JP2020199413A - Game machine - Google Patents

Game machine Download PDF

Info

Publication number
JP2020199413A
JP2020199413A JP2020162485A JP2020162485A JP2020199413A JP 2020199413 A JP2020199413 A JP 2020199413A JP 2020162485 A JP2020162485 A JP 2020162485A JP 2020162485 A JP2020162485 A JP 2020162485A JP 2020199413 A JP2020199413 A JP 2020199413A
Authority
JP
Japan
Prior art keywords
main body
state
lever
eccentric cam
swing
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Withdrawn
Application number
JP2020162485A
Other languages
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
飯島 航
Ko Iijima
航 飯島
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Sanyo Bussan Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Sanyo Bussan Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Sanyo Bussan Co Ltd filed Critical Sanyo Bussan Co Ltd
Publication of JP2020199413A publication Critical patent/JP2020199413A/en
Priority to JP2022117871A priority Critical patent/JP2022132650A/en
Withdrawn legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Landscapes

  • Pinball Game Machines (AREA)

Abstract

To provide a game machine having an excellent operational feeling.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a posture correcting device 13312, which applies a load for changing posture of a swing operation member 13310 in a direction for reducing the amount of change of the posture when posture of the swing operation member 13310, which is viewed from a player operating the swing operation member 13310, is changed by movement of a lever member 13340, thus maintaining the posture of the swing operation member 13310 to be posture in that a player can easily operate.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 89

Description

本発明は、パチンコ機などの遊技機に関するものである。 The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

パチンコ機などの遊技機において、遊技者が手動操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する操作部材を備える遊技機がある(特許文献1)。 In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including an operating member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player manually operating the machine (Patent Document 1).

特開2014−144218号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-144218

しかしながら、上述した従来の遊技機では、操作部材の操作性に改良の余地があるという問題点があった。 However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the operability of the operating member.

本発明は、上記例示した問題点を解決するためになされたものであり、操作部材の操作性の良好な遊技機を提供することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having good operability of operating members.

この目的を達成するために請求項1記載の遊技機は、遊技者に操作される操作部を有し移動可能に構成される操作部材と、その操作部材と遊技機本体を連結すると共に移動可能に構成される接続部材とを備え、前記接続部材の移動により、前記操作部を操作する遊技者から見た前記操作部材の姿勢が第1状態と、その第1状態と異なる第2状態とを形成可能とされる場合に、その姿勢の変化量を縮小する方向に操作部材を姿勢変化させる修正手段を備える。 In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has an operating member that has an operating unit operated by the player and is configured to be movable, and the operating member and the gaming machine main body are connected and movable. The first state and the second state in which the posture of the operation member as seen by the player operating the operation unit is different from the first state due to the movement of the connection member. When it is possible to form the operating member, a correction means for changing the posture of the operating member in a direction of reducing the amount of change in the posture is provided.

請求項2記載の遊技機は、請求項1記載の遊技機において、前記接続部材を駆動する駆動装置を備え、前記接続部材の移動範囲において、前記操作部材が姿勢変化する変化状態と、前記操作部材が姿勢変化されず前記操作部材と前記接続部材との姿勢が維持される維持状態とが形成され、前記変化状態の際に前記修正手段から前記操作部材に生じる負荷が、前記接続部材を制動させる向きを向く。 The gaming machine according to claim 2 includes the driving device for driving the connecting member in the gaming machine according to claim 1, and the changing state in which the operating member changes its posture within the moving range of the connecting member and the operation. A maintenance state is formed in which the posture of the member is not changed and the posture of the operation member and the connection member is maintained, and a load generated from the correction means on the operation member during the change state brakes the connection member. Turn to the direction to make.

請求項3記載の遊技機は、請求項2記載の遊技機において、前記修正手段に当接される被当接部材を備え、前記操作部材の移動において前記修正手段が前記被当接部材に当接することにより前記操作部材の姿勢が変化する。 The gaming machine according to claim 3 includes the contacted member that is brought into contact with the modifying means in the gaming machine according to claim 2, and the modifying means hits the contacted member when the operating member is moved. The posture of the operating member changes upon contact.

請求項1記載の遊技機によれば、操作部材の操作性を良好にすることができる。 According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the operability of the operating member can be improved.

請求項2記載の遊技機によれば、請求項1記載の遊技機の奏する効果に加え、駆動動作時の操作性を良好にすることができる。 According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the operability during the driving operation can be improved.

請求項3記載の遊技機によれば、請求項2記載の遊技機の奏する効果に加え、操作部材を軽量化できる。 According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 2, the weight of the operating member can be reduced.

第1実施形態におけるパチンコ機の正面図である。It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. パチンコ機の遊技盤の正面図である。It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. パチンコ機の背面図である。It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. パチンコ機の電気的構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. 操作デバイスの正面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (a)は、パチンコ機の部分正面図であり、(b)は、図6(a)のVIb−VIb線におけるパチンコ機の部分断面図である。(A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine on the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). (a)は、パチンコ機の部分正面図であり、(b)は、図7(a)のVIIb−VIIb線におけるパチンコ機の部分断面図である。(A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a). 操作デバイスの正面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view of the operation device. 操作デバイスの正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. 操作デバイスの正面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view of the operation device. 首振り操作部材及びレバー部材の分解正面斜視図である。It is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. レバー部材の本体部材、上部カバー部材、下部カバー部材及び首振り部材の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view disassembled perspective view of the main body member, the upper cover member, the lower cover member and the swinging member of a lever member. 首振り操作部材の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of the swing operation member. (a)は、偏心カム部材の正面図であり、(b)は、偏心カム部材の底面図であり、(c)は、図14(a)のXIVc−XIVc線における偏心カム部材の断面図である。(A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the eccentric cam member in the XIVc-XIVc line of FIG. 14 (a). Is. (a)は、位相検出部材の正面図であり、(b)は、位相検出部材の底面図であり、(c)は、図15(a)のXVc−XVc線における位相検出部材の断面図である。(A) is a front view of the phase detection member, (b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the phase detection member in the XVc-XVc line of FIG. 15 (a). Is. (a)は、レバー部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図16(a)の矢印XVIb方向視におけるレバー部材の側面図であり、(c)は、図16(a)の矢印XVIb方向視におけるレバー部材の上面図である。(A) is a front view of the lever member, (b) is a side view of the lever member in the direction of arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a), and (c) is an arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a). It is a top view of the lever member in a directional view. (a)は、操作デバイスの正面図であり、(b)は、図17(a)の矢印XVIIb方向視における操作デバイスの側面図である。(A) is a front view of the operating device, and (b) is a side view of the operating device in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). (a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図であり、(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIb−XVIIIb線における操作デバイスの部分断面図であり、(c)は、図17(a)のXVIIIc−XVIIIc線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). 図18(a)の首振り操作部材の部分拡大図である。It is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member of FIG. 18A. 図17(b)のXX−XX線における首振り操作部材の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the swing operation member in line XX-XX of FIG. 17B. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における首振り操作部材及びレバー部材の部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図であり、(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIc−XVIIIc線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 17 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第2実施形態における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device in the second embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)は、偏心カム部材のカム部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図30(a)の矢印XXXb方向視におけるカム部材の側面図であり、(c)は、偏心カム部材の本体部材の正面図であり、(d)は、図30(c)の矢印XXXd方向視における本体部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the cam member of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the cam member in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a), and (c) is a side view of the eccentric cam member. It is a front view of the main body member, and FIG. 30 (d) is a side view of the main body member in the direction of arrow XXXd of FIG. 30 (c). (a)は、偏心カム部材の正面図であり、(b)は図31(a)のXXXIb方向視における偏心カム部材の側面図であり、(c)は、偏心カム部材の正面図である。(A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the eccentric cam member in the XXXIb direction view of FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a front view of the eccentric cam member. .. (a)は、ロック解除カム部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図32(a)のXXXIIb方向視におけるロック解除カム部材の底面図であり、(c)は、図32(a)のXXXIIc方向視におけるロック解除カム部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the unlocked cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlocked cam member in the direction of XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of FIG. 32 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in the XXXIIc direction view. (a)は、ロック部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図33(a)のXXXIIIb方向視におけるロック部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the direction of XXXIIIb of FIG. 33 (a). (a)から(d)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック部材及びロック解除カム部材の正面図である。(A) to (d) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and an unlock cam member. (a)から(c)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック部材及びロック解除カム部材の正面図である。(A) to (c) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and an unlock cam member. (a)から(c)は、軸支棒の軸方向視で図示した首振り部材の本体部材の正面図である。(A) to (c) are front views of the main body member of the swinging member illustrated in the axial direction of the shaft support rod. (a)は、モータ固定板の上面図であり、(b)は、図37(a)のXXXVIIb方向視におけるモータ固定板の側面図であり、(c)は、図37(b)に示す状態からU字状部材がスライド移動された状態を示すモータ固定板の側面図である。(A) is a top view of the motor fixing plate, (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate in the direction of XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a), and (c) is shown in FIG. 37 (b). It is a side view of the motor fixing plate which shows the state which the U-shaped member was slid and moved from the state. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第3実施形態における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device according to the third embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). 第4実施形態における操作デバイスの正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of the operation device in 4th Embodiment. (a)は、ロック部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図44(a)のXXXXIVb方向視におけるロック部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the XXXIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a). (a)及び(b)は、ロック部材の側面図である。(A) and (b) are side views of the lock member. レバー部材及び首振り操作部材の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of a lever member and a swing operation member. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). 図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). 図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (a)は、レバー部材の本体部材及びロック受け部材の上面図であり、(b)及び(c)は、図53(a)のLIIIb方向視におけるレバー部材の本体部材及びロック受け部材の側面図である。(A) is a top view of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member, and (b) and (c) are side surfaces of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member in the LIIIb direction view of FIG. 53 (a). It is a figure. (a)及び(b)は、図6のVIb―VIb線で断面視したパチンコ機及び操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine and the operating device viewed in cross section along the line VIb-VIb of FIG. 第5実施形態における内側ケース部材の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of the inner case member in 5th Embodiment. (a)は、偏心カム部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図56(a)のLVIb方向視における偏心カム部材の底面図であり、(c)は、図56(a)のLVIc方向視における偏心カム部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member in the LVIb direction view of FIG. 56 (a), and (c) is an LVIc of FIG. 56 (a). It is a side view of an eccentric cam member in a directional view. (a)は、ロック解除カム部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図57(a)のLVIIb方向視におけるロック解除カム部材の底面図であり、(c)は、図57(a)のLVIIc方向視におけるロック解除カム部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the unlock cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member in the LVIIb direction view of FIG. 57 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of FIG. 57 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in the LVIIc direction view of. (a)は、ロック部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図58(a)のLVIII方向視におけるロック部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the LVIII direction view of FIG. 58 (a). (a)及び(b)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) and (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in chronological order. (a)から(b)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) to (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member showing the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in chronological order. (a)及び(b)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) and (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in time series. レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。It is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlock cam member, and a lock member. (a)及び(b)は、第6実施形態におけるレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) and (b) are the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in chronological order according to the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (a)及び(b)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) and (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in chronological order. (a)及び(b)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) and (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in chronological order. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第7実施形態における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the seventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第8実施形態における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the eighth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、第9実施形態における操作デバイスの側面図である。(A) and (b) are side views of the operation device in the ninth embodiment. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第10実施形態における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device according to the tenth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). 図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第11実施形態における首振り操作部材及びレバー部材の部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the eleventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第12実施形態における首振り操作部材及びレバー部材の部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the twelfth embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). 第13実施形態における操作デバイスの正面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. 操作デバイスの正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. 操作デバイスの正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. 首振り操作部材及びレバー部材の分解正面斜視図である。It is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. レバー部材の本体部材、上部カバー部材、下部カバー部材及び首振り部材の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view disassembled perspective view of the main body member, the upper cover member, the lower cover member and the swinging member of a lever member. 首振り操作部材の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of the swing operation member. (a)は、正面カバー及び背面カバーの底面図であり、(b)は正面カバー、背面カバー及び分離防止カバーの底面図であり、(c)は、図83(b)のLXXXIIIc―LXXXIIIc線における正面カバー、背面カバー、分離防止カバー及び保護カバーの断面図である。(A) is a bottom view of the front cover and the back cover, (b) is a bottom view of the front cover, the back cover and the separation prevention cover, and (c) is the line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc of FIG. 83 (b). It is sectional drawing of the front cover, the back cover, the separation prevention cover and the protective cover in. (a)は、背面側枠部材の斜視図であり、(b)は、図84(a)の矢印LXXXIVb方向視(ガイド底壁の面に垂直な方向からの方向視)における背面側枠部材の上面図であり、(c)は、図84(b)のLXXXIVc−LXXXIVc線における背面側枠部材の断面図である。(A) is a perspective view of the back side frame member, and (b) is the back side frame member in the direction view (direction view from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the guide bottom wall) indicated by the arrow LXXXIVb in FIG. 84 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXXIVc of FIG. 84 (b). (a)は、鉤部材の正面斜視図であり、(b)は、図85(a)の矢印LXXXVb方向視における鉤部材の正面図であり、(c)は、図85(a)の矢印LXXXVc方向視における鉤部材の側面図であり、(d)は、図85(b)のLXXXVd−LXXXVd線における鉤部材の断面図である。(A) is a front perspective view of the hook member, (b) is a front view of the hook member in the direction of arrow LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a), and (c) is an arrow of FIG. 85 (a). It is a side view of the hook member in the LXXXVc direction view, and FIG. 85 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the hook member in the line LXXXVd-LXXXXVd of FIG. 85 (b). (a)は、支持部材の正面斜視図であり、(b)は、図86(a)の矢印LXXXVIb方向視における支持部材の上面図であり、(c)は、図86(b)のLXXXVIc−LXXXVIc線における支持部材の断面図である。(A) is a front perspective view of the support member, (b) is a top view of the support member in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIb of FIG. 86 (a), and (c) is a top view of the support member of FIG. 86 (b). It is sectional drawing of the support member in -LXXXVIc line. (a)は、背面側枠部材の部分上面図であり、(b)は、図87(a)のLXXXVIIb−LXXXVIIb線における背面側枠部材の部分断面図であり、(c)は、背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の部分上面図であり、(d)は、図87(c)のLXXXVIId−LXXXVIId線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の部分断面図であり、(e)は、図87(d)のLXXXVIIe−LXXXVIIe線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の断面図である。(A) is a partial top view of the back side frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member in the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a), and (c) is the back side. It is a partial top view of a frame member and a posture correction device, (d) is a partial sectional view of a back side frame member and a posture correction device in line LXXXVIId-LXXXVIId of FIG. 87 (c), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the back side frame member and the posture correction apparatus in line 87 (d) LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe. (a)は、背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の部分上面図であり、(b)は、図88(a)のLXXXVIIIb−LXXXVIIIb線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の部分断面図であり、(c)は、背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の部分上面図であり、(d)は、図88(c)のLXXXVIIId−LXXXVIIId線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の部分断面図であり、(e)は、背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の部分上面図であり、(f)は、図88(e)のLXXXVIIIf−LXXXVIIIf線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の部分断面図である。(A) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line LXXXXVIIIb-LXXXXVIIIb of FIG. 88 (a). , (C) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line LXXXVIIId-LXXXXVIIId of FIG. 88 (c). Yes, (e) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf of FIG. 88 (e). Is. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)は、第14実施形態におけるロック部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図91(a)の矢印LXXXXIb方向視におけるロック部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the lock member according to the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the direction of the arrow LXXXXIb of FIG. 91 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)から(c)は、偏心カム部材及び姿勢切替装置の部分拡大図である。(A) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member and the posture switching device. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)から(c)は、偏心カム部材及び姿勢切替装置の部分拡大図である。(A) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member and the posture switching device. (a)及び(b)は、第15実施形態における当接部材の上面図であり、(c)は、図87のLXXXVIIb−LXXXVIIb線に対応する線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の断面図であり、(d)は、図98(c)のLXXXXVIIId−LXXXXVIIId線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の断面図である。(A) and (b) are top views of the contact member in the fifteenth embodiment, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the LXXXVIIb-LXXXXVIIb line of FIG. FIG. 3D is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line LXXXXXXVIIId-LXXXXVIIId of FIG. 98 (c). (a)は、図87のLXXXVIIb−LXXXVIIb線に対応する線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の断面図であり、(b)は、図99(a)のLXXXXIXb−LXXXXIXb線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の断面図である。(A) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line LXXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of a member and a posture correction device. (a)から(d)は、第16実施形態における操作デバイスの側面図である。(A) to (d) are side views of the operation device in the 16th embodiment. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第17実施形態における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in 17th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (a)から(c)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第18実施形態における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the eighteenth embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第19実施形態における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in 19th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第20実施形態における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the twentieth embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). 図104(a)の矢印CV方向視における首振り操作部材の背面図である。It is a rear view of the swing operation member in the arrow CV direction view of FIG. 104A. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第21実施形態における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in 21st Embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第22実施形態における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the 22nd embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a).

以下、本発明の実施形態について、添付図面を参照して説明する。まず、図1から図27を参照し、第1実施形態として、本発明をパチンコ遊技機(以下、単に「パチンコ機」という)10に適用した場合の一実施形態について説明する。図1は、第1実施形態におけるパチンコ機10の正面図であり、図2はパチンコ機10の遊技盤13の正面図であり、図3はパチンコ機10の背面図である。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 27, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

図1に示すように、パチンコ機10は、略矩形状に組み合わせた木枠により外殻が形成される外枠11と、その外枠11と略同一の外形形状に形成され外枠11に対して開閉可能に支持された内枠12とを備えている。外枠11には、内枠12を支持するために正面視(図1参照)左側の上下2カ所に金属製のヒンジ18が取り付けられ、そのヒンジ18が設けられた側を開閉の軸として内枠12が正面手前側へ開閉可能に支持されている。 As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

内枠12には、多数の釘や入賞口63,64等を有する遊技盤13(図2参照)が裏面側から着脱可能に装着される。この遊技盤13の正面を球(遊技球)が流下することにより弾球遊技が行われる。なお、内枠12には、球を遊技盤13の正面領域に発射する球発射ユニット112a(図4参照)やその球発射ユニット112aから発射された球を遊技盤13の正面領域まで誘導する発射レール(図示せず)等が取り付けられている。 A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

内枠12の正面側には、その正面上側を覆う正面枠14と、その下側を覆う下皿ユニット15とが設けられている。正面枠14及び下皿ユニット15を支持するために正面視(図1参照)左側の上下2カ所に金属製のヒンジ19が取り付けられ、そのヒンジ19が設けられた側を開閉の軸として正面枠14及び下皿ユニット15が正面手前側へ開閉可能に支持されている。なお、内枠12の施錠と正面枠14の施錠とは、シリンダ錠20の鍵穴21に専用の鍵を差し込んで所定の操作を行うことでそれぞれ解除される。 On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

正面枠14は、装飾用の樹脂部品や電気部品等を組み付けたものであり、その略中央部には略楕円形状に開口形成された窓部14cが設けられている。正面枠14の裏面側には2枚の板ガラスを有するガラスユニット16が配設され、そのガラスユニット16を介して遊技盤13の正面がパチンコ機10の正面側に視認可能となっている。 The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

正面枠14には、球を貯留する上皿17が正面側へ張り出して上面を開放した略箱状に形成されており、この上皿17に賞球や貸出球などが排出される。上皿17の底面は正面視(図1参照)右側に下降傾斜して形成され、その傾斜により上皿17に投入された球が球発射ユニット112a(図4参照)へと案内される。また、上皿17の上面には、枠ボタン22が設けられている。この枠ボタン22は、例えば、第3図柄表示装置81(図2参照)で表示される演出のステージを変更したり、スーパーリーチの演出内容を変更したりする場合などに、遊技者により操作される。 On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

正面枠14には、その周囲(例えばコーナー部分)に各種ランプ等の発光手段が設けられている。これら発光手段は、大当たり時や所定のリーチ時等における遊技状態の変化に応じて、点灯又は点滅することにより発光態様が変更制御され、遊技中の演出効果を高める役割を果たす。窓部14cの周縁には、LED等の発光手段を内蔵した電飾部29〜33が設けられている。パチンコ機10においては、これら電飾部29〜33が大当たりランプ等の演出ランプとして機能し、大当たり時やリーチ演出時等には内蔵するLEDの点灯や点滅によって各電飾部29〜33が点灯または点滅して、大当たり中である旨、或いは大当たり一歩手前のリーチ中である旨が報知される。また、正面枠14の正面視(図1参照)左上部には、LED等の発光手段が内蔵され賞球の払い出し中とエラー発生時とを表示可能な表示ランプ34が設けられている。 The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

また、右側の電飾部32下側には、正面枠14の裏面側を視認できるように裏面側より透明樹脂を取り付けて小窓35が形成され、遊技盤13正面の貼着スペースK1(図2参照)に貼付される証紙等がパチンコ機10の正面から視認可能とされている。また、パチンコ機10においては、より煌びやかさを醸し出すために、電飾部29〜33の周りの領域にクロムメッキを施したABS樹脂製のメッキ部材36が取り付けられている。 Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

窓部14cの下方には、貸球操作部40が配設されている。貸球操作部40には、度数表示部41と、球貸しボタン42と、返却ボタン43とが設けられている。パチンコ機10の側方に配置されるカードユニット(球貸しユニット)(図示せず)に紙幣やカード等を投入した状態で貸球操作部40が操作されると、その操作に応じて球の貸出が行われる。具体的には、度数表示部41はカード等の残額情報が表示される領域であり、内蔵されたLEDが点灯して残額情報として残額が数字で表示される。球貸しボタン42は、カード等(記録媒体)に記録された情報に基づいて貸出球を得るために操作されるものであり、カード等に残額が存在する限りにおいて貸出球が上皿17に供給される。返却ボタン43は、カードユニットに挿入されたカード等の返却を求める際に操作される。なお、カードユニットを介さずに球貸し装置等から上皿17に球が直接貸し出されるパチンコ機、いわゆる現金機では貸球操作部40が不要となるが、この場合には、貸球操作部40の設置部分に飾りシール等を付加して部品構成は共通のものとしても良い。カードユニットを用いたパチンコ機と現金機との共通化を図ることができる。 A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

上皿17の下側に位置する下皿ユニット15には、その左側部に上皿17に貯留しきれなかった球を貯留するための下皿50が上面を開放した略箱状に形成されている。下皿50の右側には、球を遊技盤13の正面へ打ち込むために遊技者によって操作される操作ハンドル51及び操作デバイス300が配設される。なお、操作デバイス300については後述する。 In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

操作ハンドル51の内部には、球発射ユニット112aの駆動を許可するためのタッチセンサ51aと、押下操作している期間中には球の発射を停止する発射停止スイッチ51bと、操作ハンドル51の回動操作量(回動位置)を電気抵抗の変化により検出する可変抵抗器(図示せず)などが内蔵されている。操作ハンドル51が遊技者によって右回りに回動操作されると、タッチセンサ51aがオンされると共に可変抵抗器の抵抗値が回動操作量に対応して変化し、その可変抵抗器の抵抗値に対応した強さ(発射強度)で球が発射され、これにより遊技者の操作に対応した飛び量で遊技盤13の正面へ球が打ち込まれる。また、操作ハンドル51が遊技者により操作されていない状態においては、タッチセンサ51aおよび発射停止スイッチ51bがオフとなっている。 Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

下皿50の正面下方部には、下皿50に貯留された球を下方へ排出する際に操作するための球抜きレバー52が設けられている。この球抜きレバー52は、常時、右方向に付勢されており、その付勢に抗して左方向へスライドさせることにより、下皿50の底面に形成された底面口が開口して、その底面口から球が自然落下して排出される。この球抜きレバー52の操作は、通常、下皿50の下方に下皿50から排出された球を受け取る箱(一般に「千両箱」と称される)を置いた状態で行われる。下皿50の右方には、上述したように操作ハンドル51が配設され、下皿50の左方には灰皿(図示せず)が取り付けられている。 A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

図2に示すように、遊技盤13は、正面視略正方形状に切削加工したベース板60に、球案内用の多数の釘(図示せず)や風車(図示せず)の他、レール61,62、一般入賞口63、第1入賞口64、第2入賞口640、可変入賞装置330、スルーゲート67、可変表示装置ユニット80等を組み付けて構成され、その周縁部が内枠12(図1参照)の裏面側に取り付けられる。ベース板60は光透過性の樹脂材料からなり、その正面側からベース板60の背面側に配設された各種構造体を遊技者に視認させることが可能に形成される。一般入賞口63、第1入賞口64、第2入賞口640、可変表示装置ユニット80は、ルータ加工によってベース板60に形成された貫通穴に配設され、遊技盤13の正面側からタッピングネジ等により固定されている。 As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc.

遊技盤13の正面中央部分は、正面枠14の窓部14c(図1参照)を通じて内枠12の正面側から視認することができる。以下に、主に図2を参照して、遊技盤13の構成について説明する。 The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

遊技盤13の正面には、帯状の金属板を略円弧状に屈曲加工して形成した外レール62が植立され、その外レール62の内側位置には外レール62と同様に帯状の金属板で形成した円弧状の内レール61が植立される。この内レール61と外レール62とにより遊技盤13の正面外周が囲まれ、遊技盤13とガラスユニット16(図1参照)とにより前後が囲まれることにより、遊技盤13の正面には、球の挙動により遊技が行われる遊技領域が形成される。遊技領域は、遊技盤13の正面であって2本のレール61,62とレール間を繋ぐ樹脂製の外縁部材73とにより区画して形成される領域(入賞口等が配設され、発射された球が流下する領域)である。 An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

2本のレール61,62は、球発射ユニット112a(図4参照)から発射された球を遊技盤13上部へ案内するために設けられたものである。内レール61の先端部分(図2の左上部)には戻り球防止部材68が取り付けられ、一旦、遊技盤13の上部へ案内された球が再度球案内通路内に戻ってしまうといった事態が防止される。外レール62の先端部(図2の右上部)には、球の最大飛翔部分に対応する位置に返しゴム69が取り付けられ、所定以上の勢いで発射された球は、返しゴム69に当たって、勢いが減衰されつつ中央部側へ跳ね返される。 The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

遊技領域の正面視左側下部(図2の左側下部)には、発光手段である複数のLED及び7セグメント表示器を備える第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bが配設されている。第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bは、主制御装置110(図4参照)で行われる各制御に応じた表示がなされるものであり、主にパチンコ機10の遊技状態の表示が行われる。本実施形態では、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bは、球が、第1入賞口64へ入賞したか、第2入賞口640へ入賞したかに応じて使い分けられるように構成されている。具体的には、球が、第1入賞口64へ入賞した場合には、第1図柄表示装置37Aが作動し、一方で、球が、第2入賞口640へ入賞した場合には、第1図柄表示装置37Bが作動するように構成されている。 In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

また、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bは、LEDにより、パチンコ機10が確変中か時短中か通常中であるかを点灯状態により示したり、変動中であるか否かを点灯状態により示したり、停止図柄が確変大当たりに対応した図柄か普通大当たりに対応した図柄か外れ図柄であるかを点灯状態により示したり、保留球数を点灯状態により示すと共に、7セグメント表示装置により、大当たり中のラウンド数やエラー表示を行う。なお、複数のLEDは、それぞれのLEDの発光色(例えば、赤、緑、青)が異なるよう構成され、その発光色の組み合わせにより、少ないLEDでパチンコ機10の各種遊技状態を示唆することができる。 In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

尚、本パチンコ機10では、第1入賞口64及び第2入賞口640へ入賞があったことを契機として抽選が行われる。パチンコ機10は、その抽選において、大当たりか否かの当否判定(大当たり抽選)を行うと共に、大当たりと判定した場合はその大当たり種別の判定も行う。ここで判定される大当たり種別としては、15R確変大当たり、4R確変大当たり、15R通常大当たりが用意されている。第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bには、変動終了後の停止図柄として抽選の結果が大当たりであるか否かが示されるだけでなく、大当たりである場合はその大当たり種別に応じた図柄が示される。 In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

ここで、「15R確変大当たり」とは、最大ラウンド数が15ラウンドの大当たりの後に高確率状態へ移行する確変大当たりのことであり、「4R確変大当たり」とは、最大ラウンド数が4ラウンドの大当たりの後に高確率状態へ移行する確変大当たりのことである。また、「15R通常大当たり」は、最大ラウンド数が15ラウンドの大当たりの後に、低確率状態へ移行すると共に、所定の変動回数の間(例えば、100変動回数)は時短状態となる大当たりのことである。 Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

また、「高確率状態」とは、大当たり終了後に付加価値としてその後の大当たり確率がアップした状態、いわゆる確率変動中(確変中)の時をいい、換言すれば、特別遊技状態へ移行し易い遊技の状態のことである。本実施形態における高確率状態(確変中)は、後述する第2図柄の当たり確率がアップして第2入賞口640へ球が入賞し易い遊技の状態を含む。「低確率状態」とは、確変中でない時をいい、大当たり確率が通常の状態、即ち、確変の時より大当たり確率が低い状態をいう。また、「低確率状態」のうちの時短状態(時短中)とは、大当たり確率が通常の状態であると共に、大当たり確率がそのままで第2図柄の当たり確率のみがアップして第2入賞口640へ球が入賞し易い遊技の状態のことをいう。一方、パチンコ機10が通常中とは、確変中でも時短中でもない遊技の状態(大当たり確率も第2図柄の当たり確率もアップしていない状態)である。 In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

確変中や時短中は、第2図柄の当たり確率がアップするだけではなく、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放される時間も変更され、通常中と比して長い時間が設定される。電動役物640aが開放された状態(開放状態)にある場合は、その電動役物640aが閉鎖された状態(閉鎖状態)にある場合と比して、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態となる。よって、確変中や時短中は、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞し易い状態となり、大当たり抽選が行われる回数を増やすことができる。 During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

なお、確変中や時短中において、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aの開放時間を変更するのではなく、または、その開放時間を変更することに加えて、1回の当たりで電動役物640aが開放する回数を通常中よりも増やす変更を行うものとしてもよい。また、確変中や時短中において、第2図柄の当たり確率は変更せず、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放される時間および1回の当たりで電動役物640aが開放する回数の少なくとも一方を変更するものとしてもよい。また、確変中や時短中において、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放される時間や、1回の当たりで電動役物640aを開放する回数はせず、第2図柄の当たり確率だけを、通常中と比してアップするよう変更するものであってもよい。 In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one time. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time is not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

遊技領域には、球が入賞することにより5個から15個の球が賞球として払い出される複数の一般入賞口63が配設されている。また、遊技領域の中央部分には、可変表示装置ユニット80が配設されている。可変表示装置ユニット80には、第1入賞口64及び第2入賞口640への入賞(始動入賞)をトリガとして、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにおける変動表示と同期させながら、第3図柄の変動表示を行う液晶ディスプレイ(以下単に「表示装置」と略す)で構成された第3図柄表示装置81と、スルーゲート67の球の通過をトリガとして第2図柄を変動表示するLEDで構成される第2図柄表示装置(図示せず)とが設けられている。また、可変表示装置ユニット80には、第3図柄表示装置81の外周を囲むようにして、センターフレーム86が配設されている。 In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and has a third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

第3図柄表示装置81は9インチサイズの大型の液晶ディスプレイで構成されるものであり、表示制御装置114(図4参照)によって表示内容が制御されることにより、例えば上、中及び下の3つの図柄列が表示される。各図柄列は複数の図柄(第3図柄)によって構成され、これらの第3図柄が図柄列毎に横スクロールして第3図柄表示装置81の表示画面上にて第3図柄が可変表示されるようになっている。本実施形態の第3図柄表示装置81は、主制御装置110(図4参照)の制御に伴った遊技状態の表示が第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bで行われるのに対して、その第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bの表示に応じた装飾的な表示を行うものである。なお、表示装置に代えて、例えばリール等を用いて第3図柄表示装置81を構成するようにしても良い。 The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

第2図柄表示装置は、球がスルーゲート67を通過する毎に表示図柄(第2図柄(図示せず))としての「○」の図柄と「×」の図柄とを所定時間交互に点灯させる変動表示を行うものである。パチンコ機10では、球がスルーゲート67を通過したことが検出されると、当たり抽選が行われる。その当たり抽選の結果、当たりであれば、第2図柄表示装置において、第2図柄の変動表示後に「○」の図柄が停止表示される。また、当たり抽選の結果、外れであれば、第2図柄表示装置において、第3図柄の変動表示後に「×」の図柄が停止表示される。 The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

パチンコ機10は、第2図柄表示装置における変動表示が所定図柄(本実施形態においては「○」の図柄)で停止した場合に、第2入賞口640に付随された電動役物640aが所定時間だけ作動状態となる(開放される)よう構成されている。 In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間は、遊技状態が通常中の場合よりも、確変中または時短中の方が短くなるように設定される。これにより、確変中および時短中は、第2図柄の変動表示が短い時間で行われるので、当たり抽選を通常中よりも多く行うことができる。よって、当たり抽選において当たりとなる機会が増えるので、第2入賞口640の電動役物640aが開放状態となる機会を遊技者に多く与えることができる。よって、確変中および時短中は、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態とすることができる。 The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

なお、確変中または時短中において、当たり確率を高める、1回に当たりに対する電動役物640aの開放時間や開放回数を増やすなど、その他の方法によっても、確変中または時短中に第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態としている場合は、第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間を遊技状態にかかわらず一定としてもよい。一方、第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間を、確変中または時短中において通常中よりも短く設定する場合は、当たり確率を遊技状態にかかわらず一定にしてもよいし、また、1回の当たりに対する電動役物640aの開放時間や開放回数を遊技状態にかかわらず一定にしてもよい。 In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

スルーゲート67は、可変表示装置ユニット80の左右の領域において遊技盤13に組み付けられ、遊技盤13に発射された球の一部が通過可能に構成されている。スルーゲート67を球が通過すると、第2図柄の当たり抽選が行われる。当たり抽選の後、第2図柄表示装置にて変動表示を行い、当たり抽選の結果が当たりであれば、変動表示の停止図柄として「○」の図柄を表示し、当たり抽選の結果が外れであれば、変動表示の停止図柄として「×」の図柄を表示する。 The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

球のスルーゲート67の通過回数は、合計で最大4回まで保留され、その保留球数が上述した第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにより表示されると共に第2図柄保留ランプ(図示せず)においても点灯表示される。第2図柄保留ランプは、最大保留数分の4つ設けられ、第3図柄表示装置81の下方に左右対称に配設されている。 The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

なお、第2図柄の変動表示は、本実施形態のように、第2図柄表示装置において複数のランプの点灯と非点灯を切り換えることにより行うものの他、第1図柄表示装置37A,37B及び第3図柄表示装置81の一部を使用して行うようにしても良い。同様に、第2図柄保留ランプの点灯を第3図柄表示装置81の一部で行うようにしても良い。また、スルーゲート67の球の通過に対する最大保留球数は4回に限定されるものでなく、3回以下、又は、5回以上の回数(例えば、8回)に設定しても良い。また、スルーゲート67の組み付け数は2つに限定されるものではなく、例えば1つであっても良い。また、スルーゲート67の組み付け位置は可変表示装置ユニット80の左右に限定されるものではなく、例えば、可変表示装置ユニット80の下方でも良い。また、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにより保留球数が示されるので、第2図柄保留ランプにより点灯表示を行わないものとしてもよい。 The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

可変表示装置ユニット80の下方には、球が入賞し得る第1入賞口64が配設されている。この第1入賞口64へ球が入賞すると遊技盤13の裏面側に設けられる第1入賞口スイッチ(図示せず)がオンとなり、その第1入賞口スイッチのオンに起因して主制御装置110(図4参照)で大当たりの抽選がなされ、その抽選結果に応じた表示が第1図柄表示装置37Aで示される。 Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

一方、第1入賞口64の正面視下方には、球が入賞し得る第2入賞口640が配設されている。この第2入賞口640へ球が入賞すると遊技盤13の裏面側に設けられる第2入賞口スイッチ(図示せず)がオンとなり、その第2入賞口スイッチのオンに起因して主制御装置110(図4参照)で大当たりの抽選がなされ、その抽選結果に応じた表示が第1図柄表示装置37Bで示される。 On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

また、第1入賞口64および第2入賞口640は、それぞれ、球が入賞すると5個の球が賞球として払い出される入賞口の1つにもなっている。なお、本実施形態においては、第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数と第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数とを同じに構成したが、第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数と第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数とを異なる数、例えば、第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数を3個とし、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数を5個として構成してもよい。 In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

第2入賞口640には電動役物640aが付随されている。この電動役物640aは開閉可能に構成されており、通常は電動役物640aが閉鎖状態(縮小状態)となって、球が第2入賞口640へ入賞しにくい状態となっている。一方、スルーゲート67への球の通過を契機として行われる第2図柄の変動表示の結果、「○」の図柄が第2図柄表示装置に表示された場合、電動役物640aが開放状態(拡大状態)となり、球が第2入賞口640へ入賞しやすい状態となる。 An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

上述した通り、確変中および時短中は、通常中と比して第2図柄の当たり確率が高く、また、第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間も短いので、第2図柄の変動表示において「○」の図柄が表示され易くなって、電動役物640aが開放状態(拡大状態)となる回数が増える。更に、確変中および時短中は、電動役物640aが開放される時間も、通常中より長くなる。よって、確変中および時短中は、通常時と比して、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態を作ることができる。 As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" ”Is easy to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

ここで、第1入賞口64に球が入賞した場合と第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合とで、大当たりとなる確率は、低確率状態であっても高確率状態でも同一である。しかしながら、大当たりとなった場合に選定される大当たりの種別として15R確変大当たりとなる確率は、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合のほうが第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合よりも高く設定されている。一方、第1入賞口64は、第2入賞口640にあるような電動役物は有しておらず、球が常時入賞可能な状態となっている。 Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

よって、通常中においては、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物が閉鎖状態にある場合が多く、第2入賞口640に入賞しづらいので、電動役物のない第1入賞口64へ向けて、可変表示装置ユニット80の左方を球が通過するように球を発射し(所謂「左打ち」)、第1入賞口64への入賞によって大当たり抽選の機会を多く得て、大当たりとなることを狙った方が、遊技者にとって有利となる。 Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

一方、確変中や時短中は、スルーゲート67に球を通過させることで、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放状態となりやすく、第2入賞口640に入賞しやすい状態であるので、第2入賞口640へ向けて、可変表示装置80の右方を球が通過するように球を発射し(所謂「右打ち」)、スルーゲート67を通過させて電動役物を開放状態にすると共に、第2入賞口640への入賞によって15R確変大当たりとなることを狙った方が、遊技者にとって有利となる。 On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

なお、本実施形態におけるパチンコ機10は、遊技盤13の構成が左右対称とされるため、「右打ち」で第1入賞口64を狙うことも、「左打ち」で第2入賞口640を狙うこともできる。そのため、本実施形態のパチンコ機10は、パチンコ機10の遊技状態(確変中であるか、時短中であるか、通常中であるか)に応じて、遊技者に対し、球の発射の仕方を「左打ち」と「右打ち」とに変えさせることを不要にできる。よって、球の打ち方を変化させる煩わしさを解消することができる。 In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

第1入賞口64の下方には可変入賞装置330(図11参照)が配設されており、その略中央部分に特定入賞口65aが設けられている。パチンコ機10においては、第1入賞口64又は第2入賞口640への入賞に起因して行われた大当たり抽選が大当たりとなると、所定時間(変動時間)が経過した後に、大当たりの停止図柄となるよう第1図柄表示装置37A又は第1図柄表示装置37Bを点灯させると共に、その大当たりに対応した停止図柄を第3図柄表示装置81に表示させて、大当たりの発生が示される。その後、球が入賞し易い特別遊技状態(大当たり)に遊技状態が遷移する。この特別遊技状態として、通常時には閉鎖されている特定入賞口65aが、所定時間(例えば、30秒経過するまで、或いは、球が10個入賞するまで)開放される。 A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

この特定入賞口65aは、所定時間が経過すると閉鎖され、その閉鎖後、再度、その特定入賞口65aが所定時間開放される。この特定入賞口65aの開閉動作は、最高で例えば15回(15ラウンド)繰り返し可能にされている。この開閉動作が行われている状態が、遊技者にとって有利な特別遊技状態の一形態であり、遊技者には、遊技上の価値(遊技価値)の付与として通常時より多量の賞球の払い出しが行われる。 The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

なお、上記した形態に特別遊技状態は限定されるものではない。特定入賞口65aとは別に開閉される大開放口を遊技領域に設け、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにおいて大当たりに対応したLEDが点灯した場合に、特定入賞口65aが所定時間開放され、その特定入賞口65aの開放中に、球が特定入賞口65a内へ入賞することを契機として特定入賞口65aとは別に設けられた大開放口が所定時間、所定回数開放される遊技状態を特別遊技状態として形成するようにしても良い。また、特定入賞口65aは1つに限るものではなく、1つ若しくは2以上の複数(例えば3つ)を配置しても良く、また配置位置も第1入賞口64の下方右側や、第1入賞口64の下方左側に限らず、例えば、可変表示装置ユニット80の左方でも良い。 The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

遊技盤13の下側における右隅部には、証紙や識別ラベル等を貼着するための貼着スペースK1が設けられ、貼着スペースK1に貼られた証紙等は、正面枠14の小窓35(図1参照)を通じて視認することができる。 A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

遊技盤13には、アウト口(図示せず)が設けられている。遊技領域を流下する球であって、いずれの入賞口63,64,65a,640にも入賞しなかった球は、アウト口を通って図示しない球排出路へと案内される。アウト口は、特定入賞口65aの左右に一対で配設される。 The game board 13 is provided with an out port (not shown). A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening. The out openings are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

遊技盤13には、球の落下方向を適宜分散、調整等するために多数の釘が植設されているとともに、風車等の各種部材(役物)とが配設されている。 A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

図3に示すように、パチンコ機10の背面側には、制御基板ユニット90,91と、裏パックユニット94とが主に備えられている。制御基板ユニット90は、主基板(主制御装置110)と音声ランプ制御基板(音声ランプ制御装置113)と表示制御基板(表示制御装置114)とが搭載されてユニット化されている。制御基板ユニット91は、払出制御基板(払出制御装置111)と発射制御基板(発射制御装置112)と電源基板(電源装置115)とカードユニット接続基板116とが搭載されてユニット化されている。 As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

裏パックユニット94は、保護カバー部を形成する裏パック92と払出ユニット93とがユニット化されている。また、各制御基板には、各制御を司る1チップマイコンとしてのMPU、各種機器との連絡をとるポート、各種抽選の際に用いられる乱数発生器、時間計数や同期を図る場合などに使用されるクロックパルス発生回路等が、必要に応じて搭載されている。 In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

なお、主制御装置110、音声ランプ制御装置113及び表示制御装置114、払出制御装置111及び発射制御装置112、電源装置115、カードユニット接続基板116は、それぞれ基板ボックス100〜104に収納されている。基板ボックス100〜104は、ボックスベースと該ボックスベースの開口部を覆うボックスカバーとを備えており、そのボックスベースとボックスカバーとが互いに連結されて、各制御装置や各基板が収納される。 The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

また、基板ボックス100(主制御装置110)及び基板ボックス102(払出制御装置111及び発射制御装置112)は、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとを封印ユニット(図示せず)によって開封不能に連結(かしめ構造による連結)している。また、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとの連結部には、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとに亘って封印シール(図示せず)が貼着されている。この封印シールは、脆性な素材で構成されており、基板ボックス100,102を開封するために封印シールを剥がそうとしたり、基板ボックス100,102を無理に開封しようとすると、ボックスベース側とボックスカバー側とに切断される。よって、封印ユニット又は封印シールを確認することで、基板ボックス100,102が開封されたかどうかを知ることができる。 Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

払出ユニット93は、裏パックユニット94の最上部に位置して上方に開口したタンク130と、タンク130の下方に連結され下流側に向けて緩やかに傾斜するタンクレール131と、タンクレール131の下流側に縦向きに連結されるケースレール132と、ケースレール132の最下流部に設けられ、払出モータ216(図4参照)の所定の電気的構成により球の払出を行う払出装置133とを備えている。タンク130には、遊技ホールの島設備から供給される球が逐次補給され、払出装置133により必要個数の球の払い出しが適宜行われる。タンクレール131には、当該タンクレール131に振動を付加するためのバイブレータ134が取り付けられている。 The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

また、払出制御装置111には状態復帰スイッチ120が設けられ、発射制御装置112には可変抵抗器の操作つまみ121が設けられ、電源装置115にはRAM消去スイッチ122が設けられている。状態復帰スイッチ120は、例えば、払出モータ216(図4参照)部の球詰まり等、払出エラーの発生時に球詰まりを解消(正常状態への復帰)するために操作される。操作つまみ121は、発射ソレノイドの発射力を調整するために操作される。RAM消去スイッチ122は、パチンコ機10を初期状態に戻したい場合に電源投入時に操作される。 Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

次に、図4を参照して、本パチンコ機10の電気的構成について説明する。図4は、パチンコ機10の電気的構成を示すブロック図である。 Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

主制御装置110には、演算装置である1チップマイコンとしてのMPU201が搭載されている。MPU201には、該MPU201により実行される各種の制御プログラムや固定値データを記憶したROM202と、そのROM202内に記憶される制御プログラムの実行に際して各種のデータ等を一時的に記憶するためのメモリであるRAM203と、そのほか、割込回路やタイマ回路、データ送受信回路などの各種回路が内蔵されている。主制御装置110では、MPU201によって、大当たり抽選や第1図柄表示装置37A,37B及び第3図柄表示装置81における表示の設定、第2図柄表示装置における表示結果の抽選といったパチンコ機10の主要な処理を実行する。 The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

なお、払出制御装置111や音声ランプ制御装置113などのサブ制御装置に対して動作を指示するために、主制御装置110から該サブ制御装置へ各種のコマンドがデータ送受信回路によって送信されるが、かかるコマンドは、主制御装置110からサブ制御装置へ一方向にのみ送信される。 In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

RAM203は、各種エリア、カウンタ、フラグのほか、MPU201の内部レジスタの内容やMPU201により実行される制御プログラムの戻り先番地などが記憶されるスタックエリアと、各種のフラグおよびカウンタ、I/O等の値が記憶される作業エリア(作業領域)とを有している。なお、RAM203は、パチンコ機10の電源の遮断後においても電源装置115からバックアップ電圧が供給されてデータを保持(バックアップ)できる構成となっており、RAM203に記憶されるデータは、すべてバックアップされる。 The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

停電などの発生により電源が遮断されると、その電源遮断時(停電発生時を含む。以下同様)のスタックポインタや、各レジスタの値がRAM203に記憶される。一方、電源投入時(停電解消による電源投入を含む。以下同様)には、RAM203に記憶される情報に基づいて、パチンコ機10の状態が電源遮断前の状態に復帰される。RAM203への書き込みはメイン処理(図示せず)によって電源遮断時に実行され、RAM203に書き込まれた各値の復帰は電源投入時の立ち上げ処理(図示せず)において実行される。なお、MPU201のNMI端子(ノンマスカブル割込端子)には、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に、停電監視回路252からの停電信号SG1が入力されるように構成されており、その停電信号SG1がMPU201へ入力されると、停電時処理としてのNMI割込処理(図示せず)が即座に実行される。 When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

主制御装置110のMPU201には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン204を介して入出力ポート205が接続されている。入出力ポート205には、払出制御装置111、音声ランプ制御装置113、第1図柄表示装置37A,37B、第2図柄表示装置、第2図柄保留ランプ、特定入賞口65aの開閉板の下辺を軸として正面側に開閉駆動するための大開放口ソレノイドや電動役物を駆動するためのソレノイドなどからなるソレノイド209が接続され、MPU201は、入出力ポート205を介してこれらに対し各種コマンドや制御信号を送信する。 An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

また、入出力ポート205には、図示しないスイッチ群およびスライド位置検出センサSや回転位置検出センサRを含むセンサ群などからなる各種スイッチ208、電源装置115に設けられた後述のRAM消去スイッチ回路253が接続され、MPU201は各種スイッチ208から出力される信号や、RAM消去スイッチ回路253より出力されるRAM消去信号SG2に基づいて各種処理を実行する。 Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

払出制御装置111は、払出モータ216を駆動させて賞球や貸出球の払出制御を行うものである。演算装置であるMPU211は、そのMPU211により実行される制御プログラムや固定値データ等を記憶したROM212と、ワークメモリ等として使用されるRAM213とを有している。 The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

払出制御装置111のRAM213は、主制御装置110のRAM203と同様に、MPU211の内部レジスタの内容やMPU211により実行される制御プログラムの戻り先番地などが記憶されるスタックエリアと、各種のフラグおよびカウンタ、I/O等の値が記憶される作業エリア(作業領域)とを有している。RAM213は、パチンコ機10の電源の遮断後においても電源装置115からバックアップ電圧が供給されてデータを保持(バックアップ)できる構成となっており、RAM213に記憶されるデータは、すべてバックアップされる。なお、主制御装置110のMPU201と同様、MPU211のNMI端子にも、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に停電監視回路252から停電信号SG1が入力されるように構成されており、その停電信号SG1がMPU211へ入力されると、停電時処理としてのNMI割込処理(図示せず)が即座に実行される。 Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

払出制御装置111のMPU211には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン214を介して入出力ポート215が接続されている。入出力ポート215には、主制御装置110や払出モータ216、発射制御装置112などがそれぞれ接続されている。また、図示はしないが、払出制御装置111には、払い出された賞球を検出するための賞球検出スイッチが接続されている。なお、該賞球検出スイッチは、払出制御装置111に接続されるが、主制御装置110には接続されていない。 An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

発射制御装置112は、主制御装置110により球の発射の指示がなされた場合に、操作ハンドル51の回動操作量に応じた球の打ち出し強さとなるよう球発射ユニット112aを制御するものである。球発射ユニット112aは、図示しない発射ソレノイドおよび電磁石を備えており、その発射ソレノイドおよび電磁石は、所定条件が整っている場合に駆動が許可される。具体的には、遊技者が操作ハンドル51に触れていることをタッチセンサ51aにより検出し、球の発射を停止させるための発射停止スイッチ51bがオフ(操作されていないこと)を条件に、操作ハンドル51の回動操作量(回動位置)に対応して発射ソレノイドが励磁され、操作ハンドル51の操作量に応じた強さで球が発射される。 The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

音声ランプ制御装置113は、音声出力装置(図示しないスピーカなど)226における音声の出力、ランプ表示装置(電飾部29〜33、表示ランプ34など)227における点灯および消灯の出力、変動演出(変動表示)や予告演出といった表示制御装置114で行われる第3図柄表示装置81の表示態様の設定などを制御するものである。演算装置であるMPU221は、そのMPU221により実行される制御プログラムや固定値データ等を記憶したROM222と、ワークメモリ等として使用されるRAM223とを有している。 The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

音声ランプ制御装置113のMPU221には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン224を介して入出力ポート225が接続されている。入出力ポート225には、主制御装置110、表示制御装置114、音声出力装置226、ランプ表示装置227、その他装置228、枠ボタン22などがそれぞれ接続されている。その他装置228には駆動モータ335a,337a及び振動装置366が含まれる。 An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 335a, 337a and a vibrating device 366.

音声ランプ制御装置113は、主制御装置110から受信した各種のコマンド(変動パターンコマンド、停止種別コマンド等)に基づいて、第3図柄表示装置81の表示態様を決定し、決定した表示態様をコマンド(表示用変動パターンコマンド、表示用停止種別コマンド等)によって表示制御装置114へ通知する。また、音声ランプ制御装置113は、枠ボタン22からの入力を監視し、遊技者によって枠ボタン22が操作された場合は、第3図柄表示装置81で表示されるステージを変更したり、スーパーリーチ時の演出内容を変更したりするように、表示制御装置114へ指示する。ステージが変更される場合は、変更後のステージに応じた背面画像を第3図柄表示装置81に表示させるべく、変更後のステージに関する情報を含めた背面画像変更コマンドを表示制御装置114へ送信する。ここで、背面画像とは、第3図柄表示装置81に表示させる主要な画像である第3図柄の背面側に表示される画像のことである。表示制御装置114は、この音声ランプ制御装置113から送信されるコマンドに従って、第3図柄表示装置81に各種の画像を表示する。 The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

また、音声ランプ制御装置113は、表示制御装置114から第3図柄表示装置81の表示内容を表すコマンド(表示コマンド)を受信する。音声ランプ制御装置113では、表示制御装置114から受信した表示コマンドに基づき、第3図柄表示装置81の表示内容に合わせて、その表示内容に対応する音声を音声出力装置226から出力し、また、その表示内容に対応させてランプ表示装置227の点灯および消灯を制御する。 Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

表示制御装置114は、音声ランプ制御装置113及び第3図柄表示装置81が接続され、音声ランプ制御装置113より受信したコマンドに基づいて、第3図柄表示装置81における第3図柄の変動演出などの表示を制御するものである。また、表示制御装置114は、第3図柄表示装置81の表示内容を通知する表示コマンドを適宜音声ランプ制御装置113へ送信する。音声ランプ制御装置113は、この表示コマンドによって示される表示内容にあわせて音声出力装置226から音声を出力することで、第3図柄表示装置81の表示と音声出力装置226からの音声出力とをあわせることができる。 In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

電源装置115は、パチンコ機10の各部に電源を供給するための電源部251と、停電等による電源遮断を監視する停電監視回路252と、RAM消去スイッチ122(図3参照)が設けられたRAM消去スイッチ回路253とを有している。電源部251は、図示しない電源経路を通じて、各制御装置110〜114等に対して各々に必要な動作電圧を供給する装置である。その概要としては、電源部251は、外部より供給される交流24ボルトの電圧を取り込み、各種スイッチ208などの各種スイッチや、ソレノイド209などのソレノイド、モータ等を駆動するための12ボルトの電圧、ロジック用の5ボルトの電圧、RAMバックアップ用のバックアップ電圧などを生成し、これら12ボルトの電圧、5ボルトの電圧及びバックアップ電圧を各制御装置110〜114等に対して必要な電圧を供給する。 The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

停電監視回路252は、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に、主制御装置110のMPU201及び払出制御装置111のMPU211の各NMI端子へ停電信号SG1を出力するための回路である。停電監視回路252は、電源部251から出力される最大電圧である直流安定24ボルトの電圧を監視し、この電圧が22ボルト未満になった場合に停電(電源断、電源遮断)の発生と判断して、停電信号SG1を主制御装置110及び払出制御装置111へ出力する。停電信号SG1の出力によって、主制御装置110及び払出制御装置111は、停電の発生を認識し、NMI割込処理を実行する。なお、電源部251は、直流安定24ボルトの電圧が22ボルト未満になった後においても、NMI割込処理の実行に充分な時間の間、制御系の駆動電圧である5ボルトの電圧の出力を正常値に維持するように構成されている。よって、主制御装置110及び払出制御装置111は、NMI割込処理(図示せず)を正常に実行し完了することができる。 The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

RAM消去スイッチ回路253は、RAM消去スイッチ122(図3参照)が押下された場合に、主制御装置110へ、バックアップデータをクリアさせるためのRAM消去信号SG2を出力するための回路である。主制御装置110は、パチンコ機10の電源投入時に、RAM消去信号SG2を入力した場合に、バックアップデータをクリアすると共に、払出制御装置111においてバックアップデータをクリアさせるための払出初期化コマンドを払出制御装置111に対して送信する。 The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

図5は、第1実施形態における操作デバイス300の正面斜視図である。図5に示すように、操作デバイス300は、正面視における内枠12の左右方向中央部(即ち、パチンコ機10の左右方向中央部)に配置される。 FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

操作デバイス300は、遊技者が把持操作可能な首振り操作部材310を備え、その首振り操作部材310は、上皿17の外枠に沿って前後方向に凹設される収容凹部17a及び下皿ユニット15の左右方向中央部で上下方向に凹設される収容凹部15aによって構成される領域を移動可能とされる。 The operation device 300 includes a swing operation member 310 that can be gripped and operated by the player, and the swing operation member 310 includes a storage recess 17a and a lower plate that are recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. The area formed by the accommodating recess 15a recessed in the vertical direction at the central portion in the horizontal direction of the unit 15 is movable.

首振り操作部材310と収容凹部15a,17aとの間には、少なくとも手の指が無理なく入る程度の隙間が空けられる。これにより、遊技者は、首振り操作部材310を上から握りこむ態様で把持することができる。首振り操作部材310を上から握りこむ態様で把持した場合、首振り操作部材310と収容凹部17aとの間に入れた指が首振り操作部材310の背面側の側面に引っ掛かり、その状態で手の力を抜いて重力に任せても、手が首振り操作部材310から滑り落ちることが防止される。従って、遊技者が首振り操作デバイス310の上に手を維持する負担を軽減することができる。 There is a gap between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodating recesses 15a and 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can grip the swing operation member 310 in a manner of grasping it from above. When the swing operation member 310 is gripped from above, the finger inserted between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodating recess 17a is caught on the back side surface of the swing operation member 310, and the hand is in that state. Even if the force is relaxed and left to gravity, the hand is prevented from slipping off the swing operation member 310. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player to maintain his / her hand on the swing operation device 310.

なお、遊技者は右手で操作ハンドル51を握るため、首振り操作部材310の操作は左手で行われることが多くなる。そのため、以下の説明では、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を左手で操作するという前提で、説明を行う。 Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the swing operation member 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the swing operation member 310 with the left hand.

図6(a)は、パチンコ機10の部分正面図であり、図6(b)は、図6(a)のVIb−VIb線におけるパチンコ機10の部分断面図であり、図7(a)は、パチンコ機10の部分正面図であり、図7(b)は、図7(a)のVIIb−VIIb線におけるパチンコ機10の部分断面図である。 6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). Is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a).

図6及び図7では、パチンコ機10の、操作デバイス300付近が部分的に図示される。なお、図6では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置(本実施形態における初期位置)に配置された状態が図示され、図7では、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置(本実施形態における押し下げ位置)に配置された状態が図示され、首振り操作部材310を把持する手が想像線で図示される。 In FIGS. 6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position (initial position in the present embodiment), and FIG. 7 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is in a downward position (push-down position in the present embodiment). ) Is shown, and the hand holding the swing operation member 310 is shown by an imaginary line.

下皿ユニット15の収容凹部15a及び上皿17の収容凹部17aは、首振り操作部材310の外形から十分に離間して配置される。そのため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持し、押し下げ操作する際に、首振り操作部材310と収容凹部15a及び収容凹部17aとの間に指を挟むことを抑制することができる。 The accommodating recess 15a of the lower plate unit 15 and the accommodating recess 17a of the upper plate 17 are arranged so as to be sufficiently separated from the outer shape of the swing operation member 310. Therefore, when the player grips the swing operation member 310 and pushes it down, it is possible to prevent the player from pinching a finger between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodation recess 15a and the accommodation recess 17a.

図6及び図7に示すように、遊技者は中間枠部材312に指をかけて首振り操作部材310を把持する。この状態で、押しボタン部分を兼ねるレンズ部材317が掌と対面配置されるので、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持したまま握り込むことで、振動部材310を押し込む操作を行うことができる。そのため、首振り操作部材310を把持した状態で指で押しボタンを押したり、首振り操作部材310を持ち替えたりせず、首振り操作部材310を把持した状態でレンズ部材317を押し込み操作することができる。従って、操作を簡単化することができる。 As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the player puts his finger on the intermediate frame member 312 to grip the swing operation member 310. In this state, the lens member 317 that also serves as the push button portion is arranged facing the palm, so that the player can push the vibrating member 310 by grasping the swinging operation member 310 while holding it. Therefore, it is possible to push the lens member 317 while holding the swing operation member 310 without pressing the push button with a finger or changing the swing operation member 310 while holding the swing operation member 310. it can. Therefore, the operation can be simplified.

首振り操作部材310に配置されるレンズ部材317が、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持した際に掌に当たる位置に配設される。そのため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持していることを検出した上でレンズ部材317を振動させることで、遊技者(の掌や指など)に振動を伝えることができ、振動が遊技者に気づかれないという事態を防ぐことができる。従って、操作デバイス300の演出効果を向上させることができる。 The lens member 317 arranged on the swing operation member 310 is arranged at a position where it hits the palm when the player grips the swing operation member 310. Therefore, by detecting that the player is holding the swing operation member 310 and then vibrating the lens member 317, the vibration can be transmitted to the player (palm, fingers, etc.), and the vibration is the game. It is possible to prevent the situation where the person is not noticed. Therefore, the effect of the operation device 300 can be improved.

また、その振動に合わせてレンズ部材317を押し込み操作することで、入力操作をするタイミングを図ることができるように演出を行うことができ、入力操作のタイミングを図ることに集中しすぎて遊技に集中できないという問題点を解消することができる。 In addition, by pushing the lens member 317 in accordance with the vibration, it is possible to produce an effect so that the timing of the input operation can be determined, and the game is too concentrated on the timing of the input operation. The problem of not being able to concentrate can be solved.

遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持した状態で、レンズ部材317は遊技者の手の内側に隠されるので、レンズ部材317が振動しているかどうか(レンズ部材317が中間枠部材312に対して移動しているかどうか)を、首振り操作部材310を把持している遊技者以外の他の遊技者は把握しづらくなる。そのため、首振り操作部材310を握っている遊技者だけに対して大当たりの告知をすることができ、遊技者の興趣を向上させることができる。 Since the lens member 317 is hidden inside the player's hand while the player holds the swing operation member 310, whether or not the lens member 317 is vibrating (the lens member 317 is relative to the intermediate frame member 312). It becomes difficult for a player other than the player holding the swinging operation member 310 to grasp (whether or not it is moving). Therefore, it is possible to notify only the player who holds the swing operation member 310 of the jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

図6及び図7に示すように、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置される状態と、下向き位置に配置される状態とでは、首振り操作部材310の前後位置および上下位置が異なる。これにより、首振り操作部材310を操作する際に、遊技者は手の位置を上下方向や前後方向に移動させることになるので、遊技者が操作している実感を得ることができる。 As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the front-rear position and the vertical position of the swing operation member 310 are different between the state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position and the state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. As a result, when operating the swing operation member 310, the player moves the position of the hand in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, so that the player can feel that he / she is operating.

遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持する際に、遊技者の指は中間枠部材312に振れ、遊技者の指先が背面側枠部材311に引っかかる。背面側枠部材311が背面側に曲率半径の中心を有する円弧を描く態様で反り返ることで、容易に指先を背面側枠部材311に引っ掛けることができるので、図7(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置される場合のように手首が固まる姿勢でも、指先が背面側枠部材311から外れることを抑制することができる。 When the player grips the swing operation member 310, the player's finger swings on the intermediate frame member 312, and the player's fingertip is caught on the back side frame member 311. By bending the back side frame member 311 in a manner of drawing an arc having the center of the radius of curvature on the back side, the fingertip can be easily hooked on the back side frame member 311. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7B, Even in a posture in which the wrist is stiffened as in the case where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position, it is possible to prevent the fingertip from coming off from the back side frame member 311.

また、指先が背面側枠部材311に引っかかることで、掌の内側に振動装置366(図11参照)の振動を閉じ込めることができ、遊技者が感じる振動を大きく確保することができる。 Further, by catching the fingertip on the back side frame member 311, the vibration of the vibration device 366 (see FIG. 11) can be confined inside the palm, and the vibration felt by the player can be largely secured.

図7に示すように、図6に示す状態から首振り操作部材310を押し下げると、首振り操作部材310が遊技者の手前下方に移動することにより自然と手首が返る。そのため、首振り操作部材310を奥に押し込む操作(図22(b)参照)を、手首の返しを解除する態様で手首を伸ばすことで行うことができる。これにより、首振り操作部材310を操作する遊技者の負担を軽減することができる。 As shown in FIG. 7, when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 6, the swing operation member 310 moves downward in front of the player, and the wrist naturally returns. Therefore, the operation of pushing the swing operation member 310 inward (see FIG. 22B) can be performed by extending the wrist in a manner of releasing the return of the wrist. As a result, the burden on the player who operates the swing operation member 310 can be reduced.

図6に示すように、首振り操作部材310の下端部から首振り操作部材310の回転軸である軸支棒363までの腕長さR1に比較して、首振り操作部材310の上端部から首振り操作部材310の回転軸である軸支棒363までの腕長さR2が長尺とされる。これにより、首振り操作部材310の上部を把持して首振り操作部材310を軸支棒363中心で回転させる場合に容易に(軽い力で)回転させることができる。一方で、首振り操作部材310の下端部に手をかけて、首振り操作部材310を軸支棒363中心で回転させる(誤操作する)場合には大きな力を必要とすることができる。従って、首振り操作部材310の上部を把持して首振り操作部材310を回転させる際の遊技者の負担を軽減できると共に、遊技者が首振り操作部材310の下端部に手をかけて、首振り操作部材310を回転させる誤操作を抑止することができる。 As shown in FIG. 6, as compared with the arm length R1 from the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to the shaft support rod 363 which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, from the upper end of the swing operation member 310. The arm length R2 up to the shaft support rod 363, which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, is long. Thereby, when the upper part of the swing operation member 310 is gripped and the swing operation member 310 is rotated around the shaft support rod 363, it can be easily rotated (with a light force). On the other hand, when a hand is placed on the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to rotate (erroneously operate) the swing operation member 310 around the shaft support rod 363, a large force can be required. Therefore, the burden on the player when gripping the upper part of the swing operation member 310 and rotating the swing operation member 310 can be reduced, and the player puts his / her hand on the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to move his / her neck. It is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of rotating the swing operation member 310.

図8は、操作デバイス300の正面斜視図である。なお、図8では、操作デバイス300の首振り操作部材310が、下向き位置(図7参照)に配置された状態が図示される。図8に示すように、操作デバイス300は、矩形状の外側ケース部材320から、首振り操作部材310が正面側に張り出して配置される。 FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 of the operation device 300 is arranged in a downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 8, in the operation device 300, the swing operation member 310 is arranged so as to project from the rectangular outer case member 320 to the front side.

図9は、操作デバイス300の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図9では、外側ケース部材320が、その外側ケース部材320よりも内側に配設される内側ケース部材330から取り外された状態が図示される。 FIG. 9 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. Note that FIG. 9 shows a state in which the outer case member 320 is removed from the inner case member 330 disposed inside the outer case member 320.

図9に示すように、外側ケース部材320は、カバー部材344,345(図11参照)の曲面に沿った形状で背面側が形成され内側ケース部材330に正面側からカバー部材344,345の左右の縁を隠す態様で取り付けられる前カバー321と、その前カバー321の上端から後方に凸設される凸設部321aに上側から嵌め込まれる長尺板形状の上カバー322と、前カバー321及び上カバー322の左右方向にフランジ状に延設されるフランジ部321b,322aを内嵌する態様で内ケース部材330に左右方向から締結固定される左カバー部材323,右カバー部材324と、内ケース部材330の内部に張り出して配設される複数のセンサ部材325aを有するセンサ基盤325と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 9, the outer case member 320 is formed on the back side in a shape along the curved surface of the cover members 344,345 (see FIG. 11), and the inner case member 330 is formed on the left and right sides of the cover members 344,345 from the front side. A front cover 321 attached in a manner of hiding the edge, a long plate-shaped upper cover 322 fitted from above into a convex portion 321a projecting rearward from the upper end of the front cover 321, and a front cover 321 and an upper cover. The left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324 and the inner case member 330 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 330 from the left and right directions in a manner in which the flange portions 321b and 322a extending in the left and right directions of the 322 are internally fitted. Mainly includes a sensor base 325 having a plurality of sensor members 325a overhanging and arranged inside the above.

左カバー部材323及び右カバー部材324を締結固定する一方で、前カバー321及び上カバー322を嵌め込みで固定することで、正面視において締結ビスが視認されることを防止することができる。従って、操作デバイス300を分解するいたずらを防止することができる。 By fastening and fixing the left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324, and fixing the front cover 321 and the upper cover 322 by fitting, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being visually recognized in the front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent mischief by disassembling the operation device 300.

センサ部材325aは、第1センサ挿通孔332e2に挿通されるフォトカプラ形式の第1センサ部材325a1と、第2センサ挿通孔332e3に挿通されるフォトカプラ形式の第2センサ部材325a2と、その第2センサ部材325a2の下方に配置されセンサ挿通孔332fに挿通されるフォトカプラ形式の第3センサ部材325a3と、を主に備える。 The sensor member 325a includes a photocoupler-type first sensor member 325a1 inserted through the first sensor insertion hole 332e2, a photocoupler-type second sensor member 325a2 inserted through the second sensor insertion hole 332e3, and a second sensor member 325a2 thereof. It mainly includes a third sensor member 325a3 of a photocoupler type, which is arranged below the sensor member 325a2 and is inserted into the sensor insertion hole 332f.

なお、第1センサ部材325a1及び第2センサ部材325a2は、レバー部材340の姿勢を検出するセンサであり、第3センサ部材325a3は、偏心カム部材333の位相を検出するセンサである。 The first sensor member 325a1 and the second sensor member 325a2 are sensors that detect the posture of the lever member 340, and the third sensor member 325a3 is a sensor that detects the phase of the eccentric cam member 333.

また、フォトカプラ形式のセンサとは、光を投光する投光部と、この投光部からの光を受光する受光部とを備え、検出する部分を挿入可能な隙間(スリット)を備えて略コ字状に配置されるセンサを意味する。 Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and has a gap (slit) into which a detection portion can be inserted. It means a sensor arranged in a substantially U shape.

図10は、操作デバイス300の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図10では、外側ケース部材320の図示が省略され、内側ケース部材330が分解された状態が図示される。 FIG. 10 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. In FIG. 10, the outer case member 320 is not shown, and the inner case member 330 is shown in a disassembled state.

図10に示すように、内側ケース部材330は、レバー部材340が内側に配設される箱状に組立てられる左カバー部材331及び右カバー部材332と、左カバー部材331から凸設される偏心カム軸331d2に軸支される偏心カム部材333と、その偏心カム部材333との相対的な位相が不変とされ偏心カム部材333と同様に偏心カム軸331d2に軸支される位相検出部材334と、左カバー部材331に外側から締結固定され偏心カム部材333を回転させる駆動力を発生させる第1駆動装置335と、左カバー部材331から凸設されるロック軸331d3に軸支されるロック部材336と、右カバー部材332に外側から締結固定されロック部材336を回転させる駆動力を発生させる第2駆動装置337と、レバー部材340を軸支するレバー支持軸331d1の後方に配設されるギアダンパ338と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 10, the inner case member 330 includes a left cover member 331 and a right cover member 332 that are assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 340 is arranged inside, and an eccentric cam that is projected from the left cover member 331. An eccentric cam member 333 pivotally supported by the shaft 331d2 and a phase detection member 334 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 in the same manner as the eccentric cam member 333, wherein the relative phases of the eccentric cam member 333 are invariant. A first drive device 335 that is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 331 from the outside to generate a driving force that rotates the eccentric cam member 333, and a lock member 336 that is pivotally supported by a lock shaft 331d3 that is projected from the left cover member 331. A second drive device 337 that is fastened and fixed to the right cover member 332 from the outside to generate a driving force that rotates the lock member 336, and a gear damper 338 that is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 that pivotally supports the lever member 340. , Is mainly provided.

左カバー部材331は、右方に開口が形成される有底筒状の部材であって、その底部(図10左側部分)において矩形板状に形成される下側側壁部331aと、その下側側壁部331aの上側に正面視左方(図10奥側)にオフセットされる矩形板状の上側側壁部331bと、下側側壁部331a及び上側側壁部331bの縁から右方に延設され手前側上部を除いて右カバー部材332と当接される板状の連結側壁部331cと、下側側壁部331a又は上側側壁部331bから右方に凸設され円柱形状に形成される複数の棒状部材331dと、上側側壁部331bに穿設される複数の挿通孔331eと、ロック部材336の姿勢を検出するフォトカプラ形式のセンサ部材331fと、上側側壁部331bの左方に張り出され棒状部材331dの内の最上部に配置されるレバー支持軸331d1を内嵌支持する有底筒状の軸支部331gと、を主に備える。 The left cover member 331 is a bottomed tubular member having an opening formed to the right, and has a lower side wall portion 331a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom portion (left portion in FIG. 10) and a lower side thereof. A rectangular plate-shaped upper side wall portion 331b offset to the left side (back side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 331a, and extending to the right from the edges of the lower side wall portion 331a and the upper side wall portion 331b. A plate-shaped connecting side wall portion 331c that is in contact with the right cover member 332 except for the upper side portion, and a plurality of rod-shaped members that are projected to the right from the lower side wall portion 331a or the upper side wall portion 331b and are formed in a cylindrical shape. 331d, a plurality of insertion holes 331e formed in the upper side wall portion 331b, a photocoupler type sensor member 331f for detecting the posture of the lock member 336, and a rod-shaped member 331d projecting to the left of the upper side wall portion 331b. Mainly includes a bottomed cylindrical shaft support portion 331g that internally fits and supports the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the lever support shaft 331d.

右カバー部材332は、左方に開口が形成される有底筒状の部材であって、その底部(図10右側部分)において矩形板状に形成される下側側壁部332aと、その下側側壁部332aの上側に正面視右方(図10手前側)にオフセットされる板状の上側側壁部332bと、下側側壁部332a及び上側側壁部332bの縁から左方に延設され手前側上部を除いて左カバー部材331と当接される板状の連結側壁部332cと、下側側壁部332aに一対の円形状が組み合わされた態様で穿設され第2駆動装置337のギア部分が挿通される駆動部材挿通孔332dと、上側側壁部332bに穿設される複数の挿通孔332eと、第3センサ部材325a3が挿通されるセンサ挿通孔332fと、上側側壁部332bの右方に張り出され棒状部材331dの内の最上部に配置されるレバー支持軸331d1を内嵌支持する有底筒状の軸支部332gと、上側側壁部332bの内面側に環状に凸設される環状凸部332iと、を主に備える。 The right cover member 332 is a bottomed tubular member having an opening formed to the left, and has a lower side wall portion 332a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom portion (right portion in FIG. 10) and a lower side thereof. A plate-shaped upper side wall portion 332b offset to the right side (front side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 332a, and a plate-shaped upper side wall portion 332a and an upper side wall portion 332b extending to the left from the edges of the front side. A plate-shaped connecting side wall portion 332c that is in contact with the left cover member 331 except for the upper portion and a pair of circular shapes are bored in the lower side wall portion 332a, and the gear portion of the second drive device 337 is formed. The drive member insertion hole 332d to be inserted, the plurality of insertion holes 332e formed in the upper side wall portion 332b, the sensor insertion hole 332f through which the third sensor member 325a3 is inserted, and the upper side wall portion 332b are stretched to the right. A bottomed tubular shaft support portion 332g that internally fits and supports the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the rod-shaped member 331d, and an annular convex portion that is annularly projected on the inner surface side of the upper side wall portion 332b. Mainly provided with 332i.

上側側壁部331b,332bは、手前側上部が左右方向視で軸支部331g,332gを中心とした1/4円形状に形成され(図17(b)参照)、連結側壁部331c,332cは、手前側上部に左右方向に切りかかれる切り欠き331c1,332c1を備える。 The upper side wall portions 331b and 332b are formed in a 1/4 circular shape centered on the shaft support portions 331g and 332g when the front side upper portion is viewed in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17B), and the connecting side wall portions 331c and 332c are formed. Notches 331c1 and 332c1 that are cut in the left-right direction are provided on the upper part on the front side.

切り欠き331c1,332c1は、レバー部材340が通される部分であって、レバー部材340の横ずれ(揺動軸であるレバー支持軸331d1の延設方向の位置ずれ)を防止する役割を有する。また、上側側壁部331b,332bの1/4円形状を利用して、前カバー321(図9参照)が内側ケース部材330に正面側から取り付けられる。 The cutouts 331c1 and 332c1 are portions through which the lever member 340 is passed, and have a role of preventing lateral displacement of the lever member 340 (positional displacement of the lever support shaft 331d1 which is a swinging shaft in the extending direction). Further, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 9) is attached to the inner case member 330 from the front side by utilizing the 1/4 circular shape of the upper side wall portions 331b and 332b.

棒状部材331dは、本実施形態では4本の円柱部材から形成される。即ち、棒状部材331dは、左カバー部材331の最上部に配置されるレバー支持軸331d1と、そのレバー支持軸331d1の下方に配設される偏心カム軸331d2と、下側側壁部331aの右方から凸設されるロック軸331d3と、そのロック軸331d3の下方に併設される補助軸331d4と、を主に備える。 The rod-shaped member 331d is formed of four cylindrical members in this embodiment. That is, the rod-shaped member 331d includes a lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 331, an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 arranged below the lever support shaft 331d1, and a right side of the lower side wall portion 331a. It mainly includes a lock shaft 331d3 projecting from the lock shaft 331d3 and an auxiliary shaft 331d4 provided below the lock shaft 331d3.

レバー支持軸331d1は、レバー部材340が揺動可能に軸支される部材であって、軸支部331g,332gに挿通されることで両端支持される。 The lever support shaft 331d1 is a member in which the lever member 340 is swingably supported, and is supported at both ends by being inserted through the shaft support portions 331g and 332g.

偏心カム軸331d2は、偏心カム部材333及び位相検出部材334が位相合わせされた状態で挿通される部材である。 The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is a member through which the eccentric cam member 333 and the phase detection member 334 are inserted in a phase-aligned state.

ロック軸331d3及び補助軸331d4は、共にロック部材336が挿通される軸であって、ロック軸331d3はロック部材336の軸支孔336bが軸支される部材であって、補助軸331d4は、ロック部材336の案内孔336cを案内する部材である。 The lock shaft 331d3 and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 are both shafts through which the lock member 336 is inserted, the lock shaft 331d3 is a member to which the shaft support hole 336b of the lock member 336 is pivotally supported, and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is locked. It is a member that guides the guide hole 336c of the member 336.

挿通孔331eは、本実施形態では、3箇所の貫通孔から構成される。即ち、レバー支持軸331d1の手前側に配置されると共にレバー支持軸331d1を中心とした円弧に沿った長孔状の案内支持孔331e1と、レバー支持軸331d1の背面側に配置される円形状の貫通孔であってギアダンパ338が挿通されるギアダンパ挿通孔331e2と、ギアダンパ挿通孔331e2の背面側下方に配置され一対の円形状が組み合わされた態様で穿設される駆動部材挿通孔331e3と、を主に備える。 In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 331e is composed of three through holes. That is, a circular guide support hole 331e1 arranged on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1 and along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 and a circular shape arranged on the back side of the lever support shaft 331d1. The gear damper insertion hole 331e2, which is a through hole through which the gear damper 338 is inserted, and the drive member insertion hole 331e3, which is arranged below the back side of the gear damper insertion hole 331e2 and is formed in a combination of a pair of circular shapes, are formed. Mainly prepare.

案内支持孔331e1は、角度規制棒部材346が挿通されレバー部材340の揺動を案内すると共に、レバー部材340の揺動の終端を端部で規定する。 In the guide support hole 331e1, the angle regulating rod member 346 is inserted to guide the swing of the lever member 340, and the end of the swing of the lever member 340 is defined by an end portion.

センサ部材331fは、ロック部材336の検出片336eがセンサ部材331fの隙間を通過することを検出して、ロック部材336の姿勢を検出する。 The sensor member 331f detects that the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 passes through the gap of the sensor member 331f, and detects the posture of the lock member 336.

駆動部材挿通孔332dは、大型の円と小型の円とが連結される形状とされるので、それぞれの円の形状を調整しておくことで、第2駆動装置337の駆動ギア337bを、大型の円を通して右カバー部材332の左方に張り出させ、その状態で駆動ギア337bを軸支する部分の台座部分を小型の円に嵌め込むことができる。 The drive member insertion hole 332d has a shape in which a large circle and a small circle are connected. Therefore, by adjusting the shape of each circle, the drive gear 337b of the second drive device 337 can be made large. The pedestal portion of the portion that pivotally supports the drive gear 337b can be fitted into a small circle in a state where the right cover member 332 is projected to the left through the circle.

これにより、第2駆動装置337に駆動ギア337bを軸支したまま内カバー部材332に挿通すること(駆動ギア337bの外径以上の径の孔が必要)と、挿通した第2駆動装置337の軸位置を固定すること(駆動ギア337bの駆動軸の台座と同程度の径の孔で固定)とを両立させることができる。 As a result, the drive gear 337b is inserted into the inner cover member 332 while the drive gear 337b is pivotally supported by the second drive device 337 (a hole having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the drive gear 337b is required), and the inserted second drive device 337 It is possible to achieve both fixing the shaft position (fixing with a hole having the same diameter as the pedestal of the drive shaft of the drive gear 337b).

挿通孔332eは、本実施形態では、3箇所の貫通孔から構成される。即ち、案内支持孔331e1と左右方向で合致する位置および形状で形成されレバー部材340の角度規制棒部材346が案内される案内支持孔332e1と、軸支部332gの背面側に配設される長方形状の貫通孔であって第1センサ部材325a1が挿通される第1センサ挿通孔332e2と、その第1センサ挿通孔332e2が軸支部332gを中心として回転した位置に配置される長方形状の貫通孔であって第2センサ部材325a2が挿通される第2センサ挿通孔332e3と、を主に備える。 In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 332e is composed of three through holes. That is, the guide support hole 332e1 which is formed at a position and shape that matches the guide support hole 331e1 in the left-right direction and guides the angle control rod member 346 of the lever member 340, and a rectangular shape arranged on the back side of the shaft support portion 332g. The first sensor insertion hole 332e2 through which the first sensor member 325a1 is inserted, and the rectangular through hole in which the first sensor insertion hole 332e2 is arranged at a position rotated around the shaft support portion 332g. It mainly includes a second sensor insertion hole 332e3 into which the second sensor member 325a2 is inserted.

センサ挿通孔332e2,332e3は、レバー部材340のセンサ検出片343bが隙間を通過することを検出してレバー部材340の姿勢を検出するセンサ部材325a1,325a2を挿通する貫通孔である。 The sensor insertion holes 332e2 and 332e3 are through holes through which the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 for detecting the posture of the lever member 340 by detecting that the sensor detection piece 343b of the lever member 340 passes through the gap are inserted.

軸支部331g,332gにねじりバネSP1が巻き付けられる。また、軸支部331g,332gの前下方に板状のねじりバネ係止部331h,332hが配置され、左カバー部材331及び右カバー部材332の左右方向外側に延設される。 The torsion spring SP1 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g. Further, plate-shaped torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h are arranged below the front and lower portions of the shaft support portions 331g and 332g, and extend outward in the left-right direction of the left cover member 331 and the right cover member 332.

本実施形態では、ねじりバネSP1の一端がねじりバネ係止部331h,332hに上側から当接され、他端が角度規制棒部材346に下側から当接される。これにより、レバー部材340は首振り操作部材310が起き上がる方向に付勢される。 In the present embodiment, one end of the torsion spring SP1 is brought into contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h from above, and the other end is brought into contact with the angle regulating rod member 346 from below. As a result, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 is raised.

環状凸部332iは、位相検出部材334が外嵌される部分である。環状凸部332iに位相検出部材334が外嵌されることにより、偏心カム軸331d2の軸合わせを強固に行うことができる。 The annular convex portion 332i is a portion to which the phase detection member 334 is fitted. By fitting the phase detection member 334 to the annular convex portion 332i, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 can be firmly aligned.

第1駆動装置335は、駆動力を発生させる駆動モータ335aと、その駆動モータ335aに軸支され回転駆動される駆動ギア335bと、を主に備える。駆動ギア335bは偏心カム部材333の本体部333aと歯合され、駆動力が伝達される。 The first drive device 335 mainly includes a drive motor 335a that generates a driving force and a drive gear 335b that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 335a and is rotationally driven. The drive gear 335b is meshed with the main body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 333, and the driving force is transmitted.

ロック部材336は、レバー部材340の揺動を防止する部材であって、先端側が略L字の鉤状に形成される本体部336aと、その本体部336aの基端側に穿設される軸支孔336bと、その軸支孔336bを中心とした円弧に沿って形成される案内孔336cと、本体部336aの基端側から軸支孔336bの軸径方向外側へ向かってギア状に凸設されるギア部336dと、軸支孔336bの軸径方向外側に延設されると共にセンサ部材331fの隙間を通過可能とされる板状の検出片336eと、を主に備える。 The lock member 336 is a member that prevents the lever member 340 from swinging, and has a main body portion 336a whose tip end side is formed in a substantially L-shaped hook shape and a shaft formed on the base end side of the main body portion 336a. A support hole 336b, a guide hole 336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 336b, and a gear-like protrusion from the base end side of the main body portion 336a toward the outside of the shaft support hole 336b in the axial direction. It mainly includes a gear portion 336d to be provided, and a plate-shaped detection piece 336e extending outward in the axial direction of the shaft support hole 336b and allowing passage through a gap of the sensor member 331f.

案内孔336cは、補助軸331d4が挿通される長孔であり、この案内孔336cの長さにより、ロック部材336の揺動終端を規定することができる。 The guide hole 336c is an elongated hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is inserted, and the length of the guide hole 336c can define the swing end of the lock member 336.

第2駆動装置337は、駆動力を発生させる駆動モータ337aと、その駆動モータ337aに軸支され回転駆動される駆動ギア337bと、を主に備える。駆動ギア337bはロック部材336のギア部336dと歯合され、駆動力が伝達される。 The second drive device 337 mainly includes a drive motor 337a that generates a driving force and a drive gear 337b that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 337a and is rotationally driven. The drive gear 337b is meshed with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 336, and the driving force is transmitted.

ギアダンパ338は、歯合回転する部材に粘性抵抗を与える部材であって、ギアダンパ挿通孔331e2を通して左カバー部材331の右方(内側ケース部材330内方)にギア部材が張り出されると共に、そのギア部材はギア部342b(図11参照)に歯合される。そのため、レバー部材340は、揺動する間、ギアダンパ338から粘性抵抗を受ける。 The gear damper 338 is a member that imparts viscous resistance to a member that rotates in teeth, and the gear member is projected to the right side (inside the inner case member 330) of the left cover member 331 through the gear damper insertion hole 331e2, and the gear thereof. The member is meshed with the gear portion 342b (see FIG. 11). Therefore, the lever member 340 receives a viscous resistance from the gear damper 338 while swinging.

図11は、首振り操作部材310及びレバー部材340の分解正面斜視図である。図11では、首振り操作部材310から背面側枠部材311が分解された状態が図示されると共に、レバー部材340の左右に締結固定されるギアダンパ受け部材342、姿勢検出部材343及び破壊防止を目的として配設される剥離部材350が分解された状態が図示される。 FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340. In FIG. 11, a state in which the back side frame member 311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 310 is shown, and the gear damper receiving member 342, the posture detection member 343, and the destruction prevention are fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 340. The state in which the peeling member 350 arranged as is disassembled is shown.

背面側枠部材311は、外殻が背面側に突出する半球形状に形成され、その突出された先から上部が正面側に張り出す(戻る)態様で略半円状に凹む(図17(b)参照)。その凹む部分に略矩形状の開口である挿通孔311aを備える。挿通孔311aは、首振り部材360が部分的に挿通される貫通孔である。 The back side frame member 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the outer shell protrudes to the back side, and the upper portion projects (returns) to the front side from the protruding tip and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape (FIG. 17 (b). )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swing member 360 is partially inserted.

図11に示すように、レバー部材340は、鉄などの金属材料から形成され断面コ字状の長尺棒状に形成される本体部材341と、その本体部材341の左側側面に締結固定され軸方向視の外形が略円形状に形成されるギアダンパ受け部材342と、そのギアダンパ受け部材342と同軸で軸支され軸方向視の外形が略円形状に形成されると共に本体部材341の右側側面に締結固定される姿勢検出部材343と、それらギアダンパ受け部材342及び姿勢検出部材343の円形部分に上側から外嵌する形状に形成される上部カバー部材344と、本体部材341を挟んで上部カバー部材344と対向配置される下部カバー部材345と、ギアダンパ受け部材342の筒状部342a及び姿勢検出部材343の筒状部343aに挿通される角度規制棒部材346と、本体部材341の軸孔341bと同軸で軸支される剥離部材350と、本体部材341の正面側端部に配設される首振り部材360と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 11, the lever member 340 is fastened and fixed to a main body member 341 formed of a metal material such as iron and formed into a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, and to the left side surface of the main body member 341 in the axial direction. A gear damper receiving member 342 whose visual outer shape is formed in a substantially circular shape, and a gear damper receiving member 342 which is coaxially supported by the gear damper receiving member 342 and whose axial outer shape is formed in a substantially circular shape and fastened to the right side surface of the main body member 341. The posture detection member 343 to be fixed, the upper cover member 344 formed in a shape that fits the circular portion of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detection member 343 from above, and the upper cover member 344 sandwiching the main body member 341. Coaxially with the lower cover member 345 arranged to face each other, the angle control rod member 346 inserted into the tubular portion 342a of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the tubular portion 343a of the posture detection member 343, and the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341. It mainly includes a peeling member 350 that is pivotally supported, and a swinging member 360 that is arranged at the front end of the main body member 341.

ギアダンパ受け部材342は、本体部材341の軸孔341bに挿通される筒状の筒状部342aと、外周面に沿ってギア歯状に形成されるギア部342bと、を主に備える。また、姿勢検出部材343は、本体部材341の軸孔341bに挿通される筒状の筒状部343aと、その筒状部343aから最も離間した位置(図11の奥側)に軸心方向に沿って延設される板状のセンサ検出片343bと、を主に備える。 The gear damper receiving member 342 mainly includes a tubular tubular portion 342a inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and a gear portion 342b formed in a gear tooth shape along the outer peripheral surface. Further, the posture detection member 343 is axially located at a position (back side in FIG. 11) that is farthest from the tubular portion 343a inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341 and the tubular portion 343a. It mainly includes a plate-shaped sensor detection piece 343b extending along the line.

筒状部342a,343aは、本体部材341の軸孔341bに挿通される部分であって、内周側にレバー支持軸331d1(図10参照)が挿通される。これにより、レバー部材340がレバー支持軸331d1を軸に揺動可能とされる。 The tubular portions 342a and 343a are portions to be inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10) is inserted into the inner peripheral side. As a result, the lever member 340 can swing around the lever support shaft 331d1.

ギア部342bは、ギアダンパ338(図10参照)と歯合される部分であって、ギアダンパ338が発生する粘性抵抗をレバー部材340に伝達する部分である。 The gear portion 342b is a portion that is meshed with the gear damper 338 (see FIG. 10), and is a portion that transmits the viscous resistance generated by the gear damper 338 to the lever member 340.

センサ検出片343bは、第1センサ部材325a1又は第2センサ部材325a2(図18(c)参照)の隙間を通過することでレバー部材340の姿勢を検出可能とする部分である。 The sensor detection piece 343b is a portion capable of detecting the posture of the lever member 340 by passing through the gap of the first sensor member 325a1 or the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 18C).

剥離部材350は、レバー部材340の軸孔341bと同軸で配置されレバー支持軸331d1(図10参照)に挿通される挿通孔352を備える板状の本体部材351と、その本体部材351の上側に固定される矩形状の嵩上げ部材353と、その嵩上げ部材353の上側に配置され本体部材351に締結固定されると共に磁性体材料から形成される磁石部材354と、を主に備える。 The peeling member 350 is a plate-shaped main body member 351 having an insertion hole 352 arranged coaxially with the shaft hole 341b of the lever member 340 and inserted into the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10), and on the upper side of the main body member 351. It mainly includes a rectangular raising member 353 to be fixed, and a magnet member 354 arranged above the raising member 353 and fastened and fixed to the main body member 351 and formed from a magnetic material.

磁石部材354は、本体部材341と対向配置され、本体部材351に締結固定されるので、本体部材341と本体部材351とを合体したり、分離させたりする働きを持つ。 The magnet member 354 is arranged to face the main body member 341 and is fastened and fixed to the main body member 351. Therefore, the magnet member 354 has a function of combining or separating the main body member 341 and the main body member 351.

図12は、レバー部材340の本体部材341、上部カバー部材344、下部カバー部材345及び首振り部材360の正面分解斜視図である。 FIG. 12 is a frontal disassembled perspective view of the main body member 341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swing member 360 of the lever member 340.

レバー部材340の本体部材341は、断面コ字状の長尺棒状に形成される本体部341aと、その本体部341aの略中央部において左右方向に穿設される一対の軸孔341bと、その軸孔341bの正面側において左右方向に穿設される規制孔341cと、本体部341aの正面側端部において本体部341aの延設方向に対して下方(図12下方)に傾斜して延設される左右一対の首振り部材支持部341dと、その首振り部材支持部341dの根本側で左右方向に穿設される軸孔341eと、その軸孔341eの正面側において左右方向に穿設される規制孔341fと、を主に備える。 The main body member 341 of the lever member 340 includes a main body portion 341a formed in the shape of a long rod having a U-shaped cross section, a pair of shaft holes 341b formed in the substantially central portion of the main body portion 341a in the left-right direction, and a pair of shaft holes 341b thereof. The regulation hole 341c drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341b and the front end of the main body 341a are inclined downward (downward in FIG. 12) with respect to the extension direction of the main body 341a. A pair of left and right swing member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left-right direction on the root side of the swing member support portion 341d, and a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341e. The regulation hole 341f is mainly provided.

軸孔341bは、筒状部342a,343a(図11参照)が挿通されると共にレバー支持軸331d1が挿通される貫通孔である。即ち、この軸孔341bの軸と同軸にレバー部材340の本体部材341と、剥離部材350とが軸支される。 The shaft hole 341b is a through hole through which the tubular portions 342a and 343a (see FIG. 11) are inserted and the lever support shaft 331d1 is inserted. That is, the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are pivotally supported coaxially with the shaft of the shaft hole 341b.

規制孔341cは、角度規制棒部材346が支持される貫通孔である。 The regulation hole 341c is a through hole in which the angle regulation rod member 346 is supported.

軸孔341eは、首振り部材360を軸支する軸支棒363が挿通される貫通孔であり、規制孔341fは首振り部材360の揺動角度を規制する規制棒365が挿通される貫通孔である。なお、規制孔341fに比較して軸孔341eの方が軸支棒363の周りに緩衝部材364が配設される分、内径が大きくされる。 The shaft hole 341e is a through hole through which the shaft support rod 363 that pivotally supports the swing member 360 is inserted, and the regulation hole 341f is a through hole through which the regulation rod 365 that regulates the swing angle of the swing member 360 is inserted. Is. The inner diameter of the shaft hole 341e is larger than that of the regulation hole 341f because the cushioning member 364 is arranged around the shaft support rod 363.

上部カバー部材344は、樹脂材料から形成され、レバー部材340の本体部材341に上側から締結固定される部材であって、背面側に軸孔341bを中心とする円に沿った曲面を形成する態様とされるガイド部344aと、そのガイド部344aに連設されレバー部材340の本体部341に上側から外嵌可能な断面コ字形状に形成される外嵌部344bと、それらガイド部344a及び外嵌部344bを連結する連結部344cと、を主に備える。連結部344cは、厚さが薄くされる(図22参照)。 The upper cover member 344 is a member formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and has an embodiment of forming a curved surface along a circle centered on a shaft hole 341b on the back surface side. The guide portion 344a, the outer fitting portion 344b which is connected to the guide portion 344a and is formed in a U-shaped cross section that can be externally fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and the guide portion 344a and the outer It mainly includes a connecting portion 344c for connecting the fitting portion 344b. The thickness of the connecting portion 344c is reduced (see FIG. 22).

下部カバー部材345は、樹脂材料から形成され、レバー部材340の本体部材341に下側から締結固定される部材であって、軸孔341bを中心とする円に沿った形状で左右方向に延設される背面ガイド部345aと、レバー部材340の本体部341に下側から外嵌可能な断面コ字形状に形成される外嵌部345bと、外嵌部345bを挟んで背面ガイド部345aの反対側に配設され正面側へ向けて湾曲形成される正面曲面部345cと、その正面曲面部345cの左右の端部から正面側に延設される正面ガイド部345dと、を主に備える。 The lower cover member 345 is a member formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and extends in the left-right direction in a shape along a circle centered on the shaft hole 341b. The back guide portion 345a is formed, the outer fitting portion 345b formed in a U-shaped cross section that can be externally fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and the rear guide portion 345a sandwiching the outer fitting portion 345b. It mainly includes a front curved surface portion 345c arranged on the side and curved toward the front side, and a front surface guide portion 345d extending from the left and right ends of the front curved surface portion 345c to the front side.

背面ガイド部345aは、上部カバー部材344のガイド部344aと共に、内側ケース部材330の切り欠き331c1(図10参照)に沿って配設される部分である。組立状態において、背面ガイド部345a及びガイド部344aの縁部を覆い隠す態様で外側ケース部材320の前カバー321(図8参照)や上カバー322(図8参照)が配設される。これにより、背面ガイド部345a及びガイド部344aは、内側ケース部材330に埃や球(遊技球、遊技媒体)が侵入することを防止することができる。 The back guide portion 345a is a portion arranged along the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330 together with the guide portion 344a of the upper cover member 344. In the assembled state, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 8) and the upper cover 322 (see FIG. 8) of the outer case member 320 are arranged so as to cover the edges of the back guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a. As a result, the back guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a can prevent dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering the inner case member 330.

正面曲面部345c及び正面ガイド部345dは、共に首振り部材360の本体部材361の揺動を案内(図11参照)する部分である。正面曲面部345cによって、首振り部材360の回転方向の位置ずれや、レンズ部材317(図10参照)を押し込まれた際の衝撃が受け止められ、正面ガイド部345dによって、首振り部材360が軸方向に位置ずれすることが抑制される。 Both the front curved surface portion 345c and the front guide portion 345d are portions that guide the swing of the main body member 361 of the swing member 360 (see FIG. 11). The front curved surface portion 345c receives the displacement of the swing member 360 in the rotational direction and the impact when the lens member 317 (see FIG. 10) is pushed in, and the front guide portion 345d causes the swing member 360 to move in the axial direction. It is suppressed that the position shifts to.

なお、下部カバー部材345は、内側ケース部材330の切り欠き331c1(図10参照)の下端部と対向配置されるので、レバー部材340が押し下げ動作される際に外側ケース部材320(図8参照)にレバー部材340の本体部材341(金属材料から形成される)が直接当接することを防止することができる。即ち、間に樹脂材料から形成される下部カバー部材345が配設されることで、レバー部材340と外側ケース部材320とが当接した場合の衝撃を緩和することができる。 Since the lower cover member 345 is arranged to face the lower end of the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330, the outer case member 320 (see FIG. 8) is pushed down when the lever member 340 is pushed down. It is possible to prevent the main body member 341 (formed from the metal material) of the lever member 340 from directly contacting the lever member 340. That is, by disposing the lower cover member 345 formed of the resin material between them, it is possible to alleviate the impact when the lever member 340 and the outer case member 320 come into contact with each other.

首振り部材360は、レバー部材340の本体部材341の正面側端部に配設され軸孔341eを軸に揺動可能とされる部材であって、首振り部材支持部341dの左右方向外側に配設される側壁部361aを有すると共に断面コ字状に形成される板状の本体部材361と、その本体部材361の正面側の壁部に係止されると共に本体部材361と同軸で軸支される板状のモータ固定板362と、本体部材361の軸孔361c及び軸孔341eに挿通される円柱形状の軸支棒363と、その軸支棒363を内嵌すると共に軸孔341eに外嵌される緩衝部材364と、その緩衝部材364に巻き付け支持されるねじりバネSP2と、規制孔341fに挿通固定される円柱形状の規制棒365と、モータ固定板362に締結固定されモータ固定板362の面に垂直な方向に直線的な振動を発生させるボイスコイルモータから構成される振動装置366と、を主に備える。 The swing member 360 is a member that is arranged at the front end of the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and is swingable around the shaft hole 341e, and is located on the lateral side of the swing member support portion 341d in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped main body member 361 having a side wall portion 361a to be arranged and formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a shaft support coaxially with the main body member 361 while being locked to a wall portion on the front side of the main body member 361. The plate-shaped motor fixing plate 362 to be formed, the cylindrical shaft support rod 363 inserted into the shaft hole 361c and the shaft hole 341e of the main body member 361, and the shaft support rod 363 are fitted inside and outside the shaft hole 341e. The cushioning member 364 to be fitted, the torsion spring SP2 wound and supported around the cushioning member 364, the cylindrical regulation rod 365 inserted and fixed in the regulation hole 341f, and the motor fixing plate 362 fastened and fixed to the motor fixing plate 362. A vibration device 366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the surface is mainly provided.

本体部材361は、互いに対向配置される一対の板状の側壁部361aと、その側壁部361aを正面側の端部で連結する正面壁部361bと、一対の側壁部361aに同軸で円形に穿設され緩衝部材364が内嵌される軸孔361cと、その軸孔361cを中心とした円に沿って形成され規制棒365が挿通される長孔状の角度規制孔361dと、側壁部361a及び正面壁部361bの上側で互いに離反する方向に折曲形成され首振り操作部材310が締結固定される固定板部361eと、を主に備える。 The main body member 361 is coaxially and circularly bored with a pair of plate-shaped side wall portions 361a arranged to face each other, a front wall portion 361b connecting the side wall portions 361a at an end portion on the front side, and a pair of side wall portions 361a. A shaft hole 361c in which the cushioning member 364 is installed, an elongated angle regulation hole 361d formed along a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c and through which the regulation rod 365 is inserted, a side wall portion 361a, and a side wall portion 361a. It mainly includes a fixing plate portion 361e which is bent on the upper side of the front wall portion 361b in a direction away from each other and to which the swinging operation member 310 is fastened and fixed.

側壁部361aの背面側端部の外形が軸孔361cを中心とした円形に形成されているので、側壁部361aの背面側端部を正面曲面部345cに摺動させた状態で本体部材361を揺動させることができる。 Since the outer shape of the back side end portion of the side wall portion 361a is formed in a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c, the main body member 361 is slid on the front curved surface portion 345c with the back side end portion of the side wall portion 361a slid. It can be rocked.

軸孔361cは、軸孔341eと同様に、緩衝部材364に外嵌支持される。これにより、首振り部材360側で生じる振動がレバー部材340の本体部材341側へ伝達することを抑制することができる。 The shaft hole 361c is externally fitted and supported by the cushioning member 364 in the same manner as the shaft hole 341e. As a result, it is possible to suppress the vibration generated on the swing member 360 side from being transmitted to the main body member 341 side of the lever member 340.

角度規制孔361dは、樹脂材料から形成される緩衝部材361d1を備える。緩衝部材361d1は角度規制孔361dの内周面を覆う態様で取り付けられる。これにより、規制棒365が角度規制孔361dに当接する際の衝撃を抑制することができる。 The angle regulating hole 361d includes a cushioning member 361d1 formed of a resin material. The cushioning member 361d1 is attached so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the angle regulating hole 361d. As a result, the impact when the regulation rod 365 comes into contact with the angle regulation hole 361d can be suppressed.

モータ固定板362は、本体部材361の正面壁部361bに対して垂直に係止される板状の本体部362aと、その本体部362aの左右端部で折曲される一対の側壁部362bと、を主に備える。 The motor fixing plate 362 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 362a that is vertically locked to the front wall portion 361b of the main body member 361, and a pair of side wall portions 362b that are bent at the left and right ends of the main body portion 362a. , Is mainly provided.

本体部362aは、正面側に突起362a1が凸設され、その突起362a1が正面壁部361bに穿設される孔に差し込まれることで係止される。 The main body portion 362a is locked by having a protrusion 362a1 projecting on the front side and inserting the protrusion 362a1 into a hole formed in the front wall portion 361b.

側壁部362bは、軸孔341eと同径の軸孔362b1が穿設され、緩衝部材364に外嵌支持される部分であって、首振り部材支持部341dの左右方向内側に配設される。即ち、首振り部材支持部341dは、側壁部361aと側壁部362bとに挟まれる形で組立られる。 The side wall portion 362b is a portion in which a shaft hole 362b1 having the same diameter as the shaft hole 341e is bored and is externally supported by the cushioning member 364, and is arranged inside the swing member support portion 341d in the left-right direction. That is, the swing member support portion 341d is assembled so as to be sandwiched between the side wall portion 361a and the side wall portion 362b.

緩衝部材364は、本体部材341に外側から挿通される筒状部材であって、差し込み先端側である差し込み部364aが小径に形成され、その差し込み部364aよりも根本側に形成される根本部364bが差し込み部364aに比較して大径に形成される。 The cushioning member 364 is a tubular member that is inserted into the main body member 341 from the outside, and the insertion portion 364a on the insertion tip side is formed to have a small diameter, and the root portion 364b is formed on the root side of the insertion portion 364a. Is formed to have a larger diameter than the insertion portion 364a.

緩衝部材364に外嵌支持されるものの内、本体部材361は根本部364bに外嵌され、本体部材341及びモータ固定板362は差し込み部364aに外嵌される。 Of those supported by the cushioning member 364, the main body member 361 is externally fitted to the root portion 364b, and the main body member 341 and the motor fixing plate 362 are externally fitted to the insertion portion 364a.

振動装置366は、電磁力により一対の部材を直線方向に近接離反させる態様で互いに動作させる装置であって、モータ固定板362に締結固定されると共に周囲に銅線が巻き付けられた筒状部材であるボビン部材366aと、そのボビン部材366aの内周面よりも外径が小径とされる円筒およびボビン部材366aの外周面よりも内径が大径とされる円筒が同軸で配置され円板形状の板で連結される押し付け部材366b(図19参照)と、を主に備える。 The vibrating device 366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move close to each other in a linear direction by an electromagnetic force, and is a cylindrical member that is fastened and fixed to a motor fixing plate 362 and has a copper wire wound around it. A disc-shaped bobbin member 366a, a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a, and a cylinder having an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a are arranged coaxially. It mainly includes a pressing member 366b (see FIG. 19) connected by a plate.

押し付け部材366bは、内側の円筒が軸心方向で極性が変化する磁性体材料から形成される。 The pressing member 366b is formed of a magnetic material whose inner cylinder changes polarity in the axial direction.

ねじりバネSP2は、一方の端部が本体部材341に係止され、他方の端部がモータ固定板362に係止される。本実施形態では、ねじりバネSP2により、首振り部材360が、本体部材341に対して倒れる方向に付勢される。 One end of the torsion spring SP2 is locked to the main body member 341, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP2 urges the swing member 360 in the direction of tilting with respect to the main body member 341.

図13は、首振り操作部材310の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図13では、背面側枠部材311の図示が省略される。図13に示すように、首振り操作部材310は、背面側枠部材311(図11参照)と、その背面側枠部材311が締結固定されると共に首振り部材360の固定板部361eに締結固定される円環板状の中間枠部材312と、その中間枠部材312との位相が一致された状態で中間枠部材312の正面側に締結固定される振動案内部材313と、その振動案内部材313から凸設される導光部材313aが挿通されると共に中心部に孔を有さない円盤形状に形成される振動部材314と、その振動部材314の中央部に固定される振動コイルスプリングCS1を挟んで振動部材314と対向配置されるスイッチ部材315と、そのスイッチ部材315の正面側から外嵌される中間部材316と、その中間部材316を背面側に収容すると共に振動部材314に外嵌支持されるレンズ部材317と、を主に備える。 FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 310. Note that in FIG. 13, the back side frame member 311 is not shown. As shown in FIG. 13, the swing operation member 310 is fastened and fixed to the back side frame member 311 (see FIG. 11) and the back side frame member 311 and to the fixing plate portion 361e of the swing member 360. A vibration guide member 313 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the intermediate frame member 312 in a state where the annular plate-shaped intermediate frame member 312 and the intermediate frame member 312 are in phase with each other, and the vibration guide member 313. A vibrating member 314 formed in a disk shape having no hole in the center and a vibrating coil spring CS1 fixed to the central portion of the vibrating member 314 are sandwiched. The switch member 315 which is arranged to face the vibrating member 314, the intermediate member 316 which is externally fitted from the front side of the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 are housed on the back side and are externally supported by the vibrating member 314. The lens member 317 is mainly provided.

上述した構成により、首振り操作部材310は、中間枠部材312及び振動案内部材313が互いに固定され、振動部材314及びレンズ部材317が互いに固定され、スイッチ部材315及び中間部材316が互いに固定される。 According to the above-described configuration, in the swing operation member 310, the intermediate frame member 312 and the vibration guide member 313 are fixed to each other, the vibration member 314 and the lens member 317 are fixed to each other, and the switch member 315 and the intermediate member 316 are fixed to each other. ..

中間枠部材312は、円環板形状の底部312aと、その底部312aの外周から全周に亘って前方に延設される側壁部312bと、底部312aの形成する面に垂直な方向で正面側に立設される複数の円柱形状のスイッチ支持棒312cと、底部312aの背面側上部に前後方向に移動可能に配設される裏ボタン部材312dと、を主に備える。 The intermediate frame member 312 has a ring-shaped bottom portion 312a, a side wall portion 312b extending forward from the outer circumference of the bottom portion 312a over the entire circumference, and a front side in a direction perpendicular to the surface formed by the bottom portion 312a. Mainly includes a plurality of cylindrical switch support rods 312c erected in the above, and a back button member 312d movably arranged on the upper part of the back surface side of the bottom portion 312a in the front-rear direction.

底部312aは、図13における上下左右の端部に径方向から中心側へ向けて凹設される矩形状の凹設部312a1を備える。 The bottom portion 312a includes a rectangular recessed portion 312a1 that is recessed from the radial direction toward the center side at the top, bottom, left, and right ends of FIG.

凹設部312a1は、スイッチ部材315の腕部315fが挿通される部分であって、スイッチ部材315の腕部315fの先端部が側壁部312bに係止される(図21(a)参照)ことで、スイッチ部材315が中間枠部材312に対して引き抜き不能に配設される。 The recessed portion 312a1 is a portion through which the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is inserted, and the tip end portion of the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is locked to the side wall portion 312b (see FIG. 21A). Therefore, the switch member 315 is arranged so as not to be pulled out with respect to the intermediate frame member 312.

スイッチ支持棒312cは、振動案内部材313、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315に共通で挿通される部材である。これにより、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315の前後方向(各部材の積層方向)の動作時に、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315が動作方向に傾くことを防止することができる。そのため、例えば、レンズ部材317に前後方向と傾斜した方向から力がかけられた場合にも、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作に抵抗が生じることを抑制でき、押し込み操作の操作性を向上させることができる。また、振動部材314が振動装置366により振動する場合に、振動部材314が傾くことを抑制することができる。 The switch support rod 312c is a member that is commonly inserted into the vibration guide member 313, the vibration member 314, and the switch member 315. As a result, it is possible to prevent the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 from tilting in the operating direction when the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (stacking direction of each member). Therefore, for example, even when a force is applied to the lens member 317 from the front-rear direction and the inclined direction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of resistance in the pushing operation of the lens member 317, and it is possible to improve the operability of the pushing operation. .. Further, when the vibrating member 314 is vibrated by the vibrating device 366, the tilting of the vibrating member 314 can be suppressed.

なお、ここで振動装置366の振動とは、部材が細かに振るえる振動や、部材が直線方向に移動し移動終端で他の部材に衝突して戻ってくることを繰り返す往復動作などを意味する。 Here, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 means a vibration in which the member vibrates finely, a reciprocating operation in which the member moves in a linear direction, collides with another member at the end of the movement, and returns.

裏ボタン部材312dは、底部312aとの間に介設されるコイルスプリングにより普段は背面側に張り出された位置に配置され、正面側の中央部に板状の検出片312d1を備える。 The back button member 312d is usually arranged at a position overhanging to the back side by a coil spring interposed between the back button member 312d and includes a plate-shaped detection piece 312d1 at the center on the front side.

振動案内部材313は、正面側に複数(本実施形態では8本)立設される導光部材313aと、スイッチ支持棒312cが挿通される複数の挿通孔313bと、下端部において正面側に配設されるフォトカプラ形式の第1センサ部材313cと、上端部において背面側に配設されるフォトカプラ形式の第2センサ部材313dと、を主に備える。 The vibration guide members 313 are arranged on the front side at the lower end, with a plurality of light guide members 313a (8 in this embodiment) erected on the front side, a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which the switch support rods 312c are inserted, and a lower end portion. It mainly includes a photocoupler type first sensor member 313c to be provided, and a photocoupler type second sensor member 313d arranged on the back side at the upper end portion.

導光部材313aは、背面側にLED等の発光部材が配設される透明部材である。導光部材313aは、振動部材314、スイッチ部材315及び中間部材316に挿通されることで、先端部がレンズ部材317に対して対向配置(近接配置)される。そのため、発光部材から照射される光をレンズ部材317付近まで導くことができ、レンズ部材317を発光させる効果を向上させることができる。 The light guide member 313a is a transparent member in which a light emitting member such as an LED is arranged on the back surface side. The light guide member 313a is inserted into the vibrating member 314, the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 so that the tip end portion thereof is arranged (closely arranged) with respect to the lens member 317. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting member can be guided to the vicinity of the lens member 317, and the effect of causing the lens member 317 to emit light can be improved.

また、上述したように、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315の前後方向(各部材の積層方向)の動作時に、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315が動作方向に傾くことが防止されるので、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315が傾くことで導光部材313aと当接し、導光部材313aが破損することを抑制することができる。 Further, as described above, when the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (stacking direction of each member), the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are prevented from being tilted in the operating direction. And when the switch member 315 is tilted, it comes into contact with the light guide member 313a, and it is possible to prevent the light guide member 313a from being damaged.

第1センサ部材313cは、スイッチ部材315に配設される検出片315g(図21(a)参照)が隙間を通過したことを検出し、スイッチ部材315の配置を検出する検出部材である。 The first sensor member 313c is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 315g (see FIG. 21A) arranged on the switch member 315 has passed through the gap and detects the arrangement of the switch member 315.

第2センサ部材313dは、検出片312d1が隙間を通過したことを検出し、後述する首振り操作部材310の首振りの姿勢を検出する検出部材である。 The second sensor member 313d is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 312d1 has passed through the gap and detects the swinging posture of the swinging operation member 310, which will be described later.

振動部材314は、断面の外径形状が底部312aと略同一形状で形成されると共に中央部に孔が開口形成されない略円板形状の本体部314aと、スイッチ支持棒312cが挿通される複数(本実施形態では4箇所)のスイッチ支持孔314bと、本体部314aの中央部から正面側に円筒形状に凸設され振動コイルスプリングCS1が巻き付け支持される中央筒状部314cと、スイッチ支持棒312cの先端部から押し込みコイルスプリングCS2に続いて挿通されるスイッチ受け部材314dと、本体部314aの下部において前後方向に第1センサ部材313cを収容可能な形状で穿設されるセンサ収容孔314eと、導光部材313aを挿通可能とされる導光孔314fと、を主に備える。 The vibrating member 314 has a substantially disk-shaped main body 314a having a cross-sectional outer diameter shape substantially the same as that of the bottom portion 312a and having no hole formed in the central portion, and a plurality of vibrating members 314 through which the switch support rod 312c is inserted. Switch support holes 314b (4 locations in this embodiment), a central tubular portion 314c that is projected in a cylindrical shape from the center of the main body 314a to the front side and around which the vibration coil spring CS1 is wound and supported, and a switch support rod 312c. A switch receiving member 314d inserted following the push-in coil spring CS2 from the tip of the sensor, and a sensor accommodating hole 314e formed in a shape capable of accommodating the first sensor member 313c in the front-rear direction at the lower part of the main body 314a. It mainly includes a light guide hole 314f through which a light guide member 313a can be inserted.

なお、振動コイルスプリングCS1に比較して、押し込みコイルスプリングCS2は、弾性係数が小さくされる。 The elastic modulus of the push-in coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the vibration coil spring CS1.

本体部314aは、外形形状が底部312aと略同一形状で形成されるので、スイッチ部材315の腕部315fを外周部分に4箇所形成される凹設部を通して挿通させることができる。 Since the main body portion 314a is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the bottom portion 312a, the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 can be inserted through the recessed portions formed at four locations on the outer peripheral portion.

スイッチ受け部材314dは、正面側にスイッチ支持孔314bよりも大径とされる大径部314d1が形成される円筒部材であって、正面側からスイッチ支持孔314bに挿通されることで、大径部314d1がスイッチ支持孔314bに係止される。なお押し込みコイルスプリングCS2は、外径がスイッチ支持孔314bよりも小径で形成される。 The switch receiving member 314d is a cylindrical member having a large diameter portion 314d1 formed on the front side having a diameter larger than that of the switch support hole 314b, and is inserted into the switch support hole 314b from the front side to have a large diameter. The portion 314d1 is locked in the switch support hole 314b. The push-in coil spring CS2 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the switch support hole 314b.

スイッチ部材315は、円板形状に形成される本体部315aと、その本体部315aの中央部から正面側(図13左側)へ向けてカップ上に張出形成されるバネ受け部315bと、スイッチ支持棒312cが挿通可能とされるスイッチ支持孔315cと、導光部材313aを挿通可能に形成される導光孔315dと、上下中央(図13の上下中央)に配置される一対のスイッチ受け部材314dに挿通される案内軸315eと、凹設部312a1に挿入され係止される腕部315fと、第1センサ部材313cの隙間を通過可能とされると共に本体部315aの下部(図13下側)において背面側に凸設される板状の検出片315gと、を主に備える。 The switch member 315 includes a main body portion 315a formed in a disk shape, a spring receiving portion 315b formed overhanging the cup from the central portion of the main body portion 315a toward the front side (left side in FIG. 13), and a switch. A switch support hole 315c through which the support rod 312c can be inserted, a light guide hole 315d formed through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and a pair of switch receiving members arranged at the upper and lower centers (upper and lower centers in FIG. 13). It is possible to pass through the gap between the guide shaft 315e inserted through the 314d, the arm portion 315f inserted into the recessed portion 312a1 and locked, and the first sensor member 313c, and the lower part of the main body portion 315a (lower side in FIG. 13). ), The plate-shaped detection piece 315 g, which is projected on the back surface side, is mainly provided.

スイッチ支持孔315cは、スイッチ支持棒312cの外径よりも大きな径で形成され、スイッチ受け部材314dの大径部314d1の外径よりも小さな径で形成される。これにより、スイッチ部材315が振動部材314に近接する方向に移動する場合に、大径部314d1でスイッチ部材315を支えることができる。 The switch support hole 315c is formed with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the switch support rod 312c, and is formed with a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the large diameter portion 314d1 of the switch receiving member 314d. As a result, when the switch member 315 moves in a direction close to the vibrating member 314, the switch member 315 can be supported by the large diameter portion 314d1.

案内軸315eは、スイッチ受け部材314dに挿通されるので、振動部材314に対するスイッチ部材315の傾きを抑制することができる。 Since the guide shaft 315e is inserted through the switch receiving member 314d, the inclination of the switch member 315 with respect to the vibrating member 314 can be suppressed.

中間部材316は、導光部材313aを挿通可能とされる導光孔316aを備え、スイッチ部材315に相対回転不能に外嵌固定される。 The intermediate member 316 is provided with a light guide hole 316a through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and is externally fitted and fixed to the switch member 315 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

図14(a)は、偏心カム部材333の正面図であり、図14(b)は、偏心カム部材333の底面図であり、図14(c)は、図14(a)のXIVc−XIVc線における偏心カム部材333の断面図である。 14 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 333, FIG. 14 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 333, and FIG. 14 (c) is the XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the eccentric cam member 333 in line.

図14に示すように、偏心カム部材333は、回転ギアとして形成される本体部333aと、その本体部333aの回転軸と同軸に配設される筒状の筒状部333bと、その筒状部333bに内接する円に沿って軸方向に延設され筒状部333bより若干短く形成されると共に内部が中空とされるカム部333cと、筒状部333bの先端部に軸方向に沿って切り欠かれる一対の切り欠き333dと、筒状部333bとカム部333cとを双方の軸を通る方向で連結する板状のリブ部333eと、本体部333aのギア部分を覆う円板形状の傘部333fと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 14, the eccentric cam member 333 includes a main body 333a formed as a rotary gear, a tubular tubular portion 333b disposed coaxially with the rotation axis of the main body 333a, and a tubular portion 333b thereof. A cam portion 333c extending in the axial direction along a circle inscribed in the portion 333b and formed slightly shorter than the tubular portion 333b and having a hollow inside, and a cam portion 333c extending in the axial direction along the tip of the tubular portion 333b. A pair of notches 333d to be cut out, a plate-shaped rib portion 333e connecting the tubular portion 333b and the cam portion 333c in the direction passing through both axes, and a disk-shaped umbrella covering the gear portion of the main body portion 333a. Mainly includes a portion 333f.

本体部333a及びカム部333cは、軸方向にずれて(2層構造で)配置される。カム部333cは、中空とされるので、レバー部材340に当接した場合に、カム部333cが内側に若干撓む(弾性変形する)ことによって衝撃を吸収することができる。 The main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c are arranged so as to be displaced in the axial direction (in a two-layer structure). Since the cam portion 333c is hollow, when it comes into contact with the lever member 340, the cam portion 333c slightly bends inward (elastically deforms) to absorb the impact.

カム部333cは、外形が円形で形成される中空の環状部分であって、本体部333aに偏心して固定される。 The cam portion 333c is a hollow annular portion having a circular outer shape, and is eccentrically fixed to the main body portion 333a.

切り欠き333dは、位相検出部材334(図15参照)との相対的な位相を不変とするためのものであり、対向配置される一対の切り欠きが周方向の長さを違えて形成されることで、位相検出部材334を180度反転して組み付けることを防止することができる。 The notch 333d is for making the phase relative to the phase detection member 334 (see FIG. 15) invariant, and a pair of notches arranged to face each other are formed having different lengths in the circumferential direction. This makes it possible to prevent the phase detection member 334 from being assembled by reversing it by 180 degrees.

リブ部333eが、カム部333cの筒状部333bから最も離間する位置と筒状部333bとを連結する態様で配設されることで、中空形成されるカム部333cの内で最も強度的に弱くなる部分の強度を向上させることができる。これにより、カム部333cが破損することを抑制することができる。 The rib portion 333e is arranged in such a manner that the position farthest from the tubular portion 333b of the cam portion 333c and the tubular portion 333b are connected to each other, so that the strength of the hollow cam portion 333c is the highest. The strength of the weakened part can be improved. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam portion 333c from being damaged.

なお、リブ部333eは、長手方向の途中で部分的に分断されても良い。これにより、カム部333cの撓み(弾性変形)の度合いが小さい場合にはリブ部333eに荷重をかけず、カム部333cの撓み(弾性変形)の度合いが大きい場合にのみリブ部333eの分断された部分が互いに当接するようにすることができる。これにより、リブ部333eが非当接の間(カム部333cの撓み(弾性変形)の度合いが小さい場合)にはリブ部333eが疲労することを抑制できるので、リブ部333eの耐久性を向上させることができる。 The rib portion 333e may be partially divided in the middle of the longitudinal direction. As a result, when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small, no load is applied to the rib portion 333e, and the rib portion 333e is divided only when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is large. The portions can be brought into contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to suppress fatigue of the rib portion 333e while the rib portion 333e is not in contact (when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small), so that the durability of the rib portion 333e is improved. Can be made to.

図15(a)は、位相検出部材334の正面図であり、図15(b)は、位相検出部材334の底面図であり、図15(c)は、図15(a)のXVc−XVc線における位相検出部材334の断面図である。なお、図15(c)では、組立状態(図17(a)参照)における環状凸部332i及び偏心カム軸331d2が想像線で図示される。 15 (a) is a front view of the phase detection member 334, FIG. 15 (b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member 334, and FIG. 15 (c) is XVc-XVc of FIG. 15 (a). It is sectional drawing of the phase detection member 334 in line. In FIG. 15C, the annular convex portion 332i and the eccentric camshaft 331d2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17A) are illustrated by imaginary lines.

図15に示すように、位相検出部材334は途中で径が拡径される筒状に形成され、偏心カム軸331d2(図10参照)に外嵌軸支される軸支部334aと、その軸支部334aに連設され正面側(図15(c)上方)へ向かうほど拡径される(2段階で拡径される)拡径部334bと、その拡径部334bの正面側端部から軸方向に延設される板状の検出片334cと、切り欠き333dに合致する形状の回り止め突起334dと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 15, the phase detection member 334 is formed in a tubular shape whose diameter is expanded in the middle, and is externally fitted to the eccentric camshaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10). The shaft support portion 334a and the shaft support portion thereof. A diameter-expanded portion 334b that is connected to 334a and whose diameter is increased toward the front side (upper in FIG. 15C) (the diameter is expanded in two steps) and the axial direction from the front end of the diameter-expanded portion 334b. 334c, which is a plate-shaped detection piece, and 334d, which has a shape corresponding to the notch 333d, are mainly provided.

拡径部334bは、右カバー部材332の内面側に環状に凸設される環状凸部332i(図10参照)に外嵌される部分である。偏心カム軸331d2を環状凸部332iの内側面で支持し、環状凸部332iの外側面で位相検出部材334の拡径部334bを内周側から支持することで、偏心カム軸331d2を強固に支持し、偏心カム軸331d2が径方向から荷重を受けた場合に軸ずれすることを抑制することができる。 The enlarged diameter portion 334b is a portion that is externally fitted to the annular convex portion 332i (see FIG. 10) that is annularly projected on the inner surface side of the right cover member 332. By supporting the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 on the inner surface of the annular convex portion 332i and supporting the enlarged diameter portion 334b of the phase detection member 334 from the inner peripheral side on the outer surface of the annular convex portion 332i, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is firmly supported. It can be supported and the eccentric camshaft 331d2 can be prevented from being displaced when a load is applied from the radial direction.

検出片334cは、第3センサ部材325a3(図9参照)の隙間を通過可能とされる。検出片334cが第3センサ部材325a3の隙間を通過すると、回り止め突起334dと切り欠き333dとが噛み合うことで位相検出部材334と相対的な位相が不変とされる偏心カム部材333の姿勢を検出することができる。 The detection piece 334c is allowed to pass through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9). When the detection piece 334c passes through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3, the posture of the eccentric cam member 333 whose phase relative to the phase detection member 334 is invariant is detected by meshing the detent projection 334d and the notch 333d. can do.

図16(a)は、レバー部材340の正面図であり、図16(b)は、図16(a)の矢印XVIb方向視におけるレバー部材340の側面図であり、図16(c)は、図16(a)の矢印XVIb方向視におけるレバー部材340の上面図である。 16 (a) is a front view of the lever member 340, FIG. 16 (b) is a side view of the lever member 340 in the direction of arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a), and FIG. 16 (c) is a side view of the lever member 340. 16 is a top view of the lever member 340 in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG. 16A.

図16(a)に示すように、軸孔341bに比較して、軸孔341eが、本体部材341の長手方向に向いた直線であって軸孔341bを通る直線よりも下方(図16(a)下方)に配置される。これによって、首振り部材360側で生じる荷重がレバー部材340の長手方向に沿って与えられることを抑制することができ、荷重をレバー部材340の回転方向に向けることができる。 As shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft hole 341e is a straight line oriented in the longitudinal direction of the main body member 341 and lower than the straight line passing through the shaft hole 341b as compared with the shaft hole 341b (FIG. 16A). ) Below). As a result, it is possible to suppress the load generated on the swing member 360 side from being applied along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340, and the load can be directed in the rotation direction of the lever member 340.

図16(b)に示すように、本体部材341は断面コ字状に形成され、そのコ字状の開放側に剥離部材350が配設される。嵩上げ部材353や磁石部材354と本体部材341との間には若干の隙間が空けられる。 As shown in FIG. 16B, the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section, and the peeling member 350 is arranged on the U-shaped open side. There is a slight gap between the raising member 353 or the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341.

これにより、剥離部材350が本体部材341に固定されている場合は、本体部材341のコ字状の開放側(図16(b)下方)を剥離部材350で埋めることで本体部材341の強度を確保することができる。 As a result, when the peeling member 350 is fixed to the main body member 341, the strength of the main body member 341 is increased by filling the U-shaped open side (lower side of FIG. 16B) of the main body member 341 with the peeling member 350. Can be secured.

また、剥離部材350が本体部材341に固定された状態から引きはがされ始める場合や、その引きはがされた状態(図23(a)参照)から剥離部材350が本体部材341に近接する方向へ移動する場合の移動抵抗を上昇させることができる。 Further, when the peeling member 350 starts to be peeled off from the state fixed to the main body member 341, or when the peeling member 350 approaches the main body member 341 from the peeled state (see FIG. 23A). It is possible to increase the movement resistance when moving to.

これにより、本体部材341に対して剥離部材350が相対移動する際の移動抵抗を上昇させることができ、例えば、レバー部材340が揺動を規制される状態(図22(a)参照)でレバー部材340が過荷重を受け剥離部材350が本体部材341から引きはがされた場合に、かけられていた荷重の勢いで本体部材341が高速で揺動することを防止することができる。 As a result, the movement resistance when the peeling member 350 moves relative to the main body member 341 can be increased. For example, the lever member 340 is restricted from swinging (see FIG. 22A). When the member 340 is overloaded and the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, it is possible to prevent the main body member 341 from swinging at high speed due to the force of the applied load.

図17(a)は、操作デバイス300の正面図であり、図17(b)は、図17(a)の矢印XVIIb方向視における操作デバイス300の側面図である。なお、図17では、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態(遊技者に押し下げ操作された状態)が図示される。 FIG. 17 (a) is a front view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 17 (b) is a side view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position (a state in which the player pushes down the swing operation member 310).

図18(a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図であり、図18(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIb−XVIIIb線における操作デバイス300の部分断面図であり、図18(c)は、図17(a)のXVIIIc−XVIIIc線における操作デバイス300の部分断面図である。また、図19は、図18(a)の首振り操作部材310の部分拡大図である。なお、図18(b)及び図18(c)は図18(a)よりも若干拡大してあり、図19では、首振り操作部材310の振動装置366の中心軸が上下方向に向けられた状態が図示される。 18 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 18 (b) is a portion of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 18 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). Further, FIG. 19 is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member 310 of FIG. 18A. 18 (b) and 18 (c) are slightly enlarged from FIG. 18 (a), and in FIG. 19, the central axis of the vibrating device 366 of the swing operation member 310 is oriented in the vertical direction. The state is illustrated.

図18(a)に示すように、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態でロック部材336が固定側に配置されると、剥離部材350の下側側面に偏心カム部材333が当接され、上側側面にロック部材336が当接されることで、剥離部材350が両方向に揺動することを防止されるので、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に固定される。 As shown in FIG. 18A, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side while the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the eccentric cam member 333 hits the lower side surface of the release member 350. When the lock member 336 is brought into contact with the upper side surface, the release member 350 is prevented from swinging in both directions, so that the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position.

本実施形態のように、ロック部材336がロック軸331d3を中心に揺動され、そのロック部材336が剥離部材350の揺動をせき止める部分の、剥離部材350を挟んで反対側に偏心カム部材333が配置される場合、剥離部材350がロック部材336に揺動をせき止められる状態におけるロック部材336の姿勢を設計的に調整することができる。 As in the present embodiment, the lock member 336 is swung around the lock shaft 331d3, and the eccentric cam member 333 is located on the opposite side of the part where the lock member 336 stops the swing of the peeling member 350 with the peeling member 350 in between. When is arranged, the posture of the lock member 336 in a state where the release member 350 is dampened by the lock member 336 can be adjusted in a design manner.

本実施形態では、ロック部材336の回転軸と剥離部材350の上側側面との距離が最も近づくとき、即ち、偏心カム部材333のカム部333cが剥離部材350の反対側に配置され筒状部333bが剥離部材350と当接される状態においてのみロック部材336を剥離部材350の上面に当接させることができる。 In the present embodiment, when the distance between the rotation shaft of the lock member 336 and the upper side surface of the release member 350 is closest, that is, the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the opposite side of the release member 350 and the tubular portion 333b. The lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the peeling member 350 only when is in contact with the peeling member 350.

言い換えれば、ロック部材336の本体部336aの長さが、筒状部333bに剥離部材350が当接した状態で剥離部材350の上側側面にL字の鉤部が当接する長さに形成される。 In other words, the length of the main body portion 336a of the lock member 336 is formed so that the L-shaped hook portion abuts on the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 in a state where the peeling member 350 abuts on the tubular portion 333b. ..

そのため、ロック部材336が剥離部材350の上側側面に当接され、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置で固定された状態においては、必ず偏心カム部材333の筒状部333bが剥離部材350の下側の側面に当接される。従って、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置で固定された状態から、首振り操作部材310が上向きに移動する方向に過荷重がかけられた場合に、偏心カム部材333のカム部333cに過荷重がかけられることを防止することができ、偏心カム部材333が破損することを抑制することができる。 Therefore, when the lock member 336 is in contact with the upper side surface of the release member 350 and the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position, the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 is always on the lower side of the release member 350. Is abutted on the side of. Therefore, when an overload is applied in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 moves upward from the state where the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position, the overload is applied to the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333. It is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged, and it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

図18(b)に示すように、ギアダンパ受け部材342のギア部342bと、ギアダンパ受け部材342の背面側に配置されるギアダンパ338とが歯合される。ギアダンパ338は、後述するように、レバー部材340の揺動に対する粘性抵抗を生じる役割と、レバー部材340が後方へ向けて押し込む荷重を受けた場合に、その荷重に抵抗する抵抗力を発生させる役割を合わせ持つ。 As shown in FIG. 18B, the gear portion 342b of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the gear damper 338 arranged on the back surface side of the gear damper receiving member 342 are meshed with each other. As will be described later, the gear damper 338 has a role of generating a viscous resistance against the swing of the lever member 340 and a role of generating a resistance force to resist the load when the lever member 340 receives a load of pushing backward. Have a combination.

ギアダンパ338を配設することにより、例えば、レバー部材340の本体部材341が剥離部材350から引きはがされた状態において、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を高速で操作する場合の抵抗は、大きくすることができ、一方で、レバー部材340がねじりバネSP1の付勢力により起き上がる場合のように速度が小さい場合の抵抗は、小さくすることができる。 By disposing the gear damper 338, for example, when the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the resistance when the player operates the swing operation member 310 at high speed is large. On the other hand, the resistance when the speed is low, such as when the lever member 340 rises due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1, can be reduced.

これにより、揺動速度によらず、遊技者の高速の操作に対応した大きな抵抗を生じる場合に比較して、ねじりバネSP1の付勢力を小さく設定でき、ねじりバネSP1の設計自由度を向上させることができる。 As a result, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be set smaller than in the case where a large resistance corresponding to the player's high-speed operation is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the degree of freedom in designing the torsion spring SP1 is improved. be able to.

図18(c)に示すように、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態において、センサ検出片343bが第2センサ部材325a2の隙間に配置されると共に、位相検出部材334の検出片334cが第3センサ部材325a3の隙間に配置される。即ち、センサ検出片343bが第2センサ部材325a2の隙間に配置されると共に、位相検出部材334の検出片334cが第3センサ部材325a3の隙間に配置される状態においてのみ、ロック部材336を揺動させることで剥離部材350の上側側面にロック部材336を当接させることが可能となる。 As shown in FIG. 18C, in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2, and the detection piece of the phase detection member 334 is arranged. The 334c is arranged in the gap of the third sensor member 325a3. That is, the lock member 336 is swung only when the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 and the detection piece 334c of the phase detection member 334 is arranged in the gap of the third sensor member 325a3. By doing so, the lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper side surface of the peeling member 350.

また、後述するように、剥離部材350が本体部材341から引きはがされる場合には、第2センサ部材325a2の隙間からセンサ検出片343bが移動されることになる。そのため、ロック部材336が図18(a)の状態から揺動していないこと(センサ部材331fで検出)と、第2センサ部材325a2の隙間からセンサ検出片343bが移動されることとを検出することにより、剥離部材350が本体部材341から引きはがされたことを検出することができる。 Further, as will be described later, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2. Therefore, it is detected that the lock member 336 does not swing from the state of FIG. 18A (detected by the sensor member 331f) and that the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2. Thereby, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

図20は、図17(b)のXX−XX線における首振り操作部材310の断面図である。なお、背面側枠部材311の図示が省略される。図20に示すように、裏ボタン部材312dは中間枠部材312の背面側に配設され、コイルスプリングで中間枠部材312から離反する方向へ付勢されるので、押し込み荷重(図20上方へ向けた荷重)がかけられない状態においては検出片312d1が第2センサ部材313dから離間される。一方で、裏ボタン部材312dに押し込み荷重(図20上方へ向けた荷重)が与えられ、検出片312d1が第2センサ部材313dの隙間に挿通されるまで裏ボタン部材312dが移動されることで、裏ボタン部材312dが押し込まれたことを検出することができる。 FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 in line XX-XX of FIG. 17 (b). The illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 20, the back button member 312d is arranged on the back side of the intermediate frame member 312 and is urged by the coil spring in the direction away from the intermediate frame member 312, so that the pushing load (directed upward in FIG. 20). The detection piece 312d1 is separated from the second sensor member 313d in a state where the load is not applied. On the other hand, a pushing load (load directed upward in FIG. 20) is applied to the back button member 312d, and the back button member 312d is moved until the detection piece 312d1 is inserted into the gap of the second sensor member 313d. It can be detected that the back button member 312d has been pushed.

図21(a)及び図21(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における首振り操作部材310及びレバー部材340の部分断面図である。なお、図21(a)では、図18(a)及び図19の状態から振動装置366が動作して上方へ向けて負荷が生じた状態が図示され図21(b)では、図18(a)及び図19の状態からレンズ部材317が押し込み操作された状態が図示される。 21 (a) and 21 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 21 (a) shows a state in which the vibrating device 366 operates from the states of FIGS. 18 (a) and 19 and a load is generated upward, and FIG. 21 (b) shows FIG. 18 (a). ) And the state in which the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 19 is shown.

上述したように、スイッチ部材315は中間枠部材312から引き抜き不能に係止され、スイッチ部材315と中間枠部材312との間に振動部材314が介設され、その振動部材314は振動コイルスプリングCS1により中間枠部材312側(図21(a)下方)へ押し付けられる。 As described above, the switch member 315 is locked from the intermediate frame member 312 so as not to be pulled out, and the vibrating member 314 is interposed between the switch member 315 and the intermediate frame member 312, and the vibrating member 314 is the vibrating coil spring CS1. Is pressed toward the intermediate frame member 312 side (downward in FIG. 21A).

この状態から、振動装置366のボビン部材366aに巻かれる銅線(図示せず)に電流が流され生じる電磁力によって押し付け部材366bが振動部材314に押し付けられると、振動部材314がスイッチ部材315に押し付けられる方向に移動する。これにより、振動部材314に外嵌固定されるレンズ部材317が(図21(a)上方へ)移動する。この状態において、レンズ部材317は段部317aがスイッチ部材315に当接されるので、レンズ部材317を押し込み操作することが困難となる(固くなる、押し込み不能状態)。 From this state, when the pressing member 366b is pressed against the vibrating member 314 by the electromagnetic force generated by the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibrating device 366, the vibrating member 314 is pressed against the switch member 315. Move in the direction of being pressed. As a result, the lens member 317, which is externally fitted and fixed to the vibrating member 314, moves (upward in FIG. 21A). In this state, since the step portion 317a of the lens member 317 is brought into contact with the switch member 315, it becomes difficult to push the lens member 317 (hardened, unable to push).

一方、振動部材314がレンズ部材317から離反されると、遊技者はレンズ部材317を押し込み可能となる(押し込み可能状態)。そのため、遊技者がレンズ部材317を通して入力操作するタイミングを振動部材314の駆動により指定することができる。 On the other hand, when the vibrating member 314 is separated from the lens member 317, the player can push the lens member 317 (pushable state). Therefore, the timing at which the player performs an input operation through the lens member 317 can be specified by driving the vibration member 314.

また、レンズ部材317を押し込み可能な押し込み可能状態と、レンズ部材317が変位不能に固定され押し込み不能である押し込み不能状態とが構成されるので、遊技者の行う操作によってレバー部材340が受ける影響をパチンコ機10(図1参照)側で切替ることができる。 Further, since the lens member 317 is configured to be in a pushable state in which the lens member 317 can be pushed in and a pushable state in which the lens member 317 is immovably fixed and cannot be pushed in, the lever member 340 is affected by the operation performed by the player. It can be switched on the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) side.

例えば、遊技者がレンズ部材317を断続的に繰り返し押し込む(連打する)場合、レンズ部材317が押し込まれた状態から戻る際に、その反作用で、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材333(図18(a)参照)へ近接する方向に首振り操作部材310が負荷を受ける。そのため、偏心カム部材333が破損する恐れがある。 For example, when the player repeatedly pushes (continuously hits) the lens member 317 intermittently, when the lens member 317 returns from the pushed state, the lever member 340 reacts to the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. 18 (a). ), The swing operation member 310 receives a load in a direction approaching). Therefore, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

一方、押し込み不能状態とされる場合、遊技者の押し込み操作に対して首振り操作部材310全体が押し下げられるので、それによりレバー部材340も偏心カム部材333(図18(a)参照)から離反する方向に移動する。従って、遊技者がレンズ部材317を連打しても、首振り操作部材310が上方へ付勢力により戻ることにより偏心カム部材333とレバー部材340とが衝突するという事態を抑制することができる。 On the other hand, when the push-in is not possible, the entire swing operation member 310 is pushed down in response to the push-in operation of the player, so that the lever member 340 also separates from the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 18A). Move in the direction. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the lens member 317, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 collide with each other due to the swinging operation member 310 returning upward due to the urging force.

なお、押し込み不能状態を構成する方法としては、鉤状の爪でレンズ部材317を係止する方法や、直線的な往復運動をするボイスコイルモータなどの振動装置366によりレンズ部材317を終端位置まで張り出させる(一方向に負荷をかけ続ける)方法等が例示される。ボイスコイルモータなどの振動装置366によりレンズ部材317を終端位置まで張り出させる方法によれば、その振動装置366によってレンズ部材317を振動させることと、レンズ部材317を押し込み不能状態とすることとの両方の作用を生じさせることができる。 As a method of configuring the non-pushable state, the lens member 317 is locked with a hook-shaped claw, or the lens member 317 is moved to the terminal position by a vibrating device 366 such as a voice coil motor that reciprocates linearly. An example is a method of projecting (continuing to apply a load in one direction). According to the method of projecting the lens member 317 to the terminal position by a vibrating device 366 such as a voice coil motor, the vibrating device 366 vibrates the lens member 317 and makes the lens member 317 in an inaccessible state. Both effects can occur.

振動装置366のボビン部材366aに巻かれる銅線(図示せず)に流す電流の向きを反転させることで押し付け部材366bの移動方向を反転させることができる。ここで、振動部材314は電磁力の力で引かれるわけでは無いので、移動速度が遅くなる恐れがあるが、本実施形態では、振動コイルスプリングCS1の弾性回復力により振動部材314が押し付け部材366bに追従して、図21(b)下方へ移動する。 By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibrating device 366, the moving direction of the pressing member 366b can be reversed. Here, since the vibrating member 314 is not pulled by the force of electromagnetic force, the moving speed may be slowed down. However, in the present embodiment, the vibrating member 314 is pressed against the pressing member 366b by the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1. 21 (b) moves downward in accordance with.

これにより、押し付け部材366bと振動部材314とを締結固定することなく、レンズ部材317の振動を高速化することができる。 As a result, the vibration of the lens member 317 can be increased in speed without fastening and fixing the pressing member 366b and the vibration member 314.

本実施形態では、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作時に振動コイルスプリングCS1の弾性回復力が抵抗となってかかることを防止することができる。詳述すると、図21(b)に示すように、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作時には、レンズ部材317の背面側に形成される段部317aがスイッチ部材315の腕部315fに当接することでレンズ部材317及び振動部材314がスイッチ部材315と一体で移動する。そのため、振動コイルスプリングCS1の縮み具合が変化しないため、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作時に振動コイルスプリングCS1の弾性回復力が抵抗となってかかることを防止することができる。 In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance during the pushing operation of the lens member 317. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21B, when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the step portion 317a formed on the back surface side of the lens member 317 comes into contact with the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315, so that the lens member The 317 and the vibrating member 314 move integrally with the switch member 315. Therefore, since the degree of contraction of the vibrating coil spring CS1 does not change, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance during the pushing operation of the lens member 317.

なお、レンズ部材317を押し込み操作したあとは、スイッチ部材315の下側側面に当接されるスイッチ受け部材314d(図13参照)が押し込みコイルスプリングCS2の弾性回復力によりスイッチ部材315を押し上げるので、レンズ部材317は押し込み前の位置(図18(a)参照)に復帰する。 After the lens member 317 is pushed in, the switch receiving member 314d (see FIG. 13) that comes into contact with the lower side surface of the switch member 315 pushes up the switch member 315 by the elastic recovery force of the pushing coil spring CS2. The lens member 317 returns to the position before pushing (see FIG. 18A).

即ち、レンズ部材317を押し込み操作する際にレンズ部材317の位置を復帰させる押し込みコイルスプリングCS2と、振動部材314の位置を復帰させる振動コイルスプリングCS1と、を別の部材で構成することができる。 That is, the pushing coil spring CS2 that returns the position of the lens member 317 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, and the vibrating coil spring CS1 that returns the position of the vibrating member 314 can be composed of different members.

本実施形態では、振動コイルスプリングCS1に比較して押し込みコイルスプリングCS2の弾性係数が小さくされるので、振動部材314を復帰させる速度は大きく確保しながら、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作は小さな力で行うことができる。従って、遊技者が受動的に感じる振動の大きさを確保しつつ、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作の容易性を向上させることができる。 In the present embodiment, since the elastic modulus of the pushing coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the vibrating coil spring CS1, the pushing operation of the lens member 317 is performed with a small force while ensuring a high speed for returning the vibrating member 314. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of the pushing operation of the lens member 317 while ensuring the magnitude of the vibration passively felt by the player.

図22(a)及び図22(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図22(a)及び図22(b)では、ロック部材336が固定側に揺動された状態が図示され、図22(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示されると共に図22(b)では、図22(a)の状態から首振り操作部材310が背面側(図22(b)右側)に押し込み操作された状態が図示される。 22 (a) and 22 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 22A and FIG. 22B, the state in which the lock member 336 is swung to the fixed side is illustrated, and in FIG. 22A, the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position. The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 22B, the state in which the swinging operation member 310 is pushed toward the back side (right side in FIG. 22B) from the state shown in FIG. 22A is shown.

首振り操作部材310を支持するレバー部材340は、ねじりバネSP1によって、レバー支持軸331d1を中心に首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる方向(図22(a)時計回り)へ向けて付勢される。そのため、図22(a)の状態から、ロック部材336を解除方向(図22(a)時計回り)に揺動させても、首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に保持することができる。 The lever member 340 that supports the swing operation member 310 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 in the direction of lifting the swing operation member 310 (clockwise in FIG. 22A) about the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, even if the lock member 336 is swung in the release direction (clockwise in FIG. 22A) from the state shown in FIG. 22A, the swing operation member 310 can be held in the upward position.

ねじりバネSP1の付勢力によるレバー部材340の揺動は、案内支持孔331e1,332e1、上カバー322及び偏心カム部材333にレバー部材340が当接することにより停止される。このように、レバー部材340を停止させる際に当接される箇所を複数用意することにより、レバー部材340にかけられる荷重を分散させることができ、レバー部材340が破損することを抑制することができる。以下、各当接箇所について詳述する。 The swing of the lever member 340 due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is stopped when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the guide support holes 331e1, 332e1, the upper cover 322 and the eccentric cam member 333. In this way, by preparing a plurality of points to be contacted when the lever member 340 is stopped, the load applied to the lever member 340 can be dispersed, and damage to the lever member 340 can be suppressed. .. Hereinafter, each contact point will be described in detail.

案内支持孔331e1,332e1には、角度規制棒部材346が挿通されるので、案内支持孔331e1,332e1の端部に角度規制棒部材346が当接することでレバー部材340の揺動を停止させることができる。なお、図10で上述したように、案内支持孔331e1,332e1はレバー部材340を揺動軸方向で挟んで配置されるので、レバー部材340を停止させる際にレバー部材340が長手方向を中心とした旋回方向に傾くことを抑制することができる。 Since the angle regulating rod member 346 is inserted into the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1, the angle regulating rod member 346 comes into contact with the end of the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1 to stop the swing of the lever member 340. Can be done. As described above in FIG. 10, since the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1 are arranged so as to sandwich the lever member 340 in the swing axis direction, the lever member 340 is centered in the longitudinal direction when the lever member 340 is stopped. It is possible to suppress tilting in the turning direction.

上カバー322には、上部カバー部材344の連結部344cが当接可能とされる。連結部344cには、上カバー322と垂直に当接する部分である段部344c1が形成され、連結部344cとレバー部材340との間には空間が形成される(図22(a)参照)。そのため、段部344c1に上カバー322が当接した場合にも、連結部344cが空間に向けて変形可能とされるので、連結部344cと上カバー322との間で生じる衝撃を緩和する事ができる。 The connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the upper cover 322. The connecting portion 344c is formed with a stepped portion 344c1 which is a portion perpendicularly in contact with the upper cover 322, and a space is formed between the connecting portion 344c and the lever member 340 (see FIG. 22A). Therefore, even when the upper cover 322 comes into contact with the step portion 344c1, the connecting portion 344c can be deformed toward the space, so that the impact generated between the connecting portion 344c and the upper cover 322 can be alleviated. it can.

これにより、本体部材341に衝撃が伝達されることを抑制することができるので、本体部材341の構成を簡素化することができ、レバー部材340全体の軽量化を図ることができる。この場合、ねじりバネSP1に必要な弾性係数を抑制することができ、それに伴って偏心カム部材333を駆動させる第1駆動装置335(図10参照)に必要な駆動力を抑制することができる。 As a result, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the impact to the main body member 341, so that the configuration of the main body member 341 can be simplified and the weight of the lever member 340 as a whole can be reduced. In this case, the elastic modulus required for the torsion spring SP1 can be suppressed, and the driving force required for the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 10) for driving the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed accordingly.

また、上部カバー部材344には衝撃を緩和する役割の他に、内側ケース部材330の内側に埃や球(遊技球、遊技媒体)が入り込むことを防止する役割がある。即ち、レバー部材340が揺動しても(図23(b)参照)、上部カバー部材344と上カバー322との間が常に閉鎖された状態とされるので、内側ケース部材330の内側に埃や球(遊技球、遊技媒体)が入り込むことを防止することができる。 In addition to the role of cushioning the impact, the upper cover member 344 also has a role of preventing dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering the inside of the inner case member 330. That is, even if the lever member 340 swings (see FIG. 23B), the space between the upper cover member 344 and the upper cover 322 is always closed, so that dust is inside the inner case member 330. And balls (game balls, game media) can be prevented from entering.

更に、上部カバー部材344は揺動軸方向(図22(a)紙面垂直方向)で内側ケース部材330の切り欠き331c1と当接可能とされる。これにより、上部カバー部材344を用いて本体部材341が揺動軸方向にぐらつくことを抑制することができる。 Further, the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the notch 331c1 of the inner case member 330 in the swing axis direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 22A). As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body member 341 from wobbling in the swing axis direction by using the upper cover member 344.

偏心カム部材333には、レバー部材340の剥離部材350が当接する。偏心カム部材333の筒状部333bを剥離部材350側に向けた状態で偏心カム部材333にレバー部材340を当接させることで、偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止することができる。 The peeling member 350 of the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. By bringing the lever member 340 into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 with the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 facing the peeling member 350 side, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

図22(a)に示すように、操作デバイス300は、振動装置366の振動方向の中心軸を示す直線L1が軸支棒363を通る。そのため、振動装置366の振動の衝撃が軸支棒363へ与えられるが、軸支棒363とモータ固定板362(図12参照)との間には緩衝部材364(図12参照)が配設されるので、緩衝部材364により振動の衝撃を緩和することができる。これにより、レバー部材340へ伝わる振動を抑制することができる。 As shown in FIG. 22A, in the operation device 300, a straight line L1 indicating the central axis of the vibration device 366 in the vibration direction passes through the shaft support rod 363. Therefore, the impact of the vibration of the vibrating device 366 is applied to the shaft support rod 363, and a cushioning member 364 (see FIG. 12) is arranged between the shaft support rod 363 and the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 12). Therefore, the shock of vibration can be alleviated by the cushioning member 364. As a result, the vibration transmitted to the lever member 340 can be suppressed.

直線L1と、レバー部材340の長手方向に沿った直線L2との間の角度が角度θ1とされる。これにより、振動装置366が発生させる振動を、直線L2に沿った方向成分と、直線L2の垂直方向に沿った方向成分とに分解することができ、パチンコ機10に伝達されパチンコ機10を振動させる負荷(直線L2に沿った方向の負荷)を抑制することができる。 The angle between the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340 is defined as the angle θ1. As a result, the vibration generated by the vibrating device 366 can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2, which is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 and vibrates the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to suppress the load to be caused (the load in the direction along the straight line L2).

また、同様に、レンズ部材317の押し込み方向(直線L1と平行)にかけられる力を、直線L2に沿った方向成分と、直線L2の垂直方向に沿った方向成分とに分解することができるので、レンズ部材317を押し込むことで、レバー支持軸331d1に与えられる負荷を抑制することができる。 Similarly, the force applied to the lens member 317 in the pushing direction (parallel to the straight line L1) can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2. By pushing the lens member 317, the load applied to the lever support shaft 331d1 can be suppressed.

振動装置366がレバー支持軸331d1の正面側(図22(a)左側)に配置され、振動装置366が動作する際に生じる反作用が本体部材341の首振り部材支持部341dを下方に押し下げる方向に向けられる。そのため、振動装置366の振動により、本体部材341を偏心カム部材333から離反する方向に揺動させることができる。これにより、振動装置366の振動により偏心カム部材333が負荷を受けることを抑制することができる。 The vibrating device 366 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 22A) of the lever support shaft 331d1, and the reaction generated when the vibrating device 366 operates is in the direction of pushing down the swing member support portion 341d of the main body member 341. Be directed. Therefore, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 can cause the main body member 341 to swing in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333. As a result, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being loaded by the vibration of the vibration device 366.

図22(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材310を押し込み操作する状態において、裏ボタン部材312dが連結部344cに押し当てられる。この場合にレバー部材340側へ向けて生じる負荷の方向F1が、レバー支持軸331d1を中心にレバー部材340の首振り部材支持部341dを押し下げる方向へ向けられる。そのため、首振り操作部材310を押し込み操作することで偏心カム部材333へ向けた負荷が生じることを抑制することができる。 As shown in FIG. 22B, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c in a state where the swinging operation member 310 is pushed in. In this case, the direction F1 of the load generated toward the lever member 340 is directed in the direction of pushing down the swing member support portion 341d of the lever member 340 with the lever support shaft 331d1 as the center. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of a load on the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the swing operation member 310.

首振り操作部材310を押し込み操作した状態では、直線L1と直線L2とが、角度θ2をなす。この角度θ2は、角度θ1よりも大きいので、振動装置366の振動の直線L2に沿った方向成分を図22(a)の状態に比較して小さくすることができる。そのため、首振り操作部材310を押し込み操作することにより、パチンコ機10に伝達させる振動を抑制することができる。 In the state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed in, the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 form an angle θ2. Since this angle θ2 is larger than the angle θ1, the directional component along the straight line L2 of the vibration of the vibrating device 366 can be made smaller than the state shown in FIG. 22 (a). Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed by pushing the swinging operation member 310.

また、直線L2の垂直方向に沿った方向成分を大きくすることができる。そのため、振動の反作用を利用してレバー部材340を図22(b)反時計回りに揺動させ易くすることができ、首振り操作部材310を押し込み操作している遊技者が感じる振動のモードを直線L1に沿った直線方向の振動と、首振り操作部材310が軸支棒363を軸に回転する振動との複数種類の振動を現出させることができる。 Further, the directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily swing the lever member 340 counterclockwise in FIG. 22 (b) by utilizing the reaction of the vibration, and the mode of vibration felt by the player who pushes the swing operation member 310 is set. It is possible to generate a plurality of types of vibrations, that is, vibration in the linear direction along the straight line L1 and vibration in which the swing operation member 310 rotates around the shaft support rod 363.

図23(a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図であり、図23(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIc−XVIIIc線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図23では、剥離部材350がロック部材336に揺動を規制された状態で本体部材341が剥離部材350から引きはがされ、首振り操作部材310が押し下げられた状態が図示されると共に首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。 23 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 23 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). It is a figure. In FIG. 23, a state in which the main body member 341 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and the swing operation member 310 is pushed down while the peeling member 350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 is shown. The cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

図22に示す状態において、レンズ部材317を押し込む方向に所定量以上の荷重(磁力による吸着力以上の荷重)がかけられたり、首振り操作部材310を押し下げる方向に所定量以上の荷重(磁力による吸着力以上の荷重)がかけられたりすることで、本体部材341が磁石部材354から引きはがされ、図23に示す状態に首振り操作部材310が移動する。これにより、ロック部材336と剥離部材350との間で大きな荷重がかかり、ロック部材336や剥離部材350が破損することを抑制することができる。 In the state shown in FIG. 22, a predetermined amount or more of a load (a load greater than the attractive force due to the magnetic force) is applied in the direction of pushing the lens member 317, or a predetermined amount or more of the load (due to the magnetic force) is applied in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310. The main body member 341 is peeled off from the magnet member 354 by applying a load (load equal to or greater than the attractive force), and the swing operation member 310 moves to the state shown in FIG. As a result, a large load is applied between the lock member 336 and the release member 350, and it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 and the release member 350 from being damaged.

なお、首振り操作部材310を押し下げた場合にレバー部材340が移動する方向の反対側に偏心カム部材333が配設され、首振り操作部材310をいくら押し下げても、偏心カム部材333側には荷重が伝達されないので、偏心カム部材333の耐久性を向上させることができる。 The eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the opposite side in the direction in which the lever member 340 moves when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, and no matter how much the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, the eccentric cam member 333 is on the side. Since the load is not transmitted, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

図23(b)に示すように、センサ検出片343bが第2センサ部材325a2の隙間から移動することで、本体部材341から剥離部材350が引きはがされたことを検出することができる。 As shown in FIG. 23B, when the sensor detection piece 343b moves from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

この場合、磁石部材354と本体部材341との間に生じていた磁力による吸着力が突然無くなり、首振り操作部材310が勢いよく下方へ移動する。そのため、レバー部材340が揺動しすぎてしまい、案内支持孔331e1,332e1に負担が生じる恐れがある。一方、本実施形態では、首振り操作部材310が押し下げられた際に、首振り操作部材310の背面側枠部材311と前カバー321とが対向配置され面当たりされることで、レバー部材340が回りすぎる場合にも、その負荷を背面側枠部材311又は前カバーが変形することで緩和することができる。これにより、レバー部材340が破損することを抑制することができる。 In this case, the attractive force due to the magnetic force generated between the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341 suddenly disappears, and the swing operation member 310 vigorously moves downward. Therefore, the lever member 340 swings too much, which may cause a load on the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, the back side frame member 311 and the front cover 321 of the swing operation member 310 are arranged to face each other and come into contact with each other, so that the lever member 340 is pressed. Even if it turns too much, the load can be alleviated by deforming the back side frame member 311 or the front cover. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from being damaged.

なお、図23(a)に示す状態から、遊技者が下方にかけていた荷重を解くことで、本体部材341がねじりバネSP1の付勢力により図23(a)時計回りに揺動され、本体部材341が剥離部材350に再度吸着される。これにより、レバー部材340(及び本体部材341)の姿勢(配置)を安定化することができ、遊技者が次の操作を行いやすくすることができる。 By releasing the load applied downward by the player from the state shown in FIG. 23 (a), the main body member 341 is swung clockwise by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 to cause the main body member 341. Is again attracted to the peeling member 350. As a result, the posture (arrangement) of the lever member 340 (and the main body member 341) can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

剥離部材350は本体部材341の揺動軸であるレバー支持軸331d1に軸支されるので、剥離部材350が本体部材341から剥離された状態においては、剥離部材350の重量が本体部材341の揺動方向にかからない。 Since the peeling member 350 is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331d1, which is the swinging shaft of the main body member 341, the weight of the peeling member 350 is the shaking of the main body member 341 when the peeling member 350 is peeled from the main body member 341. It does not take the direction of movement.

即ち、本体部材341に剥離部材350が吸着される状態と、本体部材341から剥離部材350が剥離される状態とでレバー支持軸331d1の前後の本体部材341の重量バランスが変化する。即ち、剥離部材350が引きはがされた状態の方が、本体部材341にかけられる首振り操作部材310を押し下げる方向のモーメントが大きくなる。これにより、剥離部材350が剥離した後では、本体部材341が起き上がる速度を小さくすることができるので、剥離部材350に本体部材341が吸着する際に偏心カム部材333に与えられる負荷を抑制することができる。 That is, the weight balance of the main body member 341 before and after the lever support shaft 331d1 changes depending on the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. That is, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the moment in the direction of pushing down the swinging operation member 310 applied to the main body member 341 becomes larger. As a result, after the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the speed at which the main body member 341 rises can be reduced, so that the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 when the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be suppressed. Can be done.

また、本体部材341が断面コ字状に形成され、本体部材341のコ字状の開放側からコ字状の閉鎖側へ入り込む態様で剥離部材350が移動するので、本体部材341と剥離部材350との間で摩擦抵抗が生じる場合には、本体部材341が剥離部材350に吸着する速度を小さくすることができる。 Further, since the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section and the peeling member 350 moves in a manner of entering from the U-shaped open side of the main body member 341 to the U-shaped closing side, the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 When frictional resistance occurs between the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350, the speed at which the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be reduced.

なお、ねじりバネSP1の付勢力は本体部材341に伝達され、剥離部材350には被伝達とされるため、剥離部材350と本体部材341とが引きはがされた状態でロック部材336または偏心カム部材333にねじりバネSP1の付勢力が働くことを防止できる。そのため、剥離部材350と本体部材341とが引きはがされた状態でロック部材336または偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止できる。 Since the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is transmitted to the main body member 341 and transmitted to the peeling member 350, the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam is in a state where the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are peeled off. It is possible to prevent the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 from acting on the member 333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged when the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are peeled off.

なお、図23(a)の状態で、剥離部材350は偏心カム部材333とロック部材336とに固定されるので、再度、センサ検出片343bが第2センサ部材325a2の隙間に入ることで、本体部材341と剥離部材350とが吸着したことを検出することができる。 In the state of FIG. 23A, the peeling member 350 is fixed to the eccentric cam member 333 and the lock member 336. Therefore, the sensor detection piece 343b enters the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 again to form the main body. It can be detected that the member 341 and the peeling member 350 are adsorbed.

図24(a)及び図24(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図24(a)では、図22(a)の状態からロック部材336が解除側(図24(a)時計回り)に揺動された状態が図示され、図24(b)では、図24(a)の状態から偏心カム部材333が約180度回転されレバー部材340が揺動された状態が図示される。また、首振り操作部材310が押し下げられた状態におけるレバー部材340及び首振り操作部材310の外形が想像線で図示される。 24 (a) and 24 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 24 (a) shows a state in which the lock member 336 is swung from the state of FIG. 22 (a) to the release side (clockwise in FIG. 24 (a)), and FIG. 24 (b) shows a state in which the lock member 336 is swung toward the release side (clockwise in FIG. 24 (a)). The state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated by about 180 degrees from the state of 24 (a) and the lever member 340 is swung is shown. Further, the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

ロック部材336の検出片336eがセンサ部材331fの隙間に入ることでロック部材336が解除側に揺動したことを検出することができる。ロック部材336が解除側に揺動したことを検出した後で、第1駆動装置335の駆動ギア335b(図10参照)を回転させることで偏心カム部材333を回転させ、レバー部材340を揺動させることができる。なお、偏心カム部材333を1方向に連続して回転させても良いし、回転方向を途中で切り替えても良い。 When the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 enters the gap of the sensor member 331f, it can be detected that the lock member 336 swings to the release side. After detecting that the lock member 336 swings to the release side, the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) of the first drive device 335 is rotated to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 and swing the lever member 340. Can be made to. The eccentric cam member 333 may be continuously rotated in one direction, or the rotation direction may be switched in the middle.

偏心カム部材333が回転している間、レバー部材340は、ねじりバネSP1により偏心カム部材333に押し付けられる方向(図24(a)時計回り方向)に付勢される。そのため、偏心カム部材333の回転と連動して、レバー部材340は揺動する。これにより、遊技者の注目を首振り操作部材310に集めやすくできる。 While the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction of being pressed against the eccentric cam member 333 by the torsion spring SP1 (clockwise in FIG. 24A). Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in conjunction with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. As a result, the player's attention can be easily attracted to the swing operation member 310.

図24(a)又は図24(b)に示す状態で振動装置366が作動すると、その振動の反作用が直線L1に沿って本体部材341を押し下げる方向に働く。そのため、振動の反作用によって、偏心カム部材333から離反する方向にレバー部材340が揺動するので、振動装置366が動作することで偏心カム部材333に負荷がかけられることを抑制することができる。 When the vibration device 366 operates in the state shown in FIG. 24A or FIG. 24B, the reaction of the vibration acts in the direction of pushing down the main body member 341 along the straight line L1. Therefore, since the lever member 340 swings in the direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 due to the reaction of the vibration, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by the operation of the vibration device 366.

レンズ部材317を押し込み操作する場合を考える。レンズ部材317を押し込み操作する際に、レンズ部材317に与えられる荷重の方向が直線L1に沿うと仮定すると、レンズ部材317を押し込み操作することに伴って、レバー部材340が下方へ(図24(a)反時計回りに)揺動したり、首振り操作部材310が(図24(a)時計回りに)押し込み操作されたりする可能性がある。 Consider the case where the lens member 317 is pushed in and operated. Assuming that the direction of the load applied to the lens member 317 is along the straight line L1 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the lever member 340 moves downward as the lens member 317 is pushed in (FIG. 24 (FIG. 24). a) There is a possibility that the swing operation member 310 may swing (counterclockwise) or the swing operation member 310 may be pushed in (clockwise in FIG. 24 (a)).

本実施形態では、いずれの場合でも、レバー部材340を偏心カム部材333から離反する方向に揺動させる荷重が働くので、レンズ部材317を押し込み操作することで偏心カム部材333に荷重が与えられることを抑制することができる。これにより、偏心カム部材333の耐久性を向上させることができる。 In the present embodiment, in any case, a load that swings the lever member 340 in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 acts, so that a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the lens member 317. Can be suppressed. As a result, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

図25(a)及び図25(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図25(a)では、図24(b)の状態から偏心カム部材333が反時計回りに所定角度θ3だけ回転された状態が図示され、図25(b)では、図24(b)の状態から偏心カム部材333が時計回りに所定角度θ3だけ回転された状態が図示されると共に首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。また、図25(a)及び図25(b)では、首振り操作部材310が押し下げられた状態におけるレバー部材340及び首振り操作部材310の外形が想像線で図示される。 25 (a) and 25 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 25 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 from the state of FIG. 24 (b), and FIG. 25 (b) shows FIG. 24 (b). The state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

本実施形態では、首振り部材360が前側(図25反時計回り方向)に付勢されるので、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持して押し下げ動作することを容易とすることができる。即ち、首振り操作部材310を押し下げるために図24(b)の状態から方向M1(図25(a)参照)に力を加えた場合に、首振り操作部材310を首振り操作(軸支棒363を中心に揺動させる操作)させることなく、即座に首振り操作部材310を押し下げ操作することができる。 In the present embodiment, since the swing member 360 is urged to the front side (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 25), it is possible to facilitate the player to grasp the swing operation member 310 and push it down. That is, when a force is applied to the direction M1 (see FIG. 25 (a)) from the state of FIG. 24 (b) in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the swing operation member 310 is swung (shaft support rod). The swing operation member 310 can be immediately pushed down without swinging around the 363).

ここで、レバー部材340を偏心カム部材333から離すことを可能とすると、レバー部材340を偏心カム部材333から離間した位置から勢い付けて偏心カム部材333に衝突させることが可能となるので(図25(a)及び図25(b)において、首振り操作部材310を想像線の位置から実線の位置まで押し上げることが可能となるので)、偏心カム部材333が破損する恐れがある。 Here, if the lever member 340 can be separated from the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 can be forced to collide with the eccentric cam member 333 from a position separated from the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. FIG. In 25 (a) and 25 (b), the swing operation member 310 can be pushed up from the position of the imaginary line to the position of the solid line), so that the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

これに対し、本実施形態では、偏心カム部材333を中空とすることで、偏心カム部材333の破損を防止することができる。即ち、偏心カム部材333の弾性変形によりレバー部材340からの荷重をうけとめ、偏心カム部材333が破損することを抑制できる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by making the eccentric cam member 333 hollow, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. That is, it is possible to receive the load from the lever member 340 due to the elastic deformation of the eccentric cam member 333 and prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

上述したように、偏心カム部材333は、回転方向によらず、連続して回転し続けることで、レバー部材340を揺動動作させることができる。ここで、回転方向の特徴について説明する。 As described above, the eccentric cam member 333 can swing the lever member 340 by continuously rotating regardless of the rotation direction. Here, the features in the rotation direction will be described.

図25(a)に、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態(図24(a)の状態)における偏心カム部材333の位相(以下、この位相を「退避位相」と称す)からの回転角度を示す。即ち、退避位相から図25(a)の偏心カム部材333の位相まで回転するには、時計回りの回転で角度φ1だけ偏心カム部材333を回す必要がある。 FIG. 25A shows the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (hereinafter, this phase is referred to as “retracted phase”) in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (the state of FIG. 24A). Indicates the rotation angle of. That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 of FIG. 25 (a), it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ1 by rotating clockwise.

図25(b)に、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態(図24(a)の状態)における偏心カム部材333の位相(退避位相)からの回転角度を示す。即ち、退避位相から図25(b)の偏心カム部材333の位相まで回転するには、反時計回りの回転で角度φ2だけ偏心カム部材333を回す必要がある。ここで、角度φ1は角度φ2に比較して小さい(φ1<φ2)。 FIG. 25B shows the rotation angle of the eccentric cam member 333 from the phase (evacuation phase) in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (the state of FIG. 24A). That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 shown in FIG. 25 (b), it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ2 by rotating counterclockwise. Here, the angle φ1 is smaller than the angle φ2 (φ1 <φ2).

偏心カム部材333が等速回転すると仮定すると、退避位相から偏心カム部材333を時計回りに回転させた方が、レバー部材340がねじりバネSP1で付勢される方向と偏心カム部材333の回転方向とが対向する期間(角度にして角度φ1の期間)を偏心カム部材333を反時計回りに回転させる場合(角度にして角度φ2の期間)に比較して短くすることができる。 Assuming that the eccentric cam member 333 rotates at a constant velocity, the direction in which the lever member 340 is urged by the torsional spring SP1 and the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333 are obtained by rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise from the retracting phase. The period in which the eccentric cam member 333 opposes (the period in which the angle is φ1) can be shortened as compared with the case where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise (the period in which the angle is φ2).

また、退避位置から偏心カム部材333を時計回りに回転させた方が、偏心カム部材333の回転方向とレバー部材340がねじりバネSP1で付勢される方向とが対向する状態において、レバー部材340と偏心カム部材333とが当接する位置をレバー支持軸331d1に近づけることができる(図25(a)において偏心カム部材333とレバー部材340とが当接する位置を、図25(b)において偏心カム部材333とレバー部材340とが当接する位置よりもレバー支持軸331d1に近づけることができる)。この場合、レバー部材340に同一トルクがかけられていれば、レバー部材340と偏心カム部材333とが当接する位置で生じる荷重が、小さくなる。そのため偏心カム部材333にかけられる負荷を小さくすることができるので、偏心カム部材333の耐久性を向上させることができる。 Further, when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise from the retracted position, the lever member 340 is in a state where the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333 and the direction in which the lever member 340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 are opposed to each other. The position where the eccentric cam member 333 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 can be brought closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 (the position where the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 come into contact with each other in FIG. 25 (a) is shown in FIG. 25 (b). The lever support shaft 331d1 can be closer than the position where the member 333 and the lever member 340 come into contact with each other). In this case, if the same torque is applied to the lever member 340, the load generated at the position where the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other becomes smaller. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 can be reduced, so that the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

加えて、本実施形態では、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を持ち上げ操作することで、偏心カム部材333に大きな荷重がかけられる恐れがあるので、偏心カム部材333を同一方向に連続で回転させる場合には、偏心カム部材333を図25(b)反時計回りに回転させることが好ましい。この場合、偏心カム部材333のリブ部333eが図25(b)の角度φ2の角度範囲を回転する場合には、レバー部材340から偏心カム部材333に与えられる荷重が抑制される(レバー支持軸331d1からレバー部材340と偏心カム部材との当接位置までの距離が長くなる)ので、偏心カム部材333がレバー部材340に近接する方向に移動するとしても偏心カム部材333が破損する可能性を低くすることができる。 In addition, in the present embodiment, when the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310, a large load may be applied to the eccentric cam member 333, so that the eccentric cam member 333 is continuously rotated in the same direction. In this case, it is preferable to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 counterclockwise in FIG. 25 (b). In this case, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates in the angle range of the angle φ2 in FIG. 25 (b), the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 is suppressed (lever support shaft). Since the distance from 331d1 to the contact position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member becomes longer), even if the eccentric cam member 333 moves in a direction close to the lever member 340, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged. Can be lowered.

一方、偏心カム部材333のリブ部333eが図25(a)の角度φ1の角度範囲を回転する場合には、レバー部材340から偏心カム部材333に与えられる負荷は大きくなる(レバー支持軸331d1からレバー部材340と偏心カム部材333との当接位置までの距離が短くなる)が、偏心カム部材333がレバー部材340から離反する方向に回転しているため、レバー部材340と偏心カム部材333との当接位置において偏心カム部材333に生じる負荷を抑制することができ、偏心カム部材333の耐久性を向上させることができる。なお、偏心カム部材333は同一方向に回転させる必要はなく、角度φ1側、もしくは角度φ2側を往復回転動作(反転動作)するようにしても良い。 On the other hand, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates in the angle range of the angle φ1 in FIG. 25 (a), the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 becomes large (from the lever support shaft 331d1). The distance between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 is shortened), but since the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating in the direction away from the lever member 340, the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 The load generated on the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed at the contact position of the eccentric cam member 333, and the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved. The eccentric cam member 333 does not need to be rotated in the same direction, and may be reciprocally rotated (reversed) on the angle φ1 side or the angle φ2 side.

図26(a)及び図26(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図26(a)では、図24(b)の状態から首振り操作部材310が後転方向(図26(a)時計回り)に揺動された状態が図示され、図26(b)では、図26(a)の状態から偏心カム部材333が退避位相まで回転され、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材333に当接するまで揺動された状態が図示されると共に首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。 26 (a) and 26 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 26 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 26 (a)) from the state shown in FIG. 24 (b). In FIG. 26A, a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated to the retracted phase and the lever member 340 is swung until it comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 is shown, and a cross section of the swing operation member 310 is shown. The sight is omitted.

ここで、偏心カム部材333を回転させることでレバー部材340を揺動させる間に、専らレバー部材340を押し下げる操作を求める場合、図26(a)に示すように、レバー部材340の姿勢が変化せずに首振り操作部材310が後転方向(図26(a)時計回り)に揺動することは通常生じない。そのため、裏ボタン部材312dが押し込まれたことを検出することで、遊技者が誤操作(首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる操作)を行っていることを検出することができる。 Here, when the operation of pushing down the lever member 340 is desired while the lever member 340 is swung by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the posture of the lever member 340 changes as shown in FIG. 26A. It usually does not occur that the swing operation member 310 swings in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 26A) without swinging. Therefore, by detecting that the back button member 312d is pushed in, it is possible to detect that the player is performing an erroneous operation (an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310).

この場合、偏心カム部材333にレバー部材340を通して荷重がかかり。偏心カム部材333が破損する恐れがあるので、図26(b)に示すように偏心カム部材333を退避位相まで駆動ギア335bの駆動力で駆動させることで、偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止することができる。 In this case, a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 through the lever member 340. Since the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged by driving the eccentric cam member 333 to the retracted phase with the driving force of the drive gear 335b as shown in FIG. 26 (b). Can be prevented.

このとき、偏心カム部材333を図26(b)時計回りに回転させることで、より安全に偏心カム部材333を回転させることができる。即ち、偏心カム部材333とレバー部材340との当接位置をレバー支持軸331d1から離反させながら偏心カム部材333を回転させることができ、偏心カム部材333を反時計回りに回転させる場合に比較して、レバー部材340から偏心カム部材333に与えられる荷重を抑制することができる。 At this time, by rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise in FIG. 26B, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated more safely. That is, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated while the contact position between the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 is separated from the lever support shaft 331d1, and the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated counterclockwise. Therefore, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

図27(a)及び図27(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図27(a)では、図24(a)の状態から首振り操作部材310が押し下げ操作された状態が図示され、図27(b)では、図27(a)の状態から首振り操作部材310が軸支棒363を軸に図27(a)時計回りに揺動された状態が図示されると共に首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。 27 (a) and 27 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 27 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state of FIG. 24 (a), and FIG. 27 (b) shows a swing operation from the state of FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 27A shows a state in which the member 310 is swung clockwise around the shaft support rod 363, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

図24(a)の状態から、図27(a)に示す方向D1に沿って力を加えると首振り操作部材310をレバー部材340ごと押し下げることができる。次いで、図27(a)の状態から、方向D1の反対方向である方向D2に沿って力を加えると、レバー部材340の姿勢はそのままで、首振り操作部材310を軸支棒363を軸に揺動させることができる。このように、2種類の動作(押し込みと回転など異なった態様の動作)を必要とせず、力の方向を反対にすることにより、一連の操作を行うことができるので、操作デバイス300の操作を容易とすることができる。 When a force is applied along the direction D1 shown in FIG. 27A from the state of FIG. 24A, the swing operation member 310 can be pushed down together with the lever member 340. Next, when a force is applied along the direction D2 opposite to the direction D1 from the state of FIG. 27A, the posture of the lever member 340 remains the same, and the swing operation member 310 is centered on the shaft support rod 363. It can be rocked. In this way, a series of operations can be performed by reversing the directions of the forces without requiring two types of operations (operations in different modes such as pushing and rotating), so that the operation device 300 can be operated. It can be easy.

この操作中において、レバー部材340及び剥離部材350は剛体として機能する(磁石部材354の吸着力により固定された状態が維持される)ので、遊技者が感じる操作感が変化することを抑制でき、首振り操作部材310の操作性を向上させることができる。 During this operation, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 function as rigid bodies (the state of being fixed by the attractive force of the magnet member 354 is maintained), so that it is possible to suppress a change in the operation feeling felt by the player. The operability of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

図27(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材310を首振り操作すると、裏ボタン部材312dが上部カバー部材344の連結部344cに押し付けられることで、レバー部材340を図27(b)反時計回りに回転させる方向に負荷がかけられる。これにより、首振り操作部材310を首振り操作する際にレバー部材340を図27(a)の位置に容易に固定する事ができ、図27(b)の状態で首振り操作部材310を保持することを容易にすることができる。 As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the swing operation member 310 is swung, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344, whereby the lever member 340 is counterclockwise to FIG. 27 (b). The load is applied in the direction of rotating clockwise. As a result, the lever member 340 can be easily fixed to the position shown in FIG. 27 (a) when the swing operating member 310 is swung, and the swing operating member 310 is held in the state shown in FIG. 27 (b). Can be facilitated.

次いで、図28から図38を参照して、第2実施形態における操作デバイス2300について説明する。第1実施形態では、偏心カム部材333の本体部333aとカム部333cとが一体で形成される場合を説明したが、第2実施形態における操作デバイス2300は、偏心カム部材2333が、中心部が軸支される本体部材2333aと偏心して軸支されるカム部材2333bとの別部材で形成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 38. In the first embodiment, the case where the main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 are integrally formed has been described, but in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 has a central portion. It is formed of a separate member from the main body member 2333a that is pivotally supported and the cam member 2333b that is eccentrically supported. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

なお、第2実施形態では、ねじりバネSP21からレバー部材2340を起き上げる方向に付勢力が働くとともに、ねじりバネSP22から首振り操作部材310を後転させる方向(図28(a)時計回り)に付勢力が働く。 In the second embodiment, an urging force acts in the direction of raising the lever member 2340 from the torsion spring SP21, and the swinging operation member 310 is rotated backward from the torsion spring SP22 (clockwise in FIG. 28A). The urging force works.

ねじりバネSP21は、軸支部331g,332g(図10参照)に巻き付けられ、一端がねじりバネ係止部331h,332h(図9参照)に上側から当接され、他端が角度規制棒部材346に下側から当接される。これにより、レバー部材2340は首振り操作部材310を起き上げる方向に付勢される。 The torsion spring SP21 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end of the torsion spring SP21 is brought into contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 9) from above, and the other end is attached to the angle regulating rod member 346. It is abutted from below. As a result, the lever member 2340 is urged in the direction of raising the swing operation member 310.

ねじりバネSP22は、緩衝部材364(図12参照)に巻き付け支持され、一方の端部が正面曲面部345cに係止され、他方の端部がモータ固定板2362に係止される。本実施形態では、ねじりバネSP22により、首振り部材2360が、本体部材341に対して後転する方向(図28(a)時計回り)に付勢される。 The torsion spring SP22 is wound and supported by a cushioning member 364 (see FIG. 12), one end thereof is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 2362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP22 urges the swing member 2360 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 28A) with respect to the main body member 341.

図28(a)及び図28(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第2実施形態における操作デバイス2300の断面図である。なお、図28(a)及び図28(b)では、レバー部材2340がロック部材2336に揺動を規制された状態が図示され、図28(b)では図28(a)に示す状態から首振り操作部材310が軸支棒363を軸に後方に首振り操作された状態が図示される。本実施形態では、図28(a)の状態が初期位置とされ、図28(a)では、首振り操作部材310が振動装置2366の振動の反動により揺動され至る姿勢P21が想像線で図示される。また、図17(a)では第1実施形態における操作デバイス300が図示されるが、外観は操作デバイス2300と同じなので、操作デバイス2300とみなして説明する。以下、本実施形態において同様である。 28 (a) and 28 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 according to the second embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B, the state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is shown, and in FIG. 28B, the neck is changed from the state shown in FIG. 28A. The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung backward about the shaft support rod 363 is shown. In the present embodiment, the state of FIG. 28 (a) is set as the initial position, and in FIG. 28 (a), the posture P21 at which the swing operation member 310 is swung by the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Will be done. Further, although the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same as that of the operation device 2300, it will be described as the operation device 2300. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

図28(a)に示すように、振動装置2366は、電磁力により一対の部材を直線方向に近接離反させる態様で互いに動作させる装置であって、モータ固定板2362に締結固定されると共に周囲に銅線が巻き付けられた筒状部材であるボビン部材2366aと、そのボビン部材2366aの内周面よりも外径が小径とされる円筒およびボビン部材2366aの外周面よりも内径が大径とされる円筒が同軸で配置され円板形状の板で連結される押し付け部材2366bと、を主に備える。なお、押し付け部材2366bは、内側の円筒が磁性体で形成される。 As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the vibrating device 2366 is a device that operates a pair of members in a manner in which a pair of members are brought close to each other in a linear direction by an electromagnetic force, and is fastened and fixed to a motor fixing plate 2362 and around the circumference. The bobbin member 2366a, which is a tubular member around which a copper wire is wound, has a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a, and the inner diameter is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a. It mainly includes a pressing member 2366b in which cylinders are arranged coaxially and connected by a disk-shaped plate. The inner cylinder of the pressing member 2366b is made of a magnetic material.

ボビン部材2366a及び押し付け部材2366bは、第1実施形態におけるボビン部材366a及び押し付け部材366bよりも径方向の長さが小さくされ、振動装置2366の中心軸C21は、軸支棒363から前側(図28(a)左側)に離間して配置される。 The bobbin member 2366a and the pressing member 2366b are shorter in radial length than the bobbin member 366a and the pressing member 366b in the first embodiment, and the central axis C21 of the vibrating device 2366 is on the front side from the shaft support rod 363 (FIG. 28). (A) Arranged apart from the left side).

ここで、本実施形態のようにレバー部材2340の先端に操作部として首振り操作部材310が配設される場合に、演出上遊技者に把持することを要求することがある。しかし、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持したかどうかを検出することは困難であった。例えば、押し込みボタンを長押しすることを要求することもできるが、押し込みボタンの操作を要求することを多用すると、押し込みボタンの反力以上の力で毎回押し込みボタンを押し込む必要があるので、遊技者のストレスとなる恐れがある。 Here, when the swing operation member 310 is arranged as an operation portion at the tip of the lever member 2340 as in the present embodiment, the player may be required to hold the lever member 2340 for the purpose of production. However, it was difficult to detect whether or not the player gripped the swing operation member 310. For example, it is possible to request that the push button be pressed and held, but if the push button operation is frequently requested, the push button must be pushed with a force greater than the reaction force of the push button, so that the player must push the push button. May be stressful.

これに対し、本実施形態では、振動装置2366の中心軸が軸支棒363の前側に離間して配置されるので、振動装置2366の振動の反作用により首振り部材2360が往復揺動し、首振り操作部材310の姿勢が図28(a)に示す姿勢と、姿勢P21との間を往復揺動する態様で変化する。これに伴い、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持する前は、裏ボタン部材312dが押し込み方向(中心軸C21に平行な方向)に往復動作するので、それを第2センサ部材313d(図20参照)で検出することで、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持する前であることを検出することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the central axis of the vibrating device 2366 is arranged apart from the front side of the shaft support rod 363, the swinging member 2360 swings back and forth due to the reaction of the vibration of the vibrating device 2366, and the neck swings. The posture of the swing operation member 310 changes in a mode of reciprocating and swinging between the posture shown in FIG. 28A and the posture P21. Along with this, before the player grips the swing operation member 310, the back button member 312d reciprocates in the pushing direction (direction parallel to the central axis C21), so that the second sensor member 313d (FIG. 20) By detecting with (see), it is possible to detect that the player has not yet grasped the swing operation member 310.

一方、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持すると、その把持の力により中間枠部材312の姿勢が固定され、裏ボタン部材312dが往復動作しなくなるので、第2センサ部材313dに検出される信号のパターンが変化する。この変化を検出することで、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持した後であることを検出することができる。 On the other hand, when the player grips the swing operation member 310, the posture of the intermediate frame member 312 is fixed by the gripping force, and the back button member 312d does not reciprocate, so that the signal detected by the second sensor member 313d Pattern changes. By detecting this change, it is possible to detect that the player has gripped the swing operation member 310.

首振り操作部材310の把持する際には、発生する反力は存在しないので、遊技者に必要な力は小さい。また、首振り操作部材310に遊技者の手が被さってさえいれば良く(遊技者は即座に首振り操作部材310を操作できる)、例えば、遊技者は手の自重を中間枠部材312にかけておくだけで良いので、遊技者のストレスを低減することができる。 Since there is no reaction force generated when the swing operation member 310 is gripped, the force required for the player is small. Further, it is sufficient that the swinging operation member 310 is covered with the player's hand (the player can immediately operate the swinging operation member 310). For example, the player puts his / her hand weight on the intermediate frame member 312. It is possible to reduce the stress of the player because it is sufficient.

これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持しているかどうか(操作の準備段階にあるかどうか)を、遊技者に押し込みボタンの操作を要求することなく行うことができるので、演出を進めるタイミングを遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持したタイミングに設定することができると共に、押し込みボタンの操作を要求することによる遊技者のストレスを解消することができる。 As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the player is holding the swing operation member 310 (whether or not it is in the preparatory stage for operation) without requesting the player to operate the push button. The timing can be set to the timing at which the player grips the swing operation member 310, and the stress of the player due to requesting the operation of the push button can be eliminated.

レバー部材2340と首振り部材2360との連結を軸支としたときに、振動装置2366の振動の中心軸と首振り部材2360の回転軸とを一致させることで遊技者側に伝える振動を大きくすることができる。一方で、この場合、パチンコ機10(図1参照)にも大きな振動が伝わってしまう。そのため、締結ネジの緩みや部材の劣化が早い段階で生じて、メンテナンス周期が早まるという問題点があった。 When the connection between the lever member 2340 and the swing member 2360 is used as an axis support, the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device 2366 and the rotation axis of the swing member 2360 are aligned to increase the vibration transmitted to the player side. be able to. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, there is a problem that loosening of the fastening screw and deterioration of the member occur at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

これに対し、本実施形態では、首振り部材2360の回転軸と、振動装置2366の振動の中心軸とをずらすことで、首振り操作部材310を回転させることに振動装置2366の振動を利用することができ、パチンコ機10(図1参照)に伝わる振動を少なくすることができる(振動のエネルギーが首振り操作部材310の回転に使用される)。加えて、振動装置2366の振動により、首振り操作部材310を回転させつつレンズ部材317を振動させることができるので、演出効果を向上させることができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is used to rotate the swing operation member 310 by shifting the rotation axis of the swing member 2360 and the central axis of vibration of the vibration device 2366. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) (the energy of the vibration is used for the rotation of the swing operation member 310). In addition, the vibration of the vibrating device 2366 can vibrate the lens member 317 while rotating the swing operation member 310, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

棒状部材2331dは、偏心カム軸331d2と平行に延設されるロック解除軸2331d5(図28(a)参照)を備える。 The rod-shaped member 2331d includes an unlocking shaft 2331d5 (see FIG. 28 (a)) extending in parallel with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2.

図29(a)及び図29(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス2300の断面図である。なお、図29(a)では、ロック部材2336が解除側に配置された状態で首振り操作部材310が押し下げられ下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。また、図29(b)では、図29(a)に示す状態から首振り操作部材310が前転方向(図29(a)反時計回り方向)の回転終端まで回転した状態が図示される。 29 (a) and 29 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 29A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down and placed in a downward position while the lock member 2336 is placed on the release side. Further, FIG. 29 (b) shows a state in which the swing operating member 310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 29 (a) to the end of rotation in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29 (a)).

首振り操作部材310はねじりバネSP22により後転方向(図29(a)時計回り方向)に付勢されるので、レバー部材2340が揺動範囲の下端に配置されるまでは首振り操作部材310が上部カバー部材344に押し当てられた状態が維持される。 Since the swing operation member 310 is urged in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29 (a)) by the torsion spring SP22, the swing operation member 310 until the lever member 2340 is arranged at the lower end of the swing range. Is maintained in a state of being pressed against the upper cover member 344.

レバー部材2340を揺動範囲の下端まで押し下げた状態(図29(a)参照)から、更に首振り操作部材310を押し下げる方向に首振り操作部材310に荷重をかけると、首振り操作部材310が前転方向(図29(a)反時計回り方向)に回転する。これにより、遊技者に首振り操作部材310の押し下げ操作の下端を認識させることができ、首振り操作部材310の操作範囲の終端が分からず、遊技者が意図せず首振り操作部材310に過荷重をかけることを防止することができる。 When a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in the direction of further pushing down the swing operation member 310 from the state where the lever member 2340 is pushed down to the lower end of the swing range (see FIG. 29 (a)), the swing operation member 310 moves. It rotates in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 29 (a) counterclockwise direction). As a result, the player can recognize the lower end of the push-down operation of the swing operation member 310, the end of the operation range of the swing operation member 310 is not known, and the player unintentionally passes the swing operation member 310. It is possible to prevent the load from being applied.

本実施形態では、レバー部材2340に駆動力を伝達する偏心カム部材2333と、ロック部材2336を解除側(図29(a)参照)へ向けて揺動させるロック解除カム部材2339とを、共に駆動ギア335bで回転させる。これにより、第2駆動装置337(図10参照)を配設不要とでき、製品コストを削減することができる。以下、偏心カム部材2333、ロック解除カム部材2339及びロック部材2336について説明する。 In the present embodiment, both the eccentric cam member 2333 that transmits the driving force to the lever member 2340 and the lock release cam member 2339 that swings the lock member 2336 toward the release side (see FIG. 29A) are driven. It is rotated by the gear 335b. As a result, the second drive device 337 (see FIG. 10) does not need to be arranged, and the product cost can be reduced. Hereinafter, the eccentric cam member 2333, the unlock cam member 2339, and the lock member 2336 will be described.

図30(a)は、偏心カム部材2333のカム部材2333bの正面図であり、図30(b)は、図30(a)の矢印XXXb方向視におけるカム部材2333bの側面図であり、図30(c)は、偏心カム部材2333の本体部材2333aの正面図であり、図30(d)は、図30(c)の矢印XXXd方向視における本体部材2333aの側面図である。なお、図30(c)及び図30(d)では、本体部材2333aが部分的に断面視される。 30 (a) is a front view of the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30 (b) is a side view of the cam member 2333b in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). (C) is a front view of the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30 (d) is a side view of the main body member 2333a in the direction of arrow XXXd of FIG. 30 (c). In addition, in FIG. 30C and FIG. 30D, the main body member 2333a is partially cross-sectionally viewed.

図30(a)及び図30(b)に示すように、カム部材2333bは、偏心カム軸331d2(図10参照)に軸支される筒状部2333b1と、その筒状部2333b1に内接する円に沿って軸方向に延設され筒状部2333b1より若干短く形成されると共に内部が中空とされるカム部2333b2と、筒状部2333b1の先端部に軸方向に沿って切り欠かれる一対の切り欠き2333b3と、筒状部2333b1とカム部2333b2とを双方の軸を通る方向で連結する板状のリブ部2333b4と、そのリブ部2333b4から筒状部2333b1の軸心と平行に凸設される凸設部2333b5と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), the cam member 2333b has a tubular portion 2333b1 pivotally supported by an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) and a circle inscribed in the tubular portion 2333b1. A cam portion 2333b2 that extends axially along the shaft and is formed slightly shorter than the tubular portion 2333b1 and has a hollow inside, and a pair of cuts that are cut out along the axial direction at the tip of the tubular portion 2333b1. A plate-shaped rib portion 2333b4 that connects the notch 2333b3, the tubular portion 2333b1 and the cam portion 2333b2 in the direction passing through both axes, and the rib portion 2333b4 are projected from the rib portion 2333b4 in parallel with the axial center of the tubular portion 2333b1. Mainly includes a convex portion 2333b5.

凸設部2333b5は、筒状部2333b1から径方向に半径R21の長さだけ離間した位置に配設され本体部材2333aの円環凹部2333a3に挿通される突起であり、磁性体材料から形成され、リブ部2333b4に接着材等で接着される。なお、凸設部2333b5は、筒状部2333b1の径方向と交差する態様で配設される側面(図30(a)上下の側面)が筒状部2333b1を中心とする円形状に沿う曲面形状で形成される。 The convex portion 2333b5 is a protrusion that is disposed at a position radially separated from the tubular portion 2333b1 by the length of the radius R21 and is inserted into the annular recess 2333a3 of the main body member 2333a, and is formed of a magnetic material. It is adhered to the rib portion 2333b4 with an adhesive or the like. The convex portion 2333b5 has a curved surface shape in which side surfaces (upper and lower side surfaces in FIG. 30A) are arranged so as to intersect the radial direction of the tubular portion 2333b1 along a circular shape centered on the tubular portion 2333b1. Is formed by.

なお、筒状部2333b1は筒状部333bと、カム部2333b2はカム部333cと、切り欠き2333b3は切り欠き333dと、リブ部2333b4はリブ部333eと、それぞれ対応し、それら対応する部分同士で技術的思想は共通なため、ここでは説明を省略する。 The tubular portion 2333b1 corresponds to the tubular portion 333b, the cam portion 2333b2 corresponds to the cam portion 333c, the notch 2333b3 corresponds to the notch 333d, and the rib portion 2333b4 corresponds to the rib portion 333e, and the corresponding portions correspond to each other. Since the technical ideas are common, the description is omitted here.

図30(c)及び図30(d)に示すように、本体部材2333aは、中心に偏心カム軸331d2(図10参照)に軸支される断面円形状の軸孔2333a2が穿設されると共に外周面に駆動ギア335b(図10参照)と歯合されるギア歯が形成される円板形状の円板部2333a1と、その円板部2333a1の正面側から軸孔2333a2の軸心方向に沿って円環状に凹設される円環凹部2333a3と、その円環凹部2333a3の外周面に沿って磁性体材料が円環状に配設される固定磁石部2333a4と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIGS. 30 (c) and 30 (d), the main body member 2333a is provided with a shaft hole 2333a2 having a circular cross section pivotally supported by an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) at the center thereof. A disc-shaped disc portion 2333a1 in which gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) are formed on the outer peripheral surface, and along the axial direction of the shaft hole 2333a2 from the front side of the disc portion 2333a1. It mainly includes an annular recess 2333a3 that is recessed in an annular shape, and a fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in which a magnetic material is arranged in an annular shape along the outer peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3.

円環凹部2333a3は、軸孔2333a2の中心から円環凹部2333a3の内周面までの距離が半径R22の長さとされ、径方向の幅が凸設部2333b5の厚みより若干大きくされる。本実施形態では、半径R22は変形R21と等しい長さとされる(半径R21=半径R22)。また、円環凹部2333a3の凹設深さは、凸設部2333b5の凸設長さよりも長くされる。 The distance from the center of the shaft hole 2333a2 to the inner peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3 is the length of the radius R22 of the annular recess 2333a3, and the width in the radial direction is slightly larger than the thickness of the convex portion 2333b5. In the present embodiment, the radius R22 has a length equal to that of the modified R21 (radius R21 = radius R22). Further, the recessed depth of the annular recess 2333a3 is made longer than the convex length of the convex portion 2333b5.

ここで、円環凹部2333a3の外周側に固定磁石部2333a4が配設されるので、凸設部2333b5が筒状部2333b1よりも上方に配設される場合に、レバー部材2340からカム部材2333bが過荷重を受けると、凸設部2333b5を固定磁石部2333a4から逃がす方向にカム部材2333bが荷重を受ける。これにより、凸設部2333b5が固定磁石部2333a4に押し付けられることを防止することができ、磁石同士が擦れることにより劣化することを抑制することができる。 Here, since the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the annular recess 2333a3, when the convex portion 2333b5 is disposed above the tubular portion 2333b1, the lever member 2340 to the cam member 2333b When the overload is received, the cam member 2333b receives the load in the direction in which the convex portion 2333b5 is released from the fixed magnet portion 2333a4. As a result, it is possible to prevent the convex portion 2333b5 from being pressed against the fixed magnet portion 2333a4, and it is possible to prevent deterioration due to rubbing between the magnets.

図31は、偏心カム部材2333の本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとを組み立てた図であり、図31(a)は、偏心カム部材2333の正面図であり、図31(b)は図31(a)のXXXIb方向視における偏心カム部材2333の側面図であり、図31(c)は、偏心カム部材2333の正面図である。なお、図31(c)では、図31(a)に示す状態から、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが相対回転された状態が図示される。なお、D12(b)では、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが部分的に断面視される。 FIG. 31 is a view in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are assembled, FIG. 31 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 31 (b) is FIG. 31 ( It is a side view of the eccentric cam member 2333 in the XXXIb direction view of a), and FIG. 31C is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333. Note that FIG. 31 (c) shows a state in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are relatively rotated from the state shown in FIG. 31 (a). In D12 (b), the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are partially viewed in cross section.

図31(a)及び図31(b)に示すように、偏心カム部材2333の本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが偏心カム軸331d2に軸支され組み立てられた状態において、凸設部2333b5が円環凹部2333a3に挿通され、凸設部2333b5と固定磁石部2333a4との間で互いに吸着し合う方向の磁力が働く。そのため、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとは、駆動ギア335b(図10参照)から伝達される駆動力により一体で回転することができる。 As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), in a state where the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 and assembled, the convex portion 2333b5 is circular. It is inserted through the ring recess 2333a3, and a magnetic force acts between the convex portion 2333b5 and the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in the direction of attracting each other. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b can rotate integrally by the driving force transmitted from the driving gear 335b (see FIG. 10).

この際、凸設部2333b5の形状が筒状部2333b1を中心とした円に沿った曲面で形成され、円環凹部2333a3の側面と接触する面積を大きくすることができるので、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとを強固に固定することができる。 At this time, the shape of the convex portion 2333b5 is formed by a curved surface along a circle centered on the tubular portion 2333b1, and the area of contact with the side surface of the annular recess 2333a3 can be increased, so that the main body member 2333a and the cam The member 2333b can be firmly fixed.

一方、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとは磁力で吸着固定されているに過ぎないので、その吸着力以上の力でカム部材2333bが荷重を受けると、本体部材2333aに対してカム部材2333bを滑らせることができる。即ち、図31(a)に示すように、本体部材2333aの基準とする位相を表す基準線Oとカム部材2333bのリブ部2333b4の位相を表す直線Q21とが一致した状態から、本体部材2333aが固定されカム部材2333bに回転方向の荷重が加えられることで、図31(c)に示すように、基準線Oと直線Q21とがずれた状態へと変化させることができる。 On the other hand, since the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are merely attracted and fixed by magnetic force, when the cam member 2333b receives a load with a force equal to or greater than the attractive force, the cam member 2333b slides against the main body member 2333a. Can be made. That is, as shown in FIG. 31A, the main body member 2333a is in a state where the reference line O representing the reference phase of the main body member 2333a and the straight line Q21 representing the phase of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b coincide with each other. By being fixed and applying a load in the rotational direction to the cam member 2333b, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the reference line O and the straight line Q21 can be changed to a deviated state.

図32(a)は、ロック解除カム部材2339の正面図であり、図32(b)は、図32(a)のXXXIIb方向視におけるロック解除カム部材2339の底面図であり、図32(c)は、図32(a)のXXXIIc方向視におけるロック解除カム部材2339の側面図である。 32 (a) is a front view of the unlock cam member 2339, and FIG. 32 (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member 2339 in the direction of XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). ) Is a side view of the unlock cam member 2339 in the XXXIIc direction view of FIG. 32 (a).

図32に示すように、ロック解除カム部材2339は、偏心カム部材2333の本体部材2333aと同一の大きさに形成されると共に外周面に駆動ギア335bと歯合されるギア歯が形成される本体部2339aと、その本体部2339aの中心に穿設されると共にロック解除軸2331d5が挿通される軸孔2339bと、本体部2339aの正面側の側面に沿って径方向外側へ向けて延設されると共にロック部材2336の係止部2666dに当接可能な長さで形成される解除部2339cと、その解除部2339cに対して周方向に90度の位置で径方向外側に延設される検出片2339dと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 32, the unlock cam member 2339 is formed to have the same size as the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and the main body is formed with gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b on the outer peripheral surface. A shaft hole 2339b formed in the center of the portion 2339a and the main body portion 2339a and into which the unlocking shaft 2331d5 is inserted, and a shaft hole 2339b extending outward in the radial direction along the front side surface of the main body portion 2339a. A release portion 2339c formed with a length capable of contacting the locking portion 2666d of the lock member 2336, and a detection piece extending radially outward at a position 90 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the release portion 2339c. Mainly equipped with 2339d.

検出片2339dは、図示しない検出センサの隙間を通過する。これにより、ロック解除カム部材2339の位相を検出することができる。 The detection piece 2339d passes through a gap of a detection sensor (not shown). Thereby, the phase of the unlock cam member 2339 can be detected.

図33(a)は、ロック部材2336の正面図であり、図33(b)は、図33(a)のXXXIIIb方向視におけるロック部材2336の側面図である。 33 (a) is a front view of the lock member 2336, and FIG. 33 (b) is a side view of the lock member 2336 in the direction of XXXIIIb of FIG. 33 (a).

図33(a)及び図33(b)に示すように、ロック部材2336は、ギア部336d(図10参照)が省略された形状とされる。ロック部材2336は、レバー部材2340の揺動を防止する部材であって、先端側が略L字の鉤状に形成される板形状の本体部2336aと、その本体部2336aの基端側に穿設されると共にロック軸331d3(図10参照)が挿通される軸支孔2336bと、その軸支孔2336bを中心とした円弧に沿って形成される案内孔2336cと、本体部2336aのロック解除カム部材2339と対向する側(図33(b)左側)の側面から軸支孔2336bの上方(L字の鉤状の部分の先端)において凸出される係止部2336dと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), the lock member 2336 has a shape in which the gear portion 336d (see FIG. 10) is omitted. The lock member 2336 is a member that prevents the lever member 2340 from swinging, and is formed in a plate-shaped main body portion 2336a whose tip side is formed in a substantially L-shaped hook shape and on the base end side of the main body portion 2336a. A shaft support hole 2336b through which the lock shaft 331d3 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, a guide hole 2336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 2336b, and an unlock cam member of the main body 2336a. It mainly includes a locking portion 2336d that protrudes above the shaft support hole 2336b (the tip of the L-shaped hook-shaped portion) from the side surface on the side facing the 2339 (left side in FIG. 33B).

本体部2336aは、L字の鉤状に形成される先端部の側面(レバー部材2340の下側から当接する側面)が、レバー部材2340と当接する際にロック部材2336を回転させる力が大きくなる態様とされる。 The main body 2336a has a large force for rotating the lock member 2336 when the side surface of the tip portion (the side surface that abuts from the lower side of the lever member 2340) formed in the shape of an L-shaped hook abuts on the lever member 2340. It is regarded as an aspect.

案内孔2336cは、補助軸331d4(図10参照)が挿通される長孔であり、この案内孔2336cの長さにより、ロック部材2336の揺動終端を規定することができる。 The guide hole 2336c is a long hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, and the length of the guide hole 2336c can define the swing end of the lock member 2336.

係止部2336cは、ロック解除カム部材2339(図32参照)の解除部2339cから押される部分である。また、係止部2336cにねじりバネ(図示せず)が係止され、ロック部材2336は終始、固定側(図28(a)参照)へ向けて付勢力を受ける。 The locking portion 2336c is a portion pushed from the unlocking portion 2339c of the unlocking cam member 2339 (see FIG. 32). Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is locked to the locking portion 2336c, and the locking member 2336 receives an urging force toward the fixed side (see FIG. 28A) from beginning to end.

図34及び図35は、駆動ギア335bが回転することによりレバー部材2340が揺動することを時系列で図示するレバー部材2340、偏心カム部材2333、ロック部材2336及びロック解除カム部材2339の正面図である。 34 and 35 are front views of the lever member 2340, the eccentric cam member 2333, the lock member 2336, and the unlock cam member 2339, which show in chronological order that the lever member 2340 swings due to the rotation of the drive gear 335b. Is.

なお、図34(a)では、レバー部材2340がロック部材2336に揺動を規制された状態が図示され、図34(b)では、図34(a)に示す状態からロック解除カム部材2339がロック部材2336に当接するまで回転された状態が図示され、図34(c)では、図34(b)に示す状態からロック解除カム部材2339がロック部材2336を解除側に揺動させた状態が図示され、図34(d)では、図34(c)に示す状態からロック解除カム部材2339が回転されロック部材2336が固定側の位置に復帰した状態が図示される。 Note that FIG. 34 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336, and FIG. 34 (b) shows the unlock cam member 2339 from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a). The state of being rotated until it comes into contact with the lock member 2336 is shown, and in FIG. 34 (c), the state in which the lock release cam member 2339 swings the lock member 2336 toward the release side from the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). FIG. 34 (d) shows a state in which the unlock cam member 2339 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 34 (c) and the lock member 2336 is returned to the fixed position.

また、図35(a)では、偏心カム部材2333のカム部材2333bが、筒状部2333b1の反対側(180度の角度で配置される側)の側面でレバー部材2340と当接する状態が図示され、図35(b)では、図35(a)の状態から偏心カム部材2333が回転されレバー部材2340がロック部材2336に上側から当接した状態が図示され、図35(c)では、図35(b)の状態から偏心カム部材2333が回転されレバー部材2340がロック部材2336に揺動を規制される状態が図示される。 Further, FIG. 35A shows a state in which the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 comes into contact with the lever member 2340 on the side surface opposite to the tubular portion 2333b1 (the side arranged at an angle of 180 degrees). 35 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of FIG. 35 (a) and the lever member 2340 is in contact with the lock member 2336 from above. In FIG. 35 (c), FIG. 35 The state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state (b) and the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is shown.

図34(a)に示すように、ロック解除カム部材2339の解除部2339cがロック部材2336の係止部に当接するまでに角度θ21だけ回転する必要がある場合、ロック解除カム部材2339が角度θ21だけ回転して図34(b)に示す状態に至るまでの間は、レバー部材2340が揺動を規制されるので、偏心カム部材2333のカム部材2333bが回転することができない。そのため、ロック解除カム部材2339と同期して回転する本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが、図34(a)に示す状態から角度θ21だけ相対回転する(図34(b)参照)。 As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the release portion 2339c of the unlock cam member 2339 needs to rotate by an angle θ21 before it comes into contact with the lock portion of the lock member 2336, the unlock cam member 2339 needs to rotate at an angle θ21. Since the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging until the state shown in FIG. 34B is reached, the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 cannot rotate. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b, which rotate in synchronization with the unlocked cam member 2339, rotate relative to each other by an angle θ21 from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a) (see FIG. 34 (b)).

このように、カム部材2333bを本体部材2333aと相対回転可能としているので、偏心カム部材2333とロック解除カム部材2339との位相がずれて組み立てられた場合でも、偏心カム部材2333の回転がレバー部材2340にせき止められて、駆動モータ335a(図10参照)が損傷することを防止することができる。 In this way, since the cam member 2333b can rotate relative to the main body member 2333a, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 is the lever member even when the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlocked cam member 2339 are assembled out of phase. It is possible to prevent the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 10) from being damaged by being dammed by the 2340.

ロック解除カム部材2339が角度θ21だけ回転した後は、ロック解除カム部材2339がロック部材2336を解除側に移動させ始めることで、レバー部材2340の揺動の規制が解けるので、偏心カム部材2333の回転により、レバー部材2340が揺動する。この場合、偏心カム部材2333の本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが磁力で吸着され、一体で回転する。 After the unlock cam member 2339 has rotated by the angle θ21, the unlock cam member 2339 starts to move the lock member 2336 to the release side, so that the regulation of the swing of the lever member 2340 is released, so that the eccentric cam member 2333 The rotation causes the lever member 2340 to swing. In this case, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are attracted by a magnetic force and rotate integrally.

ロック解除カム部材2339の解除部2339cがロック部材2336の上方へ抜けて、ロック部材2336が固定側に復帰すると(図34(d)参照)、その後タイミングに関わらず、レバー部材2340の後端部(図34(a)右端部)がロック部材2336の本体部2336aの鉤状部分の曲面部を押すことでロック部材2336が解除側へ押しやられ、さらにレバー部材2340の後端部が下がることで、自然に揺動が規制される。 When the release portion 2339c of the lock release cam member 2339 is pulled out above the lock member 2336 and the lock member 2336 returns to the fixed side (see FIG. 34 (d)), the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 is thereafter regardless of the timing. (Fig. 34 (a) right end) pushes the curved surface of the hook-shaped part of the main body 2336a of the lock member 2336 to push the lock member 2336 to the release side, and further lowers the rear end of the lever member 2340. , The swing is naturally regulated.

そのため、例えば、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる方向に操作し、レバー部材2340の後端部が下降する場合、レバー部材2340の姿勢に関わらず(レバー部材2340が図34(d)、図35(a)又は図35(b)のどの姿勢をとっている場合でも)レバー部材2340がロック部材2336の鉤状部分の下側まで揺動されることで揺動が規制される。 Therefore, for example, when the player operates the swing operation member 310 in the lifting direction and the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 is lowered, the lever member 2340 is shown in FIG. 34 (d) regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340. The swing is regulated by swinging the lever member 2340 to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336 (regardless of the posture shown in FIG. 35 (a) or FIG. 35 (b)).

ここで、遊技者が首振り操作部材310(図28参照)を持ち上げ操作する際に偏心カム部材2333にかかる荷重に対する対策として、偏心カム部材2333をゴムなどの弾性材料から形成し、部材が弾性変形することで荷重を逃がすという方法が考えられる。しかし、この場合、部材にへたりが生じたり、形状が変化したりするという問題点があった。 Here, as a measure against the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 when the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), the eccentric cam member 2333 is formed from an elastic material such as rubber, and the member is elastic. A method of releasing the load by deforming is conceivable. However, in this case, there is a problem that the member is settled or the shape is changed.

これに対し、本実施形態では、カム部材2333bは本体部材2333aに対して滑ることができるので、遊技者が首振り操作部材310(図28参照)を持ち上げることで偏心カム部材2333に与えられる荷重によってカム部材2333bが破損することを防止することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the player lifting the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). It is possible to prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged.

即ち、レバー部材2340の姿勢に関わらず(レバー部材2340が図34(d)、図35(a)又は図35(b)のどの姿勢をとっている場合でも)、首振り操作部材310(図28参照)に上向きの荷重がかけられることで、レバー部材2340がカム部材2333bを押しやり(本体部材2333aに対して滑らせ)、レバー部材2340がロック部材2336の鉤状部分の下側まで揺動されることで揺動が規制される。 That is, regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 (regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 in FIGS. 34 (d), 35 (a), or 35 (b)), the swing operation member 310 (FIG. When an upward load is applied to (see 28), the lever member 2340 pushes the cam member 2333b (slides against the main body member 2333a), and the lever member 2340 swings to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336. Swing is regulated by being moved.

一方で、この場合、カム部材2333bの姿勢は同じ(図35(c)参照)であるのに、ロック解除カム部材2339の位相は異なる事態が生じる(図34(d)、図35(a)又は図35(b)参照)。そのため、再度、ロック解除カム部材2339でロック部材2336を解除側へ移動させるまでに必要な駆動ギア335bの回転角度が異なり、レバー部材2340の駆動開始のタイミングを定めることが困難になるという問題点があった。 On the other hand, in this case, although the postures of the cam members 2333b are the same (see FIG. 35 (c)), the phases of the unlocked cam members 2339 may be different (FIGS. 34 (d) and 35 (a)). Or see FIG. 35 (b)). Therefore, the rotation angle of the drive gear 335b required to move the lock member 2336 to the release side by the lock release cam member 2339 is different again, and it becomes difficult to determine the drive start timing of the lever member 2340. was there.

これに対し、本実施形態では、ロック解除カム部材2339の位相を検出センサ(図示せず)で検出することで、偏心カム部材2333とロック解除カム部材2339との位相を合わせることができる。即ち、ロック部材2336にレバー部材2340が揺動を規制されている場合のカム部材2333bの配置は図35(c)に示す配置に固定されるので、この状態で駆動ギア335bを回転させてロック解除カム部材2339を所定の位相(図34(b)参照)まで回転させることで、偏心カム部材2333の位相とロック解除カム部材2339の位相とを合わせることができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlock cam member 2339 can be matched by detecting the phase of the unlock cam member 2339 with a detection sensor (not shown). That is, since the arrangement of the cam member 2333b when the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is fixed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 35 (c), the drive gear 335b is rotated and locked in this state. By rotating the release cam member 2339 to a predetermined phase (see FIG. 34B), the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the unlock cam member 2339 can be matched.

これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310(図28参照)を持ち上げ操作するタイミングに関わらず、偏心カム部材2333の位相とロック解除カム部材2339の位相とを合わせることができ、レバー部材2340の駆動開始のタイミングを容易に一致させることができる。 As a result, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the unlocked cam member 2339 can be matched regardless of the timing when the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), and the lever member 2340 can be matched. The drive start timing can be easily matched.

次いで、図36を参照して、首振り部材2360の本体部材2361について説明する。図36(a)から図36(c)は、軸支棒363の軸方向視で図示した首振り部材2360の本体部材2361の正面図である。なお、図36(a)では、後転側の終端に本体部材2361が揺動配置された状態(図28(a)参照)が図示され、図36(b)では、前転側の終端に本体部材2361が揺動配置された状態(図28(b)参照)が図示され、図36(c)では、図36(b)に示す状態から本体部材2361が長孔2361fの長手方向に沿ってスライド移動された状態が図示される。 Next, the main body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. 36 (a) to 36 (c) are front views of the main body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 illustrated in the axial direction of the shaft support rod 363. Note that FIG. 36 (a) shows a state in which the main body member 2361 is oscillatedly arranged at the end on the backward rotation side (see FIG. 28 (a)), and FIG. 36 (b) shows the state at the end on the forward rotation side. A state in which the main body member 2361 is oscillated (see FIG. 28 (b)) is shown, and in FIG. 36 (c), the main body member 2361 is along the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 2361f from the state shown in FIG. 36 (b). The state of being slid and moved is illustrated.

図36に示すように、本体部材2361は、軸孔341e(図12参照)と同軸で軸支棒363に軸支される部材であって、側壁部361a(図12参照)の形状が若干変形されて形成される変形側壁部2361aと、軸孔361cから固定板部361eの延設方向に沿って形成される長孔2361fと、角度規制孔361dの上側端部から固定板部361eの延設方向に沿って形成される長孔2361gと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 36, the main body member 2361 is a member coaxially supported by the shaft support rod 363 with the shaft hole 341e (see FIG. 12), and the shape of the side wall portion 361a (see FIG. 12) is slightly deformed. The deformed side wall portion 2361a formed by being formed, the elongated hole 2361f formed from the shaft hole 361c along the extending direction of the fixing plate portion 361e, and the extension of the fixing plate portion 361e from the upper end portion of the angle regulating hole 361d. It mainly comprises 2361 g of elongated holes formed along the direction.

これにより、少なくとも本体部材2361が前転側の終端に揺動配置されない限り、軸支棒363および規制棒365が長孔2361f,2361gに侵入しないように配設される。そのため、本体部材2361は軸支棒363を中心とした揺動動作のみを行う。 As a result, unless at least the main body member 2361 is oscillated at the end on the forward rotation side, the shaft support rod 363 and the regulation rod 365 are arranged so as not to enter the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. Therefore, the main body member 2361 only swings around the shaft support rod 363.

次いで、図37を参照して、モータ固定板2362について説明する。図37(a)は、モータ固定板2362の上面図であり、図37(b)は、図37(a)のXXXVIIb方向視におけるモータ固定板2362の側面図であり、図37(c)は、図37(b)に示す状態からU字状部材2362dがスライド移動された状態を示すモータ固定板2362の側面図である。なお、理解を容易にするために、図37(b)及び図37(c)において、本体部材2361の外形が想像線で図示される。 Next, the motor fixing plate 2362 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. 37 (a) is a top view of the motor fixing plate 2362, FIG. 37 (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 in the direction of XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a), and FIG. 37 (c) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362. It is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 showing the state in which the U-shaped member 2362d is slid and moved from the state shown in FIG. 37 (b). For ease of understanding, the outer shape of the main body member 2361 is shown by an imaginary line in FIGS. 37 (b) and 37 (c).

図37に示すように、モータ固定板2362は、本体部362a及び側壁部362bが後方(図37上方)に延長された形状で形成される本体部2362a及び側壁部2362bと、本体部2362aの底側から下方へ延設される一対の棒状部2362cと、それら棒状部2362cにスライド移動可能に配設され長孔2361f,2361gの幅よりも大きな股幅で形成されるU字状部材2362dと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 37, the motor fixing plate 2362 includes a main body portion 2362a and a side wall portion 2362b formed by extending the main body portion 362a and the side wall portion 362b rearward (upper side of FIG. 37), and the bottom of the main body portion 2362a. A pair of rod-shaped portions 2362c extending downward from the side, and a U-shaped member 2362d formed in the rod-shaped portions 2362c so as to be slidably movable and having a crotch width larger than the width of the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. Mainly prepared.

側壁部2362bは、本体部2362aの延設方向に沿って穿設される長孔2362b1を備える。 The side wall portion 2362b includes an elongated hole 2362b1 formed along the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a.

U字状部材2362dは、U字の股幅の方向が長孔2361f,2361gの幅方向に沿う態様で配設され、弾性バネ等(図示せず)により本体部2362aから離反する方向に付勢される。即ち、U字状部材2362dに荷重がかけられていない場合は、U字状部材2362dは図37(b)に示す位置に配置され、U字の脚の部分が長孔2361f,2361gと重なるので、軸支棒363及び規制棒365が長孔2361f,2361gに沿って移動することを防止できる。 The U-shaped member 2362d is arranged so that the crotch width direction of the U-shape is along the width direction of the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g, and is urged in a direction away from the main body portion 2362a by an elastic spring or the like (not shown). Will be done. That is, when no load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. 37 (b), and the U-shaped leg portion overlaps with the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. , The shaft support rod 363 and the regulation rod 365 can be prevented from moving along the elongated holes 2361f, 2361g.

一方で、U字状部材2362dに本体部2362aへ近接する方向へ向けた荷重がかけられると、U字状部材2362dは図37(c)に示す位置に配置され、U字の股の部分が長孔2361f,2361gと重なるので、軸支棒363及び規制棒365を長孔2361f,2361gに沿って移動させることができる。 On the other hand, when a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d in a direction approaching the main body portion 2362a, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. 37 (c), and the U-shaped crotch portion is formed. Since it overlaps with the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g, the shaft support rod 363 and the regulating rod 365 can be moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

即ち、U字状部材2362dに荷重をかけるか否かを切り替えることで、本体部材2361を長孔2361f,2361gに沿って移動可能とするか否かを切り替えることができる。 That is, by switching whether or not a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, it is possible to switch whether or not the main body member 2361 can be moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

ここで、U字状部材2362dをスライド移動させる部材について説明する。本実施形態では、レバー部材2340の本体部材341の内側に長手方向に沿ってスライド移動可能に配設される板状の第1解除部材2370と、首振り操作部材310の背面側枠部材311に配設される貫通孔を貫通して本体部2362aの延設方向と垂直な方向にスライド移動可能に配設される板状の第2解除部材2380と、を主に備える。 Here, a member that slides the U-shaped member 2362d will be described. In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped first release member 2370 is arranged inside the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 so as to be slidable along the longitudinal direction, and the back side frame member 311 of the swing operation member 310. It mainly includes a plate-shaped second release member 2380 that is arranged so as to be slidably movable in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a through the through hole to be arranged.

なお、第1解除部材2370は後側(図28(a)右側)のU字状部材2362dをスライド移動可能に配設され、第2解除部材2380は前側(図28(a)左側)のU字状部材2362dをスライド移動可能に配設される。 The first release member 2370 is arranged so that the U-shaped member 2362d on the rear side (right side in FIG. 28 (a)) can be slidably moved, and the second release member 2380 is the U on the front side (left side in FIG. 28 (a)). The character member 2362d is arranged so as to be slidable.

また、第1解除部材2370は、剥離部材350がレバー部材2340から引きはがされることで、本体部材351が第1解除部材2370の端部に当接し、U字状部材2362dを押進する形状とされる。第2解除部材2380は、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置され、首振り部材2360が回転し前転方向の揺動終端に配置されることで、前カバー321が第2解除部材2380の端部に当接し、U字状部材2362dを押進する形状とされる。 Further, in the first release member 2370, when the release member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 2340, the main body member 351 comes into contact with the end of the first release member 2370 and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d. It is said to be a shape. In the second release member 2380, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position, the swing member 2360 rotates and is arranged at the swing end in the forward rotation direction, so that the front cover 321 is arranged on the second release member 2380. The shape is such that it abuts on the end and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d.

例えば、図29(b)に示す状態では、は前側(図29(a)左側)のU字状部材2362dはスライド移動されるが、後側(図29(a)右側)のU字状部材2362dはスライド移動していないので、首振り操作部材310を下方にスライド移動させることはできない。 For example, in the state shown in FIG. 29 (b), the U-shaped member 2362d on the front side (left side in FIG. 29 (a)) is slidably moved, but the U-shaped member on the rear side (right side in FIG. 29 (a)) is slid. Since the 2362d is not slid, the swing operating member 310 cannot be slid downward.

図38(a)及び図38(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス2300の断面図である。なお、図38(a)では、図28(a)に示す状態から首振り操作部材310が押し下げられ下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。また、図38(b)では、図38(a)に示す状態から、首振り操作部材310が長孔2361f,2361gに沿ってスライド移動された状態が図示される。 38 (a) and 38 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 38A, a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 28A and arranged in a downward position is shown. Further, FIG. 38 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is slid and moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g from the state shown in FIG. 38 (a).

図38(a)に示すように、剥離部材350が本体部材341から引きはがされ、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置されると共に回転され前転方向の揺動終端に配置されることで、一対のU字状部材2362dがスライド移動され、首振り操作部材310が長孔2361f,2361gに沿ってスライド移動することが可能となる。 As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position and is rotated and arranged at the swing end in the forward rotation direction. Then, the pair of U-shaped members 2362d are slid and moved, and the swinging operation member 310 can be slid and moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

このとき、レバー部材2340の本体部材341が剥離部材350が引きはがされることで首振り操作部材310に既に過荷重がかかっており、首振り操作部材310が揺動範囲の下端まで揺動したうえ、更に首振り操作部材310に下向きの力が掛かっている。そのため、遊技者が、首振り操作部材310を操作する際に誤って過荷重をかけてしまったわけではなく、操作と関係無く、首振り操作部材310を破壊しにかかっていると判断することができる。 At this time, the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 is already overloaded by the peeling member 350 being peeled off, and the swing operation member 310 swings to the lower end of the swing range. In addition, a downward force is further applied to the swing operation member 310. Therefore, it can be determined that the player does not accidentally apply an overload when operating the swing operation member 310, and is about to destroy the swing operation member 310 regardless of the operation. it can.

そのため、例えば、図38(b)に示す状態となったことを検出センサ(図示せず)で検出し、警報を出すことで、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に過荷重をかけることを抑制し、操作デバイス2300が破壊されることを防止することができる。 Therefore, for example, by detecting the state shown in FIG. 38 (b) with a detection sensor (not shown) and issuing an alarm, it is possible to prevent the player from applying an overload to the swing operation member 310. However, it is possible to prevent the operating device 2300 from being destroyed.

なお、首振り操作部材310に過荷重をかけない場合には、首振り操作部材310がスライド移動することを防止することができるので、長孔2361f,2361gによって首振り操作部材310の操作感が変化することを防止することができる。 When the swing operation member 310 is not overloaded, it is possible to prevent the swing operation member 310 from sliding, so that the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g provide a feeling of operation of the swing operation member 310. It can be prevented from changing.

次いで、図39から図42を参照して、第3実施形態における操作デバイス3300について説明する。第1実施形態では、レバー部材340を駆動させる駆動力がレバー部材340にレバー支持軸331d1の後方で伝達される場合を説明したが、第3実施形態における操作デバイス3300は、レバー部材3340を駆動させる駆動力がレバー支持軸331d1の前方で伝達される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the operation device 3300 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force for driving the lever member 340 is transmitted to the lever member 340 behind the lever support shaft 331d1 has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment drives the lever member 3340. The driving force to be driven is transmitted in front of the lever support shaft 331d1. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

なお、第3実施形態では、ねじりバネSP31からレバー部材3340を前倒れさせる方向に付勢力が働くとともに、ねじりバネSP32から首振り操作部材310を後倒れさせる方向に付勢力が働く。 In the third embodiment, the urging force acts in the direction of tilting the lever member 3340 forward from the torsion spring SP31, and the urging force acts in the direction of tilting the swing operation member 310 backward from the torsion spring SP32.

ねじりバネSP31は、軸支部331g,332g(図10参照)に巻き付けられ、一端がねじりバネ係止部331h,332h(図10参照)に上側から当接され、他端が角度規制棒部材346に上側から当接される。これにより、レバー部材340は首振り操作部材310が前倒れする方向に付勢される。 The torsion spring SP31 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end of which is brought into contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 10) from above, and the other end is attached to the angle regulating rod member 346. It is abutted from above. As a result, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 tilts forward.

ねじりバネSP32は、緩衝部材364に巻き付け支持され、一方の端部が正面曲面部345cに係止され、他方の端部がモータ固定板362に係止される。本実施形態では、ねじりバネSP32により、首振り部材360が、本体部材341に対して起き上がる方向に付勢される。 The torsion spring SP32 is wound and supported around the cushioning member 364, one end thereof is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP32 urges the swing member 360 in the rising direction with respect to the main body member 341.

図39(a)及び図39(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第3実施形態における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図39(a)及び図39(b)では、レバー部材3340がロック部材336に揺動を規制された状態が図示され、図39(b)では図39(a)に示す状態から首振り操作部材310が軸支棒363を軸に前方に首振り操作された状態が図示される。本実施形態では、図39(a)の状態が初期位置とされる。また、図17(a)では操作デバイス300が図示されるが、外観は同じなので、操作デバイス3300とみなして説明を行う。以下、本実施形態において同様である。 39 (a) and 39 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 according to the third embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It should be noted that in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), the state in which the lever member 3340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 is shown, and in FIG. 39 (b), the neck is changed from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a). The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung forward about the shaft support rod 363 is shown. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 39A is the initial position. Further, although the operation device 300 is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same, the operation device 300 will be regarded as the operation device 3300 for description. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

図39に示すように、本実施形態における操作デバイス3300は、偏心カム部材333を備えておらず、レバー部材3340の駆動は後述するソレノイド機構により行われる。以下、そのソレノイド機構について説明する。 As shown in FIG. 39, the operation device 3300 in the present embodiment does not include the eccentric cam member 333, and the lever member 3340 is driven by a solenoid mechanism described later. The solenoid mechanism will be described below.

ソレノイド機構は、内側カバー部材3330の内側に配設される磁性体材料から形成される磁性体部材3339と、レバー部材3340に固定されると共に円柱形状で金属製の棒状部材3345fとで構成される。 The solenoid mechanism is composed of a magnetic material member 3339 formed from a magnetic material material arranged inside the inner cover member 3330, and a cylindrical member 3345f fixed to the lever member 3340 and made of metal. ..

レバー部材3340の下部カバー部材3345は、背面ガイド部345aの左右端部から後下方に延設されると共に下部カバー部材3345と一体で成型される一対の伝達部3345eを備え、その伝達部3345eの先端にレバー支持軸331d1と平行な姿勢で金属製の棒状部材3345fが固定され、その棒状部材3345fには電流が導通される。 The lower cover member 3345 of the lever member 3340 includes a pair of transmission portions 3345e extending rearwardly and downwardly from the left and right ends of the back guide portion 345a and integrally molded with the lower cover member 3345, and the transmission portion 3345e thereof. A metal rod-shaped member 3345f is fixed to the tip in a posture parallel to the lever support shaft 331d1, and an electric current is conducted through the rod-shaped member 3345f.

磁性体材料3339は、内側カバー部材3330の正面側壁から背面側(図39(a)右側)に上下一対で延設されるU字形状の磁石である。本実施形態では、上側に配置される上側腕部3339nがN極とされ、下側に配置される下側腕部3339sがS極とされる。上側腕部3339nの下側面および下側腕部3339sの上側面は、レバー部材3340の揺動に伴って棒状部材3345fが移動する軌跡から上下方向に若干隙間をあけて配置される。そのため、レバー部材3340が揺動する際に、棒状部材3345fが磁性体部材3339と衝突することを抑制することができる。 The magnetic material 3339 is a U-shaped magnet extending in pairs from the front side wall to the back side (right side in FIG. 39 (a)) of the inner cover member 3330. In the present embodiment, the upper arm portion 3339n arranged on the upper side is the north pole, and the lower arm portion 3339s arranged on the lower side is the south pole. The lower side surface of the upper arm portion 3339n and the upper side surface of the lower arm portion 3339s are arranged with a slight vertical gap from the locus in which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves as the lever member 3340 swings. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rod-shaped member 3345f from colliding with the magnetic member 3339 when the lever member 3340 swings.

ここで、例えば、棒状部材3345fに、図39(a)紙面手前側へ向けて電流を流すと、棒状部材3345fを後方(図39(a)右方)へ向けて移動させる電磁力が生じる。また逆方向に電流を流すと、棒状部材3345fを前方(図39(a)左方)へ向けて移動させる電磁力が生じる。これら電磁力により、レバー部材3340を揺動させることができる。 Here, for example, when an electric current is passed through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 39 (a), an electromagnetic force is generated that moves the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the rear (right side in FIG. 39 (a)). Further, when an electric current is passed in the opposite direction, an electromagnetic force is generated that moves the rod-shaped member 3345f forward (to the left in FIG. 39A). The lever member 3340 can be swung by these electromagnetic forces.

図40(a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図40(a)では、ロック部材336が解除側に配置され、レバー部材3340が付勢力により揺動され首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。 40 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 40A shows a state in which the lock member 336 is arranged on the release side, the lever member 3340 is swung by the urging force, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position.

本実施形態では、レバー部材3340がねじりバネSP1により前倒れする方向に付勢されるので、ロック部材336を解除側に配置することでレバー部材3340を揺動開始させることができる。 In the present embodiment, since the lever member 3340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 in the direction of tilting forward, the lever member 3340 can be started to swing by arranging the lock member 336 on the release side.

本実施形態のように、レバー部材3340が前倒れする方向に付勢されると、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を押し下げた場合にレバー部材3340が近接する側にレバー部材3340を駆動させる偏心カム部材を配置する必要があり、遊技者の操作により偏心カム部材が破損しやすいという問題点があった。 When the lever member 3340 is urged in the direction of tilting forward as in the present embodiment, the eccentricity that drives the lever member 3340 toward the side where the lever member 3340 is close to the player when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310. It is necessary to arrange the cam member, and there is a problem that the eccentric cam member is easily damaged by the operation of the player.

一方、本実施形態では偏心カム部材を削除し、ソレノイド機構によりレバー部材3340に駆動力を伝達する。ソレノイド機構を構成する棒状部材3345fの移動軌跡と若干隙間を空ける態様で、ソレノイド機構を構成する磁性体部材3339が配設されるので、棒状部材3345fと磁性体部材3339とが衝突することが抑制され、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を押し下げ操作した場合に、ソレノイド機構が破損することを抑制することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member is deleted, and the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 3340 by the solenoid mechanism. Since the magnetic member 3339 constituting the solenoid mechanism is arranged so as to leave a slight gap from the movement locus of the rod-shaped member 3345f constituting the solenoid mechanism, collision between the rod-shaped member 3345f and the magnetic member 3339 is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the solenoid mechanism from being damaged when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310.

図40(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図40(b)では、図39(b)に示す状態から、首振り操作部材310が下方に押し下げられ、本体部材341と剥離部材350とが引きはがされた状態が図示される。 FIG. 40 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 40 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed downward and the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 are peeled off from the state shown in FIG. 39 (b).

ねじりバネSP1の付勢力は、レバー部材3340を前倒れさせる方向(図40(b)反時計回り方向)に向けられるので、図40(b)の状態から遊技者が手を離しても、首振り操作部材310はすぐに上昇移動することは無く、その場に維持される。 Since the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is directed in the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 40 (b)), even if the player releases his / her hand from the state in FIG. 40 (b), the neck The swing operation member 310 does not immediately move up and is maintained in place.

ここで、レバー部材340の付勢の方向を起き上がる方向とすると、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に過荷重をかけた場合に、レバー部材340が剥離部材350と剥離してロック部材336の破損を防止できたとしても、遊技者が手を離すとすぐに首振り操作部材310が上昇するので、遊技者が過荷重をかけていることに気付かず、首振り操作部材310に繰り返し過荷重をかける恐れがあるという問題点があった。 Here, assuming that the urging direction of the lever member 340 is the rising direction, when the player applies an overload to the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 peels off from the peeling member 350 and the lock member 336 is damaged. Even if this can be prevented, the swing operation member 310 rises as soon as the player releases the hand, so that the player does not notice that the swing operation member 310 is overloaded and repeatedly overloads the swing operation member 310. There was a problem that there was a risk of calling.

これに対し、本実施形態では、レバー部材3340の付勢の方向がレバー部材3340を前倒れされる方向(図40(b)反時計回り方向)に向けられるので、首振り操作部材310を下向き位置に配置させ続けることができる。これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に過荷重を繰り返しかける事態を回避することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the urging direction of the lever member 3340 is directed to the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 40B), so that the swing operation member 310 is directed downward. You can keep it in place. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player repeatedly applies an overload to the swing operation member 310.

本実施形態では、レバー部材3340を駆動させる電磁力を受ける棒状部材3345fが本体部材341と一体で動作する。即ち、本体部材341が剥離部材350と分離した状態において、棒状部材3345fが電磁力を受けることで本体部材341を揺動させることができる。 In the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345f that receives the electromagnetic force for driving the lever member 3340 operates integrally with the main body member 341. That is, in a state where the main body member 341 is separated from the peeling member 350, the main body member 341 can be swung by receiving the electromagnetic force of the rod-shaped member 3345f.

ここで、レバー部材340(図10参照)に偏心カム部材333(図10参照)で駆動力を伝達する場合、偏心カム部材333を剥離部材350の下方に配設すると、ロック部材336によりレバー部材340の揺動が規制される場合に、偏心カム部材333の回転も同時に規制される(図18(a)参照)。そのため、ロック部材336によりレバー部材340の揺動が規制される場合に、偏心カム部材333が動作すると、ロック部材336に荷重がかかりロック部材336が損傷する恐れがあるという問題点があった。 Here, when the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 340 (see FIG. 10) by the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10), when the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged below the release member 350, the lock member 336 causes the lever member. When the swing of the 340 is regulated, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 is also regulated (see FIG. 18A). Therefore, when the eccentric cam member 333 operates when the swing of the lever member 340 is restricted by the lock member 336, there is a problem that a load is applied to the lock member 336 and the lock member 336 may be damaged.

これに対し、本実施形態では、ロック部材336によりレバー部材3340の揺動が規制される場合に、棒状部材3345fが電磁力を受けて移動することで、本体部材341が揺動可能とされる一方、剥離部材350には駆動力が伝達されない。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing of the lever member 3340 is regulated by the lock member 336, the rod-shaped member 3345f moves by receiving an electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 can swing. On the other hand, the driving force is not transmitted to the peeling member 350.

そのため、ロック部材336によりレバー部材3340の揺動が規制される場合に棒状部材3345fに電流が流れたとしても、その際生じる電磁力は本体部材341の揺動に使用され、剥離部材350の揺動には使用されないので、ロック部材336が損傷することを防止することができる。 Therefore, even if a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f when the swing of the lever member 3340 is regulated by the lock member 336, the electromagnetic force generated at that time is used for swinging the main body member 341, and the release member 350 swings. Since it is not used for motion, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 from being damaged.

図41(a)及び図41(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図41(a)では、図40(b)に示す状態から、レバー部材3340が起き上がる方向に揺動された状態が図示され、図41(b)では、図41(a)に示す状態から、レバー部材3340が起き上がる方向に揺動された状態が図示される。 41 (a) and 41 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 41 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction from the state shown in FIG. 40 (b), and FIG. 41 (b) shows the state shown in FIG. 41 (a). Therefore, the state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction is illustrated.

図41(a)及び図41(b)に示すように、棒状部材3345fが電磁力を受けて移動することにより、レバー部材3340の本体部材341を揺動させることができる。ここで、剥離部材350の下方に偏心カム部材333(図10参照)を配置し、その偏心カム部材333を回転させることでレバー部材3340を駆動させる場合には、剥離部材350からレバー部材340の本体部材341が引きはがされた状態(図23(b)参照)で本体部材341を駆動させることはできない。 As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the rod-shaped member 3345f moves by receiving an electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 of the lever member 3340 can be swung. Here, when the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10) is arranged below the peeling member 350 and the lever member 3340 is driven by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the peeling member 350 to the lever member 340 The main body member 341 cannot be driven in a state where the main body member 341 is peeled off (see FIG. 23B).

これに対し、本実施形態では、剥離部材350を介して本体部材341に駆動力が伝達されるのではなく、棒状部材3345fが受ける電磁力が伝達部3345eを介して本体部材341に伝達され、本体部材341が駆動される。従って、剥離部材350の位置が固定されている場合でも、本体部材341を揺動させることができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the driving force is not transmitted to the main body member 341 via the peeling member 350, but the electromagnetic force received by the rod-shaped member 3345f is transmitted to the main body member 341 via the transmission unit 3345e. The main body member 341 is driven. Therefore, even when the position of the peeling member 350 is fixed, the main body member 341 can be swung.

図40(b)に示す状態から伝達部3345eが角度α31だけ姿勢変化するまで棒状部材3345fに図40(b)紙面奥側へ向けて電流を流すことで、本体部材341を図41(a)に示す状態とすることができ、図41(a)に示す状態から伝達部3345eが角度α32だけ姿勢変化するまで棒状部材3345fに図41(a)紙面奥側へ向けて電流を流すことで、本体部材341を図41(b)に示す状態とすることができる。 FIG. 41 (a) shows the main body member 341 by passing an electric current through the rod-shaped member 3345 f from the state shown in FIG. 40 (b) toward the back side of the paper surface until the transmission portion 3345e changes its posture by the angle α31. The state shown in FIG. 41 (a) can be obtained by passing a current through the rod-shaped member 3345f from the state shown in FIG. 41 (a) toward the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 41 (a) until the transmission unit 3345e changes its posture by the angle α32. The main body member 341 can be in the state shown in FIG. 41 (b).

棒状部材3345fに流す電流の向きを反転させることで、本体部材341の姿勢を、図41(a)の状態と図41(b)の状態とに繰り返し変化させることができる。これにより、遊技者に操作デバイス3300を注目させる煽り動作を行うことができる。 By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the posture of the main body member 341 can be repeatedly changed between the state of FIG. 41 (a) and the state of FIG. 41 (b). As a result, it is possible to perform a fanning operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 3300.

また、本体部材341に剥離部材350が吸着固定された状態(図40(a)参照)においても、棒状部材3345fに流す電流の向きを反転させることで、遊技者に操作デバイス3300を注目させる煽り動作を行うことができる。この際に、棒状部材3345fが移動する経路は本体部材341から剥離部材350が引きはがされた状態の経路と同様なので、単一の磁性体部材3339で、本体部材341から剥離部材350が引きはがされた場合と本体部材341に剥離部材350が吸着している場合とに対応することができる。 Further, even in a state where the peeling member 350 is attracted and fixed to the main body member 341 (see FIG. 40 (a)), the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f is reversed to incite the player to pay attention to the operation device 3300. Can perform operations. At this time, the path through which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves is the same as the path in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Therefore, the peeling member 350 is pulled from the main body member 341 by a single magnetic member 3339. It is possible to deal with the case where the peeling member 350 is attached to the main body member 341 and the case where the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341.

なお、本体部材341に剥離部材350が吸着している状態と、本体部材341から剥離部材350が引きはがされた状態とでは、本隊部材341の長手方向における重量バランスが変化するため、同じ強さの電流を流したとしても、煽り動作の速度を異ならせることができる。これにより、演出効果を向上させることができる。 The weight balance in the longitudinal direction of the main unit member 341 changes between the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Even if the current is passed, the speed of the fanning operation can be changed. As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved.

図42(a)及び図42(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図42(a)及び図42(b)では、理解を容易とするために首振り操作部材310が断面視されずに側面視で図示され、遊技者の手が想像線で図示される。 42 (a) and 42 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the swing operation member 310 is shown in a side view without being viewed in cross section, and the player's hand is shown in an imaginary line. ..

図42(a)では、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置され、遊技者の手が首振り操作部材310の背面側(図42(a)右側)から被せられた状態が図示される。この状態から、棒状部材3345fに図42(a)紙面奥へ向けて電流が流れることで棒状部材3345fが電磁力を受け、レバー部材3340が起き上がる方向に揺動される。このレバー部材3340の揺動により、首振り操作部材310が遊技者の手に引っ掛かり、首振り操作部材310が前転方向(図42(a)反時計回り)に揺動する。これにより、裏ボタン部材312dの状態が変化し、それを第2センサ部材313d(図20参照)で検出することで、遊技者からの入力動作の有無を判断することができる。 FIG. 42 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position and the player's hand is covered from the back side (right side of FIG. 42 (a)) of the swing operation member 310. From this state, when a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the back of the paper surface in FIG. 42 (a), the rod-shaped member 3345f receives an electromagnetic force and the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction. Due to the swing of the lever member 3340, the swing operation member 310 is caught in the player's hand, and the swing operation member 310 swings in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42A). As a result, the state of the back button member 312d changes, and by detecting this with the second sensor member 313d (see FIG. 20), it is possible to determine whether or not there is an input operation from the player.

この場合、遊技者は首振り操作部材310に手を被せているだけで、入力操作を行うことができ、入力操作を容易とすることができる。また、棒状部材3345fに電流を流す態様(タイミングや強さ)によって裏ボタン部材312dの状態が変化する(遊技者が手を被せている首振り操作部材310が前転方向に揺動する)タイミングを制御できる。そのため、遊技者に入力操作を求めることなく、手を首振り操作部材310に被せさせておき、棒状部材3345fに流れる電流の向きや強さを制御することで、制御側で裏ボタン312dの入力操作のタイミングを決定することができる。これにより、例えば、タイミング良く入力をすることを求める演出を行う場合に、遊技者の負担を減少させることができる。 In this case, the player can perform the input operation simply by putting his / her hand on the swing operation member 310, and the input operation can be facilitated. Further, the timing at which the state of the back button member 312d changes (the swinging operation member 310 on which the player covers the hand swings in the forward rotation direction) depending on the mode (timing and strength) in which a current is passed through the rod-shaped member 3345f. Can be controlled. Therefore, the back button 312d is input on the control side by covering the swinging operation member 310 with the hand and controlling the direction and strength of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f without asking the player for an input operation. The timing of the operation can be determined. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the player, for example, when performing an effect that requires input at the right time.

また、遊技者が首振り操作部材310の背面側に手を被せることなく、例えば、レンズ部材317に手を置いているだけでは、図42(a)に示す状態からレバー部材3340を起き上がる方向に揺動させても、首振り操作部材310が前転方向(図42(a)反時計回り)に揺動することは無い。そのため、操作デバイス3300の操作の態様が複数存在する場合に、タイミング良く入力をするための操作の方法を指定することができ、遊技者に適切な方法で操作デバイス3300を操作させることができる。 Further, if the player does not put his / her hand on the back side of the swing operation member 310 but simply puts his / her hand on the lens member 317, for example, the lever member 3340 is raised from the state shown in FIG. 42 (a). Even if it is swung, the swing operation member 310 does not swing in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42A). Therefore, when there are a plurality of operation modes of the operation device 3300, it is possible to specify an operation method for inputting in a timely manner, and the player can operate the operation device 3300 by an appropriate method.

これは、レバー部材3340のレバー支持軸331d1の後下方に偏心カム部材333を配設する形態では不可能であり、例えば、本実施形態のように、レバー支持軸331d1の前側において棒状部材3345hが受ける電磁力が伝達され、本体部材341を起き上がる方向に揺動させる形態を採用することで、初めて達成される効果である。 This is not possible in the form in which the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged behind and below the lever support shaft 331d1 of the lever member 3340. For example, as in the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345h is provided on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1. This effect is achieved for the first time by adopting a form in which the received electromagnetic force is transmitted and the main body member 341 swings in the rising direction.

次いで、図43から図52を参照して、第4実施形態における操作デバイス4300について説明する。第1実施形態では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態でロック部材336がレバー部材340の揺動を規制する場合を説明したが、第4実施形態における操作デバイス4300は、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態でロック部材4336がレバー部材4340の揺動を規制する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the lock member 336 regulates the swing of the lever member 340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment has a neck. The lock member 4336 regulates the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図43は、第4実施形態における操作デバイス4300の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図43では、外側ケース部材320の図示が省略され、内側ケース部材4330が分解された状態が図示される。 FIG. 43 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 43, the illustration of the outer case member 320 is omitted, and the state in which the inner case member 4330 is disassembled is shown.

図43に示すように、内側ケース部材4330は、レバー部材4340が内側に配設される箱状に組立てられる左カバー部材4331及び右カバー部材4332と、左カバー部材4331から凸設される偏心カム軸331d2に軸支される偏心カム部材4333と、左カバー部材331から凸設されるロック軸4331d3に軸支されるロック部材4336と、を主に備える。なお、本実施形態における駆動部材挿通孔332d及び第2駆動装置337は、その配置および姿勢が第1実施形態とは若干異なるが、ロック部材4336を駆動させるという技術的思想は第1実施形態と同様であるので、同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 As shown in FIG. 43, the inner case member 4330 includes a left cover member 4331 and a right cover member 4332 that are assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 4340 is arranged inside, and an eccentric cam that is projected from the left cover member 4331. It mainly includes an eccentric cam member 4333 pivotally supported by the shaft 331d2 and a lock member 4336 pivotally supported by the lock shaft 4331d3 projecting from the left cover member 331. Although the arrangement and orientation of the drive member insertion hole 332d and the second drive device 337 in the present embodiment are slightly different from those in the first embodiment, the technical idea of driving the lock member 4336 is the same as that in the first embodiment. Since they are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

左カバー部材4331は、第1実施形態における左カバー部材331と異なり、上側側壁部331bから右方に凸設され円柱形状に形成される複数の棒状部材4331dを備える。 Unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment, the left cover member 4331 includes a plurality of rod-shaped members 4331d that are convex to the right from the upper side wall portion 331b and are formed in a cylindrical shape.

棒状部材4331dは、左カバー部材4331の最上部に配置されるレバー支持軸331d1と、そのレバー支持軸331d1の下方に配設される偏心カム軸331d2と、その偏心カム軸331d2の後方に配設されるロック軸4331d3と、を主に備える。 The rod-shaped member 4331d is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 4331, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 arranged below the lever support shaft 331d1, and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. The lock shaft 4331d3 is mainly provided.

ロック軸4331d3は、ロック部材4336が挿通される軸であって、左カバー部材4331及び右カバー部材4332に両持ちで支持される。 The lock shaft 4331d3 is a shaft through which the lock member 4336 is inserted, and is supported by the left cover member 4331 and the right cover member 4332 with both sides.

偏心カム部材4333は、第1実施形態における左カバー部材331と異なり、カム部4333cを備える。カム部4333cは、カム部333cと同様の構成とされるが、カム部333cに比較して、偏心カムの直径が大きく形成される。詳細には、カム部4333cの端部が本体部333aの軸心と合わせられ、カム部4333cの最大径部分がレバー部材4340に最接近した状態で、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置される大きさに、偏心カムの直径が形成される。 The eccentric cam member 4333 includes a cam portion 4333c, unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment. The cam portion 4333c has the same configuration as the cam portion 333c, but the diameter of the eccentric cam is formed larger than that of the cam portion 333c. Specifically, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position with the end of the cam portion 4333c aligned with the axis of the main body portion 333a and the maximum diameter portion of the cam portion 4333c closest to the lever member 4340. The diameter of the eccentric cam is formed to the size of the cam.

ロック部材4336は、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置付近に配置され、レバー部材4340のロック受け部材4350が配設される側が上方に配置された状態で、ロック受け部材4350に対して下側から当接し、レバー部材4340の揺動を規制する部材である。 The lock member 4336 is arranged from below with respect to the lock receiving member 4350 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged near the downward position and the side of the lever member 4340 where the lock receiving member 4350 is arranged is arranged upward. It is a member that abuts and regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

図44(a)は、ロック部材4336の正面図であり、図44(b)は、図44(a)のXXXXIVb方向視におけるロック部材4336の側面図である。 44 (a) is a front view of the lock member 4336, and FIG. 44 (b) is a side view of the lock member 4336 in the XXXIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a).

ロック部材4336は、長尺板状に形成される本体部材4336aと、断面扇型の板形状に形成されると共に第2駆動装置337の駆動力がギアの歯合により伝達される伝達部材4336bと、を主に備える。 The lock member 4336 includes a main body member 4336a formed in a long plate shape and a transmission member 4336b formed in a fan-shaped cross-section and the driving force of the second driving device 337 is transmitted by the meshing of gears. , Is mainly provided.

本体部材4336aは、長尺板状に形成される本体部4336a1と、その本体部4336a1の左右方向(図44(a)左右方向)に穿設されると共にロック軸4331d3(図43参照)が挿通される軸支孔4336a2と、本体部4336a1の伝達部材4336bと反対側の側面から軸支孔4336a2の上方において凸出される係止部4336a3と、本体部4336a1の伝達部材4336bと対向する側の側面で軸支孔4336a2の下方において背面側(図44(b)右側)から正面側に凹設される凹設部4336a4と、を主に備える。 The main body member 4336a is bored in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 44A) of the main body portion 4336a1 formed in the shape of a long plate and the main body portion 4336a1, and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. The shaft support hole 4336a2 to be formed, the locking portion 4336a3 protruding above the shaft support hole 4336a2 from the side surface of the main body portion 4336a1 opposite to the transmission member 4336b, and the side surface of the main body portion 4336a1 facing the transmission member 4336b. A recessed portion 4336a4, which is recessed from the back surface side (right side in FIG. 44B) to the front surface side below the shaft support hole 4336a2, is mainly provided.

係止部4336a3は、ロック軸4331d3に固定され一方の腕部が連結側壁部331cに係止されるねじりバネSP41の他方の腕部が係止される部分である(図45参照)。これにより、本体部材4336aは常時、図44(b)反時計回りに付勢される。 The locking portion 4336a3 is a portion in which the other arm portion of the torsion spring SP41 fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and one arm portion being locked to the connecting side wall portion 331c is locked (see FIG. 45). As a result, the main body member 4336a is constantly urged counterclockwise in FIG. 44 (b).

凹設部4336a4は、伝達部材4336bの凸設部4336b4と当接される部分である。凹設部4336aの背面側からの深さが伝達部材4336bの凸設部4336b4の厚み以上とされることにより、本体部材4336aをロック待機状態(図45(a)参照)にする際の本体部材4336aの姿勢を本体部材4336aと連結側壁部331cとの関係(本体部材4336aが連結側壁部331cに当接された状態で姿勢保持すること)から規定することができる。 The recessed portion 4336a4 is a portion of the transmission member 4336b that comes into contact with the convex portion 4336b4. When the depth of the recessed portion 4336a from the back surface side is equal to or greater than the thickness of the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b, the main body member 4336a is put into the lock standby state (see FIG. 45A). The posture of the 4336a can be defined from the relationship between the main body member 4336a and the connecting side wall portion 331c (holding the posture in a state where the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c).

伝達部材4336bは、断面扇型に形成され曲面部に駆動ギア337bに歯合されるギア部が形成される本体部4336b1と、その本体部4336b1の左右方向(図44(a)左右方向)に穿設されると共にロック軸4331d3(図43参照)が挿通される軸支孔4336b2と、図示しないセンサ部材の隙間を通り伝達部材4336bの姿勢を検出可能とする板状の検出片4336b3と、本体部4336b1の本体部材4336aと対向する側の側面から凸設されると共に本体部4336b1の揺動方向で凹設部4336a4と当接される凸設部4336b4と、を主に備える。 The transmission member 4336b has a main body portion 4336b1 formed in a fan shape in cross section and a gear portion meshed with the drive gear 337b is formed on the curved surface portion, and the main body portion 4336b1 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 44A). A shaft support hole 4336b2 through which the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted, a plate-shaped detection piece 4336b3 that can detect the posture of the transmission member 4336b through a gap of a sensor member (not shown), and a main body. Mainly includes a convex portion 4336b4 which is projected from the side surface of the portion 4336b1 on the side facing the main body member 4336a and which is brought into contact with the concave portion 4336a4 in the swing direction of the main body portion 4336b1.

凸設部4336b4は、本体部4336b1の背面側端部に形成される。これにより、伝達部材4336bを連結側壁部331cに近接させる方向に揺動させることで、ねじりバネSP41の付勢力により揺動する本体部材4336aの背面側側面を連結側壁部331cと当接させることができる。 The convex portion 4336b4 is formed at the back end side end portion of the main body portion 4336b1. As a result, by swinging the transmission member 4336b in a direction close to the connecting side wall portion 331c, the back surface side surface of the main body member 4336a that swings due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 can be brought into contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c. it can.

図45(a)及び図45(b)は、ロック部材4336の側面図である。なお、図45(a)及び図45(b)では、駆動ギア337b及び連結側壁部331cが組立状態の配置で図示される。 45 (a) and 45 (b) are side views of the lock member 4336. In addition, in FIG. 45A and FIG. 45B, the drive gear 337b and the connecting side wall portion 331c are shown in an assembled arrangement.

ロック部材4336は、図45(a)に示すロック待機状態と、図45(b)に示すロック強制解除状態とを構成可能とされる。なお、ロック待機状態とは、伝達部材4336bが連結側壁部331cに近接配置され本体部材4336aが連結側壁部331cに当接された状態を意味する。 The lock member 4336 can be configured into a lock standby state shown in FIG. 45 (a) and a lock forced release state shown in FIG. 45 (b). The lock standby state means a state in which the transmission member 4336b is arranged close to the connecting side wall portion 331c and the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c.

また、ロック強制解除状態とは、ロック待機状態から駆動ギア337bが回転し伝達部材4336bが連結側壁部331cから離反する方向に揺動されることで本体部材4336aのレバー部材4340と対向する側の端部がレバー部材4340と当接しない位置に配置された状態を意味する。ロック強制解除状態では、伝達部材4336bの凸設部4336b4が凹設部4336a4に当接し本体部材4336aの姿勢を保持する。 Further, in the lock forced release state, the drive gear 337b rotates from the lock standby state and the transmission member 4336b is swung in the direction away from the connecting side wall portion 331c, so that the main body member 4336a faces the lever member 4340. It means a state in which the end portion is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the lever member 4340. In the locked forced release state, the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b comes into contact with the concave portion 4336a4 and holds the posture of the main body member 4336a.

ロック待機状態において、レバー部材4340が本体部材4336aの上方から当接すれば、ロック部材4336によりレバー部材4340の揺動を規制することができる(図47(a)参照)。レバー部材4340の揺動が規制された状態からロック強制解除状態にすれば、レバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解けて、レバー部材4340が揺動可能とされる(図48参照)。 If the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the main body member 4336a from above in the lock standby state, the lock member 4336 can regulate the swing of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 47 (a)). If the lock is forcibly released from the state in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted, the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 is released and the lever member 4340 can swing (see FIG. 48).

ここで、再度ロック待機状態とすることで(駆動ギア337bを回転させて、伝達部材4336bを図6−1時計回りに回すことで)、後述するように、レバー部材4340のロック部材4336と当接する側の端部がロック部材4336を上方に乗り越えることに伴って自動的にレバー部材4340の揺動を規制することができる。一方、ロック強制解除状態を維持しておくことで、レバー部材4340の揺動が規制されることを防止することができる。 Here, by putting the lock standby state again (by rotating the drive gear 337b and turning the transmission member 4336b clockwise in FIG. 6-1), as will be described later, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the lock member 4336. The swing of the lever member 4340 can be automatically regulated as the end portion on the contacting side gets over the lock member 4336 upward. On the other hand, by maintaining the lock forced release state, it is possible to prevent the swing of the lever member 4340 from being restricted.

図46は、レバー部材4340及び首振り操作部材310の正面分解斜視図である。レバー部材4340は、鉄などの金属材料から形成され断面コ字状の長尺棒状に形成される本体部材4341と、本体部材4341の軸孔341bと同軸で軸支されるロック受け部材4350と、を主に備えて構成される。 FIG. 46 is a front exploded perspective view of the lever member 4340 and the swing operation member 310. The lever member 4340 includes a main body member 4341 formed of a metal material such as iron and formed into a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, and a lock receiving member 4350 coaxially supported with a shaft hole 341b of the main body member 4341. It is mainly composed of.

本体部材4341は、断面コ字状の長尺棒状に形成され後端部左側(図46左側)に切り欠きを有する前方本体部4341aと、その前方本体部4341a1の切り欠きを補填する態様で配設される断面L字状の後方本体部4341a2と、その後方本体部4341a2の上面側に締結固定され電流が導通している時のみ後方本体部4341a2と前方本体部4341a1とを吸着する電磁石部材M41と、前方本体部4341a1の略中央部において左右方向に穿設される一対の軸孔341bと、を主に備える。 The main body member 4341 is arranged in a manner of compensating for the front main body portion 4341a which is formed in a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section and has a notch on the left side of the rear end portion (left side in FIG. 46) and the notch of the front main body portion 4341a1. An electromagnet member M41 that attracts the rear main body 4341a2 and the front main body 4341a1 only when it is fastened and fixed to the upper surface side of the rear main body 4341a2 having an L-shaped cross section and the current is conducting. A pair of shaft holes 341b formed in the left-right direction at a substantially central portion of the front main body portion 4341a1 are mainly provided.

ロック受け部材4350は、前後に長尺の略直方体状に形成されると共にレバー部材4340の後方本体部4341a2の下面に締結固定される本体部4351と、その本体部4351の前側端部において左右方向に穿設され軸孔341bと同軸でレバー支持軸331d1(図43参照)に軸支される軸孔4352と、を主に備える。そのため、後方本体部4341a2が前方本体部4341a1とは独立してレバー支持軸331d1を中心に揺動可能とされるが、それについては後述する。 The lock receiving member 4350 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape in the front-rear direction, and is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the rear main body portion 4341a2 of the lever member 4340, and the main body portion 4351 and the front end portion of the main body portion 4351 in the left-right direction. 4352 is mainly provided with a shaft hole 4352 which is formed in the shaft hole 341b and is coaxially supported by the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the rear main body portion 4341a2 can swing around the lever support shaft 331d1 independently of the front main body portion 4341a1, which will be described later.

図47(a)及び図47(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図47(a)及び図47(b)では、レバー部材4340がロック部材4336に揺動を規制された状態が図示され、図47(b)では図47(a)に示す状態から首振り操作部材310が軸支棒363(図46参照)を軸に後方に首振り操作された状態が図示されると共に、首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。本実施形態では、図47(a)の状態を初期位置とする。また、図17(a)では操作デバイス300が図示されるが、外観は同じなので、操作デバイス4300とみなして説明を行う。以下、本実施形態において同様である。 47 (a) and 47 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b) show a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336, and FIG. 47 (b) shows the neck from the state shown in FIG. 47 (a). The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung backward about the shaft support rod 363 (see FIG. 46) is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 47 (a) is set as the initial position. Further, although the operation device 300 is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same, the operation device 300 will be regarded as the operation device 4300 for description. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

図47(b)に示すように、第1実施形態と同様に、レバー部材4340の揺動が規制された状態で首振り操作部材310を首振り操作し、裏ボタン部材312dを押し込み操作することができる。 As shown in FIG. 47 (b), similarly to the first embodiment, the swing operation member 310 is swung and the back button member 312d is pushed in while the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted. Can be done.

本実施形態では、ロック部材4336がレバー支持軸331d1の後方においてレバー部材4340に下側から当接されるので、首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる誤操作に対して、ロック部材4336の強度で抵抗することができる。 In the present embodiment, since the lock member 4336 comes into contact with the lever member 4340 from below behind the lever support shaft 331d1, the strength of the lock member 4336 resists an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310. Can be done.

レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材4336とロック軸4331d3よりも後方で当接されることで、ロック部材4336がロック強制解除状態(図45(b)参照)側へ揺動することを抑制することができる。これにより、ロック部材4336が前倒れする方向(図47(a)左方向)にレバー部材4340からロック部材4336に荷重を与えることができ、ロック部材4336の姿勢を保持することができる。 The rear end of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the lock member 4336 behind the lock shaft 4331d3 to prevent the lock member 4336 from swinging toward the lock forced release state (see FIG. 45B). can do. As a result, a load can be applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 4336 in the direction in which the lock member 4336 tilts forward (leftward in FIG. 47 (a)), and the posture of the lock member 4336 can be maintained.

また、本実施形態ではレバー部材4340の揺動をロック部材4336で規制する状態において、偏心カム部材4333をレバー部材4340から離間させておける。そのため、レバー部材4340の揺動をロック部材4336で規制している間に偏心カム部材4333が誤作動等により回転した場合に、偏心カム部材4333やレバー部材4340が破損することを防止することができる。 Further, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 4333 can be separated from the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336. Therefore, if the eccentric cam member 4333 rotates due to a malfunction or the like while the swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated by the lock member 4336, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 from being damaged. it can.

図48は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図48では、ロック部材4336がロック強制解除状態とされ、レバー部材4340が揺動し始めた状態が図示される。 FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 48 shows a state in which the lock member 4336 is in the locked forced release state and the lever member 4340 starts to swing.

図48に示すように、ロック部材4336にレバー部材4340が揺動を規制された状態(図47(a)参照)からロック部材4336がロック強制解除状態とされると、ねじりバネSP1の付勢力によりレバー部材4340が起き上がる方向(図48時計回り)に揺動する。 As shown in FIG. 48, when the lock member 4336 is in the locked forced release state from the state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47 (a)), the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 The lever member 4340 swings in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48).

これにより、遊技者に対して操作デバイス4300を操作することを促すことができるが、レバー部材4340の揺動速度がねじりバネSP1の付勢力により定まり、毎回変わらないので、演出自由度が低減されるという問題点があった。 As a result, the player can be urged to operate the operation device 4300, but the swing speed of the lever member 4340 is determined by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 and does not change each time, so that the degree of freedom of production is reduced. There was a problem of

なお、レバー部材4340と当接する際の偏心カム部材4333の姿勢を様々に変化させ、偏心カム部材4333の回転とレバー部材4340の揺動とを連動させることで動作速度を多様にすることもできるが、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材4333に誤って高速で衝突した場合に偏心カム部材4333が破損する恐れがあるという問題点があった。そのため、ロック部材4336をロック強制解除状態へ向けて揺動させるタイミングは、偏心カム部材4333が退避位相(図49(a)参照)とされていることを第3センサ部材325a3(図9参照)で検出してからとすることが好ましい。 The operation speed can be diversified by variously changing the posture of the eccentric cam member 4333 when it comes into contact with the lever member 4340 and interlocking the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the swing of the lever member 4340. However, there is a problem that the eccentric cam member 4333 may be damaged when the lever member 4340 accidentally collides with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed. Therefore, the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9) indicates that the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase (see FIG. 49 (a)) at the timing of swinging the lock member 4336 toward the locked forced release state. It is preferable to detect with.

ここで、首振り操作部材310に内包される振動装置366の振動の反作用は、直線L1に沿ってレバー部材4340を前倒れさせる方向に作用する。これにより、例えば、レバー部材4340が起き上がる方向(図48時計回り)に揺動している最中に振動装置366を振動させることで、レバー部材4340を前倒れする方向に押し戻すことができ、レバー部材4340の揺動速度や揺動の態様を変化させることができる(遅くすることができる)。従って、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材4333に誤って高速で衝突することを防ぐことができる。 Here, the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 366 included in the swing operation member 310 acts in the direction of tilting the lever member 4340 forward along the straight line L1. As a result, for example, by vibrating the vibrating device 366 while the lever member 4340 is swinging in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48), the lever member 4340 can be pushed back in the forward tilting direction. The swing speed and swing mode of the member 4340 can be changed (can be slowed down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from accidentally colliding with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed.

図49(a)及び図49(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図49(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図49(b)では、図49(a)の状態から首振り操作部材310が後方(図49(a)右方向)へ向けて押し込み操作された状態が図示されると共に首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。 49 (a) and 49 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 49 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 49 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is rearward (FIG. 49) from the state of FIG. 49 (a). The state in which the pushing operation is performed toward 49 (a) to the right) is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swinging operation member 310 is omitted.

図49(a)及び図49(b)では、ロック部材4336がロック強制解除状態で維持される。そのため、例えば、図49(a)の状態から遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持し上下に移動させる操作をおこなったとしても、ロック部材4336によってレバー部材4340の揺動が規制されないので、遊技者が手を離せばねじりバネSP1の付勢力により首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に復帰する。 In FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b), the lock member 4336 is maintained in the locked forced release state. Therefore, for example, even if the player performs an operation of grasping the swing operation member 310 and moving it up and down from the state of FIG. 49A, the lock member 4336 does not regulate the swing of the lever member 4340. When the person releases the hand, the swinging operation member 310 returns to the upward position by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1.

図50(a)、図50(b)、図51(a)及び図51(b)は図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図50(a)、図50(b)、図51(a)及び図51(b)では、偏心カム部材4333の回転によりレバー部材4340が揺動する様子が時系列に沿って図示される。 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a) and 51 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 50A, FIG. 50B, FIG. 51A and FIG. 51B, a state in which the lever member 4340 swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 is shown in chronological order. To.

図50(a)では、偏心カム部材4333が退避位相とされ、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材4333に当接されると共にロック部材4336がロック待機状態とされた状態が図示され、図50(b)では、図50(a)の状態から偏心カム部材4333が約90度だけ図50(a)反時計回りに回転した状態が図示される。 FIG. 50 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the eccentric cam member 4333, and the lock member 4336 is in the lock standby state. ) Shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 50 (a) by about 90 degrees from the state of FIG. 50 (a).

また、図51(a)では、図50(b)の状態から偏心カム部材4333が更に同一方向に回転し、レバー部材4340がロック部材4336の上端に当接され揺動を規制された状態が図示され、図51(b)では、図51(a)の状態から偏心カム部材4333が更に同一方向に回転し、退避位相(図50(a)参照)とされた状態が図示される。 Further, in FIG. 51 (a), the eccentric cam member 4333 further rotates in the same direction from the state of FIG. 50 (b), the lever member 4340 is in contact with the upper end of the lock member 4336, and the swing is restricted. Illustrated, FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is further rotated in the same direction from the state of FIG. 51 (a) to be in the retracted phase (see FIG. 50 (a)).

図50(a)、図50(b)、図51(a)及び図51(b)に示すように、操作デバイス4300は、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置されてから遊技者が押し下げ動作を行わない場合でも、偏心カム部材4333によりレバー部材4340を揺動させることで、首振り操作部材を下向き位置(初期位置)まで移動させることができる。 As shown in FIGS. 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a), and 51 (b), the operation device 4300 is pushed down by the player after the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position. Even when the operation is not performed, the swinging operation member can be moved to the downward position (initial position) by swinging the lever member 4340 by the eccentric cam member 4333.

ロック部材4336は、ロック待機状態とされる。この場合、ロック部材4336の左側側面をレバー部材4340が押すことでロック部材4336が後倒れする方向に回転する(図50(b)参照)。一方で、ロック部材4336は、ねじりバネSP41(図45参照)により常に前倒れする方向に付勢されるので、レバー部材4340がロック部材4336の上方まで移動すると、付勢力によりレバー部材4340の下側に入り込む(図51(a)参照)。このように、レバー部材4340を揺動させる過程において、ロック部材4336が自動でレバー部材4340の揺動を規制する。 The lock member 4336 is put into a lock standby state. In this case, when the lever member 4340 pushes the left side surface of the lock member 4336, the lock member 4336 rotates in the direction of tilting backward (see FIG. 50 (b)). On the other hand, since the lock member 4336 is always urged by the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) in the direction of tilting forward, when the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 4336, the urging force under the lever member 4340. Enter the side (see FIG. 51 (a)). In this way, in the process of swinging the lever member 4340, the lock member 4336 automatically regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

そのため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を押し下げるタイミングが不明であっても、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置されることにより、ロック部材4336でレバー部材4340の揺動を規制することを確実に行うことができる。 Therefore, even if the timing at which the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 is unknown, the lock member 4336 regulates the swing of the lever member 4340 by arranging the swing operation member 310 in the downward position. You can do it with certainty.

レバー部材4340の揺動が規制される配置(図51(a)参照)では、偏心カム部材4333の最大径部分がレバー部材4340と当接される。そのため、レバー部材4340の揺動をロック部材4333により規制した状態(図51(a)参照)で、偏心カム部材4333を逆回転させて戻すのではなく、同一方向に回転させ続けることで偏心カム部材4333を退避位相に復帰させることができる。従って、偏心カム部材4333を逆回転させるタイミングを検出する検出装置を不要とできると共に、偏心カム部材4333を駆動させる第1駆動装置335の制御を容易に行うことができる。 In an arrangement in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted (see FIG. 51 (a)), the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 comes into contact with the lever member 4340. Therefore, in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4333 (see FIG. 51 (a)), the eccentric cam member 4333 is not rotated in the reverse direction and returned, but is continuously rotated in the same direction to obtain the eccentric cam. The member 4333 can be returned to the retracted phase. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a detection device that detects the timing at which the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated in the reverse direction, and it is possible to easily control the first drive device 335 that drives the eccentric cam member 4333.

図52は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図50(a)の状態におけるレバー部材4340、首振り操作部材310及び偏心カム部材4333の外形が想像線で図示される。 FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). The outer shapes of the lever member 4340, the swing operation member 310, and the eccentric cam member 4333 in the state of FIG. 50A are shown by imaginary lines.

図52に示すように、偏心カム部材4333を偏心カム軸331d2中心に角度θ41で往復回転することで、レバー部材4340をレバー支持軸331d1中心に角度θ42で往復揺動させることができる。これにより、遊技者に操作デバイス4300を注目させる煽り動作を行うことができる。 As shown in FIG. 52, by reciprocating the eccentric cam member 4333 around the center of the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 at an angle θ41, the lever member 4340 can be reciprocally swung around the center of the lever support shaft 331d1 at an angle θ42. As a result, it is possible to perform a fanning operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 4300.

この際、偏心カム部材4333のカム部4333cをレバー支持軸331d1の反対側に配置した状態で往復回転させることで、偏心カム部材4333とレバー部材4340との当接位置からレバー支持軸331d1までの距離を長く保つことができる。これにより、レバー部材4340を揺動させるために必要な駆動力を抑制できる(駆動力が小さくても良い)と共に、レバー部材4340から偏心カム部材4333にかけられる荷重を抑制することができる(過荷重にも耐えられる)。 At this time, by reciprocating the cam portion 4333c of the eccentric cam member 4333 in a state of being arranged on the opposite side of the lever support shaft 331d1, from the contact position between the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 to the lever support shaft 331d1. You can keep the distance long. As a result, the driving force required to swing the lever member 4340 can be suppressed (the driving force may be small), and the load applied from the lever member 4340 to the eccentric cam member 4333 can be suppressed (overload). Can withstand).

また、ロック部材4336がロック強制解除状態とされることで、レバー部材4340を往復揺動させる際に、ロック部材4336からレバー部材4340が負荷を与えられることを防止でき、偏心カム部材4333を回転させるために第1駆動装置335(図43参照)が発生させる駆動力を抑制することができる。 Further, by setting the lock member 4336 to the lock forced release state, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from being applied a load from the lock member 4336 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung, and the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated. It is possible to suppress the driving force generated by the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 43).

図53(a)は、レバー部材4340の本体部材4341及びロック受け部材4350の上面図であり、図53(b)及び図53(c)は、図53(a)のLIIIb方向視におけるレバー部材4340の本体部材4341及びロック受け部材4350の側面図である。なお、図53(c)は、図53(a)の状態から、前方本体部4341a1が電磁石部材M41から離反する方向に揺動した状態が図示される。 FIG. 53 (a) is a top view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of the lever member 4340, and FIGS. 53 (b) and 53 (c) are lever members in the LIIIb direction of FIG. 53 (a). It is a side view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of 4340. Note that FIG. 53 (c) shows a state in which the front main body portion 4341a1 swings in a direction away from the electromagnet member M41 from the state of FIG. 53 (a).

図53(a)に示すように、前方本体部4341a1及び後方本体部4341a2が電磁石部材M41により吸着される。そのため、電磁石部材M41の吸着力以上の荷重が本体部材4341に与えられない限り、前方本体部4341a1及び後方本体部4341a2が一体で揺動される。 As shown in FIG. 53A, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are attracted by the electromagnet member M41. Therefore, unless a load equal to or greater than the attractive force of the electromagnet member M41 is applied to the main body member 4341, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are integrally swung.

一方、電磁石部材M41は、電流の導通が停止すれば吸着力を失う。そのため、例えば、電源が切られた状態では、前方本体部4341a1と後方本体部4341a2との相対的な位置(角度)が変化する(図53(c)参照)。 On the other hand, the electromagnet member M41 loses its attractive force when the conduction of the current is stopped. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off, the relative position (angle) between the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 changes (see FIG. 53 (c)).

図54(a)及び図54(b)は、図6のVIb―VIb線で断面視したパチンコ機4010及び操作デバイス4300の部分断面図である。なお、図6では、第1実施形態におけるパチンコ機10及び操作デバイス300が図示されているが、第4実施形態のパチンコ機4010及び操作デバイス4300と外観は同じなので、第4実施形態のパチンコ機4010及び操作デバイス4300が図示されていると見なして説明を行う。 54 (a) and 54 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 4010 and the operating device 4300 viewed in cross section along the VIb-VIb line of FIG. Although the pachinko machine 10 and the operation device 300 in the first embodiment are shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment has the same appearance as the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment. The description will be given assuming that the 4010 and the operation device 4300 are illustrated.

ここで、操作デバイス4300は、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置されるか、下向き位置に配置されるかで、首振り操作部材310の正面側への張出長さが変化する。即ち、図54(b)に図示される状態に比較して、図54(a)に図示される状態の方が、首振り操作部材310が距離X41だけ正面側に張り出される。 Here, in the operation device 4300, the extension length of the swing operation member 310 to the front side changes depending on whether the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), the swing operation member 310 projects to the front side by a distance X41 as compared with the state shown in FIG. 54 (b).

この場合、パチンコ機4010の前後方向の幅寸法が図54(b)に示す状態の方が小さくなるので、例えば、パチンコ機4010を梱包する箱を選定する際に、図54(b)に示す状態を基準として選定した方が、箱を小さくすることができる。一方で、レバー部材4340が直線棒状で固定される場合にロック部材4336に揺動を規制された状態で電源が切られると、首振り操作部材310に外部から力を加えても首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に配置することができず、パチンコ機4010を梱包用の箱に入れることができないという問題点があった。 In this case, the width dimension of the pachinko machine 4010 in the front-rear direction is smaller in the state shown in FIG. 54 (b). Therefore, for example, when selecting a box for packing the pachinko machine 4010, it is shown in FIG. 54 (b). The box can be made smaller by selecting it based on the condition. On the other hand, when the lever member 4340 is fixed in the shape of a straight bar and the power is turned off in a state where the lock member 4336 regulates the swing, the swing operation member 310 even if an external force is applied to the swing operation member 310. There is a problem that the 310 cannot be arranged in the upward position and the pachinko machine 4010 cannot be put in the packing box.

また、工場の検査ライン等で、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態のパチンコ機4010の幅でラインの幅を決めておくと、首振り操作部材310が誤って下向き位置に配置された状態でラインを流れることにより、検査機等に首振り操作部材310が衝突する恐れがあるという問題点があった。 Further, if the width of the line is determined by the width of the pachinko machine 4010 in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position in the inspection line of the factory or the like, the swing operation member 310 is erroneously arranged in the downward position. There is a problem that the swinging operation member 310 may collide with the inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line in this state.

一方、本実施形態では、レバー部材4340の本体部材4341を一体化させている電磁石部材M41の吸着力が、電源を切ることにより失われる。そのため、電源を切ることによって、ロック受け部材4350がロック部材4336に当接しているか否かに関わらず、ねじりバネSP1の付勢力によりレバー部材4340の前方本体部4341a1を起き上がる方向に揺動させ、首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に配置することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the attractive force of the electromagnet member M41 that integrates the main body member 4341 of the lever member 4340 is lost when the power is turned off. Therefore, by turning off the power, the front main body portion 4341a1 of the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 regardless of whether the lock receiving member 4350 is in contact with the lock member 4336. The swing operation member 310 can be arranged in an upward position.

これにより、梱包時に首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に確実に配置させることができる。また、パチンコ機4010を検査ラインに流す際に電源を切ることで、検査機等に首振り操作部材310が衝突することを防止することができる。 As a result, the swing operation member 310 can be reliably arranged in the upward position at the time of packing. Further, by turning off the power when the pachinko machine 4010 is sent to the inspection line, it is possible to prevent the swinging operation member 310 from colliding with the inspection machine or the like.

次いで、図55から図61を参照して、第5実施形態における操作デバイス5300について説明する。第4実施形態では偏心カム部材4333及びロック部材4336が独立で駆動される場合を説明したが、第5実施形態における操作デバイス5300は、偏心カム部材5333及びロック部材5336が単一の駆動モータ335aで同期駆動される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61. In the fourth embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock member 4336 are driven independently has been described, but in the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are a single drive motor 335a. It is driven synchronously with. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図55は、第5実施形態における内側ケース部材5330の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図55では、右カバー部材の図示が省略される。 FIG. 55 is a front exploded perspective view of the inner case member 5330 according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 55, the illustration of the right cover member is omitted.

図55に示すように、内側ケース部材5330は、偏心カム軸331d2に軸支される偏心カム部材5333と、偏心カム軸331d2の後方に駆動ギア335bを挟んで配置される円柱形状のロック解除軸5331d5と、そのロック解除軸5331d5に軸支されるロック解除カム部材5339と、ロック軸4331d3に軸支されるロック部材5336と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 55, the inner case member 5330 is a cylindrical unlocking shaft arranged with the eccentric cam member 5333 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 and the drive gear 335b behind the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. It mainly includes a 5331d5, an unlocking cam member 5339 pivotally supported by the unlocking shaft 5331d5, and a locking member 5336 pivotally supported by the lock shaft 4331d3.

図56(a)は、偏心カム部材5333の正面図であり、図56(b)は、図56(a)のLVIb方向視における偏心カム部材5333の底面図であり、図56(c)は、図56(a)のLVIc方向視における偏心カム部材5333の側面図である。 56 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 5333, FIG. 56 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 5333 in the LVIb direction view of FIG. 56 (a), and FIG. 56 (c) is a bottom view. , FIG. 56A is a side view of the eccentric cam member 5333 in the LVIc direction view.

図56に示すように、偏心カム部材5333は、正面視略D字状のカム部5333cと、部分的に切り欠き5333f1が配設される傘部5333fと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 56, the eccentric cam member 5333 mainly includes a cam portion 5333c having a substantially D-shape in front view and an umbrella portion 5333f in which a notch 5333f1 is partially arranged.

カム部5333cは、正面視略D字状に形成され、直線形状で偏心カム部材5333の最大径端部まで延設されると共に剛性の高い剛体部5333c1と、その剛体部5333c1に比較して剛性が低くレバー部材4340からの衝撃を緩和する緩衝部5333c2と、を主に備える。なお、本実施形態では、剛体部5333c1の正面視における厚さが緩衝部5333c2の正面視における厚さの略3倍に設定される。 The cam portion 5333c is formed in a substantially D-shape in front view, has a linear shape and extends to the maximum diameter end of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has a rigid body portion 5333c1 having high rigidity as compared with the rigid body portion 5333c1. It is mainly provided with a cushioning portion 5333c2 which is low in diameter and cushions the impact from the lever member 4340. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the rigid body portion 5333c1 in the front view is set to be substantially three times the thickness of the buffer portion 5333c2 in the front view.

傘部5333fの切り欠き5333f1は、駆動ギア355bに対向配置された場合に駆動ギア355bを軸方向に抜き取り可能な大きさに形成される切り欠きであって、駆動ギア355b(図55参照)に対する偏心カム部材5333の初期位相を合わせるための目印である。ここで、偏心カム部材5333とロック部材5336とを単一の駆動モータ335a(図55参照)で同期動作させる場合、レバー部材4340の姿勢を検出してロック部材5336又は偏心カム部材5333の片方のみを揺動させることができないので、予め偏心カム部材5333とロック部材5336との位相を合わせておく必要があるという問題点があった。 The notch 5333f1 of the umbrella portion 5333f is a notch formed so as to be able to pull out the drive gear 355b in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is arranged to face the drive gear 355b, and is a notch formed with respect to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. 55). It is a mark for matching the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333. Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are synchronously operated by a single drive motor 335a (see FIG. 55), the posture of the lever member 4340 is detected and only one of the lock member 5336 or the eccentric cam member 5333 is operated. Since it is not possible to swing the eccentric cam member 5333, there is a problem that it is necessary to match the phases of the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 in advance.

本実施形態では、切り欠き5333f1を傘部5333fに配設しているので、切り欠き5333f1を目印に、偏心カム部材5333の初期位相を容易に定めることができる。 In the present embodiment, since the notch 5333f1 is arranged in the umbrella portion 5333f, the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333 can be easily determined by using the notch 5333f1 as a mark.

なお、傘部5333fを本体部333aの反対側(図56(b)下方)に配設すると、左カバー部材4331(図55参照)に第1駆動装置335(図55参照)が締結固定された状態では、偏心カム部材5333を偏心カム軸331d2に挿通する際に傘部5333fが駆動ギア335bに当たる場合には偏心カム部材5333を挿通できない。 When the umbrella portion 5333f is arranged on the opposite side of the main body portion 333a (below FIG. 56B), the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, if the umbrella portion 5333f hits the drive gear 335b, the eccentric cam member 5333 cannot be inserted.

即ち、切り欠き5333f1を駆動ギア335bに対向させた姿勢でのみ偏心カム部材5333を偏心カム軸331d2に挿通することが可能となるので、偏心カム部材5333を正しい姿勢で組み立てることができる。 That is, since the eccentric cam member 5333 can be inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 only in the posture in which the notch 5333f1 faces the drive gear 335b, the eccentric cam member 5333 can be assembled in the correct posture.

図57(a)は、ロック解除カム部材5339の正面図であり、図57(b)は、図57(a)のLVIIb方向視におけるロック解除カム部材5339の底面図であり、図57(c)は、図57(a)のLVIIc方向視におけるロック解除カム部材5339の側面図である。 57 (a) is a front view of the unlock cam member 5339, FIG. 57 (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member 5339 in the LVIIb direction view of FIG. 57 (a), and FIG. 57 (c). ) Is a side view of the unlocked cam member 5339 in the LVIIc direction view of FIG. 57 (a).

図57に示すように、ロック解除カム部材5339は、偏心カム部材5333の本体部333aと同一の大きさに形成されると共に外周面に駆動ギア335b(図59参照)と歯合されるギア歯が形成される本体部5339aと、本体部5339aの中心に穿設されると共にロック解除軸5331d5が挿通される軸孔5339bと、本体部5339aの正面側の側面に沿って径方向外側へ向けて延設されると共にロック部材5336の係止部4336a3に当接可能な長さで形成される解除部5339cと、本体部5339aの正面側においてギア部分を覆う円板形状の傘部5339dと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 57, the unlock cam member 5339 is formed to have the same size as the main body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 59) on the outer peripheral surface. 5339a, a shaft hole 5339b formed in the center of the main body 5339a, and a shaft hole 5339b through which the unlocking shaft 5331d5 is inserted, and a side surface of the main body 5339a on the front side toward the outside in the radial direction. A release portion 5339c that is extended and formed with a length that allows contact with the locking portion 4336a3 of the lock member 5336, and a disk-shaped umbrella portion 5339d that covers the gear portion on the front side of the main body portion 5339a. Mainly prepare.

傘部5339dは、部分的に外周面から軸側へ向けて切りかかれる切り欠き5339d1を備える。傘部5339dの切り欠き5339d1は、駆動ギア355bに対向配置された場合に駆動ギア355bを軸方向に抜き取り可能な大きさに形成される切り欠きであって、駆動ギア355b(図55参照)に対するロック解除カム部材5339の初期位相を合わせるための目印である。 The umbrella portion 5339d includes a notch 5339d1 that is partially cut from the outer peripheral surface toward the shaft side. The notch 5339d1 of the umbrella portion 5339d is a notch formed so as to be able to pull out the drive gear 355b in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is arranged to face the drive gear 355b, and is a notch with respect to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. It is a mark for matching the initial phase of the unlock cam member 5339.

なお、傘部5339dを本体部5339aの反対側(図57(b)下方)に配設すると、左カバー部材4331(図55参照)に第1駆動装置335(図55参照)が締結固定された状態では、ロック解除カム部材5339をロック解除軸5331d5に挿通する際に傘部5339dが駆動ギア335bに当たる場合にはロック解除カム部材5339を挿通できない。 When the umbrella portion 5339d is arranged on the opposite side of the main body portion 5339a (below FIG. 57B), the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, when the unlocking cam member 5339 is inserted into the unlocking shaft 5331d5, if the umbrella portion 5339d hits the drive gear 335b, the unlocking cam member 5339 cannot be inserted.

即ち、切り欠き5339d1を駆動ギア335bに対向させた姿勢でのみロック解除カム部材5339をロック解除軸5331d5に挿通することが可能となるので、ロック解除カム部材5339を正しい姿勢で組み立てることができる。 That is, since the unlock cam member 5339 can be inserted into the unlock shaft 5331d5 only in the posture in which the notch 5339d1 faces the drive gear 335b, the lock release cam member 5339 can be assembled in the correct posture.

図58(a)は、ロック部材5336の正面図であり、図58(b)は、図58(a)のLVIII方向視におけるロック部材5336の側面図である。図58(a)及び図58(b)に示すように、ロック部材5336は、長尺板状に形成される部材で構成され、断面扇型の板形状に形成される伝達部材4336b(図44参照)は不要とされる。 58 (a) is a front view of the lock member 5336, and FIG. 58 (b) is a side view of the lock member 5336 in the LVIII direction view of FIG. 58 (a). As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), the lock member 5336 is composed of a member formed in the shape of a long plate, and the transmission member 4336b formed in the shape of a fan-shaped cross section (FIG. 44). See) is not required.

ロック部材5336は、長尺板状に形成される本体部材5336aと、その本体部材5336aの左右方向(図58(a)左右方向)に穿設されると共にロック軸4331d3(図43参照)が挿通される軸支孔5336bと、本体部材5336aのロック解除カム部材5339と対向する側(図58(a)左側)の側面から軸支孔5336bの上方において凸出される係止部5336cと、を主に備える。 The lock member 5336 is bored in the main body member 5336a formed in the shape of a long plate and in the left-right direction (FIG. 58 (a) left-right direction) of the main body member 5336a, and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. Mainly, the shaft support hole 5336b to be formed and the locking portion 5336c protruding above the shaft support hole 5336b from the side surface of the main body member 5336a facing the unlock cam member 5339 (left side in FIG. 58 (a)). Prepare for.

係止部5336cは、ロック軸4331d3に固定され一方の腕部が連結側壁部331cに係止されるねじりバネSP41の他方の腕部が係止されると共にロック解除カム部材5339(図57参照)の解除部5339cから押される部分である。 The locking portion 5336c is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and one arm is locked to the connecting side wall 331c. The other arm of the torsion spring SP41 is locked and the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 57). It is a part pushed from the release part 5339c of.

本体部材5336aは、ロック部材5336がロック待機状態とされた場合にレバー部材4340と当接する側の側面に、レバー部材4340の後端部の軌跡に沿って湾曲される湾曲壁部5336a1と、その湾曲壁部5336a1の上端部からレバー部材4340に近接する側に軸支孔5336bを中心とした円に沿って凸設される凸設部5336a2と、を主に備える。 The main body member 5336a has a curved wall portion 5336a1 that is curved along the trajectory of the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 on the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the lever member 4340 when the lock member 5336 is in the lock standby state. Mainly provided is a convex portion 5336a2 which is projected along a circle centered on the shaft support hole 5336b on the side close to the lever member 4340 from the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 5336a1.

凸設部5336a2は、下端面が先端に向かうほど上方に傾斜している。これにより、レバー部材4340が凸設部5336a2に引っかかる(係止される)ことを抑制することができる。そのため、偏心カム部材5333を介してレバー部材4340を駆動させる駆動力を発生させる第1駆動装置335の駆動力を抑制することができる。 The convex portion 5336a2 is inclined upward so that the lower end surface toward the tip end surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from being caught (locked) on the convex portion 5336a2. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the driving force of the first driving device 335 that generates the driving force for driving the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333.

図59(a)及び図59(b)は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。図59(a)では、レバー部材4340がロック部材5336に揺動を規制される状態が図示され、図59(b)では、図59(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されロック解除カム部材5339がロック部材5336を押すことでロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解除され、レバー部材4340が起き上がる方向(時計回り)に揺動された状態が図示される。 59 (a) and 59 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336. FIG. 59 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 5336, and FIG. 59 (b) shows that the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59 (a). When the lock member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is shown.

図59(a)及び図59(b)に示すように、レバー部材4340に偏心カム部材5333を介して駆動力を与える前に、初期位置からレバー部材4340を揺動させることができる。そのため、首振り操作部材310が動いたら即座に首振り操作部材310を遊技者が操作することに伴って、偏心カム部材5333が破損することを抑制することができる。例えば、首振り操作部材310が初期位置から動き出した場合に、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上下に振る操作を行ったとしても、偏心カム部材5333からレバー部材4340が離れているので、偏心カム部材5333とレバー部材4340とが衝突することを抑制することができる。 As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the lever member 4340 can be swung from the initial position before the driving force is applied to the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 5333 from being damaged as the player operates the swing operation member 310 immediately after the swing operation member 310 moves. For example, when the swing operation member 310 starts to move from the initial position, even if the player swings the swing operation member 310 up and down, the lever member 4340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 5333, so that the lever member 4340 is eccentric. It is possible to prevent the cam member 5333 and the lever member 4340 from colliding with each other.

これは、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態でレバー部材4340の揺動を規制する場合(例えば、第1実施形態の場合)には避けられなかった課題であって、本実施形態のように、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態でレバー部材4340の揺動を規制することで解決されたものである。 This is an unavoidable problem when the swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated (for example, in the case of the first embodiment) in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position. This is solved by restricting the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position as in the embodiment.

なお、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持操作しない場合であっても、ロック部材5336が揺動の規制を解除する場合(図59(b)参照)の偏心カム部材5333の姿勢が機械的に決まるため、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333の特定の位置(短径側の位置、カム部5333cの逆側の位置)に確実にレバー部材4340を当接させることができる。 Even when the player does not grip the swing operation member 310, the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333 when the lock member 5336 releases the swing restriction (see FIG. 59 (b)) is mechanical. Therefore, the lever member 4340 can surely bring the lever member 4340 into contact with a specific position (position on the minor axis side, position on the opposite side of the cam portion 5333c) of the eccentric cam member 5333.

図59(b)に示すように、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解除されレバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333に当接する際に、偏心カム部材5333は筒状部333bがレバー部材4340に最も近接する姿勢をとる。そのため、レバー部材4340がカム部5333cに衝突することにより、カム部5333cが破損することを抑制することができる。 As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released and the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 is a lever. Take the posture closest to the member 4340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam portion 5333c from being damaged due to the lever member 4340 colliding with the cam portion 5333c.

また、カム部5333cが偏心カム軸331d2を挟んでレバー部材4340の反対側に配置されることにより、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解除された直後のレバー部材4340の揺動角度(移動量)を最大に確保することができる。即ち、本実施形態は、ロック部材5336と偏心カム部材5333とが同期動作する態様の内、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解除された直後においてレバー部材4340の揺動角度(移動量)が最大に確保される同期の態様である。これにより、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制解除時に首振り操作部材310(図17(b)参照)が上方に移動する移動量を大きく確保でき、首振り操作部材310の演出効果を向上させることができる。 Further, since the cam portion 5333c is arranged on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the swing of the lever member 4340 immediately after the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released. The maximum angle (movement amount) can be secured. That is, in the present embodiment, in the mode in which the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 operate in synchronization with each other, the swing angle of the lever member 4340 immediately after the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released ( This is a synchronization mode in which the maximum amount of movement is secured. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 17B) when the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 is produced. Can be improved.

図60(a)及び図60(b)は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。図60(a)では、図59(b)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cがロック部材5336の係止部5336cの上方に配置されロック部材5336がロック待機状態に復帰した状態が図示され、図60(b)では、図60(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されレバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の湾曲壁部5336a1と摺動する状態が図示される。 60 (a) and 60 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336. In FIG. 60 (a), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59 (b), and the release portion 5339c of the unlock cam member 5339 is arranged above the locking portion 5336c of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336. Is shown in the state of returning to the lock standby state. In FIG. 60 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60 (a), and the rear end of the lever member 4340 is a curved wall of the lock member 5336. The state of sliding with the portion 5336a1 is shown.

図60(a)に示すように、剛体部5333c1の側面でレバー部材4340を揺動させることで、レバー部材4340の揺動速度を向上させることができる。 As shown in FIG. 60A, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved by swinging the lever member 4340 on the side surface of the rigid body portion 5333c1.

ここで、円形の偏心カムの長径部分にレバー部材4340の偏心カムの回転方向から当たると、偏心カムにかかるモーメントが大となり、駆動装置にかかる回転方向の荷重が大きくなる。そのため、いつレバー部材4340に偏心カムが衝突するか分からないときには、大径部分は伝達部材の回転方向で操作部材と当たらないようにすることが良い(円形の偏心カム)。一方で、いつレバー部材4340と偏心カム部材5333とが当たるのか把握できるのであれば、大外径部分(径方向外方)で操作部材を揺動させた方が、操作部材の揺動速度を大とできるので、演出効果を上げることができる。 Here, when the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam is hit from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam of the lever member 4340, the moment applied to the eccentric cam becomes large, and the load applied to the drive device in the rotation direction becomes large. Therefore, when it is not known when the eccentric cam collides with the lever member 4340, it is preferable that the large diameter portion does not hit the operating member in the rotational direction of the transmission member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the lever member 4340 and the eccentric cam member 5333 hit each other, it is better to swing the operating member at the large outer diameter portion (outward in the radial direction) to increase the swing speed of the operating member. Since it can be made large, the effect of production can be improved.

同期駆動であれば、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333に衝突するタイミングを機械的に合わせられる。従って、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333に当接する際には剛体部5333c1を若干退避させ、衝突後のタイミングで剛体部5333c1をレバー部材4340に当接させることができ、レバー部材4340の揺動動作の速度を向上させることができる。 In the case of synchronous drive, the timing at which the lever member 4340 collides with the eccentric cam member 5333 can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the rigid body portion 5333c1 can be slightly retracted, and the rigid body portion 5333c1 can be brought into contact with the lever member 4340 at the timing after the collision, and the lever member 4340 swings. The speed of operation can be improved.

本実施形態では、図60(a)に示す状態と図60(b)に示す状態とを交互に繰り返す(駆動ギア335bの回転方向を交互に切り替えて回転させる)ことで、レバー部材4340を上下に往復揺動させることができ、そのレバー部材4340の先端部に配設される首振り操作部材310(図54参照)を上下に往復揺動させることができる。 In the present embodiment, the lever member 4340 is moved up and down by alternately repeating the state shown in FIG. 60 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 60 (b) (rotating the drive gear 335b by alternately switching the rotation direction). The swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated and swung up and down.

ここで、ロック部材5336を単独で駆動させる場合、レバー部材4340を上下に往復揺動させる状態ではロック部材4336をロック強制解除状態(図48参照)とし、遊技者に操作されたり、偏心カム部材4333に押し上げられたりして、レバー部材4340が前倒れする方向に揺動し首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された場合にロック部材4336をロック待機状態とすることで、レバー部材4340の揺動を規制することができる。 Here, when the lock member 5336 is driven independently, the lock member 4336 is set to the lock forced release state (see FIG. 48) in the state where the lever member 4340 is reciprocated up and down, and the lock member 4336 is operated by the player or the eccentric cam member. When the lever member 4340 swings in the direction of tilting forward due to being pushed up by 4333 and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position, the lock member 4336 is put into the lock standby state, so that the lever member 4340 The swing can be regulated.

これにより、レバー部材4340を上下に往復揺動させる状態(図52参照)にロック部材4336からレバー部材4340に抵抗がかけられることを抑制し、第1駆動装置335(図55参照)に必要な駆動力を低減することができる。 As a result, resistance is suppressed from the lock member 4336 to the lever member 4340 in a state where the lever member 4340 is reciprocated up and down (see FIG. 52), which is necessary for the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55). The driving force can be reduced.

一方、ロック部材5336と偏心カム部材5333とが同期制御される場合、ロック部材5336を駆動させる部材(本実施形態におけるロック解除カム部材5339)の姿勢が偏心カム部材5333の姿勢に依存する。そのため、特に遊技者に操作されることで首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された場合に、ロック部材5336をロック待機状態に即座に配置させることが困難な場合が生じる。 On the other hand, when the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 are controlled synchronously, the posture of the member for driving the lock member 5336 (the unlock cam member 5339 in the present embodiment) depends on the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, it may be difficult to immediately arrange the lock member 5336 in the lock standby state, especially when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position by being operated by the player.

例えば、ロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cがロック部材5336の反対側に配置される場合、解除部5339cでロック部材5336を押し始めるまでにロック部材5336を半周回転させる必要がある。そのため、遊技者の操作に応じてロック部材5336を揺動させることが困難となる。 For example, when the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is arranged on the opposite side of the lock member 5336, it is necessary to rotate the lock member 5336 half a turn before the release portion 5339c starts pushing the lock member 5336. Therefore, it becomes difficult to swing the lock member 5336 according to the operation of the player.

これに対し、本実施形態では、図60(a)及び図60(b)に示す状態においてロック部材5336が常にロック待機状態とされる。これにより、遊技者に操作され、レバー部材4340が前倒れする方向に揺動され、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置されたら常に、ロック部材5336がレバー部材4340の下側面に当接され、レバー部材4340の揺動を規制する(図62参照)。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lock member 5336 is always in the lock standby state in the states shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b). As a result, the lever member 4340 is swung in the direction of tilting forward by being operated by the player, and whenever the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position, the lock member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. , The swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated (see FIG. 62).

しかし、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333の回転により往復揺動される際にロック部材5336と当接すると、レバー部材4340がロック部材5336から抵抗を受け、偏心カム部材5333を駆動させる駆動力が過大となる恐れがある。 However, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the lock member 5336 when it reciprocates and swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333, the lever member 4340 receives resistance from the lock member 5336 and the driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 5333 is generated. It may be excessive.

これに対し、本実施形態では、ロック部材5336に形成される湾曲壁部5336a1により、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333の回転により往復揺動される際にロック部材5336をレバー部材4340から逃がすことができるので、レバー部材4340がロック部材5336から与えられる抵抗を抑制することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved wall portion 5336a1 formed on the lock member 5336 releases the lock member 5336 from the lever member 4340 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, the lever member 4340 can suppress the resistance given by the lock member 5336.

また、図60(b)に示す状態からレバー部材4340が前倒れする方向に揺動すると、レバー部材4340の後端部が凸設部5336a2に当接し、ロック部材5336をロック解除状態側へ向けて(図60(a)時計回り方向に)揺動させ、レバー部材4340がロック部材5336の上方へ移動し、ロック部材5336が付勢方向に復帰しロック待機状態となることでレバー部材4340の揺動が規制される。 Further, when the lever member 4340 swings in the direction of tilting forward from the state shown in FIG. 60B, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2, and the lock member 5336 is directed toward the unlocked state side. (Fig. 60 (a) clockwise), the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 returns to the urging direction, and the lever member 4340 enters the lock standby state. Rocking is regulated.

従って、レバー部材4340が往復揺動される際の抵抗は抑制しながら、レバー部材4340の揺動方向の規制を任意のタイミングで行うことができる。 Therefore, the swing direction of the lever member 4340 can be regulated at an arbitrary timing while suppressing the resistance when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung.

なお、ロック解除カム部材5339は、ロック部材5336をロック解除状態とするときにのみロック部材5336に駆動力を伝達し(図59(b)参照)、それ以外ではロック部材5336とは駆動力の伝達を解除される。そのため、図60に示すように偏心カム部材5333を往復揺動させる場合にロック部材5336が連動して動作し、レバー部材4340に衝突するなどの不具合が生じることを防止することができる。 The unlock cam member 5339 transmits a driving force to the lock member 5336 only when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)), and otherwise the driving force is different from that of the lock member 5336. The transmission is canceled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is reciprocally swung, the lock member 5336 operates in conjunction with each other, and it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the lever member 4340.

図60(a)に示すように、ロック部材5336がロック待機位置に配置されるまでは、レバー部材4340は首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置される姿勢(図59(b)の姿勢)を維持する。 As shown in FIG. 60A, the lever member 4340 is in a posture in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position until the lock member 5336 is arranged in the lock standby position (posture in FIG. 59B). To maintain.

ここで、偏心カム部材5333とロック部材5336とが同期制御される場合、ロック部材5336をロック解除状態(図59(b)参照)からロック待機状態(図60(a)参照)に移動させることで偏心カム部材5333がレバー部材4340を揺動させる恐れがある。この場合、ロック待機状態で首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に維持することができないという問題点があった。 Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are controlled synchronously, the lock member 5336 is moved from the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)) to the lock standby state (see FIG. 60 (a)). The eccentric cam member 5333 may swing the lever member 4340. In this case, there is a problem that the swing operation member 310 cannot be maintained in the upward position in the lock standby state.

本実施形態では、剛体部5333c1が筒状部333bの外周に接する直線状に形成されるので(図60(a)参照)、偏心カム部材5333が所定角度(図59(b)の姿勢から図60(a)の姿勢まで)回転しても、剛体部5333c1とレバー部材4340との間の隙間が埋まるに留まり、レバー部材4340が揺動することを抑制することができる。これにより、ロック部材5336をロック解除状態からロック待機状態にする間、首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に維持することができる。 In the present embodiment, since the rigid body portion 5333c1 is formed in a straight line in contact with the outer periphery of the tubular portion 333b (see FIG. 60A), the eccentric cam member 5333 is formed at a predetermined angle (from the posture of FIG. Even if it rotates (up to the posture of 60 (a)), the gap between the rigid body portion 5333c1 and the lever member 4340 is only filled, and the lever member 4340 can be suppressed from swinging. As a result, the swing operation member 310 can be maintained in the upward position while the lock member 5336 is changed from the unlocked state to the lock standby state.

図61(a)及び図61(b)は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。図61(a)では、図60(b)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転され、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の凸設部5336a2に当接された状態が図示され、図61(b)では、図61(a)に示す状態から偏心カム部材5333が回転し、ロック部材5336の上側面がレバー部材4340の下側面に当接する配置まで回転された状態が図示される。 61 (a) and 61 (b) are schematic views of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60 (b), and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. 61 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a) and the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 is rotated to the arrangement where the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 abuts on the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. To.

図61(a)に示すように、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の凸設部5336a2を押し上げることにより、ロック部材5336がレバー部材4340から離反する方向に回転する。更に偏心カム部材5333を回転させると、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の上端部よりも上方へ移動することで、ロック部材5336がねじりバネSP41(図45参照)の付勢力により復帰され、レバー部材4340の移動をロック部材5336の上側面で規制可能となる。 As shown in FIG. 61A, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 pushes up the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 rotates in the direction away from the lever member 4340. When the eccentric cam member 5333 is further rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves upward from the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 is restored by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). The movement of the lever member 4340 can be regulated by the upper side surface of the lock member 5336.

レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の凸設部5336a2に当接するまでは、湾曲壁部5336a1によりレバー部材4340からロック部材5336が逃げる態様とされることで、レバー部材4340にロック部材5336からかけられる抵抗を抑制可能な構造とされる。 Until the rear end of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, the curved wall portion 5336a1 allows the lock member 5336 to escape from the lever member 4340, so that the lock member 5336 is attached to the lever member 4340. It has a structure that can suppress the resistance applied from the lever.

また、レバー部材4340からロック部材5336へ荷重がかけられるのは、凸設部5336a2にレバー部材4340の後端部が当接する短い期間とされるので、ねじりバネSP41(図45参照)の反力を大きく確保でき、ロック部材5336がレバー部材4340の下方へ入り込む(図61(b)参照)速度を大きく確保することができる。従って、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の移動の規制を確実に行うことができる。 Further, the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 for a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2, so that the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) is applied. Can be secured to a large extent, and the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) can be secured to a large extent. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be reliably regulated by the lock member 5336.

図62は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。なお、図62では、図60(b)に示す状態からレバー部材4340が前倒れする方向に遊技者により押し下げられた状態が図示される。 FIG. 62 is a schematic view of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. Note that FIG. 62 shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is pushed down by the player in the direction of tilting forward from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b).

図61(b)に示すように、偏心カム部材5333の筒状部333bを中心としたカム部5333cの外接円C41が、レバー部材4340の下側面と接する。そのため、首振り操作部材310が遊技者に操作され、下向き位置に配置された状態で、偏心カム部材5333を反対方向(図62時計回り)に戻す必要がなく、偏心カム部材5333を同一方向(図62反時計回り)に回転させることで偏心カム部材5333を初期位置(図59(a)参照)に復帰させることができる。 As shown in FIG. 61B, the circumscribed circle C41 of the cam portion 5333c centered on the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 comes into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. Therefore, it is not necessary to return the eccentric cam member 5333 in the opposite direction (clockwise in FIG. 62) while the swing operation member 310 is operated by the player and is arranged in the downward position, and the eccentric cam member 5333 is moved in the same direction (in the same direction (clockwise in FIG. 62)). The eccentric cam member 5333 can be returned to the initial position (see FIG. 59 (a)) by rotating it counterclockwise (FIG. 62).

なお、図60(b)に示す状態から、遊技者がレバー部材4340を前倒れする方向に押し下げ操作しない場合でも、図60(b)に示す状態から偏心カム部材5333を同一方向(図62反時計回り)に回転させることでレバー部材4340を揺動させ、ロック部材5336をレバー部材4340の下側に当接させる(図61(b)参照)ことでレバー部材4340の揺動を規制することができる。 Even if the player does not push down the lever member 4340 in the forward tilting direction from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), the eccentric cam member 5333 is pushed in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b) (FIG. 62). The lever member 4340 is swung by rotating it clockwise), and the lock member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower side of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) to regulate the swing of the lever member 4340. Can be done.

これにより、ロック部材5336をロック解除状態とした後で、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を押し下げる操作をするか否かに関わらず、首振り操作部材310を下向き位置に復帰させることができる。 As a result, after the lock member 5336 is released from the lock state, the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the downward position regardless of whether or not the player pushes down the swing operation member 310.

次いで、図63から図65を参照して、第6実施形態について説明する。上記第5実施形態では、ロック部材5336がロック解除状態とされた場合に、カム部5333cの剛体部5333c1が偏心カム軸331d2の下方に配置されることでレバー部材4340の揺動幅が確保される場合を説明したが、第6実施形態における操作デバイス6300は、ロック部材5336がロック解除状態とされた場合に、カム部5333cの剛体部5333c1が偏心カム軸331d2の上方に配置される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. In the fifth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is arranged below the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, so that the swing width of the lever member 4340 is secured. However, in the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is arranged above the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図63(a)及び図63(b)は、第6実施形態におけるレバー部材4340、偏心カム部材6333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材4340、偏心カム部材6333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。図63(a)では、レバー部材4340がロック部材5336に揺動を規制される状態が図示され、図63(b)では、図63(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されロック解除カム部材5339がロック部材5336を押すことでロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解除され、レバー部材4340が起き上がる方向(時計回り)に揺動された状態が図示される。 63 (a) and 63 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in the sixth embodiment in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 63 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 5336, and FIG. 63 (b) shows that the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a). When the lock member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is shown.

図63(a)に示すように、偏心カム部材6333は、ロック解除カム部材5339がロック部材5336に当接する直前の状態において、カム部5333cがレバー部材4340側に向く姿勢でロック解除カム部材5339と同期されると共に、それに伴って、傘部6333fの切り欠き6333f1が、第5実施形態とは異なる配置で凹設される。 As shown in FIG. 63A, the eccentric cam member 6333 is in a state immediately before the unlock cam member 5339 comes into contact with the lock member 5336, and the unlock cam member 5339 is in a posture in which the cam portion 5333c faces the lever member 4340 side. Along with this, the notch 6333f1 of the umbrella portion 6333f is recessed in a different arrangement from that of the fifth embodiment.

図63(a)及び図63(b)に示すように、ロック部材5336がロック解除状態とされると、即座に偏心カム部材6333とレバー部材4340とが当接するので、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材6333の回転に追従して揺動する。そのため、本実施形態における偏心カム部材6333とロック解除カム部材5339との動作を同期させる方法によれば、ロック部材5336の規制の解除のタイミングを遊技者に認識させ難くできる。 As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lever member 4340 immediately come into contact with each other, so that the lever member 4340 is eccentric cam. It swings following the rotation of the member 6333. Therefore, according to the method of synchronizing the operations of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlock cam member 5339 in the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the timing of releasing the regulation of the lock member 5336.

また、レバー部材4340の揺動速度は偏心カム部材6333の回転速度によるので、ロック部材5336の解除した直後から、レバー部材4340の揺動速度を任意に設定することができる。これにより、レバー部材4340の揺動速度の設計自由度を向上し、首振り操作部材310が上下に移動することの演出効果を向上させることができる。 Further, since the swing speed of the lever member 4340 depends on the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be arbitrarily set immediately after the lock member 5336 is released. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved, and the effect of moving the swing operation member 310 up and down can be improved.

図64(a)及び図64(b)は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材6333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材4340、偏心カム部材6333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。 64 (a) and 64 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336.

図64(a)では、図63(b)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cがロック部材5336の係止部5336cの上方に配置されロック部材5336がロック待機状態に復帰した状態が図示され、図64(b)では、図64(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転され偏心カム部材6333の剛体部5333c1がレバー部材4340の下側面に当接する状態が図示される。 In FIG. 64A, the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 63B, and the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 is arranged above the locking portion 5336c of the locking member 5336, and the locking member 5336. Is shown in the state of returning to the lock standby state. In FIG. 64 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64 (a), and the rigid body portion 5333c1 of the eccentric cam member 6333 is below the lever member 4340. The state of contacting the side surface is shown.

図64(a)及び図64(b)に示すように、偏心カム部材6333のカム部5333cが、偏心カム軸331d2を挟んでレバー部材4340の反対側に配置される場合には、レバー部材4340が揺動しても、その揺動が偏心カム軸331d2にせき止められる。そのため、カム部5333cとレバー部材4340とが衝突する恐れが無いので、偏心カム部材6333の回転速度を高速にしても、レバー部材4340とカム部5333cとが衝突する際に過荷重が生じることで偏心カム部材6333が破損することが無い。 As shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, when the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 is arranged on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the lever member 4340 Even if it swings, the swing is dammed by the eccentric camshaft 331d2. Therefore, there is no possibility that the cam portion 5333c and the lever member 4340 collide with each other. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 is increased, an overload occurs when the lever member 4340 and the cam portion 5333c collide with each other. The eccentric cam member 6333 will not be damaged.

従って、図64(a)及び図64(b)の間のみ偏心カム部材6333の回転速度を増加させることで、レバー部材4340が図64(a)の状態(レバー部材4340の後端部が最下端に配置される状態)とされる期間を短くすることができる。これにより、レバー部材4340が図64(a)の状態とされる期間を任意に設定することができるので、レバー部材4340の揺動動作の設計自由度を向上させることができる。 Therefore, by increasing the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 only between FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the lever member 4340 is in the state of FIG. 64 (a) (the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is the most). The period of being placed at the lower end) can be shortened. As a result, the period during which the lever member 4340 is in the state shown in FIG. 64A can be arbitrarily set, so that the degree of freedom in designing the swing operation of the lever member 4340 can be improved.

図65(a)及び図65(b)は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材6333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。なお、図65(a)では、図64(b)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されレバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の湾曲壁部5336a1と摺動する状態が図示され、図65(b)では、図65(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転され、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の凸設部5336a2に当接された状態が図示される。 65 (a) and 65 (b) are schematic views of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. In addition, in FIG. 65A, a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64B and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 slides with the curved wall portion 5336a1 of the lock member 5336 is shown. 65 (b) shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 65 (a) and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. Will be done.

また、図65(b)に示す状態から、更に偏心カム部材5333が回転することで、レバー部材4340の後端部が押し上げられ、ロック部材5336の上側面がレバー部材4340の下側面に当接することでレバー部材4340の揺動が規制される。 Further, by further rotating the eccentric cam member 5333 from the state shown in FIG. 65 (b), the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is pushed up, and the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 comes into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. This regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

本実施形態では、図64(b)に示す状態と図65(a)に示す状態とを交互に繰り返す(駆動ギア335bの回転方向を交互に切り替えて回転させる)ことで、レバー部材4340を上下に往復揺動させることができ、そのレバー部材4340の先端部に配設される首振り操作部材310(図54参照)を上下に往復揺動(煽り動作)させることができる。 In the present embodiment, the lever member 4340 is moved up and down by alternately repeating the state shown in FIG. 64 (b) and the state shown in FIG. 65 (a) (rotating the drive gear 335b by alternately switching the rotation direction). The swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) arranged at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated and swung up and down (fanning operation).

この場合、図64(b)及び図65(a)に示すように、ロック解除カム部材5339がロック部材5336に当接することは無いので(ロック解除カム部材の解除部5339cがロック部材5336から離間されるので)、ロック解除カム部材5339に対してロック部材5336から抵抗がかけられることを抑制でき、偏心カム部材5333の回転の状態を安定させることができる。 In this case, as shown in FIGS. 64 (b) and 65 (a), the unlock cam member 5339 does not come into contact with the lock member 5336 (the unlock portion 5339c of the unlock cam member is separated from the lock member 5336. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the application of resistance from the lock member 5336 to the unlock cam member 5339, and to stabilize the rotational state of the eccentric cam member 5333.

図65(b)に示すように、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の凸設部5336a2を押し上げることにより、ロック部材5336がレバー部材4340から離反する方向に回転する。更に偏心カム部材6333を回転させると、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の上端部よりも上方へ移動することで、ロック部材5336がねじりバネSP41(図45参照)の付勢力により復帰され、レバー部材4340の移動をロック部材5336の上側面で規制可能となる(図63(a)参照)。 As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 pushes up the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 rotates in the direction away from the lever member 4340. When the eccentric cam member 6333 is further rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves upward from the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 is restored by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be regulated by the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 63 (a)).

また、レバー部材4340からロック部材5336へ荷重がかけられるのは、凸設部5336a2にレバー部材4340の後端部が当接する短い期間とされるので、ねじりバネSP41(図45参照)の反力を大きく確保でき、ロック部材5336がレバー部材4340の下方へ入り込む(図61(b)参照)速度を大きく確保することができる。従って、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の移動の規制を確実に行うことができる。 Further, the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 for a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2, so that the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) is applied. Can be secured to a large extent, and the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) can be secured to a large extent. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be reliably regulated by the lock member 5336.

図65(a)に示す状態において、遊技者からレバー部材4340を上向きに持ち上げる方向の荷重がかけられる場合を考える。この場合、偏心カム部材6333のカム部5333cにレバー部材4340から下向きの荷重がかけられ、偏心カム部材6333が時計回りに回転される。本実施形態では、偏心カム部材6333とロック解除カム部材5339とが同期動作されるので、ロック解除カム部材5339の回転が規制される場合、偏心カム部材6333の回転も規制され、レバー部材4340から負荷される荷重により偏心カム部材6333が破損する恐れがある。 In the state shown in FIG. 65A, consider a case where a load is applied by the player in the direction of lifting the lever member 4340 upward. In this case, a downward load is applied to the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 from the lever member 4340, and the eccentric cam member 6333 is rotated clockwise. In the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlock cam member 5339 are operated in synchronization with each other. Therefore, when the rotation of the unlock cam member 5339 is restricted, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 6333 is also restricted from the lever member 4340. The eccentric cam member 6333 may be damaged by the applied load.

これに対し、本実施形態では、図65(a)の状態から、レバー部材4340が持ち上げ動作され、後端部が下げられる場合に、偏心カム部材6333の時計回りの回転に伴ってロック解除カム部材5339は時計回りに回転するので、ロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cがロック部材5336から離反する方向に移動する。従って、ロック解除カム部材5339がロック部材5336に当接して回転を規制される恐れはないので、偏心カム部材6333がレバー部材4340から負荷される荷重による破損することを抑制することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lever member 4340 is lifted and the rear end is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), the unlock cam is rotated clockwise with the eccentric cam member 6333. Since the member 5339 rotates clockwise, the release portion 5339c of the unlock cam member 5339 moves in a direction away from the lock member 5336. Therefore, since there is no possibility that the unlock cam member 5339 comes into contact with the lock member 5336 and the rotation is restricted, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 6333 from being damaged by the load applied from the lever member 4340.

なお、本実施形態では、偏心カム部材6333のカム部5333cと、ロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cとが、厚み方向(図65(a)紙面垂直方向)で異なる位置(図65(a)紙面平行方向で干渉しない位置)に配置される。そのため、図65(a)の状態から偏心カム部材6333のカム部5333cと、ロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cとが、図65(a)において近接する方向に回転しても、干渉することなくすれ違うので、偏心カム部材6333やロック解除カム部材5339の破損を防止することができる。 In the present embodiment, the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the release portion 5339c of the unlock cam member 5339 are at different positions in the thickness direction (FIG. 65 (a) in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface) (FIG. 65 (a)). It is placed at a position that does not interfere in the direction parallel to the paper surface. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocked portion 5339c of the unlocked cam member 5339 interfere with each other even if they rotate in the proximity direction in FIG. 65 (a). Since they pass each other, it is possible to prevent damage to the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlock cam member 5339.

次いで、図66を参照して、第7実施形態における操作デバイス7300について説明する。第1実施形態では、ギアダンパ338が常時レバー部材340に抵抗を与える場合を説明したが、第7実施形態における操作デバイス7300は、剥離部材7350がレバー部材7340から引きはがされた時に限定してギアダンパ7347からレバー部材7340に抵抗が与えられる場合を説明する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. In the first embodiment, the case where the gear damper 338 constantly gives resistance to the lever member 340 has been described, but the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment is limited to the case where the peeling member 7350 is peeled off from the lever member 7340. The case where resistance is given to the lever member 7340 from the gear damper 7347 will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図66(a)及び図66(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第7実施形態における操作デバイス7300の部分断面図である。なお、図66(a)では、レバー部材7340に剥離部材7350が吸着した状態が図示され、図66(b)では、剥離部材7350の揺動がロック部材336に規制され、レバー部材7340から剥離部材7350が引きはがされた状態が図示される。 66 (a) and 66 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 66 (a) shows a state in which the release member 7350 is attracted to the lever member 7340, and FIG. 66 (b) shows that the release member 7350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 and is separated from the lever member 7340. The state in which the member 7350 is peeled off is shown.

図66(a)に示すように、レバー部材7340は、本体部材341の内側に配設されるギアダンパ7347を備える。そのギアダンパ7347は、剥離部材7350の本体部材7351に形成される挿通孔352を中心とした円に沿ってギア歯状に形成されるギア部7351aに歯合される。 As shown in FIG. 66 (a), the lever member 7340 includes a gear damper 7347 arranged inside the main body member 341. The gear damper 7347 is meshed with a gear portion 7351a formed in a gear tooth shape along a circle centered on an insertion hole 352 formed in the main body member 7351 of the peeling member 7350.

この場合、図66(a)に示すように、レバー部材7340と剥離部材7350とが吸着固定され一体として揺動すると、ギアダンパ7347とギア部7351aとの相対的な位置関係が変化しないので、レバー部材7340がギアダンパ7347の粘性抵抗を受けることはない。 In this case, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are attracted and fixed and swing as one, the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a does not change, so that the lever The member 7340 is not subject to the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347.

一方、図66(b)に示すように、剥離部材7350がロック部材336に揺動を規制され、レバー部材7340から引きはがされた状態では、レバー部材7340が揺動する(遊技者が首振り操作部材310(図54参照)を操作する)場合に、ギアダンパ7347とギア部7351aとの相対的な位置関係が変化するので、ギアダンパ7347の粘性抵抗がレバー部材7340に与えられる。 On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the release member 7350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 and is peeled off from the lever member 7340, the lever member 7340 swings (the player necks). When the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) is operated), the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a changes, so that the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 is given to the lever member 7340.

従って、遊技者が首振り操作部材310(図54参照)に、剥離部材7350からレバー部材7340を引きはがすほどの過荷重を与えた場合にのみギアダンパ7347の粘性抵抗がレバー部材7340に働くようにすることができる。これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を操作する際の操作感を変化させ、首振り操作部材310を適切に使用するように促すことができる。 Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 acts on the lever member 7340 only when the player applies an overload to the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) enough to peel off the lever member 7340 from the peeling member 7350. can do. As a result, it is possible to change the operation feeling when the player operates the swing operation member 310 and encourage the player to properly use the swing operation member 310.

例えば、図66(b)の状態において首振り操作部材310を操作する際の操作抵抗が過度に大きくなることで、遊技者にとっては操作がしづらくなり、ストレスとなる。レバー部材7340及び剥離部材7350が吸着固定された状態に戻れば、操作抵抗が小さくなり、遊技者にとって操作し易くなる。そのため、ストレスを回避しようとする遊技者ほど、首振り操作部材310に過荷重をかけることを避けるようになる。これにより、操作デバイス7300が破壊されることを抑制することができる。 For example, in the state of FIG. 66 (b), the operation resistance when operating the swing operation member 310 becomes excessively large, which makes the operation difficult for the player and causes stress. When the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are returned to the suction-fixed state, the operation resistance is reduced and the player can easily operate the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350. Therefore, the player who tries to avoid stress will avoid applying an overload to the swing operation member 310. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating device 7300 from being destroyed.

次いで、図67から図69を参照して、第8実施形態について説明する。上記各実施形態では、ロック部材336,2336,4336,5336が内側ケース部材330,3330,4330,5330に軸支される場合を説明したが、第8実施形態における操作デバイス8300は、ロック部材8336が、レバー部材340の揺動に伴って内側ケース部材8330をスライド移動可能に構成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lock members 336, 2336, 4336, and 5336 are pivotally supported by the inner case members 330, 3330, 4330, and 5330 has been described, but the operation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment is the lock member 8336. However, the inner case member 8330 is configured to be slidable as the lever member 340 swings. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図67(a)及び図67(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第8実施形態における操作デバイス8300の断面図である。なお、図17(a)は第1実施形態における操作デバイス300を図示したものであるが、外観形状は本実施形態における操作デバイス8300と同等なので、代用する。図68及び図69においても同様である。また、図67(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図67(b)では、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。 67 (a) and 67 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 according to the eighth embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 8300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. The same applies to FIGS. 68 and 69. Further, FIG. 67A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 67B shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position. ..

図67(a)に示すように、内側ケース部材8330は、左カバー部材8331に、レバー支持軸331d1を中心とした円弧に沿って穿設される長孔形状のスライド孔8331iを複数備える。なお、スライド孔8331iは、左カバー部材8331と一対で配設される右カバー部材(図示せず)の対応した位置に左カバー部材8331と同様に穿設される。 As shown in FIG. 67A, the inner case member 8330 includes a plurality of elongated hole-shaped slide holes 8331i formed in the left cover member 8331 along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. The slide hole 8331i is formed in the same manner as the left cover member 8331 at a position corresponding to the right cover member (not shown) arranged in pairs with the left cover member 8331.

スライド孔8331iは、一対の長孔から構成され、内側面が平滑な表面から構成されると共にレバー支持軸331d1から離れた側に配設される第1スライド孔8331i1と、内側面が平滑な表面から構成されると共に第1スライド孔8331i1よりもレバー支持軸331d1側に配設される第2スライド孔8331i2と、を主に備える。 The slide hole 8331i is composed of a pair of elongated holes, the inner side surface is composed of a smooth surface, and the first slide hole 8331i1 is arranged on the side away from the lever support shaft 331d1, and the inner side surface is smooth. It is mainly provided with a second slide hole 8331i2 which is composed of the above and is arranged on the lever support shaft 331d1 side of the first slide hole 8331i1.

第2スライド孔8331i2は、ロック部材8336の軸部8336fの楔状部8336f1が挿通される長孔である。ロック部材8336の姿勢により、楔状部8336f1と第2スライド孔8331i2との間の摩擦抵抗が変化する。 The second slide hole 8331i2 is a long hole through which the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 of the shaft portion 8336f of the lock member 8336 is inserted. The frictional resistance between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2 changes depending on the posture of the lock member 8336.

ロック部材8336は、左カバー部材8331の内側面に沿ってスライド移動する態様で配設される板状のスライド板8370に軸支される。ロック部材8336は、軸支孔336bに挿通される円柱形状の部位であると共にスライド板8370を貫通する軸部8336fを備え、その軸部8336fを介してスライド板8370に軸支される。 The lock member 8336 is pivotally supported by a plate-shaped slide plate 8370 arranged so as to slide and move along the inner surface of the left cover member 8331. The lock member 8336 is provided with a shaft portion 8336f which is a cylindrical portion inserted into the shaft support hole 336b and penetrates the slide plate 8370, and is pivotally supported by the slide plate 8370 via the shaft portion 8336f.

軸部8336fは、軸方向の一部であって第2スライド孔8331i2に挿通される楔状部8336f1を備える。楔状部8336f1は、対向配置された状態において第2スライド孔8331i2の長手方向に延設される側面と所定距離だけ離れる態様(図67(a)参照)で形成される一対の第1側面8336f1aと、対向配置された状態において第2スライド孔8331i2の長手方向に延設される側面と面当たりする(図68(a)参照)一対の第2側面8336f1bと、を主に備え、各側面が若干湾曲した略ひし形状に構成される。 The shaft portion 8336f includes a wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 which is a part in the axial direction and is inserted into the second slide hole 8331i2. The wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 has a pair of first side surfaces 8336f1a formed in a manner of being separated from the side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 by a predetermined distance (see FIG. 67A) in a state of being arranged to face each other. , Mainly provided with a pair of second side surfaces 8336f1b that face a surface contact with a side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state of facing each other (see FIG. 68 (a)), and each side surface is slightly provided. It is composed of a curved rhombus.

第1側面8336f1aは、図67(a)に示すように、ロック部材8336が解除側に位置する状態において第2スライド孔8331i2の曲線形状に沿った(曲率半径の同一な)曲面形状から形成される。また、第2側面8336f1bは、図68(a)に示すように、ロック部材8336が固定側に位置する状態において第2スライド孔8331i2の曲線形状に沿った(曲率半径の同一な)曲面形状から形成される。 As shown in FIG. 67A, the first side surface 8336f1a is formed from a curved surface shape (with the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where the lock member 8336 is located on the release side. The radius. Further, as shown in FIG. 68A, the second side surface 8336f1b has a curved surface shape (with the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where the lock member 8336 is located on the fixed side. It is formed.

ロック部材8336が解除位置側に配置される状態においては、第1側面8336f1aが第2スライド孔8331i2と当接せず、所定距離隙間が空けられるため、レバー部材340の揺動に追従して移動するスライド板8370の移動抵抗を抑制することができる。 In the state where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release position side, the first side surface 8336f1a does not come into contact with the second slide hole 8331i2 and a predetermined distance is left, so that the lever member 340 moves following the swing of the lever member 340. It is possible to suppress the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370.

なお、図67(b)では、ロック部材8336が解除側の位置から所定量固定側の位置へ向けて回転された状態が図示される。この状態においても、楔状部8336f1と第2スライド孔8331i2との間には若干の隙間が空けられる。即ち、ロック部材8336が解除側の位置から多少回転しても、スライド板8370の移動抵抗が増加することが無いので、レバー部材340の揺動抵抗を抑制でき、遊技者が操作デバイス8300を揺動操作する際の操作感を損なうことを抑制することができる。 Note that FIG. 67B shows a state in which the lock member 8336 is rotated from the position on the release side to the position on the fixed amount side. Even in this state, a slight gap is provided between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2. That is, even if the lock member 8336 rotates slightly from the position on the release side, the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370 does not increase, so that the swing resistance of the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the player swings the operation device 8300. It is possible to suppress impairing the feeling of operation during dynamic operation.

一方で、ロック部材8336を解除側の位置から所定量固定側の位置へ向けて回転された状態で維持しておけば、所定のタイミングでロック部材8336を固定側に配置するまでの期間を短くすることができる。これにより、ロック部材8336を所望の位置で固定側に配置させやすくできる。 On the other hand, if the lock member 8336 is kept rotated from the position on the release side to the position on the fixed amount side, the period until the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side at a predetermined timing is shortened. can do. As a result, the lock member 8336 can be easily arranged on the fixed side at a desired position.

スライド板8370は、スライド孔8331iに挿通され断面円弧形状に凸設される凸設部8371と、剥離部材350と対向配置されると共に磁性体材料から形成される磁石部8372と、ロック部材8336の回転軸と駆動軸が平行になる態様でスライド板8370に配設される駆動モータ8373と、その駆動モータ8373が回転させると共にロック部材8336のギア部336dに歯合される駆動ギア8374と、を主に備える。 The slide plate 8370 includes a convex portion 8371 that is inserted into the slide hole 8331i and is projected in an arc shape in cross section, a magnet portion 8372 that is arranged to face the peeling member 350 and is formed of a magnetic material, and a lock member 8336. A drive motor 8373 arranged on the slide plate 8370 so that the rotation shaft and the drive shaft are parallel to each other, and a drive gear 8374 that rotates the drive motor 8373 and meshes with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 8336. Mainly prepare.

凸設部8371は、レバー支持軸331d1を中心とした円弧形状に形成される。これにより、凸設部8371が係止凹部8331i2に引っかかることを抑制することができる。 The convex portion 8371 is formed in an arc shape centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the convex portion 8371 from being caught in the locking recess 8331i2.

磁石部8372は、磁性体材料から形成され、剥離部材350に接着される。磁石部材8372が剥離部材350に接着された状態でレバー部材340が揺動されることに伴いスライド板8370がスライド孔8331iに沿ってスライド移動する。 The magnet portion 8372 is formed of a magnetic material and is adhered to the peeling member 350. The slide plate 8370 slides along the slide hole 8331i as the lever member 340 swings while the magnet member 8372 is adhered to the peeling member 350.

駆動モータ8373は、駆動ギア8374を駆動させることによって、ロック部材8336を解除側の位置(図67(a)参照)と、固定側の位置(図68(a)参照)とに配置可能とする駆動手段である。駆動モータ8373はスライド板8370に配設されるので、スライド板8370と共にスライド移動する。 By driving the drive gear 8374, the drive motor 8373 makes it possible to arrange the lock member 8336 at a position on the release side (see FIG. 67 (a)) and a position on the fixed side (see FIG. 68 (a)). It is a driving means. Since the drive motor 8373 is arranged on the slide plate 8370, it slides and moves together with the slide plate 8370.

剥離部材350は、下側の側面に沿って磁気を検出する磁気センサMC1を備え、その磁気センサMC1によって、磁石部8372が剥離部材350に吸着しているか、磁石部8372から剥離部材350が離反しているかを検出可能とされる。以下、ロック部材8336の制御の一例について説明する。 The peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects magnetism along the lower side surface, and the magnetic sensor MC1 either attracts the magnet portion 8372 to the peeling member 350 or separates the peeling member 350 from the magnet portion 8372. It is possible to detect whether or not it is. Hereinafter, an example of control of the lock member 8336 will be described.

ここで、図67(a)の状態では、第2センサ部材325a2(図23(b)参照)の隙間に検出片343b(図23(b)、図16参照)が配置されることで、レバー部材340が揺動範囲の終端に配置されていることが検出される。また、図67(b)の状態では、第1センサ部材325a1(図23(b)参照)の隙間に検出片343bが配置されることで、レバー部材340が揺動範囲の終端に配置されていることが検出される。 Here, in the state of FIG. 67 (a), the detection piece 343b (see FIGS. 23 (b) and 16) is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 23 (b)), so that the lever It is detected that the member 340 is located at the end of the swing range. Further, in the state of FIG. 67 (b), the detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the first sensor member 325a1 (see FIG. 23 (b)), so that the lever member 340 is arranged at the end of the swing range. Is detected.

そのため、偏心カム部材333が停止した状態において、レバー部材340が図67(a)の状態と図67(b)の状態とで繰り返し切り替わるような場合には、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上下に最大可動範囲で繰り返し操作していることを検出することができる(主制御装置に各センサ部材325a1,325a2から信号が出力される)。この場合、レバー部材340(剥離部材350)が偏心カム部材333に繰り返し衝突することで、偏心カム部材333が破損する恐れがある。 Therefore, when the eccentric cam member 333 is stopped and the lever member 340 repeatedly switches between the state shown in FIG. 67 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 67 (b), the player swings the swing operation member 310. It is possible to detect that the operation is repeated up and down within the maximum movable range (signals are output from the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 to the main control device). In this case, the lever member 340 (peeling member 350) repeatedly collides with the eccentric cam member 333, which may damage the eccentric cam member 333.

第1実施形態のように、ロック部材336が内側ケース部材330に軸支される態様では、停止した状態のレバー部材340をロック部材336で固定することはできても、揺動途中のレバー部材340をロック部材336で固定することは困難であった。 In the embodiment in which the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, the lever member 340 in the stopped state can be fixed by the lock member 336, but the lever member is in the process of swinging. It was difficult to fix the 340 with the lock member 336.

これに対し、本実施形態では、ロック部材8336がレバー部材340に追従して移動可能とされるので、レバー部材340の揺動動作中においても、レバー部材340の揺動をロック部材8336で停止させることが可能となる。そのため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上下に最大可動範囲で繰り返し操作していることを検出した場合に、ロック部材8336を作動させることで、偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止することができる。以下、これについて説明する。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lock member 8336 can move following the lever member 340, the lock member 8336 stops the swing of the lever member 340 even during the swing operation of the lever member 340. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, when it is detected that the player repeatedly operates the swing operation member 310 up and down within the maximum movable range, the lock member 8336 is operated to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. Can be done. This will be described below.

図68(a)及び図68(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス8300の断面図である。なお、図68(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置と下向き位置との中間に配置された状態が図示され、図68(b)では、図68(a)の状態から所定量以上の荷重が首振り操作部材310に下向きにかけられ、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引きはがされた状態が図示される。 68 (a) and 68 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 68 (a) shows a state in which the swing operating member 310 is arranged between the upward position and the downward position, and FIG. 68 (b) shows a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. 68 (a). The load is applied downward to the swing operation member 310, and the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350.

図68(a)に示すように、駆動ギア8374を回転させ、ロック部材8336を固定側に配置することで、楔状部8336f1の第2側面8336f1bが第2スライド孔7332i2の両側面に当接されることで、摩擦力によりスライド板8370のスライド移動が停止される。この状態で、首振り操作部材310を押し下げる操作に対しては、ロック部材8336が下向きに剥離部材350を係止し、首振り操作部材310を押し上げる操作に対しては、磁石部8372を介してスライド板8370が上向きに剥離部材350を係止する。そのため、レバー部材340は、上下方向の負荷が多少かかったとしても、図68(a)の状態で姿勢を維持する。 As shown in FIG. 68A, by rotating the drive gear 8374 and arranging the lock member 8336 on the fixed side, the second side surface 8336f1b of the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 is brought into contact with both side surfaces of the second slide hole 7332i2. As a result, the sliding movement of the slide plate 8370 is stopped by the frictional force. In this state, the lock member 8336 locks the release member 350 downward for the operation of pushing down the swing operation member 310, and the magnet portion 8372 is used for the operation of pushing up the swing operation member 310. The slide plate 8370 locks the release member 350 upward. Therefore, the lever member 340 maintains its posture in the state shown in FIG. 68A even if a load in the vertical direction is slightly applied.

図68(a)の状態から、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に対して、下方へ所定量以上(剥離部材350の磁石部材354とレバー部材340との吸着力以上)の荷重を与えると、剥離部材350からレバー部材340から引きはがされる(図68(b)参照)。これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に与えた所定量以上の荷重がロック部材8336に伝達されることで、ロック部材8336が破損することを防止することができる。 From the state shown in FIG. 68A, when the player applies a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attractive force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) to the swinging operation member 310, The peeling member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 340 (see FIG. 68 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the lock member 8336 from being damaged by transmitting a load of a predetermined amount or more applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player to the lock member 8336.

図68(b)に示すように、スライド板8370がその移動範囲の途中(レバー部材340の移動範囲の途中)で固定されることで、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる操作を行ったとしても、偏心カム部材333にレバー部材340が当接する前に磁石部8372に当接することで、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材333に当接することを防止することができる。これにより、偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止することができる。 As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the slide plate 8370 is fixed in the middle of the moving range (in the middle of the moving range of the lever member 340), so that the player lifts the swing operation member 310. Even so, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from coming into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 by contacting the magnet portion 8372 before the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. This makes it possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

また、図68(b)に示すように、レバー部材340を揺動させることができる角度範囲(剥離部材350の上側の範囲)が狭められるため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上方に移動させることでレバー部材340に付加される勢いを抑制することができ、レバー部材340が上から剥離部材350に当接する際に生じる荷重を抑制することができる。 Further, as shown in FIG. 68B, since the angle range in which the lever member 340 can be swung (the range above the peeling member 350) is narrowed, the player moves the swing operation member 310 upward. By doing so, the momentum applied to the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the load generated when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the peeling member 350 from above can be suppressed.

これにより、レバー部材340が剥離部材350に当接される際の反作用でロック部材8336に生じる荷重を抑制することができるので、ロック部材8336を駆動させる駆動モータ8373の駆動力を抑制することができる。 As a result, the load generated on the lock member 8336 due to the reaction when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the release member 350 can be suppressed, so that the driving force of the drive motor 8373 that drives the lock member 8336 can be suppressed. it can.

図69(a)及び図69(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス8300の断面図である。なお、図69(a)では、偏心カム部材333の回転により揺動されるレバー部材340及び剥離部材350が想像線で図示されると共に、ロック部材8336が解除側に配置された状態で剥離部材350が磁石部8372から引きはがされた状態におけるレバー部材340及び剥離部材350が実線で図示され、図69(b)では、図69(a)に実線で図示される状態からロック部材8336が固定側に配置された状態が図示される。 69 (a) and 69 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 69A, the lever member 340 and the release member 350 that are swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the release member is arranged with the lock member 8336 on the release side. The lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 in a state where the 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372 are shown by solid lines, and in FIG. 69 (b), the lock member 8336 is shown from the state shown by the solid line in FIG. 69 (a). The state of being arranged on the fixed side is illustrated.

図69(a)に示すように、偏心カム部材333の回転によりレバー部材340及び剥離部材350が揺動する場合、スライド板8370も剥離部材350と共にスライド移動する。このとき、首振り操作部材310に下向きに高速で荷重が付与されると、スライド板8370が剥離部材350の移動速度に追従できず(スライド孔8331iとの間の摩擦抵抗により減速され)、剥離部材350とスライド板8370とが離間し得る(図69(a)実線部分参照)。 As shown in FIG. 69A, when the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 swing due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333, the slide plate 8370 also slides and moves together with the peeling member 350. At this time, if a load is applied downward to the swing operation member 310 at a high speed, the slide plate 8370 cannot follow the moving speed of the release member 350 (decelerated due to frictional resistance with the slide hole 8331i) and is released. The member 350 and the slide plate 8370 can be separated from each other (see the solid line portion in FIG. 69A).

この場合、ロック部材8336が解除側に配置され、スライド板8370が固定されておらず、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上向きに持ち上げる操作を行うと、偏心カム部材333に剥離部材350が当接することで、偏心カム部材333が破損する恐れがある。 In this case, when the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release side, the slide plate 8370 is not fixed, and the player performs an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 upward, the release member 350 hits the eccentric cam member 333. The eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged by the contact.

これに対し、本実施形態では、剥離部材350が、剥離部材350から磁石部8372が引きはがされたことを検出する磁気センサMC1を備える。磁気センサMC1が、剥離部材350と磁石部8372とが分離したことを検出したら、即座に、ロック部材8336が固定側に配置される(図69(b)参照)ように制御することで、剥離部材350の下側面にロック部材8336の上側面を当接可能にすることができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects that the magnet portion 8372 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350. When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the peeling member 350 and the magnet portion 8372 are separated, the locking member 8336 is immediately controlled to be arranged on the fixed side (see FIG. 69B), thereby peeling. The upper side surface of the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the lower side surface of the member 350.

これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に上向きの荷重を与えたとしても、剥離部材350が偏心カム部材333に当接する前に、剥離部材350がロック部材8336に当接することで下方への移動が止められるので、偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止することができる。なお、本効果は、本実施形態のように、ロック部材8336が剥離部材350と共にスライド移動する構成があって初めて発揮される効果である。 As a result, even if the player applies an upward load to the swing operation member 310, the release member 350 abuts on the lock member 8336 before the release member 350 abuts on the eccentric cam member 333, thereby moving downward. Since the movement is stopped, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. It should be noted that this effect is exhibited only when the lock member 8336 is configured to slide and move together with the release member 350 as in the present embodiment.

即ち、第1実施形態のように、ロック部材336が内側ケース部材330に軸支される場合、偏心カム部材333の位相によっては(例えば、図24(b)参照)、ロック部材336を固定側に配置しても、ロック部材336の上側面よりも偏心カム部材333の上側面が剥離部材350側に張り出している恐れがあり、この状態で首振り操作部材310に上向きの荷重を与えられると、剥離部材350は偏心カム部材333に当接する。そのため、偏心カム部材333の破損を防ぐ効果が十分でない。 That is, when the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, the lock member 336 is fixed on the fixed side depending on the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (see, for example, FIG. 24B). Even if it is arranged in, there is a possibility that the upper side surface of the eccentric cam member 333 protrudes toward the release member 350 side rather than the upper side surface of the lock member 336, and if an upward load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in this state. , The peeling member 350 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. Therefore, the effect of preventing damage to the eccentric cam member 333 is not sufficient.

これに対し、本実施形態によれば、偏心カム部材333の回転により剥離部材350も、ロック部材8336も同様に移動する(剥離部材350が偏心カム部材333及び磁石部8372の両方と当接する状態が維持される)ので、剥離部材350が磁石部8372から引き剥がされた直後にロック部材8336を固定側に配置することで、ロック部材8336の上側面を偏心カム部材333よりも剥離部材350に近づけることができる。これにより、偏心カム部材333よりも先にロック部材8336を剥離部材350に当接させ、剥離部材350が偏心カム部材333に衝突することを防止することができる。 On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the release member 350 and the lock member 8336 move in the same manner due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 (a state in which the release member 350 comes into contact with both the eccentric cam member 333 and the magnet portion 8372). By arranging the lock member 8336 on the fixed side immediately after the release member 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372, the upper side surface of the lock member 8336 is placed on the release member 350 rather than the eccentric cam member 333. You can get closer. As a result, the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the release member 350 before the eccentric cam member 333, and the release member 350 can be prevented from colliding with the eccentric cam member 333.

なお、磁気センサMC1が、磁石部8372と剥離部材350が分離したことを検出した際には、偏心カム部材333の回転を停止させることが好ましい。そのまま偏心カム部材333が回転を継続し、最大径部分が剥離部材350に近づく態様で移動すると、偏心カム部材333の最大径部分がロック部材8336を越えて剥離部材350に近づいてしまう恐れがあるためである。 When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the magnet portion 8372 and the peeling member 350 are separated, it is preferable to stop the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. If the eccentric cam member 333 continues to rotate and moves in such a manner that the maximum diameter portion approaches the release member 350, the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 333 may exceed the lock member 8336 and approach the release member 350. Because.

次いで、図70を参照して、第9実施形態について説明する。上記各実施形態では、レバー部材340,2340,3340,4340の全体が剛体である場合を説明したが、第9実施形態における操作デバイス9300は、レバー部材9340の首振り操作部材310にコイルスプリングから形成される弾性連結部材CS91,CS92を備える。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lever members 340, 2340, 3340, and 4340 are entirely rigid has been described, but the operation device 9300 in the ninth embodiment is attached to the swing operation member 310 of the lever member 9340 from a coil spring. The elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 to be formed are provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図70(a)及び図70(b)は、第9実施形態における操作デバイス9300の側面図である。なお、図70(a)では、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図70(b)では、図70(a)に示す状態において首振り操作部材310に下向きに所定量以上の荷重がかけられ、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92が撓んだ状態が図示される。 70 (a) and 70 (b) are side views of the operation device 9300 according to the ninth embodiment. Note that FIG. 70 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position, and FIG. 70 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is downward in the state shown in FIG. 70 (a). A state in which the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are bent when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied is shown.

図70(a)及び図70(b)に示すように、レバー部材9340は、首振り操作部材310付近に上下一対で配設されるコイルスプリング状の弾性連結部材CS91,CS92を備える。 As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the lever member 9340 includes coil spring-shaped elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 arranged in pairs up and down near the swing operation member 310.

首振り操作部材310に遊技者が負荷をかけていない状態においては、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92が略同等の長さに縮められた状態が維持される。なお、首振り操作部材310の重量を支えながら図70(a)の状態(双方が略同等の長さに縮められた状態)を維持するために、上側の弾性連結部材CS91の弾性係数が下側の弾性連結部材CS91の弾性係数に比較して高く設定されると共に、双方の長さは略同一とされる。 When the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 310, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are maintained in a state of being contracted to substantially the same length. The elastic modulus of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is lowered in order to maintain the state shown in FIG. 70 (a) (both are contracted to substantially the same length) while supporting the weight of the swinging operation member 310. It is set higher than the elastic modulus of the elastic connecting member CS91 on the side, and the lengths of both are substantially the same.

首振り操作部材310へ遊技者から加えられる荷重が所定量よりも小さい場合においては、レバー部材9340と首振り操作部材310との相対的な位置関係が弾性連結部材CS91,CS92により維持される。 When the load applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player is smaller than a predetermined amount, the relative positional relationship between the lever member 9340 and the swing operation member 310 is maintained by the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92.

一方、図70(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材310に、所定量以上の荷重が下向きにかけられると、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92の伸縮状態が変化することにより(上側の弾性連結部材CS91の長さが下側の弾性連結部材CS92に比較して長くなることにより)、首振り操作部材310とレバー部材9340との相対的な位置関係が崩れ、首振り操作部材310に負荷された荷重が直接的にレバー部材340の後部(剥離部材350等、図16参照)に伝達されることを抑制することができる。換言すれば、首振り操作部材310にかけられた荷重を弾性連結部材CS91,CS92の変形に消費することができる。従って、首振り操作部材310にかけられる荷重によって、外側ケース部材320の内部の部材(例えば、偏心カム部材333、図10参照)が破損することを抑制することができる。 On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70B, when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied downward to the swing operation member 310, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 change their elastic states (upper elastic connecting member). (Because the length of CS91 is longer than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92), the relative positional relationship between the swinging operation member 310 and the lever member 9340 is broken, and the swinging operation member 310 is loaded. It is possible to prevent the load from being directly transmitted to the rear portion of the lever member 340 (peeling member 350, etc., see FIG. 16). In other words, the load applied to the swing operation member 310 can be consumed for the deformation of the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inner member of the outer case member 320 (for example, the eccentric cam member 333, see FIG. 10) from being damaged by the load applied to the swing operation member 310.

次いで、図71から図74を参照して、第10実施形態について説明する。上記各実施形態では、偏心カム部材333,2333,4333,5333がレバー支持軸331d1の後方であってレバー部材340,2340,4340の下方に配設される場合を説明したが、第10実施形態における操作デバイス10300は、偏心カム部材2333が、レバー支持軸331d1の後方であってレバー部材340の上方に配設される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the eccentric cam members 333, 2333, 4333, 5333 are arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and below the lever members 340, 2340, 4340 has been described, but the tenth embodiment has been described. In the operation device 10300, the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and above the lever member 340. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図71(a)、図71(b)、図72(a)及び図72(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第10実施形態における操作デバイス10300の断面図である。なお、図17(a)は第1実施形態における操作デバイス300を図示したものであるが、外観形状は本実施形態における操作デバイス10300と同等なので、代用する。図73及び図74においても同様に代用する。 71 (a), 71 (b), 72 (a) and 72 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 according to the tenth embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 10300 according to the present embodiment, it is substituted. The same applies to FIGS. 73 and 74.

また、図71(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図71(b)では、図71(a)の状態から偏心カム部材2333が図71(a)において反時計回りに所定角度θ101だけ回転した状態が図示され、図72(a)では、図71(a)の状態から偏心カム部材2333が図71(a)において反時計回りに角度θ101よりも大きな角度θ102だけ回転した状態が図示され、図72(b)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。 Further, in FIG. 71 (a), a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position is shown, and in FIG. 71 (b), the eccentric cam member 2333 is shown in FIG. 71 (a) from the state of FIG. 71 (a). ) Is shown in a state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ101, and in FIG. 72 (a), the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated counterclockwise from the angle θ101 in FIG. 71 (a). The state in which the swing operation member 310 is rotated by a large angle θ102 is shown, and FIG. 72 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position.

図71(a)に示すように、操作デバイス10300は、断面矩形の箱状の内側ケース部材10330を備え、その内側ケース部材10330は、レバー支持軸331d1の後方に偏心カム部材2333を軸支する偏心カム軸10331iを備えると共に、その偏心カム軸10331iから所定距離だけ離れた位置に駆動モータにより回転駆動される駆動ギア10335が配設され、その駆動ギア10335の回転により偏心カム部材2333が回転駆動される。 As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the operation device 10300 includes a box-shaped inner case member 10330 having a rectangular cross section, and the inner case member 10330 pivotally supports an eccentric cam member 2333 behind the lever support shaft 331d1. An eccentric cam shaft 10331i is provided, and a drive gear 10335 that is rotationally driven by a drive motor is arranged at a position separated from the eccentric cam shaft 10331i by a predetermined distance, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotationally driven by the rotation of the drive gear 10335. Will be done.

本実施形態では、弾性材料から形成されるねじりバネ状のねじりバネSP101が、レバー部材340に対して首振り操作部材310を下方へ押し下げる方向に付勢する付勢力を発生させる。 In the present embodiment, the torsion spring-like torsion spring SP101 formed of the elastic material generates an urging force that urges the lever member 340 in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310.

これにより、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材2333に押し当てられる態様で常時付勢されるので、レバー部材340を偏心カム部材2333の回転に追従させて動作させることができる。 As a result, the lever member 340 is constantly urged so as to be pressed against the eccentric cam member 2333, so that the lever member 340 can be operated by following the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333.

本実施形態では、レバー部材340を揺動させる手段として、第2実施形態で説明した偏心カム部材2333を利用するため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を押し下げることで、レバー部材340の後端部が持ち上がり、レバー部材340から偏心カム部材2333に負荷が生じても、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが滑ることで、カム部材2333bが破損することを抑制することができる。 In the present embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 2333 described in the second embodiment is used as a means for swinging the lever member 340, the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 to push down the rear end of the lever member 340. Even if the portion is lifted and a load is generated from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333, it is possible to prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged due to the sliding of the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b.

ここで、カム部材2333bが本体部材2333aに対して滑ることができるとしても、カム部材2333bのリブ部2333b4の延設方向とレバー部材340の上面とが垂直な姿勢で当接すると、レバー部材340からの荷重が偏心カム部材2333の径方向に働き(周方向に逃げない)、カム部材2333bが破損する恐れがある。 Here, even if the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, when the extending direction of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b and the upper surface of the lever member 340 come into contact with each other in a vertical posture, the lever member 340 The load from the cam member 2333 acts in the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 2333 (does not escape in the circumferential direction), and the cam member 2333b may be damaged.

これに対し、本実施形態では、図71(a)に示すように、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置される状態において、レバー部材340の上面と当接する部位P101が、偏心カム部材2333のリブ部2333b4から所定角度ずれた位置(図71時計回りに所定角度ずれた位置)とされる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the portion P101 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the lever member 340 is the eccentric cam member 2333. It is set to a position deviated from the rib portion 2333b4 of the above by a predetermined angle (a position deviated by a predetermined angle clockwise in FIG. 71).

これにより、図71(a)の状態で、レバー部材340から偏心カム部材2333に荷重が負荷されても、偏心カム部材2333の周方向に荷重が与えられ、カム部材2333bを本体部材2333aに対して滑らせることができる。従って、偏心カム部材2333が破損することを抑制することができる。 As a result, even if a load is applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333 in the state of FIG. 71A, the load is applied in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 2333, and the cam member 2333b is applied to the main body member 2333a. Can be slid. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

本実施形態では、偏心カム部材2333がレバー支持軸331d1の後上方に配置されるので、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる誤操作を行う場合には、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材333から離反する方向に移動する。そのため、レバー部材340を持ち上げる誤操作を行うことにより偏心カム部材2333が破損することを防止することができる。 In the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind and above the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, when the player makes an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 333. Move in the direction you want. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged by performing an erroneous operation of lifting the lever member 340.

なお、図71(a)の状態において、剥離部材350の下側に円柱状の部材が配設され、レバー部材340がそれ以上、揺動不可能とされる(図71(a)の姿勢が終端位置とされる)。 In the state of FIG. 71 (a), a columnar member is arranged under the peeling member 350, and the lever member 340 cannot swing any more (the posture of FIG. 71 (a) is It is considered to be the terminal position).

図71(b)に示す状態から、図72(a)に示す状態まで偏心カム部材2333が反時計回りに回転すると、首振り操作部材310が上方へ揺動する。また、図72(a)の状態から、図71(b)に示す状態まで偏心カム部材2333が逆方向(時計回り)に回転すると、首振り操作部材310が下方へ揺動する。このように、偏心カム部材2333を時計回りに回転させることと、反時計回りに回転させることとを繰り返すことによって、首振り操作部材310を上下に往復揺動(煽り動作)させることができる。これにより、遊技者にとって有利な状態や、不利な状態を報知することができる。また、操作デバイス10300を演出装置として遊技者に視認させることができる。 When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 71 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), the swing operation member 310 swings upward. Further, when the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 72 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 71 (b), the swing operating member 310 swings downward. By repeating the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 clockwise and the counterclockwise rotation in this way, the swing operation member 310 can be reciprocally swung up and down (fanning operation). As a result, it is possible to notify the player of an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state. In addition, the operation device 10300 can be visually recognized by the player as an effect device.

なお、偏心カム部材2333の往復回転により首振り操作部材を上下に往復揺動させる場合、本実施形態のように、レバー支持軸331d1の後方に偏心カム部材2333が配置されることが好ましい。レバー支持軸331d1を遊技者側(前方)に配置し易くなり、これにより、切り欠き331c1,332c1のレバー支持軸331d1の周方向の長さが同じ場合でも、首振り操作部材310の揺動角度を大きくすることができるためである。この場合、首振り操作部材310の上下方向の移動量を大きく保つことができ、首振り操作部材310の演出効果を向上させることができる。 When the swinging operation member is reciprocally swung up and down by the reciprocating rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, it is preferable that the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 as in the present embodiment. The lever support shaft 331d1 can be easily arranged on the player side (front), whereby the swing angle of the swing operation member 310 even when the lengths of the lever support shafts 331d1 of the notches 331c1 and 332c1 in the circumferential direction are the same. This is because can be increased. In this case, the amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 in the vertical direction can be kept large, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

図72(b)に示す状態では、ロック部材336が固定側に配置され、剥離部材350がロック部材336に移動を規制される。そのため、首振り操作部材310に遊技者が手を乗せる等の小さな荷重をかける場合に、レバー部材340及び剥離部材350が揺動することが防止される。 In the state shown in FIG. 72B, the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side, and the release member 350 is restricted from moving by the lock member 336. Therefore, when a small load such as a player placing a hand on the swing operation member 310 is applied, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are prevented from swinging.

図73(a)、図73(b)及び図74は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス10300の断面図である。なお、図73(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置され、ロック部材336が固定側の位置に配置されると共に偏心カム部材2333がレバー部材340の反対側に退避された状態が図示され、図73(b)では、図73(a)の状態からレバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされると共に、偏心カム部材2333に当接された状態が図示され、図74では、図73(b)の状態から、偏心カム部材2333が時計回りに所定角度回転し、レバー部材340が時計周りに揺動された状態が図示されると共に、図73(b)の状態が想像線で図示される。 73 (a), 73 (b) and 74 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 73A, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the lock member 336 is arranged in the fixed side position, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is retracted to the opposite side of the lever member 340. 73 (b) shows a state in which the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and is in contact with the eccentric cam member 2333 from the state shown in FIG. 73 (a). From the state of FIG. 73 (b), the state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle and the lever member 340 is swung clockwise is shown, and the state of FIG. 73 (b) is an imaginary line. Illustrated in.

本実施形態では、ロック部材336が固定側に配置され、レバー部材340の移動が規制されると、それに伴って、偏心カム部材2333がレバー部材340から離反する位置に移動するように制御される。これにより、首振り操作部材310に負荷がかけられ、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引きはがされ移動する場合に、偏心カム部材2333の筒状部2333b1側に当接されるので(図73(b)参照)、偏心カム部材2333のカム部2333b2が破損することを抑制することができる。 In the present embodiment, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side and the movement of the lever member 340 is restricted, the eccentric cam member 2333 is controlled to move to a position away from the lever member 340. .. As a result, when a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and moved, the lever member 340 is brought into contact with the tubular portion 2333b1 side of the eccentric cam member 2333 (FIG. 73). (See (b)), it is possible to prevent the cam portion 2333b2 of the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

また、本実施形態によれば、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引きはがされた後にレバー部材340が偏心カム部材2333に当接されるので、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に加える荷重の一部がレバー部材340を剥離部材350から引き剥がすことに使用される。そのため、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材2333に負荷する荷重を減少させることができる。 Further, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 2333, so that the load applied by the player to the swing operation member 310 is applied. A part is used to peel the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the lever member 340 can be reduced.

遊技者が首振り操作部材310に押し下げ方向の荷重を加える場合に、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされるまではレバー部材340が移動しないので、遊技者に対して反力が伝えられる(首振り操作部材310の揺動抵抗が高くなる)。これにより、首振り操作部材310を押し下げるためには、遊技者は所定量以上(剥離部材350の磁石部材354とレバー部材340との間の吸着力以上)の負荷を首振り操作部材310に負荷することが必要となるので(重くなるので)、遊技者に操作感を与えることができる。 When the player applies a load in the pushing-down direction to the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 does not move until the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, so that the reaction force is transmitted to the player ( The swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 increases). As a result, in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the player applies a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attractive force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) to the swing operation member 310. Because it is necessary to do (because it becomes heavy), it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation.

図74に示すように、本実施形態によれば、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされた後において、偏心カム部材2333を回転させることで、レバー部材340を揺動させ、首振り操作部材310を上下に往復動作(煽り動作)させることができる。 As shown in FIG. 74, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated to swing the lever member 340 and swing the lever member. The member 310 can be reciprocated up and down (fanned).

これにより、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされたという内部状態の変化を遊技者に認識し難くすることができる。そのため、レバー部材340を剥離部材350から引き剥がすという破壊動作を行うことに伴い遊技者が感じる不安感を抑制することができる。 As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the internal state that the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the anxiety felt by the player due to the destructive operation of peeling the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350.

また、首振り操作部材310の押し下げ操作後にレバー部材340を揺動させることで、首振り操作部材310を把持している遊技者の手に反力を返すことができ、遊技者に操作感を付与することができる。 Further, by swinging the lever member 340 after pushing down the swing operation member 310, a reaction force can be returned to the hand of the player holding the swing operation member 310, giving the player a feeling of operation. Can be granted.

一方で、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされた後で、偏心カム部材2333が高速で回転することで、レバー部材340が高速で往復揺動する。これにより、遊技者に異状を報知することができる。例えば、パチンコ機10の液晶表示装置に、「弱く」という文字を表示して、遊技者に、首振り操作部材310へかける荷重が強すぎることを知らせることができる。 On the other hand, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates at high speed, so that the lever member 340 reciprocates and swings at high speed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the abnormality. For example, the character "weak" can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko machine 10 to notify the player that the load applied to the swing operation member 310 is too strong.

即ち、本実施形態では、レバー部材340を剥離部材350から引き剥がした後で偏心カム部材2333の回転に伴ってレバー部材340を上下に往復揺動させることを、遊技者に操作の反力を返し操作感を付与することにも使えるし、遊技者に異状を報知することにも使用することができる。前者の場合は、遊技者が行う操作を促進する効果を奏し、後者の場合は、遊技者が行う操作を抑制させる効果を奏する。なお、この状態の切替は、偏心カム部材2333の回転速度の大小により切り替えることができる。 That is, in the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the lever member 340 is reciprocally swung up and down with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, which causes the player to perform an operation reaction force. It can be used to give a feeling of return operation, and can also be used to notify the player of an abnormality. In the former case, it has the effect of promoting the operation performed by the player, and in the latter case, it has the effect of suppressing the operation performed by the player. It should be noted that this state can be switched depending on the magnitude of the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333.

従って、本実施形態によれば、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされた後における偏心カム部材2333の回転速度を切り替えることによって、遊技者に所定の操作を促進させたり、所定の操作を抑制させたりすることができる。 Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by switching the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the player can be promoted to perform a predetermined operation or perform a predetermined operation. It can be suppressed.

次いで、図75を参照して、第11実施形態について説明する。上記各実施形態では、レンズ部材317の押し込み動作と首振り操作部材310の揺動動作とは構造的に連関しない場合を説明したが、第11実施形態における操作デバイス11300は、首振り操作部材11310の揺動時の抵抗がレンズ部材317の押し込み動作により上昇する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pushing operation of the lens member 317 and the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 310 are structurally not related to each other has been described, but the operation device 11300 in the eleventh embodiment has the swinging operation member 11310. The resistance when swinging is increased by the pushing operation of the lens member 317. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図75(a)及び図75(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第11実施形態における首振り操作部材11310及びレバー部材340の部分断面図である。なお、図17(a)は第1実施形態における操作デバイス300を図示したものであるが、外観形状は本実施形態における操作デバイス11300と同等なので、代用する。また、図75(a)では、レンズ部材317が押し込みの負荷を受けない無負荷状態が図示され、図75(b)では、図75(a)の状態から、レンズ部材317が押し込み操作された状態が図示される。 75 (a) and 75 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 11310 and the lever member 340 according to the eleventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 11300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. Further, FIG. 75 (a) shows a no-load state in which the lens member 317 is not subjected to a pushing load, and FIG. 75 (b) shows a pushing operation of the lens member 317 from the state of FIG. 75 (a). The state is illustrated.

図75(a)に示すように、首振り操作部材11310では、振動装置11366の押し付け部材11366bの中心軸上に貫通孔が開口形成され、ボビン部材11366aの底壁から軸支棒363の径方向両側に向けて一対の貫通孔が開口形成される。そのため、振動装置11366を通って振動部材11314から軸支棒363まで貫通する貫通孔が開口形成される。なお、ボビン部材11366aの開口の間隔は、軸支棒363に巻き付けられるねじりバネSP2の外径よりも短くされる。 As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the swing operation member 11310, a through hole is formed on the central axis of the pressing member 11366b of the vibrating device 11366, and a through hole is formed in the radial direction of the shaft support rod 363 from the bottom wall of the bobbin member 11366a. A pair of through holes are formed toward both sides. Therefore, a through hole is formed through the vibrating device 11366 and penetrating from the vibrating member 11314 to the shaft support rod 363. The interval between the openings of the bobbin member 11366a is shorter than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2 wound around the shaft support rod 363.

振動部材11314は、押し付け部材11366bの貫通孔に挿通される回転止め部11314gを備える。 The vibrating member 11314 includes a rotation stop portion 11314g which is inserted into a through hole of the pressing member 11366b.

回転止め部11314gは、押し付け部材11366bの貫通孔に挿通される棒状の部分であって、ボビン部材11366aの一対の貫通孔に挿通されると共に一対の板バネ状に形成される挟み込み部11314g1を備える。 The rotation stop portion 11314g is a rod-shaped portion that is inserted into the through hole of the pressing member 11366b, and includes a sandwiching portion 11314g1 that is inserted into the pair of through holes of the bobbin member 11366a and is formed in the shape of a pair of leaf springs. ..

挟み込み部11314g1は、無負荷状態(図75(a)参照)では、ねじりバネSP2から離間した位置に配置され、レンズ部材317が押し込み操作された状態(図75(b)参照)では、ねじりバネSP2を挟持する位置に配置される。ここで、挟み込み部11314g1が板バネ状に形成され、図75(b)の状態で、挟み込み部11314g1がねじりバネSP2ごと軸支棒363をくわえ込むので、首振り操作部材310の軸支棒363を中心とした揺動動作の抵抗を上昇させることができる。即ち、レンズ部材317を押し込む動作を行うことにより、レバー部材340に対する首振り操作部材310の揺動抵抗を上昇させることができる。 The sandwiching portion 11314g1 is arranged at a position separated from the torsion spring SP2 in the no-load state (see FIG. 75 (a)), and the torsion spring in the state in which the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 75 (b)). It is arranged at a position where the SP2 is sandwiched. Here, the sandwiching portion 11314g1 is formed in a leaf spring shape, and in the state of FIG. 75 (b), the sandwiching portion 11314g1 holds the shaft support rod 363 together with the torsion spring SP2, so that the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation member 310 is held. It is possible to increase the resistance of the swinging motion centered on. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

この場合、振動装置11366の動作時に、振動装置11366の振動が首振り操作部の軸支棒363を中心とした揺動の駆動力として消費され、遊技者に伝わる振動装置11366の振動方向(図75(a)上下方向)の振動成分が減少することを抑制することができる。 In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 11366, the vibration of the vibration device 11366 is consumed as a driving force for the vibration centered on the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation unit, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player (FIG. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the vibration component of 75 (a) in the vertical direction).

また、遊技者がレンズ部材317を押し込み操作している時にのみ首振り操作部材310の揺動を抑制しつつ、遊技者に伝わる振動装置11366の振動成分を確保し、遊技者がレンズ部材317から手を離す無負荷状態においては、振動装置11366の振動によって首振り操作部材310を揺動動作させることができる。 Further, while suppressing the swing of the swing operation member 310 only when the player is pushing the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player is secured, and the player can press the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In the no-load state where the hand is released, the swing operation member 310 can be swung by the vibration of the vibrating device 11366.

これにより、レンズ部材317を押し込む遊技者に伝わる振動成分を確保する効果と、無負荷状態では首振り操作部材11310の動作を激しくし遊技者の注目を集める効果とを、同一の振動装置11366で両立させることができる。 As a result, the same vibrating device 11366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of vibrating the swing operation member 11310 in the no-load state and attracting the player's attention. It can be compatible.

次いで、図76を参照して、第12実施形態について説明する。上記第11実施形態では、レンズ部材317の押し込み動作により首振り操作部材11310の揺動動作の抵抗が上昇する場合を説明したが、第12実施形態における操作デバイス12300は、レンズ部材317の押し込み動作により規制棒365が首振り部材360の角度規制孔361dの下方の端部に押し付けられる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the resistance of the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 11310 increases due to the pushing operation of the lens member 317 has been described, but the operating device 12300 in the twelfth embodiment has the pushing operation of the lens member 317. The regulating rod 365 is pressed against the lower end of the swinging member 360 at the angle regulating hole 361d. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図76(a)及び図76(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第12実施形態における首振り操作部材12310及びレバー部材340の部分断面図である。なお、図17(a)は第1実施形態における操作デバイス300を図示したものであるが、外観形状は本実施形態における操作デバイス12300と同等なので、代用する。また、図76(a)では、レンズ部材317が押し込みの負荷を受けない無負荷状態が図示され、図76(b)では、図76(a)の状態から、レンズ部材317が押し込み操作された状態が図示される。 76 (a) and 76 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 12310 and the lever member 340 according to the twelfth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 12300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. Further, FIG. 76 (a) shows a no-load state in which the lens member 317 is not subjected to a pushing load, and FIG. 76 (b) shows a pushing operation of the lens member 317 from the state of FIG. 76 (a). The state is illustrated.

図76(a)に示すように、首振り操作部材12310は、中間枠部材12312と、振動部材12314と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the swing operation member 12310 mainly includes an intermediate frame member 12312 and a vibration member 12314.

中間枠部材12312は、第1実施形態の中間枠部材312(図13参照)に対して、底部312aの中心の開口が拡大される。 The opening of the center of the bottom portion 312a of the intermediate frame member 12312 is enlarged with respect to the intermediate frame member 312 (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment.

振動部材12314は、本体部314aから中間枠部材12312の中心の開口の拡大部分を振動装置366に沿って下方に延設される棒状の押し付け棒部12314gを備える。押し付け棒部12314gは、先端が規制棒365に当接可能な位置まで延設される。 The vibrating member 12314 includes a rod-shaped pressing rod portion 12314g in which an enlarged portion of the central opening of the intermediate frame member 12312 is extended downward along the vibrating device 366 from the main body portion 314a. The pressing rod portion 12314g is extended to a position where the tip can come into contact with the regulation rod 365.

押し付け棒部12314gは、無負荷状態(図76(a)参照)では、規制棒365と接する位置に配置され、レンズ部材317が押し込み操作された状態(図76(b)参照)では、規制棒365に押し当てられる。そのため、レンズ部材317を押し込むことで、押し付け棒部12314gが移動する距離分(本体部314aと押し付け部材366bとの間の距離)だけ、首振り操作部材12310が時計回りに回転され、軸支棒365が角度規制孔361dの終端に押し付けられる。この状態において、角度規制孔361dに対して軸支棒365を固定することができるので、首振り操作部材12310の軸支棒363を中心とした揺動動作を抑制することができる。即ち、レンズ部材317を押し込む動作を行うことにより、レバー部材340に対する首振り操作部材12310の揺動抵抗を上昇させることができる。 The pressing rod portion 12314g is arranged at a position in contact with the regulating rod 365 in the no-load state (see FIG. 76 (a)), and the restricting rod is in the state where the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 76 (b)). It is pressed against 365. Therefore, by pushing the lens member 317, the swing operation member 12310 is rotated clockwise by the distance that the pressing rod portion 12314g moves (the distance between the main body portion 314a and the pressing member 366b), and the shaft support rod is rotated. 365 is pressed against the end of the angle control hole 361d. In this state, since the shaft support rod 365 can be fixed to the angle regulation hole 361d, it is possible to suppress the swinging operation of the swing operation member 12310 centering on the shaft support rod 363. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 12310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

この場合、振動装置366の動作時に、振動装置366の振動が首振り操作部の軸支棒363を中心とした揺動の駆動力として消費され、遊技者に伝わる振動装置366の振動方向(図76(a)上下方向)の振動成分が減少することを抑制することができる。 In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 366, the vibration of the vibration device 366 is consumed as a driving force for the vibration centered on the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation unit, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 366 is transmitted to the player (FIG. FIG. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the vibration component of 76 (a) in the vertical direction).

また、遊技者がレンズ部材317を押し込み操作している時にのみ首振り操作部材12310の揺動を抑制しつつ、遊技者に伝わる振動装置366の振動成分を確保し、遊技者がレンズ部材317から手を離す無負荷状態においては、振動装置366の振動によって首振り操作部材12310を揺動動作させることができる。 Further, while suppressing the swing of the swing operation member 12310 only when the player is pushing the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibration device 366 transmitted to the player is secured, and the player can operate the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In the no-load state where the hand is released, the swing operation member 12310 can be swung by the vibration of the vibrating device 366.

これにより、レンズ部材317を押し込む遊技者に伝わる振動成分を確保する効果と、無負荷状態では首振り操作部材12310の動作を激しくし遊技者の注目を集める効果とを、同一の振動装置366で両立させることができる。 As a result, the same vibration device 366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of vibrating the swing operation member 12310 in the no-load state and attracting the player's attention. It can be compatible.

次いで、図77から図90を参照して、第13実施形態について説明する。上述した第1実施形態では、偏心カム部材333の回転によりレバー部材340が回転動作し、その回転動作中は首振り操作部材310がレバー部材340に対する付勢方向にレバー部材340に対して保持される場合を説明したが、第13実施形態における操作デバイス13300は、レバー部材340が回転動作する間に、首振り操作部材310がレバー部材340に対する付勢方向の逆側にレバー部材340に対して変位する状態を構成可能とされる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 90. In the first embodiment described above, the lever member 340 rotates due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333, and the swing operation member 310 is held against the lever member 340 in the urging direction with respect to the lever member 340 during the rotation operation. However, in the operation device 13300 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the swing operation member 310 with respect to the lever member 340 on the opposite side of the urging direction with respect to the lever member 340 while the lever member 340 rotates. It is possible to configure a state of displacement. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図77は、第13実施形態における操作デバイス13300の正面斜視図である。なお、図77では、操作デバイス13300の首振り操作部材13310が、下向き位置(図7参照)に配置された状態が図示される。図77に示すように、操作デバイス13300は、矩形状の外側ケース部材13320から、首振り操作部材13310が正面側に張り出して配置される。 FIG. 77 is a front perspective view of the operation device 13300 according to the thirteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 77 shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 of the operation device 13300 is arranged in a downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 77, in the operation device 13300, the swing operation member 13310 is arranged so as to project from the rectangular outer case member 13320 to the front side.

図78は、操作デバイス13300の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図78では、外側ケース部材13320が、その外側ケース部材13320よりも内側に配設される内側ケース部材13330から取り外された状態が図示される。 FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 13300. Note that FIG. 78 shows a state in which the outer case member 13320 is removed from the inner case member 13330 arranged inside the outer case member 13320.

図78に示すように、外側ケース部材13320は、カバー部材344,345(図11参照)の曲面に沿った形状で背面側が形成され内側ケース部材13330に正面側からカバー部材344,345の左右の縁を隠す態様で取り付けられる左前カバー13321、右前カバー13322と、内側ケース部材13330に左右方向から締結固定される左カバー部材13323,右カバー部材13324と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 78, the outer case member 13320 is formed on the back surface side in a shape along the curved surface of the cover members 344,345 (see FIG. 11), and the inner case member 13330 is formed on the left and right sides of the cover members 344,345 from the front side. It mainly includes a left front cover 13321 and a right front cover 13322 that are attached in a manner of hiding the edges, and a left cover member 13323 and a right cover member 13324 that are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 13330 from the left and right directions.

左カバー部材13323及び右カバー部材13324は、外側上端部において、前後方向に穿設され左右方向に長尺に延設される調整長孔13323a,13324aをそれぞれ備える。 The left cover member 13323 and the right cover member 13324 are provided with adjusting elongated holes 13323a and 13324a, respectively, which are bored in the front-rear direction and extended in the left-right direction at the outer upper end portion.

調整長孔13323a,13324aは、それぞれ左前カバー13321及び右前カバー13322を締結固定するための孔であり、左右方向に長尺とされることで、成型のばらつき等により左前カバー13321及び右前カバー13322の形状がばらついた場合でも、首振り操作部材13310に対する左前カバー13321及び右前カバー13322の左右方向の位置を容易に調整することができる。これにより、右前カバー13322に嵌め込まれる壁部材13322bと、当接部材13312aとの間に生じる左右方向の位置ずれを低減することができる。 The adjustment elongated holes 13323a and 13324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322, respectively. Since they are elongated in the left-right direction, the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 may be formed due to variations in molding or the like. Even if the shapes vary, the positions of the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 with respect to the swing operation member 13310 can be easily adjusted in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the positional deviation in the left-right direction that occurs between the wall member 13322b fitted into the right front cover 13322 and the contact member 13312a.

左前カバー13321及び右前カバー13322は、調整長孔13323a,13324aに前後方向で締結固定されると共に、左右方向で対向する端面で、左右方向に締結固定される。 The left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 are fastened and fixed to the adjusting elongated holes 13323a and 13324a in the front-rear direction, and are fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at the end faces facing each other in the left-right direction.

図78に示すように、右前カバー13322は、右前カバー13322の左前カバー13321と当接する端面から右方向に凹設される嵌合凹部13322aと、その嵌合凹部13322aに前後方向に抜け止めされる態様で装着される壁部材13322bと、を備え、右前カバー13322と左前カバー13321とが組み立てられた状態(図77参照)において、左方への移動を左前カバー13321の端面によって止められることにより壁部材13322bが嵌合凹部13322aの内部に保持される。 As shown in FIG. 78, the right front cover 13322 is prevented from coming off in the front-rear direction by the fitting recess 13322a recessed in the right direction from the end face of the right front cover 13322 in contact with the left front cover 13322 and the fitting recess 13322a. In a state where the wall member 13322b to be mounted in the embodiment is provided and the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 are assembled (see FIG. 77), the movement to the left is stopped by the end surface of the left front cover 13321 to prevent the wall. The member 13322b is held inside the fitting recess 13322a.

このような構成により、壁部材13322bを交換する際には、右前カバー13322を取り外すのみで壁部材13322bを交換することができる(壁部材13322bは、姿勢修正装置13312からの負荷を受け、破損し易い箇所である)。従って、メンテナンス効率を向上させることができる。 With such a configuration, when the wall member 13322b is replaced, the wall member 13322b can be replaced only by removing the right front cover 13322 (the wall member 13322b is damaged due to the load from the posture correction device 13312). It is an easy place). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

図79は、操作デバイス13300の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図79では、外側ケース部材13320の図示が省略され、内側ケース部材13330が分解された状態が図示される。 FIG. 79 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 13300. In FIG. 79, the illustration of the outer case member 13320 is omitted, and the state in which the inner case member 13330 is disassembled is shown.

図79に示すように、内側ケース部材13330は、複数の棒状部材13331dを備え、その複数の棒状部材13331dは、レバー部材13340を軸支するレバー支持軸331d1と、偏心カム部材5333を軸支する偏心カム軸331d2と、ロック部材5336が軸支されるロック軸4331d3と、そのロック軸4331d3の上方に配置されレバー支持軸331d1よりも短い長さで形成されると共にロック解除カム部材5339が軸支されるロック解除軸13331d5と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a plurality of rod-shaped members 13331d, and the plurality of rod-shaped members 13331d pivotally support a lever support shaft 331d1 that pivotally supports the lever member 13340 and an eccentric cam member 5333. The eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the lock shaft 4331d3 on which the lock member 5336 is pivotally supported, and the lock shaft 4331d3 arranged above the lock shaft 4331d3 are formed to have a length shorter than the lever support shaft 331d1 and the lock release cam member 5339 is pivotally supported. The lock release shaft 13331d5 is mainly provided.

ロック解除軸13331d5の先端には折曲形成される板金部材B13が左カバー部材13331に締結固定されることにより固定される。これにより、ロック解除カム部材5339がロック解除軸13331d5から抜き取り不能に維持される。 A bent sheet metal member B13 is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 13331 at the tip of the unlocking shaft 13331d5. As a result, the unlock cam member 5339 is maintained so as not to be pulled out from the unlock shaft 13331d5.

ロック解除軸13331d5が、レバー支持軸331d1よりも短く形成されることにより、ロック解除軸13331d5が配設されていない部分(ロック解除軸13331d5の先端よりも正面視右方の部分)においてレバー部材13340を回転させることにより、ロック解除軸13331d5とレバー部材13340とが干渉することを避けることができる。 Since the unlocking shaft 13331d5 is formed shorter than the lever support shaft 331d1, the lever member 13340 is located in the portion where the unlocking shaft 13331d5 is not arranged (the portion on the right side of the front end of the unlocking shaft 13331d5). By rotating the lock release shaft 13331d5, it is possible to prevent the lever member 13340 from interfering with each other.

図79に示すように、内側ケース部材13330は、レバー部材13340が内側に配設される箱状に組立てられる左カバー部材13331及び右カバー部材13332と、偏心カム部材5333と、位相検出部材334と、第1駆動装置335と、ロック部材5336と、ギアダンパ338と、ロック解除カム部材5339と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a left cover member 13331 and a right cover member 13332, which are assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 13340 is arranged inside, an eccentric cam member 5333, and a phase detection member 334. , The first drive device 335, the lock member 5336, the gear damper 338, and the unlock cam member 5339 are mainly provided.

図80は、首振り操作部材13310及びレバー部材13340の分解正面斜視図である。図80では、首振り操作部材13310から背面側枠部材13311が分解された状態が図示されると共に、レバー部材13340の左右に締結固定されるギアダンパ受け部材342及び姿勢検出部材343が分解された状態が図示される。 FIG. 80 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 13310 and the lever member 13340. In FIG. 80, a state in which the back side frame member 13311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 13310 is shown, and a state in which the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detecting member 343 that are fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 13340 are disassembled. Is illustrated.

背面側枠部材13311は、外殻が背面側に突出する半球形状に形成され、その突出された先から上部が正面側に張り出す(戻る)態様で略半円状に凹む(図17(b)参照)。その凹む部分に略矩形状の開口である挿通孔311aを備える。挿通孔311aは、首振り部材360が部分的に挿通される貫通孔である。 The back side frame member 13311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the outer shell protrudes to the back side, and the upper part protrudes (returns) to the front side from the protruding tip and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape (FIG. 17 (b). )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swing member 360 is partially inserted.

図80に示すように、レバー部材13340は、鉄などの金属材料から形成され断面コ字状の長尺棒状に形成される本体部材13341と、ギアダンパ受け部材342と、そのギアダンパ受け部材342と同軸で軸支される姿勢検出部材343と、上部カバー部材344と、下部カバー部材345と、角度規制棒部材346と、本体部材341の正面側端部に配設される首振り部材360と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 80, the lever member 13340 is coaxial with the main body member 13341 formed from a metal material such as iron and formed in the shape of a long rod having a U-shaped cross section, the gear damper receiving member 342, and the gear damper receiving member 342. The posture detection member 343, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, the angle control rod member 346, and the swing member 360 arranged at the front end of the main body member 341. Mainly prepare.

図81は、レバー部材13340の本体部材13341、上部カバー部材344、下部カバー部材345及び首振り部材360の正面分解斜視図である。 FIG. 81 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 13341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swinging member 360 of the lever member 13340.

レバー部材13340の本体部材13341は、断面コ字状の長尺棒状に形成される本体部13341aと、その本体部13341aの略中央部において左右方向に穿設される一対の軸孔341bと、規制孔341cと、一対の首振り部材支持部341dと、軸孔341eと、規制孔341fと、本体部13341aの後下部に締結固定されると共に偏心カム部材5333及びロック部材5336(図79参照)と当接される当接部材13341gと、を主に備える。 The main body member 13341 of the lever member 13340 is regulated by a main body portion 13341a formed in a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section and a pair of shaft holes 341b formed in the substantially central portion of the main body portion 13341a in the left-right direction. The hole 341c, the pair of swing member support portions 341d, the shaft hole 341e, the regulation hole 341f, and the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 79) are fastened and fixed to the rear lower portion of the main body portion 13341a. Mainly includes a contact member 13341 g to be contacted.

当接部材13341gは、下側側面の正面側部分において偏心カム部材5333と当接され、下側側面の背面側部分においてロック部材5336と当接される。なお、当接部材13341gの断面形状は、ロック受け部材4350(図46参照)と同等な形状とされる。 The contact member 13341g is in contact with the eccentric cam member 5333 at the front side portion of the lower side surface and is in contact with the lock member 5336 at the back surface side portion of the lower side surface. The cross-sectional shape of the contact member 13341g is the same as that of the lock receiving member 4350 (see FIG. 46).

次いで、図82を参照して、首振り操作部材13310の枠構造について説明する。図82は、首振り操作部材13310の正面分解斜視図である。首振り操作部材13310は、首振り部材360の固定板部361e(図81参照)に締結固定される円盤板形状の中間ベースM13と、その中間ベースM13の下面に締結固定される背面側枠部材13311と、その背面側枠部材13311の内側に配設されると共に内側から外側に張り出す部分を有する姿勢修正装置13312と、背面側枠部材13311と中間ベースM13との間に挟持されるフランジ部を有し背面側枠部材13311及び中間ベースM13を前後方向から挟み互いに締結固定される正面カバー13313及び背面カバー13314と、それら正面カバー13313と背面カバー13314との締結位置に覆設される一対の分離防止カバー13315と、その分離防止カバー13315の下方(図82)から嵌め込まれる保護カバー13316と、中間ベースM13との間で弾性的に連結されるレンズ部材13317と、を主に備える。 Next, the frame structure of the swing operation member 13310 will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 13310. The swing operation member 13310 is a disk plate-shaped intermediate base M13 that is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 361e (see FIG. 81) of the swing member 360, and a back side frame member that is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the intermediate base M13. 13311, a posture correction device 13312 which is arranged inside the back side frame member 13311 and has a portion protruding from the inside to the outside, and a flange portion sandwiched between the back side frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13. The front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, which are fixed to each other by sandwiching the back side frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13 from the front-rear direction, and a pair of covers at the fastening positions of the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314. It mainly includes a separation prevention cover 13315, a protective cover 13316 fitted from below the separation prevention cover 13315 (FIG. 82), and a lens member 13317 elastically connected between the intermediate base M13.

姿勢修正装置13312は、背面側枠部材13311のガイド孔13311bから外方へ張り出される当接部材13312aと、その当接部材13312aとの間にコイルバネSP13を介して配設される支持部材13312bと、背面側枠部材13311の鉤部挿入孔13311eから内方へ張り出されると共に支持部材13312bの係止凸部13312b3と嵌合する鉤形状部分を有する鉤部材13312cと、を備える。 The posture correction device 13312 has a support member 13312b disposed between the contact member 13312a protruding outward from the guide hole 13311b of the back side frame member 13311 and the contact member 13312a via a coil spring SP13. A hook member 13312c having a hook-shaped portion that projects inward from the hook portion insertion hole 13311e of the back side frame member 13311 and fits with the locking convex portion 13312b3 of the support member 13312b.

当接部材13312aは、直棒形状の張り出し部13312a1と、その張り出し部13312a1から左右方向にフランジ状に張り出すフランジ部13312a2と、を備える。 The contact member 13312a includes a straight rod-shaped overhanging portion 13312a1 and a flange portion 13312a2 protruding from the overhanging portion 13312a1 in a flange shape in the left-right direction.

張り出し部13312a1は、背面側枠部材13311のガイド孔13311bの外側に張り出す部分であり、フランジ部13312a2は、背面側枠部材13311の延設壁13311cに当接することで当接部材13312がそれ以上に張り出す事を防止する部分である。 The overhanging portion 13312a1 is a portion that overhangs the outside of the guide hole 13311b of the back side frame member 13311, and the flange portion 13312a2 abuts on the extended wall 13311c of the back side frame member 13311 so that the contact member 13312 is further extended. It is a part that prevents overhanging.

正面カバー13313は、背面カバー13314との締結位置の下方(図82奥方)に、後方へ向けて開放される凹設形状の係止凹部13313aを備える。 The front cover 13313 is provided with a recessed locking recess 13313a that is opened rearward below the fastening position with the back cover 13314 (in the back of FIG. 82).

分離防止カバー13315は、保護カバー13316の外形と同等の形状で凹設され組立状態において保護カバー13316を受け入れ可能に構成される受入凹部13315aと、その受入凹部13315aの上方(図82手前側)に穿設されると共に内部を挿通される棒が組立状態(図77参照)において係止凹部13313aに内嵌可能に構成される抜止孔13315bと、を主に備える。 The separation prevention cover 13315 is recessed in the same shape as the outer shape of the protective cover 13316 so that the protective cover 13316 can be received in the assembled state, and above the receiving recess 13315a (front side in FIG. 82). A rod to be drilled and inserted into the inside is mainly provided with a retaining hole 13315b configured to be internally fitted into the locking recess 13313a in the assembled state (see FIG. 77).

図83は、正面カバー13313、背面カバー13314、分離防止カバー13315及び保護カバー13316の組立方法を時系列で図示するものであり、図83(a)は、正面カバー13313及び背面カバー13314の底面図であり、図83(b)は正面カバー13313、背面カバー13314及び分離防止カバー13315の底面図であり、図83(c)は、図83(b)のLXXXIIIc―LXXXIIIc線における正面カバー13313、背面カバー13314、分離防止カバー13315及び保護カバー13316の断面図である。 FIG. 83 shows the assembly method of the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, the separation prevention cover 13315, and the protective cover 13316 in chronological order, and FIG. 83A is a bottom view of the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314. 83 (b) is a bottom view of the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314 and the separation prevention cover 13315, and FIG. 83 (c) is the front cover 13313 and the back surface of the line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc of FIG. 83 (b). It is sectional drawing of the cover 13314, the separation prevention cover 13315 and the protective cover 13316.

図83に示すように、図83(a)では、正面カバー13313及び背面カバー13314が固定された状態が図視され、図83(b)では、図83(a)の状態に分離防止カバー13315が追加された状態が図視され、図83(c)では、図83(b)の状態に保護カバー13316が追加されると共に背面側枠部材13311に固定された状態が図示される。 As shown in FIG. 83, in FIG. 83 (a), a state in which the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314 are fixed is illustrated, and in FIG. 83 (b), the separation prevention cover 13315 is in the state of FIG. 83 (a). Is added, and FIG. 83 (c) shows a state in which the protective cover 13316 is added to the state of FIG. 83 (b) and is fixed to the back side frame member 13311.

図83(a)に図示されるように、正面カバー13313と背面カバー13314とは、対向配置される壁部分が締結ビスN13aによって締結固定されることにより組立てられる。図83(b)に示すように、締結ビスN13aを覆う(少なくとも前後方向(図83(b)上下方向で覆う)態様で分離防止カバー13315が取り付けられ、係止凹部13313aに挿通される締結ネジN13bが抜止孔13315bに螺入されることにより、分離防止カバー13315が取り外し不能に固定される。 As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314 are assembled by fastening and fixing the wall portions arranged to face each other with the fastening screw N13a. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the separation prevention cover 13315 is attached so as to cover the fastening screw N13a (at least in the front-rear direction (covering in the vertical direction in FIG. 83 (b)), and the fastening screw is inserted into the locking recess 13313a. By screwing N13b into the retaining hole 13315b, the separation prevention cover 13315 is fixed so as not to be removable.

図83(c)に示すように、締結ビスN13bを覆う態様で受入凹部13315aに保護カバー13316が嵌め込まれ(側方(図83(c)右方)へ引き抜き不能な態様で嵌め込まれ)、その後、中間ベースM13(図82参照)が背面側枠部材13311に締結固定されることにより、背面側枠部材の上側面が保護カバー13316の下面と当接される。 As shown in FIG. 83 (c), the protective cover 13316 is fitted into the receiving recess 13315a in a manner of covering the fastening screw N13b (fitted sideways (to the right of FIG. 83C) in a non-pullable manner), and then. By fastening and fixing the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) to the back side frame member 13311, the upper side surface of the back side frame member is brought into contact with the lower surface of the protective cover 13316.

この構造により、正面カバー13313と背面カバー13314とを分離させることを困難とし、操作デバイス13300を部分的に分解して内部にワイヤを通す不正を防止することができる。 With this structure, it is difficult to separate the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, and the operation device 13300 can be partially disassembled to prevent fraudulent passage of wires inside.

即ち、正面カバー13313と背面カバー13314とを分解するには締結ビスN13aを取り外さなければいけないところ、締結ビスN13aへの経路は分離防止カバー13315に防がれている。 That is, the fastening screw N13a must be removed in order to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, but the path to the fastening screw N13a is blocked by the separation prevention cover 133315.

更に、分離防止カバー13315を正面カバー13313及び背面カバー13314から分離させるには締結ビスN13bを取り外さなければいけないところ、締結ビスN13bへの経路は保護カバー13316に防がれており、その保護カバー13316は組立状態において引き抜き方向で背面側枠部材13311に当接されるので、保護カバー13316を取り外すには背面側枠部材13311を中間ベースM13(図82参照)から取り外す必要が生じる。 Further, where the fastening screw N13b must be removed in order to separate the separation prevention cover 13315 from the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, the route to the fastening screw N13b is blocked by the protective cover 13316, and the protective cover 13316 thereof. Is abutted against the back side frame member 13311 in the pull-out direction in the assembled state, so that it is necessary to remove the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) in order to remove the protective cover 13316.

従って、正面カバー13313と背面カバー13314とを分解するために、背面側枠部材13311を中間ベースM13から取り外す必要が生じるが、組立状態において背面側枠部材13311の背面側に左前カバー13321及び右前カバー13322が近接配置される(図77参照)ので、背面側から正面側へ向けて挿通されている締結ネジを取り外すためのアクセス経路が狭くなる。そのため、背面側枠部材13311を中間ベースM13から取り外すことを困難とでき、不正防止を図ることができる。 Therefore, in order to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, it is necessary to remove the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13, but in the assembled state, the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover are on the back side of the back side frame member 13311. Since the 13322s are arranged close to each other (see FIG. 77), the access path for removing the fastening screw inserted from the back side to the front side is narrowed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13, and it is possible to prevent fraud.

次いで、図84を参照して、背面側枠部材13311について説明する。図84(a)は、背面側枠部材13311の斜視図であり、図84(b)は、図84(a)の矢印LXXXIVb方向視(ガイド底壁13311dの面に垂直な方向からの方向視)における背面側枠部材13311の上面図であり、図84(c)は、図84(b)のLXXXIVc−LXXXIVc線における背面側枠部材13311の断面図である。 Next, the back side frame member 13311 will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the back side frame member 13311, and FIG. 84 (b) is a directional view of the arrow LXXXIVb of FIG. 84 (a) (direction view from a direction perpendicular to the plane of the guide bottom wall 13311d). It is a top view of the back side frame member 13311 in FIG. 84 (c), and FIG. 84 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 in the line LXXXXIVc-LXXXXIVc of FIG. 84 (b).

図84に図示されるように、背面側枠部材13311は、レバー部材13340(図80参照)が挿通される挿通孔311aと、その挿通孔311aの下方において前後方向(図84(c)左右方向)に穿設されるガイド孔13311bと、背面側枠部材13311の内側においてガイド孔13311bの左右側面よりも左右方向外側に延設される壁状の延設壁13311cと、ガイド孔13311bの底壁に沿って背面側枠部材13311の内側に延設されるガイド底壁13311dと、そのガイド底壁13311dのガイド孔13311bの反対側の端部において上下方向に穿設される鉤部挿入孔13311eと、延設壁13311cの端部からガイド孔13311bの開口方向に沿って延設される一対の支持部材案内壁13311fと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 84, the back side frame member 13311 has an insertion hole 311a through which the lever member 13340 (see FIG. 80) is inserted, and a front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 84C) below the insertion hole 311a. ), A wall-shaped extension wall 13311c extending laterally from the left and right side surfaces of the guide hole 13311b inside the back side frame member 13311, and a bottom wall of the guide hole 13311b. A guide bottom wall 13311d extending inside the back side frame member 13311 along the line, and a hook insertion hole 13311e formed in the vertical direction at the opposite end of the guide hole 13311b of the guide bottom wall 13311d. A pair of support member guide walls 13311f extending from the end of the extension wall 13311c along the opening direction of the guide hole 13311b are mainly provided.

図84(c)に示すように、鉤部挿入孔13311eは、ガイド底壁13311d側の側面が、下端から上方へ向かうにつれてガイド孔1311bから遠ざかる態様で傾斜する。この傾斜により、後述する鉤部材13312cの傾斜当接部13312c3との当接面積を確保し、ガイド底壁13311dが鉤部材13312cからかけられる負荷により破損する(割れる)ことを防止することができる。 As shown in FIG. 84 (c), the hook insertion hole 13311e is inclined so that the side surface of the guide bottom wall 13311d side moves away from the guide hole 1311b as it goes upward from the lower end. Due to this inclination, the contact area of the hook member 13312c described later with the inclined contact portion 13312c3 can be secured, and the guide bottom wall 13311d can be prevented from being damaged (cracked) by the load applied from the hook member 13312c.

支持部材案内壁13311fは、上端面(図84(a)手前側面)がガイド底壁13311dと平行な面として形成される。 The support member guide wall 13311f is formed so that the upper end surface (front side surface in FIG. 84A) is parallel to the guide bottom wall 13311d.

次いで、図85を参照して、鉤部材13312cについて説明する。鉤部材13312cは硬質の樹脂材料から構成される部材であって、図85(a)は、鉤部材13312cの正面斜視図であり、図85(b)は、図85(a)の矢印LXXXVb方向視における鉤部材13312cの正面図であり、図85(c)は、図85(a)の矢印LXXXVc方向視における鉤部材13312cの側面図であり、図85(d)は、図85(b)のLXXXVd−LXXXVd線における鉤部材13312cの断面図である。 Next, the hook member 13312c will be described with reference to FIG. 85. The hook member 13312c is a member made of a hard resin material, FIG. 85 (a) is a front perspective view of the hook member 13312c, and FIG. 85 (b) is the direction of the arrow LXXXVb in FIG. 85 (a). FIG. 85 (c) is a front view of the hook member 13312c in view, FIG. 85 (c) is a side view of the hook member 13312c in the direction of arrow LXXXVc in FIG. 85 (a), and FIG. 85 (d) is a side view of FIG. 85 (b). It is sectional drawing of the hook member 13312c in the line LXXXXVd-LXXXVd.

図85に示すように、鉤部材13312cは左右対称な形状で構成される部材であって、上下方向に沿った長方形板状の本体部13312c1と、その本体部13312c1の上端部から正面側に延設される鉤部13312c2と、本体部13312c1の下端部から正面側に延設される傾斜当接部13312c3と、本体部13312c1及び傾斜当接部13312c3の底面よりも外側に張り出す底壁として形成される底壁部13312c4と、その底壁部13312c4の下面から本体部13312c1の一部を長手方向に削る態様で凹設される凹設部13312c5と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 85, the hook member 13312c is a member having a symmetrical shape, and extends from the upper end portion of the rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 13312c1 and the main body portion 13312c1 along the vertical direction to the front side. Formed as a hook portion 13312c2 to be provided, an inclined contact portion 13312c3 extending from the lower end portion of the main body portion 13312c1 to the front side, and a bottom wall protruding outward from the bottom surfaces of the main body portion 13312c1 and the inclined contact portion 13312c3. It mainly includes a bottom wall portion 13312c4 to be formed, and a recessed portion 13312c5 recessed in a manner in which a part of the main body portion 13312c1 is cut in the longitudinal direction from the lower surface of the bottom wall portion 13312c4.

傾斜当接部13312c3の底壁部13312c4の傾斜角度は、背面側枠部材13311のガイド底壁13311dに対する鉤部挿入孔13311eの傾斜角度と同等な傾斜角度とされる。 The inclination angle of the bottom wall portion 13312c4 of the inclined contact portion 13312c3 is set to an inclination angle equivalent to the inclination angle of the hook portion insertion hole 13311e with respect to the guide bottom wall 13311d of the back side frame member 13311.

次いで、図86を参照して、支持部材13312bについて説明する。支持部材13312bは硬質樹脂から構成されると共に上面視において長手方向を軸に対称な形状から形成される部材であって、図86(a)は、支持部材13312bの正面斜視図であり、図86(b)は、図86(a)の矢印LXXXVIb方向視における支持部材13312bの上面図であり、図86(c)は、図86(b)のLXXXVIc−LXXXVIc線における支持部材13312bの断面図である。 Next, the support member 13312b will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The support member 13312b is a member made of a hard resin and formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to the longitudinal direction in a top view. FIG. 86A is a front perspective view of the support member 13312b, and FIG. (B) is a top view of the support member 13312b in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIb of FIG. 86 (a), and FIG. 86 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the support member 13312b in the line LXXXVIc-LXXXXVIc of FIG. 86 (b). is there.

図86に示すように、支持部材13312bは、断面L字の板形状に形成される本体部13312b1と、その本体部13312b1の交差部の両側面を連結する一対の板状の当接板13312b2と、本体部13312b1の端部から厚み方向に凸設される係止凸部13312b3と、本体部13312b1の交差部において上下方向に穿設される覗き孔13312b4と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 86, the support member 13312b includes a main body portion 13312b1 formed in a plate shape having an L-shaped cross section and a pair of plate-shaped contact plates 13312b2 connecting both side surfaces of the intersection of the main body portion 13312b1. Mainly includes a locking convex portion 13312b3 that is projected from the end of the main body portion 13312b1 in the thickness direction, and a peep hole 13312b4 that is bored in the vertical direction at the intersection of the main body portion 13312b1.

図86(c)に示すように、支持部材13312bは、本体部13312b1及び当接板13312b2で囲われる領域にコイルバネSP13及び当接部材13312aが配設される部材である。 As shown in FIG. 86 (c), the support member 13312b is a member in which the coil spring SP13 and the contact member 13312a are arranged in the region surrounded by the main body portion 13312b1 and the contact plate 13312b2.

なお、本体部13312b1がコイルバネSP13に被さる状態で組み立てられるところ、覗き孔13312b4を通してコイルバネSP13を視認可能とされるので、組立時にコイルバネSP13を入れ忘れたり、コイルバネSP13の支持部材13312bに対する位置がずれたりすることを防止することができる。 When the main body portion 13312b1 is assembled so as to cover the coil spring SP13, the coil spring SP13 can be visually recognized through the peephole 13312b4. Therefore, the coil spring SP13 may be forgotten to be inserted during assembly, or the position of the coil spring SP13 with respect to the support member 13312b may shift. Can be prevented.

次いで、図87及び図88を参照して、背面側枠部材13311に対して姿勢修正装置13312を組み付ける方法について説明する。なお、図87及び図88では、背面側枠部材13311に姿勢修正装置13312を組み付ける様子が時系列で図示される。 Next, a method of assembling the posture correction device 13312 to the back side frame member 13311 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. In addition, in FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, the state of assembling the posture correction device 13312 to the back side frame member 13311 is shown in time series.

図87(a)は、背面側枠部材13311の部分上面図であり、図87(b)は、図87(a)のLXXXVIIb−LXXXVIIb線における背面側枠部材13311の部分断面図であり、図87(c)は、背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置13312の部分上面図であり、図87(d)は、図87(c)のLXXXVIId−LXXXVIId線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置13312の部分断面図であり、図87(e)は、図87(d)のLXXXVIIe−LXXXVIIe線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置13312の断面図である。 87 (a) is a partial top view of the back side frame member 13311, and FIG. 87 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 in the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a). 87 (c) is a partial top view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312, and FIG. 87 (d) is the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device in the line LXXXVIId-LXXXXVIId of FIG. 87 (c). It is a partial cross-sectional view of 13312, and FIG. 87 (e) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 in the line LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe of FIG. 87 (d).

また、図88(a)、図88(c)及び図88(e)は、背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置13312の部分上面図であり、図88(b)は、図88(a)のLXXXVIIIb−LXXXVIIIb線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置13312の部分断面図であり、図88(d)は、図88(c)のLXXXVIIId−LXXXVIIId線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置13312の部分断面図であり、図88(f)は、図88(e)のLXXXVIIIf−LXXXVIIIf線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置13312の部分断面図である。 88 (a), 88 (c) and 88 (e) are partial top views of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312, and FIG. 88 (b) is a partial top view of FIG. 88 (a). FIG. 88 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 in the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb, and FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of 13312, and FIG. 88 (f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 in the line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf of FIG. 88 (e).

背面側枠部材13310及び姿勢修正装置13312の組立方法について、詳細に説明する。まず、図87(a)及び図87(b)に図示される背面側枠部材13310に、姿勢修正装置13312がガイド底壁13311dに沿う形で移動され、図87(c)及び図87(d)に図示されるように、支持部材13312bの本体部13312b1の先端がガイド孔13311bに挿通される。ここで、支持部材13312bの左方には鉤部材13312cが組み付けられるが、それは後付けとされるので、支持部材13312bをガイド孔13311bに挿通する経路のスペース(図87(d)の支持部材13312bの左方のスペース)を広く取ることができ、支持部材13312bをガイド孔13311bに挿通することを容易とすることができる。 The method of assembling the back side frame member 13310 and the posture correction device 13312 will be described in detail. First, the posture correction device 13312 is moved to the back side frame member 13310 shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and 87 (b) along the guide bottom wall 13311d, and FIGS. 87 (c) and 87 (d). ), The tip of the main body portion 13312b1 of the support member 13312b is inserted into the guide hole 13311b. Here, the hook member 13312c is assembled to the left side of the support member 13312b, but since it is retrofitted, the space of the path for inserting the support member 13312b into the guide hole 13311b (the support member 13312b in FIG. 87 (d)). The space on the left side) can be widened, and the support member 13312b can be easily inserted into the guide hole 13311b.

この状態において、図87(e)に示すように、当接部材13312aは、フランジ部13312a2が背面側枠部材13311の延設壁13311cに係止される(せき止められる)形で背面側枠部材13311の内側に配設される。 In this state, as shown in FIG. 87 (e), in the contact member 13312a, the flange portion 13312a2 is locked (dammed) to the extended wall 13311c of the back side frame member 13311, and the back side frame member 13311 It is arranged inside the.

図87(c)から図87(e)に示す状態において、コイルバネSP13は自然長よりも縮められた状態となっている。即ち、支持部材13312bに右方へ向けた負荷がかけられており、その負荷を解除すると支持部材13312bが左方へ移動することとなる。 In the state shown in FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e), the coil spring SP13 is in a state of being contracted more than its natural length. That is, a load directed to the right is applied to the support member 13312b, and when the load is released, the support member 13312b moves to the left.

図88(a)及び図88(b)に示すように、図87(c)から図87(e)に示す状態から、背面側枠部材13311の鉤部挿入孔13311eに鉤部材13312cを背面側枠部材13311の外側(図88(b)下方)から挿入する。そのため、図88(d)に示すように、鉤部材13312cの一部が背面側枠部材13311の外方に露出するので、組み付け忘れした場合や、鉤部材が破損して脱落した場合に、外観検査でそれらの不良に気付く事ができる。 As shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), from the state shown in FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e), the hook member 13312c is placed on the back side of the hook portion insertion hole 13311e of the back side frame member 13311. It is inserted from the outside of the frame member 13311 (below FIG. 88 (b)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), a part of the hook member 13312c is exposed to the outside of the back side frame member 13311. Therefore, the appearance when the hook member is forgotten to be assembled or the hook member is damaged and falls off. You can notice those defects by inspection.

図88(c)及び図88(d)に示すように、鉤部材13312cの底壁部13312c4がガイド底壁13311dの下側面に当接するまで鉤部材13312cを押し込み、その状態で支持部材13312bにかけられていた負荷を外すと、コイルバネSP13の弾性力により支持部材13312bが鉤部材13312cに当接する位置まで図88(f)左方に移動され(支持部材13312bの左方への移動が鉤部材13312cにより防止され)、係止凸部13312b3が鉤部材13312cの鉤部13312c2に上方から覆われることにより支持部材13312bの上方への移動が規制される。 As shown in FIGS. 88 (c) and 88 (d), the hook member 13312c is pushed in until the bottom wall portion 13312c4 of the hook member 13312c abuts on the lower side surface of the guide bottom wall 13311d, and in that state, the hook member 13312b is hung on the support member 13312b. When the applied load is removed, the support member 13312b is moved to the left in FIG. 88 (f) to the position where the support member 13312b abuts on the hook member 13312c due to the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 (the movement of the support member 13312b to the left is due to the hook member 13312c. (Prevented), the locking convex portion 13312b3 is covered from above by the hook portion 13312c2 of the hook member 13312c, so that the upward movement of the support member 13312b is restricted.

即ち、支持部材13312bが、コイルバネSP13の弾性力により、図88(e)及び図88(f)に図示するように背面側枠部材13311に位置決めされる。 That is, the support member 13312b is positioned on the back side frame member 13311 as shown in FIGS. 88 (e) and 88 (f) by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13.

なお、本実施形態では、鉤部材13312cを背面側枠部材13311の外側から組み付けるようにしているので、支持部材13312bの移動寸法を小さくすることができる。即ち、鉤部材13312cを背面側枠部材13311の内側から背面側枠部材13311に組み付ける実施形態において、鉤部13312c2が支持部材13312bの上方への移動をせき止めるのと同様に、鉤部材13312cが背面側枠部材13311から上方へ移動することをせき止める鉤状部が鉤部13312c2の反対側に配設される場合には、支持部材13312bを鉤部13312c2の分の寸法に加え鉤状部の寸法の分も移動させる必要が生じる。 In the present embodiment, since the hook member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, the moving dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced. That is, in the embodiment in which the hook member 13312c is assembled from the inside of the back side frame member 13311 to the back side frame member 13311, the hook member 13312c is on the back side in the same manner as the hook portion 13312c2 blocks the upward movement of the support member 13312b. When the hook-shaped portion that prevents the frame member 13311 from moving upward is arranged on the opposite side of the hook portion 13312c2, the support member 13312b is added to the size of the hook portion 13312c2 and the size of the hook-shaped portion. Will also need to be moved.

この場合には、コイルバネSP13の選定が困難となり、姿勢修正装置13312の機能に支障をきたすおそれがある。即ち、姿勢修正装置13312の保持力を重視する場合、コイルバネSP13は弾性力の大きい物を選定する方が良い。組付け時に支持部材13312bを余分に移動させる必要(例えば、2倍の距離移動させる必要)が生じると、コイルバネSP13から生じる弾性力はその分だけ大きくなり(例えば、2倍となり)、力の弱い作業者では組み付けが困難となる。 In this case, it becomes difficult to select the coil spring SP13, which may interfere with the function of the posture correction device 13312. That is, when the holding force of the posture correction device 13312 is emphasized, it is better to select a coil spring SP13 having a large elastic force. If it becomes necessary to move the support member 13312b extra (for example, it is necessary to move it twice the distance) during assembly, the elastic force generated from the coil spring SP13 increases (for example, doubles) by that amount, and the force is weak. It is difficult for workers to assemble.

一方で、組立状態で支持部材13312bを保持するコイルバネSP13の弾性力は、鉤部材13312cを組み付ける際に支持部材13312bを移動させた距離には関係無く、組立状態でのコイルバネSP13の自然長からの変位による。そのため、支持部材13312bを移動させる距離を小さくする方が、より小さな力で組み付けられると共に、大きな保持力を確保することができる。本実施形態では、鉤部材13312cを背面側枠部材13311の外側から組み付けるようにしているので、支持部材13312bの移動寸法を小さくすることができる。 On the other hand, the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 that holds the support member 13312b in the assembled state is from the natural length of the coil spring SP13 in the assembled state regardless of the distance that the support member 13312b is moved when assembling the hook member 13312c. Depends on displacement. Therefore, if the distance for moving the support member 13312b is reduced, it can be assembled with a smaller force and a large holding force can be secured. In the present embodiment, since the hook member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, the moving dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced.

姿勢修正装置13312を取り外す際には、支持部材13312bの正面側端部(図88(f)左側端部)をコイルバネSP13が縮む方向に移動させることにより、鉤部材13312cと支持部材13312bとの係止が外れ、鉤部材13312cと支持部材13312bとをそれぞれ別々に背面側枠部材13311から取り外すことができる。 When removing the posture correction device 13312, the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b are engaged by moving the front side end portion (left end portion in FIG. 88F) of the support member 13312b in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts. The stopper is released, and the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b can be separately removed from the back side frame member 13311.

本実施形態では、組立状態(図88(f)参照)において、本体部13312b1の先端が背面側枠部材13311の外側面よりも内側(面位置)に配置されるので、背面側枠部材13311の外側から支持部材13312bを引き出すことが困難とされ、支持部材13312bをコイルバネSP13が縮む方向へ移動させるには、背面側枠部材13311の内側から力を負荷する必要がある。これにより、遊技者が誤って支持部材13312bを背面側枠部材13311から外してしまうことや、支持部材13312bや鉤部材13312cを抜き取る不正等を防止することができる。 In the present embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 88 (f)), the tip of the main body portion 13312b1 is arranged inside (surface position) from the outer surface of the back side frame member 13311, so that the back side frame member 13311 It is difficult to pull out the support member 13312b from the outside, and in order to move the support member 13312b in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts, it is necessary to apply a force from the inside of the back side frame member 13311. This makes it possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the support member 13312b from the back side frame member 13311 and fraudulently pulling out the support member 13312b and the hook member 13312c.

なお、支持部材13312bのぐらつきを防止するために、組立状態(図88(f)参照)において、鉤部材13312cの鉤部13312c2の下面と、支持部材13312bの係止凸部13312b3の上面とを密着させる必要がある。そのため、寸法関係を厳しく管理する必要が生じるが、支持部材13312bや鉤部材13312cの成型のばらつきにより、普通に嵌め込むだけでは鉤部13312c2の下面が係止凸部13312b3の上面よりも上側まで行かない(鉤部13312c2の背面(図88(f)右側の面)と係止凸部13312b3とが当接して支持部材が途中で止まってしまう)場合が生じる恐れがある。 In order to prevent the support member 13312b from wobbling, the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c2 of the hook member 13312c and the upper surface of the locking convex portion 13312b3 of the support member 13312b are brought into close contact with each other in the assembled state (see FIG. 88 (f)). I need to let you. Therefore, it is necessary to strictly control the dimensional relationship, but due to variations in the molding of the support member 13312b and the hook member 13312c, the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c2 may go to the upper side of the upper surface of the locking convex portion 13312b3 just by fitting normally. There is a possibility that there is no such case (the back surface of the hook portion 13312c2 (the surface on the right side in FIG. 88F) and the locking convex portion 13312b3 come into contact with each other and the support member stops in the middle).

本実施形態では、鉤部材13312cに配設される凹設部13312c5に力を集中して押し込むことにより、比較的小さな力で鉤部材13312cを変形させて、鉤部13312c1の下面が係止凸部13312b3の上面よりも上側に行くまで背面側枠部材13311の内側に押し込むことができる。 In the present embodiment, the hook member 13312c is deformed by a relatively small force by concentrating and pushing the force into the recessed portion 13312c5 arranged on the hook member 13312c, and the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c1 is locked by the convex portion. It can be pushed inward of the back side frame member 13311 until it goes above the upper surface of 13312b3.

また、鉤部材13312cが破損したり、鉤部材13312cを取り付け忘れた場合でも、支持部材13312bがコイルバネSP13の弾性力でガイド孔13311bの反対側の壁部に押し付けられるまで移動することにより、鉤部挿入孔13311eが閉鎖される。これにより、鉤部挿入孔13311eからワイヤを侵入させる不正行為を抑制することができる。 Further, even if the hook member 13312c is damaged or the hook member 13312c is forgotten to be attached, the support member 13312b moves until it is pressed against the wall portion on the opposite side of the guide hole 13311b by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13. The insertion hole 13311e is closed. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which the wire is inserted through the hook insertion hole 13311e.

次いで、図89を参照して、姿勢修正装置13312の機能について説明する。図89(a)及び図89(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイス13300の部分断面図である。なお、図89(a)では、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図89(b)では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。 Next, the function of the posture correction device 13312 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. 89 (a) and 89 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 13300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 89A shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 89B shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. ..

図89(a)に示すように、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置される際にレンズ部材13317が移動する方向Y13a(軸支棒363を通る直線方向であって振動装置366が変位する方向)と同じ方向に、遊技者がレンズ部材13317を押し込む操作方向U13aを設定する場合を説明する。なお、方向Y13aと、操作方向U13aとのなす角度が小さいほど、操作が容易となる(手首を返さず押し込める)。 As shown in FIG. 89A, the vibrating device 366 is displaced in the direction Y13a in which the lens member 13317 moves when the swing operating member 13310 is arranged in the upward position (in a linear direction passing through the shaft support rod 363). The case where the player sets the operation direction U13a for pushing the lens member 13317 in the same direction as the direction) will be described. The smaller the angle between the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a, the easier the operation (the wrist can be pushed in without returning).

図89(a)に示す状態から、駆動モータ335a(図79参照)を回転させることにより、偏心カム部材5333が回転し、レバー部材13340を図89(b)に示す下向き位置まで回転させる。 By rotating the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) from the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated, and the lever member 13340 is rotated to the downward position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

ここで、図89(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材13310を上向き位置から下向き位置まで移動する際に、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置される際のレバー部材13340の長手方向と平行な直線X13aと、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置される際のレバー部材13340の長手方向と平行な直線X13bとの成す角度θ13xだけ、レバー部材13340が回転される。 Here, as shown in FIG. 89B, when the swing operation member 13310 is moved from the upward position to the downward position, the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position. The lever member 13340 is rotated by the angle θ13x formed by the straight line X13a parallel to the above and the straight line X13b parallel to the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position.

ここで、レバー部材13340及び首振り操作部材13310が相対変位しない場合、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置されると、方向Y13aと操作方向U13aとの間の角度は、角度θ13xとなる。 Here, when the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 are not relatively displaced, the angle between the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a becomes the angle θ13x when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position.

これに対し、本実施形態では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置されると、当接部材13312aの張り出し部13312a1の先端が壁部材13322bに当接し、レバー部材13340に対して首振り操作部材13310が図89(a)時計回りに角度θ13yだけ回転される。なお、角度θ13yは、首振り部材360の本体部材361が回転可能な角度と同様の角度に設定される。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the tip of the overhanging portion 13312a1 of the contact member 13312a comes into contact with the wall member 13322b, and the swing operation is performed on the lever member 13340. The member 13310 is rotated clockwise by an angle θ13y in FIG. 89 (a). The angle θ13y is set to an angle similar to the angle at which the main body member 361 of the swing member 360 can rotate.

首振り操作部材13310がレバー部材13340に対して首振り回転されることにより、レンズ部材13317が移動する方向が方向Y13bに変化される(方向Y13aと方向Y13bとの成す角度が角度θ13y)。従って、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態において、レンズ部材13317が移動する方向Y13bを操作方向U13aに寄せる(レンズ部材13317を移動させる方向と操作方向U13aとの角度を小さくする)事ができるので、操作感が変化することを避けると共に、遊技者がレンズ部材13317を押しにくくなる事態を避けることができる。 When the swing operation member 13310 swings and rotates with respect to the lever member 13340, the direction in which the lens member 13317 moves is changed to the direction Y13b (the angle formed by the direction Y13a and the direction Y13b is an angle θ13y). Therefore, in the state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the direction Y13b in which the lens member 13317 moves is brought closer to the operation direction U13a (the angle between the direction in which the lens member 13317 is moved and the operation direction U13a is reduced). Since this can be done, it is possible to avoid a change in the operation feeling and a situation in which it becomes difficult for the player to press the lens member 13317.

本実施形態では、レバー部材13340に対する首振り操作部材13310の姿勢変化を、首振り操作部材13310の内部に姿勢修正装置13312を配設することにより達成している。そのため、レバー部材13340の内部に首振り操作部材13310に駆動力を伝達する伝達機構を配設する場合に比較して、構造を簡素化することができる。 In the present embodiment, the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is achieved by disposing the posture correction device 13312 inside the swing operation member 13310. Therefore, the structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the swing operation member 13310 is provided inside the lever member 13340.

また、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置されたタイミングで姿勢変化する構成とされるので、レバー部材13340を回転動作させる間に亘って首振り操作部材13310の姿勢変化を継続させる場合に比較して、遊技者にレンズ部材317を押すタイミングを示唆し易くすることができる。即ち、例えば、レバー部材13340に対して首振り操作部材13310が姿勢変化するタイミングに合わせて、第3図柄表示装置81(図2参照)に「押せ」などの表示をすることにより、第3図柄表示装置81の表示と操作デバイス13310の動きとをリンクさせることができ、遊技者がレンズ部材13317を押すべきタイミングを、遊技者にわかり易く告知することができる。 Further, since the swing operation member 13310 is configured to change its posture at the timing when it is arranged in the downward position, it is compared with the case where the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 is continued while the lever member 13340 is rotated. Therefore, it is possible to easily indicate to the player the timing of pressing the lens member 317. That is, for example, by displaying "press" or the like on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) at the timing when the swing operation member 13310 changes its posture with respect to the lever member 13340, the third symbol The display of the display device 81 and the movement of the operation device 13310 can be linked, and the timing at which the player should press the lens member 13317 can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

本実施形態では、姿勢修正装置13312が首振り操作部材13310のレバー部材13340に対する姿勢を変化させる負荷を与える機能を有するところ、姿勢修正装置13312から首振り操作部材13310に負荷される力はレバー部材13340の回転方向と逆向きに生じる(レバー部材13340が図89(b)反時計回りに回転する際に首振り操作部材13310を図89(b)時計回りに回転させる負荷が生じる)。従って、首振り操作部材13310を姿勢変化させるために姿勢修正装置13312が発生する力が、レバー部材13340を制動させる力としても機能する。そのため、レバー部材13340が勢い余って回転しすぎ、レバー部材13340の後端部(図89(b)右側端部)が内側ケース部材13330に衝突することを防止することができる。 In the present embodiment, the posture correction device 13312 has a function of applying a load for changing the posture of the swing operation member 13310 to the lever member 13340, and the force applied from the posture correction device 13312 to the swing operation member 13310 is the lever member. It occurs in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of 13340 (when the lever member 13340 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 89 (b), a load for rotating the swing operation member 13310 clockwise (b) occurs). Therefore, the force generated by the posture correction device 13312 for changing the posture of the swing operation member 13310 also functions as a force for braking the lever member 13340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 13340 from rotating too much and the rear end portion (right end portion in FIG. 89B) of the lever member 13340 from colliding with the inner case member 13330.

なお、姿勢修正装置13312が当接する壁部材13322bは、レバー部材13340が反時計回りに過回転(図89(b)の状態から更に回転)しようとする場合は、レバー部材13340にも当接可能な位置に配置されている。これにより、レンズ部材13317に遊技者が過荷重をかける場合にでも、レバー部材13340が過回転することを壁部材13322bにより防ぐことができる。 The wall member 13322b with which the posture correction device 13312 abuts can also abut with the lever member 13340 when the lever member 13340 intends to over-rotate counterclockwise (further rotate from the state shown in FIG. 89B). It is placed in a suitable position. As a result, even when the player applies an overload to the lens member 13317, the wall member 13322b can prevent the lever member 13340 from over-rotating.

ここで、レバー部材13340に沿ってレバー部材13340の回転軸から首振り操作部材13310までギアを連結させて、そのギア群の歯合回転により首振り操作部材13310を回転させることも可能である。これに対し、本実施形態では、首振り操作部材13310から張り出された当接部材13312aが壁部材13322bに当接することにより首振り操作部材13310を姿勢変化させるので、レバー部材13340に配設するギア群分の重量を省くことができる。そのため、レバー部材13340を軽量化することができ、駆動モータ335a(図79参照)の駆動力を抑制することができる。 Here, it is also possible to connect gears from the rotation shaft of the lever member 13340 to the swing operation member 13310 along the lever member 13340, and rotate the swing operation member 13310 by the mesh rotation of the gear group. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the contact member 13312a projecting from the swing operation member 13310 changes the posture of the swing operation member 13310 by contacting the wall member 13322b, so that the swing operation member 13310 is arranged on the lever member 13340. The weight of the gear group can be saved. Therefore, the weight of the lever member 13340 can be reduced, and the driving force of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be suppressed.

図89(a)及び図89(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材13310を付勢するねじりバネSP2の弾性力(ねじり方向の変位)が、上向き位置に配置される状態に比較して、下向き位置に配置される状態の方が大きくされる。また、下向き位置では、ねじりバネSP2の付勢方向の反対方向に首振り操作部材13310を回転させようとする態様で姿勢修正装置13312から首振り操作部材13310へ向けて力が負荷される。 As shown in FIGS. 89A and 89B, the elastic force (displacement in the torsional direction) of the torsion spring SP2 that urges the swing operation member 13310 is compared with the state in which the torsion spring SP2 is arranged in the upward position. , The state where it is placed in the downward position is larger. Further, in the downward position, a force is applied from the posture correction device 13312 toward the swing operation member 13310 in a manner in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated in the direction opposite to the urging direction of the torsion spring SP2.

そのため、首振り操作部材13310をレバー部材13340に対して相対変位しないように固定する力が、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置される状態に比較して、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置される状態の方が大きくなる。従って、レバー部材13340に対して首振り操作部材13310の回転抵抗の小さい(軽い)操作感を生じる状態(上向き位置)と、回転抵抗の大きい(重い)操作感を生じる状態(下向き位置)とを形成することができる。 Therefore, the force for fixing the swing operation member 13310 so as not to be relatively displaced with respect to the lever member 13340 is such that the swing operation member 13310 is in the downward position as compared with the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position. The state of being placed in is larger. Therefore, there are two states: a state in which the swing operation member 13310 has a small (light) operation feeling with respect to the lever member 13340 (upward position) and a state in which the rotation resistance is large (heavy) in operation (downward position). Can be formed.

例えば、上向き位置に首振り操作部材13310が配置される時にレンズ部材13317(図77参照)を叩く操作を行う場合に、ねじりバネSP2の付勢力が弱く、叩いた反動で首振り操作部材13310がレバー部材13340に対してぐらぐらと回動する演出を行うことができる一方で、下向き位置に首振り操作部材13310が配置される時にレンズ部材13317を叩く操作を行う場合には、首振り操作部材13310のレバー部材13340に対する回転抵抗が上昇することにより首振り操作部材13310をレバー部材13340に対して固めることができ、例えば、レンズ部材13317を連続して叩く場合に叩き損ねることを抑制することができる。 For example, when the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) is hit when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is weak, and the swing operation member 13310 is affected by the hit reaction. While it is possible to produce an effect of wobbling with respect to the lever member 13340, when the operation of hitting the lens member 13317 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation member 13310 is performed. By increasing the rotational resistance of the lever member 13340, the swinging operation member 13310 can be solidified with respect to the lever member 13340, and for example, it is possible to suppress failure to hit the lens member 13317 when it is continuously hit. ..

なお、本実実施形態における首振り操作部材13310の回転抵抗の変化は、レバー部材13340の位置の変化により生じるものであり、その作用が、レバー部材13340の移動速度によって変化するものでは無い。 The change in the rotational resistance of the swinging operation member 13310 in the present embodiment is caused by a change in the position of the lever member 13340, and the action is not changed by the moving speed of the lever member 13340.

次いで、図90を参照して、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態における首振り操作部材13310の姿勢変化について説明する。図90(a)及び図90(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイス13300の部分断面図である。なお、図90(a)及び図90(b)では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図90(a)では、当接部材13312aが壁部材13322bに当接して後方向に回転された状態が図示され、図90(b)では、レンズ部材13317が押し込まれた後も首振り操作部材13310に力が加えられ、姿勢修正装置13312のコイルバネSP13を縮ませながら、首振り操作部材13310を前方向に倒した状態が図示される。 Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 in the state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position will be described. 90 (a) and 90 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 13300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 90A and FIG. 90B, the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position is shown, and in FIG. 90A, the contact member 13312a comes into contact with the wall member 13322b. In FIG. 90B, a force is applied to the swing operation member 13310 even after the lens member 13317 is pushed in, and the coil spring SP13 of the posture correction device 13312 is contracted while the state of being rotated in the rearward direction is shown. , The state in which the swing operation member 13310 is tilted forward is shown.

図90(b)に示すように、レンズ部材13317に過負荷が与えられた場合にでも、姿勢修正装置13312が縮むことのできる態様で構成されるので、レンズ部材13317に過負荷が生じた場合に首振り操作部材13310を姿勢変化可能とすると共に、壁部材13322bを破損する(貫通して破壊する)ことを防止することができる。 As shown in FIG. 90 (b), even when the lens member 13317 is overloaded, the posture correction device 13312 is configured to be able to contract, so that when the lens member 13317 is overloaded. The posture of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed, and the wall member 13322b can be prevented from being damaged (penetrated and destroyed).

また、当接部材13312aの先端を壁部材13322bに押し当てて首振り操作部材13310を回転させる場合に、その回転角度が大きくなるほどコイルバネSP13の変位が大きくなり、コイルバネSP13から生じる弾性力その変位に比例して大きくなるので、首振り操作部材13310が過度に回転することを抑制することができる。 Further, when the tip of the contact member 13312a is pressed against the wall member 13322b to rotate the swing operation member 13310, the displacement of the coil spring SP13 increases as the rotation angle increases, and the elastic force generated from the coil spring SP13 is affected by the displacement. Since it increases proportionally, it is possible to prevent the swinging operation member 13310 from rotating excessively.

なお、本実施形態では、レンズ部材13317を押し込む方向Y13a,Y13b上に首振り操作部材13310の回転軸である軸支棒363が配設されるので、レンズ部材13317を押し込む荷重により首振り操作部材13310を回転させる力が生じることを抑制することができる。 In the present embodiment, since the shaft support rod 363, which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 13310, is arranged on the directions Y13a and Y13b for pushing the lens member 13317, the swing operation member is subjected to the load of pushing the lens member 13317. It is possible to suppress the generation of a force for rotating the 13310.

次いで、図91から図96を参照して、第14実施形態について説明する。上述した第13実施形態では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置されると首振り操作部材13310が必ず姿勢変化される場合を説明したが、第14実施形態における操作デバイス14300は、首振り操作部材14310が下向き位置に配置された状態において首振り操作部材14310が姿勢変化する場合と、姿勢変化しない場合とを切り替えることができる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the swing operation member 13310 is always arranged in the downward position causes the swing operation member 13310 to change its posture. However, the operation device 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment swings. It is possible to switch between the case where the swinging operation member 14310 changes its posture and the case where the posture does not change when the operating member 14310 is arranged in the downward position. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図91(a)は、第14実施形態におけるロック部材14336の正面図であり、図91(b)は、図91(a)の矢印LXXXXIb方向視におけるロック部材14336の側面図である。 91 (a) is a front view of the lock member 14336 in the 14th embodiment, and FIG. 91 (b) is a side view of the lock member 14336 in the direction of the arrow LXXXXIb of FIG. 91 (a).

図91に示すように、ロック部材14336は、上下方向に長尺な棒形状に構成されると共に湾曲壁部5336a1及び凸設部5336a2を有する本体部材14336aと、軸支孔5336bと、本体部材14336aから没出方向に移動可能に構成される係止部材14336cと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 91, the lock member 14336 is formed in a rod shape that is long in the vertical direction, and has a main body member 14336a having a curved wall portion 5336a1 and a convex portion 5336a2, a shaft support hole 5336b, and a main body member 14336a. It mainly includes a locking member 14336c which is configured to be movable in the sinking direction.

係止部材14336cは、本体部材14336aに没出動作可能に嵌め込まれ、本体部材14336aとの間に付勢バネSP14aが配設される部材であって、出張った状態ではロック解除カム部材5339と当接可能な位置に配置される。係止部材14336cは、上側面に面取りされて構成される面取り部14336c1を備える。 The locking member 14336c is a member that is fitted into the main body member 14336a so as to be retractable, and an urging spring SP14a is arranged between the locking member 14336c and the main body member 14336a, and is in contact with the unlocking cam member 5339 when traveling. It is placed in a position where it can be touched. The locking member 14336c includes a chamfered portion 14336c1 formed by chamfering on the upper side surface.

そのため、ロック解除カム部材5339(図92(a)参照)が係止部材14336cに上方から当接する場合には面取り部14336c1に沿って係止部材14336cを本体部材14336aの内方へ向けて押し込む(没入)させることが可能とされ、上方以外(例えば、正面側から(図91(b)左方から))当接する場合には係止部材14336cを押すことによりロック部材14336を回転させることができる。 Therefore, when the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 92A) comes into contact with the locking member 14336c from above, the locking member 14336c is pushed inward of the main body member 14336a along the chamfered portion 14336c1 (see FIG. 92A). (Immersion) is possible, and the lock member 14336 can be rotated by pushing the locking member 14336c when the contact is made from the front side (for example, from the left side in FIG. 91B). ..

図92(a)を参照して、偏心カム部材14333と、その偏心カム部材14333に当接し回転する姿勢切替装置14337について説明する。図92(a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイス14300の部分断面図である。 The eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 that abuts and rotates in contact with the eccentric cam member 14333 will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (a). FIG. 92 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 14300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a).

図92(a)に示すように、偏心カム部材14333は、本体部333aと、筒状部333bと、左右方向(図92(a)紙面垂直方向)で形状が異なるカム部14333cと、傘部5333fと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 92A, the eccentric cam member 14333 includes a main body portion 333a, a tubular portion 333b, a cam portion 14333c having different shapes in the left-right direction (FIG. 92 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface), and an umbrella portion. Mainly includes 5333f.

カム部14333cは、図92(a)手前側において半円状に形成される半円状部14333c1と、その半円状部14333c1の左方(図92(b)紙面奥方)において半円状部14333c1の端部から凸設される凸設部14333c2と、を備える。 The cam portion 14333c is a semicircular portion 14333c1 formed in a semicircular shape on the front side in FIG. 92 (a) and a semicircular portion on the left side of the semicircular portion 14333c1 (in the back of the paper surface in FIG. 92 (b)). A convex portion 14333c2, which is projected from an end portion of the 14333c1, is provided.

凸設部14333c2は、周方向の側面が偏心カム部材14333の径方向に対して傾斜する態様とされる。そのため、凸設部14333c2と、姿勢切替装置14337とが当接する際に、凸設部14337b1を押す力を偏心カム部材14333の周方向の力だけでなく、径方向に発生する力(偏心カム軸331d2との間の距離関係で生じる負荷)によっても生じさせることができる。従って、偏心カム部材14333に生じる回転方向の負荷を低減することができる。 The convex portion 14333c2 is configured such that the side surface in the circumferential direction is inclined with respect to the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333. Therefore, when the convex portion 14333c2 and the attitude switching device 14337 come into contact with each other, the force for pushing the convex portion 14337b1 is not only the force in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 but also the force generated in the radial direction (eccentric cam shaft). It can also be generated by the load generated in the distance relationship with 331d2). Therefore, the load in the rotational direction generated on the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced.

姿勢切替装置14337は、断面L字の板形状に構成される本体部材14337aと、その本体部材14337aの側方から二股を構成する形状で延設される延設部14337bと、それら本体部材14337aと延設部14337bとの連結部分において本体部材14337a及び延設部14337bを軸支する軸支部14337cと、本体部材14337aの端部に弾性力を負荷する事により本体部材14337aの姿勢を中間位置で維持する弾性装置14337dと、を主に備える。 The posture switching device 14337 includes a main body member 14337a having a plate shape with an L-shaped cross section, an extension portion 14337b extending from the side of the main body member 14337a in a bifurcated shape, and these main body members 14337a. The posture of the main body member 14337a is maintained at an intermediate position by applying an elastic force to the shaft support portion 14337c that pivotally supports the main body member 14337a and the extension portion 14337b at the connecting portion with the extension portion 14337b and the end portion of the main body member 14337a. The elastic device 14337d and the like are mainly provided.

本体部材14337aは、軸支部14337cに軸支される端部の反対側の端部が内側ケース部材14330から張り出し可能に構成される。なお、図92(a)に示す状態では、本体部材14337aは首振り操作部材14310に当接はしても、荷重を負荷することはできない位置関係(距離0で触れる位置関係)とされる。 The main body member 14337a is configured such that the end on the opposite side of the end pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 14337c can project from the inner case member 14330. In the state shown in FIG. 92A, the main body member 14337a is in a positional relationship (positional relationship in which the main body member 14337a is touched at a distance of 0) even if it comes into contact with the swing operation member 14310, but cannot apply a load.

延設部14337bは、左右方向(図92(a)紙面垂直方向)の位置として傘部5333fと同じ平面上に配設され、軸支部14337cの反対側において凸設部14333c2と当接可能なように図92(a)紙面手前側に凸設される凸設部14337b1を備える。ここで、凸設部14337b1は、図92(a)の状態で凸設部14333c2の移動軌跡上に配設されると共に、本体部材14337aが端まで回転された状態(図93(b)又は図95(b)参照)において凸設部14333c2の移動軌跡から外れる位置に配設される。 The extension portion 14337b is arranged on the same plane as the umbrella portion 5333f as a position in the left-right direction (vertical direction on the paper surface in FIG. 92A) so that it can come into contact with the convex portion 14333c2 on the opposite side of the shaft support portion 14337c. 92 (a) is provided with a convex portion 14337b1 projecting on the front side of the paper surface. Here, the convex portion 14337b1 is arranged on the movement locus of the convex portion 14333c2 in the state of FIG. 92 (a), and the main body member 14337a is rotated to the end (FIG. 93 (b) or FIG. 95 (b)), it is arranged at a position deviating from the movement locus of the convex portion 14333c2.

弾性装置14337dは、内側ケース部材14330の内側にケースが固着され、本体部材14337aに当接する部分がくの字状に凹設され、その凹設部分がコイルバネで付勢された状態で位置変化可能に構成される。即ち、本体部材14337aが回転仕掛けたとしても、回転力を取り除くと、くの字状の凹設部分に収束される形で位置復帰させる事ができる。 In the elastic device 14337d, the case is fixed to the inside of the inner case member 14330, and the portion in contact with the main body member 14337a is recessed in a dogleg shape, and the recessed portion can be changed in position while being urged by a coil spring. It is composed. That is, even if the main body member 14337a is set to rotate, if the rotational force is removed, the position can be returned in a form that converges on the dogleg-shaped recessed portion.

図92(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイス14300の部分断面図である。なお、図92(b)では、図92(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが回転され、偏心カム部材14333とロック解除カム部材5339が反時計回りに回転することにより、ロック部材14336が回転され、レバー部材13340が回転し、首振り操作部材14310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。即ち、図92(a)から図92(b)までの間に、首振り操作部材14310は第13実施形態における首振り操作部材13310と同等の距離移動される。 FIG. 92 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 14300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 92 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated from the state of FIG. 92 (a), and the eccentric cam member 14333 and the unlock cam member 5339 are rotated counterclockwise to rotate the lock member 14336. , The state in which the lever member 13340 is rotated and the swing operation member 14310 is arranged in the upward position is shown. That is, between FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b), the swing operation member 14310 is moved by the same distance as the swing operation member 13310 in the thirteenth embodiment.

また、本実施形態では、第13実施形態と比較して、壁部材13322b(図78参照)が省略されると共に、姿勢修正装置13312(図80参照)が張り出す為に穿設されたガイド孔13311bが閉鎖される態様で形成される背面側枠部材14311が首振り操作部材14310の後側面に配設される。 Further, in the present embodiment, as compared with the thirteenth embodiment, the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted, and the guide hole drilled for the posture correction device 13312 (see FIG. 80) to project. A back side frame member 14311 formed in such a manner that the 13311b is closed is arranged on the rear side surface of the swing operation member 14310.

図93(a)及び図93(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイス14300の部分断面図である。なお、図93(a)では、図92(b)の状態から偏心カム部材14333が反時計回りに回転され首振り操作部材14310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図93(b)では、図93(a)の状態から偏心カム部材14333が反時計回りに回転され姿勢切替部材14337の本体部材14337aが回転端まで回転される状態が図示される。図93(b)の状態から更に偏心カム部材14333を回転させると図92(a)の状態に戻る。 93 (a) and 93 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 14300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 93 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 92 (b) and the swing operation member 14310 is arranged in the downward position. The state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 93A and the main body member 14337a of the posture switching member 14337 is rotated to the rotation end is shown. When the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 93 (b), the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 92 (a).

即ち、偏心カム部材14333を図92(a)の反時計回りに回転させる駆動状態では、姿勢切替装置14337から首振り操作部材14310へ負荷が生じることは無く、首振り操作部材14310はレバー部材13340に対して姿勢を維持したまま移動する。 That is, in the driving state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 92 (a), no load is generated from the attitude switching device 14337 to the swing operation member 14310, and the swing operation member 14310 is the lever member 13340. Move while maintaining the posture.

次いで図94を参照して、偏心カム部材14333と姿勢切替装置14337との連動について説明する。図94(a)から図94(c)は、偏心カム部材14333及び姿勢切替装置14337の部分拡大図である。なお、図94(a)では、偏心カム部材14333が反時計回りに回転され、凸設部14333c2と凸設部14337b1とが当接した状態が図示され、図94(b)では、図94(a)の状態から更に偏心カム部材14333が反時計回りに所定量回転され凸設部14337b1が凸設部14333c2よりも偏心カム軸331d2側に移動された状態が図示され、図94(c)では、図94(b)の状態から更に偏心カム部材14333が反時計回りに所定量回転され、凸設部14333c2と凸設部14337b1との当接が解除された直後の状態が図示される。 Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the interlocking of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 will be described. 94 (a) to 94 (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337. Note that FIG. 94 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise and the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 are in contact with each other, and FIG. 94 (b) shows FIG. 94 (b). From the state of a), the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount, and the convex portion 14337b1 is moved to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 side from the convex portion 14333c2. FIG. 94 (c) shows. , The state immediately after the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 94B and the contact between the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 is released is shown.

図94に示すように、本実施形態では、半円状部14333c1で姿勢切替装置14337を押す場合に比較して、延設部14337bの回転角度が小さな状態で凸設部14333c2と凸設部14337b1との当接を解除することができる。 As shown in FIG. 94, in the present embodiment, the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 are in a state where the rotation angle of the extension portion 14337b is smaller than that in the case where the posture switching device 14337 is pushed by the semicircular portion 14333c1. The contact with and can be released.

即ち、半円状部14333c1で姿勢切替装置14337を押す場合、半円状部14333c1の回転軌跡から凸設部14337b1を押し出すまでは、延設部14337bが回転され続ける。 That is, when the posture switching device 14337 is pushed by the semicircular portion 14333c1, the extending portion 14337b continues to rotate until the convex portion 14337b1 is pushed out from the rotation locus of the semicircular portion 14333c1.

これに対し、本実実施形態では、凸設部14337b1が凸設部14333c2と偏心カム軸331d2との間に逃げることができるので(図94(b)参照)、図94(a)に示す状態から、図94(b)に示す状態まで延設部14337bを回転させるのみで、凸設部14333c2と凸設部14337b1との当接を解除することができる(図94(c)参照)。従って、延設部14337bが偏心カム部材14333の回転の抵抗となる領域を小さくする事ができ、偏心カム部材14333を駆動する駆動力を抑制することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the convex portion 14337b1 can escape between the convex portion 14333c2 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 94 (b)), the state shown in FIG. 94 (a). Therefore, the contact between the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 can be released only by rotating the extension portion 14337b to the state shown in FIG. 94 (b) (see FIG. 94 (c)). Therefore, the region where the extension portion 14337b becomes a resistance to rotation of the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced, and the driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 14333 can be suppressed.

図95及び図96を参照して、図95(a)、図95(b)、図96(a)及び図96(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイス14300の部分断面図である。なお、図95(a)では、首振り操作部材14310が下向き位置に配置されると共に偏心カム部材14333の凸設部14333c2が姿勢切替装置の凸設部14337b1よりも下方に配置された状態(図92(a)と同等の状態)が図示され、図95(b)では、図95(a)の状態から偏心カム部材14333が時計回りに回転され凸設部14333cが凸設部14337b1を押すことにより姿勢切替部材14337の本体部材14337aが回転端まで回転された状態が図示され、図96(a)では、図95(b)に示す状態から偏心カム部材14333が時計回りに回転された状態が図示され、図96(b)では、図96(a)に示す状態から偏心カム部材14333が時計回りに回転された状態が図示される。 95 (a), 95 (b), 96 (a) and 96 (b) are the lines corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa lines of FIG. 17 (a) with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 14300. In FIG. 95A, the swing operation member 14310 is arranged in a downward position, and the convex portion 14333c2 of the eccentric cam member 14333 is arranged below the convex portion 14337b1 of the attitude switching device (FIG. FIG. A state equivalent to 92 (a)) is shown, and in FIG. 95 (b), the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 95 (a), and the convex portion 14333c pushes the convex portion 14337b1. The state in which the main body member 14337a of the posture switching member 14337 is rotated to the rotation end is shown, and in FIG. 96 (a), the state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 95 (b) is shown. Illustrated, FIG. 96 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 96 (a).

図95及び図96に示すように、偏心カム部材14333を反時計回りに回転させることにより、姿勢切替装置14337を介して首振り操作部材14310を首振り動作させることができる(図95(b)参照)。即ち、偏心カム部材14333の回転方向を切り替えるだけで、下向き位置において首振り操作部材14310を首振りさせる動作状態と、首振り操作部材14310のレバー部材13340に対する姿勢を維持する動作状態とを切り替えることができる。 As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, by rotating the eccentric cam member 14333 counterclockwise, the swing operation member 14310 can be swung via the attitude switching device 14337 (FIG. 95 (b)). reference). That is, by simply switching the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, the operation state of swinging the swing operation member 14310 in the downward position and the operation state of maintaining the posture of the swing operation member 14310 with respect to the lever member 13340 can be switched. Can be done.

また、図95(b)に図示されるように、偏心カム部材14333で首振り操作部材14310に負荷をあたえる際には、レバー部材13340に対して偏心カム部材14333は負荷を与えていない。これは、レバー部材13340と姿勢切替装置14337との間に十分な距離を設け、レバー部材13340、姿勢切替装置14337及び偏心カム部材14333が同時に当接しない位置関係で配設したことによる。従って、偏心カム部材14333により複数の部材にそれぞれ駆動力を伝達可能としながらも、それらが同時に伝達されることは避けることができるので、駆動モータ335a(図79参照)の駆動力を抑制することができる。 Further, as shown in FIG. 95B, when the eccentric cam member 14333 applies a load to the swing operation member 14310, the eccentric cam member 14333 does not apply a load to the lever member 13340. This is because a sufficient distance is provided between the lever member 13340 and the attitude switching device 14337, and the lever member 13340, the attitude switching device 14337, and the eccentric cam member 14333 are arranged in a positional relationship so as not to come into contact with each other at the same time. Therefore, while the eccentric cam member 14333 can transmit the driving force to each of the plurality of members, it is possible to avoid transmitting them at the same time, so that the driving force of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) is suppressed. Can be done.

凸設部14333c2の上側側面(凸設部14337b1と当接する側面)が、偏心カム部材14333の軸径方向に対して傾斜して形成されるので、凸設部14333c2と、姿勢切替装置14337とが当接する際に、凸設部14337b1を押す力を偏心カム部材14333の周方向の力だけでなく、径方向に発生する力(偏心カム軸331d2との間の距離関係で生じる負荷)によっても生じさせることができる。従って、偏心カム部材14333に生じる回転方向の負荷を低減することができる。 Since the upper side surface of the convex portion 14333c2 (the side surface that comes into contact with the convex portion 14337b1) is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the axial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, the convex portion 14333c2 and the posture switching device 14337 are formed. The force that pushes the convex portion 14337b1 at the time of contact is generated not only by the force in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 but also by the force generated in the radial direction (the load generated by the distance relationship with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2). Can be made to. Therefore, the load in the rotational direction generated on the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced.

なお、図96(b)の状態から更に偏心カム部材14333が時計回りに回転すると図95(a)の状態に戻る。このとき、ロック解除カム部材5339はロック部材14336に対して上方から当接されるので、ロック部材14336の係止部材14336c(図91参照)は没入状態とされ、ロック解除カム部材5339の回転が阻害されることは防止される。 When the eccentric cam member 14333 further rotates clockwise from the state of FIG. 96 (b), it returns to the state of FIG. 95 (a). At this time, since the unlock cam member 5339 is brought into contact with the lock member 14336 from above, the locking member 14336c (see FIG. 91) of the lock member 14336 is in an immersive state, and the rotation of the unlock cam member 5339 is performed. It is prevented from being hindered.

図92から図96で説明したように、偏心カム部材14333の回転方向を切り替えることにより首振り操作部材14310が下向き位置に配置された状態において姿勢変化するか否かを切り替えることができるので、例えば、偏心カム部材14333を特定の位相に配置することにより首振り操作部材14310に負荷を与える場合に比較して、駆動モータ335a(図79参照)の制御を緩くすることができる(多少空回りさせたとしても、外観上変化を生じなくさせることができる)。 As described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96, by switching the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, it is possible to switch whether or not the posture changes when the swing operation member 14310 is arranged in the downward position. By arranging the eccentric cam member 14333 in a specific phase, the control of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be loosened (slightly idle) as compared with the case where a load is applied to the swing operation member 14310. However, it is possible to prevent the appearance from changing).

ここで、図92(a)の状態から偏心カム部材14333が回転されることにより図92(b)の状態へ変わるまでの時間と、図95(a)の状態から偏心カム部材14333が回転されることにより図95(b)の状態へ変わるまでの時間とを合わせることにより(合致するように偏心カム部材14333及びロック部材14336の停止位置を定めることにより)、偏心カム部材14333の回転速度はそのままで、回転方向を切り替えることにより、駆動モータ335a(図79参照)の駆動後の同じタイミングで図92(a)の状態から図92(b)の状態へ変わるか、図95(a)の状態から図95(b)の状態へ変わるかのどちらかの変化を生じさせることができる。 Here, the time until the eccentric cam member 14333 changes from the state of FIG. 92 (a) to the state of FIG. 92 (b) and the eccentric cam member 14333 are rotated from the state of FIG. 95 (a). By matching the time until the state changes to the state shown in FIG. 95 (b) (by determining the stop positions of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 so as to match), the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 14333 can be adjusted. By switching the rotation direction as it is, the state of FIG. 92 (a) changes to the state of FIG. 92 (b) at the same timing after the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) is driven, or the state of FIG. 95 (a). Either change from state to state in FIG. 95 (b) can occur.

例えば、図92(a)の状態から図92(b)の状態へ変わる変化が生じるまでの時間よりも、図95(a)の状態から図95(b)の状態へ変わる変化が生じるまでの時間の方が短いとすると、駆動モータ335aの動作振動を感じてから図95(a)の状態から図95(b)の状態へ変わる変化が生じ無い場合には、必然的に図92(a)の状態から図92(b)の状態へ変わる変化が生じることとなってしまい、首振り操作部材14310の動きに注目せずとも首振り操作部材14310が次にどんな動作を行うかを判別できてしまい、遊技者の興趣を低下させることになる。 For example, it takes longer than the time until the change from the state of FIG. 92 (a) to the state of FIG. 92 (b) occurs until the change from the state of FIG. 95 (a) to the state of FIG. 95 (b) occurs. Assuming that the time is shorter, if there is no change from the state shown in FIG. 95 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 95 (b) after the operating vibration of the drive motor 335a is felt, it is inevitable that the state shown in FIG. ) Will change to the state shown in FIG. 92 (b), and it is possible to determine what kind of operation the swing operation member 14310 will perform next without paying attention to the movement of the swing operation member 14310. This will reduce the interest of the player.

これに対し、本実施形態では、駆動モータ335aの振動を遊技者が感じたとしても、それによって図92(a)の状態から図92(b)の状態へ変わる変化が生じるのか、図95(a)の状態から図95(b)の状態へ変わる変化が生じるのかを判別することを不可能とすることができる。従って、首振り操作部材14310への遊技者の注目力を向上させることができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the player feels the vibration of the drive motor 335a, does it cause a change from the state of FIG. 92 (a) to the state of FIG. 92 (b)? It is possible to make it impossible to determine whether or not a change from the state of a) to the state of FIG. 95 (b) occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the swing operation member 14310.

なお、本実施形態では、偏心カム部材14333とロック部材14336とが同一の駆動ギア335bに歯合され同期回転する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものでは無い。例えば、第4実施形態のように、偏心カム部材14333とロック部材14336とが別の駆動ギアで回転されても良い。この場合にも、いずれかの駆動モータを動作させてから、首振り操作部材14310がレバー部材13340に対して首振り動作(図92(a)時計回りに回転)し始めるまでの時間と、レバー部材13340が図92(a)時計回りに回転動作し始めるまでの時間とを合わせることで、同様の効果を得ることができる。 In the present embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 are meshed with the same drive gear 335b and rotate synchronously has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the fourth embodiment, the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 may be rotated by different drive gears. In this case as well, the time from operating one of the drive motors until the swinging operation member 14310 starts swinging with respect to the lever member 13340 (rotating clockwise in FIG. 92A) and the lever. The same effect can be obtained by combining the time until the member 13340 starts to rotate clockwise in FIG. 92 (a).

また、それぞれ動作し始めるまでの時間が異なる場合にも、かかる時間が長い第1の駆動モータを先に回転させ、かかる時間の短い第2の駆動モータを後で回転させた後で、先に駆動させた第1の駆動モータを停止させることにより(この間も第2の駆動モータの振動を遊技者が感じる)、かかる時間の長い第1の駆動モータの振動を遊技者に感じさせながら、第2の駆動モータによる動作を生じさせる事ができ、遊技者に驚きを与えることができる。 In addition, even if the time required to start operation is different, the first drive motor, which takes a long time, is rotated first, and the second drive motor, which takes a short time, is rotated later, and then first. By stopping the driven first drive motor (the player still feels the vibration of the second drive motor during this period), the player feels the vibration of the first drive motor, which takes a long time, and the first The operation by the drive motor of 2 can be generated, and the player can be surprised.

次いで図97を参照して、偏心カム部材14333と姿勢切替装置14337との連動について説明する。図97(a)から図97(c)は、偏心カム部材14333及び姿勢切替装置14337の部分拡大図である。なお、図97(a)では、偏心カム部材14333が時計回りに回転され、凸設部14333c2と凸設部14337b1とが当接し始めた状態が図示され、図97(b)では、図97(a)の状態から更に偏心カム部材14333が時計回りに所定量回転され凸設部14337b1が凸設部14333c2の外周に近い側に移動された状態が図示され、図97(c)では、図97(b)の状態から更に偏心カム部材14333が時計回りに所定量回転され、凸設部14333c2の外周面に凸設部14337b1が当接された状態が図示される。 Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the interlocking of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 will be described. 97 (a) to 97 (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the attitude switching device 14337. Note that FIG. 97 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise and the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 start to come into contact with each other. FIG. 97 (b) shows FIG. 97 (b). From the state of a), the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, and the convex portion 14337b1 is moved to the side closer to the outer periphery of the convex portion 14333c2. FIG. 97 (c) shows FIG. 97. From the state of (b), the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, and the state in which the convex portion 14337b1 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the convex portion 14333c2 is shown.

図97に示すように、凸設部14333c2の上側面が外周面から偏心カム軸331d2に近接するほど外周面と偏心カム軸331dを結ぶ直線から遠ざかる態様で傾斜するので、偏心カム部材14333の回転による変位が、凸設部14337b1を偏心カム部材14333の軸径方向に移動させる(負荷の軸径方向への成分が支配的となる)。そのため、偏心カム部材14333に周方向の抵抗が生じる場合に比較して、偏心カム部材14333に与えられる負荷(駆動モータ335aに与えられる負荷)を抑制することができる。 As shown in FIG. 97, the closer the upper side surface of the convex portion 14333c2 is to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 from the outer peripheral surface, the more it is inclined from the straight line connecting the outer peripheral surface and the eccentric cam shaft 331d. Therefore, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 14333 The displacement due to the above causes the convex portion 14337b1 to move in the axial direction of the shaft of the eccentric cam member 14333 (the component in the axial direction of the load becomes dominant). Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 14333 (the load applied to the drive motor 335a) can be suppressed as compared with the case where resistance in the circumferential direction is generated in the eccentric cam member 14333.

また、図97(c)に示す状態において、凸設部14337bから偏心カム部材14333へ与えられる負荷は偏心カム軸331d2を通るので、偏心カム部材14333を回転させる力が生じず、駆動モータ335aの動力を切った状態でも凸設部14337bからの負荷に対抗することができる。従って、駆動モータ335aの消費電力を低減することができる。 Further, in the state shown in FIG. 97 (c), since the load applied from the convex portion 14337b to the eccentric cam member 14333 passes through the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, no force is generated to rotate the eccentric cam member 14333, and the drive motor 335a Even when the power is turned off, the load from the convex portion 14337b can be countered. Therefore, the power consumption of the drive motor 335a can be reduced.

次いで、図98及び図99を参照して、第15実施形態について説明する。上述した第13実施形態では、姿勢修正装置13312の当接部材13312aを背面側枠部材13311の外側から抜き取り不能な場合を説明したが、第15実施形態における操作デバイス15300は、当接部材13312aを背面側枠部材13311の外側から抜き取る状態を構成可能とされる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 cannot be pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311 has been described, but the operation device 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment has the contact member 13312a. It is possible to configure a state in which the back side frame member 13311 is pulled out from the outside. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図98(a)及び図98(b)は、第15実施形態における当接部材15312aの上面図であり、図98(c)は、図87のLXXXVIIb−LXXXVIIb線に対応する線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置15312の断面図であり、図98(d)は、図98(c)のLXXXXVIIId−LXXXXVIIId線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置15312の断面図である。 98 (a) and 98 (b) are top views of the contact member 15312a in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 98 (c) is a back side frame in a line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. FIG. 98 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312, and FIG. 98 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312 in the line LXXXXXXVIIId-LXXXXVIIId of FIG. 98 (c).

なお、図98(a)では、フランジ部材15312a2が張り出し部材13312a1に埋め込まれた状態(係止状態)が図示され、図98(b)では、フランジ部材15312a2が張り出し部材13312a1から抜き取られた状態(抜き状態)が図示される。 Note that FIG. 98A shows a state in which the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the overhanging member 13312a1 (locked state), and FIG. 98B shows a state in which the flange member 15312a2 is pulled out from the overhanging member 13312a1 (in FIG. 98B). The unplugged state) is shown.

図98(a)及び図98(b)に示すように、当接部材15312aは、端部が変形可能に構成される棒状の張り出し部材15312a1と、断面T字状に形成されると共に張り出し部材15312a1に埋め込まれることで張り出し部材15312a1を変形させるフランジ部材15312a2と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b), the contact member 15312a is formed with a rod-shaped overhang member 15312a1 having a deformable end portion and a T-shaped cross section, and the overhang member 15312a1. Mainly includes a flange member 15312a2 that deforms the overhanging member 15312a1 by being embedded in the.

張り出し部材15312a1は、弾性率の高いゴム材料から形成され、長尺棒状の本体部15312a11と、その本体部15312a11の一端の短手方向端部において連結される一対の変形部15312a12と、を主に備える。本体部15312a11と変形部15312a12との連結部分には、変形し易いように切れ目が入れられており、フランジ部材15312a2が埋め込まれていない状態(図98(b)参照)において変形部15312a12は本体部15312a11の短手方向の幅の内側に収まる。 The overhanging member 15312a1 is formed of a rubber material having a high elastic modulus, and mainly includes a long rod-shaped main body portion 15312a11 and a pair of deformed portions 15312a12 connected at one end of the main body portion 15312a11 in the lateral direction. Be prepared. The connecting portion between the main body portion 15312a11 and the deforming portion 15312a12 is provided with a cut so as to be easily deformed, and the deformed portion 15312a12 is the main body portion in a state where the flange member 15312a2 is not embedded (see FIG. 98 (b)). It fits inside the width of 15312a11 in the lateral direction.

フランジ部材15312a2は、一対の支持部材案内壁13311fの間に収まる寸法で形成される土台部15312a21と、その土台部15312a21から張り出し部材15312a1の本体部15312a11と変形部15312a12との連結部分同士の距離よりも短い幅で凸設される凸設部15312a22と、を主に備える。 The flange member 15312a2 is based on the distance between the base portion 15312a21 formed so as to fit between the pair of support member guide walls 13311f and the connecting portion between the main body portion 15312a11 of the overhanging member 15312a1 and the deformed portion 15312a12 from the base portion 15312a21. Also mainly includes a convex portion 15312a22 which is convexly provided with a short width.

このような構成により、フランジ部材15312a2の凸設部15312a22が張り出し部材15312a1に埋め込まれる場合には張り出し部材15312a1の変形部15312a12が外側に張り出す係止状態(図98(a)参照)とされ、フランジ部材15312a2が張り出し部材15312a1から離される場合には変形部15312a12が内側にすぼまる抜き状態(図98(b)参照)とされる。 With such a configuration, when the convex portion 15312a22 of the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 of the overhanging member 15312a1 is in a locked state (see FIG. 98A). When the flange member 15312a2 is separated from the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 is in a pulled-out state (see FIG. 98B).

図98(c)及び図98(d)では、鉤部材13312cが背面側外枠部材13311に組み付けられた状態が図示される。この状態において、コイルバネSP13は自然長よりも短くされるので、コイルバネSP13からフランジ部材15312a2を張り出し部材15312a1に埋め込ませる負荷を生じさせる事ができる。そのため、図98(d)に示すように、当接部材15312aは係止状態とされる。この係止状態において、張り出し部材15312a1を引き抜こうとしても、変形部15312a12が引っ掛かり、引き抜く事ができない。従って、遊技者が誤って張り出し部材15312a1を引き抜く事や、張り出し部材15312a1を引き抜く不正を防止することができる。 In FIGS. 98 (c) and 98 (d), a state in which the hook member 13312c is assembled to the back side outer frame member 13311 is illustrated. In this state, since the coil spring SP13 is shorter than the natural length, it is possible to generate a load for embedding the flange member 15312a2 in the overhanging member 15312a1 from the coil spring SP13. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98 (d), the contact member 15312a is in the locked state. In this locked state, even if an attempt is made to pull out the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 is caught and cannot be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally pulling out the overhanging member 15312a1 and fraudulently pulling out the overhanging member 15312a1.

図99(a)は、図87のLXXXVIIb−LXXXVIIb線に対応する線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置15312の断面図であり、図99(b)は、図99(a)のLXXXXIXb−LXXXXIXb線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置15312の断面図である。 FIG. 99 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312 in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87, and FIG. 99 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the LXXXXXIXb- of FIG. 99 (a). It is sectional drawing of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312 in line LXXXXXXb.

なお、図99(a)及び図99(b)では、鉤部材13312cが背面側枠部材13311から外され、鉤部材13312cが占めていたスペースに支持部材13312bをスライド移動させた状態が図示される。 In addition, in FIGS. 99A and 99B, a state in which the hook member 13312c is removed from the back side frame member 13311 and the support member 13312b is slid to the space occupied by the hook member 13312c is shown. ..

図99(a)及び図99(b)に示す状態において、コイルバネSP13は自然長よりも長い状態とされるので、フランジ部材15312a2を張り出し部材15312a1に押し付ける力が生じなくなり、変形部15312a12が形状を復帰(図98(b)の状態へと復帰)することにより、当接部材15312aが抜き状態とされる。これにより、張り出し部材15312a1を背面側枠部材13311の外側(図99(b)右方)から抜き取ることができる。 In the states shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), since the coil spring SP13 is in a state longer than the natural length, the force for pressing the flange member 15312a2 against the overhanging member 15312a1 is not generated, and the deformed portion 15312a12 has a shape. By returning (returning to the state shown in FIG. 98 (b)), the contact member 15312a is brought into the removed state. As a result, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be pulled out from the outside (right side in FIG. 99B) of the back side frame member 13311.

即ち、支持部材13312bを背面側枠部材13311から離間させなくとも、横スライドさせるだけで、張り出し部材15312a1を交換することができる。そのため、例えば、背面側枠部材13311の内側に多く部材が配設されており、支持部材13312bをガイド底壁13311dから離間させることができなくとも、他の部材と衝突するため破損し易い部分である張り出し部材15312a1の交換を行うことができ、メンテナンス性を向上させることができる。 That is, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be replaced by simply sliding the support member 13312b laterally without separating it from the back side frame member 13311. Therefore, for example, many members are arranged inside the back side frame member 13311, and even if the support member 13312b cannot be separated from the guide bottom wall 13311d, it collides with other members and is easily damaged. A certain overhanging member 15312a1 can be replaced, and maintainability can be improved.

本実施形態の構成によれば、鉤部材13312cが脱落することにより、支持部材13312bが移動することで、当接部材15312aを背面側枠部材13311の外側に押し出す力は低減されるので、鉤部材13312cが割れるなどして脱落するような大きな荷重が支持部材13312bから鉤部材13312cへかけられた場合に、当接部材15312aが同じように破損することを抑制することができる。 According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the force of pushing the contact member 15312a to the outside of the back side frame member 13311 is reduced by moving the support member 13312b due to the hook member 13312c falling off, so that the hook member When a large load such as the 13312c falling off due to cracking is applied from the support member 13312b to the hook member 13312c, it is possible to prevent the contact member 15312a from being similarly damaged.

本実施形態の構成によれば、鉤部材13312cが脱落した場合には、当接部材15312aを抜き状態とできることから、取り替えを早急に行うことができる。例えば、当接部材15312aが壁部材13322b(図78参照)に疲労強度に安全を考慮した重み付けをした回数としての所定回数衝突することにより鉤部材13312cが脱落するように疲労強度を設計しておくことにより、鉤部材13312cの脱落を目印に当接部材15312aの交換時期を判断することができる。また、鉤部材13312cが脱落した状態では、張り出し部材15312a1を背面側枠部材13311の外側から抜き取り可能なので、取り替えを容易におこなうことができ、メンテナンス性能を向上させることができる。 According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the hook member 13312c falls off, the contact member 15312a can be pulled out, so that the replacement can be performed immediately. For example, the fatigue strength is designed so that the hook member 13312c falls off when the contact member 15312a collides with the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) a predetermined number of times as the number of times the fatigue strength is weighted in consideration of safety. Thereby, the replacement time of the contact member 15312a can be determined by using the detachment of the hook member 13312c as a mark. Further, in the state where the hook member 13312c has fallen off, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, so that the replacement can be easily performed and the maintenance performance can be improved.

次いで、図100を参照して、第16実施形態について説明する。上述した第13実施形態では、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置されるか下向き位置に配置されるかによって、首振り操作部材13310を付勢するねじりバネSP1の弾性力が変化し、首振り操作部材13310の操作感が変化する場合を説明したが、第16実施形態における操作デバイス16300は、それに加えて、首振り操作部材16310の重心位置が変化することによって首振り操作部材16310の操作感を変化可能とされる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the elastic force of the torsion spring SP1 that urges the swing operation member 13310 changes depending on whether the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position, and the neck is changed. The case where the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes has been described, but in addition to this, the operation device 16300 in the 16th embodiment operates the swing operation member 16310 by changing the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310. The feeling can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図100(a)から図100(d)は、第16実施形態における操作デバイス16300の側面図である。なお、図100(a)から図100(d)では、首振り操作部材16310の外観図が図示されると共に、レバー部材13340の断面図が模式的に図示され、その他の部分が模式的に想像線で図示される。 100 (a) to 100 (d) are side views of the operation device 16300 according to the 16th embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 100A to 100D, an external view of the swing operation member 16310 is shown, a cross-sectional view of the lever member 13340 is schematically shown, and other parts are schematically imagined. Illustrated by a line.

図100(a)及び図100(b)では、首振り操作部材16310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図100(c)及び図100(d)では、首振り操作部材16310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。また、図100(a)及び図100(c)では、首振り操作部材16310がレバー部材13340に対して前転側(図100(a)反時計回り側)の移動端に配置された状態が図示され、図100(b)及び図100(d)では、首振り操作部材16310がレバー部材13340に対して後転側(図100(a)時計回り側)の移動端に配置された状態が図示される。 100 (a) and 100 (b) show a state in which the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in an upward position, and in FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d), the swing operation member 16310 faces downward. The state of being arranged at the position is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (c), the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the moving end on the forward rotation side (counterclockwise side in FIG. 100 (a)) with respect to the lever member 13340. Illustrated, in FIGS. 100 (b) and 100 (d), the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the moving end on the backward rotation side (clockwise side in FIG. 100 (a)) with respect to the lever member 13340. Illustrated.

図100に示すように、首振り操作部材16310は、背面側枠部材13311と、姿勢修正装置13312と、正面カバー13313と、背面カバー13314と、それら正面カバー13313及び背面カバー13314の締結部分を隠すと共に首振り操作部材16310の重心位置を変化させる鉄球16315eを有する分離防止カバー16315と、その分離防止カバー16315の下側に配置され背面側枠部材13311との間に挟まれる保護カバー13316(図82参照)と、レンズ部材13317と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 100, the swing operation member 16310 hides the fastening portion of the back side frame member 13311, the posture correction device 13312, the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, and the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314. A protective cover 13316 sandwiched between a separation prevention cover 16315 having an iron ball 16315e that changes the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 and a back side frame member 13311 arranged below the separation prevention cover 16315 (FIG. 82) and a lens member 13317 are mainly provided.

分離防止カバー16315は、受入凹部13315a及び抜止孔13315b(図82参照)と、円盤部分の下端部から前後方向(図100(a)左右方向)に背面側枠部材13311及び正面カバー13313の壁面に沿って延設される延設部16315cと、その延設部16315cの背面側枠部材13311及び正面カバー13313と対向配置される側面に長溝状に配設される長溝16315dと、その長溝16315dの内部を移動可能に配設される鉄球16315eと、主に備える。 The separation prevention cover 16315 is provided on the wall surface of the receiving recess 13315a and the retaining hole 13315b (see FIG. 82), and the back side frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 100 (a)) from the lower end of the disk portion. An extension portion 16315c extending along the extension portion 16315c, a long groove 16315d arranged in a long groove shape on a side surface facing the back side frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313 of the extension portion 16315c, and the inside of the long groove 16315d. 16315e, which is movably arranged, and is mainly provided.

長溝16315dは、内部に配設される鉄球16315eを重力により転動させる溝であって、図100(a)において、右側端部の方が左側端部に比較して軸支棒363からの距離が短くされる。 The long groove 16315d is a groove for rolling the iron ball 16315e arranged inside by gravity, and in FIG. 100A, the right end portion is from the shaft support rod 363 as compared with the left end portion. The distance is shortened.

また、首振り操作部材16310を前転側端部から後転側端部へ回転させる角度θ13yが10度であり(θ13y=10°)、レバー部材13340の回転角度が34度であるので、図100(a)における長溝16315dの角度θ16aを水平方向(図100(a)左右方向)に対して24度未満とすることにより(θ16a<24°)、首振り操作部材16310が上向き位置に配置される場合も、下向き位置に配置される場合も、首振り操作部材16310の首振り操作に対して鉄球16315eの位置を維持することができる(長溝16315dの左右端部の上下関係を維持することができる)。なお、本実施形態では、角度θ16aが約10度に設定される。 Further, the angle θ13y for rotating the swing operation member 16310 from the forward rotation side end portion to the backward rotation side end portion is 10 degrees (θ13y = 10 °), and the rotation angle of the lever member 13340 is 34 degrees. By setting the angle θ16a of the long groove 16315d in 100 (a) to less than 24 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 100 (a)) (θ16a <24 °), the swing operating member 16310 is arranged in the upward position. The position of the iron ball 16315e can be maintained with respect to the swing operation of the swing operation member 16310 (maintaining the vertical relationship between the left and right ends of the long groove 16315d) regardless of whether the iron ball 16315e is arranged in the downward position. Can be done). In this embodiment, the angle θ16a is set to about 10 degrees.

鉄球16315eは、鉄製の球状部材であって、首振り操作部材16310の重量の大部分を担うことができる球である。そのため、鉄球16315eが移動する事により、首振り操作部材16310の重心位置が変化する。 The iron ball 16315e is a spherical member made of iron and is a ball capable of carrying most of the weight of the swinging operation member 16310. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity of the swinging operation member 16310 changes as the iron ball 16315e moves.

図100(a)及び図100(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材16310が上向き位置に配置された状態では、長溝16315dの右端部に鉄球16315eが配置され重心位置が軸支棒363から近くされる一方、図100(c)及び図100(d)に示すように、首振り操作部材16310が下向き位置に配置された状態では、長溝16315dの左端部に鉄球16315eが配置され重心位置が軸支棒363から遠くされる。 As shown in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (b), when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the iron ball 16315e is arranged at the right end of the long groove 16315d and the center of gravity is the shaft support rod 363. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d), in the state where the swinging operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the iron ball 16315e is arranged at the left end of the long groove 16315d and the center of gravity. The position is moved away from the shaft support rod 363.

即ち、首振り操作部材16310が上向き位置に配置されるか下向き位置に配置されるかにより、軸支棒363からの首振り操作部材16310の重心位置までの距離を変化させることができる。これにより、首振り操作部材16310の操作感を変化させることができる。 That is, the distance from the shaft support rod 363 to the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position. Thereby, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed.

例えば、首振り操作部材16310が上向き位置に配置される場合よりも、下向き位置に配置される場合の方において、重心位置が軸支棒363から遠くなり、首振り操作部材16310の軸回りのモーメント(図100(c)反時計回りのモーメント)を大きくすることができる。 For example, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the center of gravity is farther from the shaft support rod 363 than when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, and the moment around the axis of the swing operation member 16310. (Fig. 100 (c) counterclockwise moment) can be increased.

従って、首振り操作部材16310が下向き位置に配置された状態において(図100(c)及び図100(d)参照)、遊技者がレンズ部材13317を押し込み操作することにより首振り操作部材16310が前転方向に回転した後(図100(d)の状態から図100(c)の状態に回転した後)、姿勢修正装置13312から生じる負荷により首振り操作部材16310の姿勢が戻る(図100(c)の状態から図100(d)の状態まで回転する)のに要する時間を、首振り操作部材16310の重心が回転軸付近に配置される場合に比較して長くすることができる(ゆっくり戻るようにすることができる)。 Therefore, in a state where the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position (see FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d)), the swing operation member 16310 is moved forward by the player pushing the lens member 13317. After rotating in the rolling direction (after rotating from the state of FIG. 100 (d) to the state of FIG. 100 (c)), the posture of the swing operation member 16310 returns due to the load generated from the posture correction device 13312 (FIG. 100 (c). ) To the state of FIG. 100 (d)) can be lengthened as compared with the case where the center of gravity of the swinging operation member 16310 is arranged near the rotation axis (so that it returns slowly). Can be).

これにより、首振り操作部材16310が上向き位置に配置された際には、レバー部材13340に対する首振り操作部材16310の回転抵抗を第13実施形態における首振り操作部材13310(図89参照)の回転抵抗と同等に保ちながら、首振り操作部材16310が下向き位置に配置された際には、首振り操作部材16310が起き上がる方向(図100(c)時計回り)に回転する回転抵抗を大きくすることができる。この場合、レンズ部材13317を遊技者が叩く操作をして、首振り操作部材16310が図100(c)の状態となってから、図100(d)の状態に復帰するまでの時間が長い分、再び遊技者がレンズ部材13317を叩く場合(連打する場合)にも首振り操作部材16310の姿勢を図100(c)の状態で維持する事ができ、即座に図100(c)の状態から図100(d)の状態に戻ってしまう場合に比較して、レンズ部材13317の連打操作を容易とすることができる。 As a result, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 16310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is changed to the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 13310 (see FIG. 89) in the thirteenth embodiment. When the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310 rotating in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 100C) can be increased. .. In this case, it takes a long time for the player to hit the lens member 13317 and the swing operation member 16310 returns to the state shown in FIG. 100 (d) after the swing operation member 16310 is in the state shown in FIG. 100 (c). Even when the player hits the lens member 13317 again (when hitting repeatedly), the posture of the swinging operation member 16310 can be maintained in the state of FIG. 100 (c), and immediately from the state of FIG. 100 (c). Compared with the case of returning to the state of FIG. 100 (d), the continuous striking operation of the lens member 13317 can be facilitated.

また、首振り操作部材16310の回転方向の違いによる回転抵抗の変化の点から言及すると、首振り操作部材16310が上向き位置に配置された場合、首振り操作部材16310を図100(a)時計回りに回転させる方向が、鉄球16315eを下方へ移動させる方向であるので、図100(a)反時計回りに回転させる場合に比較して、回転抵抗を小さくすることができる。 Further, referring to the change in rotational resistance due to the difference in the rotation direction of the swing operation member 16310, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position, the swing operation member 16310 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 100 (a). Since the direction of rotation is the direction of moving the iron ball 16315e downward, the rotational resistance can be reduced as compared with the case of rotating counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (a).

一方で、首振り操作部材16310が下向き位置に配置された場合、首振り操作部材16310を図100(c)反時計回りに回転させる方向が、鉄球16315eを下方へ移動させる方向であるので、図100(c)時計回りに回転させる場合に比較して、回転抵抗を小さくすることができる。 On the other hand, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the direction in which the swing operation member 16310 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (c) is the direction in which the iron ball 16315e is moved downward. FIG. 100 (c) The rotational resistance can be reduced as compared with the case of rotating clockwise.

従って、首振り操作部材16310が下向き位置に配置された場合か、首振り操作部材16310が上向き位置に配置された場合かで、首振り操作部材16310を回転操作する際の回転抵抗が軽くなる方向を、逆転させることができる。 Therefore, depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position or the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the rotational resistance when the swing operation member 16310 is rotated is reduced. Can be reversed.

本実施形態によれば、鉄球16315eの移動により(首振り操作部材16310の内部の状況の変化により)首振り操作部材16310の回転抵抗を変化させるので、首振り操作部材16310の移動方向と逆方向の負荷を与えることにより首振り操作部材16310の回転抵抗を上げる場合に比較して、首振り操作部材16310にかけられる負荷を低減することができる。 According to the present embodiment, the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 16310 is changed by the movement of the iron ball 16315e (due to the change in the internal condition of the swing operation member 16310), so that the direction is opposite to the movement direction of the swing operation member 16310. The load applied to the swing operation member 16310 can be reduced as compared with the case where the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310 is increased by applying a load in the direction.

次いで、図101を参照して第17実施形態について説明する。上述した第13実施形態では、ねじりバネSP2の捻り加減が変化することにより首振り操作部材13310の操作感が変化する場合を説明したが、第17実施形態における操作デバイス17300は、首振り部材17360と壁部材17322bとが擦れることにより首振り操作部材13310の操作感を変化可能とされる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes due to the change in the twisting degree of the torsion spring SP2 has been described, but the operation device 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment has the swing member 17360. By rubbing against the wall member 17322b, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図101(a)及び図101(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第17実施形態における操作デバイス17300の部分断面図である。なお、図101(a)では、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図101(b)では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。また、図101(a)及び図101(b)では、ねじりバネSP2及び下部カバー部材345(図81参照)が取り外された状態が図示されると共に、それぞれレバー部材13340に対して首振り操作部材13310が前転側に回転された状態が図示される。 101 (a) and 101 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 17300 according to the 17th embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 101 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 101 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. .. Further, in FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b), a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed is shown, and the swinging operation member with respect to the lever member 13340, respectively. The state in which 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side is shown.

本実施形態では、レバー部材13340の先端に第1実施形態での首振り部材360の替わりに首振り部材17360が軸支される。首振り部材17360は、本体部材361と、壁部材17322bと擦れる態様で形成されるモータ固定板17362と、軸支棒363と、緩衝部材364と、規制棒365と、振動装置366と、を主に備える(図81参照)。 In the present embodiment, the swing member 17360 is pivotally supported at the tip of the lever member 13340 instead of the swing member 360 in the first embodiment. The swing member 17360 mainly includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 17362 formed in a manner of rubbing against a wall member 17322b, a shaft support rod 363, a cushioning member 364, a regulation rod 365, and a vibration device 366. (See FIG. 81).

モータ固定板17362は、側壁部362bから軸支棒363を挿通する軸孔362b1の径方向に延設される摩擦腕部17362cを備える。 The motor fixing plate 17362 includes a friction arm portion 17362c extending in the radial direction of the shaft hole 362b1 through which the shaft support rod 363 is inserted from the side wall portion 362b.

また、第13実施形態の壁部材13322bの替わりに、壁部材17322bが右前カバー13322と左前カバー13321との間に嵌め込まれる(図78参照)。壁部材17322bは、その上端部から上方に延設される延設部17322b1を備える。 Further, instead of the wall member 13322b of the thirteenth embodiment, the wall member 17322b is fitted between the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 (see FIG. 78). The wall member 17322b includes an extension portion 17322b1 extending upward from the upper end portion thereof.

図101(a)及び図101(b)に示すように、延設部17322b1は、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置される状態では摩擦腕部17362cと接触せず、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置される状態では摩擦腕部17362cと接触する態様で形成される。即ち、延設部17322b1は、図101(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態において、摩擦腕部17362cの先端部に押し付けられる当接面が軸支棒363を中心とした円弧形状で形成される。これにより、延設部17322b1と摩擦腕部17362cとの当接面積を確保でき、十分な動摩擦力を発揮することができる。従って、動摩擦力によりモータ固定板17362の回転抵抗が上昇することにより首振り操作部材13310の回転抵抗も上昇するので、首振り操作部材13310の操作感を変化させることができる。 As shown in FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b), the extension portion 17322b1 does not come into contact with the friction arm portion 17362c when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position, and the swing operation member 13310 Is formed in contact with the friction arm portion 17362c in a state where the is arranged in the downward position. That is, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the extension portion 17322b1 has a shaft support rod having a contact surface pressed against the tip end portion of the friction arm portion 17362c in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. It is formed in an arc shape centered on 363. As a result, the contact area between the extending portion 17322b1 and the friction arm portion 17362c can be secured, and a sufficient dynamic friction force can be exhibited. Therefore, since the rotational resistance of the motor fixing plate 17362 increases due to the dynamic friction force, the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 also increases, so that the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed.

上述した操作感の変化は、レバー部材13340の位置により変化するものであるので、レバー部材13340の動作速度によってその変化量が変わるものではない。従って、首振り操作部材13310を高速で振り回して操作する場合も、首振り操作部材13310をゆっくりと操作する場合も、レバー部材13310の先端が下向き位置に配置されてしまえば、首振り操作部材13310の回転に対して同じように動摩擦力をかけることができるので、操作感の変化を確実に生じさせることができる。 Since the change in the operation feeling described above changes depending on the position of the lever member 13340, the amount of change does not change depending on the operating speed of the lever member 13340. Therefore, whether the swing operation member 13310 is swung at high speed or the swing operation member 13310 is slowly operated, if the tip of the lever member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation member 13310 Since the dynamic friction force can be applied in the same manner to the rotation of the head, it is possible to surely cause a change in the operation feeling.

また、動摩擦力は、押し付けられる力により変化するものであって、モータ固定板17362の回転速度によって変化するものではないので、摩擦腕部17362cの先端が延設部17322b1に押し付けられている状態において、回転速度が遅い場合(例えば、回転させ始め)においても、十分な動摩擦力を発生させることができる。 Further, since the dynamic friction force is changed by the pressing force and not by the rotation speed of the motor fixing plate 17362, the tip of the friction arm portion 17362c is pressed against the extension portion 17322b1. Even when the rotation speed is slow (for example, when the rotation starts), a sufficient dynamic friction force can be generated.

なお、本実施形態では、延設部17322b1が壁部材17322bに配設されるので、延設部17322b1が破損した場合に、取り替える必要がある部材を左前カバー13321及び右前カバー13322に限定することができる。従って、壁部材17322bの交換を容易とでき、メンテナンス性を向上させることができる。 In the present embodiment, since the extension portion 17322b1 is arranged on the wall member 17322b, if the extension portion 17322b1 is damaged, the members that need to be replaced can be limited to the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322. it can. Therefore, the wall member 17322b can be easily replaced, and maintainability can be improved.

次いで、図102を参照して、第18実施形態について説明する。上述した第13実施形態では、レバー部材13340の配置によって首振り操作部材13310の回転抵抗が変化する場合を説明したが、第18実施形態における操作デバイス18300は、偏心カム部材5333を介して駆動力が首振り部材18360に伝達されることにより、首振り操作部材13310の回転抵抗を変化可能とされる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the rotational resistance of the swing operating member 13310 changes depending on the arrangement of the lever member 13340 has been described, but the operating device 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment has a driving force via the eccentric cam member 5333. Is transmitted to the swing member 18360, so that the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図102(a)から図102(c)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第18実施形態における操作デバイス18300の部分断面図である。なお、図102(a)から図102(c)では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示されると共に、ねじりバネSP2の図示が省略され、下部カバー部材345(図81参照)が取り外された状態が図示される。また、それぞれレバー部材18340に対して首振り操作部材13310が前転側に回転された状態が図示される。 102 (a) to 102 (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 18300 according to the eighteenth embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (c), the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position is shown, and the torsion spring SP2 is not shown, and the lower cover member 345 (FIG. 81). The state in which (see) is removed is shown. Further, a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side with respect to the lever member 18340 is shown.

本実施形態における操作デバイス18300は、首振り操作部材13310の内部に配設されるとともに首振り操作部材13310と一体で回転する首振り部材18360と、首振り部材18360を軸支するレバー部材18340を、第13実施形態における操作デバイス13300と違う部分として少なくとも備える。 The operation device 18300 in the present embodiment includes a swing member 18360 which is arranged inside the swing operation member 13310 and rotates integrally with the swing operation member 13310, and a lever member 18340 which pivotally supports the swing member 18360. , At least as a part different from the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment.

首振り部材18360は、本体部材361と、軸孔362b1の開口方向にそって側壁部362bから延設される薄壁部18362cを有するモータ固定板18362と、軸支棒363と、緩衝部材364と、規制棒365と、振動装置366と、を主に備える(図81参照)。 The swing member 18360 includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 18362 having a thin wall portion 18362c extending from the side wall portion 362b along the opening direction of the shaft hole 362b1, a shaft support rod 363, and a cushioning member 364. , A regulation rod 365 and a vibrating device 366 are mainly provided (see FIG. 81).

薄壁部18362cは、組立状態(図102(a)参照)において、軸支棒363の周囲に配設される部分であって、本実施形態では、その薄壁部18362cを軸支棒363に押し付ける方向に負荷を生じさせることができるゴムバンドRBが薄壁部18362cの周囲に巻き付けられる。 The thin wall portion 18362c is a portion arranged around the shaft support rod 363 in the assembled state (see FIG. 102 (a)), and in the present embodiment, the thin wall portion 18362c is attached to the shaft support rod 363. A rubber band RB capable of generating a load in the pressing direction is wound around the thin wall portion 18362c.

ゴムバンドRBは、ゴム材料から形成される帯状の部材であって、両端がレバー支持軸331d1の周囲に移動不能にピン固定される。従って、首振り操作部材13310を回転させる場合に、薄壁部18362cとゴムバンドRBとの間で摺動摩擦が生じる。 The rubber band RB is a band-shaped member formed of a rubber material, and both ends thereof are immovably pinned around the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, when the swing operation member 13310 is rotated, sliding friction occurs between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB.

レバー部材18340は、第13実施形態の本体部材13341の替わりに、偏心カム部材5333に当接されることにより移動可能に構成される伝達装置18347を有する本体部材18341を備える。 The lever member 18340 includes a main body member 18341 having a transmission device 18347 configured to be movable by being brought into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333 instead of the main body member 13341 of the thirteenth embodiment.

本体部材18341は、断面コ字状に形成される本体部18341aの側壁部分に、レバー部材18340の長手方向と傾斜して延設される長孔18341hと、その長孔18341hの延設方向を挟む態様で平行に配設される一対のガイド壁部18341iと、を主に備える。長孔18341hは、図102(a)に示すように、ゴムバンドRBに干渉する位置まで延設される。 The main body member 18341 sandwiches an elongated hole 18341h extending in an inclined direction from the longitudinal direction of the lever member 18340 and an extending direction of the elongated hole 18341h in a side wall portion of the main body portion 18341a formed in a U-shaped cross section. It mainly includes a pair of guide wall portions 18341i arranged in parallel in the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 102 (a), the elongated hole 18341h extends to a position where it interferes with the rubber band RB.

伝達装置18347は、長孔18341hに挿通される凸部を有すると共にガイド壁部18341iの間をスライド移動可能な大きさで構成される押し込み部18347aと、その押し込み部18347aの下端部で軸支される調整部18347bと、押し込み部18347aの下端部から調整部18347bの片側の側面に沿って(本実施形態では上側の側面に沿って)張り出される張り出し部18347cと、を主に備える。なお、本実施形態では、調整部18347bが押し込み部18347aに対して図示しない付勢バネによって、図102(a)の姿勢(調整部18347bが張り出し部18347cに当接する姿勢)に維持される。 The transmission device 18347 is pivotally supported by a push-in portion 18347a having a convex portion to be inserted into the elongated hole 18341h and having a size that allows sliding movement between the guide wall portions 18341i, and a lower end portion of the push-in portion 18347a. The adjusting portion 18347b and the overhanging portion 18347c protruding from the lower end portion of the pushing portion 18347a along one side surface of the adjusting portion 18347b (along the upper side surface in the present embodiment) are mainly provided. In the present embodiment, the adjusting portion 18347b is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 102 (a) (the posture in which the adjusting portion 18347b abuts on the overhanging portion 18347c) by an urging spring (not shown) with respect to the pushing portion 18347a.

本実施形態において、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態において、偏心カム部材5333が回転する途中で調整部18347bと偏心カム部材5333とが衝突する位置関係で、長孔18241h及びガイド壁部18341iが配設される。 In the present embodiment, in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position, the elongated hole 18241h and the guide are in a positional relationship in which the adjusting portion 18347b and the eccentric cam member 5333 collide with each other while the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotating. The wall portion 18341i is arranged.

張り出し部18347cが、調整部18347bの軸支位置を越えて延設されることにより、調整部18347bが張り出し部18347cに近接する方向に回転することを防止することができる。従って、押し込み部18347aに対して調整部18347bが回転し易い方向と、回転しにくい方向とを作ることができる。 By extending the overhanging portion 18347c beyond the axial support position of the adjusting portion 18347b, it is possible to prevent the adjusting portion 18347b from rotating in a direction close to the overhanging portion 18347c. Therefore, it is possible to create a direction in which the adjusting portion 18347b is easy to rotate and a direction in which the adjusting portion 18347b is difficult to rotate with respect to the pushing portion 18347a.

このような構成から、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態において、首振り操作部材13310の回転抵抗を変化させるか否かを切り替えることができる。 From such a configuration, it is possible to switch whether or not to change the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 in the state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position.

即ち、図102(a)の状態から、偏心カム部材5333を図102(a)反時計回りに回転させる場合、調整部18347bが押し込み部18347aに対して回転することに駆動力が使われ、押し込み部18347aが長孔18341hに沿って移動しない(図102(b)参照)。そのため、ゴムバンドRBの状態に変化はなく、首振り操作部材13310の回転抵抗の変化は生じない。 That is, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 102 (a) from the state shown in FIG. 102 (a), the driving force is used to rotate the adjusting portion 18347b with respect to the pushing portion 18347a, and the pushing force is used. Part 18347a does not move along the elongated hole 18341h (see FIG. 102 (b)). Therefore, the state of the rubber band RB does not change, and the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 does not change.

一方、図102(a)の状態から、偏心カム部材5333を図102(a)時計回りに回転させる場合、調整部18347bが張り出し部18347cに回転方向で係止され、調整部18347bが押し込み部18347aに対して回転不能となるので、長孔18341hを移動する事に駆動力が使用される(図102(c)参照)。この場合、押し込み部18347aがゴムバンドRBを引き延ばす方向に変形させるので、薄壁部18362cとゴムバンドRBとがより密着し、薄壁部18362cとゴムバンドRBとの間の摺動抵抗が大きくなる。従って、首振り操作部材13310の操作感が変化する。 On the other hand, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 102 (a) from the state of FIG. 102 (a), the adjusting portion 18347b is locked to the overhanging portion 18347c in the rotational direction, and the adjusting portion 18347b is pushed into the pushing portion 18347a. A driving force is used to move the elongated hole 18341h (see FIG. 102 (c)). In this case, since the pushing portion 18347a deforms the rubber band RB in the stretching direction, the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB are more closely attached, and the sliding resistance between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB increases. .. Therefore, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes.

従って、外観上は首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態として同じ状態に見えても、偏心カム部材5333の回転方向を切り替え伝達装置18347を動作させるか、停止させておくかを切り替えることで、首振り操作部材13310の操作感を変化させることができる。 Therefore, even if the swing operation member 13310 looks the same as the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 5333 is switched to switch whether the transmission device 18347 is operated or stopped. As a result, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed.

次いで、図103を参照して、第19実施形態について説明する。上述した第13実施形態では、姿勢修正装置13312から生じる負荷が首振り操作部材13310のみに与えられる場合を説明したが、第19実施形態における操作デバイス19300は、姿勢修正装置13312から発生する負荷をレバー部材19340にも及ぼすことが可能とされる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the load generated from the posture correction device 13312 is applied only to the swing operation member 13310 has been described, but the operation device 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment receives the load generated from the posture correction device 13312. It is possible to apply it to the lever member 19340. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図103(a)及び図103(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第19実施形態における操作デバイス19300の部分断面図である。なお、図103(a)及び図103(b)では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示されると共に、図103(a)では、遊技者から首振り操作部材13310に力が負荷されていない状態が図示され、図103(b)では、遊技者から首振り操作部材13310に力が負荷され前転方向(図103(b)反時計周り)に回転された状態が図示される。 103 (a) and 103 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 19300 in the 19th embodiment on the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 103 (a) and FIG. 103 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position is shown, and in FIG. 103 (a), the player moves to the swing operation member 13310. A state in which no force is applied is shown, and in FIG. 103 (b), a state in which a force is applied from the player to the swing operation member 13310 and rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 103 (b)) is shown. Illustrated.

レバー部材19340は、第13実施形態におけるレバー部材13340の下部カバー部材345の側壁から係止凸部19345eが凸設されることのみがレバー部材13340から追加される態様で構成される。係止凸部19345eは、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態において、回転レバー19337bの回転軌跡上に入る位置に配設される。 The lever member 19340 is configured in such a manner that the locking convex portion 19345e is convexly provided from the side wall of the lower cover member 345 of the lever member 13340 according to the thirteenth embodiment, and is added from the lever member 13340. The locking convex portion 19345e is arranged at a position where the swing operating member 13310 is placed on the rotation locus of the rotary lever 19337b in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at a downward position.

図103(a)に示すように、本実施形態では、内側ケース部材13330の替わりに、内側ケース部材19330が配設される。内側ケース部材19330は、内側ケース部材13330の内側に、伝達装置19337が追加される態様で構成される。 As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the present embodiment, the inner case member 19330 is arranged instead of the inner case member 13330. The inner case member 19330 is configured such that a transmission device 19337 is added to the inside of the inner case member 13330.

伝達装置19337は、左カバー部材13331の回転軸19337aに軸支されると共に断面L字形状に形成される回転レバー19337bと、左カバー部材13331に固定され回転レバー19337bの回転方向(図103(a)反時計回り)に付勢力を発生させるねじりばねSP19と、を主に備える。 The transmission device 19337 is pivotally supported by the rotation shaft 19337a of the left cover member 13331 and formed in an L-shaped cross section, and the rotation direction of the rotation lever 19337b fixed to the left cover member 13331 (FIG. 103 (a)). ) A torsion spring SP19 that generates an urging force (counterclockwise) is mainly provided.

回転レバー19337bは、付勢方向の回転端に位置する場合において(図103(a)参照)、左カバー部材13331の正面側の壁面の内側の面に当接する姿勢維持部19337b1と、その姿勢維持部19337b1を有する棒状部分から折曲されるとともに回転レバー19337bが付勢方向の回転端に位置する場合において先端部が左前カバー13321の姿勢修正装置13312の当接部材13312aと当接する面と面位置に配設される当接部19337b2と、を主に備える。なお、本実施形態では、壁部材13322b(図78参照)の配設が省略され、内側ケース部材19330にも開口が形成されることにより、その開口の内側で当接部材13312aと当接部19337b2とを当接可能に構成される。 When the rotary lever 19337b is located at the rotating end in the urging direction (see FIG. 103 (a)), the posture maintaining portion 19337b1 that comes into contact with the inner surface of the wall surface on the front side of the left cover member 13331 and its posture maintaining portion 19337b1. When the rotary lever 19337b is bent from the rod-shaped portion having the portion 19337b1 and the rotary lever 19337b is located at the rotating end in the urging direction, the surface and surface position where the tip portion abuts on the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 of the left front cover 13321. A contact portion 19337b2 arranged in the above is mainly provided. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted, and the inner case member 19330 also has an opening, so that the contact member 13312a and the contact portion 19337b2 are formed inside the opening. It is configured so that it can be contacted with.

これらの構成により、首振り操作部材13310に与えられる負荷をレバー部材19340の振動を抑制するための負荷として利用することができる。以下において、詳述する。 With these configurations, the load applied to the swing operation member 13310 can be used as a load for suppressing the vibration of the lever member 19340. It will be described in detail below.

図103(a)に示すように、首振り操作部材13310に遊技者が負荷を与えない状態で首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置される場合(例えば、偏心カム部材5333(図89参照)の回転により首振り操作部材13310が移動する場合)、姿勢修正装置13312の当接部材13312aが伝達装置19337の当接部19337b2に押されて、首振り操作部材13310がレバー部材19340に対して回転する(図103(a)の状態となる)。この状態においては、回転レバー19337bはレバー部材19340と当接しておらず、負荷は伝達されないので、回転レバー19337bを駆動させる駆動力を低減させることができる。 As shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position in a state where the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 13310 (for example, the eccentric cam member 5333 (see FIG. 89)). (When the swing operation member 13310 moves due to the rotation of the swing operation member 13310), the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 is pushed by the contact portion 19337b2 of the transmission device 19337, and the swing operation member 13310 rotates with respect to the lever member 19340. (The state shown in FIG. 103 (a) is obtained). In this state, the rotary lever 19337b is not in contact with the lever member 19340 and the load is not transmitted, so that the driving force for driving the rotary lever 19337b can be reduced.

図103(b)に示すように、図103(a)の状態から、遊技者が首振り操作部材13310を回転させる操作を行った場合、その際の負荷がねじりバネSP19の付勢力を上回ると、姿勢修正装置13312の当接部材13312aが伝達装置19337の回転レバー19337bを回転させる。この場合、回転レバー19337bが回転方向で係止凸部19345eと当接することにより、回転レバー19337bを介して、レバー部材19340の回転方向への反動動作(図103(b)時計回りに回転する動作)を抑制することができる。 As shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the player performs an operation of rotating the swing operation member 13310 from the state of FIG. 103 (a), the load at that time exceeds the urging force of the torsion spring SP19. , The contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 rotates the rotary lever 19337b of the transmission device 19337. In this case, when the rotary lever 19337b comes into contact with the locking convex portion 19345e in the rotational direction, the lever member 19340 rebounds in the rotational direction via the rotary lever 19337b (FIG. 103 (b), an operation of rotating clockwise). ) Can be suppressed.

従って、例えば、首振り操作部材13310のレンズ部材13317(図77参照)を遊技者が叩く場合、その反動によりレバー部材19340を起き上がらせる方向に負荷がかかり、レバー部材19340の後端部を下方から支えるロック部材5336(図12(b)参照)に過負荷がかけられる場合があるが、本実施形態では、回転レバー19337bがレバー部材19340の回転を抑制可能に構成されるので、ロック部材5336にかけられる負荷を低減することができる。 Therefore, for example, when the player hits the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) of the swing operation member 13310, a load is applied in the direction of raising the lever member 19340 due to the reaction, and the rear end portion of the lever member 19340 is moved from below. An overload may be applied to the supporting lock member 5336 (see FIG. 12B), but in the present embodiment, the rotary lever 19337b is configured to be able to suppress the rotation of the lever member 19340, so that the lock member 5336 is applied. The load to be applied can be reduced.

また、回転レバー19337bがレバー部材19340に当接するとレバー部材19340の回転抵抗が上昇し、レバー部材19340を駆動させる駆動力が不必要に大きくなる恐れがあるところ、本実施形態では、レンズ部材13317(図77参照)に過負荷がかけられたときにのみ回転レバー19337bがレバー部材19340に当接可能とされるので、普段(例えば、首振り操作部材13310を遊技者が触っていない場合)のレバー部材19340の回転抵抗は低い状態で維持することができる。 Further, when the rotary lever 19337b comes into contact with the lever member 19340, the rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 may increase and the driving force for driving the lever member 19340 may become unnecessarily large. However, in the present embodiment, the lens member 13317 Since the rotary lever 19337b can come into contact with the lever member 19340 only when an overload is applied to (see FIG. 77), it is usual (for example, when the player is not touching the swing operation member 13310). The rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 can be maintained in a low state.

これにより、レバー部材19340の駆動力は抑制しながら、過負荷が与えられた場合には一時的にレバー部材19340の回転抵抗を上昇させることにより、ロック部材5336(図89(b)参照)に与えられる負荷を抑制し、ロック部材5336の耐久性を向上させることができる。 As a result, while suppressing the driving force of the lever member 19340, when an overload is applied, the rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 is temporarily increased to make the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 89 (b)). The applied load can be suppressed and the durability of the lock member 5336 can be improved.

次いで、図104及び図105を参照して、第20実施形態について説明する。上述した第13実施形態では首振り操作部材13310を起き上がらせる方向に回転させる姿勢修正装置13312が直動動作する場合を説明したが、第20実施形態における操作デバイス20300は、姿勢修正装置20312が回動動作する装置として構成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the posture correction device 13312 for rotating the swing operation member 13310 in the rising direction operates in a linear motion has been described, but in the operation device 20300 in the twentieth embodiment, the posture correction device 20312 is rotated. It is configured as a dynamic device. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図104(a)及び図104(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第20実施形態における操作デバイス20300の部分断面図であり、図105は、図104(a)の矢印CV方向視における首振り操作部材20310の背面図である。 104 (a) and 104 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 20300 in the 20th embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 105 is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 104 (a). It is a rear view of the swinging operation member 20310 in the arrow CV direction view of a).

なお、図104(a)及び図104(b)では、首振り操作部材20310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示されると共に、図104(a)では、遊技者から首振り操作部材13310に力が負荷されず首振り操作部材20310が後転方向に回転された状態が図示され、図104(b)では、遊技者から首振り操作部材13310に力が負荷され前転方向(図104(b)反時計周り)に首振り操作部材20310が回転された状態が図示される。 In addition, in FIG. 104 (a) and FIG. 104 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 20310 is arranged in the downward position is shown, and in FIG. 104 (a), the player moves to the swing operation member 13310. A state in which the swing operation member 20310 is rotated in the backward rotation direction without a force being applied is shown. In FIG. 104 (b), a force is applied from the player to the swing operation member 13310 in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 104 (b)). b) The state in which the swing operation member 20310 is rotated counterclockwise) is shown.

首振り操作部材20310は、首振り部材366の下側に配設されるカップ状(背面側枠部材13311と近似される外形)の背面側枠部材20311と、その背面側枠部材20311に配設される姿勢修正装置20312と、正面カバー13313と、背面カバー13314と、分離防止カバー13315と、保護カバー13316と、レンズ部材13317と、を主に備える(図82参照)。 The swing operation member 20310 is arranged on the back side frame member 20311 having a cup shape (outer shape similar to the back side frame member 13311) and the back side frame member 20311 arranged on the lower side of the swing member 366. The posture correction device 20312, the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, the separation prevention cover 13315, the protective cover 13316, and the lens member 13317 are mainly provided (see FIG. 82).

背面側枠部材20311は、背面の開口を挿通孔311aと、姿勢修正装置20312が動作する領域を開ける動作領域孔20311bとに分割する仕切りである機能壁部20311cを備える。 The back side frame member 20311 includes a functional wall portion 20311c that is a partition that divides the opening on the back surface into an insertion hole 311a and an operation area hole 20311b that opens an area in which the posture correction device 20312 operates.

機能壁部20311cは、背面側から正面側へ向けて姿勢修正装置20312の軸棒部20312a1よりも若干大きな幅で凹設され軸棒部20312a1を軸支可能に形成される凹設部20311c1と、その凹設部20311c1の上方において断面扇形状(入口から深くなるほど幅が広くなる幅が広くなる形状)に凹設される被差込凹部20311c2と、その被差込凹部20311c2の凹設部20311c1から遠い側の内側側面から凸設される係止凸部20311c3と、を主に備える。 The functional wall portion 20311c is recessed from the back side to the front side with a width slightly larger than that of the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the posture correction device 20312, and the recessed portion 20311c1 formed so as to support the shaft rod portion 20312a1. From the insertion recess 20311c2 recessed above the recessed portion 20311c1 in a cross-sectional fan shape (the shape becomes wider as it gets deeper from the entrance) and the recessed portion 20311c1 of the insertion recess 20311c2. It mainly includes a locking convex portion 20311c3 that is projected from the inner side surface on the distant side.

姿勢修正装置20312は、断面J字状に構成される本体部材20312aと、その本体部材20312aの開口部20312a3を貫通する態様で本体部材20312aと組み立てられる板バネ状の板バネ部材20312bと、を主に備える。 The posture correction device 20312 mainly includes a main body member 20312a having a J-shaped cross section and a leaf spring-shaped leaf spring member 20312b assembled with the main body member 20312a in a manner of penetrating the opening 20312a3 of the main body member 20312a. Prepare for.

本体部材20312aは、凹設部20311c1に軸支される軸棒部20312a1と、その軸棒部20312a1を端部に配置して平板状に形成される平板部20312a2と、軸棒部20312a1及び平板部20312a2の間に開口形成される開口部20312a3と、平板部20312a2の下端部から湾曲形成される湾曲部20312a4と、その湾曲部20312a4の先端部において板バネ部材20312bを挟持可能に凹設される挟持凹部20312a5と、を主に備える。 The main body member 20312a includes a shaft rod portion 20312a1 pivotally supported by the recessed portion 20311c1, a flat plate portion 20312a2 formed in a flat plate shape by arranging the shaft rod portion 20312a1 at an end portion, and a shaft rod portion 20312a1 and a flat plate portion. An opening 20312a3 formed between the 20312a2, a curved portion 20312a4 curved from the lower end of the flat plate portion 20312a2, and a pinching portion in which the leaf spring member 20312b is recessed so as to be sandwiched at the tip of the curved portion 20312a4. It mainly includes a recess 20312a5.

被差込凹部20311c2の凹設部20311c1から遠い側の側面は、凹設部20311c1が凹設される壁部と平行に配設され、それらの垂直方向の間隔が板バネ部剤20312bの厚みよりも若干大きくされる。 The side surface of the recessed portion 20311c2 on the side far from the recessed portion 20311c1 is arranged parallel to the wall portion on which the recessed portion 20311c1 is recessed, and the vertical distance between them is larger than the thickness of the leaf spring portion agent 20312b. Is also slightly enlarged.

板バネ部材20312bは、被差込凹部20311c2の入口の寸法よりも厚みが小さく設定されると共に開口部20312a3よりも横幅が小さく設定され、組立状態において被差込凹部20311c2に差し込まれると共に凹設部20311c1に嵌め込まれた軸棒部20312a1を引き抜き不能に押さえる上側部20312b1と、その上側部20312b1の下端部(開口部20312a3の上端部に位置する)から折曲されると共に開口部20312a3を内側へ向けて貫通する態様で延設され挟持凹部20312a5に差し込まれる下側部20312b2と、上側部20312b1に穿設される係止孔20312b3と、を主に備える。なお、本実施形態において、板バネ部材20312bは、折れ曲がりを緩やかにする方向(図104(a)の下端部が反時計回りに回転擦る方向)に付勢される。 The leaf spring member 20312b is set to have a thickness smaller than the size of the entrance of the insertion recess 20311c2 and a width smaller than the opening 20312a3, and is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2 in the assembled state and is recessed. The upper portion 20312b1 that presses the shaft rod portion 20312a1 fitted in the 20311c1 so that it cannot be pulled out, and the lower end portion (located at the upper end portion of the opening 20312a3) of the upper portion 20312b1 are bent and the opening 20312a3 is directed inward. The lower portion 20312b2 is extended and inserted into the sandwiching recess 20312a5, and the locking hole 20312b3 is formed in the upper portion 20312b1. In the present embodiment, the leaf spring member 20312b is urged in a direction in which the bending is gentle (a direction in which the lower end portion in FIG. 104A is rotationally rubbed counterclockwise).

係止孔20312b3は、板バネ部材20312bを被差込凹部20311c2に差し込んだ状態において係止凸部20311c3が引っ掛けられる孔である。そのため、組立状態において、板バネ部材20312bに外向き(図104(a)右向き)の負荷がかけられたとしても、板バネ部材20312bが被差込凹部20311c2から脱落することを防止することができる。 The locking hole 20312b3 is a hole into which the locking convex portion 20311c3 is hooked in a state where the leaf spring member 20312b is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2. Therefore, even if the leaf spring member 20312b is loaded outward (to the right in FIG. 104 (a)) in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the leaf spring member 20312b from falling off from the insertion recess 20311c2. ..

本実施形態における構成によれば、板バネ部材20312bの弾性力により、本体部材20312aが凹設部20311c1から脱落することを防止することができる。即ち、本体部材20312aの軸棒部20312a1が脱落する方向に移動させる場合、板バネ部材20312bも一緒に移動させる必要があるところ、その移動方向は板バネ部材20312bの係止孔20312b3を係止凸部20311c3に食い込ませる方向であるので、板バネ部材20312bを移動させることができず、その結果、本体部材20312aの軸棒部20312a1が凹設部20311c1から脱落することを防止することができる。 According to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the main body member 20312a from falling off from the recessed portion 20311c1 due to the elastic force of the leaf spring member 20312b. That is, when the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a is moved in the direction in which it falls off, the leaf spring member 20312b also needs to be moved together, but the moving direction locks the locking hole 20312b3 of the leaf spring member 20312b. Since the direction is to bite into the portion 20311c3, the leaf spring member 20312b cannot be moved, and as a result, the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a can be prevented from falling off from the recessed portion 20311c1.

また、図104(b)に示すように、本体部材20312aが壁部材13322bから負荷を受け、背面側枠部材20311の内側に押し込まれる場合には、板バネ部材20312bの付勢力が増す方向に板バネ部材20312bが変位されるので、軸棒部20312a1を凹設部20311c1から脱落させることは一層困難になる。従って、ネジなどの締結部材を一切使用しない構成ながら、遊技中に遊技者が誤って姿勢修正装置2031を取り外してしまう事態を防止することができる。 Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the main body member 20312a receives a load from the wall member 13322b and is pushed inside the back side frame member 20311, the plate is in the direction in which the urging force of the leaf spring member 20312b increases. Since the spring member 20312b is displaced, it becomes more difficult to remove the shaft rod portion 20312a1 from the recessed portion 20311c1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the posture correction device 2031 during the game, even though the structure does not use any fastening members such as screws.

ここで、壁部材13322bと本体部材20312aとの間に過負荷が生じ、本体部材20312aが割れてしまった場合、本体部材20312aの下端部が動作領域孔20311bの下端部に係止されずに、曲げが解消される位置まで板バネ部材20312bが変形する。従って、背面側枠部材20311の外側に板バネ部材20312bが露出した状態となるので、正常な状態との違いが大きく、外観検査でメンテナンスの必要性を容易に判断することができる。 Here, when an overload occurs between the wall member 13322b and the main body member 20312a and the main body member 20312a is cracked, the lower end portion of the main body member 20312a is not locked to the lower end portion of the operating region hole 20311b. The leaf spring member 20312b is deformed to a position where the bending is eliminated. Therefore, since the leaf spring member 20312b is exposed on the outside of the back side frame member 20311, the difference from the normal state is large, and the necessity of maintenance can be easily determined by the visual inspection.

なお、姿勢修正装置20312を機能壁部20311cに組み付ける方法としては、まず、板バネ部材20312bを本体部材20312aの開口部20312a3に挿通した状態で軸棒部20312a1を凹設部20311c1に嵌め込む。このとき、板バネ部剤20312bはまだ狭持凹部20312a5には差し込まない。 As a method of assembling the posture correction device 20312 to the functional wall portion 20311c, first, the shaft rod portion 20312a1 is fitted into the recessed portion 20311c1 in a state where the leaf spring member 20312b is inserted into the opening portion 20312a3 of the main body member 20312a. At this time, the leaf spring portion agent 20312b is not yet inserted into the narrow holding recess 20312a5.

次に、開口部20312a3の内側を自由に移動できる状態の板バネ部材20312bの上側部20312b1を、被差込凹部20311c2に差し込む。 Next, the upper portion 20312b1 of the leaf spring member 20312b in a state where it can freely move inside the opening 20312a3 is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2.

最後に、背面側枠部材20311の内側から板バネ部材20312bの下側部20312b2を下方に引っ張って狭持凹部20312a5に差し込むことで図104(a)の状態を形成することができる。この状態において、板バネ部材20312bの上側部20312b1は凹設部20311c1が凹設される側面を支点として被差込凹部20311c2の内側を係止凸部20311c3に近接する方向に回転され、係止孔20312b3が係止凸部20311c3に引っ掛けられる。従って上側部20312b1が被差込凹部20311c2から脱落することを防止することができる。 Finally, the state shown in FIG. 104 (a) can be formed by pulling the lower portion 20312b2 of the leaf spring member 20312b downward from the inside of the back side frame member 20311 and inserting it into the narrow holding recess 20312a5. In this state, the upper portion 20312b1 of the leaf spring member 20312b is rotated in the direction close to the locking convex portion 20311c3 with the side surface on which the recessed portion 20311c1 is recessed as a fulcrum as a fulcrum, and the locking hole 20311c3. The 20312b3 is hooked on the locking convex portion 20311c3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper portion 20312b1 from falling off from the insertion recess 20311c2.

このように、背面側枠部材20311の内側から板バネ部材20312bを触れば、組み付けや取り外しは容易である(下側部20312b2を変形させれば良い)ものの、組立状態のように背面側枠部材20311の外側からしか板バネ部材20312bに触れない場合には、取り外しが困難となる。 In this way, if the leaf spring member 20312b is touched from the inside of the back side frame member 20311, it can be easily assembled and removed (the lower side frame member 20312b2 may be deformed), but the back side frame member is as in the assembled state. If the leaf spring member 20312b is touched only from the outside of the 20311, it becomes difficult to remove it.

従って、メンテナンス時のように背面側枠部材20311を取り外して内側から姿勢修正装置20312を取り外す場合には、その作業を迅速かつ容易に行うことができると共に、背面側枠部材20311の外側から姿勢修正装置20312を取り外すような不正行為を困難とすることができる。 Therefore, when the back side frame member 20311 is removed and the posture correction device 20312 is removed from the inside as in the case of maintenance, the work can be performed quickly and easily, and the posture is corrected from the outside of the back side frame member 20311. Cheating such as removing device 20312 can be made difficult.

次いで、図106を参照して、第21実施形態について説明する。上述した第17実施形態ではモータ固定板17362が壁部材17322bに擦れる場合を説明したが、第21実施形態における操作デバイス21300は、モータ固定板21362がレバー部材13340の回転に連動して回転する態様で構成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the motor fixing plate 17362 rubs against the wall member 17322b has been described, but in the operation device 21300 in the 21st embodiment, the motor fixing plate 21362 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the lever member 13340. Consists of. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図106(a)及び図106(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第21実施形態における操作デバイス21300の部分断面図である。なお、図106(a)では、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図106(b)では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。また、図106(a)及び図106(b)では、ねじりバネSP2及び下部カバー部材345(図81参照)が取り外された状態が図示されると共に、図106(a)では、レバー部材13340に対して首振り操作部材13310が前転側に回転された状態が、図106(b)では、レバー部材13340に対して首振り操作部材13310が後転側に回転された状態が、それぞれ図示される。 106 (a) and 106 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 21300 in the 21st embodiment on the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 106 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 106 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. .. Further, in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed is shown, and in FIG. 106 (a), the lever member 13340 is shown. On the other hand, the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side is shown, and in FIG. 106 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the backward rotation side with respect to the lever member 13340 is shown. To.

図106に示すように、壁部材21322bは、前上方(図106(a)斜め左上方向)へ延設され一対の摩擦腕部17362cの内側に配設される延設スライド部21322b2を備える。 As shown in FIG. 106, the wall member 21322b includes an extended slide portion 21322b2 extending forward and upward (in the diagonally upper left direction in FIG. 106 (a)) and arranged inside a pair of friction arm portions 17362c.

延設スライド部21322b2は、左右方向(図106紙面垂直方向)に穿設され上下方向に延設される長孔21322b21を備える。溝部21322b21は、図106(a)に示す状態においてモータ固定板21362の凸設ピン21362dが挿通可能な位置に配置され、その位置から、レバー支持軸331d1を中心としてその位置を通る円弧よりも外側を、下方へ向かうほどレバー支持軸331d1からの距離が遠くなる態様で延設され、図106(b)に示す状態においてモータ固定板21362の凸設ピン21362dが挿通可能な態様で形成される。 The extended slide portion 21322b2 includes an elongated hole 21322b21 that is bored in the left-right direction (vertical direction on the paper surface of FIG. 106) and extends in the vertical direction. The groove portion 21322b21 is arranged at a position where the convex pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted in the state shown in FIG. 106A, and is outside the arc passing through the position centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 from that position. Is extended downward so that the distance from the lever support shaft 331d1 increases, and the convex pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted in the state shown in FIG. 106 (b).

首振り部材21360は、本体部材361と、モータ固定板362に近似した形状から構成されるモータ固定板21362と、軸支棒363と、緩衝部材364と、規制棒365と、振動装置366と、を主に備える(図81参照)。 The swing member 21360 includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 21362 having a shape similar to that of the motor fixing plate 362, a shaft support rod 363, a cushioning member 364, a regulation rod 365, a vibrating device 366, and the like. (See FIG. 81).

モータ固定板21362は、本体部362aと、側壁部362bと、一対の摩擦腕部17362bと、その一対の摩擦腕部17362bから内側へ凸設される凸設ピン21362dと、を主に備える。 The motor fixing plate 21362 mainly includes a main body portion 362a, a side wall portion 362b, a pair of friction arm portions 17362b, and a convex pin 21362d projecting inward from the pair of friction arm portions 17362b.

本実施形態において、凸設ピン21362dが長孔21322b21に挿通されるので、長孔21322b21の形状の設定により、レバー部材13340の回転に伴う首振り操作部材13310のレバー部材13340に対する移動態様を変化させることができる。例えば、長孔21322b21を、レバー支持軸331d1を中心とした円弧と同等な形状とすることで、レバー部材13340がレバー支持軸331d1を中心に回転した場合の首振り操作部材13310のレバー部材13340に対する変位を無しにすることができる。 In the present embodiment, since the convex pin 21362d is inserted into the elongated hole 21322b21, the movement mode of the swinging operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 due to the rotation of the lever member 13340 is changed by setting the shape of the elongated hole 21322b21. be able to. For example, by making the elongated hole 21322b21 a shape equivalent to an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, the lever member 13340 with respect to the lever member 13340 of the swing operation member 13310 when the lever member 13340 rotates about the lever support shaft 331d1. Displacement can be eliminated.

一方で、本実施形態のように、長孔21322b21を、レバー支持軸331d1を中心とした円弧に対して傾斜した方向に延設される態様とすることによって、レバー部材13340が回転する事により凸設ピン21362dと長孔21322b21との間に生じる嵌合位置のずれを埋めるべく、モータ固定板21362が回転される。従って、レバー部材13340の回転動作に伴って(連動して)、モータ固定板21362が(回転可能な方向、即ち図106(a)の状態から図106(b)の状態に回転するのであれば、図106(a)時計回りに)回転されるので、首振り操作部材13310を回転させることができる。これにより、レバー部材13340と首振り操作部材13310とを連動して回転させることができる。 On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the elongated hole 21322b21 is extended in a direction inclined with respect to the arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, so that the lever member 13340 is rotated to be convex. The motor fixing plate 21362 is rotated to fill the gap in the fitting position that occurs between the setting pin 21362d and the elongated hole 21322b21. Therefore, if the motor fixing plate 21362 rotates (in conjunction with) with the rotation operation of the lever member 13340 (in a rotatable direction, that is, from the state of FIG. 106 (a) to the state of FIG. 106 (b)). , FIG. 106 (a) is rotated clockwise), so that the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated. As a result, the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated in conjunction with each other.

次いで、図107を参照して、第22実施形態について説明する。上述した第21実施形態ではモータ固定板21362の凸設ピン21362dが溝部21322b21に案内されることにより首振り操作部材13310が姿勢変化する場合を説明したが、第22実施形態における操作デバイス22300は、首振り操作部材13310の姿勢変化が、ギアの歯合回転により生じる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 107. In the 21st embodiment described above, the case where the swing operation member 13310 changes its posture by guiding the convex pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 to the groove portion 21322b21 has been described. However, the operation device 22300 in the 22nd embodiment has been described. The posture change of the swing operation member 13310 is caused by the tooth rotation of the gear. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図107(a)及び図107(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第22実施形態における操作デバイス22300の部分断面図である。 107 (a) and 107 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 22300 in the 22nd embodiment on the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a).

図107(a)では、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図107(b)では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。なお、図107(a)及び図107(b)では、ねじりバネSP2及び下部カバー部材345(図81参照)が取り外された状態が図示されると共に、図107(a)では、レバー部材22340に対して首振り操作部材13310が前転側に回転された状態が、図107(b)では、レバー部材22340に対して首振り操作部材13310が後転側に回転された状態が、それぞれ図示される。また、図107(a)及び図107(b)では、理解を容易とするために、ねじりバネSP1及び案内支持孔331e1の図示が省略される。 FIG. 107 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 107 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. In addition, in FIGS. 107 (a) and 107 (b), the state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed is shown, and in FIG. 107 (a), the lever member 22340 is shown. On the other hand, the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side is shown, and in FIG. 107 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the backward rotation side with respect to the lever member 22340 is shown. To. Further, in FIGS. 107 (a) and 107 (b), the torsion spring SP1 and the guide support hole 331e1 are omitted for ease of understanding.

図107に示すように、操作デバイス22300は、首振り操作部材13310を一方(図107(b)左側)の端部で軸支しながら、レバー支持軸331d1に軸支されるレバー部材22340と、レバー部材22340の回転ギア22347と常に歯合される円弧壁部22322b2を有する壁部材22322bと、レバー部材22340の回転ギア22347と常に歯合される歯合板部22362cを有する首振り部材22360と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 107, the operation device 22300 includes a lever member 22340 that is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331d1 while pivotally supporting the swing operation member 13310 at one end (left side of FIG. 107 (b)). A wall member 22322b having an arc wall portion 22322b2 that is always meshed with the rotary gear 22347 of the lever member 22340, and a swing member 22360 having a tooth plywood portion 22362c that is always meshed with the rotary gear 22347 of the lever member 22340. Mainly prepare.

レバー部材22340は、第13実施形態におけるレバー部材13340に、角度規制棒部材346に軸支される回転ギア22347を追加する態様で構成される。 The lever member 22340 is configured by adding a rotary gear 22347 axially supported by the angle control rod member 346 to the lever member 13340 in the thirteenth embodiment.

壁部材22322bは、嵌合凹部13322a(図78参照)に嵌合される板部材であって、レバー支持軸331d1へ近接する方向へ向けて延設される内方延設部22322b1と、その内方延設部22322b1の内方(図107(a)右方)の端部からレバー支持軸331d1を中心とした円弧に沿って延設されると共に回転ギア22347と歯合されるギア歯を有する円弧壁部22322b2と、を備える。 The wall member 22322b is a plate member fitted in the fitting recess 13322a (see FIG. 78), and is an inward extending portion 22322b1 extending in a direction approaching the lever support shaft 331d1 and an inward extending portion 22322b1 thereof. 22322b2 is an arc wall portion that extends from the inner end of 22322b1 (right side in FIG. 107 (a)) along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 and has gear teeth that are meshed with the rotary gear 22347. And.

首振り部材22360は、第13実施形態における首振り部材360のモータ固定板362(図81参照)が、回転ギア22347に歯合されるギア歯が形成される歯合板部22362cを有するモータ固定板22362と交換された態様で構成される。 The swing member 22360 is a motor fixing plate having a tooth plywood portion 22362c in which the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 81) of the swing member 360 according to the thirteenth embodiment is formed with gear teeth meshed with the rotary gear 22347. It is configured in a manner exchanged for 22362.

本実施形態の構成によれば、レバー部材22340が回転されることにより、円弧壁部22322b2に対して回転ギア22347が回転され、その回転ギア22347の回転に伴って、モータ固定板22362が軸支棒363を軸に回転される。従って、レバー部材22340が回転している間中、首振り操作部材13310の回転を継続させることができる。 According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the rotation of the lever member 22340 causes the rotary gear 22347 to rotate with respect to the arc wall portion 22322b2, and the motor fixing plate 22362 is pivotally supported by the rotation of the rotary gear 22347. It is rotated around the rod 363. Therefore, the rotation of the swing operation member 13310 can be continued while the lever member 22340 is rotating.

なお、本実施形態では、レバー部材22340が図107(a)に示す状態から図107(b)に示す状態まで34度回転され、その間に首振り操作部材13310が10度回転される。即ち、円弧壁部22322b2に形成されるギア歯に対する歯合板部22362cのギア比が約0.3(=10/34)となる態様で形成される。 In the present embodiment, the lever member 22340 is rotated 34 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 107 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 107 (b), and the swing operation member 13310 is rotated 10 degrees during that time. That is, the gear ratio of the tooth plywood portion 22362c to the gear teeth formed on the arc wall portion 22322b2 is about 0.3 (= 10/34).

以上、上記実施形態に基づき本発明を説明したが、本発明は上記形態に何ら限定されるものではなく、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない範囲内で種々の変形改良が可能であることは容易に推察できるものである。 Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

上記各実施形態において、一の実施形態における構成の一部または全部を、他の実施形態における構成の一部または全部の構成と組み合わせて或いは置き換えて、別の実施形態としても良い。 In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

上記各実施形態では、レバー部材340の本体部材341が形状を固定される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、長手方向で部分的に伸縮可能とされても良い。この場合、本体部材341を縮め、首振り操作部材310を後方に収納できるように構成することで、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置されパチンコ機10の前方に張り出して、梱包用の箱からはみ出す場合に、梱包用の箱に入るサイズまで首振り操作部材310の前後幅を縮めることができる。 In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is fixed in shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be partially stretchable in the longitudinal direction. In this case, the main body member 341 is shrunk so that the swing operation member 310 can be stored rearward, so that the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position and projects in front of the pachinko machine 10, and is a box for packing. The front-rear width of the swing operation member 310 can be reduced to a size that fits in a packing box when it protrudes from the outside.

上記第6実施形態では、ギアダンパ6347が、レバー部材6340から剥離部材6350が引きはがされた場合に限り粘性抵抗を生じる場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、ギアダンパが、レバー部材6340及び剥離部材6350が吸着固定されている場合に限って、粘性抵抗を生じるようにしても良い。この場合、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を操作する際の操作速度に応じた抵抗を遊技者に返すことができ、操作感を向上させることができる。 In the sixth embodiment, the case where the gear damper 6347 causes viscous resistance only when the peeling member 6350 is peeled off from the lever member 6340 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the gear damper may generate viscous resistance only when the lever member 6340 and the peeling member 6350 are suction-fixed. In this case, the resistance corresponding to the operation speed when the player operates the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the player, and the operation feeling can be improved.

上記第4実施形態では、偏心カム部材4333の最長径部分とロック受け部材4350とが当接している時(偏心カム部材4333の回転軌跡の外接円とロック受け部材4350とが接する時)に、ロック部材4336の上端とロック受け部材4350の下端部とが当接する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、ロック受け部材4350が偏心カム部材4333から上方に離間した位置でロック部材4336の上端に揺動を規制される態様でも良い。 In the fourth embodiment, when the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact with each other (when the circumscribed circle of the rotation locus of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact with each other). Although the case where the upper end of the lock member 4336 and the lower end of the lock receiving member 4350 come into contact with each other has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lock receiving member 4350 may be restricted from swinging at the upper end of the lock member 4336 at a position separated upward from the eccentric cam member 4333.

この場合、偏心カム部材4333の回転駆動によりロック受け部材4350が揺動する場合には、ロック受け部材4350がロック部材4336に規制されることは無いため、偏心カム部材4333を一方向に回転駆動させることにより、首振り操作部材310を上下に往復動作させる煽り動作を行うことができる。 In this case, when the lock receiving member 4350 swings due to the rotational drive of the eccentric cam member 4333, the lock receiving member 4350 is not restricted by the lock member 4336, so that the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotationally driven in one direction. By making the swing operation member 310 reciprocate up and down, it is possible to perform a fanning operation.

また、例えば、偏心カム部材4333の最長径部分と偏心カム軸331d2との間の中間部がロック受け部材4350と当接している時にロック受け部材4350がロック部材4336に揺動を規制される態様でも良い。 Further, for example, when the intermediate portion between the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350, the lock receiving member 4350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336. But it's okay.

この場合、偏心カム部材4333を一方向に回転させることで、ロック受け部材4350がロック部材4336の上端よりも上側で上下に往復動作可能とされ、煽り動作を行うことができる。なお且つ、煽り動作中に、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上向きに持ち上げる誤操作を行ったとしても、ロック部材4336でロック受け部材4350の揺動を規制することができ、偏心カム部材4333が破損することを防止することができる。 In this case, by rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 in one direction, the lock receiving member 4350 can be reciprocated up and down above the upper end of the lock member 4336, and the fanning operation can be performed. Moreover, even if the player makes an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 upward during the fanning operation, the lock member 4336 can regulate the swing of the lock receiving member 4350, and the eccentric cam member 4333 can be used. It can be prevented from being damaged.

上記第8実施形態では、レバー部材340とスライド板8370とが離間した際に、ロック部材8336がレバー部材340の下側に入り込み、レバー部材340の揺動を規制する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、内側ケース部材8330の側壁から内側ケース部材8330の内方へ向けて、伸縮する棒状部材が配設され、その棒状部材は、レバー部材340とスライド板8370とが離間する場合に伸張され、レバー部材340の後端部の下側に入り込むようにしても良い。 In the eighth embodiment, when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other, the lock member 8336 enters the lower side of the lever member 340 to regulate the swing of the lever member 340, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, a rod-shaped member that expands and contracts is arranged from the side wall of the inner case member 8330 toward the inside of the inner case member 8330, and the rod-shaped member is extended when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other. It may be inserted into the lower side of the rear end portion of the lever member 340.

この場合、ロック部材8336の鉤状の先端部の形状をレバー部材340の下側に入り込む形状にする必要が無いので、ロック部材8336の設計自由度を向上させることができる。 In this case, since it is not necessary to make the shape of the hook-shaped tip portion of the lock member 8336 into a shape that fits under the lever member 340, the degree of freedom in designing the lock member 8336 can be improved.

上記第8実施形態では、レバー部材340が揺動角度範囲の中間の姿勢とされた状態でロック部材8336が固定側に配置される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、レバー部材340の後端部が揺動角度範囲の最上位置に配置された場合にロック部材8336が固定側に配置されるようにしても良い。 In the eighth embodiment, the case where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side in a state where the lever member 340 is in an intermediate posture in the swing angle range has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the uppermost position of the swing angle range, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side.

この場合、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされたとしても、揺動を規制された剥離部材350の上側においてレバー部材340が揺動可能な範囲が限定されているため、遊技者の操作によりレバー部材340にかけられる揺動方向の勢いが抑制される(勢いを付ける程度にレバー部材340を移動させることができない)。従って、レバー部材340が勢いよく内側ケース部材8330に衝突して内側ケース部材8330が破損することを防止することができる。 In this case, even if the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the range in which the lever member 340 can swing is limited on the upper side of the peeling member 350 whose swing is restricted, so that the player can operate the lever member 340. As a result, the momentum in the swing direction applied to the lever member 340 is suppressed (the lever member 340 cannot be moved to the extent that the momentum is applied). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from vigorously colliding with the inner case member 8330 and damaging the inner case member 8330.

また、例えば、レバー部材340の後端部が揺動角度範囲の最下位置に配置された場合にロック部材8336が固定側に配置されるようにしても良い。この場合、レバー部材340が揺動を規制された姿勢において、レバー部材340の後端部と内側ケース部材8330の上側面との距離を遠くできるので、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引きはがされることにより遊技者に伝わる感覚が変化すること(剥離部材350の重さが遊技者に伝わらなくなり、首振り操作部材310を重く感じること)に遊技者が気付き、遊技者が首振り操作部材310にかける負荷を和らげる時間的余裕を持つことができる。 Further, for example, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the lowest position in the swing angle range. In this case, in a posture in which the lever member 340 is restricted from swinging, the distance between the rear end portion of the lever member 340 and the upper side surface of the inner case member 8330 can be increased, so that the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350. The player notices that the feeling transmitted to the player changes (the weight of the peeling member 350 is not transmitted to the player and the swing operation member 310 feels heavy), and the player notices that the swing operation member is heavy. There can be time to relieve the load on the 310.

一方で、レバー部材340の後端部が揺動角度範囲の最下位置に配置された場合、剥離部材350と偏心カム部材333とが当接するため、剥離部材350から偏心カム部材333に負荷が生じる恐れがある。そのため、これを防ぐために、ロック部材8336が揺動範囲の中間位置よりも情報に配置される時(偏心カム部材333が剥離部材350と当接しない時)に限って、ロック部材8336が固定側に配置されるようにしても良い。 On the other hand, when the rear end of the lever member 340 is arranged at the lowest position in the swing angle range, the release member 350 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other, so that a load is applied from the release member 350 to the eccentric cam member 333. May occur. Therefore, in order to prevent this, the lock member 8336 is fixed on the fixed side only when the lock member 8336 is arranged in information from the intermediate position of the swing range (when the eccentric cam member 333 does not abut on the release member 350). It may be arranged in.

上記第9実施形態では、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92をそれぞれ同じ長さで形成し、上側の弾性連結部材CS91の弾性係数を下側の弾性連結部材CS92に比較して大きくする場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92をそれぞれ同じ弾性係数とし、上側の弾性連結部材CS91を下側の弾性連結部材CS92に比較して短くしてもいい。 In the ninth embodiment, the case where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are formed to have the same length and the elastic modulus of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is made larger than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92 has been described. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 may have the same elastic modulus, and the upper elastic connecting member CS91 may be shorter than the lower elastic connecting member CS92.

この場合、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92が互いに同じ長さになる(延伸される)状態において、上側の弾性連結部材CS91の方が弾性変位が大きくなり、弾性回復力が大きくなるので、弾性回復した後の状態において首振り操作部材310のレンズ部材317を上方向きに保持しやすくできる。これにより、遊技者がレンズ部材317を上方から押し込み操作すること容易とすることができる。 In this case, in a state where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 have the same length (stretched), the upper elastic connecting member CS91 has a larger elastic displacement and a larger elastic recovery force, so that the elastic recovery is performed. In the later state, the lens member 317 of the swing operation member 310 can be easily held upward. This makes it easy for the player to push the lens member 317 from above.

上記第13実施形態では、鉤部材13312cが硬質樹脂から形成される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、常温で鉤部材13312cの形状を維持し、加熱により支持部材13312bとの係合が解除される態様で形状変化する形状記憶材料から形成されても良い。この場合、鉤部材13312cの交換を中間ベースM13から背面側枠部材13311を取り外すことなく行うことができる。 In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the hook member 13312c is formed of a hard resin has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a shape memory material that maintains the shape of the hook member 13312c at room temperature and changes its shape in such a manner that the engagement with the support member 13312b is released by heating. In this case, the hook member 13312c can be replaced without removing the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13.

上記第13実施形態では、保護カバー13316が硬質樹脂から形成され、保護カバー13316を取り外すために背面側枠部材13311を中間ベースM13から取り外す必要がある場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、保護カバー13316が軟質の樹脂材料から形成されても良い。この場合、保護カバー13316の形状を変形させることで、背面側枠部材13311を中間ベースM13に固定したままでも保護カバー13316を取り外すことができる。 In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the protective cover 13316 is formed of a hard resin and the back side frame member 13311 needs to be removed from the intermediate base M13 in order to remove the protective cover 13316 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the protective cover 13316 may be formed from a soft resin material. In this case, by deforming the shape of the protective cover 13316, the protective cover 13316 can be removed even while the back side frame member 13311 is fixed to the intermediate base M13.

上記第17実施形態では、壁部材17322bの延設部17322b1の表面状態が一様である場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、延設部17322b1の表面状態に、摩擦係数の大きい第1領域と、その第1領域よりも摩擦係数の小さくされる第2領域とが形成されても良い。この場合、摩擦腕部17362cと延設部17322b1とが擦れている状態で首振り操作部材13310を首振り操作する遊技者に与える操作感(回転抵抗、重さ)を摩擦腕部17362cが第1領域と擦れる場合と、摩擦腕部17362cが第2領域と擦れる場合とで変化させることができる。 In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the surface state of the extending portion 17322b1 of the wall member 17322b is uniform has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a first region having a large friction coefficient and a second region having a friction coefficient smaller than that of the first region may be formed on the surface state of the extending portion 17322b1. In this case, the friction arm portion 17362c first gives a feeling of operation (rotational resistance, weight) to the player who swings the swing operation member 13310 while the friction arm portion 17362c and the extension portion 17322b1 are rubbing against each other. It can be changed depending on whether it rubs against the region or when the friction arm portion 17362c rubs against the second region.

上記第19実施形態では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態において回転レバー19337bがレバー部材19340に当接される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置へ向かう途中(レバー部材19340が移動中)に回転レバー19337bがレバー部材19340に当接する態様とされても良い。この場合、回転レバー19337bをレバー部材19340の回転方向と逆方向に動作させ当接させることにより、レバー部材19340を減速させる効果を奏することができる。 In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the rotary lever 19337b is brought into contact with the lever member 19340 in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotary lever 19337b may come into contact with the lever member 19340 while the swing operation member 13310 is moving toward the downward position (the lever member 19340 is moving). In this case, the effect of decelerating the lever member 19340 can be achieved by moving the rotary lever 19337b in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the lever member 19340 and bringing them into contact with each other.

本発明を上記各実施形態とは異なるタイプのパチンコ機等に実施してもよい。例えば、一度大当たりすると、それを含めて複数回(例えば2回、3回)大当たり状態が発生するまで、大当たり期待値が高められるようなパチンコ機(通称、2回権利物、3回権利物と称される)として実施してもよい。また、大当たり図柄が表示された後に、所定の領域に球を入賞させることを必要条件として遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技を発生させるパチンコ機として実施してもよい。また、Vゾーン等の特別領域を有する入賞装置を有し、その特別領域に球を入賞させることを必要条件として特別遊技状態となるパチンコ機に実施してもよい。更に、パチンコ機以外にも、アレパチ、雀球、スロットマシン、いわゆるパチンコ機とスロットマシンとが融合した遊技機などの各種遊技機として実施するようにしても良い。 The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

なお、スロットマシンは、例えばコインを投入して図柄有効ラインを決定させた状態で操作レバーを操作することにより図柄が変動され、ストップボタンを操作することにより図柄が停止されて確定される周知のものである。従って、スロットマシンの基本概念としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を変動表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する表示装置を備え、始動用操作手段(例えば操作レバー)の操作に起因して識別情報の変動表示が開始され、停止用操作手段(例えばストップボタン)の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の変動表示が停止して確定表示され、その停止時の識別情報の組合せが特定のものであることを必要条件として、遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技を発生させるスロットマシン」となり、この場合、遊技媒体はコイン、メダル等が代表例として挙げられる。 In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

また、パチンコ機とスロットマシンとが融合した遊技機の具体例としては、複数の図柄からなる図柄列を変動表示した後に図柄を確定表示する表示装置を備えており、球打出用のハンドルを備えていないものが挙げられる。この場合、所定の操作(ボタン操作)に基づく所定量の球の投入の後、例えば操作レバーの操作に起因して図柄の変動が開始され、例えばストップボタンの操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、図柄の変動が停止され、その停止時の確定図柄がいわゆる大当たり図柄であることを必要条件として遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技が発生させられ、遊技者には、下部の受皿に多量の球が払い出されるものである。かかる遊技機をスロットマシンに代えて使用すれば、遊技ホールでは球のみを遊技価値として取り扱うことができるため、パチンコ機とスロットマシンとが混在している現在の遊技ホールにおいてみられる、遊技価値たるメダルと球との別個の取扱による設備上の負担や遊技機設置個所の制約といった問題を解消し得る。 Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

以下に、本発明の遊技機に加えて上述した実施形態に含まれる各種発明の概念を示す。 The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<ロック時にレバー部材340が折れる構造とする技術思想の一例>
遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材と、その移動部材の移動を規制する規制部材と、を備える遊技機において、前記移動部材は、遊技者が操作する操作部材と、その操作部材に連結され前記規制部材に移動を規制可能とされる被規制部材と、を備え、前記被規制部材が、前記規制部材に移動を規制される状態において、前記操作部材に所定量以上の荷重が作用することにより、前記移動部材の形状が変形可能に構成されることを特徴とする遊技機A1。
<An example of a technical concept in which the lever member 340 breaks when locked>
In a gaming machine including a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player and a regulating member that regulates the movement of the moving member, the moving member is provided by the player. The operation member to be operated and a regulated member connected to the operating member and capable of restricting movement by the regulating member are provided, and the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulating member. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the shape of the moving member is deformable when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the operating member.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、遊技者が手動操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材が規制部材によって所定位置で移動を規制される遊技機がある(例えば、特開2014−144218号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、移動を規制された状態で遊技者が移動部材に過荷重を加えると、移動部材を通して規制部材に荷重が加わり、規制部材が破損する恐れがあるという問題点があった。 In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player manually operates is restricted from moving at a predetermined position by a regulating member (for example,). (See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, if the player applies an overload to the moving member while the movement is restricted, the load is applied to the regulating member through the moving member, and the regulating member may be damaged. was there.

これに対し、遊技機A1によれば、移動部材は、遊技者が操作する操作部材と、その操作部材に連結され規制部材に移動を規制可能とされる被規制部材と、を備え、被規制部材が、規制部材に移動を規制される状態において、操作部材に所定量以上の荷重が作用することにより、移動部材の形状が変形可能とされるので、荷重が移動部材の形状変形に消費されることで、規制部材に伝達される荷重を減少させることができる。従って、遊技者が移動部材に過荷重をかけることにより規制部材が破損することを防止することができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the moving member includes an operating member operated by the player and a regulated member connected to the operating member so that the movement can be regulated by the regulating member, and is regulated. In a state where the member is restricted from moving by the regulating member, the shape of the moving member can be deformed by applying a load of a predetermined amount or more to the operating member, so that the load is consumed for the shape deformation of the moving member. As a result, the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restricting member from being damaged by the player applying an overload to the moving member.

なお、荷重の負荷による移動部材の形状の変形を実現する移動部材の構成としては、例えば、移動部材の一部にバネ等の弾性部材を配設する構成や、移動部材が複数の部位から構成され各部位が磁力で吸着される構成等が例示される。 The structure of the moving member that realizes the deformation of the shape of the moving member due to the load is, for example, a structure in which an elastic member such as a spring is arranged as a part of the moving member, or a structure in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts. An example is a configuration in which each part is attracted by a magnetic force.

移動部材の一部にバネ等の弾性部材が配設される構成では、負荷される荷重に比例して移動部材の形状の変形の度合いが変化するため、遊技者から操作部材に過荷重がかけられる程、移動部材の変形の度合いが大きくなる。そのため、遊技者から操作部材に過荷重がかけられる程、弾性部材で消費される荷重を大きくすることができ、その分規制部材に伝達される荷重を減少させることができる。 In a configuration in which an elastic member such as a spring is arranged as a part of the moving member, the degree of deformation of the shape of the moving member changes in proportion to the applied load, so that the player applies an overload to the operating member. The greater the degree of deformation of the moving member. Therefore, the more the player applies an overload to the operating member, the larger the load consumed by the elastic member can be, and the more the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced.

移動部材が複数の部位から構成され各部材が磁力で吸着される構成では、吸着力以上の荷重がかけられるまでは移動部材が形状を維持し、吸着力以上の荷重がかけられて初めて移動部材の形状が変形する。これにより、吸着力以下の荷重で通常通りに操作する場合には、移動部材を剛体として扱え、移動部材の操作を容易とすることができる。 In a configuration in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts and each member is attracted by a magnetic force, the moving member maintains its shape until a load equal to or greater than the attractive force is applied, and the moving member must be applied with a load greater than the attractive force. The shape of is deformed. As a result, when the moving member is operated as usual with a load equal to or less than the suction force, the moving member can be treated as a rigid body, and the moving member can be easily operated.

遊技機A1において、前記移動部材は、前記操作部材が前記被規制部材に固定される固定状態と、前記被規制部材が前記規制部材に移動を規制された状態で、前記操作部材に所定量以上の荷重が負荷されることで、少なくとも前記操作部材が前記被規制部材に対して相対移動可能とされる非伝達状態と、を構成可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機A2。 In the game machine A1, the moving member has a predetermined amount or more to the operating member in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and a state in which the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulated member. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that, by being loaded with the load of the above, at least the operating member can be configured in a non-transmission state in which the operating member can move relative to the regulated member.

遊技機A2によれば、遊技機A1の奏する効果に加え、移動部材は、操作部材が被規制部材に固定される固定状態と、被規制部材が規制部材に移動を規制された状態で、操作部材に所定量以上の荷重が負荷されることで、少なくとも操作部材が被規制部材に対して相対移動可能とされる非伝達状態と、を構成可能とされるので、固定状態において操作部材の操作性を確保しながら、非伝達状態では規制部材への荷重の伝達を抑制することができる。 According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the moving member is operated in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and in a state in which the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulated member. When a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the member, it is possible to configure at least a non-transmission state in which the operating member can move relative to the regulated member. Therefore, the operating member can be operated in the fixed state. It is possible to suppress the transmission of the load to the regulating member in the non-transmission state while ensuring the property.

遊技機A1及び2において、前記移動部材を支持する支持部材を備え、前記移動部材を構成する前記操作部材および前記被規制部材は前記支持部材に配設される第1軸に同軸で軸支され、前記移動部材の移動は、前記第1軸を中心とした揺動であることを特徴とする遊技機A3。 In the game machines A1 and 2, the support member for supporting the moving member is provided, and the operating member and the regulated member constituting the moving member are coaxially supported by a first axis arranged on the supporting member. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the movement of the moving member is a swing about the first axis.

遊技機A3によれば、遊技機A1及び2の奏する効果に加え、操作部材が操作されることで、規制部材と被規制部材との間で大きな荷重がかかることを抑制でき、規制部材または被規制部材が破損することを抑制することができる。 According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 and 2, it is possible to suppress a large load from being applied between the regulated member and the regulated member by operating the operating member, and the regulated member or the subject It is possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged.

遊技機A3において、前記移動部材を揺動方向に移動させる付勢力を発生させる第1付勢部材を備え、前記付勢力は前記操作部材側に加えられることを特徴とする遊技機A4。 The game machine A4 includes a first urging member that generates an urging force for moving the moving member in the swing direction, and the urging force is applied to the operating member side.

遊技機A4によれば、遊技機A3の奏する効果に加え、第1付勢部材の付勢力が操作部材側に加えられ、被規制部材側には加えられないので、規制部材に付勢部材の付勢力が加わることを防止できる。これにより、移動部材が非伝達状態となった際に規制部材が第1付勢部材から過度な付勢力を受けて破損することを防止することができる。 According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the urging force of the first urging member is applied to the operating member side and not to the regulated member side. It is possible to prevent the addition of urging force. This makes it possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged by receiving an excessive urging force from the first urging member when the moving member is in the non-transmission state.

ここで、過度な付勢力が生じる場合としては、操作部材と被規制部材との間を連結する態様でバネ部材が配設され、固定状態ではバネ部材が伸縮しないが、非伝達状態で操作部材と被規制部材との間のバネ部材が伸縮され、付勢力が生じる場合が例示される。この場合、操作部材と被規制部材との間の距離の変化量が大きくなることで、被規制部材から規制部材に過度な付勢力が生じる恐れがある。 Here, when an excessive urging force is generated, the spring member is arranged in a manner of connecting the operating member and the regulated member, and the spring member does not expand or contract in the fixed state, but the operating member is not transmitted. An example is a case where the spring member between the regulated member and the regulated member is expanded and contracted to generate an urging force. In this case, the amount of change in the distance between the operating member and the regulated member becomes large, so that an excessive urging force may be generated from the regulated member to the regulated member.

遊技機A4において、前記第1軸が横方向に長手方向を向けて配設され、前記第1付勢部材の付勢力が、前記操作部材を前倒れさせる方向に向けて発生し、前記固定状態の前記移動部材が、前記規制部材に揺動を規制された状態で、前記操作部材に下向きの荷重をかけることで、前記非伝達状態が構成されることを特徴とする遊技機A5。 In the game machine A4, the first axis is arranged in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, and the urging force of the first urging member is generated in the direction of tilting the operating member forward, and the fixed state. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the non-transmission state is formed by applying a downward load to the operating member while the moving member is restricted from swinging by the regulating member.

ここで、第1付勢部材の付勢の方向を移動部材が起き上がる方向に設定すると、遊技者が操作部材に下向きに過荷重をかけた場合に、操作部材が被規制部材から剥離して規制部材の破損を防止できたとしても、遊技者が手を離すとすぐに操作部材が上昇するので、遊技者が過荷重をかけていることに気付かず、操作部材に繰り返し過荷重をかける恐れがあるという問題点があった。 Here, if the urging direction of the first urging member is set to the direction in which the moving member rises, the operating member is separated from the regulated member and regulated when the player applies a downward overload to the operating member. Even if the member can be prevented from being damaged, the operating member rises as soon as the player releases the hand, so that the player may not notice that the operating member is overloaded and may repeatedly overload the operating member. There was a problem that there was.

これに対し、遊技機A5では、遊技機A4の奏する効果に加え、第1付勢部材による操作部材の付勢の方向が操作部材を前倒れされる方向に向けられるので、操作部材を下方の位置に配置させ続けることができる。これにより、遊技者が操作部材に過荷重を繰り返しかける事態を回避することができる。 On the other hand, in the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the direction of urging the operation member by the first urging member is directed to the direction in which the operation member is tilted forward, so that the operation member is moved downward. Can be kept in place. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player repeatedly applies an overload to the operating member.

遊技機A4において、前記第1軸が横方向に長手方向を向けて配設され、前記第1付勢部材の付勢力が、前記操作部材を上昇させる方向に向けられ、前記固定状態の前記移動部材が、前記規制部材に揺動を規制された状態で、前記操作部材に下向きの荷重をかけることで、前記非伝達状態が構成されることを特徴とする遊技機A6。 In the game machine A4, the first axis is arranged in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, the urging force of the first urging member is directed in the direction of raising the operating member, and the movement in the fixed state. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the non-transmission state is formed by applying a downward load to the operating member in a state where the member is restricted from swinging by the regulating member.

遊技機A6によれば、遊技機A4の奏する効果に加え、操作部材を上昇させる方向に向けられ、操作部材に下向きの荷重をかけることで非伝達状態が構成されるので、遊技者が操作部材に下向きの荷重をかけて、移動部材が非伝達状態を構成しても、遊技者が荷重を解くと操作部材が付勢力により固定状態側へ移動する。これにより、操作部材の配置を安定化することができ、遊技者が次の操作を行いやすくすることができる。 According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the operating member is directed in the direction of raising and a non-transmission state is formed by applying a downward load to the operating member, so that the player can operate the operating member. Even if a downward load is applied to the moving member to form a non-transmission state, when the player releases the load, the operating member moves to the fixed state side by the urging force. As a result, the arrangement of the operating members can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

遊技機A6において、前記移動部材が前記非伝達状態から前記固定状態へ復帰する場合の前記操作部材の揺動速度を低減する制動手段を備える遊技機A7。 In the game machine A6, the game machine A7 includes a braking means for reducing the swing speed of the operating member when the moving member returns from the non-transmission state to the fixed state.

遊技機A7によれば、遊技機A6の奏する効果に加え、非伝達状態から固定状態へ復帰する際の操作部材の揺動速度が低減されるので、操作部材が固定状態に高速で復帰することで規制部材に衝撃が伝わることを抑制することができる。 According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, the swing speed of the operating member when returning from the non-transmission state to the fixed state is reduced, so that the operating member returns to the fixed state at high speed. It is possible to suppress the impact from being transmitted to the regulating member.

遊技機A7において、前記制動手段は、前記支持部材に配設され粘性抵抗を発生可能なギアダンパであり、前記操作部材に配設されるギア部と前記ギアダンパとが歯合することを特徴とする遊技機A8。 In the game machine A7, the braking means is a gear damper disposed on the support member and capable of generating a viscous resistance, and is characterized in that the gear portion disposed on the operating member and the gear damper mesh with each other. Game machine A8.

遊技機A8によれば、遊技機A7の奏する効果に加え、制動手段が粘性抵抗を発生可能なギアダンパから構成されるので、操作部材の揺動速度が大きい程、操作部材にかかる抵抗は大きくなる。そのため、揺動速度が小さい(操作部材の復帰速度が小さい)場合の抵抗を抑制し、例えば、移動部材が非伝達状態の場合に遊技者が操作部材を操作して操作部材が高速で揺動する場合の抵抗は大きくすることができる。 According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the braking means is composed of a gear damper capable of generating viscous resistance. Therefore, the higher the swing speed of the operating member, the greater the resistance applied to the operating member. .. Therefore, the resistance when the swing speed is small (the return speed of the operation member is small) is suppressed. For example, when the moving member is in the non-transmission state, the player operates the operation member and the operation member swings at high speed. The resistance can be increased.

これにより、揺動速度によらず、遊技者の高速の操作に対応した大きな抵抗を生じる場合に比較して、第1付勢部材の付勢力を小さく設定でき、第1付勢部材の設計自由度を向上させることができる。 As a result, the urging force of the first urging member can be set smaller than in the case where a large resistance corresponding to the player's high-speed operation is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the design of the first urging member is free. The degree can be improved.

遊技機A8において、前記ギアダンパは、前記操作部材および前記被規制部材の相対移動に粘性抵抗を発生させる態様で配設されることを特徴とする遊技機A9。 A9 of the game machine A8, wherein the gear damper is arranged in a manner of generating a viscous resistance with respect to the relative movement of the operation member and the regulated member.

ここで、操作部材と被規制部材とが固定され一体として揺動すると、操作部材と被規制部材との相対的な位置関係が変化しないので、操作部材がギアダンパから粘性抵抗を受けることはない。 Here, when the operating member and the regulated member are fixed and swing as one, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member does not change, so that the operating member does not receive viscous resistance from the gear damper.

これに対し、遊技機A9によれば、遊技機A8の奏する効果に加え、非伝達状態では、操作部材が揺動する場合に、操作部材と被規制部材との相対的な位置関係が変化するので、ギアダンパの粘性抵抗が操作部材に与えられる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A8, in the non-transmission state, when the operation member swings, the relative positional relationship between the operation member and the regulated member changes. Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper is given to the operating member.

従って、遊技者が操作部材に、被規制部材と操作部材とが非伝達状態を構成するほどの荷重を与えた場合にのみギアダンパの粘性抵抗が操作部材に働くようにすることができる。これにより、遊技者が操作部材を操作する際の操作感を変化させ、操作部材を適切に使用するように促すことができる。 Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper can be made to act on the operating member only when the player applies a load to the operating member so that the regulated member and the operating member form a non-transmission state. As a result, it is possible to change the feeling of operation when the player operates the operating member and encourage the player to use the operating member appropriately.

例えば、操作部材を操作する際の操作抵抗が過度に大きくなることで、遊技者にとっては操作がしづらくなり、ストレスとなる。操作部材および被規制部材が固定された状態に戻れば、操作抵抗が小さくなり、遊技者にとって操作し易くできる。 For example, when the operating resistance when operating the operating member becomes excessively large, it becomes difficult for the player to operate the operating member, which causes stress. When the operating member and the regulated member are returned to the fixed state, the operating resistance is reduced and the player can easily operate the operating member.

そのため、ストレスを回避しようとする遊技者ほど、操作部材に過荷重をかけることを避けるようになる。これにより、移動部材が破壊されることを抑制することができる。 Therefore, a player who tries to avoid stress will avoid applying an overload to the operating member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving member from being destroyed.

遊技機A1からA9のいずれかにおいて、前記移動部材を駆動させる駆動力を発生する駆動装置と、その駆動力を前記移動部材へ伝達する伝達部材と、を備え、前記移動部材が荷重を受け前記固定状態から前記非伝達状態へ変化する際に、その荷重が伝達されない位置に前記伝達部材が配設されることを特徴とする遊技機A10。 In any of the game machines A1 to A9, a driving device for generating a driving force for driving the moving member and a transmitting member for transmitting the driving force to the moving member are provided, and the moving member receives a load and said. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the transmission member is arranged at a position where the load is not transmitted when the state changes from the fixed state to the non-transmission state.

遊技機A10によれば、遊技機A1からA9のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、移動部材が荷重を受け、固定状態から非伝達状態へ変化したとしても、伝達部材にはその荷重が伝達されないので、伝達部材の破損を抑制し、伝達部材の耐久性を向上させることができる。 According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A9, even if the moving member receives a load and changes from the fixed state to the non-transmission state, the load is not transmitted to the transmission member. , Damage of the transmission member can be suppressed, and the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

なお、移動部材から荷重が伝達されない位置としては、移動部材が荷重を受ける方向に移動するとした場合に移動部材が移動する方向の反対側の位置や、移動部材が荷重を受ける方向に移動するとした場合に移動部材が移動する方向の位置であって移動部材から所定距離だけ離間する位置などが例示される。 The position where the load is not transmitted from the moving member is the position opposite to the direction in which the moving member moves when the moving member moves in the direction in which the load is received, or the position in which the moving member receives the load. In this case, a position in which the moving member moves and is separated from the moving member by a predetermined distance is exemplified.

遊技機A10において、前記移動部材が前記非伝達状態とされ、前記駆動装置から駆動力が生じる場合に、前記駆動装置の駆動力が前記操作部材に伝達され、前記被規制部材に非伝達とされることを特徴とする遊技機A11。 In the game machine A10, when the moving member is in the non-transmission state and a driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member and is not transmitted to the regulated member. A game machine A11 characterized by the fact that.

遊技機A11によれば、遊技機A10の奏する効果に加え、規制部材により移動部材の揺動が規制される場合に、駆動装置から駆動力が生じたとしても、その際生じる駆動力は操作部材の揺動に使用され、被規制部材の揺動には使用されないので、規制部材が損傷することを防止することができる。 According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of the game machine A10, when the swing of the moving member is regulated by the regulating member, even if the driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force generated at that time is the operating member. Since it is used for swinging the regulated member and not for swinging the regulated member, it is possible to prevent the regulated member from being damaged.

遊技機A2からA11において、前記移動部材が前記固定状態とされ、前記移動部材が前記第1位置に配置される場合に比較して前記第2位置に配置される場合の方が、前記操作部材を外方に張り出させる態様で構成され、前記移動部材が第2位置に配置された場合に前記移動部材が前記規制部材により移動を規制され、前記操作部材および前記被規制部材が電磁石で吸着されることにより前記固定状態が構成されることを特徴とする遊技機A12。 In the game machines A2 to A11, the operating member is arranged in the second position as compared with the case where the moving member is in the fixed state and the moving member is arranged in the first position. The moving member is restricted from moving by the regulating member when the moving member is arranged at the second position, and the operating member and the regulated member are attracted by an electromagnet. The gaming machine A12 is characterized in that the fixed state is formed by the operation.

ここで、第1位置で操作部材の揺動を規制した方が操作部材の外方への張り出し幅が小さいので、例えば、遊技機を梱包する箱を選定する際に、第1位置で操作部材が固定された状態を基準として選定した方が、箱を小さくすることができる。 Here, since the width of the operating member overhanging outward is smaller when the swing of the operating member is regulated at the first position, for example, when selecting a box for packing the game machine, the operating member is regulated at the first position. The box can be made smaller by selecting it based on the fixed state.

一方で、第2位置で操作部材の揺動を規制した状態で電源が切られると、操作部材を第2位置から移動させることができず、遊技機を梱包用の箱に入れることができないという問題点があった。 On the other hand, if the power is turned off while the swing of the operating member is restricted at the second position, the operating member cannot be moved from the second position and the gaming machine cannot be put in the packing box. There was a problem.

また、工場の検査ライン等で、操作部材が第1位置に配置された状態の幅でライン幅を決めておくと、操作部材が誤って第2位置に配置され揺動を固定された状態でラインを流れることにより、検査機等に操作部材が衝突する恐れがあるという問題点があった。 In addition, if the line width is determined by the width of the operation member placed in the first position on the inspection line of a factory or the like, the operation member is mistakenly placed in the second position and the swing is fixed. There is a problem that the operating member may collide with the inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line.

遊技機A12によれば、遊技機A2からA11のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、移動部材が操作部材を張り出させる第2位置で移動を規制されたとしても、操作部材と被規制部材とが電磁石で固定されているため、電源を落とすことで操作部材と被規制部材との固定を解くことができる。これにより、操作部材を容易に第1位置に配置することができ、梱包用の箱に遊技機を収納する事や、向上の検査ラインでの検査を容易にすることができる。 According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A11, even if the movement is restricted at the second position where the moving member projects the operating member, the operating member and the regulated member are still in contact with each other. Since it is fixed by an electromagnet, it is possible to release the fixation between the operating member and the regulated member by turning off the power supply. As a result, the operating member can be easily arranged in the first position, the game machine can be stored in the packing box, and the inspection on the improved inspection line can be facilitated.

<偏心カムがレバーと離間可能とされる技術思想の一例>
遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材と、その移動部材を移動させる駆動力を発生させる駆動装置と、その駆動装置から生じる駆動力を前記移動部材に伝達する伝達部材と、を備える遊技機であって、前記移動部材が一の方向に操作されることで、前記移動部材が、前記伝達部材から離反する方向に移動することを特徴とする遊技機B1。
<An example of the technical idea that the eccentric cam can be separated from the lever>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player, a driving device that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated from the driving device are used as the moving member. A game machine including a transmission member for transmitting to the above, wherein the moving member moves in a direction away from the transmission member when the moving member is operated in one direction. Machine B1.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材が、ギアの歯合により駆動される遊技機がある(例えば、特開2014−144218号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、移動部材の駆動中に移動部材が手動操作されると、ギアにかかる負担が大きくなり、駆動装置や伝達部材の耐久性が落ちたり、駆動により移動部材が遊技者に負荷を与えたりする恐れがあるという問題点があった。 In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is driven by a gear mesh (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014). -144218 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, if the moving member is manually operated while the moving member is being driven, the load on the gear is increased, the durability of the driving device and the transmission member is lowered, or the moving member is moved by the driving. There was a problem that there was a risk of giving a load to the player.

これに対し、遊技機B1によれば、遊技者が移動部材を一方に操作することで、移動部材が伝達部材から離反する方向に移動するので、移動部材から駆動装置や伝達部材に負荷が与えられることを抑制することができる。また、駆動により、移動部材が遊技者に負荷を与えることを抑制することができる。なお、伝達部材としては、偏心カムや、ソレノイドなどが例示される。 On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, when the player operates the moving member in one direction, the moving member moves in the direction away from the transmitting member, so that a load is applied from the moving member to the driving device and the transmitting member. It can be suppressed. In addition, the drive can prevent the moving member from giving a load to the player. Examples of the transmission member include an eccentric cam and a solenoid.

遊技機B1において、前記伝達部材が、第1軸に偏心して軸支され、前記第1軸を中心に回転される部材から構成されることを特徴とする遊技機B2。 In the game machine B1, the game machine B2 is characterized in that the transmission member is eccentrically supported by a first axis and is composed of a member that is rotated about the first axis.

ここで、移動部材が一の方向へ操作されることで移動部材と伝達部材とが離反されるので、逆に移動部材を他の方向へ操作すると、移動部材と伝達部材とが衝突する。移動部材の移動幅が大きくなるほど伝達部材の腕長さが長くなることが多い。この場合、衝突により伝達部材が破損する恐れがある。 Here, when the moving member is operated in one direction, the moving member and the transmitting member are separated from each other. Therefore, when the moving member is operated in the other direction, the moving member and the transmitting member collide with each other. As the moving width of the moving member increases, the arm length of the transmitting member often becomes longer. In this case, the transmission member may be damaged due to the collision.

これに対し、遊技機B2によれば、遊技機B1の奏する効果に加え、伝達部材が偏心カムから構成されるので、第1軸から外形までの距離が長い部分で移動部材を駆動させる際の移動量を確保しつつ、移動部材と衝突する際には第1軸から外形までの距離が短い部分を移動部材に向けた姿勢をとることで、第1軸から移動部材と伝達部材とが衝突する部分の伝達部材の腕長さを短くすることができる。これにより、伝達部材が破損することを防止することができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, since the transmission member is composed of an eccentric cam, when the moving member is driven in a portion where the distance from the first axis to the outer shape is long. When colliding with the moving member while ensuring the amount of movement, the moving member and the transmitting member collide from the first axis by taking a posture in which the portion where the distance from the first axis to the outer shape is short is directed toward the moving member. It is possible to shorten the arm length of the transmission member of the portion to be used. This makes it possible to prevent the transmission member from being damaged.

遊技機B2において、前記移動部材を特定の方向に移動させる付勢力を発生する第1付勢部材を備え、前記特定の方向が、前記移動部材および前記伝達部材を近接させる方向であることを特徴とする遊技機B3。 The game machine B2 includes a first urging member that generates an urging force that moves the moving member in a specific direction, and the specific direction is a direction that brings the moving member and the transmission member close to each other. Game machine B3.

遊技機B3によれば、遊技機B2の奏する効果に加え、第1付勢部材の付勢力により、移動部材が伝達部材に押し付けられるので、伝達部材を第1軸中心に回転させることで、移動部材に往復移動を行わせることができる。これにより、遊技者の注目を移動部材に集めやすくできる。 According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the moving member is pressed against the transmission member by the urging force of the first urging member. Therefore, the moving member is moved by rotating the transmission member around the first axis. The member can be reciprocated. This makes it easier for the player to draw the attention of the moving member.

遊技機B3において、前記移動部材が前記第1軸とは異なる軸であって左右方向に延設される第2軸で揺動可能に軸支され、前記移動部材が、遊技者が操作する操作部材を備え、前記伝達部材が前記第2軸を挟んで前記操作部材の反対側であって、かつ前記移動部材の下側に配設されることを特徴とする遊技機B4。 In the game machine B3, the moving member is swingably supported by a second axis that is different from the first axis and extends in the left-right direction, and the moving member is operated by the player. A gaming machine B4 comprising a member, wherein the transmission member is arranged on the opposite side of the operating member with the second shaft interposed therebetween and below the moving member.

遊技機B4によれば、遊技機B3の奏する効果に加え、第2軸が左右方向に延設され、レバーが前倒れする方向に揺動可能とされた状態で、伝達部材が移動部材の下側かつ第2軸を挟んで操作部材の反対側に配設されるので、遊技者が操作部材を押し下げ操作する場合に、伝達部材に荷重が与えられることを抑制することができる。これにより、伝達部材の耐久性を向上させることができる。 According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the transmission member is under the moving member in a state where the second axis is extended in the left-right direction and the lever can swing in the direction of tilting forward. Since it is arranged on the side and on the opposite side of the operating member with the second shaft in between, it is possible to suppress the application of a load to the transmitting member when the player pushes down the operating member. Thereby, the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

遊技機B4において、前記操作部材に、遊技者に対する演出を行う演出部材が配設されることを特徴とする遊技機B5。 In the game machine B4, the game machine B5 is characterized in that the operation member is provided with an effect member for producing an effect on the player.

遊技機B5によれば、遊技機B4の奏する効果に加え、操作部材に、遊技者に対する演出を行う演出部材が配設されるので、操作部材に遊技者の注目を集めることができる。 According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4, since the operation member is provided with the effect member for producing the effect on the player, the operation member can attract the attention of the player.

なお、遊技者に対する演出を行う演出装置としては、基盤に配設されたLEDなどの発光装置や、振動を生じる振動装置等が例示される。 Examples of the effect device for producing the effect on the player include a light emitting device such as an LED arranged on the substrate, a vibration device that generates vibration, and the like.

遊技機B5において、前記演出部材は、少なくとも振動を生じる振動装置を備え、その振動装置が振動することにより前記操作部材に加えられる荷重が、前記移動部材を前記伝達部材から離反させる方向に向けられることを特徴とする遊技機B6。 In the game machine B5, the effect member includes at least a vibrating device that generates vibration, and the load applied to the operating member due to the vibration of the vibrating device is directed in a direction that separates the moving member from the transmitting member. A game machine B6 characterized by this.

ここで、操作部材に演出装置が配設される場合、移動部材の操作部材側の重量が重くなるため、第1付勢部材の付勢力が大きく必要となる。そのため、伝達部材にかけられる負荷が大きくなる恐れがある。 Here, when the effect device is arranged on the operating member, the weight of the moving member on the operating member side becomes heavy, so that a large urging force of the first urging member is required. Therefore, the load applied to the transmission member may increase.

これに対し、遊技機B6によれば、遊技機B5の奏する効果に加え、演出部材が少なくとも振動を生じる振動装置を備え、その振動装置が振動することにより操作部材に加えられる荷重が、移動部材を伝達部材から離反させる方向に向けられるので、振動装置の振動により、移動部材から伝達部材へかけられる負荷を減少させることができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the effect member is provided with a vibrating device that generates at least vibration, and the load applied to the operating member due to the vibration of the vibrating device is a moving member. Is directed away from the transmission member, so that the load applied from the moving member to the transmission member can be reduced by the vibration of the vibrating device.

遊技機B6において、前記操作部材が内部を中空とした球状に構成され、その操作部材の略中央部に前記振動装置が配設され、その振動装置によって振動する振動部が、前記操作部材の外殻と剛体として連結されることを特徴とする遊技機B7。 In the game machine B6, the operating member is formed in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, the vibrating device is arranged at a substantially central portion of the operating member, and the vibrating portion vibrated by the vibrating device is outside the operating member. A game machine B7 characterized in that it is connected to a shell as a rigid body.

遊技機B7によれば、遊技機B6の奏する効果に加え、操作部材が内部を中空とした球状に構成され、その操作部材の略中央部に振動装置が配設されるので、操作部材の外形は小さく抑えながら、振動装置の大きさを確保することができる。その上で、振動装置によって振動する振動部が操作部材の内部に隠されるのではなく、操作部材の外殻と剛体として連結されるので、操作部材を操作する遊技者の手指に直に振動を伝えることができる。従って、振動装置の演出効果を向上させることができる。 According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6, the operation member is formed in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, and the vibration device is arranged in the substantially central portion of the operation member. It is possible to secure the size of the vibrating device while keeping it small. On top of that, the vibrating part vibrated by the vibrating device is not hidden inside the operating member, but is connected to the outer shell of the operating member as a rigid body, so that the vibration is directly applied to the fingers of the player who operates the operating member. I can tell. Therefore, the effect of the vibrating device can be improved.

遊技機B3からB7のいずれかにおいて、前記操作部材は下方へ向けた押し込み動作を可能とする押し込み部材を備え、その押し込み部材を押し込む方向軸が、前記第2軸を挟んで前記第1軸の反対側に配置されることを特徴とする遊技機B8。 In any of the game machines B3 to B7, the operating member includes a pushing member that enables a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is the first axis with the second axis interposed therebetween. A game machine B8 characterized in that it is arranged on the opposite side.

遊技機B8によれば、遊技機B3からB7のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、操作部材は下方へ向けた押し込み動作を可能とする押し込み部材を備え、その押し込み部材を押し込む方向軸が、第2軸を挟んで第1軸の反対側に配置されるので、遊技者が押し込み部材を押し込むことによって、移動部材が伝達部材から離反される方向に荷重を受け、伝達部材に移動部材からかけられる荷重を減少させることができる。 According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B3 to B7, the operating member is provided with a pushing member that enables a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is a second. Since it is arranged on the opposite side of the first axis with the shaft in between, when the player pushes the pushing member, the moving member receives a load in the direction away from the transmitting member, and the load applied to the transmitting member from the moving member. Can be reduced.

遊技機B8において、前記押し込み部材を押し込み可能な押し込み可能状態と、前記押し込み部材が変位不能に固定され押し込み不能である押し込み不能状態とが構成されることを特徴とする遊技機B9。 The game machine B8 is characterized in that a pushable state in which the push member can be pushed and a pushable state in which the push member is fixed so as not to be displaced and cannot be pushed are configured.

遊技機B9によれば、遊技機B8の奏する効果に加え、押し込み部材を押し込み可能な押し込み可能状態と、押し込み部材が変位不能に固定され押し込み不能である押し込み不能状態とが構成されるので、遊技者の行う操作によって移動部材が受ける影響を遊技機側で切替ることができる。 According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of the game machine B8, a pushable state in which the push member can be pushed in and a pushable state in which the push member is fixed in a non-displaceable manner and cannot be pushed are configured. The effect on the moving member can be switched on the gaming machine side by the operation performed by the person.

例えば、遊技者が押し込み部材を断続的に繰り返し押し込む(連打する)場合、押し込み部材が押し込まれた状態から戻る際に、その反作用で、移動部材が伝達部材へ近接する方向に負荷を受ける。そのため、伝達部材が破損する恐れがある。 For example, when a player repeatedly pushes (continuously hits) the pushing member intermittently, when the pushing member returns from the pushed state, the moving member receives a load in a direction close to the transmission member due to the reaction. Therefore, the transmission member may be damaged.

一方、押し込み不能状態とされる場合、遊技者の押し込み操作に対して操作部材全体が押し下げられるので、それにより移動部材も伝達部材から離反する方向に移動する。従って、遊技者が押し込み部材を連打しても、操作部材が上方へ付勢力により戻ることにより伝達部材と移動部材とが衝突するという事態を抑制することができる。 On the other hand, when the pushing-in impossible state is set, the entire operating member is pushed down in response to the pushing operation of the player, so that the moving member also moves in the direction away from the transmission member. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the pushing member, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the transmitting member and the moving member collide with each other due to the operating member returning upward by the urging force.

なお、押し込み不能状態を構成する方法としては、鉤状の爪で押し込み部材を係止する方法や、直線的な往復運動をするボイスコイルモータなどの振動装置により押し込み部材を終端位置まで張り出させる(一方向に負荷をかけ続ける)方法等が例示される。ボイスコイルモータなどの振動装置により押し込み部材を終端位置まで張り出させる方法によれば、その振動装置によって押し込み部材を振動させることと、押し込み部材を押し込み不能状態とすることとの両方の作用を生じさせることができる。 In addition, as a method of configuring the push-in impossible state, a method of locking the push member with a hook-shaped claw or a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor that makes a linear reciprocating motion is used to extend the push member to the terminal position. An example is a method (continuing to apply a load in one direction). According to the method of projecting the pushing member to the terminal position by a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor, the vibrating device causes both the action of vibrating the pushing member and the action of making the pushing member in a push-in impossible state. Can be made to.

遊技機B4からB9のいずれかにおいて、前記第1軸と前記第2軸とが平行に配置され、前記伝達部材の回転方向が、前記第2軸を挟んで前記第1軸から離間する側が前記移動部材に対向する方向とされることを特徴とする遊技機B10。 In any of the game machines B4 to B9, the first axis and the second axis are arranged in parallel, and the side in which the rotation direction of the transmission member is separated from the first axis across the second axis is said. A game machine B10 characterized in that the direction is opposed to a moving member.

遊技機B10によれば、遊技機B4からB9のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、伝達部材の回転方向が、第2軸を挟んで第1軸から遠い側で移動部材に対向する方向とされるので、伝達部材が移動部材に対向して移動する場合には、移動部材から伝達部材に与えられる荷重が抑制される(第2軸から移動部材と伝達部材との当接位置までの距離が長くなる)ので、伝達部材が移動部材に近接する方向に移動するとしても伝達部材が破損する可能性を低くすることができる。 According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B4 to B9, the rotation direction of the transmission member is a direction facing the moving member on the side far from the first axis with the second axis in between. Therefore, when the transmission member moves facing the moving member, the load applied to the transmission member from the moving member is suppressed (the distance from the second axis to the contact position between the moving member and the transmission member is long). Therefore, even if the transmission member moves in a direction close to the moving member, the possibility that the transmission member is damaged can be reduced.

遊技機B1からB10のいずれかにおいて、前記伝達部材は第1軸で軸支され、前記駆動装置から駆動力を伝達される回転ギアと、前記第1軸に偏心して軸支されると共に前記移動部材に当接される偏心カムと、を備え、その偏心カムに対して前記回転ギアが固定される固定状態と、前記偏心カムに対して前記回転ギアが相対移動可能な非伝達状態とを構成可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機B11。 In any of the game machines B1 to B10, the transmission member is pivotally supported by the first shaft, and is pivotally supported and eccentrically supported by the rotating gear to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving device and the movement. An eccentric cam that comes into contact with a member is provided, and a fixed state in which the rotary gear is fixed to the eccentric cam and a non-transmission state in which the rotary gear can move relative to the eccentric cam are configured. A game machine B11 characterized in that it is possible.

遊技機B11によれば、遊技機B1からB10のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、固定状態では、伝達部材の回転により移動部材を揺動させることができると共に、偏心カムが移動部材から閾値以上の荷重を受ける場合には、偏心カムおよび回転ギアを非伝達状態とすることで、移動部材から偏心カムに加えられる荷重を逃がすことができる。これにより、偏心カムが破損することを防止することができる。 According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B10, in the fixed state, the moving member can be swung by the rotation of the transmission member, and the eccentric cam is equal to or higher than the threshold value from the moving member. When receiving a load, the load applied to the eccentric cam can be released from the moving member by setting the eccentric cam and the rotary gear in a non-transmissive state. This makes it possible to prevent the eccentric cam from being damaged.

なお、偏心カムと回転ギアとが非伝達状態を構成可能とされる場合とは、例えば、磁力によって偏心カムと回転ギアとが吸着固定される場合や、偏心カムと回転ギアとが周方向の摩擦で嵌合している場合等が例示される。 The case where the eccentric cam and the rotary gear can be configured in a non-transmission state is, for example, the case where the eccentric cam and the rotary gear are attracted and fixed by magnetic force, or the case where the eccentric cam and the rotary gear are in the circumferential direction. An example is the case where the gears are fitted by friction.

<移動部材を固定するロック部材が移動部材と同期動作される技術思想の一例>
遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材と、その移動部材を駆動させる駆動力を発生する駆動装置と、第1軸に偏心して軸支されると共に前記駆動装置の駆動力を前記移動部材に伝達する伝達部材と、前記移動部材の揺動を規制する規制部材と、を備える遊技機であって、前記規制部材は、前記移動部材の揺動を規制可能な待機状態と、前記移動部材の揺動の規制を解除する解除状態と、を構成可能とされ、前記伝達部材と前記規制部材とが前記駆動装置の駆動力により同期して動作することを特徴とする遊技機C1。
<Example of technical concept in which the lock member that fixes the moving member is operated in synchronization with the moving member>
A moving member that moves between the first position and the second position by being operated by the player, a driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving member, and an eccentric support on the first axis. A gaming machine including a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the drive device to the moving member and a regulating member that regulates the swing of the moving member, wherein the regulating member causes the moving member to swing. A regulateable standby state and a release state for releasing the restriction on the swing of the moving member can be configured, and the transmission member and the regulating member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. A game machine C1 characterized by.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材が、駆動装置で駆動される偏心カム状の伝達部材により揺動され、その偏心カム状の伝達部材に近接する方向に移動部材を移動させる付勢力を受け、移動部材の揺動の途中で移動部材の揺動を規制すると共に所定のタイミングで移動部材の揺動の規制を解除する規制部材を備える遊技機がある(例えば、特開2013−244108号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、移動部材の揺動の規制を解除するのに合わせて、偏心カム状の伝達部材の短径側を移動部材と当接する側に向けることで、移動部材と偏心カム状の伝達部材とが衝突した場合の伝達部材の破損を防止できるが、何らかの理由で規制部材が誤作動した場合に、偏心カム状の伝達部材の姿勢を変化させることができず、偏心カム状の伝達部材が長径側で移動部材と衝突し、偏心カム状の伝達部材が破損する恐れがあるという問題点があった。 In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is oscillated by an eccentric cam-shaped transmitting member driven by a driving device. In response to the urging force that moves the moving member in the direction close to the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, the swing of the moving member is regulated during the swing of the moving member, and the swing of the moving member is regulated at a predetermined timing. There is a gaming machine provided with a restricting member to be released (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-244108). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the minor axis side of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member is directed to the side that comes into contact with the moving member in accordance with the release of the restriction on the swing of the moving member. It is possible to prevent damage to the transmission member when it collides with the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, but if the regulating member malfunctions for some reason, the posture of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member cannot be changed and the eccentricity is eccentric. There is a problem that the cam-shaped transmission member may collide with the moving member on the major axis side and the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member may be damaged.

これに対し、遊技機C1によれば、移動部材に駆動力を伝達する伝達部材と、移動部材の揺動を規制する規制部材とが駆動装置の駆動力により同期して動作するので、規制部材が解除状態とされる際の伝達部材の姿勢を機械的に定めることができる。これにより、伝達部材の強度の高い側(短径側)を移動部材へ向けた状態で移動部材と伝達部材とを当接させることができるので、伝達部材の耐久性を向上させることができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force to the moving member and the regulating member that regulates the swing of the moving member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. The posture of the transmission member when is in the released state can be mechanically determined. As a result, the moving member and the transmitting member can be brought into contact with each other with the high-strength side (minor diameter side) of the transmitting member facing the moving member, so that the durability of the transmitting member can be improved.

遊技機C1において、前記規制部材は、前記移動部材の揺動の規制を解除する位相に限って前記伝達部材と同期動作され、前記伝達部材との同期動作が解除された場合には、前記規制部材は前記待機状態とされ、前記移動部材が所定位置まで移動することで前記移動部材の揺動が前記規制部材に規制されることを特徴とする遊技機C2。 In the game machine C1, the restricting member is synchronously operated with the transmission member only in the phase in which the regulation of the swing of the moving member is released, and when the synchronous operation with the transmission member is released, the regulation is performed. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the member is put into the standby state, and the swing of the moving member is restricted by the regulating member when the moving member moves to a predetermined position.

遊技機C2によれば、遊技機C1の奏する効果に加え、規制部材が移動部材の揺動の規制を解除した後は、駆動装置の駆動力を専ら移動部材の揺動に利用することができるので、伝達部材を回転させる際に規制部材が一緒に動くことにより移動部材と衝突する等の不具合が生じることを防止することができる。 According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, after the regulating member releases the restriction on the swing of the moving member, the driving force of the driving device can be exclusively used for swinging the moving member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the moving member due to the regulation member moving together when the transmission member is rotated.

また、同期駆動中に遊技者が移動部材を操作した場合にも、所定位置に移動部材を配置することにより移動部材の揺動を規制部材により規制することができるので、繰り返し、移動部材と規制部材との同期駆動(移動部材の揺動規制を解除すること)を行うことができる。 Further, even when the player operates the moving member during the synchronous drive, the swing of the moving member can be regulated by the regulating member by arranging the moving member at a predetermined position. Synchronous drive with the member (release of the swing regulation of the moving member) can be performed.

遊技機C2において、前記規制部材が前記待機状態とされる場合に、前記移動部材の一端が前記規制部材に乗り上げる態様で前記規制部材を移動させることで、前記移動部材の揺動が規制され、前記移動部材は、前記伝達部材の移動態様により、前記所定位置を経由しない第1動作と、前記所定位置へ至る第2動作と、を実行可能とされ、前記規制部材は、前記移動部材が前記第1動作を実行する場合に、前記移動部材の外形部の揺動軌跡から退避して凹設される凹設部を備えることを特徴とする遊技機C3。 In the game machine C2, when the regulating member is put into the standby state, the swing of the moving member is restricted by moving the regulating member in such a manner that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member. The moving member is capable of performing a first operation that does not pass through the predetermined position and a second operation that reaches the predetermined position, depending on the movement mode of the transmission member. The gaming machine C3 is provided with a recessed portion that is recessed from the swing locus of the outer shape portion of the moving member when the first operation is executed.

移動部材の一端が規制部材に乗り上げる態様で規制部材を移動させることで移動部材の揺動方向が規制される場合、移動部材に揺動方向の規制を与える前段階として、移動部材に対して規制部材から抵抗が加えられる。一方で、第1動作のように、揺動方向の規制を与えられることを目的としない動作の際にまで規制部材から抵抗が加わると、移動部材の駆動力が余計に必要となる。 When the swing direction of the moving member is regulated by moving the regulating member so that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member, the moving member is regulated as a preliminary step of restricting the swinging direction of the moving member. Resistance is applied from the member. On the other hand, if resistance is applied from the restricting member even during an operation that is not intended to regulate the swing direction, such as the first operation, an extra driving force of the moving member is required.

これに対し、遊技機C3によれば、遊技機C2の奏する効果に加え、移動部材が第1動作を実行する場合に、凹設部が移動部材から退避して凹設されるので、規制部材から移動部材へ抵抗が加えられることを防止することができる。これによって、伝達部材にかけられる負荷を抑制することができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, when the moving member executes the first operation, the recessed portion is retracted from the moving member and is recessed. It is possible to prevent the resistance from being applied to the moving member. As a result, the load applied to the transmission member can be suppressed.

遊技機C1からC3のいずれかにおいて、前記移動部材を前記伝達部材へ近接する方向へ揺動させる付勢力を発生する第1付勢装置を備え、前記伝達部材は前記第1軸を中心に回転する偏心カムから構成され、前記規制部材による前記移動部材の揺動の規制が解除され、前記移動部材が前記伝達部材へ向けて付勢力で移動される場合に、前記伝達部材のカム部分の内で、前記移動部材と当接する側の側面である第1側面が、前記第1軸に軸支される前記伝達部材の一部分である円筒部に接する態様で構成され、前記移動部材が前記円筒部に当接し始めた際に前記第1側面が前記移動部材から退避して配置されることを特徴とする遊技機C4。 In any of the game machines C1 to C3, a first urging device for generating an urging force for swinging the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member is provided, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. It is composed of an eccentric cam, and when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released and the moving member is moved toward the transmitting member by a tangential force, the inside of the cam portion of the transmitting member The first side surface, which is the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the moving member, is configured to be in contact with a cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmitting member pivotally supported by the first axis, and the moving member is formed by the cylindrical portion. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the first side surface is retracted from the moving member when it starts to come into contact with the moving member.

遊技機C4によれば、遊技機C1からC3のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、規制部材による移動部材の揺動の規制が解除され、移動部材が伝達部材へ向けて付勢力で移動する場合に、伝達部材のカム部分の内で、伝達部材の移動部材と当接する側の側面である第1側面が、第1軸に軸支される伝達部材の一部分である円筒部に接する態様で構成され、移動部材が円筒部に当接し始めた際に第1側面が移動部材から退避して配置されるので、移動部材の揺動変位を最大に確保することができる。従って、規制部材による移動部材の揺動の規制を解除した直後において移動部材の揺動変位を最大に確保する同期状態を構成することができる。 According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released and the moving member moves toward the transmission member by a tangential force. In the cam portion of the transmission member, the first side surface, which is the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the moving member of the transmission member, is configured to be in contact with the cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member pivotally supported by the first axis. Since the first side surface is retracted from the moving member when the moving member starts to come into contact with the cylindrical portion, the swing displacement of the moving member can be secured to the maximum. Therefore, it is possible to configure a synchronous state in which the maximum swing displacement of the moving member is secured immediately after the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released.

遊技機C4において、前記第1側面の前記円筒部の反対側の端部が、前記移動部材と前記伝達部材との当たり始めから当接することを特徴とする遊技機C5。 In the game machine C4, the game machine C5 is characterized in that an end portion of the first side surface opposite to the cylindrical portion comes into contact with the moving member and the transmission member from the beginning of contact.

遊技機C5によれば、遊技機C4の奏する効果に加え、移動部材の揺動動作の速度を向上させることができる。 According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the speed of the swinging motion of the moving member can be improved.

ここで、円形の偏心カムの長径部分に移動部材が偏心カムの回転方向から当たると、偏心カムにかかるモーメントが大となり、駆動装置にかかる回転方向の荷重が大きくなる。そのため、いつ移動部材に伝達部材が衝突するか分からないときには、大径部分は伝達部材の回転方向で移動部材と当たらないようにすることが良い(円形の偏心カム)。一方で、いつ移動部材と伝達部材とが当たるのか把握できるのであれば、大外径部分で移動部材を揺動させた方が、移動部材の揺動速度を大とできるので、演出効果を上げることができる。 Here, when the moving member hits the major axis portion of the circular eccentric cam from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam, the moment applied to the eccentric cam becomes large, and the load applied to the drive device in the rotation direction becomes large. Therefore, when it is not known when the transmission member collides with the moving member, it is preferable that the large diameter portion does not hit the moving member in the rotational direction of the transmitting member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the moving member and the transmitting member hit each other, it is better to swing the moving member at the large outer diameter portion because the swinging speed of the moving member can be increased, so that the effect is improved. be able to.

同期駆動であれば、移動部材が伝達部材に衝突するタイミングを機械的に合わせられる。従って、移動部材が伝達部材に当接する際には第1側面を若干退避させ、衝突後のタイミングで第1側面を移動部材に当接させることができ、移動部材の揺動動作の速度を向上させることができる。 In the case of synchronous drive, the timing at which the moving member collides with the transmission member can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the moving member comes into contact with the transmission member, the first side surface can be slightly retracted, and the first side surface can be brought into contact with the moving member at the timing after the collision, improving the speed of the swinging motion of the moving member. Can be made to.

遊技機C1からC3のいずれかにおいて、前記移動部材を前記伝達部材へ近接する方向へ揺動させる付勢力を発生する第1付勢装置を備え、前記伝達部材は前記第1軸を中心に回転する偏心カムから構成され、前記規制部材による前記移動部材の揺動の規制が解除される際に、前記伝達部材が前記移動部材に当接し、前記伝達部材の回転に追従して前記移動部材が揺動されることを特徴とする遊技機C6。 In any of the game machines C1 to C3, a first urging device for generating an urging force for swinging the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member is provided, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. When the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, the transmitting member comes into contact with the moving member, and the moving member follows the rotation of the transmitting member. A game machine C6 characterized by being rocked.

遊技機C6によれば、遊技機C1からC3のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、移動部材を伝達部材へ近接する方向へ揺動させる付勢力を発生する第1付勢装置を備え、伝達部材は第1軸を中心に回転する偏心カムから構成され、規制部材による移動部材の揺動の規制が解除される際に、伝達部材が移動部材に当接し、伝達部材の回転に追従して前記移動部材が揺動するので、遊技者に移動部材の揺動の規制が解除されるタイミングを気付きにくくさせることができる。これにより、遊技者が遊技に集中しやすくすることができる。 According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, the transmission member includes a first urging device that generates an urging force that swings the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member. It is composed of an eccentric cam that rotates around the first axis, and when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, the transmitting member comes into contact with the moving member and moves following the rotation of the transmitting member. Since the member swings, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the timing when the restriction on the swing of the moving member is released. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the game.

<移動部材の先端に配置される操作部が振動する技術思想の一例>
遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材と、その移動部材に配設され振動を発生可能とされる振動装置と、を備え、前記振動装置の振動の方向と、前記移動部材の長手方向とが互いに傾斜することを特徴とする遊技機D1。
<Example of technical concept in which the operation unit placed at the tip of the moving member vibrates>
The vibration of the vibration device is provided with a moving member that moves between the first position and the second position by being operated by the player, and a vibration device that is arranged on the moving member and is capable of generating vibration. D1 is a gaming machine D1 characterized in that the direction of the moving member and the longitudinal direction of the moving member are inclined to each other.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材が、振動装置を備える遊技機がある(例えば、特開2001−120741号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、振動装置の振動が遊技機に伝達されることで遊技機が揺れる等の不具合が生じることを防ぐため、振動を大きくする事が困難であるという問題点があった。 In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is provided with a vibration device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-120741). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the vibration in order to prevent problems such as the game machine from shaking due to the vibration of the vibration device being transmitted to the game machine. there were.

これに対し、遊技機D1によれば、移動部材の長手方向と、その移動部材に配設される振動装置の振動の方向とが傾斜するので、振動装置が発生させる振動を、移動部材の長手方向に沿った方向成分と、その方向成分の垂直方向に沿った方向成分とに分解することができ、遊技機に伝達される振動を抑制することができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the longitudinal direction of the moving member and the vibration direction of the vibrating device arranged on the moving member are inclined, so that the vibration generated by the vibrating device is generated by the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It can be decomposed into a directional component along the direction and a directional component along the vertical direction of the directional component, and vibration transmitted to the game machine can be suppressed.

なお、振動装置としては、直線方向の振動を構成するボイスコイルモータや、偏心した重りを回転させることで振動を生じるバイブレータ等が例示される。ボイスコイルモータの場合、振動の方向とは、ボイスコイルモータが往復動作する方向を意味し、バイブレータの場合、振動の方向とは、重りの回転軸と垂直な方向を意味する。 Examples of the vibrating device include a voice coil motor that constitutes vibration in the linear direction, a vibrator that generates vibration by rotating an eccentric weight, and the like. In the case of a voice coil motor, the direction of vibration means the direction in which the voice coil motor reciprocates, and in the case of a vibrator, the direction of vibration means the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the weight.

遊技機D1において、前記移動部材を揺動させる駆動力を発生させる駆動装置と、その駆動装置が発生する駆動力を前記移動部材へ伝達する伝達部材と、を備え、前記振動装置は直線方向の振動を発生する装置から構成され、前記振動装置の振動により前記移動部材が移動される方向の反対側に前記伝達部材が配設されることを特徴とする遊技機D2。 The game machine D1 includes a driving device that generates a driving force that causes the moving member to swing, and a transmission member that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device to the moving member, and the vibrating device is in a linear direction. The gaming machine D2 is composed of a device that generates vibration, and the transmission member is arranged on the side opposite to the direction in which the moving member is moved by the vibration of the vibrating device.

遊技機D2によれば、遊技機D1の奏する効果に加え、振動装置が動作する際に生じる反作用が移動部材を伝達部材から離反させる方向に向けられるので、振動装置の振動により、移動部材を伝達部材から離反する方向に揺動させることができる。これにより、振動装置の振動により伝達部材が負荷を受けることを抑制することができる。 According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the reaction generated when the vibrating device operates is directed in the direction of separating the moving member from the transmitting member, so that the moving member is transmitted by the vibration of the vibrating device. It can be swung in a direction away from the member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission member from receiving a load due to the vibration of the vibrating device.

遊技機D1又はD2において、前記振動装置は直線方向の振動を発生する装置から構成され、前記振動装置が、前記移動部材に配設される第2軸で軸支され、前記振動装置の振動の中心軸が、前記第2軸を通る態様で配置され、その第2軸に振動を吸収する緩衝部材が配設されることを特徴とする遊技機D3。 In the game machine D1 or D2, the vibrating device is composed of a device that generates vibration in the linear direction, and the vibrating device is pivotally supported by a second axis arranged on the moving member to generate vibration of the vibrating device. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that a central axis is arranged so as to pass through the second axis, and a cushioning member that absorbs vibration is arranged on the second axis.

遊技機D3によれば、遊技機D1又はD2の奏する効果に加え、振動装置が移動部材に配設される第2軸で軸支され、振動装置は直線方向の振動を発生する装置から構成され、振動装置の振動の中心軸が、第2軸を通る態様で配置され、第2軸に緩衝部材が配設されるので、緩衝部材により振動の衝撃を緩和することができる。これにより、移動部材へ伝わる振動を抑制することができ、遊技機に伝わる振動を抑制することができる。 According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is pivotally supported by the second axis arranged on the moving member, and the vibration device is composed of a device that generates vibration in the linear direction. Since the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device is arranged so as to pass through the second axis and the cushioning member is arranged on the second axis, the shock of vibration can be mitigated by the cushioning member. As a result, the vibration transmitted to the moving member can be suppressed, and the vibration transmitted to the game machine can be suppressed.

遊技機D3において、前記移動部材は遊技者が押し込み操作する押し込み部材を備え、その押し込み部材を押し込み操作することにより前記第2軸の回転抵抗が上昇する態様で構成されることを特徴とする遊技機D4。 The game machine D3 is characterized in that the moving member includes a pushing member that the player pushes in, and the rotation resistance of the second shaft is increased by pushing the pushing member. Machine D4.

遊技機D4によれば、遊技機D3の奏する効果に加え、移動部材は遊技者が押し込み操作する押し込み部材を備え、その押し込み部材を押し込み操作することにより第2軸の回転抵抗が上昇する態様で構成されるので、遊技者が押し込み部材を押し込み操作する場合に特に、振動装置の回転動作を抑制し、振動成分を大きく確保することができる。これにより、振動装置が第2軸で回転し易くなる状態と、振動装置が振動成分を大きく確保する状態とを遊技者の操作により切り替えることができる。 According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, the moving member is provided with a pushing member that the player pushes in, and the rotation resistance of the second axis is increased by pushing the pushing member. Since it is configured, it is possible to suppress the rotational operation of the vibrating device and secure a large vibration component, particularly when the player pushes the pushing member. As a result, the state in which the vibrating device can easily rotate on the second axis and the state in which the vibrating device secures a large vibration component can be switched by the operation of the player.

遊技機D4において、前記振動装置が、前記押し込み部材と剛体として連結されることを特徴とする遊技機D5。 In the game machine D4, the game machine D5 is characterized in that the vibrating device is connected to the pushing member as a rigid body.

遊技機D5によれば、遊技機D4の奏する効果に加え、振動装置が押し込み部材と剛体として連結されるので、遊技者が、押し込み部材を通して振動装置の振動を体感することができる。そのため、押し込み部材を押し込んでいないときには振動装置を振動および第2軸を中心として揺動させて遊技者の注目を振動装置に集め、一方で、押し込み部材を押し込む際には、振動装置の揺動を抑えることで遊技者が感じる直線方向の振動を大きくすることができる。従って、状況(遊技者が押し込み部材を押し込んでいるか否か)に応じて、振動装置の挙動を変化させることができる。 According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the vibrating device is connected to the pushing member as a rigid body, so that the player can experience the vibration of the vibrating device through the pushing member. Therefore, when the pushing member is not pushed, the vibrating device vibrates and swings around the second axis to attract the player's attention to the vibrating device, while when pushing the pushing member, the vibrating device swings. It is possible to increase the vibration in the linear direction felt by the player by suppressing the vibration. Therefore, the behavior of the vibrating device can be changed according to the situation (whether or not the player is pushing the pushing member).

遊技機D1又はD2において、前記振動装置が、前記移動部材に配設される第2軸で軸支され、前記振動装置の振動の中心軸が、第2軸と離間した位置を通る態様で配置されることを特徴とする遊技機D6。 In the game machine D1 or D2, the vibrating device is pivotally supported by a second axis arranged on the moving member, and the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device is arranged so as to pass through a position separated from the second axis. A game machine D6 characterized by being played.

移動部材と振動装置との連結を軸支としたときに、振動装置の振動の中心軸と軸支位置とを一致させることで遊技者側に伝える振動を大きくすることができる。一方で、この場合、遊技機にも大きな振動が伝わってしまう。そのため、締結ネジの緩みや部材の劣化が早い段階で生じて、メンテナンス周期が早まるという問題点があった。 When the connection between the moving member and the vibrating device is used as a shaft support, the vibration transmitted to the player side can be increased by matching the central axis of the vibration of the vibrating device with the shaft support position. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the game machine. Therefore, there is a problem that loosening of the fastening screw and deterioration of the member occur at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

これに対し、遊技機D6によれば、遊技機D1又はD2の奏する効果に加え、振動装置の回転軸と、振動装置の振動の中心軸とをずらすことで、振動装置を回転させることに振動装置の振動を利用することができ、遊技機に伝わる振動を少なくすることができる(振動のエネルギーが振動装置の回転に使用される)。加えて、振動装置の振動により、振動装置を揺動させることで演出効果を向上させることができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the rotating axis of the vibrating device and the central axis of the vibration of the vibrating device are shifted to rotate the vibrating device. The vibration of the device can be utilized, and the vibration transmitted to the game machine can be reduced (the energy of the vibration is used for the rotation of the vibration device). In addition, the effect of the vibrating device can be improved by vibrating the vibrating device.

遊技機D6において、前記振動装置の振動を検出する検出装置を備え、前記振動装置は、遊技者が把持する操作部材に配設されることを特徴とする遊技機D7。 The game machine D6 includes a detection device for detecting the vibration of the vibration device, and the vibration device is arranged on an operation member held by the player.

遊技機D7によれば、遊技機D6の奏する効果に加え、遊技者が把持する操作部材に振動装置が配設され、振動装置の振動を検出する検出装置を備えるため、振動装置が振動している最中に操作部材を把持することで振動を抑え、振動装置が検出する信号を変化させることができる。これにより、遊技者が操作部材を把持しているか(移動部材を操作する準備段階にあるか)を検出することができる。 According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, a vibration device is provided on the operating member gripped by the player, and the vibration device is provided with a detection device for detecting the vibration of the vibration device. By grasping the operating member during the operation, vibration can be suppressed and the signal detected by the vibration device can be changed. This makes it possible to detect whether the player is holding the operating member (whether it is in the preparatory stage for operating the moving member).

<煽りを行う移動部材の入力タイミングを補助する技術思想の一例>
遊技者が入力操作する入力装置を備え、その入力装置は遊技者に対して近接離反する方向に駆動されると共に入力操作を行う部分である入力部を備えることを特徴とする遊技機E1。
<An example of a technical idea that assists the input timing of moving members that perform fanning>
The gaming machine E1 is provided with an input device for the player to perform an input operation, and the input device is driven in a direction in which the player is moved away from the player and is provided with an input unit which is a portion for performing an input operation.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、入力装置を操作するタイミングが指定される遊技機がある(例えば、特開2012−210238号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、入力装置を操作するタイミングに気を取られ、球を弾く強度の調整がおろそかになるなど、遊技に集中できなくなるという問題点があった。 In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the timing for operating the input device is specified (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-210238). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that it is not possible to concentrate on the game, such as being distracted by the timing of operating the input device and neglecting the adjustment of the strength of playing the ball.

これに対し、遊技機E1によれば、入力装置の入力部が、遊技者に対して近接離反する方向に駆動されるので、入力部が遊技者に近接する方向に移動し、遊技者の手指に当接したら、それを押し返す態様で入力部を操作させることで、入力部の操作のタイミングを遊技機側で図ることができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the input unit of the input device is driven in the direction of approaching and separating from the player, the input unit moves in the direction of approaching the player, and the player's fingers By operating the input unit in a manner of pushing back the input unit, the timing of operation of the input unit can be determined on the game machine side.

なお、入力操作としては、押しボタンを押し込み操作する操作や、移動部材に対して引っ張る動作などが例示される。 Examples of the input operation include an operation of pushing a push button and an operation of pulling a moving member.

遊技機E1において、前記入力装置は、直線方向に振動する振動装置を備え、その振動装置の振動方向と、前記入力部を操作する方向とが一致する態様で配置され、前記振動装置が前記入力部に押し付けられる場合には、前記入力部が操作不能とされ、前記振動装置が前記入力部から退避される場合には、前記入力部が操作可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機E2。 In the game machine E1, the input device includes a vibrating device that vibrates in a linear direction, and is arranged in such a manner that the vibrating direction of the vibrating device and the direction of operating the input unit coincide with each other. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the input unit is inoperable when pressed against the unit, and the input unit is operable when the vibrating device is retracted from the input unit.

遊技機E2によれば、遊技機E1の奏する効果に加え、振動装置が入力部に押し付けられる場合には、入力部が操作不能とされ、振動装置が入力部から退避される場合には、入力部が操作可能とされるので、振動装置に、入力装置を振動させる演出効果と、入力部を操作するタイミングを図る効果との両方を持たせることができる。 According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the input unit is disabled when the vibrating device is pressed against the input unit, and the input unit is retracted from the input unit when the vibrating device is retracted from the input unit. Since the unit can be operated, the vibrating device can have both an effect of vibrating the input device and an effect of timing the operation of the input unit.

遊技機E2において遊技者が前記入力部を操作する際に遊技者側に反力を作用させる第1付勢装置の弾性係数が、前記入力部に前記伝達装置が振動を伝達する際に前記振動装置側に反力を作用させる第2付勢装置の弾性係数に比較して小さくされることを特徴とする遊技機E3。 In the game machine E2, the elastic modulus of the first urging device that causes a reaction force to act on the player side when the player operates the input unit is the vibration when the transmission device transmits vibration to the input unit. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is made smaller than the elastic modulus of the second urging device that exerts a reaction force on the device side.

遊技機E3によれば、遊技機E2の奏する効果に加え、第2付勢装置の弾性係数に比較して、第1付勢装置の弾性係数が小さくされるので、振動装置を入力装置から離間する位置に復帰させる速度は大きく確保しながら、入力部の操作は小さな力で行うことができる。従って、遊技者が受動的に感じる振動の大きさを確保しつつ、入力部の操作の容易性を向上させることができる。 According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the elastic modulus of the first urging device is smaller than that of the second urging device, so that the vibrating device is separated from the input device. The input unit can be operated with a small force while ensuring a high speed for returning to the desired position. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of operation of the input unit while ensuring the magnitude of the vibration that the player passively feels.

遊技機E2又はE3において、前記入力装置は、遊技者が把持可能な大きさの部材であって、前記入力装置を遊技者が把持する際に、掌の位置に入力部を配置可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機E4。 In the game machine E2 or E3, the input device is a member having a size that can be gripped by the player, and when the player grips the input device, the input unit can be arranged at the position of the palm. A game machine E4 characterized by this.

遊技機E4によれば、遊技機E2又はE3の奏する効果に加え、入力部を備える入力装置が遊技者が把持可能な大きさの部材として形成され、入力装置を遊技者が把持する際に、掌の位置に入力部を配置可能とされるので、入力部の操作の容易性を向上させることができる。即ち、入力装置を把持した状態で、更に握り込むことにより、掌を入力部に押し当てることができ、入力装置を持ち替える等の別の動作を不要とできる。 According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2 or E3, an input device provided with an input unit is formed as a member having a size that can be gripped by the player, and when the player grips the input device, the input device is formed. Since the input unit can be arranged at the position of the palm, the ease of operation of the input unit can be improved. That is, by further grasping the input device while grasping it, the palm can be pressed against the input unit, and another operation such as changing the input device can be unnecessary.

また、入力部を掌で隠すことができるので、入力部が振動する動作を、入力部を把持している遊技者だけに把握させることができる。これにより、他の遊技者には気づかれない態様で、大当たりなどの告知を行うことができる。 Further, since the input unit can be hidden by the palm, the operation of the input unit vibrating can be grasped only by the player holding the input unit. As a result, it is possible to announce a big hit or the like in a manner that is not noticed by other players.

遊技機E4において、前記入力装置の前記入力部の反対側に手指を係止する係止部を備えることを特徴とする遊技機E5。 The game machine E5 is characterized in that the game machine E4 is provided with a locking portion for locking the fingers on the opposite side of the input portion of the input device.

遊技機E5によれば、遊技機E4の奏する効果に加え、入力装置を把持した際に、入力部側の振動を掌で受け止めて、係止部に手指を引っ掛けることで、振動装置による振動を掌の内側に閉じ込めることができる。これにより、遊技者が感じる振動を大きく確保することができる。 According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, when the input device is gripped, the vibration on the input part side is received by the palm, and the vibration by the vibration device is generated by hooking the finger on the locking part. Can be confined inside the palm. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of vibration felt by the player.

<球状部分が移動下端で遊技者側に向き直る技術思想の一例>
遊技者に操作される操作部を有し移動可能に構成される操作部材と、その操作部材と遊技機本体を連結すると共に移動可能に構成される接続部材とを備え、前記接続部材の移動により、前記操作部を操作する遊技者から見た前記操作部材の姿勢が第1状態と、その第1状態と異なる第2状態とを形成可能とされる場合に、その姿勢の変化量を縮小する方向に操作部材を姿勢変化させる修正手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機F1。
<An example of the technical idea that the spherical part turns to the player side at the lower end of the movement>
It is provided with an operation member having an operation unit operated by the player and being movable, and a connecting member that connects the operation member and the game machine main body and is configured to be movable, and by moving the connecting member. When the posture of the operating member as seen by the player who operates the operating unit can form a first state and a second state different from the first state, the amount of change in the posture is reduced. The gaming machine F1 is provided with a correction means for changing the posture of the operating member in a direction.

押しボタン等の操作部を有する操作部材を備え、操作部材が移動することにより操作部材の遊技者に対する姿勢が第1状態と第2状態とで変化する遊技機が知られている(例えば、特開2014−144218号公報参照)。このような遊技機では、例えば、第1状態で遊技者に操作し易い姿勢とすると、第2状態では操作し難くなる恐れがあり、第1状態と第2状態とで操作部材の操作感が変化することにより、遊技者がストレスを感じ、遊技者から不満が出る恐れがあるという問題点があった。 A gaming machine is known that includes an operating member having an operating portion such as a push button, and the posture of the operating member with respect to the player changes between the first state and the second state when the operating member moves (for example, special feature). Open 2014-144218 (see). In such a game machine, for example, if the posture is set so that the player can easily operate it in the first state, it may be difficult to operate in the second state, and the operation feeling of the operating member is felt in the first state and the second state. There is a problem that the player feels stress due to the change and the player may be dissatisfied.

例えば、操作部材が遊技者の正面側に距離をおいて配置され、操作部が押し下げ動作を求める場合には、操作部を楽に操作できたとしても、操作部材が左右方向に延設される軸を中心とした円弧軌道で移動することにより遊技者に近接し、操作部が正面側からの押し込み動作を求める態様に変化する場合には、操作部を押し込む腕を配置するスペースが狭くなり、遊技者が操作部を操作することが困難となり、最悪の場合、遊技者が操作部を操作することを放棄する可能性がある。 For example, when the operating member is arranged at a distance from the front side of the player and the operating unit requires a pushing-down operation, even if the operating unit can be easily operated, the operating member is extended in the left-right direction. When the player approaches the player by moving in an arc orbit centered on the player and the operation unit changes to a mode in which a pushing operation from the front side is required, the space for arranging the arm for pushing the operation unit becomes narrow, and the game It becomes difficult for a person to operate the operation unit, and in the worst case, the player may abandon the operation of the operation unit.

これに対し、遊技機F1によれば、接続部材の移動により操作部材を操作する遊技者から見た操作部材の姿勢が第1状態と、その第1状態と異なる第2状態とを形成可能とされる場合に、その変化量を縮小する方向に操作部材を姿勢変化させる修正手段を備えるため、遊技者の操作部材に対する操作感を変わりにくくすることができる。従って、第1状態で遊技者にとって遊技し易いように構成されることにより、第2状態においても、遊技者にとって操作し易い状態を維持することができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the posture of the operating member as seen by the player who operates the operating member by moving the connecting member can form a first state and a second state different from the first state. In this case, since the correction means for changing the posture of the operating member in the direction of reducing the amount of change is provided, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to change the operating feeling of the operating member. Therefore, by being configured to be easy for the player to play in the first state, it is possible to maintain a state that is easy for the player to operate even in the second state.

なお、修正手段としては、例えば、壁部材と、その壁部材に当接可能な態様で操作部材に配設される当接部材とから構成され、当接部材が壁部材に当接する際に生じる反力で操作部材の姿勢を変化させる装置や、操作部材に配設されるギア歯と歯合すると共に接続部材の移動によりそのギア歯に回転方向の負荷を与えるギア群から構成される装置等が例示される。 The correction means is composed of, for example, a wall member and a contact member arranged on the operation member in a manner capable of contacting the wall member, and occurs when the contact member comes into contact with the wall member. A device that changes the posture of the operating member by a reaction force, a device that meshes with the gear teeth arranged on the operating member, and a group of gears that apply a load in the rotational direction to the gear teeth by moving the connecting member, etc. Is exemplified.

また、接続部材の移動の態様としては、所定の回転軸を中心とした回転や、直線方向へのスライド移動等が例示される。 Moreover, as a mode of movement of the connecting member, rotation about a predetermined rotation axis, slide movement in a linear direction, and the like are exemplified.

遊技機F1において、前記接続部材を駆動する駆動装置を備え、前記接続部材の移動範囲において、前記操作部材が姿勢変化する変化状態と、前記操作部材が姿勢変化されず前記操作部材と前記接続部材との姿勢が維持される維持状態とが形成され、前記変化状態の際に前記修正手段から前記操作部材に生じる負荷が、前記接続部材を制動させる向きを向くことを特徴とする遊技機F2。 The game machine F1 is provided with a drive device for driving the connecting member, and the operating member is in a changing state in which the posture of the operating member changes within the moving range of the connecting member, and the operating member is not changed in posture and the operating member and the connecting member are not changed. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that a maintenance state in which the posture is maintained is formed, and a load generated from the correction means on the operation member in the change state is directed to brake the connection member.

遊技機F2によれば、遊技機F1の奏する効果に加え、接続部材に対して操作部材が常時姿勢変化するわけではないので、接続部材が常時姿勢変化する場合に比較して、接続部材を駆動させるのに必要な駆動力を抑制することができると共に、変化状態の際に修正手段から操作部材に生じる負荷が接続部材を制動させる向きに向けられるので、接続部材を制動させるのに駆動装置が発生する必要がある力を修正手段が補助し、駆動装置に与えられる負荷を抑制することができる。 According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the operation member does not always change its posture with respect to the connecting member, so that the connecting member is driven as compared with the case where the connecting member constantly changes its posture. The driving force required for braking can be suppressed, and the load generated on the operating member from the correction means in the changing state is directed in the direction of braking the connecting member, so that the driving device can brake the connecting member. The correction means can assist the force that needs to be generated, and the load applied to the drive device can be suppressed.

例えば、接続部材および操作部材が上下方向に移動し、接続部材および操作部材が移動範囲の下端に配置された際に変化状態を構成する場合、移動範囲の下端では修正手段から操作部材に与えられる負荷により接続部材および操作部材の移動速度を減速することができると共に、移動範囲の上端付近まで接続部材および操作部材が上昇した場合に接続部材および操作部材の移動抵抗が上がることを抑制することで、接続部材の駆動に必要な駆動力を抑制することができる。 For example, when the connecting member and the operating member move in the vertical direction and the connecting member and the operating member are arranged at the lower end of the moving range to form a changing state, the correction means gives the operating member at the lower end of the moving range. The moving speed of the connecting member and the operating member can be reduced by the load, and the movement resistance of the connecting member and the operating member is suppressed from increasing when the connecting member and the operating member rise to the vicinity of the upper end of the moving range. , The driving force required to drive the connecting member can be suppressed.

遊技機F2において、前記修正手段に当接される被当接部材を備え、前記操作部材の移動において前記修正手段が前記被当接部材に当接することにより前記操作部材の姿勢が変化することを特徴とする遊技機F3。 The game machine F2 includes a contacted member that comes into contact with the correcting means, and the posture of the operating member changes when the correcting means comes into contact with the contacted member when the operating member moves. The featured game machine F3.

遊技機F3によれば、遊技機F2の奏する効果に加え、修正手段と被当接部材とが当接することにより操作部材が姿勢変化するので、駆動装置の駆動力を操作部材に伝達するための部材を接続部材に配設する場合に比較して接続部材の構造を簡素化することができると共に、被当接部材が配置される位置まで修正手段が到達するまでは操作部材の姿勢を接続部材に対して維持することにより、操作部を遊技者に操作させるタイミングを示すことができる。 According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, the operation member changes its posture due to the contact between the correction means and the contacted member, so that the driving force of the driving device can be transmitted to the operating member. The structure of the connecting member can be simplified as compared with the case where the member is arranged on the connecting member, and the posture of the operating member is changed until the correction means reaches the position where the contacted member is arranged. By maintaining the above, it is possible to indicate the timing at which the player operates the operation unit.

遊技機F2又はF3において、前記操作部材が前記変化状態とされる場合に、前記修正手段から生じる負荷の方向と逆方向である所定方向の負荷を操作部材に与えることで、前記操作部材を前記所定方向に姿勢変化可能に前記修正手段が構成されることを特徴とする遊技機F4。 In the game machine F2 or F3, when the operating member is in the changed state, the operating member is subjected to the operation member by applying a load in a predetermined direction opposite to the direction of the load generated from the correction means to the operating member. The gaming machine F4, wherein the correction means is configured so that the posture can be changed in a predetermined direction.

遊技機F4によれば、遊技機F2又はF3の奏する効果に加え、変化状態における姿勢変化時に、その姿勢変化の方向と対向する方向であって変位の方向と力の方向とが向かい合うことからその負荷が過大となる恐れのある所定方向で操作部材に負荷が与えられたとしても、修正手段が操作部材を所定方向で姿勢変化可能に構成されることで、修正手段が破壊されることを抑制することができる。 According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2 or F3, when the posture changes in the changing state, the direction of the displacement and the direction of the force face each other in the direction facing the direction of the posture change. Even if a load is applied to the operating member in a predetermined direction in which the load may become excessive, the correcting means is configured to be able to change the posture of the operating member in the predetermined direction, thereby suppressing the destruction of the correcting means. can do.

遊技機F4において、前記修正手段は、前記操作部材との間にバネ弾性を有する弾性部材を備え、その弾性部材のバネ弾性により修正手段が変形することを特徴とする遊技機F5。 In the game machine F4, the correction means includes an elastic member having spring elasticity between the operating member and the game machine F5, wherein the correction means is deformed by the spring elasticity of the elastic member.

遊技機F5によれば、遊技機F4の奏する効果に加え、操作部材との間に修正手段が備える弾性部材のバネ弾性により修正手段が変形されるので、操作部材の姿勢変化に比例する反発力を発生可能であり、操作部材に所定方向の荷重が負荷された場合に、操作部材の移動量が大きくなるに伴い修正手段から操作部材に与えられる力を大きくすることで、操作部材の移動量を抑制することができる。 According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F4, the correction means is deformed by the spring elasticity of the elastic member provided between the correction means and the operation member, so that the repulsive force proportional to the posture change of the operation member is deformed. Is possible, and when a load in a predetermined direction is applied to the operating member, the moving amount of the operating member is increased by increasing the force applied to the operating member from the correction means as the moving amount of the operating member increases. Can be suppressed.

遊技機F1からF5のいずれかにおいて、前記修正手段が当接する被当接部材を備え、前記接続部材は前記遊技機本体に軸支されるレバー部材であって、前記修正手段が前記被当接部材に当接した際に受ける反力の方向が、その際の前記レバー部材の移動方向と垂直な方向成分を有する方向となることを特徴とする遊技機F6。 In any of the game machines F1 to F5, the abutting member provided with the abutting means, the connecting member is a lever member pivotally supported by the amusement machine main body, and the abutting means abuts the abutting member. The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the direction of the reaction force received when it comes into contact with the member is a direction having a direction component perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member at that time.

遊技機F6によれば、遊技機F1からF5のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、修正手段がレバー部材の移動方向と垂直な方向に沿う方向で被当接部材に当接するので、修正手段によって操作部材にかけられる負荷がレバー部材の移動方向と垂直な方向に沿って作用し、レバー部材が軸径方向の負荷を受けるので、レバー部材が移動方向(周方向)に振動する事を抑制することができる(修正手段によって操作部材にかけられる負荷がレバー部材の移動方向に作用することを抑制できる)。従って、操作部材が被当接部材と当接して姿勢変化する際のレバー部材の姿勢を安定させることができ、操作性を向上させることができる。 According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F5, the correction means abuts on the contacted member in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member, and thus is operated by the correction means. Since the load applied to the member acts along the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member and the lever member receives the load in the axial radial direction, it is possible to suppress the lever member from vibrating in the moving direction (circumferential direction). (It is possible to suppress the load applied to the operating member by the correction means from acting in the moving direction of the lever member). Therefore, the posture of the lever member when the operating member comes into contact with the contacted member and changes its posture can be stabilized, and the operability can be improved.

遊技機F6において、前記被当接部材は、前記修正手段から所定量以上の荷重が加えられることにより、前記レバー部材に当接可能に張り出すことを特徴とする遊技機F7。 The game machine F6 is characterized in that the contacted member projects so as to be in contact with the lever member when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied from the correction means.

遊技機F7によれば、遊技機F6の奏する効果に加え、遊技者の操作等により修正手段を通して被当接部材に所定量以上の荷重が加えられる場合には、被当接部材をレバー部材に当接する位置まで張り出させることによりレバー部材を制動させて、レバー部材の移動速度を抑制することができる一方で、修正手段から操作部材に加えられる負荷が所定量未満の場合にはレバー部材の移動抵抗を抑制することができる。これにより、レバー部材の破壊防止と、レバー部材の操作を軽くすることとの両立を図ることができる。 According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of the game machine F6, when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the contacted member through the correction means by the operation of the player or the like, the contacted member is used as the lever member. The lever member can be braked by projecting to the abutting position to suppress the moving speed of the lever member, but when the load applied to the operating member from the correction means is less than a predetermined amount, the lever member Movement resistance can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to achieve both prevention of breakage of the lever member and lightening of the operation of the lever member.

<球状部分が移動下端で向き直るか否かを切り替えられる技術思想の一例>
遊技者が操作する操作部を有する操作部材と、その操作部材を所定幅で移動可能な態様で遊技機本体に連結する接続部材と、少なくとも前記接続部材を駆動する駆動装置と、を備え、接続部材を所定位置に配置した状態で操作部材を第1姿勢と、その第1姿勢とは異なる第2姿勢と、で変化可能な遊技機において、前記駆動装置の駆動力を前記操作部材に伝達する伝達部材を備え、前記接続部材が所定位置に配置された状態において、前記操作部材が前記第1姿勢で維持される第1動作状態と、前記接続部材が所定位置に配置された状態において、前記伝達部材を介して前記駆動装置の駆動力が前記操作部材に伝達され、前記操作部材が前記第1姿勢から前記第2姿勢に変化される第2動作状態と、を切替可能に構成され、それら第1動作状態と第2動作状態とで、前記操作部材の移動幅が不変とされることを特徴とする遊技機G1。
<An example of a technical idea that can switch whether or not the spherical part turns at the lower end of the movement>
An operating member having an operating unit operated by the player, a connecting member for connecting the operating member to the game machine main body in a manner movable by a predetermined width, and at least a driving device for driving the connecting member are provided and connected. In a gaming machine in which the operating member can be changed between a first posture and a second posture different from the first posture with the member arranged at a predetermined position, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member. The first operating state in which the transmission member is provided and the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, the operating member is maintained in the first posture, and the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position. The driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member via the transmitting member, and the operating member is configured to be switchable between a second operating state in which the operating member is changed from the first posture to the second posture. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the movement width of the operating member is invariant between the first operating state and the second operating state.

操作部材と接続部材とを備え、接続部材を駆動させる駆動装置により操作部材を接続部材に対して相対的に駆動させる遊技機が知られている(例えば、特開2014−144218号公報参照)。このような遊技機では、操作性を重視する場面と、演出効果を重視する場面とがあったとしても、接続部材の動作に対する操作部材の動きは一種類しかないので、操作性を重視するか演出効果を重視するかの一方を選択し、他方を犠牲にする必要があり、改良の余地があった。 There is known a game machine that includes an operating member and a connecting member and drives the operating member relative to the connecting member by a driving device that drives the connecting member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). In such a game machine, even if there are scenes where operability is emphasized and scenes where the effect is emphasized, since there is only one type of movement of the operating member with respect to the movement of the connecting member, is it important to emphasize operability? There was room for improvement because it was necessary to choose one that emphasizes the effect and sacrifice the other.

例えば、操作部材に遊技者が操作する押しボタンが配設される場合、遊技者から見た押しボタンの姿勢を一定とした方が、遊技者はその押しボタンを押し易くなる一方で、操作部材自体の動きは小さくなるので操作部材の動きを利用して大きな演出を行うことが困難となる。 For example, when a push button operated by a player is provided on an operation member, it is easier for the player to push the push button when the posture of the push button as seen from the player is constant, while the operation member is arranged. Since the movement of itself becomes small, it becomes difficult to perform a large effect by utilizing the movement of the operating member.

これに対し、遊技機G1によれば、接続部材が所定位置に配置された状態において操作部材が第1姿勢のまま維持される第1動作状態と、接続部材が所定位置に配置された状態において伝達部材を介して駆動装置の駆動力が操作部材に伝達され操作部材が第1姿勢から第2姿勢に変化される第2動作状態とを、操作部材の移動幅を不変としたまま切替られるので、操作性と演出効果との両立を図ることができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, in the first operating state in which the operating member is maintained in the first posture when the connecting member is arranged in the predetermined position, and in the state where the connecting member is arranged in the predetermined position. Since the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member via the transmitting member and the operating member is changed from the first posture to the second posture, the second operating state can be switched while keeping the movement width of the operating member unchanged. , It is possible to achieve both operability and directing effect.

例えば、操作部材に押しボタンが配設される場合に、遊技者に押しボタンの操作を求める際には操作部材の姿勢を第2姿勢に変化させ、遊技者に操作し易い向きに押しボタンを向ける一方で、遊技者に操作を求めない演出時には、操作部材の姿勢を第1姿勢のままとすることで、操作性は度外視した演出に切り替えることができ、操作部材を大きく動作させることができる。従って、操作性の向上と、演出性の向上とを両立させることができる。 For example, when a push button is arranged on the operation member, when the player is requested to operate the push button, the posture of the operation member is changed to the second posture, and the push button is pushed in a direction that is easy for the player to operate. On the other hand, at the time of the production that does not require the player to operate, by keeping the posture of the operating member in the first posture, the operability can be switched to the disregarded production, and the operating member can be greatly operated. .. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement in operability and improvement in color rendering.

また、第1動作状態と第2動作状態とで操作部材の移動幅が不変とされるので、操作部材の姿勢が所定位置で変化するまでは、遊技者は操作部材がどちらの動作状態となっているのかを把握しづらくできるので、遊技者の興趣を向上させることができる。 Further, since the movement width of the operating member is unchanged between the first operating state and the second operating state, the player is in which operating state the operating member is in until the posture of the operating member changes at a predetermined position. Since it is difficult to grasp whether or not the player is playing, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

また、遊技者に操作部を操作させるタイミングまでは第1動作状態とされ操作部材を所定幅で往復移動を継続させ、所定のタイミングで第2動作状態に切り替え操作部材の姿勢を変化させることにより、遊技者に操作部を押すタイミングを知らせることができると共に、操作部材自体も押しやすい姿勢にされることで、遊技をわかり易く(押しボタンを押すタイミングをわかり易く)、かつ、快適にする(押しボタンを押しやすくする)ことができる。 Further, the first operating state is set until the player is made to operate the operation unit, the operating member is continuously reciprocated with a predetermined width, and the operation member is switched to the second operating state at a predetermined timing to change the posture of the operating member. , The player can be informed of the timing to press the operation unit, and the operation member itself is placed in an easy-to-push posture to make the game easy to understand (the timing to press the push button is easy to understand) and comfortable (push button). Can be made easier to press).

遊技機G1において、前記伝達部材に駆動力を伝達する偏心カム部材を備え、その偏心カム部材は、前記駆動装置から前記接続部材へ駆動力を伝達可能に構成され、前記偏心カム部材は、前記駆動装置の駆動力を、前記伝達部材または前記接続部材のいずれか一方に伝達する態様で構成され、いずれに伝達するかを切替可能な切替手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機G2。 The game machine G1 includes an eccentric cam member that transmits a driving force to the transmission member, the eccentric cam member is configured to be able to transmit a driving force from the driving device to the connecting member, and the eccentric cam member is the said. The gaming machine G2 is configured to transmit the driving force of the driving device to either the transmitting member or the connecting member, and includes a switching means capable of switching which of the transmitting members is transmitted.

遊技機G2によれば、遊技機G1の奏する効果に加え、偏心カム部材を通して駆動装置の駆動力が操作部材または接続部材のいずれか一方に切替可能に伝達されるので、操作部材と接続部材とを同時に駆動させる場合に比較して駆動装置から発生させる駆動力を抑制することができる。 According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the driving force of the driving device is switchably transmitted to either the operating member or the connecting member through the eccentric cam member, so that the operating member and the connecting member It is possible to suppress the driving force generated from the driving device as compared with the case where the two are driven at the same time.

なお、駆動装置の駆動力を接続部材に伝達するか操作部材に伝達するかを切り替える態様としては、操作部材および接続部材まで駆動装置から歯合により連結されるギア群が配設され、状況によって歯合するギアを切替可能とする態様や、偏心カム部材が回転の途中で接続部材または伝達部材のどちらかに当接可能に構成され、それら接続部材と操作部材との間の距離が偏心カム部材の幅よりも大きくされる態様等が例示される。 As a mode for switching whether to transmit the driving force of the driving device to the connecting member or the operating member, a gear group in which the driving device and the connecting member are connected by teeth from the driving device is arranged, depending on the situation. The eccentric cam member is configured so that the gears to be meshed can be switched, and the eccentric cam member can come into contact with either the connecting member or the transmitting member during rotation, and the distance between the connecting member and the operating member is the eccentric cam. An embodiment in which the width is made larger than the width of the member is exemplified.

遊技機G2において、前記偏心カム部材が正回転される状態で前記伝達部材に当接する場合には、前記伝達部材を介して前記操作部材に駆動力が伝達され、前記偏心カム部材が逆回転される状態で前記伝達部材に当接する場合には、前記操作部材へ駆動力が非伝達とされることを特徴とする遊技機G3。 In the game machine G2, when the eccentric cam member comes into contact with the transmission member in a state of being rotated forward, a driving force is transmitted to the operating member via the transmission member, and the eccentric cam member is rotated in the reverse direction. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the driving force is not transmitted to the operating member when it comes into contact with the transmitting member in such a state.

ここで、例えば、偏心カム部材と接続部材とが離間することを契機に駆動力が操作部材に伝達される態様で構成される場合、動作時の振動や、遊技者が操作部材を操作すること等により、接続部材が偏心カム部材から意図せず離間することを検出して、誤って操作部材に駆動力が伝達されることを防止するために駆動装置を停止させる必要が生じるので、検出装置を追加する必要が有ると共に、駆動装置の制御が複雑となる。 Here, for example, when the eccentric cam member and the connecting member are separated from each other and the driving force is transmitted to the operating member, vibration during operation or the player operating the operating member. For example, it is necessary to detect that the connecting member is unintentionally separated from the eccentric cam member and stop the driving device in order to prevent the driving force from being erroneously transmitted to the operating member. It is necessary to add, and the control of the drive device becomes complicated.

これに対し、遊技機G3によれば、遊技機G2の奏する効果に加え、偏心カム部材の回転方向によって駆動力が操作部材に伝達されるか否かを切り替えることができるので、接続部材と偏心カム部材とが動作の途中で離間したとしても、一定の方向で偏心カム部材を回転させ続けるかぎり駆動力の伝達対象が切り替えられることが無いので、操作部材に誤って駆動力が伝達される恐れが生じず、駆動装置の制御を緩やかなものとする事ができる(駆動装置を即座に停止させることが不要とされる)。 On the other hand, according to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, it is possible to switch whether or not the driving force is transmitted to the operating member depending on the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member, so that the connecting member and the eccentricity can be switched. Even if the cam member is separated in the middle of operation, the transmission target of the driving force is not switched as long as the eccentric cam member is continuously rotated in a certain direction, so that the driving force may be erroneously transmitted to the operating member. The control of the drive device can be relaxed (it is not necessary to stop the drive device immediately).

また、接続部材と偏心カム部材とが離間したことを検出するための検出センサを不要とできるので、製品コストを低減することができる。 Further, since the detection sensor for detecting that the connecting member and the eccentric cam member are separated from each other can be eliminated, the product cost can be reduced.

遊技機G3において、前記偏心カム部材は、外径部分に回転軸に沿って凸設される第1凸設部を備え、前記伝達部材は、前記第1凸設部と当接可能な態様で凸設される第2凸設部を備え、前記偏心カム部材が回転されるに伴って前記第2凸設部が前記偏心カム部材の回転軸に近接移動する領域を有し、その領域において前記第2凸設部が、前記第1凸設部よりも前記偏心カム部材の回転軸に近接配置可能に構成されることを特徴とする遊技機G4。 In the game machine G3, the eccentric cam member includes a first convex portion projecting along the rotation axis on the outer diameter portion, and the transmission member is in a manner capable of contacting the first convex portion. A second convex portion to be convex is provided, and the second convex portion has a region that moves close to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member as the eccentric cam member is rotated. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the second convex portion is configured to be arranged closer to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member than the first convex portion.

遊技機G4によれば、遊技機G3の奏する効果に加え、偏心カム部材が回転されるに伴って、第2凸設部が偏心カム部材の回転軸に近接移動する領域を有し、その領域において第2凸設部が第1凸設部よりも偏心カム部材の回転軸に近接配置可能に構成されるので、第2凸設部の位置の復帰を、第1凸設部と偏心カム部材の回転軸との間を第2凸設部が通過することにより行うことができる。 According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, the second convex portion has a region that moves close to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member as the eccentric cam member is rotated. Since the second convex portion can be arranged closer to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member than the first convex portion, the position of the second convex portion can be returned to the first convex portion and the eccentric cam member. This can be done by passing the second convex portion between the rotating shafts of the above.

従って、第2凸設部が偏心カム部材の第1凸設部の外径部分の軌跡の外側まで移動してから伝達部材の姿勢を復帰させる場合に比較して、第1凸設部が第2凸設部に当接してから離間するまでの伝達部材の回転角度を抑制することができ、偏心カム部材にかけられる負荷が上昇する角度範囲を抑制することができる。 Therefore, as compared with the case where the second convex portion moves to the outside of the locus of the outer diameter portion of the first convex portion of the eccentric cam member and then the posture of the transmission member is restored, the first convex portion is the first. The rotation angle of the transmission member from the contact with the convex portion to the separation from the convex portion can be suppressed, and the angle range in which the load applied to the eccentric cam member increases can be suppressed.

遊技機G4において、前記第1凸設部は、その第1凸設部の最外径部分と前記偏心カム部材の回転軸とを結ぶ所定直線に対して傾斜する壁部として構成され、前記正回転で前記偏心カム部材が回転される状態において前記第2凸部に当接される押し込み壁面が、前記所定直線に対して軸径方向に遠ざかるほど近接する態様で傾斜して構成されることを特徴とする遊技機G5。 In the game machine G4, the first convex portion is configured as a wall portion inclined with respect to a predetermined straight line connecting the outermost diameter portion of the first convex portion and the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member. In a state where the eccentric cam member is rotated by rotation, the pushing wall surface that comes into contact with the second convex portion is inclined so as to be closer to the predetermined straight line in the axial direction. The featured game machine G5.

遊技機G5によれば、遊技機G4の奏する効果に加え、伝達部材を介して操作部材に駆動力が伝達される状態である偏心カム部材の回転方向が正回転の場合に、伝達部材と当接する押し込み壁面が所定直線に対して軸径方向に遠ざかるほど近接する態様で傾斜して構成されるので、押し込み部材が所定方向に沿った壁面で構成される場合に比較して、偏心カム部材が所定角度回転される場合の伝達部材の移動量を低減することができる。従って、伝達部材を介して伝達される駆動力の所定時間あたりの伝達効率を低減することができるので、操作部材を操作されることにより伝達部材を介して偏心カム部材に短期間に大荷重が負荷されることを抑制することができる。 According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G4, when the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member, which is a state in which the driving force is transmitted to the operation member via the transmission member, is forward rotation, the transmission member and the contact member. Since the pushing wall surface in contact is inclined so as to be closer to the predetermined straight line in the axial direction, the eccentric cam member is formed as compared with the case where the pushing member is formed of the wall surface along the predetermined direction. It is possible to reduce the amount of movement of the transmission member when it is rotated by a predetermined angle. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the transmission efficiency of the driving force transmitted through the transmission member per predetermined time, so that a large load is applied to the eccentric cam member via the transmission member in a short period of time by operating the operation member. It is possible to suppress being loaded.

遊技機G3からG5のいずれかにおいて、前記接続部材の姿勢を所定の位置で固定するロック部材を備え、そのロック部材による前記接続部材の姿勢の固定の解除は、前記偏心カム部材が逆回転することにより可能である一方で、前記偏心カム部材が正回転する場合には前記ロック部材による前記接続部材の姿勢の固定が維持されることを特徴とする遊技機G6。 In any of the game machines G3 to G5, a lock member for fixing the posture of the connecting member at a predetermined position is provided, and the unlocking of the posture of the connecting member by the locking member causes the eccentric cam member to rotate in the reverse direction. On the other hand, the gaming machine G6 is characterized in that when the eccentric cam member rotates in the forward direction, the posture of the connecting member is maintained by the locking member.

遊技機G6によれば、遊技機G3からG5のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、ロック部材による接続部材の固定の解除が、偏心カム部材が逆回転する場合にのみ生じるので、接続部材を所定位置に配置した状態で偏心カム部材を一方向(正回転の方向)に回転させることにより、接続部材の姿勢を維持したまま、容易に伝達部材を介して操作部材に駆動力を伝達することができる。従って、偏心カム部材の位相を細かく制御せずとも、ロック部材による接続部材の姿勢の維持と、操作部材の姿勢変化とを共に達成することができるので、駆動装置の制御を緩やかにすることができる。 According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G3 to G5, the fixing of the connecting member by the lock member occurs only when the eccentric cam member rotates in the reverse direction, so that the connecting member is placed in a predetermined position. By rotating the eccentric cam member in one direction (forward rotation direction) in the state of being arranged in, the driving force can be easily transmitted to the operating member via the transmission member while maintaining the posture of the connecting member. .. Therefore, even if the phase of the eccentric cam member is not finely controlled, the posture of the connecting member can be maintained by the lock member and the posture of the operating member can be changed, so that the control of the drive device can be relaxed. it can.

<抑制部材が第2移動部材を押し出す弾性力の反力で押さえられる技術思想の一例>
移動可能に構成される第1移動部材と、前記第1移動部材の外方に少なくとも一部が張り出された状態で配設されると共に前記第1移動部材に対して移動可能とされる第2移動部材と、その第2移動部材の移動方向において前記第1移動部材の内方側に配設され一方の端部が前記第2移動部材に連結されると共にバネ弾性を有する弾性部材と、その弾性部材の他方の端部に配設され前記弾性部材の弾性力により前記第1移動部材に押し付けられることにより前記第1移動部材から前記第2移動部材が離間することを抑制する抑制部材と、を備え、前記第2移動部材の前記第1移動部材から張り出される部分が移動することにより、前記抑制部材を前記第1移動部材に押し付ける力が大きくなることを特徴とする遊技機H1。
<Example of technical concept in which the restraining member is pressed by the reaction force of the elastic force pushing out the second moving member>
A first moving member configured to be movable, and a first movable member that is arranged in a state in which at least a part of the first moving member is projected outward and is movable with respect to the first moving member. Two moving members, an elastic member arranged on the inner side of the first moving member in the moving direction of the second moving member, one end of which is connected to the second moving member, and elastic member having spring elasticity. An inhibitory member that is disposed at the other end of the elastic member and is pressed against the first moving member by the elastic force of the elastic member to prevent the second moving member from separating from the first moving member. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the force of pressing the restraining member against the first moving member is increased by moving the portion of the second moving member that projects from the first moving member.

第1移動部材と、その第1移動部材の外方に張り出し第1移動部材に対して移動可能な第2移動部材を備える遊技機が知られている(例えば、特開2014−144218号公報参照)。このような遊技機では、第1移動部材の移動時に第2移動部材が他の部材と衝突することにより破損して、取り替えが必要となる場合があるため仮止め程度に止めておく方が取り替えの時間を短縮できる一方で、保持力が不十分だと、他の部材との衝突時に生じる荷重の大きさ次第で第1移動部材から第2移動部材が外れてしまう恐れがある。 A gaming machine including a first moving member and a second moving member that projects outward from the first moving member and is movable with respect to the first moving member is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). In such a game machine, when the first moving member is moved, the second moving member may be damaged due to a collision with another member and need to be replaced. Therefore, it is better to temporarily fix the first moving member. On the other hand, if the holding force is insufficient, the second moving member may come off from the first moving member depending on the magnitude of the load generated at the time of collision with other members.

換言すれば、第2移動部材を第1移動部材に保持する部材をビスでの締結により第1移動部材に固定した方が、嵌合で固定する場合に比較して固定力を大きくすることができる一方で、組立時にはビスをネジ入れる手間が、また、メンテナンス等で取り外す時にはビスを取り外す手間が、それぞれ生じ、作業時間が長くなる。 In other words, fixing the member that holds the second moving member to the first moving member to the first moving member by fastening with screws can increase the fixing force as compared with the case of fixing by fitting. On the other hand, it takes time to screw in the screws when assembling, and it takes time to remove the screws when removing them for maintenance or the like, which increases the work time.

即ち、第2移動部材を第1移動部材に強固に固定することと、第2移動部材を第1移動部材に組み付ける及び第2移動部材を第1移動部材から取り外す作業時間を短縮することとを両立することは困難であるという問題点があった。 That is, firmly fixing the second moving member to the first moving member, assembling the second moving member to the first moving member, and shortening the work time for removing the second moving member from the first moving member. There was a problem that it was difficult to achieve both.

これに対し、遊技機H1では、第1移動部材から張り出される部分が弾性部材の弾性力に抗する方向に動作することにより、抑制部材が第1移動部材に押し付けられる力が大きくなるので、第2移動部材が他の部材に当接して第1移動部材に大きな荷重がかかる場合に、より強固に抑制部材を第1移動部材に固定することができる。従って、弾性力により第1移動部材に第2移動部材を保持することにより取り替えの時間の短縮を図りつつ、第2移動部材が他の部材に当接する際にも第2移動部材が第1移動部材から外れることを防止することができる。 On the other hand, in the game machine H1, the portion protruding from the first moving member operates in a direction that opposes the elastic force of the elastic member, so that the force that the suppressing member is pressed against the first moving member increases. When the second moving member comes into contact with another member and a large load is applied to the first moving member, the restraining member can be more firmly fixed to the first moving member. Therefore, while the replacement time is shortened by holding the second moving member on the first moving member by elastic force, the second moving member moves first when the second moving member comes into contact with another member. It is possible to prevent it from coming off the member.

遊技機H1において、前記抑制部材を、前記弾性部材の弾性力の方向に対して垂直な方向で移動不能に前記第1移動部材に保持する鉤部材を備え、その鉤部材は、前記抑制部材が前記第1移動部材に押し付けられる方向において移動可能な位置の一部に配置されることを特徴とする遊技機H2。 The game machine H1 includes a hook member that holds the restraining member to the first moving member in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the elastic force of the elastic member so that the restraining member can not move. The gaming machine H2 is arranged at a part of a movable position in a direction of being pressed against the first moving member.

遊技機H2によれば、遊技機H1の奏する効果に加え、鉤部材は、抑制部材が第1移動部材に押し付けられる方向において移動可能な位置の一部に配置されるので、鉤部材を第1移動部材に取り付ける前においては、鉤部材が取り付けられるスペースが空きスペースとなるので、抑制部材を配置することが容易となると共に、鉤部材の装着後は抑制部材が第1移動部材から弾性部材の弾性力の垂直な方向に離反することを抑制することができる。 According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the hook member is arranged at a part of the movable position in the direction in which the restraining member is pressed against the first moving member, so that the hook member is first placed. Before attaching to the moving member, the space for attaching the hook member becomes an empty space, so that it becomes easy to arrange the suppressing member, and after the hook member is attached, the suppressing member is changed from the first moving member to the elastic member. It is possible to prevent the elastic force from separating in the vertical direction.

また、鉤部材が、抑制部材の第1移動部材に押し付けられる方向において移動可能な位置の一部に配置されることから、鉤部材を第1移動部材に保持する力が弾性部材の変形により生じるので、弾性部材を逆方向に変形させることで容易に鉤部材を第1移動部材から取り外すことができ、それに伴い第2移動部材を容易に第1移動部材から取り外すことができる。 Further, since the hook member is arranged at a part of the movable position in the direction of being pressed against the first moving member of the restraining member, a force for holding the hook member on the first moving member is generated by the deformation of the elastic member. Therefore, the hook member can be easily removed from the first moving member by deforming the elastic member in the opposite direction, and the second moving member can be easily removed from the first moving member accordingly.

遊技機H2において、前記弾性部材および前記抑制部材が前記第1移動部材の内側に配設され、前記鉤部材が、前記第1移動部材の外側から内側へ向けて取り付けられることを特徴とする遊技機H3。 In the game machine H2, the elastic member and the restraining member are arranged inside the first moving member, and the hook member is attached from the outside to the inside of the first moving member. Machine H3.

遊技機H3によれば、遊技機H2の奏する効果に加え、弾性部材および抑制部材を遊技者が不正に取り外すことを抑制できると共に、鉤部材が第1移動部材の外側から取り付け可能なので鉤部材が外れた場合や組み付け忘れをした場合等に第1移動部材を分解することなく鉤部材を第1移動部材に取り付けることができ、メンテナンス時間を短縮することができる。 According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally removing the elastic member and the restraining member, and the hook member can be attached from the outside of the first moving member, so that the hook member can be attached. The hook member can be attached to the first moving member without disassembling the first moving member when it comes off or is forgotten to be assembled, and the maintenance time can be shortened.

また、鉤部材が外側から取り付けられることから、第1移動部材から鉤部材が外れた場合に第1移動部材の外に鉤部材を落下させる構成とすることができ、鉤部材が落下することを頼りにメンテナンスの必要性を判断することができる。即ち、第1移動部材を分解して内部を覗くことなくメンテナンスの必要性を判断することができる。 Further, since the hook member is attached from the outside, when the hook member is removed from the first moving member, the hook member can be dropped to the outside of the first moving member, and the hook member can be dropped. You can rely on it to determine the need for maintenance. That is, the necessity of maintenance can be determined without disassembling the first moving member and looking inside.

更に、鉤部材を第1移動部材の内側から取り付ける場合、鉤部材を第1移動部材から引き抜き不能に係止するための係止突起の寸法分だけ余分に弾性部材を縮ませられる態様とすることが望まれるところ、鉤部材を第1移動部材の外側から取り付ける場合には、係止突起を第1移動部材の外側に配置することができ、鉤部材を組み付ける際に弾性部材を縮ませる量を抑制することができる。これにより、弾性部材の弾性力を大きく保持して第2移動部材や抑制部材を第1移動部材に保持する強さを大きく保ちつつ(硬めの弾性部材を使用しつつ)、鉤部材の取り付けを容易とすることができる。 Further, when the hook member is attached from the inside of the first moving member, the elastic member can be further contracted by the size of the locking projection for locking the hook member from the first moving member so that it cannot be pulled out. However, when the hook member is attached from the outside of the first moving member, the locking projection can be arranged outside the first moving member, and the amount of contraction of the elastic member when assembling the hook member is increased. It can be suppressed. As a result, the hook member can be attached while maintaining a large elastic force of the elastic member and maintaining a large strength of holding the second moving member and the restraining member in the first moving member (while using a hard elastic member). It can be easy.

遊技機H3において、前記抑制部材を前記弾性力で押し付けられる方向の反対方向に変位させることにより、前記鉤部材が前記第1移動部材から取り外し可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機H4。 The game machine H3 is characterized in that the hook member can be removed from the first moving member by displacing the restraining member in a direction opposite to the direction of being pressed by the elastic force.

遊技機H4によれば、遊技機H3の奏する効果に加え、第1移動部材の内側に配設される抑制部材を弾性力で押し付けられる方向の反対方向に変位させることにより、鉤部材が第1移動部材から取り外し可能とされるので、遊技中に誤って遊技者が鉤部材を第1移動部材から取り外すことを防止することができる。また、不正に鉤部材を取り外すことを抑制することができる。 According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, the hook member is displaced in the direction opposite to the direction in which it is pressed by the elastic force, so that the hook member is first. Since it is removable from the moving member, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the hook member from the first moving member during the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hook member from being removed illegally.

遊技機H2からH4のいずれかにおいて、前記鉤部材が配置される位置に前記抑制部材が侵入することにより、前記第2移動部材に負荷される弾性力が低減されることを特徴とする遊技機H5。 In any of the game machines H2 to H4, the elastic force applied to the second moving member is reduced by invading the restraining member at the position where the hook member is arranged. H5.

遊技機H5によれば、遊技機H2からH4の奏する効果に加え、鉤部材が破断される等して鉤部材が配置されていたスペースが空き、そのスペースに抑制部材が侵入することにより第2移動部材に負荷される弾性力が低減されるので、鉤部材が破断される等して配置されていたスペースが空いた後において、第2移動部材にかけられる負荷に対する緩衝作用を向上させることができ、第2移動部材が破損することを抑制することができる。 According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machines H2 to H4, a space in which the hook member is arranged is vacant due to a break of the hook member, and the restraining member invades the space to obtain a second. Since the elastic force applied to the moving member is reduced, it is possible to improve the cushioning action against the load applied to the second moving member after the space where the hook member has been arranged is vacated due to breakage of the hook member or the like. , It is possible to prevent the second moving member from being damaged.

なお、鉤部材の構成としては、例えば、鉤部材が破断された後に再組み付け可能に構成するものが例示される。この場合において、破断している間は鉤部材の一部が第1移動部材の外側に露出することで、鉤部材が破断していることを外観から確認し易くすることができる。 As the configuration of the hook member, for example, one that can be reassembled after the hook member is broken is exemplified. In this case, a part of the hook member is exposed to the outside of the first moving member while the hook member is broken, so that it is easy to confirm from the appearance that the hook member is broken.

遊技機H2からH5のいずれかにおいて、前記第2移動部材は、前記第1移動部材の外側から引き抜き可能な抜き状態と、前記第1移動部材の外側から引き抜き不能に構成される係止状態とを形成可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機H6。 In any of the game machines H2 to H5, the second moving member has a pulling state in which it can be pulled out from the outside of the first moving member and a locked state in which it cannot be pulled out from the outside of the first moving member. A game machine H6 characterized in that it is possible to form.

遊技機H6によれば、遊技機H2からH5のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、第2移動部材は、抜き状態と、係止状態とを形成可能とされるので、メンテナンス性能を向上できる状態と、容易に第2移動部材を取り外せないことにより不正防止の性能を向上できる状態とを場合によって切り替えることができる。 According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H2 to H5, the second moving member can form a pulled-out state and a locked state, so that the maintenance performance can be improved. In some cases, it is possible to switch between a state in which the fraud prevention performance can be improved by not being able to easily remove the second moving member.

遊技機H6において、前記抜き状態は、前記抑制部材を前記鉤部材が保持する状態において前記鉤部材が配置されるスペースの内側に、前記抑制部材が侵入することにより形成可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機H7。 In the game machine H6, the pulled-out state can be formed by the restraining member invading the inside of the space in which the hook member is arranged while the holding member is held by the hook member. The game machine H7.

遊技機H7によれば、遊技機H6の奏する効果に加え、抜き状態は、鉤部材を組立状態における正規の位置から取り去った状態において空いたスペースに抑制部材を侵入させることにより形成可能なので、鉤部材が正規の位置に配置された状態においては第2移動部材を取り外すために第1移動部材を分解することが必要であり、第2移動部材を取り外す不正を抑制することができる。 According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of the game machine H6, the pulled-out state can be formed by invading the restraining member into the vacant space when the hook member is removed from the normal position in the assembled state. In a state where the member is arranged at a regular position, it is necessary to disassemble the first moving member in order to remove the second moving member, and it is possible to suppress fraudulent removal of the second moving member.

また、鉤部材に大きな負荷が与えられ、鉤部材が正規の位置から外れた場合には、抜き状態を形成することができ、第2移動部材を容易に取り替えることができるので、メンテナンス性能を向上させることができる。 Further, when a large load is applied to the hook member and the hook member deviates from the normal position, a pulled-out state can be formed and the second moving member can be easily replaced, so that maintenance performance is improved. Can be made to.

<球状部分の接続部材に対する回転抵抗を変化させる技術思想の一例>
遊技者が操作可能に構成される操作部材と、その操作部材を移動可能に支持する接続部材と、を備え、その接続部材に対して、前記操作部材を所定方向に移動させる場合の移動抵抗を可変とする可変手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機I1。
<Example of technical concept to change the rotational resistance of the spherical part to the connecting member>
An operating member configured to be operable by a player and a connecting member that movably supports the operating member are provided, and a movement resistance when the operating member is moved in a predetermined direction is provided to the connecting member. A game machine I1 characterized by comprising variable means for making it variable.

接続部材と、その接続部材に対して移動可能に構成される操作部材を備える遊技機が知られている(特開2014−144218号公報参照)。このような遊技機では、操作部材を接続部材に対して所定方向に操作する場合、操作感(例えば、遊技者が感じる重さ)に変化が無く、操作部材の操作に遊技者が飽きてしまうという問題点があった。 A gaming machine including a connecting member and an operating member configured to be movable with respect to the connecting member is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). In such a game machine, when the operating member is operated in a predetermined direction with respect to the connecting member, the operating feeling (for example, the weight felt by the player) does not change, and the player gets tired of operating the operating member. There was a problem.

例えば、接続部材に操作部材が回転可能に軸支され、操作部材を正回転させる場合と、操作部材を逆回転させる場合とで回転抵抗を変化させておいたとしても、遊技者が操作部材を操作する方向と、回転抵抗との関係が常に一定とされるので、操作部材を回転させる動作により遊技者に生じる気付き(発見)が乏しく、遊技者が操作部材の操作に飽きてしまう。 For example, even if the operation member is rotatably supported by the connecting member and the rotation resistance is changed between the case where the operation member is rotated forward and the case where the operation member is rotated in the reverse direction, the player can control the operation member. Since the relationship between the operating direction and the rotational resistance is always constant, there is little awareness (discovery) that occurs in the player due to the operation of rotating the operating member, and the player gets tired of operating the operating member.

これに対し、遊技機I1によれば、接続部材に対して操作部材を所定方向に移動させる場合の移動抵抗を可変とする可変手段を備えるので、同一方向に操作部材を操作させた場合の操作部材の操作感に変化を持たせることができ、操作部材を操作する遊技者の興趣を向上させることができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since the variable means for changing the movement resistance when the operating member is moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the connecting member is provided, the operation when the operating member is operated in the same direction is provided. It is possible to change the operation feeling of the member, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player who operates the operation member.

なお、可変手段の態様としては、接続部材が移動可能に構成される場合に、接続部材の位置により調整を行う態様や、操作部材の変位量により調整を行う態様や、操作部材および接続部材以外の部材(例えば接続部材を駆動する部材等)により調整を行う態様等が例示される。 In addition, as the mode of the variable means, when the connecting member is configured to be movable, the mode of adjusting by the position of the connecting member, the mode of adjusting by the displacement amount of the operating member, and the mode other than the operating member and the connecting member An embodiment in which adjustment is performed by a member (for example, a member for driving a connecting member) is exemplified.

例えば、操作部材および接続部材以外の部材により調整を行う態様によれば、操作部材に触れてみて初めて状態(操作部材の接続部材に対する移動抵抗の状態)を分かるようにすることができ、遊技者の操作部材に対する注目力を上げることができる。 For example, according to an embodiment in which adjustment is performed by a member other than the operating member and the connecting member, the state (state of movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member) can be known only by touching the operating member, and the player can understand the state. It is possible to raise the attention to the operating members of.

また、接続部材が遊技機本体に対して移動可能に構成されている場合、接続部材に対する操作部材の移動抵抗を、遊技機本体に対する接続部材の移動抵抗を境界として強弱切替可能とする事により、遊技者には操作部材の操作のみを求めながら、場合によって、遊技機本体に対して接続部材を移動させるよりも接続部材に対して操作部材を移動させやすい状況と、接続部材に対して操作部材を移動させるよりも遊技機本体に対して接続部材を移動させやすい状況とを切り替えることができる(押しボタンを固めることとの違い)。 Further, when the connecting member is configured to be movable with respect to the game machine main body, the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member can be switched between strength and weakness with the movement resistance of the connecting member with respect to the game machine main body as a boundary. While requesting the player to operate only the operating member, in some cases, it is easier to move the operating member with respect to the connecting member than to move the connecting member with respect to the game machine main body, and the operating member with respect to the connecting member. It is possible to switch between situations where it is easier to move the connecting member to the game machine body than to move it (difference from pressing the push button).

遊技機I1において、前記接続部材が移動可能に構成され、前記可変手段による移動抵抗の調整が、前記接続部材の配置が変化することにより行われることを特徴とする遊技機I2。 The game machine I1 is characterized in that the connecting member is configured to be movable, and the movement resistance is adjusted by the variable means by changing the arrangement of the connecting member.

遊技機I2によれば、遊技機I1の奏する効果に加え、接続部材の配置が変化することによって接続部材に対する操作部材の移動抵抗の強弱が調整されるので、接続部材または操作部材を操作する速度に関わりなく接続部材に対する操作部材の移動抵抗を変化させることができる。 According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the strength of the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member is adjusted by changing the arrangement of the connecting member, so that the speed at which the connecting member or the operating member is operated is adjusted. The movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member can be changed regardless of the connection member.

なお、接続部材の配置の変化により移動抵抗を調整する態様としては、接続部材の移動量に対応して移動抵抗を変化させる態様や、接続部材が所定位置に配置されたことを契機に移動抵抗を切り替える態様等が例示される。 In addition, as a mode of adjusting the movement resistance by changing the arrangement of the connecting member, a mode of changing the movement resistance according to the movement amount of the connecting member or a movement resistance triggered by the arrangement of the connecting member at a predetermined position. An embodiment of switching between the above is exemplified.

遊技機I2において、前記操作部材を前記接続部材に対して所定方向に付勢する弾性力を生じる付勢部材と、前記操作部材に当接可能に配設される壁部材と、を備え、前記接続部材が所定位置に配置された状態において、前記操作部材が、前記付勢部材による付勢方向とは反対方向である第1方向の負荷を前記壁部材から与えられ、前記第1方向に前記操作部材が移動される態様で構成されることを特徴とする遊技機I3。 The game machine I2 includes an urging member that generates an elastic force that urges the operating member in a predetermined direction with respect to the connecting member, and a wall member that is arranged so as to come into contact with the operating member. In a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, the operating member is given a load from the wall member in the first direction opposite to the urging direction by the urging member, and the operating member receives the load in the first direction. A game machine I3 characterized in that the operating member is configured to be moved.

遊技機I3によれば、遊技機I2の奏する効果に加え、接続部材が所定位置に配置されることにより操作部材が壁部材に当接し、第1方向に操作部材が移動されるので、接続部材に対して静止する操作部材を付勢する付勢部材から生じる弾性力が、接続部材が所定位置以外に配置される場合に比較して向上する。従って、接続部材が所定位置に配置される状態において接続部材に対する操作部材の移動抵抗を上昇させることができる。 According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2, when the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, the operating member comes into contact with the wall member and the operating member is moved in the first direction. The elastic force generated from the urging member that urges the operating member that stands still is improved as compared with the case where the connecting member is arranged at a position other than a predetermined position. Therefore, it is possible to increase the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member in a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position.

遊技機I2において、前記接続部材を所定位置に配置した状態において前記操作部材の移動方向に沿って延設されると共に前記操作部材と擦れる摩擦部材を備えることを特徴とする遊技機I4。 The game machine I2 is characterized by including a friction member that extends along the moving direction of the operating member and rubs against the operating member in a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position.

遊技機I4によれば、遊技機I2の奏する効果に加え、接続部材を所定位置に配置した状態において、操作部材が摩擦部材と擦れながら移動するので、操作部材の回転し始めから擦れる面積に応じた動摩擦を操作部材にかけることができ、十分に移動抵抗を変化させることができる。 According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2, the operating member moves while rubbing against the friction member in a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, so that the operating member moves according to the area of rubbing from the beginning of rotation. The dynamic friction can be applied to the operating member, and the movement resistance can be sufficiently changed.

なお、摩擦部材の配設位置としては、接続部材に配設される態様や、接続部材を支持する本体ケースに配設される態様が例示される。 Examples of the arrangement position of the friction member include a mode in which the friction member is arranged in the connecting member and a mode in which the friction member is arranged in the main body case that supports the connecting member.

遊技機I4において、前記接続部材を箱の内部に支持する本体ケースと、その本体ケースの外側に配設されるカバー部材と、を備え、前記摩擦部材が前記カバー部材から前記接続部材側に延設される部分として構成されることを特徴とする遊技機I5。 The game machine I4 includes a main body case that supports the connecting member inside the box and a cover member that is arranged outside the main body case, and the friction member extends from the cover member to the connecting member side. A game machine I5 characterized in that it is configured as a part to be installed.

遊技機I5によれば、遊技機I4の奏する効果に加え、摩擦部材が接続部材に配設される場合に比較して、摩擦部材が摩耗した場合の摩擦部材の取り替えを容易とすることができる。 According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, it is possible to facilitate the replacement of the friction member when the friction member is worn, as compared with the case where the friction member is arranged on the connecting member. ..

遊技機I5において、前記摩擦部材は、擦れた状態において前記操作部材に所定の動摩擦を与える低摩擦部と、その低摩擦部に比較して大きな動摩擦を与える高摩擦部と、を備え、それらが前記操作部材の移動方向に沿って分割配置されることを特徴とする遊技機I6。 In the game machine I5, the friction member includes a low friction portion that gives a predetermined dynamic friction to the operating member in a rubbed state, and a high friction portion that gives a large dynamic friction as compared with the low friction portion. The gaming machine I6, characterized in that it is divided and arranged along the moving direction of the operating member.

遊技機I6によれば、操作部材が主に低摩擦部から動摩擦を受ける場合と、主に高摩擦部から動摩擦を受ける場合とで、操作部材の接続部材に対する移動抵抗を変化させることができる。従って、操作感を2段階に切り替えることができる。 According to the game machine I6, the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member can be changed depending on whether the operating member receives the dynamic friction mainly from the low friction portion or the dynamic friction mainly from the high friction portion. Therefore, the feeling of operation can be switched between two stages.

遊技機I1において、前記操作部材は、重心位置を構成する重し部材を備え、前記可変手段による移動抵抗の調整が、前記重し部材の操作部材の回転軸からの距離が変化することにより行われることを特徴とする遊技機I7。 In the game machine I1, the operation member includes a weight member constituting the position of the center of gravity, and the adjustment of the movement resistance by the variable means is performed by changing the distance of the weight member from the rotation axis of the operation member. A game machine I7 characterized by being struck.

遊技機I7によれば、遊技機I1の奏する効果に加え、可変手段による移動抵抗の調整が、操作部材の回転軸から重し部材までの距離が変化することにより行われるので、操作部材の移動方向とは逆方向の負荷を与えることで操作部材の移動抵抗を上げる場合に比較して、操作部材にかけられる負荷を低減することができる。 According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the movement resistance is adjusted by the variable means by changing the distance from the rotation axis of the operation member to the weight member, so that the movement of the operation member is performed. The load applied to the operating member can be reduced as compared with the case where the moving resistance of the operating member is increased by applying the load in the direction opposite to the direction.

また、操作部材の回転軸から見て、重し部材を持ち上げる回転方向の回転抵抗を向上させることができるので、重し部材を移動させることにより回転軸に対する重し部材の配置を逆転させることにより、回転抵抗が重くなる方向を逆転させることができる。従って、遊技者に与える操作感を、変化させることができる。 Further, since the rotational resistance in the rotational direction for lifting the weight member can be improved when viewed from the rotation axis of the operating member, the arrangement of the weight member with respect to the rotation axis can be reversed by moving the weight member. , The direction in which the rotational resistance becomes heavy can be reversed. Therefore, the feeling of operation given to the player can be changed.

なお、重し部材を操作部材の回転軸から移動させる態様としては、重し部材が載置される底面の傾斜が操作部材の姿勢変化により変化し、底面の両端の上下関係が反転することにより重し部材が重力で底面を移動する態様が例示される。 In addition, as a mode of moving the weight member from the rotation axis of the operation member, the inclination of the bottom surface on which the weight member is placed changes due to the change in the posture of the operation member, and the vertical relationship between both ends of the bottom surface is reversed. An embodiment in which the weight member moves on the bottom surface by gravity is exemplified.

遊技機I1において、駆動力を発生させる駆動装置と、その駆動装置の駆動力を前記接続部材に伝達可能に構成される伝達装置と、変位により前記操作部材の移動抵抗を調整する抵抗変化部材と、を備え、前記抵抗変化部材は、前記駆動装置の駆動力により変位することを特徴とする遊技機I8。 In the game machine I1, a driving device that generates a driving force, a transmission device that is configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving device to the connecting member, and a resistance changing member that adjusts the movement resistance of the operating member by displacement. I8, wherein the resistance changing member is displaced by a driving force of the driving device.

遊技機I8によれば、遊技機I1の奏する効果に加え、操作部材の移動抵抗が、接続部材を駆動させる駆動装置の駆動力により抵抗変化部材を変位させることにより調整されるので、追加の駆動装置無しで、操作部材および接続部材の外観を全く変えずに操作部材の移動抵抗を調整することができる。 According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the movement resistance of the operating member is adjusted by displacement the resistance changing member by the driving force of the driving device that drives the connecting member, so that additional driving is performed. Without the device, the moving resistance of the operating member can be adjusted without changing the appearance of the operating member and the connecting member at all.

そのため、遊技者が触って初めて操作部材の移動抵抗の状態を確認することができ、操作部材を触ることの遊技者にとっての価値を引き上げることができる。また、有利な状態になったことを契機に操作部材の移動抵抗を変化させる場合には、操作をする遊技者にしか分からない形で、遊技者にとって有利な状態になったと告知することができる。 Therefore, the state of the movement resistance of the operating member can be confirmed only when the player touches it, and the value for the player of touching the operating member can be increased. In addition, when the movement resistance of the operating member is changed when the operating member is in an advantageous state, it can be notified that the operating member is in an advantageous state in a form known only to the operating player. ..

遊技機A1からA12,B1からB11,C1からC6,D1からD7,E1からE5,F1からF7,G1からG6,H1からH7,I1からI8のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はスロットマシンであることを特徴とする遊技機J1。中でも、スロットマシンの基本構成としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を動的表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する可変表示手段を備え、始動用操作手段(例えば操作レバー)の操作に起因して識別情報の動的表示が開始され、停止用操作手段(ストップボタン)の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の動的表示が停止され、その停止時の確定識別情報が特定識別情報であることを必要条件として、遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態を発生させる特別遊技状態発生手段とを備えた遊技機」となる。この場合、遊技媒体はコイン、メダル等が代表例として挙げられる。 In any of the game machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the game machine is a slot machine. A game machine J1 characterized by this. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

遊技機A1からA12,B1からB11,C1からC6,D1からD7,E1からE5,F1からF7,G1からG6,H1からH7,I1からI8のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はパチンコ遊技機であることを特徴とする遊技機J2。中でも、パチンコ遊技機の基本構成としては操作ハンドルを備え、その操作ハンドルの操作に応じて球を所定の遊技領域へ発射し、球が遊技領域内の所定の位置に配設された作動口に入賞(又は作動口を通過)することを必要条件として、表示手段において動的表示されている識別情報が所定時間後に確定停止されるものが挙げられる。また、特別遊技状態の発生時には、遊技領域内の所定の位置に配設された可変入賞装置(特定入賞口)が所定の態様で開放されて球を入賞可能とし、その入賞個数に応じた有価価値(景品球のみならず、磁気カードへ書き込まれるデータ等も含む)が付与されるものが挙げられる。 In any of the game machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. A game machine J2 characterized by being there. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

遊技機A1からA12,B1からB11,C1からC6,D1からD7,E1からE5,F1からF7,G1からG6,H1からH7,I1からI8のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はパチンコ遊技機とスロットマシンとを融合させたものであることを特徴とする遊技機J3。中でも、融合させた遊技機の基本構成としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を動的表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する可変表示手段を備え、始動用操作手段(例えば操作レバー)の操作に起因して識別情報の変動が開始され、停止用操作手段(例えばストップボタン)の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の動的表示が停止され、その停止時の確定識別情報が特定識別情報であることを必要条件として、遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態を発生させる特別遊技状態発生手段とを備え、遊技媒体として球を使用すると共に、前記識別情報の動的表示の開始に際しては所定数の球を必要とし、特別遊技状態の発生に際しては多くの球が払い出されるように構成されている遊技機」となる。 In any of the game machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the game machine is a pachinko machine. A game machine J3 characterized by being fused with a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 パチンコ機(遊技機)
310、13310、14310、15310、16310、20310 首振り操作部材(操作部材の一部、入力装置の一部、第1移動部材)
311a 挿通孔(係止部)
313d 第2センサ部材(検出装置)
317、13317 レンズ部材(入力装置の一部、入力部、押し込み部材、操作部)
330、3330、5330、8330、10330、13330 内側ケース部材(支持部材の一部、本体ケース)
331d1 レバー支持軸(第1軸、第2軸)
331d2 偏心カム軸(第1軸)
333、2333、4333、6333、14333 偏心カム部材(伝達部材、偏心カム部材)
333b 筒状部(円筒部)
335 第1駆動装置(駆動装置)
336、4336、5336、8336、14336 ロック部材(規制部材、ロック部材)
338 ギアダンパ(制動手段)
340、2340、3340、4340、7340、9340、13340、18340、19340 レバー部材(移動部材の一部、接続部材)
350、4350、7350、 剥離部材(被規制部材の一部)
363 軸支棒(第2軸)
364 緩衝部材
366 振動装置(演出部材の一部、振動装置)
366b 押し付け部材(振動部)
2333a 本体部材(回転ギア)
2333b カム部材(偏心カム)
5336a1 湾曲壁部(凹設部)
13312、15312、20312 姿勢修正装置(修正手段、可変手段の一部)
13312a 当接部材(第2移動部材)
13312b 支持部材
13312c 鉤部材(ロック部材)
13322 右前カバー(カバー部材)
13322b、17322b 壁部材(被当接部材)
14333c2 凸設部(第1凸設部)
14337 姿勢切替装置(切替手段)
14337a 本体部材(伝達部材の一部、切替手段の一部)
14337b 延設部(伝達部材の一部)
14337b1 凸設部(第2凸設部)
16315 分離防止カバー(可変手段の一部)
16315e 鉄球(重し部材)
17322b1 延設部(可変手段の一部、摩擦部材)
17362c 摩擦腕部(可変手段の一部)
18347 伝達装置(可変手段の一部、抵抗変化部材の一部)
CS1 振動コイルスプリング(第2付勢装置)
CS2 押し込みコイルスプリング(第1付勢装置)
M41 電磁石部材(電磁石)
RB ゴムバンド(可変手段の一部、抵抗変化部材の一部)
SP1、SP21、SP31、SP41、SP101 ねじりバネ(第1付勢部材、付勢部材)
SP13 コイルバネ(弾性部材、可変手段の一部)
10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
310, 13310, 14310, 15310, 16310, 20310 Swing operation member (part of operation member, part of input device, first moving member)
311a Insertion hole (locking part)
313d 2nd sensor member (detector)
317, 13317 Lens member (part of input device, input part, pushing member, operation part)
330, 3330, 5330, 8330, 10330, 13330 Inner case member (part of support member, main body case)
331d1 lever support shaft (1st shaft, 2nd shaft)
331d2 Eccentric camshaft (1st axis)
333, 2333, 4333, 6333, 14333 Eccentric cam member (transmission member, eccentric cam member)
333b Cylindrical part (cylindrical part)
335 First drive device (drive device)
336, 4336, 5336, 8336, 14336 Lock member (regulatory member, lock member)
338 Gear damper (braking means)
340, 2340, 3340, 4340, 7340, 9340, 13340, 18340, 19340 Lever member (part of moving member, connecting member)
350, 4350, 7350, peeling member (part of regulated member)
363 Shaft support rod (2nd shaft)
364 Cushioning member 366 Vibration device (part of production member, vibration device)
366b Pressing member (vibrating part)
2333a Main body member (rotary gear)
2333b Cam member (eccentric cam)
5336a1 Curved wall part (concave part)
13312, 15312, 20312 Posture correction device (correction means, part of variable means)
13312a Contact member (second moving member)
13312b Support member 13312c Hook member (lock member)
13322 Right front cover (cover member)
13322b, 17322b Wall member (contact member)
14333c2 Convex part (first convex part)
14337 Posture switching device (switching means)
14337a Main body member (part of transmission member, part of switching means)
14337b Extension (part of transmission member)
14337b1 Convex part (second convex part)
16315 Separation prevention cover (part of variable means)
16315e Iron ball (weight member)
17322b1 Extension (part of variable means, friction member)
17362c Friction arm (part of variable means)
18347 Transmission device (part of variable means, part of resistance changing member)
CS1 vibration coil spring (second urging device)
CS2 Push-in coil spring (1st urging device)
M41 Electromagnet member (electromagnet)
RB rubber band (part of variable means, part of resistance changing member)
SP1, SP21, SP31, SP41, SP101 Torsion spring (first urging member, urging member)
SP13 Coil spring (elastic member, part of variable means)

本発明は、パチンコ機などの遊技機に関するものである。 The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

パチンコ機などの遊技機において、遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材が、振動装置を備える遊技機がある(特許文献1)。 In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the player is moving member to move between a first position and a second position by operation, there is a gaming machine provided with a vibration device (patent document 1).

特開2001−120741号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-120741

しかしながら、上述した従来の遊技機では、振動装置の振動伝達に改良の余地があるという問題点があった。 However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the vibration transmission of the vibration device .

本発明は、上記例示した問題点を解決するためになされたものであり、振動装置の振動伝達を良好にすることができる遊技機を提供することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving vibration transmission of a vibrating device .

この目的を達成するために請求項1記載の遊技機は、遊技者操作によって第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する所定部材と、その所定部材に配設され振動を発生可能とされる振動装置と、前記所定部材を前記第1位置または前記第2位置へ向けて付勢する付勢手段と、を備え、前記振動装置の振動の方向と、前記所定部材の移動による前記振動装置の移動方向とが互いに傾斜するGaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this object, a predetermined member that moves between a first position and a second position by operation of the player, and can generate vibration are arranged in the predetermined member The vibrating device and the urging means for urging the predetermined member toward the first position or the second position are provided, and the vibration direction of the vibrating device and the vibration due to the movement of the predetermined member are provided. The moving direction of the device is tilted with each other .

請求項1記載の遊技機によれば、振動装置の振動伝達を良好にすることができる。 According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the vibration transmission of the vibration device can be improved.

第1実施形態におけるパチンコ機の正面図である。It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. パチンコ機の遊技盤の正面図である。It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. パチンコ機の背面図である。It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. パチンコ機の電気的構成を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. 操作デバイスの正面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (a)は、パチンコ機の部分正面図であり、(b)は、図6(a)のVIb−VIb線におけるパチンコ機の部分断面図である。(A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine on the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). (a)は、パチンコ機の部分正面図であり、(b)は、図7(a)のVIIb−VIIb線におけるパチンコ機の部分断面図である。(A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a). 操作デバイスの正面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view of the operation device. 操作デバイスの正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. 操作デバイスの正面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view of the operation device. 首振り操作部材及びレバー部材の分解正面斜視図である。It is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. レバー部材の本体部材、上部カバー部材、下部カバー部材及び首振り部材の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view disassembled perspective view of the main body member, the upper cover member, the lower cover member and the swinging member of a lever member. 首振り操作部材の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of the swing operation member. (a)は、偏心カム部材の正面図であり、(b)は、偏心カム部材の底面図であり、(c)は、図14(a)のXIVc−XIVc線における偏心カム部材の断面図である。(A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the eccentric cam member in the XIVc-XIVc line of FIG. 14 (a). Is. (a)は、位相検出部材の正面図であり、(b)は、位相検出部材の底面図であり、(c)は、図15(a)のXVc−XVc線における位相検出部材の断面図である。(A) is a front view of the phase detection member, (b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the phase detection member in the XVc-XVc line of FIG. 15 (a). Is. (a)は、レバー部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図16(a)の矢印XVIb方向視におけるレバー部材の側面図であり、(c)は、図16(a)の矢印XVIb方向視におけるレバー部材の上面図である。(A) is a front view of the lever member, (b) is a side view of the lever member in the direction of arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a), and (c) is an arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a). It is a top view of the lever member in a directional view. (a)は、操作デバイスの正面図であり、(b)は、図17(a)の矢印XVIIb方向視における操作デバイスの側面図である。(A) is a front view of the operating device, and (b) is a side view of the operating device in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). (a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図であり、(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIb−XVIIIb線における操作デバイスの部分断面図であり、(c)は、図17(a)のXVIIIc−XVIIIc線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). 図18(a)の首振り操作部材の部分拡大図である。It is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member of FIG. 18A. 図17(b)のXX−XX線における首振り操作部材の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the swing operation member in line XX-XX of FIG. 17B. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における首振り操作部材及びレバー部材の部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図であり、(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIc−XVIIIc線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 17 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第2実施形態における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device in the second embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)は、偏心カム部材のカム部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図30(a)の矢印XXXb方向視におけるカム部材の側面図であり、(c)は、偏心カム部材の本体部材の正面図であり、(d)は、図30(c)の矢印XXXd方向視における本体部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the cam member of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the cam member in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a), and (c) is a side view of the eccentric cam member. It is a front view of the main body member, and FIG. 30 (d) is a side view of the main body member in the direction of arrow XXXd of FIG. 30 (c). (a)は、偏心カム部材の正面図であり、(b)は図31(a)のXXXIb方向視における偏心カム部材の側面図であり、(c)は、偏心カム部材の正面図である。(A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the eccentric cam member in the XXXIb direction view of FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a front view of the eccentric cam member. .. (a)は、ロック解除カム部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図32(a)のXXXIIb方向視におけるロック解除カム部材の底面図であり、(c)は、図32(a)のXXXIIc方向視におけるロック解除カム部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the unlocked cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlocked cam member in the direction of XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of FIG. 32 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in the XXXIIc direction view. (a)は、ロック部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図33(a)のXXXIIIb方向視におけるロック部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the direction of XXXIIIb of FIG. 33 (a). (a)から(d)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック部材及びロック解除カム部材の正面図である。(A) to (d) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and an unlock cam member. (a)から(c)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック部材及びロック解除カム部材の正面図である。(A) to (c) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and an unlock cam member. (a)から(c)は、軸支棒の軸方向視で図示した首振り部材の本体部材の正面図である。(A) to (c) are front views of the main body member of the swinging member illustrated in the axial direction of the shaft support rod. (a)は、モータ固定板の上面図であり、(b)は、図37(a)のXXXVIIb方向視におけるモータ固定板の側面図であり、(c)は、図37(b)に示す状態からU字状部材がスライド移動された状態を示すモータ固定板の側面図である。(A) is a top view of the motor fixing plate, (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate in the direction of XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a), and (c) is shown in FIG. 37 (b). It is a side view of the motor fixing plate which shows the state which the U-shaped member was slid and moved from the state. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第3実施形態における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device according to the third embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). 第4実施形態における操作デバイスの正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of the operation device in 4th Embodiment. (a)は、ロック部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図44(a)のXXXXIVb方向視におけるロック部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the XXXIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a). (a)及び(b)は、ロック部材の側面図である。(A) and (b) are side views of the lock member. レバー部材及び首振り操作部材の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of a lever member and a swing operation member. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). 図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). 図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (a)は、レバー部材の本体部材及びロック受け部材の上面図であり、(b)及び(c)は、図53(a)のLIIIb方向視におけるレバー部材の本体部材及びロック受け部材の側面図である。(A) is a top view of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member, and (b) and (c) are side surfaces of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member in the LIIIb direction view of FIG. 53 (a). It is a figure. (a)及び(b)は、図6のVIb―VIb線で断面視したパチンコ機及び操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine and the operating device viewed in cross section along the line VIb-VIb of FIG. 第5実施形態における内側ケース部材の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of the inner case member in 5th Embodiment. (a)は、偏心カム部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図56(a)のLVIb方向視における偏心カム部材の底面図であり、(c)は、図56(a)のLVIc方向視における偏心カム部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member in the LVIb direction view of FIG. 56 (a), and (c) is an LVIc of FIG. 56 (a). It is a side view of an eccentric cam member in a directional view. (a)は、ロック解除カム部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図57(a)のLVIIb方向視におけるロック解除カム部材の底面図であり、(c)は、図57(a)のLVIIc方向視におけるロック解除カム部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the unlock cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member in the LVIIb direction view of FIG. 57 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of FIG. 57 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in the LVIIc direction view of. (a)は、ロック部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図58(a)のLVIII方向視におけるロック部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the LVIII direction view of FIG. 58 (a). (a)及び(b)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) and (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in time series. (a)から(b)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) to (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member showing the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in chronological order. (a)及び(b)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) and (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in time series. レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。It is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlock cam member, and a lock member. (a)及び(b)は、第6実施形態におけるレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) and (b) are the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in chronological order according to the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (a)及び(b)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) and (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in time series. (a)及び(b)は、レバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材、偏心カム部材、ロック解除カム部材及びロック部材の模式図である。(A) and (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in time series. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第7実施形態における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the seventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第8実施形態における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the eighth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、第9実施形態における操作デバイスの側面図である。(A) and (b) are side views of the operation device in the ninth embodiment. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第10実施形態における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device according to the tenth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。(A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). 図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイスの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第11実施形態における首振り操作部材及びレバー部材の部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the eleventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第12実施形態における首振り操作部材及びレバー部材の部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the twelfth embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). 第13実施形態における操作デバイスの正面斜視図である。It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. 操作デバイスの正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. 操作デバイスの正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. 首振り操作部材及びレバー部材の分解正面斜視図である。It is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. レバー部材の本体部材、上部カバー部材、下部カバー部材及び首振り部材の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view disassembled perspective view of the main body member, the upper cover member, the lower cover member and the swinging member of a lever member. 首振り操作部材の正面分解斜視図である。It is a front view exploded perspective view of the swing operation member. (a)は、正面カバー及び背面カバーの底面図であり、(b)は正面カバー、背面カバー及び分離防止カバーの底面図であり、(c)は、図83(b)のLXXXIIIc―LXXXIIIc線における正面カバー、背面カバー、分離防止カバー及び保護カバーの断面図である。(A) is a bottom view of the front cover and the back cover, (b) is a bottom view of the front cover, the back cover and the separation prevention cover, and (c) is the line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc of FIG. 83 (b). It is sectional drawing of the front cover, the back cover, the separation prevention cover and the protective cover in. (a)は、背面側枠部材の斜視図であり、(b)は、図84(a)の矢印LXXXIVb方向視(ガイド底壁の面に垂直な方向からの方向視)における背面側枠部材の上面図であり、(c)は、図84(b)のLXXXIVc−LXXXIVc線における背面側枠部材の断面図である。(A) is a perspective view of the back side frame member, and (b) is the back side frame member in the direction view (direction view from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the guide bottom wall) indicated by the arrow LXXXIVb in FIG. 84 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXXIVc of FIG. 84 (b). (a)は、鉤部材の正面斜視図であり、(b)は、図85(a)の矢印LXXXVb方向視における鉤部材の正面図であり、(c)は、図85(a)の矢印LXXXVc方向視における鉤部材の側面図であり、(d)は、図85(b)のLXXXVd−LXXXVd線における鉤部材の断面図である。(A) is a front perspective view of the hook member, (b) is a front view of the hook member in the direction of arrow LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a), and (c) is an arrow of FIG. 85 (a). It is a side view of the hook member in the LXXXVc direction view, and FIG. 85 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the hook member in the line LXXXVd-LXXXXVd of FIG. 85 (b). (a)は、支持部材の正面斜視図であり、(b)は、図86(a)の矢印LXXXVIb方向視における支持部材の上面図であり、(c)は、図86(b)のLXXXVIc−LXXXVIc線における支持部材の断面図である。(A) is a front perspective view of the support member, (b) is a top view of the support member in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIb of FIG. 86 (a), and (c) is a top view of the support member of FIG. 86 (b). It is sectional drawing of the support member in -LXXXVIc line. (a)は、背面側枠部材の部分上面図であり、(b)は、図87(a)のLXXXVIIb−LXXXVIIb線における背面側枠部材の部分断面図であり、(c)は、背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の部分上面図であり、(d)は、図87(c)のLXXXVIId−LXXXVIId線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の部分断面図であり、(e)は、図87(d)のLXXXVIIe−LXXXVIIe線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の断面図である。(A) is a partial top view of the back side frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member in the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a), and (c) is the back side. It is a partial top view of a frame member and a posture correction device, (d) is a partial sectional view of a back side frame member and a posture correction device in line LXXXVIId-LXXXVIId of FIG. 87 (c), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the back side frame member and the posture correction apparatus in line 87 (d) LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe. (a)は、背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の部分上面図であり、(b)は、図88(a)のLXXXVIIIb−LXXXVIIIb線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の部分断面図であり、(c)は、背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の部分上面図であり、(d)は、図88(c)のLXXXVIIId−LXXXVIIId線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の部分断面図であり、(e)は、背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の部分上面図であり、(f)は、図88(e)のLXXXVIIIf−LXXXVIIIf線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の部分断面図である。(A) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line LXXXXVIIIb-LXXXXVIIIb of FIG. 88 (a). , (C) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line LXXXVIIId-LXXXXVIIId of FIG. 88 (c). Yes, (e) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf of FIG. 88 (e). Is. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)は、第14実施形態におけるロック部材の正面図であり、(b)は、図91(a)の矢印LXXXXIb方向視におけるロック部材の側面図である。(A) is a front view of the lock member according to the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the direction of the arrow LXXXXIb of FIG. 91 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)から(c)は、偏心カム部材及び姿勢切替装置の部分拡大図である。(A) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member and the posture switching device. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)から(c)は、偏心カム部材及び姿勢切替装置の部分拡大図である。(A) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member and the posture switching device. (a)及び(b)は、第15実施形態における当接部材の上面図であり、(c)は、図87のLXXXVIIb−LXXXVIIb線に対応する線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の断面図であり、(d)は、図98(c)のLXXXXVIIId−LXXXXVIIId線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の断面図である。(A) and (b) are top views of the contact member in the fifteenth embodiment, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the LXXXVIIb-LXXXXVIIb line of FIG. FIG. 3D is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line LXXXXXXVIIId-LXXXXVIIId of FIG. 98 (c). (a)は、図87のLXXXVIIb−LXXXVIIb線に対応する線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の断面図であり、(b)は、図99(a)のLXXXXIXb−LXXXXIXb線における背面側枠部材及び姿勢修正装置の断面図である。(A) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line LXXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of a member and a posture correction device. (a)から(d)は、第16実施形態における操作デバイスの側面図である。(A) to (d) are side views of the operation device in the 16th embodiment. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第17実施形態における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in 17th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (a)から(c)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第18実施形態における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the eighteenth embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第19実施形態における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in 19th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第20実施形態における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the twentieth embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). 図104(a)の矢印CV方向視における首振り操作部材の背面図である。It is a rear view of the swing operation member in the arrow CV direction view of FIG. 104A. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第21実施形態における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in 21st Embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (a)及び(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第22実施形態における操作デバイスの部分断面図である。(A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the 22nd embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a).

以下、本発明の実施形態について、添付図面を参照して説明する。まず、図1から図27を参照し、第1実施形態として、本発明をパチンコ遊技機(以下、単に「パチンコ機」という)10に適用した場合の一実施形態について説明する。図1は、第1実施形態におけるパチンコ機10の正面図であり、図2はパチンコ機10の遊技盤13の正面図であり、図3はパチンコ機10の背面図である。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 27, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

図1に示すように、パチンコ機10は、略矩形状に組み合わせた木枠により外殻が形成される外枠11と、その外枠11と略同一の外形形状に形成され外枠11に対して開閉可能に支持された内枠12とを備えている。外枠11には、内枠12を支持するために正面視(図1参照)左側の上下2カ所に金属製のヒンジ18が取り付けられ、そのヒンジ18が設けられた側を開閉の軸として内枠12が正面手前側へ開閉可能に支持されている。 As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

内枠12には、多数の釘や入賞口63,64等を有する遊技盤13(図2参照)が裏面側から着脱可能に装着される。この遊技盤13の正面を球(遊技球)が流下することにより弾球遊技が行われる。なお、内枠12には、球を遊技盤13の正面領域に発射する球発射ユニット112a(図4参照)やその球発射ユニット112aから発射された球を遊技盤13の正面領域まで誘導する発射レール(図示せず)等が取り付けられている。 A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

内枠12の正面側には、その正面上側を覆う正面枠14と、その下側を覆う下皿ユニット15とが設けられている。正面枠14及び下皿ユニット15を支持するために正面視(図1参照)左側の上下2カ所に金属製のヒンジ19が取り付けられ、そのヒンジ19が設けられた側を開閉の軸として正面枠14及び下皿ユニット15が正面手前側へ開閉可能に支持されている。なお、内枠12の施錠と正面枠14の施錠とは、シリンダ錠20の鍵穴21に専用の鍵を差し込んで所定の操作を行うことでそれぞれ解除される。 On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

正面枠14は、装飾用の樹脂部品や電気部品等を組み付けたものであり、その略中央部には略楕円形状に開口形成された窓部14cが設けられている。正面枠14の裏面側には2枚の板ガラスを有するガラスユニット16が配設され、そのガラスユニット16を介して遊技盤13の正面がパチンコ機10の正面側に視認可能となっている。 The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

正面枠14には、球を貯留する上皿17が正面側へ張り出して上面を開放した略箱状に形成されており、この上皿17に賞球や貸出球などが排出される。上皿17の底面は正面視(図1参照)右側に下降傾斜して形成され、その傾斜により上皿17に投入された球が球発射ユニット112a(図4参照)へと案内される。また、上皿17の上面には、枠ボタン22が設けられている。この枠ボタン22は、例えば、第3図柄表示装置81(図2参照)で表示される演出のステージを変更したり、スーパーリーチの演出内容を変更したりする場合などに、遊技者により操作される。 On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

正面枠14には、その周囲(例えばコーナー部分)に各種ランプ等の発光手段が設けられている。これら発光手段は、大当たり時や所定のリーチ時等における遊技状態の変化に応じて、点灯又は点滅することにより発光態様が変更制御され、遊技中の演出効果を高める役割を果たす。窓部14cの周縁には、LED等の発光手段を内蔵した電飾部29〜33が設けられている。パチンコ機10においては、これら電飾部29〜33が大当たりランプ等の演出ランプとして機能し、大当たり時やリーチ演出時等には内蔵するLEDの点灯や点滅によって各電飾部29〜33が点灯または点滅して、大当たり中である旨、或いは大当たり一歩手前のリーチ中である旨が報知される。また、正面枠14の正面視(図1参照)左上部には、LED等の発光手段が内蔵され賞球の払い出し中とエラー発生時とを表示可能な表示ランプ34が設けられている。 The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

また、右側の電飾部32下側には、正面枠14の裏面側を視認できるように裏面側より透明樹脂を取り付けて小窓35が形成され、遊技盤13正面の貼着スペースK1(図2参照)に貼付される証紙等がパチンコ機10の正面から視認可能とされている。また、パチンコ機10においては、より煌びやかさを醸し出すために、電飾部29〜33の周りの領域にクロムメッキを施したABS樹脂製のメッキ部材36が取り付けられている。 Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

窓部14cの下方には、貸球操作部40が配設されている。貸球操作部40には、度数表示部41と、球貸しボタン42と、返却ボタン43とが設けられている。パチンコ機10の側方に配置されるカードユニット(球貸しユニット)(図示せず)に紙幣やカード等を投入した状態で貸球操作部40が操作されると、その操作に応じて球の貸出が行われる。具体的には、度数表示部41はカード等の残額情報が表示される領域であり、内蔵されたLEDが点灯して残額情報として残額が数字で表示される。球貸しボタン42は、カード等(記録媒体)に記録された情報に基づいて貸出球を得るために操作されるものであり、カード等に残額が存在する限りにおいて貸出球が上皿17に供給される。返却ボタン43は、カードユニットに挿入されたカード等の返却を求める際に操作される。なお、カードユニットを介さずに球貸し装置等から上皿17に球が直接貸し出されるパチンコ機、いわゆる現金機では貸球操作部40が不要となるが、この場合には、貸球操作部40の設置部分に飾りシール等を付加して部品構成は共通のものとしても良い。カードユニットを用いたパチンコ機と現金機との共通化を図ることができる。 A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

上皿17の下側に位置する下皿ユニット15には、その左側部に上皿17に貯留しきれなかった球を貯留するための下皿50が上面を開放した略箱状に形成されている。下皿50の右側には、球を遊技盤13の正面へ打ち込むために遊技者によって操作される操作ハンドル51及び操作デバイス300が配設される。なお、操作デバイス300については後述する。 In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

操作ハンドル51の内部には、球発射ユニット112aの駆動を許可するためのタッチセンサ51aと、押下操作している期間中には球の発射を停止する発射停止スイッチ51bと、操作ハンドル51の回動操作量(回動位置)を電気抵抗の変化により検出する可変抵抗器(図示せず)などが内蔵されている。操作ハンドル51が遊技者によって右回りに回動操作されると、タッチセンサ51aがオンされると共に可変抵抗器の抵抗値が回動操作量に対応して変化し、その可変抵抗器の抵抗値に対応した強さ(発射強度)で球が発射され、これにより遊技者の操作に対応した飛び量で遊技盤13の正面へ球が打ち込まれる。また、操作ハンドル51が遊技者により操作されていない状態においては、タッチセンサ51aおよび発射停止スイッチ51bがオフとなっている。 Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

下皿50の正面下方部には、下皿50に貯留された球を下方へ排出する際に操作するための球抜きレバー52が設けられている。この球抜きレバー52は、常時、右方向に付勢されており、その付勢に抗して左方向へスライドさせることにより、下皿50の底面に形成された底面口が開口して、その底面口から球が自然落下して排出される。この球抜きレバー52の操作は、通常、下皿50の下方に下皿50から排出された球を受け取る箱(一般に「千両箱」と称される)を置いた状態で行われる。下皿50の右方には、上述したように操作ハンドル51が配設され、下皿50の左方には灰皿(図示せず)が取り付けられている。 A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

図2に示すように、遊技盤13は、正面視略正方形状に切削加工したベース板60に、球案内用の多数の釘(図示せず)や風車(図示せず)の他、レール61,62、一般入賞口63、第1入賞口64、第2入賞口640、可変入賞装置330、スルーゲート67、可変表示装置ユニット80等を組み付けて構成され、その周縁部が内枠12(図1参照)の裏面側に取り付けられる。ベース板60は光透過性の樹脂材料からなり、その正面側からベース板60の背面側に配設された各種構造体を遊技者に視認させることが可能に形成される。一般入賞口63、第1入賞口64、第2入賞口640、可変表示装置ユニット80は、ルータ加工によってベース板60に形成された貫通穴に配設され、遊技盤13の正面側からタッピングネジ等により固定されている。 As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc.

遊技盤13の正面中央部分は、正面枠14の窓部14c(図1参照)を通じて内枠12の正面側から視認することができる。以下に、主に図2を参照して、遊技盤13の構成について説明する。 The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

遊技盤13の正面には、帯状の金属板を略円弧状に屈曲加工して形成した外レール62が植立され、その外レール62の内側位置には外レール62と同様に帯状の金属板で形成した円弧状の内レール61が植立される。この内レール61と外レール62とにより遊技盤13の正面外周が囲まれ、遊技盤13とガラスユニット16(図1参照)とにより前後が囲まれることにより、遊技盤13の正面には、球の挙動により遊技が行われる遊技領域が形成される。遊技領域は、遊技盤13の正面であって2本のレール61,62とレール間を繋ぐ樹脂製の外縁部材73とにより区画して形成される領域(入賞口等が配設され、発射された球が流下する領域)である。 An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

2本のレール61,62は、球発射ユニット112a(図4参照)から発射された球を遊技盤13上部へ案内するために設けられたものである。内レール61の先端部分(図2の左上部)には戻り球防止部材68が取り付けられ、一旦、遊技盤13の上部へ案内された球が再度球案内通路内に戻ってしまうといった事態が防止される。外レール62の先端部(図2の右上部)には、球の最大飛翔部分に対応する位置に返しゴム69が取り付けられ、所定以上の勢いで発射された球は、返しゴム69に当たって、勢いが減衰されつつ中央部側へ跳ね返される。 The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

遊技領域の正面視左側下部(図2の左側下部)には、発光手段である複数のLED及び7セグメント表示器を備える第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bが配設されている。第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bは、主制御装置110(図4参照)で行われる各制御に応じた表示がなされるものであり、主にパチンコ機10の遊技状態の表示が行われる。本実施形態では、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bは、球が、第1入賞口64へ入賞したか、第2入賞口640へ入賞したかに応じて使い分けられるように構成されている。具体的には、球が、第1入賞口64へ入賞した場合には、第1図柄表示装置37Aが作動し、一方で、球が、第2入賞口640へ入賞した場合には、第1図柄表示装置37Bが作動するように構成されている。 In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

また、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bは、LEDにより、パチンコ機10が確変中か時短中か通常中であるかを点灯状態により示したり、変動中であるか否かを点灯状態により示したり、停止図柄が確変大当たりに対応した図柄か普通大当たりに対応した図柄か外れ図柄であるかを点灯状態により示したり、保留球数を点灯状態により示すと共に、7セグメント表示装置により、大当たり中のラウンド数やエラー表示を行う。なお、複数のLEDは、それぞれのLEDの発光色(例えば、赤、緑、青)が異なるよう構成され、その発光色の組み合わせにより、少ないLEDでパチンコ機10の各種遊技状態を示唆することができる。 In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

尚、本パチンコ機10では、第1入賞口64及び第2入賞口640へ入賞があったことを契機として抽選が行われる。パチンコ機10は、その抽選において、大当たりか否かの当否判定(大当たり抽選)を行うと共に、大当たりと判定した場合はその大当たり種別の判定も行う。ここで判定される大当たり種別としては、15R確変大当たり、4R確変大当たり、15R通常大当たりが用意されている。第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bには、変動終了後の停止図柄として抽選の結果が大当たりであるか否かが示されるだけでなく、大当たりである場合はその大当たり種別に応じた図柄が示される。 In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

ここで、「15R確変大当たり」とは、最大ラウンド数が15ラウンドの大当たりの後に高確率状態へ移行する確変大当たりのことであり、「4R確変大当たり」とは、最大ラウンド数が4ラウンドの大当たりの後に高確率状態へ移行する確変大当たりのことである。また、「15R通常大当たり」は、最大ラウンド数が15ラウンドの大当たりの後に、低確率状態へ移行すると共に、所定の変動回数の間(例えば、100変動回数)は時短状態となる大当たりのことである。 Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

また、「高確率状態」とは、大当たり終了後に付加価値としてその後の大当たり確率がアップした状態、いわゆる確率変動中(確変中)の時をいい、換言すれば、特別遊技状態へ移行し易い遊技の状態のことである。本実施形態における高確率状態(確変中)は、後述する第2図柄の当たり確率がアップして第2入賞口640へ球が入賞し易い遊技の状態を含む。「低確率状態」とは、確変中でない時をいい、大当たり確率が通常の状態、即ち、確変の時より大当たり確率が低い状態をいう。また、「低確率状態」のうちの時短状態(時短中)とは、大当たり確率が通常の状態であると共に、大当たり確率がそのままで第2図柄の当たり確率のみがアップして第2入賞口640へ球が入賞し易い遊技の状態のことをいう。一方、パチンコ機10が通常中とは、確変中でも時短中でもない遊技の状態(大当たり確率も第2図柄の当たり確率もアップしていない状態)である。 In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

確変中や時短中は、第2図柄の当たり確率がアップするだけではなく、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放される時間も変更され、通常中と比して長い時間が設定される。電動役物640aが開放された状態(開放状態)にある場合は、その電動役物640aが閉鎖された状態(閉鎖状態)にある場合と比して、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態となる。よって、確変中や時短中は、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞し易い状態となり、大当たり抽選が行われる回数を増やすことができる。 During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

なお、確変中や時短中において、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aの開放時間を変更するのではなく、または、その開放時間を変更することに加えて、1回の当たりで電動役物640aが開放する回数を通常中よりも増やす変更を行うものとしてもよい。また、確変中や時短中において、第2図柄の当たり確率は変更せず、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放される時間および1回の当たりで電動役物640aが開放する回数の少なくとも一方を変更するものとしてもよい。また、確変中や時短中において、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放される時間や、1回の当たりで電動役物640aを開放する回数はせず、第2図柄の当たり確率だけを、通常中と比してアップするよう変更するものであってもよい。 In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one time. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time is not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

遊技領域には、球が入賞することにより5個から15個の球が賞球として払い出される複数の一般入賞口63が配設されている。また、遊技領域の中央部分には、可変表示装置ユニット80が配設されている。可変表示装置ユニット80には、第1入賞口64及び第2入賞口640への入賞(始動入賞)をトリガとして、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにおける変動表示と同期させながら、第3図柄の変動表示を行う液晶ディスプレイ(以下単に「表示装置」と略す)で構成された第3図柄表示装置81と、スルーゲート67の球の通過をトリガとして第2図柄を変動表示するLEDで構成される第2図柄表示装置(図示せず)とが設けられている。また、可変表示装置ユニット80には、第3図柄表示装置81の外周を囲むようにして、センターフレーム86が配設されている。 In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and has a third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

第3図柄表示装置81は9インチサイズの大型の液晶ディスプレイで構成されるものであり、表示制御装置114(図4参照)によって表示内容が制御されることにより、例えば上、中及び下の3つの図柄列が表示される。各図柄列は複数の図柄(第3図柄)によって構成され、これらの第3図柄が図柄列毎に横スクロールして第3図柄表示装置81の表示画面上にて第3図柄が可変表示されるようになっている。本実施形態の第3図柄表示装置81は、主制御装置110(図4参照)の制御に伴った遊技状態の表示が第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bで行われるのに対して、その第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bの表示に応じた装飾的な表示を行うものである。なお、表示装置に代えて、例えばリール等を用いて第3図柄表示装置81を構成するようにしても良い。 The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

第2図柄表示装置は、球がスルーゲート67を通過する毎に表示図柄(第2図柄(図示せず))としての「○」の図柄と「×」の図柄とを所定時間交互に点灯させる変動表示を行うものである。パチンコ機10では、球がスルーゲート67を通過したことが検出されると、当たり抽選が行われる。その当たり抽選の結果、当たりであれば、第2図柄表示装置において、第2図柄の変動表示後に「○」の図柄が停止表示される。また、当たり抽選の結果、外れであれば、第2図柄表示装置において、第3図柄の変動表示後に「×」の図柄が停止表示される。 The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

パチンコ機10は、第2図柄表示装置における変動表示が所定図柄(本実施形態においては「○」の図柄)で停止した場合に、第2入賞口640に付随された電動役物640aが所定時間だけ作動状態となる(開放される)よう構成されている。 In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間は、遊技状態が通常中の場合よりも、確変中または時短中の方が短くなるように設定される。これにより、確変中および時短中は、第2図柄の変動表示が短い時間で行われるので、当たり抽選を通常中よりも多く行うことができる。よって、当たり抽選において当たりとなる機会が増えるので、第2入賞口640の電動役物640aが開放状態となる機会を遊技者に多く与えることができる。よって、確変中および時短中は、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態とすることができる。 The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

なお、確変中または時短中において、当たり確率を高める、1回に当たりに対する電動役物640aの開放時間や開放回数を増やすなど、その他の方法によっても、確変中または時短中に第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態としている場合は、第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間を遊技状態にかかわらず一定としてもよい。一方、第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間を、確変中または時短中において通常中よりも短く設定する場合は、当たり確率を遊技状態にかかわらず一定にしてもよいし、また、1回の当たりに対する電動役物640aの開放時間や開放回数を遊技状態にかかわらず一定にしてもよい。 In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

スルーゲート67は、可変表示装置ユニット80の左右の領域において遊技盤13に組み付けられ、遊技盤13に発射された球の一部が通過可能に構成されている。スルーゲート67を球が通過すると、第2図柄の当たり抽選が行われる。当たり抽選の後、第2図柄表示装置にて変動表示を行い、当たり抽選の結果が当たりであれば、変動表示の停止図柄として「○」の図柄を表示し、当たり抽選の結果が外れであれば、変動表示の停止図柄として「×」の図柄を表示する。 The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

球のスルーゲート67の通過回数は、合計で最大4回まで保留され、その保留球数が上述した第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにより表示されると共に第2図柄保留ランプ(図示せず)においても点灯表示される。第2図柄保留ランプは、最大保留数分の4つ設けられ、第3図柄表示装置81の下方に左右対称に配設されている。 The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

なお、第2図柄の変動表示は、本実施形態のように、第2図柄表示装置において複数のランプの点灯と非点灯を切り換えることにより行うものの他、第1図柄表示装置37A,37B及び第3図柄表示装置81の一部を使用して行うようにしても良い。同様に、第2図柄保留ランプの点灯を第3図柄表示装置81の一部で行うようにしても良い。また、スルーゲート67の球の通過に対する最大保留球数は4回に限定されるものでなく、3回以下、又は、5回以上の回数(例えば、8回)に設定しても良い。また、スルーゲート67の組み付け数は2つに限定されるものではなく、例えば1つであっても良い。また、スルーゲート67の組み付け位置は可変表示装置ユニット80の左右に限定されるものではなく、例えば、可変表示装置ユニット80の下方でも良い。また、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにより保留球数が示されるので、第2図柄保留ランプにより点灯表示を行わないものとしてもよい。 The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

可変表示装置ユニット80の下方には、球が入賞し得る第1入賞口64が配設されている。この第1入賞口64へ球が入賞すると遊技盤13の裏面側に設けられる第1入賞口スイッチ(図示せず)がオンとなり、その第1入賞口スイッチのオンに起因して主制御装置110(図4参照)で大当たりの抽選がなされ、その抽選結果に応じた表示が第1図柄表示装置37Aで示される。 Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

一方、第1入賞口64の正面視下方には、球が入賞し得る第2入賞口640が配設されている。この第2入賞口640へ球が入賞すると遊技盤13の裏面側に設けられる第2入賞口スイッチ(図示せず)がオンとなり、その第2入賞口スイッチのオンに起因して主制御装置110(図4参照)で大当たりの抽選がなされ、その抽選結果に応じた表示が第1図柄表示装置37Bで示される。 On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

また、第1入賞口64および第2入賞口640は、それぞれ、球が入賞すると5個の球が賞球として払い出される入賞口の1つにもなっている。なお、本実施形態においては、第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数と第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数とを同じに構成したが、第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数と第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数とを異なる数、例えば、第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数を3個とし、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合に払い出される賞球数を5個として構成してもよい。 In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

第2入賞口640には電動役物640aが付随されている。この電動役物640aは開閉可能に構成されており、通常は電動役物640aが閉鎖状態(縮小状態)となって、球が第2入賞口640へ入賞しにくい状態となっている。一方、スルーゲート67への球の通過を契機として行われる第2図柄の変動表示の結果、「○」の図柄が第2図柄表示装置に表示された場合、電動役物640aが開放状態(拡大状態)となり、球が第2入賞口640へ入賞しやすい状態となる。 An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

上述した通り、確変中および時短中は、通常中と比して第2図柄の当たり確率が高く、また、第2図柄の変動表示にかかる時間も短いので、第2図柄の変動表示において「○」の図柄が表示され易くなって、電動役物640aが開放状態(拡大状態)となる回数が増える。更に、確変中および時短中は、電動役物640aが開放される時間も、通常中より長くなる。よって、確変中および時短中は、通常時と比して、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞しやすい状態を作ることができる。 As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" ”Is easy to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

ここで、第1入賞口64に球が入賞した場合と第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合とで、大当たりとなる確率は、低確率状態であっても高確率状態でも同一である。しかしながら、大当たりとなった場合に選定される大当たりの種別として15R確変大当たりとなる確率は、第2入賞口640へ球が入賞した場合のほうが第1入賞口64へ球が入賞した場合よりも高く設定されている。一方、第1入賞口64は、第2入賞口640にあるような電動役物は有しておらず、球が常時入賞可能な状態となっている。 Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

よって、通常中においては、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物が閉鎖状態にある場合が多く、第2入賞口640に入賞しづらいので、電動役物のない第1入賞口64へ向けて、可変表示装置ユニット80の左方を球が通過するように球を発射し(所謂「左打ち」)、第1入賞口64への入賞によって大当たり抽選の機会を多く得て、大当たりとなることを狙った方が、遊技者にとって有利となる。 Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

一方、確変中や時短中は、スルーゲート67に球を通過させることで、第2入賞口640に付随する電動役物640aが開放状態となりやすく、第2入賞口640に入賞しやすい状態であるので、第2入賞口640へ向けて、可変表示装置80の右方を球が通過するように球を発射し(所謂「右打ち」)、スルーゲート67を通過させて電動役物を開放状態にすると共に、第2入賞口640への入賞によって15R確変大当たりとなることを狙った方が、遊技者にとって有利となる。 On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

なお、本実施形態におけるパチンコ機10は、遊技盤13の構成が左右対称とされるため、「右打ち」で第1入賞口64を狙うことも、「左打ち」で第2入賞口640を狙うこともできる。そのため、本実施形態のパチンコ機10は、パチンコ機10の遊技状態(確変中であるか、時短中であるか、通常中であるか)に応じて、遊技者に対し、球の発射の仕方を「左打ち」と「右打ち」とに変えさせることを不要にできる。よって、球の打ち方を変化させる煩わしさを解消することができる。 In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

第1入賞口64の下方には可変入賞装置330(図11参照)が配設されており、その略中央部分に特定入賞口65aが設けられている。パチンコ機10においては、第1入賞口64又は第2入賞口640への入賞に起因して行われた大当たり抽選が大当たりとなると、所定時間(変動時間)が経過した後に、大当たりの停止図柄となるよう第1図柄表示装置37A又は第1図柄表示装置37Bを点灯させると共に、その大当たりに対応した停止図柄を第3図柄表示装置81に表示させて、大当たりの発生が示される。その後、球が入賞し易い特別遊技状態(大当たり)に遊技状態が遷移する。この特別遊技状態として、通常時には閉鎖されている特定入賞口65aが、所定時間(例えば、30秒経過するまで、或いは、球が10個入賞するまで)開放される。 A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

この特定入賞口65aは、所定時間が経過すると閉鎖され、その閉鎖後、再度、その特定入賞口65aが所定時間開放される。この特定入賞口65aの開閉動作は、最高で例えば15回(15ラウンド)繰り返し可能にされている。この開閉動作が行われている状態が、遊技者にとって有利な特別遊技状態の一形態であり、遊技者には、遊技上の価値(遊技価値)の付与として通常時より多量の賞球の払い出しが行われる。 The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

なお、上記した形態に特別遊技状態は限定されるものではない。特定入賞口65aとは別に開閉される大開放口を遊技領域に設け、第1図柄表示装置37A,37Bにおいて大当たりに対応したLEDが点灯した場合に、特定入賞口65aが所定時間開放され、その特定入賞口65aの開放中に、球が特定入賞口65a内へ入賞することを契機として特定入賞口65aとは別に設けられた大開放口が所定時間、所定回数開放される遊技状態を特別遊技状態として形成するようにしても良い。また、特定入賞口65aは1つに限るものではなく、1つ若しくは2以上の複数(例えば3つ)を配置しても良く、また配置位置も第1入賞口64の下方右側や、第1入賞口64の下方左側に限らず、例えば、可変表示装置ユニット80の左方でも良い。 The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

遊技盤13の下側における右隅部には、証紙や識別ラベル等を貼着するための貼着スペースK1が設けられ、貼着スペースK1に貼られた証紙等は、正面枠14の小窓35(図1参照)を通じて視認することができる。 A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

遊技盤13には、アウト口(図示せず)が設けられている。遊技領域を流下する球であって、いずれの入賞口63,64,65a,640にも入賞しなかった球は、アウト口を通って図示しない球排出路へと案内される。アウト口は、特定入賞口65aの左右に一対で配設される。 The game board 13 is provided with an out port (not shown). A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening. The out openings are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

遊技盤13には、球の落下方向を適宜分散、調整等するために多数の釘が植設されているとともに、風車等の各種部材(役物)とが配設されている。 A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

図3に示すように、パチンコ機10の背面側には、制御基板ユニット90,91と、裏パックユニット94とが主に備えられている。制御基板ユニット90は、主基板(主制御装置110)と音声ランプ制御基板(音声ランプ制御装置113)と表示制御基板(表示制御装置114)とが搭載されてユニット化されている。制御基板ユニット91は、払出制御基板(払出制御装置111)と発射制御基板(発射制御装置112)と電源基板(電源装置115)とカードユニット接続基板116とが搭載されてユニット化されている。 As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

裏パックユニット94は、保護カバー部を形成する裏パック92と払出ユニット93とがユニット化されている。また、各制御基板には、各制御を司る1チップマイコンとしてのMPU、各種機器との連絡をとるポート、各種抽選の際に用いられる乱数発生器、時間計数や同期を図る場合などに使用されるクロックパルス発生回路等が、必要に応じて搭載されている。 In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

なお、主制御装置110、音声ランプ制御装置113及び表示制御装置114、払出制御装置111及び発射制御装置112、電源装置115、カードユニット接続基板116は、それぞれ基板ボックス100〜104に収納されている。基板ボックス100〜104は、ボックスベースと該ボックスベースの開口部を覆うボックスカバーとを備えており、そのボックスベースとボックスカバーとが互いに連結されて、各制御装置や各基板が収納される。 The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

また、基板ボックス100(主制御装置110)及び基板ボックス102(払出制御装置111及び発射制御装置112)は、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとを封印ユニット(図示せず)によって開封不能に連結(かしめ構造による連結)している。また、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとの連結部には、ボックスベースとボックスカバーとに亘って封印シール(図示せず)が貼着されている。この封印シールは、脆性な素材で構成されており、基板ボックス100,102を開封するために封印シールを剥がそうとしたり、基板ボックス100,102を無理に開封しようとすると、ボックスベース側とボックスカバー側とに切断される。よって、封印ユニット又は封印シールを確認することで、基板ボックス100,102が開封されたかどうかを知ることができる。 Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

払出ユニット93は、裏パックユニット94の最上部に位置して上方に開口したタンク130と、タンク130の下方に連結され下流側に向けて緩やかに傾斜するタンクレール131と、タンクレール131の下流側に縦向きに連結されるケースレール132と、ケースレール132の最下流部に設けられ、払出モータ216(図4参照)の所定の電気的構成により球の払出を行う払出装置133とを備えている。タンク130には、遊技ホールの島設備から供給される球が逐次補給され、払出装置133により必要個数の球の払い出しが適宜行われる。タンクレール131には、当該タンクレール131に振動を付加するためのバイブレータ134が取り付けられている。 The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

また、払出制御装置111には状態復帰スイッチ120が設けられ、発射制御装置112には可変抵抗器の操作つまみ121が設けられ、電源装置115にはRAM消去スイッチ122が設けられている。状態復帰スイッチ120は、例えば、払出モータ216(図4参照)部の球詰まり等、払出エラーの発生時に球詰まりを解消(正常状態への復帰)するために操作される。操作つまみ121は、発射ソレノイドの発射力を調整するために操作される。RAM消去スイッチ122は、パチンコ機10を初期状態に戻したい場合に電源投入時に操作される。 Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

次に、図4を参照して、本パチンコ機10の電気的構成について説明する。図4は、パチンコ機10の電気的構成を示すブロック図である。 Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

主制御装置110には、演算装置である1チップマイコンとしてのMPU201が搭載されている。MPU201には、該MPU201により実行される各種の制御プログラムや固定値データを記憶したROM202と、そのROM202内に記憶される制御プログラムの実行に際して各種のデータ等を一時的に記憶するためのメモリであるRAM203と、そのほか、割込回路やタイマ回路、データ送受信回路などの各種回路が内蔵されている。主制御装置110では、MPU201によって、大当たり抽選や第1図柄表示装置37A,37B及び第3図柄表示装置81における表示の設定、第2図柄表示装置における表示結果の抽選といったパチンコ機10の主要な処理を実行する。 The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

なお、払出制御装置111や音声ランプ制御装置113などのサブ制御装置に対して動作を指示するために、主制御装置110から該サブ制御装置へ各種のコマンドがデータ送受信回路によって送信されるが、かかるコマンドは、主制御装置110からサブ制御装置へ一方向にのみ送信される。 In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

RAM203は、各種エリア、カウンタ、フラグのほか、MPU201の内部レジスタの内容やMPU201により実行される制御プログラムの戻り先番地などが記憶されるスタックエリアと、各種のフラグおよびカウンタ、I/O等の値が記憶される作業エリア(作業領域)とを有している。なお、RAM203は、パチンコ機10の電源の遮断後においても電源装置115からバックアップ電圧が供給されてデータを保持(バックアップ)できる構成となっており、RAM203に記憶されるデータは、すべてバックアップされる。 The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

停電などの発生により電源が遮断されると、その電源遮断時(停電発生時を含む。以下同様)のスタックポインタや、各レジスタの値がRAM203に記憶される。一方、電源投入時(停電解消による電源投入を含む。以下同様)には、RAM203に記憶される情報に基づいて、パチンコ機10の状態が電源遮断前の状態に復帰される。RAM203への書き込みはメイン処理(図示せず)によって電源遮断時に実行され、RAM203に書き込まれた各値の復帰は電源投入時の立ち上げ処理(図示せず)において実行される。なお、MPU201のNMI端子(ノンマスカブル割込端子)には、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に、停電監視回路252からの停電信号SG1が入力されるように構成されており、その停電信号SG1がMPU201へ入力されると、停電時処理としてのNMI割込処理(図示せず)が即座に実行される。 When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

主制御装置110のMPU201には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン204を介して入出力ポート205が接続されている。入出力ポート205には、払出制御装置111、音声ランプ制御装置113、第1図柄表示装置37A,37B、第2図柄表示装置、第2図柄保留ランプ、特定入賞口65aの開閉板の下辺を軸として正面側に開閉駆動するための大開放口ソレノイドや電動役物を駆動するためのソレノイドなどからなるソレノイド209が接続され、MPU201は、入出力ポート205を介してこれらに対し各種コマンドや制御信号を送信する。 An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

また、入出力ポート205には、図示しないスイッチ群およびスライド位置検出センサSや回転位置検出センサRを含むセンサ群などからなる各種スイッチ208、電源装置115に設けられた後述のRAM消去スイッチ回路253が接続され、MPU201は各種スイッチ208から出力される信号や、RAM消去スイッチ回路253より出力されるRAM消去信号SG2に基づいて各種処理を実行する。 Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

払出制御装置111は、払出モータ216を駆動させて賞球や貸出球の払出制御を行うものである。演算装置であるMPU211は、そのMPU211により実行される制御プログラムや固定値データ等を記憶したROM212と、ワークメモリ等として使用されるRAM213とを有している。 The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

払出制御装置111のRAM213は、主制御装置110のRAM203と同様に、MPU211の内部レジスタの内容やMPU211により実行される制御プログラムの戻り先番地などが記憶されるスタックエリアと、各種のフラグおよびカウンタ、I/O等の値が記憶される作業エリア(作業領域)とを有している。RAM213は、パチンコ機10の電源の遮断後においても電源装置115からバックアップ電圧が供給されてデータを保持(バックアップ)できる構成となっており、RAM213に記憶されるデータは、すべてバックアップされる。なお、主制御装置110のMPU201と同様、MPU211のNMI端子にも、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に停電監視回路252から停電信号SG1が入力されるように構成されており、その停電信号SG1がMPU211へ入力されると、停電時処理としてのNMI割込処理(図示せず)が即座に実行される。 Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

払出制御装置111のMPU211には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン214を介して入出力ポート215が接続されている。入出力ポート215には、主制御装置110や払出モータ216、発射制御装置112などがそれぞれ接続されている。また、図示はしないが、払出制御装置111には、払い出された賞球を検出するための賞球検出スイッチが接続されている。なお、該賞球検出スイッチは、払出制御装置111に接続されるが、主制御装置110には接続されていない。 An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

発射制御装置112は、主制御装置110により球の発射の指示がなされた場合に、操作ハンドル51の回動操作量に応じた球の打ち出し強さとなるよう球発射ユニット112aを制御するものである。球発射ユニット112aは、図示しない発射ソレノイドおよび電磁石を備えており、その発射ソレノイドおよび電磁石は、所定条件が整っている場合に駆動が許可される。具体的には、遊技者が操作ハンドル51に触れていることをタッチセンサ51aにより検出し、球の発射を停止させるための発射停止スイッチ51bがオフ(操作されていないこと)を条件に、操作ハンドル51の回動操作量(回動位置)に対応して発射ソレノイドが励磁され、操作ハンドル51の操作量に応じた強さで球が発射される。 The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

音声ランプ制御装置113は、音声出力装置(図示しないスピーカなど)226における音声の出力、ランプ表示装置(電飾部29〜33、表示ランプ34など)227における点灯および消灯の出力、変動演出(変動表示)や予告演出といった表示制御装置114で行われる第3図柄表示装置81の表示態様の設定などを制御するものである。演算装置であるMPU221は、そのMPU221により実行される制御プログラムや固定値データ等を記憶したROM222と、ワークメモリ等として使用されるRAM223とを有している。 The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

音声ランプ制御装置113のMPU221には、アドレスバス及びデータバスで構成されるバスライン224を介して入出力ポート225が接続されている。入出力ポート225には、主制御装置110、表示制御装置114、音声出力装置226、ランプ表示装置227、その他装置228、枠ボタン22などがそれぞれ接続されている。その他装置228には駆動モータ335a,337a及び振動装置366が含まれる。 An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 335a, 337a and a vibrating device 366.

音声ランプ制御装置113は、主制御装置110から受信した各種のコマンド(変動パターンコマンド、停止種別コマンド等)に基づいて、第3図柄表示装置81の表示態様を決定し、決定した表示態様をコマンド(表示用変動パターンコマンド、表示用停止種別コマンド等)によって表示制御装置114へ通知する。また、音声ランプ制御装置113は、枠ボタン22からの入力を監視し、遊技者によって枠ボタン22が操作された場合は、第3図柄表示装置81で表示されるステージを変更したり、スーパーリーチ時の演出内容を変更したりするように、表示制御装置114へ指示する。ステージが変更される場合は、変更後のステージに応じた背面画像を第3図柄表示装置81に表示させるべく、変更後のステージに関する情報を含めた背面画像変更コマンドを表示制御装置114へ送信する。ここで、背面画像とは、第3図柄表示装置81に表示させる主要な画像である第3図柄の背面側に表示される画像のことである。表示制御装置114は、この音声ランプ制御装置113から送信されるコマンドに従って、第3図柄表示装置81に各種の画像を表示する。 The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

また、音声ランプ制御装置113は、表示制御装置114から第3図柄表示装置81の表示内容を表すコマンド(表示コマンド)を受信する。音声ランプ制御装置113では、表示制御装置114から受信した表示コマンドに基づき、第3図柄表示装置81の表示内容に合わせて、その表示内容に対応する音声を音声出力装置226から出力し、また、その表示内容に対応させてランプ表示装置227の点灯および消灯を制御する。 Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

表示制御装置114は、音声ランプ制御装置113及び第3図柄表示装置81が接続され、音声ランプ制御装置113より受信したコマンドに基づいて、第3図柄表示装置81における第3図柄の変動演出などの表示を制御するものである。また、表示制御装置114は、第3図柄表示装置81の表示内容を通知する表示コマンドを適宜音声ランプ制御装置113へ送信する。音声ランプ制御装置113は、この表示コマンドによって示される表示内容にあわせて音声出力装置226から音声を出力することで、第3図柄表示装置81の表示と音声出力装置226からの音声出力とをあわせることができる。 In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

電源装置115は、パチンコ機10の各部に電源を供給するための電源部251と、停電等による電源遮断を監視する停電監視回路252と、RAM消去スイッチ122(図3参照)が設けられたRAM消去スイッチ回路253とを有している。電源部251は、図示しない電源経路を通じて、各制御装置110〜114等に対して各々に必要な動作電圧を供給する装置である。その概要としては、電源部251は、外部より供給される交流24ボルトの電圧を取り込み、各種スイッチ208などの各種スイッチや、ソレノイド209などのソレノイド、モータ等を駆動するための12ボルトの電圧、ロジック用の5ボルトの電圧、RAMバックアップ用のバックアップ電圧などを生成し、これら12ボルトの電圧、5ボルトの電圧及びバックアップ電圧を各制御装置110〜114等に対して必要な電圧を供給する。 The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

停電監視回路252は、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に、主制御装置110のMPU201及び払出制御装置111のMPU211の各NMI端子へ停電信号SG1を出力するための回路である。停電監視回路252は、電源部251から出力される最大電圧である直流安定24ボルトの電圧を監視し、この電圧が22ボルト未満になった場合に停電(電源断、電源遮断)の発生と判断して、停電信号SG1を主制御装置110及び払出制御装置111へ出力する。停電信号SG1の出力によって、主制御装置110及び払出制御装置111は、停電の発生を認識し、NMI割込処理を実行する。なお、電源部251は、直流安定24ボルトの電圧が22ボルト未満になった後においても、NMI割込処理の実行に充分な時間の間、制御系の駆動電圧である5ボルトの電圧の出力を正常値に維持するように構成されている。よって、主制御装置110及び払出制御装置111は、NMI割込処理(図示せず)を正常に実行し完了することができる。 The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

RAM消去スイッチ回路253は、RAM消去スイッチ122(図3参照)が押下された場合に、主制御装置110へ、バックアップデータをクリアさせるためのRAM消去信号SG2を出力するための回路である。主制御装置110は、パチンコ機10の電源投入時に、RAM消去信号SG2を入力した場合に、バックアップデータをクリアすると共に、払出制御装置111においてバックアップデータをクリアさせるための払出初期化コマンドを払出制御装置111に対して送信する。 The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

図5は、第1実施形態における操作デバイス300の正面斜視図である。図5に示すように、操作デバイス300は、正面視における内枠12の左右方向中央部(即ち、パチンコ機10の左右方向中央部)に配置される。 FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

操作デバイス300は、遊技者が把持操作可能な首振り操作部材310を備え、その首振り操作部材310は、上皿17の外枠に沿って前後方向に凹設される収容凹部17a及び下皿ユニット15の左右方向中央部で上下方向に凹設される収容凹部15aによって構成される領域を移動可能とされる。 The operation device 300 includes a swing operation member 310 that can be gripped and operated by the player, and the swing operation member 310 includes a storage recess 17a and a lower plate that are recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. The area formed by the accommodating recess 15a recessed in the vertical direction at the central portion in the horizontal direction of the unit 15 is movable.

首振り操作部材310と収容凹部15a,17aとの間には、少なくとも手の指が無理なく入る程度の隙間が空けられる。これにより、遊技者は、首振り操作部材310を上から握りこむ態様で把持することができる。首振り操作部材310を上から握りこむ態様で把持した場合、首振り操作部材310と収容凹部17aとの間に入れた指が首振り操作部材310の背面側の側面に引っ掛かり、その状態で手の力を抜いて重力に任せても、手が首振り操作部材310から滑り落ちることが防止される。従って、遊技者が首振り操作デバイス310の上に手を維持する負担を軽減することができる。 There is a gap between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodating recesses 15a and 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can grip the swing operation member 310 in a manner of grasping it from above. When the swing operation member 310 is gripped from above, the finger inserted between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodating recess 17a is caught on the back side surface of the swing operation member 310, and the hand is in that state. Even if the force is relaxed and left to gravity, the hand is prevented from slipping off the swing operation member 310. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player to maintain his / her hand on the swing operation device 310.

なお、遊技者は右手で操作ハンドル51を握るため、首振り操作部材310の操作は左手で行われることが多くなる。そのため、以下の説明では、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を左手で操作するという前提で、説明を行う。 Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the swing operation member 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the swing operation member 310 with the left hand.

図6(a)は、パチンコ機10の部分正面図であり、図6(b)は、図6(a)のVIb−VIb線におけるパチンコ機10の部分断面図であり、図7(a)は、パチンコ機10の部分正面図であり、図7(b)は、図7(a)のVIIb−VIIb線におけるパチンコ機10の部分断面図である。 6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). Is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a).

図6及び図7では、パチンコ機10の、操作デバイス300付近が部分的に図示される。なお、図6では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置(本実施形態における初期位置)に配置された状態が図示され、図7では、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置(本実施形態における押し下げ位置)に配置された状態が図示され、首振り操作部材310を把持する手が想像線で図示される。 In FIGS. 6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position (initial position in the present embodiment), and FIG. 7 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is in a downward position (push-down position in the present embodiment). ) Is shown, and the hand holding the swing operation member 310 is shown by an imaginary line.

下皿ユニット15の収容凹部15a及び上皿17の収容凹部17aは、首振り操作部材310の外形から十分に離間して配置される。そのため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持し、押し下げ操作する際に、首振り操作部材310と収容凹部15a及び収容凹部17aとの間に指を挟むことを抑制することができる。 The accommodating recess 15a of the lower plate unit 15 and the accommodating recess 17a of the upper plate 17 are arranged so as to be sufficiently separated from the outer shape of the swing operation member 310. Therefore, when the player grips the swing operation member 310 and pushes it down, it is possible to prevent the player from pinching a finger between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodation recess 15a and the accommodation recess 17a.

図6及び図7に示すように、遊技者は中間枠部材312に指をかけて首振り操作部材310を把持する。この状態で、押しボタン部分を兼ねるレンズ部材317が掌と対面配置されるので、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持したまま握り込むことで、振動部材310を押し込む操作を行うことができる。そのため、首振り操作部材310を把持した状態で指で押しボタンを押したり、首振り操作部材310を持ち替えたりせず、首振り操作部材310を把持した状態でレンズ部材317を押し込み操作することができる。従って、操作を簡単化することができる。 As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the player puts his finger on the intermediate frame member 312 to grip the swing operation member 310. In this state, the lens member 317 that also serves as the push button portion is arranged facing the palm, so that the player can push the vibrating member 310 by grasping the swinging operation member 310 while holding it. Therefore, it is possible to push the lens member 317 while holding the swing operation member 310 without pressing the push button with a finger or changing the swing operation member 310 while holding the swing operation member 310. it can. Therefore, the operation can be simplified.

首振り操作部材310に配置されるレンズ部材317が、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持した際に掌に当たる位置に配設される。そのため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持していることを検出した上でレンズ部材317を振動させることで、遊技者(の掌や指など)に振動を伝えることができ、振動が遊技者に気づかれないという事態を防ぐことができる。従って、操作デバイス300の演出効果を向上させることができる。 The lens member 317 arranged on the swing operation member 310 is arranged at a position where it hits the palm when the player grips the swing operation member 310. Therefore, by detecting that the player is holding the swing operation member 310 and then vibrating the lens member 317, the vibration can be transmitted to the player (palm, fingers, etc.), and the vibration is the game. It is possible to prevent the situation where the person is not noticed. Therefore, the effect of the operation device 300 can be improved.

また、その振動に合わせてレンズ部材317を押し込み操作することで、入力操作をするタイミングを図ることができるように演出を行うことができ、入力操作のタイミングを図ることに集中しすぎて遊技に集中できないという問題点を解消することができる。 In addition, by pushing the lens member 317 in accordance with the vibration, it is possible to produce an effect so that the timing of the input operation can be determined, and the game is too concentrated on the timing of the input operation. The problem of not being able to concentrate can be solved.

遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持した状態で、レンズ部材317は遊技者の手の内側に隠されるので、レンズ部材317が振動しているかどうか(レンズ部材317が中間枠部材312に対して移動しているかどうか)を、首振り操作部材310を把持している遊技者以外の他の遊技者は把握しづらくなる。そのため、首振り操作部材310を握っている遊技者だけに対して大当たりの告知をすることができ、遊技者の興趣を向上させることができる。 Since the lens member 317 is hidden inside the player's hand while the player holds the swing operation member 310, whether or not the lens member 317 is vibrating (the lens member 317 is relative to the intermediate frame member 312). It becomes difficult for a player other than the player holding the swinging operation member 310 to grasp (whether or not it is moving). Therefore, it is possible to notify only the player who holds the swing operation member 310 of the jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

図6及び図7に示すように、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置される状態と、下向き位置に配置される状態とでは、首振り操作部材310の前後位置および上下位置が異なる。これにより、首振り操作部材310を操作する際に、遊技者は手の位置を上下方向や前後方向に移動させることになるので、遊技者が操作している実感を得ることができる。 As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the front-rear position and the vertical position of the swing operation member 310 are different between the state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position and the state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. As a result, when operating the swing operation member 310, the player moves the position of the hand in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, so that the player can feel that he / she is operating.

遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持する際に、遊技者の指は中間枠部材312に振れ、遊技者の指先が背面側枠部材311に引っかかる。背面側枠部材311が背面側に曲率半径の中心を有する円弧を描く態様で反り返ることで、容易に指先を背面側枠部材311に引っ掛けることができるので、図7(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置される場合のように手首が固まる姿勢でも、指先が背面側枠部材311から外れることを抑制することができる。 When the player grips the swing operation member 310, the player's finger swings on the intermediate frame member 312, and the player's fingertip is caught on the back side frame member 311. By bending the back side frame member 311 in a manner of drawing an arc having the center of the radius of curvature on the back side, the fingertip can be easily hooked on the back side frame member 311. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7B, Even in a posture in which the wrist is stiffened as in the case where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position, it is possible to prevent the fingertip from coming off from the back side frame member 311.

また、指先が背面側枠部材311に引っかかることで、掌の内側に振動装置366(図11参照)の振動を閉じ込めることができ、遊技者が感じる振動を大きく確保することができる。 Further, by catching the fingertip on the back side frame member 311, the vibration of the vibration device 366 (see FIG. 11) can be confined inside the palm, and the vibration felt by the player can be largely secured.

図7に示すように、図6に示す状態から首振り操作部材310を押し下げると、首振り操作部材310が遊技者の手前下方に移動することにより自然と手首が返る。そのため、首振り操作部材310を奥に押し込む操作(図22(b)参照)を、手首の返しを解除する態様で手首を伸ばすことで行うことができる。これにより、首振り操作部材310を操作する遊技者の負担を軽減することができる。 As shown in FIG. 7, when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 6, the swing operation member 310 moves downward in front of the player, and the wrist naturally returns. Therefore, the operation of pushing the swing operation member 310 inward (see FIG. 22B) can be performed by extending the wrist in a manner of releasing the return of the wrist. As a result, the burden on the player who operates the swing operation member 310 can be reduced.

図6に示すように、首振り操作部材310の下端部から首振り操作部材310の回転軸である軸支棒363までの腕長さR1に比較して、首振り操作部材310の上端部から首振り操作部材310の回転軸である軸支棒363までの腕長さR2が長尺とされる。これにより、首振り操作部材310の上部を把持して首振り操作部材310を軸支棒363中心で回転させる場合に容易に(軽い力で)回転させることができる。一方で、首振り操作部材310の下端部に手をかけて、首振り操作部材310を軸支棒363中心で回転させる(誤操作する)場合には大きな力を必要とすることができる。従って、首振り操作部材310の上部を把持して首振り操作部材310を回転させる際の遊技者の負担を軽減できると共に、遊技者が首振り操作部材310の下端部に手をかけて、首振り操作部材310を回転させる誤操作を抑止することができる。 As shown in FIG. 6, as compared with the arm length R1 from the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to the shaft support rod 363 which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, from the upper end of the swing operation member 310. The arm length R2 up to the shaft support rod 363, which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, is long. Thereby, when the upper part of the swing operation member 310 is gripped and the swing operation member 310 is rotated around the shaft support rod 363, it can be easily rotated (with a light force). On the other hand, when a hand is placed on the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to rotate (erroneously operate) the swing operation member 310 around the shaft support rod 363, a large force can be required. Therefore, the burden on the player when gripping the upper part of the swing operation member 310 and rotating the swing operation member 310 can be reduced, and the player puts his / her hand on the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to move his / her neck. It is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of rotating the swing operation member 310.

図8は、操作デバイス300の正面斜視図である。なお、図8では、操作デバイス300の首振り操作部材310が、下向き位置(図7参照)に配置された状態が図示される。図8に示すように、操作デバイス300は、矩形状の外側ケース部材320から、首振り操作部材310が正面側に張り出して配置される。 FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 of the operation device 300 is arranged in a downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 8, in the operation device 300, the swing operation member 310 is arranged so as to project from the rectangular outer case member 320 to the front side.

図9は、操作デバイス300の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図9では、外側ケース部材320が、その外側ケース部材320よりも内側に配設される内側ケース部材330から取り外された状態が図示される。 FIG. 9 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. Note that FIG. 9 shows a state in which the outer case member 320 is removed from the inner case member 330 disposed inside the outer case member 320.

図9に示すように、外側ケース部材320は、カバー部材344,345(図11参照)の曲面に沿った形状で背面側が形成され内側ケース部材330に正面側からカバー部材344,345の左右の縁を隠す態様で取り付けられる前カバー321と、その前カバー321の上端から後方に凸設される凸設部321aに上側から嵌め込まれる長尺板形状の上カバー322と、前カバー321及び上カバー322の左右方向にフランジ状に延設されるフランジ部321b,322aを内嵌する態様で内ケース部材330に左右方向から締結固定される左カバー部材323,右カバー部材324と、内ケース部材330の内部に張り出して配設される複数のセンサ部材325aを有するセンサ基盤325と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 9, the outer case member 320 is formed on the back side in a shape along the curved surface of the cover members 344,345 (see FIG. 11), and the inner case member 330 is formed on the left and right sides of the cover members 344,345 from the front side. A front cover 321 attached in a manner of hiding the edge, a long plate-shaped upper cover 322 fitted from above into a convex portion 321a projecting rearward from the upper end of the front cover 321, and a front cover 321 and an upper cover. The left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324 and the inner case member 330 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 330 from the left and right directions in a manner in which the flange portions 321b and 322a extending in the left and right directions of the 322 are internally fitted. Mainly includes a sensor base 325 having a plurality of sensor members 325a overhanging and arranged inside the above.

左カバー部材323及び右カバー部材324を締結固定する一方で、前カバー321及び上カバー322を嵌め込みで固定することで、正面視において締結ビスが視認されることを防止することができる。従って、操作デバイス300を分解するいたずらを防止することができる。 By fastening and fixing the left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324, and fixing the front cover 321 and the upper cover 322 by fitting, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being visually recognized in the front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent mischief by disassembling the operation device 300.

センサ部材325aは、第1センサ挿通孔332e2に挿通されるフォトカプラ形式の第1センサ部材325a1と、第2センサ挿通孔332e3に挿通されるフォトカプラ形式の第2センサ部材325a2と、その第2センサ部材325a2の下方に配置されセンサ挿通孔332fに挿通されるフォトカプラ形式の第3センサ部材325a3と、を主に備える。 The sensor member 325a includes a photocoupler-type first sensor member 325a1 inserted through the first sensor insertion hole 332e2, a photocoupler-type second sensor member 325a2 inserted through the second sensor insertion hole 332e3, and a second sensor member 325a2 thereof. It mainly includes a third sensor member 325a3 of a photocoupler type, which is arranged below the sensor member 325a2 and is inserted into the sensor insertion hole 332f.

なお、第1センサ部材325a1及び第2センサ部材325a2は、レバー部材340の姿勢を検出するセンサであり、第3センサ部材325a3は、偏心カム部材333の位相を検出するセンサである。 The first sensor member 325a1 and the second sensor member 325a2 are sensors that detect the posture of the lever member 340, and the third sensor member 325a3 is a sensor that detects the phase of the eccentric cam member 333.

また、フォトカプラ形式のセンサとは、光を投光する投光部と、この投光部からの光を受光する受光部とを備え、検出する部分を挿入可能な隙間(スリット)を備えて略コ字状に配置されるセンサを意味する。 Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and has a gap (slit) into which a detection portion can be inserted. It means a sensor arranged in a substantially U shape.

図10は、操作デバイス300の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図10では、外側ケース部材320の図示が省略され、内側ケース部材330が分解された状態が図示される。 FIG. 10 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. In FIG. 10, the outer case member 320 is not shown, and the inner case member 330 is shown in a disassembled state.

図10に示すように、内側ケース部材330は、レバー部材340が内側に配設される箱状に組立てられる左カバー部材331及び右カバー部材332と、左カバー部材331から凸設される偏心カム軸331d2に軸支される偏心カム部材333と、その偏心カム部材333との相対的な位相が不変とされ偏心カム部材333と同様に偏心カム軸331d2に軸支される位相検出部材334と、左カバー部材331に外側から締結固定され偏心カム部材333を回転させる駆動力を発生させる第1駆動装置335と、左カバー部材331から凸設されるロック軸331d3に軸支されるロック部材336と、右カバー部材332に外側から締結固定されロック部材336を回転させる駆動力を発生させる第2駆動装置337と、レバー部材340を軸支するレバー支持軸331d1の後方に配設されるギアダンパ338と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 10, the inner case member 330 includes a left cover member 331 and a right cover member 332 that are assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 340 is arranged inside, and an eccentric cam that is projected from the left cover member 331. An eccentric cam member 333 pivotally supported by the shaft 331d2 and a phase detection member 334 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 in the same manner as the eccentric cam member 333, wherein the relative phases of the eccentric cam member 333 are invariant. A first drive device 335 that is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 331 from the outside to generate a driving force that rotates the eccentric cam member 333, and a lock member 336 that is pivotally supported by a lock shaft 331d3 that is projected from the left cover member 331. A second drive device 337 that is fastened and fixed to the right cover member 332 from the outside to generate a driving force that rotates the lock member 336, and a gear damper 338 that is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 that pivotally supports the lever member 340. , Is mainly provided.

左カバー部材331は、右方に開口が形成される有底筒状の部材であって、その底部(図10左側部分)において矩形板状に形成される下側側壁部331aと、その下側側壁部331aの上側に正面視左方(図10奥側)にオフセットされる矩形板状の上側側壁部331bと、下側側壁部331a及び上側側壁部331bの縁から右方に延設され手前側上部を除いて右カバー部材332と当接される板状の連結側壁部331cと、下側側壁部331a又は上側側壁部331bから右方に凸設され円柱形状に形成される複数の棒状部材331dと、上側側壁部331bに穿設される複数の挿通孔331eと、ロック部材336の姿勢を検出するフォトカプラ形式のセンサ部材331fと、上側側壁部331bの左方に張り出され棒状部材331dの内の最上部に配置されるレバー支持軸331d1を内嵌支持する有底筒状の軸支部331gと、を主に備える。 The left cover member 331 is a bottomed tubular member having an opening formed to the right, and has a lower side wall portion 331a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom portion (left portion in FIG. 10) and a lower side thereof. A rectangular plate-shaped upper side wall portion 331b offset to the left side (back side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 331a, and extending to the right from the edges of the lower side wall portion 331a and the upper side wall portion 331b. A plate-shaped connecting side wall portion 331c that is in contact with the right cover member 332 except for the upper side portion, and a plurality of rod-shaped members that are projected to the right from the lower side wall portion 331a or the upper side wall portion 331b and are formed in a cylindrical shape. 331d, a plurality of insertion holes 331e formed in the upper side wall portion 331b, a photocoupler type sensor member 331f for detecting the posture of the lock member 336, and a rod-shaped member 331d projecting to the left of the upper side wall portion 331b. Mainly includes a bottomed cylindrical shaft support portion 331g that internally fits and supports the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the lever support shaft 331d.

右カバー部材332は、左方に開口が形成される有底筒状の部材であって、その底部(図10右側部分)において矩形板状に形成される下側側壁部332aと、その下側側壁部332aの上側に正面視右方(図10手前側)にオフセットされる板状の上側側壁部332bと、下側側壁部332a及び上側側壁部332bの縁から左方に延設され手前側上部を除いて左カバー部材331と当接される板状の連結側壁部332cと、下側側壁部332aに一対の円形状が組み合わされた態様で穿設され第2駆動装置337のギア部分が挿通される駆動部材挿通孔332dと、上側側壁部332bに穿設される複数の挿通孔332eと、第3センサ部材325a3が挿通されるセンサ挿通孔332fと、上側側壁部332bの右方に張り出され棒状部材331dの内の最上部に配置されるレバー支持軸331d1を内嵌支持する有底筒状の軸支部332gと、上側側壁部332bの内面側に環状に凸設される環状凸部332iと、を主に備える。 The right cover member 332 is a bottomed tubular member having an opening formed to the left, and has a lower side wall portion 332a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom portion (right portion in FIG. 10) and a lower side thereof. A plate-shaped upper side wall portion 332b offset to the right side (front side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 332a, and a plate-shaped upper side wall portion 332a and an upper side wall portion 332b extending to the left from the edges of the front side. A plate-shaped connecting side wall portion 332c that is in contact with the left cover member 331 except for the upper portion and a pair of circular shapes are bored in the lower side wall portion 332a, and the gear portion of the second drive device 337 is formed. The drive member insertion hole 332d to be inserted, the plurality of insertion holes 332e formed in the upper side wall portion 332b, the sensor insertion hole 332f through which the third sensor member 325a3 is inserted, and the upper side wall portion 332b are stretched to the right. A bottomed tubular shaft support portion 332g that internally fits and supports the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the rod-shaped member 331d, and an annular convex portion that is annularly projected on the inner surface side of the upper side wall portion 332b. Mainly provided with 332i.

上側側壁部331b,332bは、手前側上部が左右方向視で軸支部331g,332gを中心とした1/4円形状に形成され(図17(b)参照)、連結側壁部331c,332cは、手前側上部に左右方向に切りかかれる切り欠き331c1,332c1を備える。 The upper side wall portions 331b and 332b are formed in a 1/4 circular shape centered on the shaft support portions 331g and 332g when the front side upper portion is viewed in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17B), and the connecting side wall portions 331c and 332c are formed. Notches 331c1 and 332c1 that are cut in the left-right direction are provided on the upper part on the front side.

切り欠き331c1,332c1は、レバー部材340が通される部分であって、レバー部材340の横ずれ(揺動軸であるレバー支持軸331d1の延設方向の位置ずれ)を防止する役割を有する。また、上側側壁部331b,332bの1/4円形状を利用して、前カバー321(図9参照)が内側ケース部材330に正面側から取り付けられる。 The cutouts 331c1 and 332c1 are portions through which the lever member 340 is passed, and have a role of preventing lateral displacement of the lever member 340 (positional displacement of the lever support shaft 331d1 which is a swinging shaft in the extending direction). Further, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 9) is attached to the inner case member 330 from the front side by utilizing the 1/4 circular shape of the upper side wall portions 331b and 332b.

棒状部材331dは、本実施形態では4本の円柱部材から形成される。即ち、棒状部材331dは、左カバー部材331の最上部に配置されるレバー支持軸331d1と、そのレバー支持軸331d1の下方に配設される偏心カム軸331d2と、下側側壁部331aの右方から凸設されるロック軸331d3と、そのロック軸331d3の下方に併設される補助軸331d4と、を主に備える。 The rod-shaped member 331d is formed of four cylindrical members in this embodiment. That is, the rod-shaped member 331d includes a lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 331, an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 arranged below the lever support shaft 331d1, and a right side of the lower side wall portion 331a. It mainly includes a lock shaft 331d3 projecting from the lock shaft 331d3 and an auxiliary shaft 331d4 provided below the lock shaft 331d3.

レバー支持軸331d1は、レバー部材340が揺動可能に軸支される部材であって、軸支部331g,332gに挿通されることで両端支持される。 The lever support shaft 331d1 is a member in which the lever member 340 is swingably supported, and is supported at both ends by being inserted through the shaft support portions 331g and 332g.

偏心カム軸331d2は、偏心カム部材333及び位相検出部材334が位相合わせされた状態で挿通される部材である。 The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is a member through which the eccentric cam member 333 and the phase detection member 334 are inserted in a phase-aligned state.

ロック軸331d3及び補助軸331d4は、共にロック部材336が挿通される軸であって、ロック軸331d3はロック部材336の軸支孔336bが軸支される部材であって、補助軸331d4は、ロック部材336の案内孔336cを案内する部材である。 The lock shaft 331d3 and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 are both shafts through which the lock member 336 is inserted, the lock shaft 331d3 is a member to which the shaft support hole 336b of the lock member 336 is pivotally supported, and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is locked. It is a member that guides the guide hole 336c of the member 336.

挿通孔331eは、本実施形態では、3箇所の貫通孔から構成される。即ち、レバー支持軸331d1の手前側に配置されると共にレバー支持軸331d1を中心とした円弧に沿った長孔状の案内支持孔331e1と、レバー支持軸331d1の背面側に配置される円形状の貫通孔であってギアダンパ338が挿通されるギアダンパ挿通孔331e2と、ギアダンパ挿通孔331e2の背面側下方に配置され一対の円形状が組み合わされた態様で穿設される駆動部材挿通孔331e3と、を主に備える。 In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 331e is composed of three through holes. That is, a circular guide support hole 331e1 arranged on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1 and along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 and a circular shape arranged on the back side of the lever support shaft 331d1. The gear damper insertion hole 331e2, which is a through hole through which the gear damper 338 is inserted, and the drive member insertion hole 331e3, which is arranged below the back side of the gear damper insertion hole 331e2 and is formed in a combination of a pair of circular shapes, are formed. Mainly prepare.

案内支持孔331e1は、角度規制棒部材346が挿通されレバー部材340の揺動を案内すると共に、レバー部材340の揺動の終端を端部で規定する。 In the guide support hole 331e1, the angle regulating rod member 346 is inserted to guide the swing of the lever member 340, and the end of the swing of the lever member 340 is defined by an end portion.

センサ部材331fは、ロック部材336の検出片336eがセンサ部材331fの隙間を通過することを検出して、ロック部材336の姿勢を検出する。 The sensor member 331f detects that the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 passes through the gap of the sensor member 331f, and detects the posture of the lock member 336.

駆動部材挿通孔332dは、大型の円と小型の円とが連結される形状とされるので、それぞれの円の形状を調整しておくことで、第2駆動装置337の駆動ギア337bを、大型の円を通して右カバー部材332の左方に張り出させ、その状態で駆動ギア337bを軸支する部分の台座部分を小型の円に嵌め込むことができる。 The drive member insertion hole 332d has a shape in which a large circle and a small circle are connected. Therefore, by adjusting the shape of each circle, the drive gear 337b of the second drive device 337 can be made large. The pedestal portion of the portion that pivotally supports the drive gear 337b can be fitted into a small circle in a state where the right cover member 332 is projected to the left through the circle.

これにより、第2駆動装置337に駆動ギア337bを軸支したまま内カバー部材332に挿通すること(駆動ギア337bの外径以上の径の孔が必要)と、挿通した第2駆動装置337の軸位置を固定すること(駆動ギア337bの駆動軸の台座と同程度の径の孔で固定)とを両立させることができる。 As a result, the drive gear 337b is inserted into the inner cover member 332 while the drive gear 337b is pivotally supported by the second drive device 337 (a hole having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the drive gear 337b is required), and the inserted second drive device 337 It is possible to achieve both fixing the shaft position (fixing with a hole having the same diameter as the pedestal of the drive shaft of the drive gear 337b).

挿通孔332eは、本実施形態では、3箇所の貫通孔から構成される。即ち、案内支持孔331e1と左右方向で合致する位置および形状で形成されレバー部材340の角度規制棒部材346が案内される案内支持孔332e1と、軸支部332gの背面側に配設される長方形状の貫通孔であって第1センサ部材325a1が挿通される第1センサ挿通孔332e2と、その第1センサ挿通孔332e2が軸支部332gを中心として回転した位置に配置される長方形状の貫通孔であって第2センサ部材325a2が挿通される第2センサ挿通孔332e3と、を主に備える。 In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 332e is composed of three through holes. That is, the guide support hole 332e1 which is formed at a position and shape that matches the guide support hole 331e1 in the left-right direction and guides the angle control rod member 346 of the lever member 340, and a rectangular shape arranged on the back side of the shaft support portion 332g. The first sensor insertion hole 332e2 through which the first sensor member 325a1 is inserted, and the rectangular through hole in which the first sensor insertion hole 332e2 is arranged at a position rotated around the shaft support portion 332g. It mainly includes a second sensor insertion hole 332e3 into which the second sensor member 325a2 is inserted.

センサ挿通孔332e2,332e3は、レバー部材340のセンサ検出片343bが隙間を通過することを検出してレバー部材340の姿勢を検出するセンサ部材325a1,325a2を挿通する貫通孔である。 The sensor insertion holes 332e2 and 332e3 are through holes through which the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 for detecting the posture of the lever member 340 by detecting that the sensor detection piece 343b of the lever member 340 passes through the gap are inserted.

軸支部331g,332gにねじりバネSP1が巻き付けられる。また、軸支部331g,332gの前下方に板状のねじりバネ係止部331h,332hが配置され、左カバー部材331及び右カバー部材332の左右方向外側に延設される。 The torsion spring SP1 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g. Further, plate-shaped torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h are arranged below the front and lower portions of the shaft support portions 331g and 332g, and extend outward in the left-right direction of the left cover member 331 and the right cover member 332.

本実施形態では、ねじりバネSP1の一端がねじりバネ係止部331h,332hに上側から当接され、他端が角度規制棒部材346に下側から当接される。これにより、レバー部材340は首振り操作部材310が起き上がる方向に付勢される。 In the present embodiment, one end of the torsion spring SP1 is brought into contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h from above, and the other end is brought into contact with the angle regulating rod member 346 from below. As a result, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 is raised.

環状凸部332iは、位相検出部材334が外嵌される部分である。環状凸部332iに位相検出部材334が外嵌されることにより、偏心カム軸331d2の軸合わせを強固に行うことができる。 The annular convex portion 332i is a portion to which the phase detection member 334 is fitted. By fitting the phase detection member 334 to the annular convex portion 332i, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 can be firmly aligned.

第1駆動装置335は、駆動力を発生させる駆動モータ335aと、その駆動モータ335aに軸支され回転駆動される駆動ギア335bと、を主に備える。駆動ギア335bは偏心カム部材333の本体部333aと歯合され、駆動力が伝達される。 The first drive device 335 mainly includes a drive motor 335a that generates a driving force and a drive gear 335b that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 335a and is rotationally driven. The drive gear 335b is meshed with the main body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 333, and the driving force is transmitted.

ロック部材336は、レバー部材340の揺動を防止する部材であって、先端側が略L字の鉤状に形成される本体部336aと、その本体部336aの基端側に穿設される軸支孔336bと、その軸支孔336bを中心とした円弧に沿って形成される案内孔336cと、本体部336aの基端側から軸支孔336bの軸径方向外側へ向かってギア状に凸設されるギア部336dと、軸支孔336bの軸径方向外側に延設されると共にセンサ部材331fの隙間を通過可能とされる板状の検出片336eと、を主に備える。 The lock member 336 is a member that prevents the lever member 340 from swinging, and has a main body portion 336a whose tip end side is formed in a substantially L-shaped hook shape and a shaft formed on the base end side of the main body portion 336a. A support hole 336b, a guide hole 336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 336b, and a gear-like protrusion from the base end side of the main body portion 336a toward the outside of the shaft support hole 336b in the axial direction. It mainly includes a gear portion 336d to be provided, and a plate-shaped detection piece 336e extending outward in the axial direction of the shaft support hole 336b and allowing passage through a gap of the sensor member 331f.

案内孔336cは、補助軸331d4が挿通される長孔であり、この案内孔336cの長さにより、ロック部材336の揺動終端を規定することができる。 The guide hole 336c is an elongated hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is inserted, and the length of the guide hole 336c can define the swing end of the lock member 336.

第2駆動装置337は、駆動力を発生させる駆動モータ337aと、その駆動モータ337aに軸支され回転駆動される駆動ギア337bと、を主に備える。駆動ギア337bはロック部材336のギア部336dと歯合され、駆動力が伝達される。 The second drive device 337 mainly includes a drive motor 337a that generates a driving force and a drive gear 337b that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 337a and is rotationally driven. The drive gear 337b is meshed with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 336, and the driving force is transmitted.

ギアダンパ338は、歯合回転する部材に粘性抵抗を与える部材であって、ギアダンパ挿通孔331e2を通して左カバー部材331の右方(内側ケース部材330内方)にギア部材が張り出されると共に、そのギア部材はギア部342b(図11参照)に歯合される。そのため、レバー部材340は、揺動する間、ギアダンパ338から粘性抵抗を受ける。 The gear damper 338 is a member that imparts viscous resistance to a member that rotates in teeth, and the gear member is projected to the right side (inside the inner case member 330) of the left cover member 331 through the gear damper insertion hole 331e2, and the gear thereof. The member is meshed with the gear portion 342b (see FIG. 11). Therefore, the lever member 340 receives a viscous resistance from the gear damper 338 while swinging.

図11は、首振り操作部材310及びレバー部材340の分解正面斜視図である。図11では、首振り操作部材310から背面側枠部材311が分解された状態が図示されると共に、レバー部材340の左右に締結固定されるギアダンパ受け部材342、姿勢検出部材343及び破壊防止を目的として配設される剥離部材350が分解された状態が図示される。 FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340. In FIG. 11, a state in which the back side frame member 311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 310 is shown, and the gear damper receiving member 342, the posture detection member 343, and the destruction prevention are fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 340. The state in which the peeling member 350 arranged as is disassembled is shown.

背面側枠部材311は、外殻が背面側に突出する半球形状に形成され、その突出された先から上部が正面側に張り出す(戻る)態様で略半円状に凹む(図17(b)参照)。その凹む部分に略矩形状の開口である挿通孔311aを備える。挿通孔311aは、首振り部材360が部分的に挿通される貫通孔である。 The back side frame member 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the outer shell protrudes to the back side, and the upper portion projects (returns) to the front side from the protruding tip and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape (FIG. 17 (b). )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swing member 360 is partially inserted.

図11に示すように、レバー部材340は、鉄などの金属材料から形成され断面コ字状の長尺棒状に形成される本体部材341と、その本体部材341の左側側面に締結固定され軸方向視の外形が略円形状に形成されるギアダンパ受け部材342と、そのギアダンパ受け部材342と同軸で軸支され軸方向視の外形が略円形状に形成されると共に本体部材341の右側側面に締結固定される姿勢検出部材343と、それらギアダンパ受け部材342及び姿勢検出部材343の円形部分に上側から外嵌する形状に形成される上部カバー部材344と、本体部材341を挟んで上部カバー部材344と対向配置される下部カバー部材345と、ギアダンパ受け部材342の筒状部342a及び姿勢検出部材343の筒状部343aに挿通される角度規制棒部材346と、本体部材341の軸孔341bと同軸で軸支される剥離部材350と、本体部材341の正面側端部に配設される首振り部材360と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 11, the lever member 340 is fastened and fixed to a main body member 341 formed of a metal material such as iron and formed into a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, and to the left side surface of the main body member 341 in the axial direction. A gear damper receiving member 342 whose visual outer shape is formed in a substantially circular shape, and a gear damper receiving member 342 which is coaxially supported by the gear damper receiving member 342 and whose axial outer shape is formed in a substantially circular shape and fastened to the right side surface of the main body member 341. The posture detection member 343 to be fixed, the upper cover member 344 formed in a shape that fits the circular portion of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detection member 343 from above, and the upper cover member 344 sandwiching the main body member 341. Coaxially with the lower cover member 345 arranged to face each other, the angle control rod member 346 inserted into the tubular portion 342a of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the tubular portion 343a of the posture detection member 343, and the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341. It mainly includes a peeling member 350 that is pivotally supported, and a swinging member 360 that is arranged at the front end of the main body member 341.

ギアダンパ受け部材342は、本体部材341の軸孔341bに挿通される筒状の筒状部342aと、外周面に沿ってギア歯状に形成されるギア部342bと、を主に備える。また、姿勢検出部材343は、本体部材341の軸孔341bに挿通される筒状の筒状部343aと、その筒状部343aから最も離間した位置(図11の奥側)に軸心方向に沿って延設される板状のセンサ検出片343bと、を主に備える。 The gear damper receiving member 342 mainly includes a tubular tubular portion 342a inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and a gear portion 342b formed in a gear tooth shape along the outer peripheral surface. Further, the posture detection member 343 is axially located at a position (back side in FIG. 11) that is farthest from the tubular portion 343a inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341 and the tubular portion 343a. It mainly includes a plate-shaped sensor detection piece 343b extending along the line.

筒状部342a,343aは、本体部材341の軸孔341bに挿通される部分であって、内周側にレバー支持軸331d1(図10参照)が挿通される。これにより、レバー部材340がレバー支持軸331d1を軸に揺動可能とされる。 The tubular portions 342a and 343a are portions to be inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10) is inserted into the inner peripheral side. As a result, the lever member 340 can swing around the lever support shaft 331d1.

ギア部342bは、ギアダンパ338(図10参照)と歯合される部分であって、ギアダンパ338が発生する粘性抵抗をレバー部材340に伝達する部分である。 The gear portion 342b is a portion that is meshed with the gear damper 338 (see FIG. 10), and is a portion that transmits the viscous resistance generated by the gear damper 338 to the lever member 340.

センサ検出片343bは、第1センサ部材325a1又は第2センサ部材325a2(図18(c)参照)の隙間を通過することでレバー部材340の姿勢を検出可能とする部分である。 The sensor detection piece 343b is a portion capable of detecting the posture of the lever member 340 by passing through the gap of the first sensor member 325a1 or the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 18C).

剥離部材350は、レバー部材340の軸孔341bと同軸で配置されレバー支持軸331d1(図10参照)に挿通される挿通孔352を備える板状の本体部材351と、その本体部材351の上側に固定される矩形状の嵩上げ部材353と、その嵩上げ部材353の上側に配置され本体部材351に締結固定されると共に磁性体材料から形成される磁石部材354と、を主に備える。 The peeling member 350 is a plate-shaped main body member 351 having an insertion hole 352 arranged coaxially with the shaft hole 341b of the lever member 340 and inserted into the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10), and on the upper side of the main body member 351. It mainly includes a rectangular raising member 353 to be fixed, and a magnet member 354 arranged above the raising member 353 and fastened and fixed to the main body member 351 and formed from a magnetic material.

磁石部材354は、本体部材341と対向配置され、本体部材351に締結固定されるので、本体部材341と本体部材351とを合体したり、分離させたりする働きを持つ。 The magnet member 354 is arranged to face the main body member 341 and is fastened and fixed to the main body member 351. Therefore, the magnet member 354 has a function of combining or separating the main body member 341 and the main body member 351.

図12は、レバー部材340の本体部材341、上部カバー部材344、下部カバー部材345及び首振り部材360の正面分解斜視図である。 FIG. 12 is a frontal disassembled perspective view of the main body member 341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swing member 360 of the lever member 340.

レバー部材340の本体部材341は、断面コ字状の長尺棒状に形成される本体部341aと、その本体部341aの略中央部において左右方向に穿設される一対の軸孔341bと、その軸孔341bの正面側において左右方向に穿設される規制孔341cと、本体部341aの正面側端部において本体部341aの延設方向に対して下方(図12下方)に傾斜して延設される左右一対の首振り部材支持部341dと、その首振り部材支持部341dの根本側で左右方向に穿設される軸孔341eと、その軸孔341eの正面側において左右方向に穿設される規制孔341fと、を主に備える。 The main body member 341 of the lever member 340 includes a main body portion 341a formed in the shape of a long rod having a U-shaped cross section, a pair of shaft holes 341b formed in the substantially central portion of the main body portion 341a in the left-right direction, and a pair of shaft holes 341b thereof. The regulation hole 341c drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341b and the front end of the main body 341a are inclined downward (downward in FIG. 12) with respect to the extension direction of the main body 341a. A pair of left and right swing member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left-right direction on the root side of the swing member support portion 341d, and a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341e. The regulation hole 341f is mainly provided.

軸孔341bは、筒状部342a,343a(図11参照)が挿通されると共にレバー支持軸331d1が挿通される貫通孔である。即ち、この軸孔341bの軸と同軸にレバー部材340の本体部材341と、剥離部材350とが軸支される。 The shaft hole 341b is a through hole through which the tubular portions 342a and 343a (see FIG. 11) are inserted and the lever support shaft 331d1 is inserted. That is, the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are pivotally supported coaxially with the shaft of the shaft hole 341b.

規制孔341cは、角度規制棒部材346が支持される貫通孔である。 The regulation hole 341c is a through hole in which the angle regulation rod member 346 is supported.

軸孔341eは、首振り部材360を軸支する軸支棒363が挿通される貫通孔であり、規制孔341fは首振り部材360の揺動角度を規制する規制棒365が挿通される貫通孔である。なお、規制孔341fに比較して軸孔341eの方が軸支棒363の周りに緩衝部材364が配設される分、内径が大きくされる。 The shaft hole 341e is a through hole through which the shaft support rod 363 that pivotally supports the swing member 360 is inserted, and the regulation hole 341f is a through hole through which the regulation rod 365 that regulates the swing angle of the swing member 360 is inserted. Is. The inner diameter of the shaft hole 341e is larger than that of the regulation hole 341f because the cushioning member 364 is arranged around the shaft support rod 363.

上部カバー部材344は、樹脂材料から形成され、レバー部材340の本体部材341に上側から締結固定される部材であって、背面側に軸孔341bを中心とする円に沿った曲面を形成する態様とされるガイド部344aと、そのガイド部344aに連設されレバー部材340の本体部341に上側から外嵌可能な断面コ字形状に形成される外嵌部344bと、それらガイド部344a及び外嵌部344bを連結する連結部344cと、を主に備える。連結部344cは、厚さが薄くされる(図22参照)。 The upper cover member 344 is a member formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and has an embodiment of forming a curved surface along a circle centered on a shaft hole 341b on the back surface side. The guide portion 344a, the outer fitting portion 344b which is connected to the guide portion 344a and is formed in a U-shaped cross section that can be externally fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and the guide portion 344a and the outer It mainly includes a connecting portion 344c for connecting the fitting portion 344b. The thickness of the connecting portion 344c is reduced (see FIG. 22).

下部カバー部材345は、樹脂材料から形成され、レバー部材340の本体部材341に下側から締結固定される部材であって、軸孔341bを中心とする円に沿った形状で左右方向に延設される背面ガイド部345aと、レバー部材340の本体部341に下側から外嵌可能な断面コ字形状に形成される外嵌部345bと、外嵌部345bを挟んで背面ガイド部345aの反対側に配設され正面側へ向けて湾曲形成される正面曲面部345cと、その正面曲面部345cの左右の端部から正面側に延設される正面ガイド部345dと、を主に備える。 The lower cover member 345 is a member formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and extends in the left-right direction in a shape along a circle centered on the shaft hole 341b. The back guide portion 345a is formed, the outer fitting portion 345b formed in a U-shaped cross section that can be externally fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and the rear guide portion 345a sandwiching the outer fitting portion 345b. It mainly includes a front curved surface portion 345c arranged on the side and curved toward the front side, and a front surface guide portion 345d extending from the left and right ends of the front curved surface portion 345c to the front side.

背面ガイド部345aは、上部カバー部材344のガイド部344aと共に、内側ケース部材330の切り欠き331c1(図10参照)に沿って配設される部分である。組立状態において、背面ガイド部345a及びガイド部344aの縁部を覆い隠す態様で外側ケース部材320の前カバー321(図8参照)や上カバー322(図8参照)が配設される。これにより、背面ガイド部345a及びガイド部344aは、内側ケース部材330に埃や球(遊技球、遊技媒体)が侵入することを防止することができる。 The back guide portion 345a is a portion arranged along the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330 together with the guide portion 344a of the upper cover member 344. In the assembled state, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 8) and the upper cover 322 (see FIG. 8) of the outer case member 320 are arranged so as to cover the edges of the back guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a. As a result, the back guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a can prevent dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering the inner case member 330.

正面曲面部345c及び正面ガイド部345dは、共に首振り部材360の本体部材361の揺動を案内(図11参照)する部分である。正面曲面部345cによって、首振り部材360の回転方向の位置ずれや、レンズ部材317(図10参照)を押し込まれた際の衝撃が受け止められ、正面ガイド部345dによって、首振り部材360が軸方向に位置ずれすることが抑制される。 Both the front curved surface portion 345c and the front guide portion 345d are portions that guide the swing of the main body member 361 of the swing member 360 (see FIG. 11). The front curved surface portion 345c receives the displacement of the swing member 360 in the rotational direction and the impact when the lens member 317 (see FIG. 10) is pushed in, and the front guide portion 345d causes the swing member 360 to move in the axial direction. It is suppressed that the position shifts to.

なお、下部カバー部材345は、内側ケース部材330の切り欠き331c1(図10参照)の下端部と対向配置されるので、レバー部材340が押し下げ動作される際に外側ケース部材320(図8参照)にレバー部材340の本体部材341(金属材料から形成される)が直接当接することを防止することができる。即ち、間に樹脂材料から形成される下部カバー部材345が配設されることで、レバー部材340と外側ケース部材320とが当接した場合の衝撃を緩和することができる。 Since the lower cover member 345 is arranged to face the lower end of the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330, the outer case member 320 (see FIG. 8) is pushed down when the lever member 340 is pushed down. It is possible to prevent the main body member 341 (formed from the metal material) of the lever member 340 from directly contacting the lever member 340. That is, by disposing the lower cover member 345 formed of the resin material between them, it is possible to alleviate the impact when the lever member 340 and the outer case member 320 come into contact with each other.

首振り部材360は、レバー部材340の本体部材341の正面側端部に配設され軸孔341eを軸に揺動可能とされる部材であって、首振り部材支持部341dの左右方向外側に配設される側壁部361aを有すると共に断面コ字状に形成される板状の本体部材361と、その本体部材361の正面側の壁部に係止されると共に本体部材361と同軸で軸支される板状のモータ固定板362と、本体部材361の軸孔361c及び軸孔341eに挿通される円柱形状の軸支棒363と、その軸支棒363を内嵌すると共に軸孔341eに外嵌される緩衝部材364と、その緩衝部材364に巻き付け支持されるねじりバネSP2と、規制孔341fに挿通固定される円柱形状の規制棒365と、モータ固定板362に締結固定されモータ固定板362の面に垂直な方向に直線的な振動を発生させるボイスコイルモータから構成される振動装置366と、を主に備える。 The swing member 360 is a member that is arranged at the front end of the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and is swingable around the shaft hole 341e, and is located on the lateral side of the swing member support portion 341d in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped main body member 361 having a side wall portion 361a to be arranged and formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a shaft support coaxially with the main body member 361 while being locked to a wall portion on the front side of the main body member 361. The plate-shaped motor fixing plate 362 to be formed, the cylindrical shaft support rod 363 inserted into the shaft hole 361c and the shaft hole 341e of the main body member 361, and the shaft support rod 363 are fitted inside and outside the shaft hole 341e. The cushioning member 364 to be fitted, the torsion spring SP2 wound and supported around the cushioning member 364, the cylindrical regulation rod 365 inserted and fixed in the regulation hole 341f, and the motor fixing plate 362 fastened and fixed to the motor fixing plate 362. A vibration device 366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the surface is mainly provided.

本体部材361は、互いに対向配置される一対の板状の側壁部361aと、その側壁部361aを正面側の端部で連結する正面壁部361bと、一対の側壁部361aに同軸で円形に穿設され緩衝部材364が内嵌される軸孔361cと、その軸孔361cを中心とした円に沿って形成され規制棒365が挿通される長孔状の角度規制孔361dと、側壁部361a及び正面壁部361bの上側で互いに離反する方向に折曲形成され首振り操作部材310が締結固定される固定板部361eと、を主に備える。 The main body member 361 is coaxially and circularly bored with a pair of plate-shaped side wall portions 361a arranged to face each other, a front wall portion 361b connecting the side wall portions 361a at an end portion on the front side, and a pair of side wall portions 361a. A shaft hole 361c in which the cushioning member 364 is installed, an elongated angle regulation hole 361d formed along a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c and through which the regulation rod 365 is inserted, a side wall portion 361a, and a side wall portion 361a. It mainly includes a fixing plate portion 361e which is bent on the upper side of the front wall portion 361b in a direction away from each other and to which the swinging operation member 310 is fastened and fixed.

側壁部361aの背面側端部の外形が軸孔361cを中心とした円形に形成されているので、側壁部361aの背面側端部を正面曲面部345cに摺動させた状態で本体部材361を揺動させることができる。 Since the outer shape of the back side end portion of the side wall portion 361a is formed in a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c, the main body member 361 is slid on the front curved surface portion 345c with the back side end portion of the side wall portion 361a slid. It can be rocked.

軸孔361cは、軸孔341eと同様に、緩衝部材364に外嵌支持される。これにより、首振り部材360側で生じる振動がレバー部材340の本体部材341側へ伝達することを抑制することができる。 The shaft hole 361c is externally fitted and supported by the cushioning member 364 in the same manner as the shaft hole 341e. As a result, it is possible to suppress the vibration generated on the swing member 360 side from being transmitted to the main body member 341 side of the lever member 340.

角度規制孔361dは、樹脂材料から形成される緩衝部材361d1を備える。緩衝部材361d1は角度規制孔361dの内周面を覆う態様で取り付けられる。これにより、規制棒365が角度規制孔361dに当接する際の衝撃を抑制することができる。 The angle regulating hole 361d includes a cushioning member 361d1 formed of a resin material. The cushioning member 361d1 is attached so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the angle regulating hole 361d. As a result, the impact when the regulation rod 365 comes into contact with the angle regulation hole 361d can be suppressed.

モータ固定板362は、本体部材361の正面壁部361bに対して垂直に係止される板状の本体部362aと、その本体部362aの左右端部で折曲される一対の側壁部362bと、を主に備える。 The motor fixing plate 362 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 362a that is vertically locked to the front wall portion 361b of the main body member 361, and a pair of side wall portions 362b that are bent at the left and right ends of the main body portion 362a. , Is mainly provided.

本体部362aは、正面側に突起362a1が凸設され、その突起362a1が正面壁部361bに穿設される孔に差し込まれることで係止される。 The main body portion 362a is locked by having a protrusion 362a1 projecting on the front side and inserting the protrusion 362a1 into a hole formed in the front wall portion 361b.

側壁部362bは、軸孔341eと同径の軸孔362b1が穿設され、緩衝部材364に外嵌支持される部分であって、首振り部材支持部341dの左右方向内側に配設される。即ち、首振り部材支持部341dは、側壁部361aと側壁部362bとに挟まれる形で組立られる。 The side wall portion 362b is a portion in which a shaft hole 362b1 having the same diameter as the shaft hole 341e is bored and is externally supported by the cushioning member 364, and is arranged inside the swing member support portion 341d in the left-right direction. That is, the swing member support portion 341d is assembled so as to be sandwiched between the side wall portion 361a and the side wall portion 362b.

緩衝部材364は、本体部材341に外側から挿通される筒状部材であって、差し込み先端側である差し込み部364aが小径に形成され、その差し込み部364aよりも根本側に形成される根本部364bが差し込み部364aに比較して大径に形成される。 The cushioning member 364 is a tubular member that is inserted into the main body member 341 from the outside, and the insertion portion 364a on the insertion tip side is formed to have a small diameter, and the root portion 364b is formed on the root side of the insertion portion 364a. Is formed to have a larger diameter than the insertion portion 364a.

緩衝部材364に外嵌支持されるものの内、本体部材361は根本部364bに外嵌され、本体部材341及びモータ固定板362は差し込み部364aに外嵌される。 Of those supported by the cushioning member 364, the main body member 361 is externally fitted to the root portion 364b, and the main body member 341 and the motor fixing plate 362 are externally fitted to the insertion portion 364a.

振動装置366は、電磁力により一対の部材を直線方向に近接離反させる態様で互いに動作させる装置であって、モータ固定板362に締結固定されると共に周囲に銅線が巻き付けられた筒状部材であるボビン部材366aと、そのボビン部材366aの内周面よりも外径が小径とされる円筒およびボビン部材366aの外周面よりも内径が大径とされる円筒が同軸で配置され円板形状の板で連結される押し付け部材366b(図19参照)と、を主に備える。 The vibrating device 366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move close to each other in a linear direction by an electromagnetic force, and is a cylindrical member that is fastened and fixed to a motor fixing plate 362 and has a copper wire wound around it. A disc-shaped bobbin member 366a, a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a, and a cylinder having an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a are arranged coaxially. It mainly includes a pressing member 366b (see FIG. 19) connected by a plate.

押し付け部材366bは、内側の円筒が軸心方向で極性が変化する磁性体材料から形成される。 The pressing member 366b is formed of a magnetic material whose inner cylinder changes polarity in the axial direction.

ねじりバネSP2は、一方の端部が本体部材341に係止され、他方の端部がモータ固定板362に係止される。本実施形態では、ねじりバネSP2により、首振り部材360が、本体部材341に対して倒れる方向に付勢される。 One end of the torsion spring SP2 is locked to the main body member 341, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP2 urges the swing member 360 in the direction of tilting with respect to the main body member 341.

図13は、首振り操作部材310の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図13では、背面側枠部材311の図示が省略される。図13に示すように、首振り操作部材310は、背面側枠部材311(図11参照)と、その背面側枠部材311が締結固定されると共に首振り部材360の固定板部361eに締結固定される円環板状の中間枠部材312と、その中間枠部材312との位相が一致された状態で中間枠部材312の正面側に締結固定される振動案内部材313と、その振動案内部材313から凸設される導光部材313aが挿通されると共に中心部に孔を有さない円盤形状に形成される振動部材314と、その振動部材314の中央部に固定される振動コイルスプリングCS1を挟んで振動部材314と対向配置されるスイッチ部材315と、そのスイッチ部材315の正面側から外嵌される中間部材316と、その中間部材316を背面側に収容すると共に振動部材314に外嵌支持されるレンズ部材317と、を主に備える。 FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 310. Note that in FIG. 13, the back side frame member 311 is not shown. As shown in FIG. 13, the swing operation member 310 is fastened and fixed to the back side frame member 311 (see FIG. 11) and the back side frame member 311 and to the fixing plate portion 361e of the swing member 360. A vibration guide member 313 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the intermediate frame member 312 in a state where the annular plate-shaped intermediate frame member 312 and the intermediate frame member 312 are in phase with each other, and the vibration guide member 313. A vibrating member 314 formed in a disk shape having no hole in the center and a vibrating coil spring CS1 fixed to the central portion of the vibrating member 314 are sandwiched. The switch member 315 which is arranged to face the vibrating member 314, the intermediate member 316 which is externally fitted from the front side of the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 are housed on the back side and are externally supported by the vibrating member 314. The lens member 317 is mainly provided.

上述した構成により、首振り操作部材310は、中間枠部材312及び振動案内部材313が互いに固定され、振動部材314及びレンズ部材317が互いに固定され、スイッチ部材315及び中間部材316が互いに固定される。 According to the above-described configuration, in the swing operation member 310, the intermediate frame member 312 and the vibration guide member 313 are fixed to each other, the vibration member 314 and the lens member 317 are fixed to each other, and the switch member 315 and the intermediate member 316 are fixed to each other. ..

中間枠部材312は、円環板形状の底部312aと、その底部312aの外周から全周に亘って前方に延設される側壁部312bと、底部312aの形成する面に垂直な方向で正面側に立設される複数の円柱形状のスイッチ支持棒312cと、底部312aの背面側上部に前後方向に移動可能に配設される裏ボタン部材312dと、を主に備える。 The intermediate frame member 312 has a ring-shaped bottom portion 312a, a side wall portion 312b extending forward from the outer circumference of the bottom portion 312a over the entire circumference, and a front side in a direction perpendicular to the surface formed by the bottom portion 312a. Mainly includes a plurality of cylindrical switch support rods 312c erected in the above, and a back button member 312d movably arranged on the upper part of the back surface side of the bottom portion 312a in the front-rear direction.

底部312aは、図13における上下左右の端部に径方向から中心側へ向けて凹設される矩形状の凹設部312a1を備える。 The bottom portion 312a includes a rectangular recessed portion 312a1 that is recessed from the radial direction toward the center side at the top, bottom, left, and right ends of FIG.

凹設部312a1は、スイッチ部材315の腕部315fが挿通される部分であって、スイッチ部材315の腕部315fの先端部が側壁部312bに係止される(図21(a)参照)ことで、スイッチ部材315が中間枠部材312に対して引き抜き不能に配設される。 The recessed portion 312a1 is a portion through which the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is inserted, and the tip end portion of the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is locked to the side wall portion 312b (see FIG. 21A). Therefore, the switch member 315 is arranged so as not to be pulled out with respect to the intermediate frame member 312.

スイッチ支持棒312cは、振動案内部材313、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315に共通で挿通される部材である。これにより、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315の前後方向(各部材の積層方向)の動作時に、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315が動作方向に傾くことを防止することができる。そのため、例えば、レンズ部材317に前後方向と傾斜した方向から力がかけられた場合にも、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作に抵抗が生じることを抑制でき、押し込み操作の操作性を向上させることができる。また、振動部材314が振動装置366により振動する場合に、振動部材314が傾くことを抑制することができる。 The switch support rod 312c is a member that is commonly inserted into the vibration guide member 313, the vibration member 314, and the switch member 315. As a result, it is possible to prevent the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 from tilting in the operating direction when the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (stacking direction of each member). Therefore, for example, even when a force is applied to the lens member 317 from the front-rear direction and the inclined direction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of resistance in the pushing operation of the lens member 317, and it is possible to improve the operability of the pushing operation. .. Further, when the vibrating member 314 is vibrated by the vibrating device 366, the tilting of the vibrating member 314 can be suppressed.

なお、ここで振動装置366の振動とは、部材が細かに振るえる振動や、部材が直線方向に移動し移動終端で他の部材に衝突して戻ってくることを繰り返す往復動作などを意味する。 Here, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 means a vibration in which the member vibrates finely, a reciprocating operation in which the member moves in a linear direction, collides with another member at the end of the movement, and returns.

裏ボタン部材312dは、底部312aとの間に介設されるコイルスプリングにより普段は背面側に張り出された位置に配置され、正面側の中央部に板状の検出片312d1を備える。 The back button member 312d is usually arranged at a position overhanging to the back side by a coil spring interposed between the back button member 312d and includes a plate-shaped detection piece 312d1 at the center on the front side.

振動案内部材313は、正面側に複数(本実施形態では8本)立設される導光部材313aと、スイッチ支持棒312cが挿通される複数の挿通孔313bと、下端部において正面側に配設されるフォトカプラ形式の第1センサ部材313cと、上端部において背面側に配設されるフォトカプラ形式の第2センサ部材313dと、を主に備える。 The vibration guide members 313 are arranged on the front side at the lower end, with a plurality of light guide members 313a (8 in this embodiment) erected on the front side, a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which the switch support rods 312c are inserted, and a lower end portion. It mainly includes a photocoupler type first sensor member 313c to be provided, and a photocoupler type second sensor member 313d arranged on the back side at the upper end portion.

導光部材313aは、背面側にLED等の発光部材が配設される透明部材である。導光部材313aは、振動部材314、スイッチ部材315及び中間部材316に挿通されることで、先端部がレンズ部材317に対して対向配置(近接配置)される。そのため、発光部材から照射される光をレンズ部材317付近まで導くことができ、レンズ部材317を発光させる効果を向上させることができる。 The light guide member 313a is a transparent member in which a light emitting member such as an LED is arranged on the back surface side. The light guide member 313a is inserted into the vibrating member 314, the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 so that the tip end portion thereof is arranged (closely arranged) with respect to the lens member 317. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting member can be guided to the vicinity of the lens member 317, and the effect of causing the lens member 317 to emit light can be improved.

また、上述したように、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315の前後方向(各部材の積層方向)の動作時に、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315が動作方向に傾くことが防止されるので、振動部材314及びスイッチ部材315が傾くことで導光部材313aと当接し、導光部材313aが破損することを抑制することができる。 Further, as described above, when the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (stacking direction of each member), the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are prevented from being tilted in the operating direction. And when the switch member 315 is tilted, it comes into contact with the light guide member 313a, and it is possible to prevent the light guide member 313a from being damaged.

第1センサ部材313cは、スイッチ部材315に配設される検出片315g(図21(a)参照)が隙間を通過したことを検出し、スイッチ部材315の配置を検出する検出部材である。 The first sensor member 313c is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 315g (see FIG. 21A) arranged on the switch member 315 has passed through the gap and detects the arrangement of the switch member 315.

第2センサ部材313dは、検出片312d1が隙間を通過したことを検出し、後述する首振り操作部材310の首振りの姿勢を検出する検出部材である。 The second sensor member 313d is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 312d1 has passed through the gap and detects the swinging posture of the swinging operation member 310, which will be described later.

振動部材314は、断面の外径形状が底部312aと略同一形状で形成されると共に中央部に孔が開口形成されない略円板形状の本体部314aと、スイッチ支持棒312cが挿通される複数(本実施形態では4箇所)のスイッチ支持孔314bと、本体部314aの中央部から正面側に円筒形状に凸設され振動コイルスプリングCS1が巻き付け支持される中央筒状部314cと、スイッチ支持棒312cの先端部から押し込みコイルスプリングCS2に続いて挿通されるスイッチ受け部材314dと、本体部314aの下部において前後方向に第1センサ部材313cを収容可能な形状で穿設されるセンサ収容孔314eと、導光部材313aを挿通可能とされる導光孔314fと、を主に備える。 The vibrating member 314 has a substantially disk-shaped main body 314a having a cross-sectional outer diameter shape substantially the same as that of the bottom portion 312a and having no hole formed in the central portion, and a plurality of vibrating members 314 through which the switch support rod 312c is inserted. Switch support holes 314b (4 locations in this embodiment), a central tubular portion 314c that is projected in a cylindrical shape from the center of the main body 314a to the front side and around which the vibration coil spring CS1 is wound and supported, and a switch support rod 312c. A switch receiving member 314d inserted following the push-in coil spring CS2 from the tip of the sensor, and a sensor accommodating hole 314e formed in a shape capable of accommodating the first sensor member 313c in the front-rear direction at the lower part of the main body 314a. It mainly includes a light guide hole 314f through which a light guide member 313a can be inserted.

なお、振動コイルスプリングCS1に比較して、押し込みコイルスプリングCS2は、弾性係数が小さくされる。 The elastic modulus of the push-in coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the vibration coil spring CS1.

本体部314aは、外形形状が底部312aと略同一形状で形成されるので、スイッチ部材315の腕部315fを外周部分に4箇所形成される凹設部を通して挿通させることができる。 Since the main body portion 314a is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the bottom portion 312a, the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 can be inserted through the recessed portions formed at four locations on the outer peripheral portion.

スイッチ受け部材314dは、正面側にスイッチ支持孔314bよりも大径とされる大径部314d1が形成される円筒部材であって、正面側からスイッチ支持孔314bに挿通されることで、大径部314d1がスイッチ支持孔314bに係止される。なお押し込みコイルスプリングCS2は、外径がスイッチ支持孔314bよりも小径で形成される。 The switch receiving member 314d is a cylindrical member having a large diameter portion 314d1 formed on the front side having a diameter larger than that of the switch support hole 314b, and is inserted into the switch support hole 314b from the front side to have a large diameter. The portion 314d1 is locked in the switch support hole 314b. The push-in coil spring CS2 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the switch support hole 314b.

スイッチ部材315は、円板形状に形成される本体部315aと、その本体部315aの中央部から正面側(図13左側)へ向けてカップ上に張出形成されるバネ受け部315bと、スイッチ支持棒312cが挿通可能とされるスイッチ支持孔315cと、導光部材313aを挿通可能に形成される導光孔315dと、上下中央(図13の上下中央)に配置される一対のスイッチ受け部材314dに挿通される案内軸315eと、凹設部312a1に挿入され係止される腕部315fと、第1センサ部材313cの隙間を通過可能とされると共に本体部315aの下部(図13下側)において背面側に凸設される板状の検出片315gと、を主に備える。 The switch member 315 includes a main body portion 315a formed in a disk shape, a spring receiving portion 315b formed overhanging the cup from the central portion of the main body portion 315a toward the front side (left side in FIG. 13), and a switch. A switch support hole 315c through which the support rod 312c can be inserted, a light guide hole 315d formed through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and a pair of switch receiving members arranged at the upper and lower centers (upper and lower centers in FIG. 13). It is possible to pass through the gap between the guide shaft 315e inserted through the 314d, the arm portion 315f inserted into the recessed portion 312a1 and locked, and the first sensor member 313c, and the lower part of the main body portion 315a (lower side in FIG. 13). ), The plate-shaped detection piece 315 g, which is projected on the back surface side, is mainly provided.

スイッチ支持孔315cは、スイッチ支持棒312cの外径よりも大きな径で形成され、スイッチ受け部材314dの大径部314d1の外径よりも小さな径で形成される。これにより、スイッチ部材315が振動部材314に近接する方向に移動する場合に、大径部314d1でスイッチ部材315を支えることができる。 The switch support hole 315c is formed with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the switch support rod 312c, and is formed with a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the large diameter portion 314d1 of the switch receiving member 314d. As a result, when the switch member 315 moves in a direction close to the vibrating member 314, the switch member 315 can be supported by the large diameter portion 314d1.

案内軸315eは、スイッチ受け部材314dに挿通されるので、振動部材314に対するスイッチ部材315の傾きを抑制することができる。 Since the guide shaft 315e is inserted through the switch receiving member 314d, the inclination of the switch member 315 with respect to the vibrating member 314 can be suppressed.

中間部材316は、導光部材313aを挿通可能とされる導光孔316aを備え、スイッチ部材315に相対回転不能に外嵌固定される。 The intermediate member 316 is provided with a light guide hole 316a through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and is externally fitted and fixed to the switch member 315 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

図14(a)は、偏心カム部材333の正面図であり、図14(b)は、偏心カム部材333の底面図であり、図14(c)は、図14(a)のXIVc−XIVc線における偏心カム部材333の断面図である。 14 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 333, FIG. 14 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 333, and FIG. 14 (c) is the XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the eccentric cam member 333 in line.

図14に示すように、偏心カム部材333は、回転ギアとして形成される本体部333aと、その本体部333aの回転軸と同軸に配設される筒状の筒状部333bと、その筒状部333bに内接する円に沿って軸方向に延設され筒状部333bより若干短く形成されると共に内部が中空とされるカム部333cと、筒状部333bの先端部に軸方向に沿って切り欠かれる一対の切り欠き333dと、筒状部333bとカム部333cとを双方の軸を通る方向で連結する板状のリブ部333eと、本体部333aのギア部分を覆う円板形状の傘部333fと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 14, the eccentric cam member 333 includes a main body 333a formed as a rotary gear, a tubular tubular portion 333b disposed coaxially with the rotation axis of the main body 333a, and a tubular portion 333b thereof. A cam portion 333c extending in the axial direction along a circle inscribed in the portion 333b and formed slightly shorter than the tubular portion 333b and having a hollow inside, and a cam portion 333c extending in the axial direction along the tip of the tubular portion 333b. A pair of notches 333d to be cut out, a plate-shaped rib portion 333e connecting the tubular portion 333b and the cam portion 333c in the direction passing through both axes, and a disk-shaped umbrella covering the gear portion of the main body portion 333a. Mainly includes a portion 333f.

本体部333a及びカム部333cは、軸方向にずれて(2層構造で)配置される。カム部333cは、中空とされるので、レバー部材340に当接した場合に、カム部333cが内側に若干撓む(弾性変形する)ことによって衝撃を吸収することができる。 The main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c are arranged so as to be displaced in the axial direction (in a two-layer structure). Since the cam portion 333c is hollow, when it comes into contact with the lever member 340, the cam portion 333c slightly bends inward (elastically deforms) to absorb the impact.

カム部333cは、外形が円形で形成される中空の環状部分であって、本体部333aに偏心して固定される。 The cam portion 333c is a hollow annular portion having a circular outer shape, and is eccentrically fixed to the main body portion 333a.

切り欠き333dは、位相検出部材334(図15参照)との相対的な位相を不変とするためのものであり、対向配置される一対の切り欠きが周方向の長さを違えて形成されることで、位相検出部材334を180度反転して組み付けることを防止することができる。 The notch 333d is for making the phase relative to the phase detection member 334 (see FIG. 15) invariant, and a pair of notches arranged to face each other are formed having different lengths in the circumferential direction. This makes it possible to prevent the phase detection member 334 from being assembled by reversing it by 180 degrees.

リブ部333eが、カム部333cの筒状部333bから最も離間する位置と筒状部333bとを連結する態様で配設されることで、中空形成されるカム部333cの内で最も強度的に弱くなる部分の強度を向上させることができる。これにより、カム部333cが破損することを抑制することができる。 The rib portion 333e is arranged in such a manner that the position farthest from the tubular portion 333b of the cam portion 333c and the tubular portion 333b are connected to each other, so that the strength of the hollow cam portion 333c is the highest. The strength of the weakened part can be improved. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam portion 333c from being damaged.

なお、リブ部333eは、長手方向の途中で部分的に分断されても良い。これにより、カム部333cの撓み(弾性変形)の度合いが小さい場合にはリブ部333eに荷重をかけず、カム部333cの撓み(弾性変形)の度合いが大きい場合にのみリブ部333eの分断された部分が互いに当接するようにすることができる。これにより、リブ部333eが非当接の間(カム部333cの撓み(弾性変形)の度合いが小さい場合)にはリブ部333eが疲労することを抑制できるので、リブ部333eの耐久性を向上させることができる。 The rib portion 333e may be partially divided in the middle of the longitudinal direction. As a result, when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small, no load is applied to the rib portion 333e, and the rib portion 333e is divided only when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is large. The portions can be brought into contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to suppress fatigue of the rib portion 333e while the rib portion 333e is not in contact (when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small), so that the durability of the rib portion 333e is improved. Can be made to.

図15(a)は、位相検出部材334の正面図であり、図15(b)は、位相検出部材334の底面図であり、図15(c)は、図15(a)のXVc−XVc線における位相検出部材334の断面図である。なお、図15(c)では、組立状態(図17(a)参照)における環状凸部332i及び偏心カム軸331d2が想像線で図示される。 15 (a) is a front view of the phase detection member 334, FIG. 15 (b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member 334, and FIG. 15 (c) is XVc-XVc of FIG. 15 (a). It is sectional drawing of the phase detection member 334 in line. In FIG. 15C, the annular convex portion 332i and the eccentric camshaft 331d2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17A) are illustrated by imaginary lines.

図15に示すように、位相検出部材334は途中で径が拡径される筒状に形成され、偏心カム軸331d2(図10参照)に外嵌軸支される軸支部334aと、その軸支部334aに連設され正面側(図15(c)上方)へ向かうほど拡径される(2段階で拡径される)拡径部334bと、その拡径部334bの正面側端部から軸方向に延設される板状の検出片334cと、切り欠き333dに合致する形状の回り止め突起334dと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 15, the phase detection member 334 is formed in a tubular shape whose diameter is expanded in the middle, and is externally fitted to the eccentric camshaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10). The shaft support portion 334a and the shaft support portion thereof. A diameter-expanded portion 334b that is connected to 334a and whose diameter is increased toward the front side (upper in FIG. 15C) (the diameter is expanded in two steps) and the axial direction from the front end of the diameter-expanded portion 334b. 334c, which is a plate-shaped detection piece, and 334d, which has a shape corresponding to the notch 333d, are mainly provided.

拡径部334bは、右カバー部材332の内面側に環状に凸設される環状凸部332i(図10参照)に外嵌される部分である。偏心カム軸331d2を環状凸部332iの内側面で支持し、環状凸部332iの外側面で位相検出部材334の拡径部334bを内周側から支持することで、偏心カム軸331d2を強固に支持し、偏心カム軸331d2が径方向から荷重を受けた場合に軸ずれすることを抑制することができる。 The enlarged diameter portion 334b is a portion that is externally fitted to the annular convex portion 332i (see FIG. 10) that is annularly projected on the inner surface side of the right cover member 332. By supporting the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 on the inner surface of the annular convex portion 332i and supporting the enlarged diameter portion 334b of the phase detection member 334 from the inner peripheral side on the outer surface of the annular convex portion 332i, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is firmly supported. It can be supported and the eccentric camshaft 331d2 can be prevented from being displaced when a load is applied from the radial direction.

検出片334cは、第3センサ部材325a3(図9参照)の隙間を通過可能とされる。検出片334cが第3センサ部材325a3の隙間を通過すると、回り止め突起334dと切り欠き333dとが噛み合うことで位相検出部材334と相対的な位相が不変とされる偏心カム部材333の姿勢を検出することができる。 The detection piece 334c is allowed to pass through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9). When the detection piece 334c passes through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3, the posture of the eccentric cam member 333 whose phase relative to the phase detection member 334 is invariant is detected by meshing the detent projection 334d and the notch 333d. can do.

図16(a)は、レバー部材340の正面図であり、図16(b)は、図16(a)の矢印XVIb方向視におけるレバー部材340の側面図であり、図16(c)は、図16(a)の矢印XVIb方向視におけるレバー部材340の上面図である。 16 (a) is a front view of the lever member 340, FIG. 16 (b) is a side view of the lever member 340 in the direction of arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a), and FIG. 16 (c) is a side view of the lever member 340. 16 is a top view of the lever member 340 in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG. 16A.

図16(a)に示すように、軸孔341bに比較して、軸孔341eが、本体部材341の長手方向に向いた直線であって軸孔341bを通る直線よりも下方(図16(a)下方)に配置される。これによって、首振り部材360側で生じる荷重がレバー部材340の長手方向に沿って与えられることを抑制することができ、荷重をレバー部材340の回転方向に向けることができる。 As shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft hole 341e is a straight line oriented in the longitudinal direction of the main body member 341 and lower than the straight line passing through the shaft hole 341b as compared with the shaft hole 341b (FIG. 16A). ) Below). As a result, it is possible to suppress the load generated on the swing member 360 side from being applied along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340, and the load can be directed in the rotation direction of the lever member 340.

図16(b)に示すように、本体部材341は断面コ字状に形成され、そのコ字状の開放側に剥離部材350が配設される。嵩上げ部材353や磁石部材354と本体部材341との間には若干の隙間が空けられる。 As shown in FIG. 16B, the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section, and the peeling member 350 is arranged on the U-shaped open side. There is a slight gap between the raising member 353 or the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341.

これにより、剥離部材350が本体部材341に固定されている場合は、本体部材341のコ字状の開放側(図16(b)下方)を剥離部材350で埋めることで本体部材341の強度を確保することができる。 As a result, when the peeling member 350 is fixed to the main body member 341, the strength of the main body member 341 is increased by filling the U-shaped open side (lower side of FIG. 16B) of the main body member 341 with the peeling member 350. Can be secured.

また、剥離部材350が本体部材341に固定された状態から引きはがされ始める場合や、その引きはがされた状態(図23(a)参照)から剥離部材350が本体部材341に近接する方向へ移動する場合の移動抵抗を上昇させることができる。 Further, when the peeling member 350 starts to be peeled off from the state fixed to the main body member 341, or when the peeling member 350 approaches the main body member 341 from the peeled state (see FIG. 23A). It is possible to increase the movement resistance when moving to.

これにより、本体部材341に対して剥離部材350が相対移動する際の移動抵抗を上昇させることができ、例えば、レバー部材340が揺動を規制される状態(図22(a)参照)でレバー部材340が過荷重を受け剥離部材350が本体部材341から引きはがされた場合に、かけられていた荷重の勢いで本体部材341が高速で揺動することを防止することができる。 As a result, the movement resistance when the peeling member 350 moves relative to the main body member 341 can be increased. For example, the lever member 340 is restricted from swinging (see FIG. 22A). When the member 340 is overloaded and the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, it is possible to prevent the main body member 341 from swinging at high speed due to the force of the applied load.

図17(a)は、操作デバイス300の正面図であり、図17(b)は、図17(a)の矢印XVIIb方向視における操作デバイス300の側面図である。なお、図17では、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態(遊技者に押し下げ操作された状態)が図示される。 FIG. 17 (a) is a front view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 17 (b) is a side view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position (a state in which the player pushes down the swing operation member 310).

図18(a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図であり、図18(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIb−XVIIIb線における操作デバイス300の部分断面図であり、図18(c)は、図17(a)のXVIIIc−XVIIIc線における操作デバイス300の部分断面図である。また、図19は、図18(a)の首振り操作部材310の部分拡大図である。なお、図18(b)及び図18(c)は図18(a)よりも若干拡大してあり、図19では、首振り操作部材310の振動装置366の中心軸が上下方向に向けられた状態が図示される。 18 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 18 (b) is a portion of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 18 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). Further, FIG. 19 is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member 310 of FIG. 18A. 18 (b) and 18 (c) are slightly enlarged from FIG. 18 (a), and in FIG. 19, the central axis of the vibrating device 366 of the swing operation member 310 is oriented in the vertical direction. The state is illustrated.

図18(a)に示すように、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態でロック部材336が固定側に配置されると、剥離部材350の下側側面に偏心カム部材333が当接され、上側側面にロック部材336が当接されることで、剥離部材350が両方向に揺動することを防止されるので、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に固定される。 As shown in FIG. 18A, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side while the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the eccentric cam member 333 hits the lower side surface of the release member 350. When the lock member 336 is brought into contact with the upper side surface, the release member 350 is prevented from swinging in both directions, so that the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position.

本実施形態のように、ロック部材336がロック軸331d3を中心に揺動され、そのロック部材336が剥離部材350の揺動をせき止める部分の、剥離部材350を挟んで反対側に偏心カム部材333が配置される場合、剥離部材350がロック部材336に揺動をせき止められる状態におけるロック部材336の姿勢を設計的に調整することができる。 As in the present embodiment, the lock member 336 is swung around the lock shaft 331d3, and the eccentric cam member 333 is located on the opposite side of the part where the lock member 336 stops the swing of the peeling member 350 with the peeling member 350 in between. When is arranged, the posture of the lock member 336 in a state where the release member 350 is dampened by the lock member 336 can be adjusted in a design manner.

本実施形態では、ロック部材336の回転軸と剥離部材350の上側側面との距離が最も近づくとき、即ち、偏心カム部材333のカム部333cが剥離部材350の反対側に配置され筒状部333bが剥離部材350と当接される状態においてのみロック部材336を剥離部材350の上面に当接させることができる。 In the present embodiment, when the distance between the rotation shaft of the lock member 336 and the upper side surface of the release member 350 is closest, that is, the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the opposite side of the release member 350 and the tubular portion 333b. The lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the peeling member 350 only when is in contact with the peeling member 350.

言い換えれば、ロック部材336の本体部336aの長さが、筒状部333bに剥離部材350が当接した状態で剥離部材350の上側側面にL字の鉤部が当接する長さに形成される。 In other words, the length of the main body portion 336a of the lock member 336 is formed so that the L-shaped hook portion abuts on the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 in a state where the peeling member 350 abuts on the tubular portion 333b. ..

そのため、ロック部材336が剥離部材350の上側側面に当接され、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置で固定された状態においては、必ず偏心カム部材333の筒状部333bが剥離部材350の下側の側面に当接される。従って、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置で固定された状態から、首振り操作部材310が上向きに移動する方向に過荷重がかけられた場合に、偏心カム部材333のカム部333cに過荷重がかけられることを防止することができ、偏心カム部材333が破損することを抑制することができる。 Therefore, when the lock member 336 is in contact with the upper side surface of the release member 350 and the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position, the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 is always on the lower side of the release member 350. Is abutted on the side of. Therefore, when an overload is applied in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 moves upward from the state where the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position, the overload is applied to the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333. It is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged, and it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

図18(b)に示すように、ギアダンパ受け部材342のギア部342bと、ギアダンパ受け部材342の背面側に配置されるギアダンパ338とが歯合される。ギアダンパ338は、後述するように、レバー部材340の揺動に対する粘性抵抗を生じる役割と、レバー部材340が後方へ向けて押し込む荷重を受けた場合に、その荷重に抵抗する抵抗力を発生させる役割を合わせ持つ。 As shown in FIG. 18B, the gear portion 342b of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the gear damper 338 arranged on the back surface side of the gear damper receiving member 342 are meshed with each other. As will be described later, the gear damper 338 has a role of generating a viscous resistance against the swing of the lever member 340 and a role of generating a resistance force to resist the load when the lever member 340 receives a load of pushing backward. Have a combination.

ギアダンパ338を配設することにより、例えば、レバー部材340の本体部材341が剥離部材350から引きはがされた状態において、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を高速で操作する場合の抵抗は、大きくすることができ、一方で、レバー部材340がねじりバネSP1の付勢力により起き上がる場合のように速度が小さい場合の抵抗は、小さくすることができる。 By disposing the gear damper 338, for example, when the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the resistance when the player operates the swing operation member 310 at high speed is large. On the other hand, the resistance when the speed is low, such as when the lever member 340 rises due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1, can be reduced.

これにより、揺動速度によらず、遊技者の高速の操作に対応した大きな抵抗を生じる場合に比較して、ねじりバネSP1の付勢力を小さく設定でき、ねじりバネSP1の設計自由度を向上させることができる。 As a result, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be set smaller than in the case where a large resistance corresponding to the player's high-speed operation is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the degree of freedom in designing the torsion spring SP1 is improved. be able to.

図18(c)に示すように、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態において、センサ検出片343bが第2センサ部材325a2の隙間に配置されると共に、位相検出部材334の検出片334cが第3センサ部材325a3の隙間に配置される。即ち、センサ検出片343bが第2センサ部材325a2の隙間に配置されると共に、位相検出部材334の検出片334cが第3センサ部材325a3の隙間に配置される状態においてのみ、ロック部材336を揺動させることで剥離部材350の上側側面にロック部材336を当接させることが可能となる。 As shown in FIG. 18C, in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2, and the detection piece of the phase detection member 334 is arranged. The 334c is arranged in the gap of the third sensor member 325a3. That is, the lock member 336 is swung only when the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 and the detection piece 334c of the phase detection member 334 is arranged in the gap of the third sensor member 325a3. By doing so, the lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper side surface of the peeling member 350.

また、後述するように、剥離部材350が本体部材341から引きはがされる場合には、第2センサ部材325a2の隙間からセンサ検出片343bが移動されることになる。そのため、ロック部材336が図18(a)の状態から揺動していないこと(センサ部材331fで検出)と、第2センサ部材325a2の隙間からセンサ検出片343bが移動されることとを検出することにより、剥離部材350が本体部材341から引きはがされたことを検出することができる。 Further, as will be described later, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2. Therefore, it is detected that the lock member 336 does not swing from the state of FIG. 18A (detected by the sensor member 331f) and that the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2. Thereby, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

図20は、図17(b)のXX−XX線における首振り操作部材310の断面図である。なお、背面側枠部材311の図示が省略される。図20に示すように、裏ボタン部材312dは中間枠部材312の背面側に配設され、コイルスプリングで中間枠部材312から離反する方向へ付勢されるので、押し込み荷重(図20上方へ向けた荷重)がかけられない状態においては検出片312d1が第2センサ部材313dから離間される。一方で、裏ボタン部材312dに押し込み荷重(図20上方へ向けた荷重)が与えられ、検出片312d1が第2センサ部材313dの隙間に挿通されるまで裏ボタン部材312dが移動されることで、裏ボタン部材312dが押し込まれたことを検出することができる。 FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 in line XX-XX of FIG. 17 (b). The illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 20, the back button member 312d is arranged on the back side of the intermediate frame member 312 and is urged by the coil spring in the direction away from the intermediate frame member 312, so that the pushing load (directed upward in FIG. 20). The detection piece 312d1 is separated from the second sensor member 313d in a state where the load is not applied. On the other hand, a pushing load (load directed upward in FIG. 20) is applied to the back button member 312d, and the back button member 312d is moved until the detection piece 312d1 is inserted into the gap of the second sensor member 313d. It can be detected that the back button member 312d has been pushed.

図21(a)及び図21(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における首振り操作部材310及びレバー部材340の部分断面図である。なお、図21(a)では、図18(a)及び図19の状態から振動装置366が動作して上方へ向けて負荷が生じた状態が図示され図21(b)では、図18(a)及び図19の状態からレンズ部材317が押し込み操作された状態が図示される。 21 (a) and 21 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 21 (a) shows a state in which the vibrating device 366 operates from the states of FIGS. 18 (a) and 19 and a load is generated upward, and FIG. 21 (b) shows FIG. 18 (a). ) And the state in which the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 19 is shown.

上述したように、スイッチ部材315は中間枠部材312から引き抜き不能に係止され、スイッチ部材315と中間枠部材312との間に振動部材314が介設され、その振動部材314は振動コイルスプリングCS1により中間枠部材312側(図21(a)下方)へ押し付けられる。 As described above, the switch member 315 is locked from the intermediate frame member 312 so as not to be pulled out, and the vibrating member 314 is interposed between the switch member 315 and the intermediate frame member 312, and the vibrating member 314 is the vibrating coil spring CS1. Is pressed toward the intermediate frame member 312 side (downward in FIG. 21A).

この状態から、振動装置366のボビン部材366aに巻かれる銅線(図示せず)に電流が流され生じる電磁力によって押し付け部材366bが振動部材314に押し付けられると、振動部材314がスイッチ部材315に押し付けられる方向に移動する。これにより、振動部材314に外嵌固定されるレンズ部材317が(図21(a)上方へ)移動する。この状態において、レンズ部材317は段部317aがスイッチ部材315に当接されるので、レンズ部材317を押し込み操作することが困難となる(固くなる、押し込み不能状態)。 From this state, when the pressing member 366b is pressed against the vibrating member 314 by the electromagnetic force generated by the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibrating device 366, the vibrating member 314 is pressed against the switch member 315. Move in the direction of being pressed. As a result, the lens member 317, which is externally fitted and fixed to the vibrating member 314, moves (upward in FIG. 21A). In this state, since the step portion 317a of the lens member 317 is brought into contact with the switch member 315, it becomes difficult to push the lens member 317 (hardened, unable to push).

一方、振動部材314がレンズ部材317から離反されると、遊技者はレンズ部材317を押し込み可能となる(押し込み可能状態)。そのため、遊技者がレンズ部材317を通して入力操作するタイミングを振動部材314の駆動により指定することができる。 On the other hand, when the vibrating member 314 is separated from the lens member 317, the player can push the lens member 317 (pushable state). Therefore, the timing at which the player performs an input operation through the lens member 317 can be specified by driving the vibration member 314.

また、レンズ部材317を押し込み可能な押し込み可能状態と、レンズ部材317が変位不能に固定され押し込み不能である押し込み不能状態とが構成されるので、遊技者の行う操作によってレバー部材340が受ける影響をパチンコ機10(図1参照)側で切替ることができる。 Further, since the lens member 317 is configured to be in a pushable state in which the lens member 317 can be pushed in and a pushable state in which the lens member 317 is immovably fixed and cannot be pushed in, the lever member 340 is affected by the operation performed by the player. It can be switched on the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) side.

例えば、遊技者がレンズ部材317を断続的に繰り返し押し込む(連打する)場合、レンズ部材317が押し込まれた状態から戻る際に、その反作用で、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材333(図18(a)参照)へ近接する方向に首振り操作部材310が負荷を受ける。そのため、偏心カム部材333が破損する恐れがある。 For example, when the player repeatedly pushes (continuously hits) the lens member 317 intermittently, when the lens member 317 returns from the pushed state, the lever member 340 reacts to the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. 18 (a). ), The swing operation member 310 receives a load in a direction approaching). Therefore, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

一方、押し込み不能状態とされる場合、遊技者の押し込み操作に対して首振り操作部材310全体が押し下げられるので、それによりレバー部材340も偏心カム部材333(図18(a)参照)から離反する方向に移動する。従って、遊技者がレンズ部材317を連打しても、首振り操作部材310が上方へ付勢力により戻ることにより偏心カム部材333とレバー部材340とが衝突するという事態を抑制することができる。 On the other hand, when the push-in is not possible, the entire swing operation member 310 is pushed down in response to the push-in operation of the player, so that the lever member 340 also separates from the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 18A). Move in the direction. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the lens member 317, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 collide with each other due to the swinging operation member 310 returning upward due to the urging force.

なお、押し込み不能状態を構成する方法としては、鉤状の爪でレンズ部材317を係止する方法や、直線的な往復運動をするボイスコイルモータなどの振動装置366によりレンズ部材317を終端位置まで張り出させる(一方向に負荷をかけ続ける)方法等が例示される。ボイスコイルモータなどの振動装置366によりレンズ部材317を終端位置まで張り出させる方法によれば、その振動装置366によってレンズ部材317を振動させることと、レンズ部材317を押し込み不能状態とすることとの両方の作用を生じさせることができる。 As a method of configuring the non-pushable state, the lens member 317 is locked with a hook-shaped claw, or the lens member 317 is moved to the terminal position by a vibrating device 366 such as a voice coil motor that reciprocates linearly. An example is a method of projecting (continuing to apply a load in one direction). According to the method of projecting the lens member 317 to the terminal position by a vibrating device 366 such as a voice coil motor, the vibrating device 366 vibrates the lens member 317 and makes the lens member 317 in an inaccessible state. Both effects can occur.

振動装置366のボビン部材366aに巻かれる銅線(図示せず)に流す電流の向きを反転させることで押し付け部材366bの移動方向を反転させることができる。ここで、振動部材314は電磁力の力で引かれるわけでは無いので、移動速度が遅くなる恐れがあるが、本実施形態では、振動コイルスプリングCS1の弾性回復力により振動部材314が押し付け部材366bに追従して、図21(b)下方へ移動する。 By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibrating device 366, the moving direction of the pressing member 366b can be reversed. Here, since the vibrating member 314 is not pulled by the force of electromagnetic force, the moving speed may be slowed down. However, in the present embodiment, the vibrating member 314 is pressed against the pressing member 366b by the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1. 21 (b) moves downward in accordance with.

これにより、押し付け部材366bと振動部材314とを締結固定することなく、レンズ部材317の振動を高速化することができる。 As a result, the vibration of the lens member 317 can be increased in speed without fastening and fixing the pressing member 366b and the vibration member 314.

本実施形態では、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作時に振動コイルスプリングCS1の弾性回復力が抵抗となってかかることを防止することができる。詳述すると、図21(b)に示すように、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作時には、レンズ部材317の背面側に形成される段部317aがスイッチ部材315の腕部315fに当接することでレンズ部材317及び振動部材314がスイッチ部材315と一体で移動する。そのため、振動コイルスプリングCS1の縮み具合が変化しないため、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作時に振動コイルスプリングCS1の弾性回復力が抵抗となってかかることを防止することができる。 In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance during the pushing operation of the lens member 317. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21B, when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the step portion 317a formed on the back surface side of the lens member 317 comes into contact with the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315, so that the lens member The 317 and the vibrating member 314 move integrally with the switch member 315. Therefore, since the degree of contraction of the vibrating coil spring CS1 does not change, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance during the pushing operation of the lens member 317.

なお、レンズ部材317を押し込み操作したあとは、スイッチ部材315の下側側面に当接されるスイッチ受け部材314d(図13参照)が押し込みコイルスプリングCS2の弾性回復力によりスイッチ部材315を押し上げるので、レンズ部材317は押し込み前の位置(図18(a)参照)に復帰する。 After the lens member 317 is pushed in, the switch receiving member 314d (see FIG. 13) that comes into contact with the lower side surface of the switch member 315 pushes up the switch member 315 by the elastic recovery force of the pushing coil spring CS2. The lens member 317 returns to the position before pushing (see FIG. 18A).

即ち、レンズ部材317を押し込み操作する際にレンズ部材317の位置を復帰させる押し込みコイルスプリングCS2と、振動部材314の位置を復帰させる振動コイルスプリングCS1と、を別の部材で構成することができる。 That is, the pushing coil spring CS2 that returns the position of the lens member 317 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, and the vibrating coil spring CS1 that returns the position of the vibrating member 314 can be composed of different members.

本実施形態では、振動コイルスプリングCS1に比較して押し込みコイルスプリングCS2の弾性係数が小さくされるので、振動部材314を復帰させる速度は大きく確保しながら、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作は小さな力で行うことができる。従って、遊技者が受動的に感じる振動の大きさを確保しつつ、レンズ部材317の押し込み操作の容易性を向上させることができる。 In the present embodiment, since the elastic modulus of the pushing coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the vibrating coil spring CS1, the pushing operation of the lens member 317 is performed with a small force while ensuring a high speed for returning the vibrating member 314. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of the pushing operation of the lens member 317 while ensuring the magnitude of the vibration passively felt by the player.

図22(a)及び図22(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図22(a)及び図22(b)では、ロック部材336が固定側に揺動された状態が図示され、図22(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示されると共に図22(b)では、図22(a)の状態から首振り操作部材310が背面側(図22(b)右側)に押し込み操作された状態が図示される。 22 (a) and 22 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 22A and FIG. 22B, the state in which the lock member 336 is swung to the fixed side is illustrated, and in FIG. 22A, the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position. The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 22B, the state in which the swinging operation member 310 is pushed toward the back side (right side in FIG. 22B) from the state shown in FIG. 22A is shown.

首振り操作部材310を支持するレバー部材340は、ねじりバネSP1によって、レバー支持軸331d1を中心に首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる方向(図22(a)時計回り)へ向けて付勢される。そのため、図22(a)の状態から、ロック部材336を解除方向(図22(a)時計回り)に揺動させても、首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に保持することができる。 The lever member 340 that supports the swing operation member 310 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 in the direction of lifting the swing operation member 310 (clockwise in FIG. 22A) about the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, even if the lock member 336 is swung in the release direction (clockwise in FIG. 22A) from the state shown in FIG. 22A, the swing operation member 310 can be held in the upward position.

ねじりバネSP1の付勢力によるレバー部材340の揺動は、案内支持孔331e1,332e1、上カバー322及び偏心カム部材333にレバー部材340が当接することにより停止される。このように、レバー部材340を停止させる際に当接される箇所を複数用意することにより、レバー部材340にかけられる荷重を分散させることができ、レバー部材340が破損することを抑制することができる。以下、各当接箇所について詳述する。 The swing of the lever member 340 due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is stopped when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the guide support holes 331e1, 332e1, the upper cover 322 and the eccentric cam member 333. In this way, by preparing a plurality of points to be contacted when the lever member 340 is stopped, the load applied to the lever member 340 can be dispersed, and damage to the lever member 340 can be suppressed. .. Hereinafter, each contact point will be described in detail.

案内支持孔331e1,332e1には、角度規制棒部材346が挿通されるので、案内支持孔331e1,332e1の端部に角度規制棒部材346が当接することでレバー部材340の揺動を停止させることができる。なお、図10で上述したように、案内支持孔331e1,332e1はレバー部材340を揺動軸方向で挟んで配置されるので、レバー部材340を停止させる際にレバー部材340が長手方向を中心とした旋回方向に傾くことを抑制することができる。 Since the angle regulating rod member 346 is inserted into the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1, the angle regulating rod member 346 comes into contact with the end of the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1 to stop the swing of the lever member 340. Can be done. As described above in FIG. 10, since the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1 are arranged so as to sandwich the lever member 340 in the swing axis direction, the lever member 340 is centered in the longitudinal direction when the lever member 340 is stopped. It is possible to suppress tilting in the turning direction.

上カバー322には、上部カバー部材344の連結部344cが当接可能とされる。連結部344cには、上カバー322と垂直に当接する部分である段部344c1が形成され、連結部344cとレバー部材340との間には空間が形成される(図22(a)参照)。そのため、段部344c1に上カバー322が当接した場合にも、連結部344cが空間に向けて変形可能とされるので、連結部344cと上カバー322との間で生じる衝撃を緩和する事ができる。 The connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the upper cover 322. The connecting portion 344c is formed with a stepped portion 344c1 which is a portion perpendicularly in contact with the upper cover 322, and a space is formed between the connecting portion 344c and the lever member 340 (see FIG. 22A). Therefore, even when the upper cover 322 comes into contact with the step portion 344c1, the connecting portion 344c can be deformed toward the space, so that the impact generated between the connecting portion 344c and the upper cover 322 can be alleviated. it can.

これにより、本体部材341に衝撃が伝達されることを抑制することができるので、本体部材341の構成を簡素化することができ、レバー部材340全体の軽量化を図ることができる。この場合、ねじりバネSP1に必要な弾性係数を抑制することができ、それに伴って偏心カム部材333を駆動させる第1駆動装置335(図10参照)に必要な駆動力を抑制することができる。 As a result, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the impact to the main body member 341, so that the configuration of the main body member 341 can be simplified and the weight of the lever member 340 as a whole can be reduced. In this case, the elastic modulus required for the torsion spring SP1 can be suppressed, and the driving force required for the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 10) for driving the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed accordingly.

また、上部カバー部材344には衝撃を緩和する役割の他に、内側ケース部材330の内側に埃や球(遊技球、遊技媒体)が入り込むことを防止する役割がある。即ち、レバー部材340が揺動しても(図23(b)参照)、上部カバー部材344と上カバー322との間が常に閉鎖された状態とされるので、内側ケース部材330の内側に埃や球(遊技球、遊技媒体)が入り込むことを防止することができる。 In addition to the role of cushioning the impact, the upper cover member 344 also has a role of preventing dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering the inside of the inner case member 330. That is, even if the lever member 340 swings (see FIG. 23B), the space between the upper cover member 344 and the upper cover 322 is always closed, so that dust is inside the inner case member 330. And balls (game balls, game media) can be prevented from entering.

更に、上部カバー部材344は揺動軸方向(図22(a)紙面垂直方向)で内側ケース部材330の切り欠き331c1と当接可能とされる。これにより、上部カバー部材344を用いて本体部材341が揺動軸方向にぐらつくことを抑制することができる。 Further, the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the notch 331c1 of the inner case member 330 in the swing axis direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 22A). As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body member 341 from wobbling in the swing axis direction by using the upper cover member 344.

偏心カム部材333には、レバー部材340の剥離部材350が当接する。偏心カム部材333の筒状部333bを剥離部材350側に向けた状態で偏心カム部材333にレバー部材340を当接させることで、偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止することができる。 The peeling member 350 of the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. By bringing the lever member 340 into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 with the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 facing the peeling member 350 side, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

図22(a)に示すように、操作デバイス300は、振動装置366の振動方向の中心軸を示す直線L1が軸支棒363を通る。そのため、振動装置366の振動の衝撃が軸支棒363へ与えられるが、軸支棒363とモータ固定板362(図12参照)との間には緩衝部材364(図12参照)が配設されるので、緩衝部材364により振動の衝撃を緩和することができる。これにより、レバー部材340へ伝わる振動を抑制することができる。 As shown in FIG. 22A, in the operation device 300, a straight line L1 indicating the central axis of the vibration device 366 in the vibration direction passes through the shaft support rod 363. Therefore, the impact of the vibration of the vibrating device 366 is applied to the shaft support rod 363, and a cushioning member 364 (see FIG. 12) is arranged between the shaft support rod 363 and the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 12). Therefore, the shock of vibration can be alleviated by the cushioning member 364. As a result, the vibration transmitted to the lever member 340 can be suppressed.

直線L1と、レバー部材340の長手方向に沿った直線L2との間の角度が角度θ1とされる。これにより、振動装置366が発生させる振動を、直線L2に沿った方向成分と、直線L2の垂直方向に沿った方向成分とに分解することができ、パチンコ機10に伝達されパチンコ機10を振動させる負荷(直線L2に沿った方向の負荷)を抑制することができる。 The angle between the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340 is defined as the angle θ1. As a result, the vibration generated by the vibrating device 366 can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2, which is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 and vibrates the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to suppress the load to be caused (the load in the direction along the straight line L2).

また、同様に、レンズ部材317の押し込み方向(直線L1と平行)にかけられる力を、直線L2に沿った方向成分と、直線L2の垂直方向に沿った方向成分とに分解することができるので、レンズ部材317を押し込むことで、レバー支持軸331d1に与えられる負荷を抑制することができる。 Similarly, the force applied to the lens member 317 in the pushing direction (parallel to the straight line L1) can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2. By pushing the lens member 317, the load applied to the lever support shaft 331d1 can be suppressed.

振動装置366がレバー支持軸331d1の正面側(図22(a)左側)に配置され、振動装置366が動作する際に生じる反作用が本体部材341の首振り部材支持部341dを下方に押し下げる方向に向けられる。そのため、振動装置366の振動により、本体部材341を偏心カム部材333から離反する方向に揺動させることができる。これにより、振動装置366の振動により偏心カム部材333が負荷を受けることを抑制することができる。 The vibrating device 366 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 22A) of the lever support shaft 331d1, and the reaction generated when the vibrating device 366 operates is in the direction of pushing down the swing member support portion 341d of the main body member 341. Be directed. Therefore, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 can cause the main body member 341 to swing in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333. As a result, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being loaded by the vibration of the vibration device 366.

図22(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材310を押し込み操作する状態において、裏ボタン部材312dが連結部344cに押し当てられる。この場合にレバー部材340側へ向けて生じる負荷の方向F1が、レバー支持軸331d1を中心にレバー部材340の首振り部材支持部341dを押し下げる方向へ向けられる。そのため、首振り操作部材310を押し込み操作することで偏心カム部材333へ向けた負荷が生じることを抑制することができる。 As shown in FIG. 22B, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c in a state where the swinging operation member 310 is pushed in. In this case, the direction F1 of the load generated toward the lever member 340 is directed in the direction of pushing down the swing member support portion 341d of the lever member 340 with the lever support shaft 331d1 as the center. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of a load on the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the swing operation member 310.

首振り操作部材310を押し込み操作した状態では、直線L1と直線L2とが、角度θ2をなす。この角度θ2は、角度θ1よりも大きいので、振動装置366の振動の直線L2に沿った方向成分を図22(a)の状態に比較して小さくすることができる。そのため、首振り操作部材310を押し込み操作することにより、パチンコ機10に伝達させる振動を抑制することができる。 In the state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed in, the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 form an angle θ2. Since this angle θ2 is larger than the angle θ1, the directional component along the straight line L2 of the vibration of the vibrating device 366 can be made smaller than the state shown in FIG. 22 (a). Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed by pushing the swinging operation member 310.

また、直線L2の垂直方向に沿った方向成分を大きくすることができる。そのため、振動の反作用を利用してレバー部材340を図22(b)反時計回りに揺動させ易くすることができ、首振り操作部材310を押し込み操作している遊技者が感じる振動のモードを直線L1に沿った直線方向の振動と、首振り操作部材310が軸支棒363を軸に回転する振動との複数種類の振動を現出させることができる。 Further, the directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily swing the lever member 340 counterclockwise in FIG. 22 (b) by utilizing the reaction of the vibration, and the mode of vibration felt by the player who pushes the swing operation member 310 is set. It is possible to generate a plurality of types of vibrations, that is, vibration in the linear direction along the straight line L1 and vibration in which the swing operation member 310 rotates around the shaft support rod 363.

図23(a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図であり、図23(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIc−XVIIIc線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図23では、剥離部材350がロック部材336に揺動を規制された状態で本体部材341が剥離部材350から引きはがされ、首振り操作部材310が押し下げられた状態が図示されると共に首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。 23 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 23 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). It is a figure. In FIG. 23, a state in which the main body member 341 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and the swing operation member 310 is pushed down while the peeling member 350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 is shown. The cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

図22に示す状態において、レンズ部材317を押し込む方向に所定量以上の荷重(磁力による吸着力以上の荷重)がかけられたり、首振り操作部材310を押し下げる方向に所定量以上の荷重(磁力による吸着力以上の荷重)がかけられたりすることで、本体部材341が磁石部材354から引きはがされ、図23に示す状態に首振り操作部材310が移動する。これにより、ロック部材336と剥離部材350との間で大きな荷重がかかり、ロック部材336や剥離部材350が破損することを抑制することができる。 In the state shown in FIG. 22, a predetermined amount or more of a load (a load greater than the attractive force due to the magnetic force) is applied in the direction of pushing the lens member 317, or a predetermined amount or more of the load (due to the magnetic force) is applied in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310. The main body member 341 is peeled off from the magnet member 354 by applying a load (load equal to or greater than the attractive force), and the swing operation member 310 moves to the state shown in FIG. As a result, a large load is applied between the lock member 336 and the release member 350, and it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 and the release member 350 from being damaged.

なお、首振り操作部材310を押し下げた場合にレバー部材340が移動する方向の反対側に偏心カム部材333が配設され、首振り操作部材310をいくら押し下げても、偏心カム部材333側には荷重が伝達されないので、偏心カム部材333の耐久性を向上させることができる。 The eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the opposite side in the direction in which the lever member 340 moves when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, and no matter how much the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, the eccentric cam member 333 is on the side. Since the load is not transmitted, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

図23(b)に示すように、センサ検出片343bが第2センサ部材325a2の隙間から移動することで、本体部材341から剥離部材350が引きはがされたことを検出することができる。 As shown in FIG. 23B, when the sensor detection piece 343b moves from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

この場合、磁石部材354と本体部材341との間に生じていた磁力による吸着力が突然無くなり、首振り操作部材310が勢いよく下方へ移動する。そのため、レバー部材340が揺動しすぎてしまい、案内支持孔331e1,332e1に負担が生じる恐れがある。一方、本実施形態では、首振り操作部材310が押し下げられた際に、首振り操作部材310の背面側枠部材311と前カバー321とが対向配置され面当たりされることで、レバー部材340が回りすぎる場合にも、その負荷を背面側枠部材311又は前カバーが変形することで緩和することができる。これにより、レバー部材340が破損することを抑制することができる。 In this case, the attractive force due to the magnetic force generated between the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341 suddenly disappears, and the swing operation member 310 vigorously moves downward. Therefore, the lever member 340 swings too much, which may cause a load on the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, the back side frame member 311 and the front cover 321 of the swing operation member 310 are arranged to face each other and come into contact with each other, so that the lever member 340 is pressed. Even if it turns too much, the load can be alleviated by deforming the back side frame member 311 or the front cover. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from being damaged.

なお、図23(a)に示す状態から、遊技者が下方にかけていた荷重を解くことで、本体部材341がねじりバネSP1の付勢力により図23(a)時計回りに揺動され、本体部材341が剥離部材350に再度吸着される。これにより、レバー部材340(及び本体部材341)の姿勢(配置)を安定化することができ、遊技者が次の操作を行いやすくすることができる。 By releasing the load applied downward by the player from the state shown in FIG. 23 (a), the main body member 341 is swung clockwise by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 to cause the main body member 341. Is again attracted to the peeling member 350. As a result, the posture (arrangement) of the lever member 340 (and the main body member 341) can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

剥離部材350は本体部材341の揺動軸であるレバー支持軸331d1に軸支されるので、剥離部材350が本体部材341から剥離された状態においては、剥離部材350の重量が本体部材341の揺動方向にかからない。 Since the peeling member 350 is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331d1, which is the swinging shaft of the main body member 341, the weight of the peeling member 350 is the shaking of the main body member 341 when the peeling member 350 is peeled from the main body member 341. It does not take the direction of movement.

即ち、本体部材341に剥離部材350が吸着される状態と、本体部材341から剥離部材350が剥離される状態とでレバー支持軸331d1の前後の本体部材341の重量バランスが変化する。即ち、剥離部材350が引きはがされた状態の方が、本体部材341にかけられる首振り操作部材310を押し下げる方向のモーメントが大きくなる。これにより、剥離部材350が剥離した後では、本体部材341が起き上がる速度を小さくすることができるので、剥離部材350に本体部材341が吸着する際に偏心カム部材333に与えられる負荷を抑制することができる。 That is, the weight balance of the main body member 341 before and after the lever support shaft 331d1 changes depending on the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. That is, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the moment in the direction of pushing down the swinging operation member 310 applied to the main body member 341 becomes larger. As a result, after the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the speed at which the main body member 341 rises can be reduced, so that the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 when the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be suppressed. Can be done.

また、本体部材341が断面コ字状に形成され、本体部材341のコ字状の開放側からコ字状の閉鎖側へ入り込む態様で剥離部材350が移動するので、本体部材341と剥離部材350との間で摩擦抵抗が生じる場合には、本体部材341が剥離部材350に吸着する速度を小さくすることができる。 Further, since the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section and the peeling member 350 moves in a manner of entering from the U-shaped open side of the main body member 341 to the U-shaped closing side, the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 When frictional resistance occurs between the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350, the speed at which the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be reduced.

なお、ねじりバネSP1の付勢力は本体部材341に伝達され、剥離部材350には被伝達とされるため、剥離部材350と本体部材341とが引きはがされた状態でロック部材336または偏心カム部材333にねじりバネSP1の付勢力が働くことを防止できる。そのため、剥離部材350と本体部材341とが引きはがされた状態でロック部材336または偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止できる。 Since the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is transmitted to the main body member 341 and transmitted to the peeling member 350, the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam is in a state where the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are peeled off. It is possible to prevent the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 from acting on the member 333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged when the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are peeled off.

なお、図23(a)の状態で、剥離部材350は偏心カム部材333とロック部材336とに固定されるので、再度、センサ検出片343bが第2センサ部材325a2の隙間に入ることで、本体部材341と剥離部材350とが吸着したことを検出することができる。 In the state of FIG. 23A, the peeling member 350 is fixed to the eccentric cam member 333 and the lock member 336. Therefore, the sensor detection piece 343b enters the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 again to form the main body. It can be detected that the member 341 and the peeling member 350 are adsorbed.

図24(a)及び図24(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図24(a)では、図22(a)の状態からロック部材336が解除側(図24(a)時計回り)に揺動された状態が図示され、図24(b)では、図24(a)の状態から偏心カム部材333が約180度回転されレバー部材340が揺動された状態が図示される。また、首振り操作部材310が押し下げられた状態におけるレバー部材340及び首振り操作部材310の外形が想像線で図示される。 24 (a) and 24 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 24 (a) shows a state in which the lock member 336 is swung from the state of FIG. 22 (a) to the release side (clockwise in FIG. 24 (a)), and FIG. 24 (b) shows a state in which the lock member 336 is swung toward the release side (clockwise in FIG. 24 (a)). The state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated by about 180 degrees from the state of 24 (a) and the lever member 340 is swung is shown. Further, the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

ロック部材336の検出片336eがセンサ部材331fの隙間に入ることでロック部材336が解除側に揺動したことを検出することができる。ロック部材336が解除側に揺動したことを検出した後で、第1駆動装置335の駆動ギア335b(図10参照)を回転させることで偏心カム部材333を回転させ、レバー部材340を揺動させることができる。なお、偏心カム部材333を1方向に連続して回転させても良いし、回転方向を途中で切り替えても良い。 When the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 enters the gap of the sensor member 331f, it can be detected that the lock member 336 swings to the release side. After detecting that the lock member 336 swings to the release side, the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) of the first drive device 335 is rotated to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 and swing the lever member 340. Can be made to. The eccentric cam member 333 may be continuously rotated in one direction, or the rotation direction may be switched in the middle.

偏心カム部材333が回転している間、レバー部材340は、ねじりバネSP1により偏心カム部材333に押し付けられる方向(図24(a)時計回り方向)に付勢される。そのため、偏心カム部材333の回転と連動して、レバー部材340は揺動する。これにより、遊技者の注目を首振り操作部材310に集めやすくできる。 While the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction of being pressed against the eccentric cam member 333 by the torsion spring SP1 (clockwise in FIG. 24A). Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in conjunction with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. As a result, the player's attention can be easily attracted to the swing operation member 310.

図24(a)又は図24(b)に示す状態で振動装置366が作動すると、その振動の反作用が直線L1に沿って本体部材341を押し下げる方向に働く。そのため、振動の反作用によって、偏心カム部材333から離反する方向にレバー部材340が揺動するので、振動装置366が動作することで偏心カム部材333に負荷がかけられることを抑制することができる。 When the vibration device 366 operates in the state shown in FIG. 24A or FIG. 24B, the reaction of the vibration acts in the direction of pushing down the main body member 341 along the straight line L1. Therefore, since the lever member 340 swings in the direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 due to the reaction of the vibration, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by the operation of the vibration device 366.

レンズ部材317を押し込み操作する場合を考える。レンズ部材317を押し込み操作する際に、レンズ部材317に与えられる荷重の方向が直線L1に沿うと仮定すると、レンズ部材317を押し込み操作することに伴って、レバー部材340が下方へ(図24(a)反時計回りに)揺動したり、首振り操作部材310が(図24(a)時計回りに)押し込み操作されたりする可能性がある。 Consider the case where the lens member 317 is pushed in and operated. Assuming that the direction of the load applied to the lens member 317 is along the straight line L1 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the lever member 340 moves downward as the lens member 317 is pushed in (FIG. 24 (FIG. 24). a) There is a possibility that the swing operation member 310 may swing (counterclockwise) or the swing operation member 310 may be pushed in (clockwise in FIG. 24 (a)).

本実施形態では、いずれの場合でも、レバー部材340を偏心カム部材333から離反する方向に揺動させる荷重が働くので、レンズ部材317を押し込み操作することで偏心カム部材333に荷重が与えられることを抑制することができる。これにより、偏心カム部材333の耐久性を向上させることができる。 In the present embodiment, in any case, a load that swings the lever member 340 in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 acts, so that a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the lens member 317. Can be suppressed. As a result, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

図25(a)及び図25(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図25(a)では、図24(b)の状態から偏心カム部材333が反時計回りに所定角度θ3だけ回転された状態が図示され、図25(b)では、図24(b)の状態から偏心カム部材333が時計回りに所定角度θ3だけ回転された状態が図示されると共に首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。また、図25(a)及び図25(b)では、首振り操作部材310が押し下げられた状態におけるレバー部材340及び首振り操作部材310の外形が想像線で図示される。 25 (a) and 25 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 25 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 from the state of FIG. 24 (b), and FIG. 25 (b) shows FIG. 24 (b). The state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

本実施形態では、首振り部材360が前側(図25反時計回り方向)に付勢されるので、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持して押し下げ動作することを容易とすることができる。即ち、首振り操作部材310を押し下げるために図24(b)の状態から方向M1(図25(a)参照)に力を加えた場合に、首振り操作部材310を首振り操作(軸支棒363を中心に揺動させる操作)させることなく、即座に首振り操作部材310を押し下げ操作することができる。 In the present embodiment, since the swing member 360 is urged to the front side (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 25), it is possible to facilitate the player to grasp the swing operation member 310 and push it down. That is, when a force is applied to the direction M1 (see FIG. 25 (a)) from the state of FIG. 24 (b) in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the swing operation member 310 is swung (shaft support rod). The swing operation member 310 can be immediately pushed down without swinging around the 363).

ここで、レバー部材340を偏心カム部材333から離すことを可能とすると、レバー部材340を偏心カム部材333から離間した位置から勢い付けて偏心カム部材333に衝突させることが可能となるので(図25(a)及び図25(b)において、首振り操作部材310を想像線の位置から実線の位置まで押し上げることが可能となるので)、偏心カム部材333が破損する恐れがある。 Here, if the lever member 340 can be separated from the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 can be forced to collide with the eccentric cam member 333 from a position separated from the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. FIG. In 25 (a) and 25 (b), the swing operation member 310 can be pushed up from the position of the imaginary line to the position of the solid line), so that the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

これに対し、本実施形態では、偏心カム部材333を中空とすることで、偏心カム部材333の破損を防止することができる。即ち、偏心カム部材333の弾性変形によりレバー部材340からの荷重をうけとめ、偏心カム部材333が破損することを抑制できる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by making the eccentric cam member 333 hollow, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. That is, it is possible to receive the load from the lever member 340 due to the elastic deformation of the eccentric cam member 333 and prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

上述したように、偏心カム部材333は、回転方向によらず、連続して回転し続けることで、レバー部材340を揺動動作させることができる。ここで、回転方向の特徴について説明する。 As described above, the eccentric cam member 333 can swing the lever member 340 by continuously rotating regardless of the rotation direction. Here, the features in the rotation direction will be described.

図25(a)に、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態(図24(a)の状態)における偏心カム部材333の位相(以下、この位相を「退避位相」と称す)からの回転角度を示す。即ち、退避位相から図25(a)の偏心カム部材333の位相まで回転するには、時計回りの回転で角度φ1だけ偏心カム部材333を回す必要がある。 FIG. 25A shows the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (hereinafter, this phase is referred to as “retracted phase”) in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (the state of FIG. 24A). Indicates the rotation angle of. That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 of FIG. 25 (a), it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ1 by rotating clockwise.

図25(b)に、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態(図24(a)の状態)における偏心カム部材333の位相(退避位相)からの回転角度を示す。即ち、退避位相から図25(b)の偏心カム部材333の位相まで回転するには、反時計回りの回転で角度φ2だけ偏心カム部材333を回す必要がある。ここで、角度φ1は角度φ2に比較して小さい(φ1<φ2)。 FIG. 25B shows the rotation angle of the eccentric cam member 333 from the phase (evacuation phase) in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (the state of FIG. 24A). That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 shown in FIG. 25 (b), it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ2 by rotating counterclockwise. Here, the angle φ1 is smaller than the angle φ2 (φ1 <φ2).

偏心カム部材333が等速回転すると仮定すると、退避位相から偏心カム部材333を時計回りに回転させた方が、レバー部材340がねじりバネSP1で付勢される方向と偏心カム部材333の回転方向とが対向する期間(角度にして角度φ1の期間)を偏心カム部材333を反時計回りに回転させる場合(角度にして角度φ2の期間)に比較して短くすることができる。 Assuming that the eccentric cam member 333 rotates at a constant velocity, the direction in which the lever member 340 is urged by the torsional spring SP1 and the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333 are obtained by rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise from the retracting phase. The period in which the eccentric cam member 333 opposes (the period in which the angle is φ1) can be shortened as compared with the case where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise (the period in which the angle is φ2).

また、退避位置から偏心カム部材333を時計回りに回転させた方が、偏心カム部材333の回転方向とレバー部材340がねじりバネSP1で付勢される方向とが対向する状態において、レバー部材340と偏心カム部材333とが当接する位置をレバー支持軸331d1に近づけることができる(図25(a)において偏心カム部材333とレバー部材340とが当接する位置を、図25(b)において偏心カム部材333とレバー部材340とが当接する位置よりもレバー支持軸331d1に近づけることができる)。この場合、レバー部材340に同一トルクがかけられていれば、レバー部材340と偏心カム部材333とが当接する位置で生じる荷重が、小さくなる。そのため偏心カム部材333にかけられる負荷を小さくすることができるので、偏心カム部材333の耐久性を向上させることができる。 Further, when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise from the retracted position, the lever member 340 is in a state where the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333 and the direction in which the lever member 340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 are opposed to each other. The position where the eccentric cam member 333 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 can be brought closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 (the position where the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 come into contact with each other in FIG. 25 (a) is shown in FIG. 25 (b). The lever support shaft 331d1 can be closer than the position where the member 333 and the lever member 340 come into contact with each other). In this case, if the same torque is applied to the lever member 340, the load generated at the position where the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other becomes smaller. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 can be reduced, so that the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

加えて、本実施形態では、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を持ち上げ操作することで、偏心カム部材333に大きな荷重がかけられる恐れがあるので、偏心カム部材333を同一方向に連続で回転させる場合には、偏心カム部材333を図25(b)反時計回りに回転させることが好ましい。この場合、偏心カム部材333のリブ部333eが図25(b)の角度φ2の角度範囲を回転する場合には、レバー部材340から偏心カム部材333に与えられる荷重が抑制される(レバー支持軸331d1からレバー部材340と偏心カム部材との当接位置までの距離が長くなる)ので、偏心カム部材333がレバー部材340に近接する方向に移動するとしても偏心カム部材333が破損する可能性を低くすることができる。 In addition, in the present embodiment, when the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310, a large load may be applied to the eccentric cam member 333, so that the eccentric cam member 333 is continuously rotated in the same direction. In this case, it is preferable to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 counterclockwise in FIG. 25 (b). In this case, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates in the angle range of the angle φ2 in FIG. 25 (b), the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 is suppressed (lever support shaft). Since the distance from 331d1 to the contact position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member becomes longer), even if the eccentric cam member 333 moves in a direction close to the lever member 340, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged. Can be lowered.

一方、偏心カム部材333のリブ部333eが図25(a)の角度φ1の角度範囲を回転する場合には、レバー部材340から偏心カム部材333に与えられる負荷は大きくなる(レバー支持軸331d1からレバー部材340と偏心カム部材333との当接位置までの距離が短くなる)が、偏心カム部材333がレバー部材340から離反する方向に回転しているため、レバー部材340と偏心カム部材333との当接位置において偏心カム部材333に生じる負荷を抑制することができ、偏心カム部材333の耐久性を向上させることができる。なお、偏心カム部材333は同一方向に回転させる必要はなく、角度φ1側、もしくは角度φ2側を往復回転動作(反転動作)するようにしても良い。 On the other hand, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates in the angle range of the angle φ1 in FIG. 25 (a), the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 becomes large (from the lever support shaft 331d1). The distance between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 is shortened), but since the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating in the direction away from the lever member 340, the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 The load generated on the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed at the contact position of the eccentric cam member 333, and the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved. The eccentric cam member 333 does not need to be rotated in the same direction, and may be reciprocally rotated (reversed) on the angle φ1 side or the angle φ2 side.

図26(a)及び図26(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図26(a)では、図24(b)の状態から首振り操作部材310が後転方向(図26(a)時計回り)に揺動された状態が図示され、図26(b)では、図26(a)の状態から偏心カム部材333が退避位相まで回転され、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材333に当接するまで揺動された状態が図示されると共に首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。 26 (a) and 26 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 26 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 26 (a)) from the state shown in FIG. 24 (b). In FIG. 26A, a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated to the retracted phase and the lever member 340 is swung until it comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 is shown, and a cross section of the swing operation member 310 is shown. The sight is omitted.

ここで、偏心カム部材333を回転させることでレバー部材340を揺動させる間に、専らレバー部材340を押し下げる操作を求める場合、図26(a)に示すように、レバー部材340の姿勢が変化せずに首振り操作部材310が後転方向(図26(a)時計回り)に揺動することは通常生じない。そのため、裏ボタン部材312dが押し込まれたことを検出することで、遊技者が誤操作(首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる操作)を行っていることを検出することができる。 Here, when the operation of pushing down the lever member 340 is desired while the lever member 340 is swung by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the posture of the lever member 340 changes as shown in FIG. 26A. It usually does not occur that the swing operation member 310 swings in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 26A) without swinging. Therefore, by detecting that the back button member 312d is pushed in, it is possible to detect that the player is performing an erroneous operation (an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310).

この場合、偏心カム部材333にレバー部材340を通して荷重がかかり。偏心カム部材333が破損する恐れがあるので、図26(b)に示すように偏心カム部材333を退避位相まで駆動ギア335bの駆動力で駆動させることで、偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止することができる。 In this case, a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 through the lever member 340. Since the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged by driving the eccentric cam member 333 to the retracted phase with the driving force of the drive gear 335b as shown in FIG. 26 (b). Can be prevented.

このとき、偏心カム部材333を図26(b)時計回りに回転させることで、より安全に偏心カム部材333を回転させることができる。即ち、偏心カム部材333とレバー部材340との当接位置をレバー支持軸331d1から離反させながら偏心カム部材333を回転させることができ、偏心カム部材333を反時計回りに回転させる場合に比較して、レバー部材340から偏心カム部材333に与えられる荷重を抑制することができる。 At this time, by rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise in FIG. 26B, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated more safely. That is, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated while the contact position between the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 is separated from the lever support shaft 331d1, and the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated counterclockwise. Therefore, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

図27(a)及び図27(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス300の断面図である。なお、図27(a)では、図24(a)の状態から首振り操作部材310が押し下げ操作された状態が図示され、図27(b)では、図27(a)の状態から首振り操作部材310が軸支棒363を軸に図27(a)時計回りに揺動された状態が図示されると共に首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。 27 (a) and 27 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 27 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state of FIG. 24 (a), and FIG. 27 (b) shows a swing operation from the state of FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 27A shows a state in which the member 310 is swung clockwise around the shaft support rod 363, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

図24(a)の状態から、図27(a)に示す方向D1に沿って力を加えると首振り操作部材310をレバー部材340ごと押し下げることができる。次いで、図27(a)の状態から、方向D1の反対方向である方向D2に沿って力を加えると、レバー部材340の姿勢はそのままで、首振り操作部材310を軸支棒363を軸に揺動させることができる。このように、2種類の動作(押し込みと回転など異なった態様の動作)を必要とせず、力の方向を反対にすることにより、一連の操作を行うことができるので、操作デバイス300の操作を容易とすることができる。 When a force is applied along the direction D1 shown in FIG. 27A from the state of FIG. 24A, the swing operation member 310 can be pushed down together with the lever member 340. Next, when a force is applied along the direction D2 opposite to the direction D1 from the state of FIG. 27A, the posture of the lever member 340 remains the same, and the swing operation member 310 is centered on the shaft support rod 363. It can be rocked. In this way, a series of operations can be performed by reversing the directions of the forces without requiring two types of operations (operations in different modes such as pushing and rotating), so that the operation device 300 can be operated. It can be easy.

この操作中において、レバー部材340及び剥離部材350は剛体として機能する(磁石部材354の吸着力により固定された状態が維持される)ので、遊技者が感じる操作感が変化することを抑制でき、首振り操作部材310の操作性を向上させることができる。 During this operation, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 function as rigid bodies (the state of being fixed by the attractive force of the magnet member 354 is maintained), so that it is possible to suppress a change in the operation feeling felt by the player. The operability of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

図27(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材310を首振り操作すると、裏ボタン部材312dが上部カバー部材344の連結部344cに押し付けられることで、レバー部材340を図27(b)反時計回りに回転させる方向に負荷がかけられる。これにより、首振り操作部材310を首振り操作する際にレバー部材340を図27(a)の位置に容易に固定する事ができ、図27(b)の状態で首振り操作部材310を保持することを容易にすることができる。 As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the swing operation member 310 is swung, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344, whereby the lever member 340 is counterclockwise to FIG. 27 (b). The load is applied in the direction of rotating clockwise. As a result, the lever member 340 can be easily fixed to the position shown in FIG. 27 (a) when the swing operating member 310 is swung, and the swing operating member 310 is held in the state shown in FIG. 27 (b). Can be facilitated.

次いで、図28から図38を参照して、第2実施形態における操作デバイス2300について説明する。第1実施形態では、偏心カム部材333の本体部333aとカム部333cとが一体で形成される場合を説明したが、第2実施形態における操作デバイス2300は、偏心カム部材2333が、中心部が軸支される本体部材2333aと偏心して軸支されるカム部材2333bとの別部材で形成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 38. In the first embodiment, the case where the main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 are integrally formed has been described, but in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 has a central portion. It is formed of a separate member from the main body member 2333a that is pivotally supported and the cam member 2333b that is eccentrically supported. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

なお、第2実施形態では、ねじりバネSP21からレバー部材2340を起き上げる方向に付勢力が働くとともに、ねじりバネSP22から首振り操作部材310を後転させる方向(図28(a)時計回り)に付勢力が働く。 In the second embodiment, an urging force acts in the direction of raising the lever member 2340 from the torsion spring SP21, and the swinging operation member 310 is rotated backward from the torsion spring SP22 (clockwise in FIG. 28A). The urging force works.

ねじりバネSP21は、軸支部331g,332g(図10参照)に巻き付けられ、一端がねじりバネ係止部331h,332h(図9参照)に上側から当接され、他端が角度規制棒部材346に下側から当接される。これにより、レバー部材2340は首振り操作部材310を起き上げる方向に付勢される。 The torsion spring SP21 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end of the torsion spring SP21 is brought into contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 9) from above, and the other end is attached to the angle regulating rod member 346. It is abutted from below. As a result, the lever member 2340 is urged in the direction of raising the swing operation member 310.

ねじりバネSP22は、緩衝部材364(図12参照)に巻き付け支持され、一方の端部が正面曲面部345cに係止され、他方の端部がモータ固定板2362に係止される。本実施形態では、ねじりバネSP22により、首振り部材2360が、本体部材341に対して後転する方向(図28(a)時計回り)に付勢される。 The torsion spring SP22 is wound and supported by a cushioning member 364 (see FIG. 12), one end thereof is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 2362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP22 urges the swing member 2360 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 28A) with respect to the main body member 341.

図28(a)及び図28(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第2実施形態における操作デバイス2300の断面図である。なお、図28(a)及び図28(b)では、レバー部材2340がロック部材2336に揺動を規制された状態が図示され、図28(b)では図28(a)に示す状態から首振り操作部材310が軸支棒363を軸に後方に首振り操作された状態が図示される。本実施形態では、図28(a)の状態が初期位置とされ、図28(a)では、首振り操作部材310が振動装置2366の振動の反動により揺動され至る姿勢P21が想像線で図示される。また、図17(a)では第1実施形態における操作デバイス300が図示されるが、外観は操作デバイス2300と同じなので、操作デバイス2300とみなして説明する。以下、本実施形態において同様である。 28 (a) and 28 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 according to the second embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B, the state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is shown, and in FIG. 28B, the neck is changed from the state shown in FIG. 28A. The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung backward about the shaft support rod 363 is shown. In the present embodiment, the state of FIG. 28 (a) is set as the initial position, and in FIG. 28 (a), the posture P21 at which the swing operation member 310 is swung by the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Will be done. Further, although the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same as that of the operation device 2300, it will be described as the operation device 2300. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

図28(a)に示すように、振動装置2366は、電磁力により一対の部材を直線方向に近接離反させる態様で互いに動作させる装置であって、モータ固定板2362に締結固定されると共に周囲に銅線が巻き付けられた筒状部材であるボビン部材2366aと、そのボビン部材2366aの内周面よりも外径が小径とされる円筒およびボビン部材2366aの外周面よりも内径が大径とされる円筒が同軸で配置され円板形状の板で連結される押し付け部材2366bと、を主に備える。なお、押し付け部材2366bは、内側の円筒が磁性体で形成される。 As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the vibrating device 2366 is a device that operates a pair of members in a manner in which a pair of members are brought close to each other in a linear direction by an electromagnetic force, and is fastened and fixed to a motor fixing plate 2362 and around the circumference. The bobbin member 2366a, which is a tubular member around which a copper wire is wound, has a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a, and the inner diameter is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a. It mainly includes a pressing member 2366b in which cylinders are arranged coaxially and connected by a disk-shaped plate. The inner cylinder of the pressing member 2366b is made of a magnetic material.

ボビン部材2366a及び押し付け部材2366bは、第1実施形態におけるボビン部材366a及び押し付け部材366bよりも径方向の長さが小さくされ、振動装置2366の中心軸C21は、軸支棒363から前側(図28(a)左側)に離間して配置される。 The bobbin member 2366a and the pressing member 2366b are shorter in radial length than the bobbin member 366a and the pressing member 366b in the first embodiment, and the central axis C21 of the vibrating device 2366 is on the front side from the shaft support rod 363 (FIG. 28). (A) Arranged apart from the left side).

ここで、本実施形態のようにレバー部材2340の先端に操作部として首振り操作部材310が配設される場合に、演出上遊技者に把持することを要求することがある。しかし、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持したかどうかを検出することは困難であった。例えば、押し込みボタンを長押しすることを要求することもできるが、押し込みボタンの操作を要求することを多用すると、押し込みボタンの反力以上の力で毎回押し込みボタンを押し込む必要があるので、遊技者のストレスとなる恐れがある。 Here, when the swing operation member 310 is arranged as an operation portion at the tip of the lever member 2340 as in the present embodiment, the player may be required to hold the lever member 2340 for the purpose of production. However, it was difficult to detect whether or not the player gripped the swing operation member 310. For example, it is possible to request that the push button be pressed and held, but if the push button operation is frequently requested, the push button must be pushed with a force greater than the reaction force of the push button, so that the player must push the push button. May be stressful.

これに対し、本実施形態では、振動装置2366の中心軸が軸支棒363の前側に離間して配置されるので、振動装置2366の振動の反作用により首振り部材2360が往復揺動し、首振り操作部材310の姿勢が図28(a)に示す姿勢と、姿勢P21との間を往復揺動する態様で変化する。これに伴い、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持する前は、裏ボタン部材312dが押し込み方向(中心軸C21に平行な方向)に往復動作するので、それを第2センサ部材313d(図20参照)で検出することで、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持する前であることを検出することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the central axis of the vibrating device 2366 is arranged apart from the front side of the shaft support rod 363, the swinging member 2360 swings back and forth due to the reaction of the vibration of the vibrating device 2366, and the neck swings. The posture of the swing operation member 310 changes in a mode of reciprocating and swinging between the posture shown in FIG. 28A and the posture P21. Along with this, before the player grips the swing operation member 310, the back button member 312d reciprocates in the pushing direction (direction parallel to the central axis C21), so that the second sensor member 313d (FIG. 20) By detecting with (see), it is possible to detect that the player has not yet grasped the swing operation member 310.

一方、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持すると、その把持の力により中間枠部材312の姿勢が固定され、裏ボタン部材312dが往復動作しなくなるので、第2センサ部材313dに検出される信号のパターンが変化する。この変化を検出することで、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持した後であることを検出することができる。 On the other hand, when the player grips the swing operation member 310, the posture of the intermediate frame member 312 is fixed by the gripping force, and the back button member 312d does not reciprocate, so that the signal detected by the second sensor member 313d Pattern changes. By detecting this change, it is possible to detect that the player has gripped the swing operation member 310.

首振り操作部材310の把持する際には、発生する反力は存在しないので、遊技者に必要な力は小さい。また、首振り操作部材310に遊技者の手が被さってさえいれば良く(遊技者は即座に首振り操作部材310を操作できる)、例えば、遊技者は手の自重を中間枠部材312にかけておくだけで良いので、遊技者のストレスを低減することができる。 Since there is no reaction force generated when the swing operation member 310 is gripped, the force required for the player is small. Further, it is sufficient that the swinging operation member 310 is covered with the player's hand (the player can immediately operate the swinging operation member 310). For example, the player puts his / her hand weight on the intermediate frame member 312. It is possible to reduce the stress of the player because it is sufficient.

これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持しているかどうか(操作の準備段階にあるかどうか)を、遊技者に押し込みボタンの操作を要求することなく行うことができるので、演出を進めるタイミングを遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持したタイミングに設定することができると共に、押し込みボタンの操作を要求することによる遊技者のストレスを解消することができる。 As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the player is holding the swing operation member 310 (whether or not it is in the preparatory stage for operation) without requesting the player to operate the push button. The timing can be set to the timing at which the player grips the swing operation member 310, and the stress of the player due to requesting the operation of the push button can be eliminated.

レバー部材2340と首振り部材2360との連結を軸支としたときに、振動装置2366の振動の中心軸と首振り部材2360の回転軸とを一致させることで遊技者側に伝える振動を大きくすることができる。一方で、この場合、パチンコ機10(図1参照)にも大きな振動が伝わってしまう。そのため、締結ネジの緩みや部材の劣化が早い段階で生じて、メンテナンス周期が早まるという問題点があった。 When the connection between the lever member 2340 and the swing member 2360 is used as an axis support, the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device 2366 and the rotation axis of the swing member 2360 are aligned to increase the vibration transmitted to the player side. be able to. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, there is a problem that loosening of the fastening screw and deterioration of the member occur at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

これに対し、本実施形態では、首振り部材2360の回転軸と、振動装置2366の振動の中心軸とをずらすことで、首振り操作部材310を回転させることに振動装置2366の振動を利用することができ、パチンコ機10(図1参照)に伝わる振動を少なくすることができる(振動のエネルギーが首振り操作部材310の回転に使用される)。加えて、振動装置2366の振動により、首振り操作部材310を回転させつつレンズ部材317を振動させることができるので、演出効果を向上させることができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is used to rotate the swing operation member 310 by shifting the rotation axis of the swing member 2360 and the central axis of vibration of the vibration device 2366. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) (the energy of the vibration is used for the rotation of the swing operation member 310). In addition, the vibration of the vibrating device 2366 can vibrate the lens member 317 while rotating the swing operation member 310, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

棒状部材2331dは、偏心カム軸331d2と平行に延設されるロック解除軸2331d5(図28(a)参照)を備える。 The rod-shaped member 2331d includes an unlocking shaft 2331d5 (see FIG. 28 (a)) extending in parallel with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2.

図29(a)及び図29(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス2300の断面図である。なお、図29(a)では、ロック部材2336が解除側に配置された状態で首振り操作部材310が押し下げられ下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。また、図29(b)では、図29(a)に示す状態から首振り操作部材310が前転方向(図29(a)反時計回り方向)の回転終端まで回転した状態が図示される。 29 (a) and 29 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 29A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down and placed in a downward position while the lock member 2336 is placed on the release side. Further, FIG. 29 (b) shows a state in which the swing operating member 310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 29 (a) to the end of rotation in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29 (a)).

首振り操作部材310はねじりバネSP22により後転方向(図29(a)時計回り方向)に付勢されるので、レバー部材2340が揺動範囲の下端に配置されるまでは首振り操作部材310が上部カバー部材344に押し当てられた状態が維持される。 Since the swing operation member 310 is urged in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29 (a)) by the torsion spring SP22, the swing operation member 310 until the lever member 2340 is arranged at the lower end of the swing range. Is maintained in a state of being pressed against the upper cover member 344.

レバー部材2340を揺動範囲の下端まで押し下げた状態(図29(a)参照)から、更に首振り操作部材310を押し下げる方向に首振り操作部材310に荷重をかけると、首振り操作部材310が前転方向(図29(a)反時計回り方向)に回転する。これにより、遊技者に首振り操作部材310の押し下げ操作の下端を認識させることができ、首振り操作部材310の操作範囲の終端が分からず、遊技者が意図せず首振り操作部材310に過荷重をかけることを防止することができる。 When a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in the direction of further pushing down the swing operation member 310 from the state where the lever member 2340 is pushed down to the lower end of the swing range (see FIG. 29 (a)), the swing operation member 310 moves. It rotates in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 29 (a) counterclockwise direction). As a result, the player can recognize the lower end of the push-down operation of the swing operation member 310, the end of the operation range of the swing operation member 310 is not known, and the player unintentionally passes the swing operation member 310. It is possible to prevent the load from being applied.

本実施形態では、レバー部材2340に駆動力を伝達する偏心カム部材2333と、ロック部材2336を解除側(図29(a)参照)へ向けて揺動させるロック解除カム部材2339とを、共に駆動ギア335bで回転させる。これにより、第2駆動装置337(図10参照)を配設不要とでき、製品コストを削減することができる。以下、偏心カム部材2333、ロック解除カム部材2339及びロック部材2336について説明する。 In the present embodiment, both the eccentric cam member 2333 that transmits the driving force to the lever member 2340 and the lock release cam member 2339 that swings the lock member 2336 toward the release side (see FIG. 29A) are driven. It is rotated by the gear 335b. As a result, the second drive device 337 (see FIG. 10) does not need to be arranged, and the product cost can be reduced. Hereinafter, the eccentric cam member 2333, the unlock cam member 2339, and the lock member 2336 will be described.

図30(a)は、偏心カム部材2333のカム部材2333bの正面図であり、図30(b)は、図30(a)の矢印XXXb方向視におけるカム部材2333bの側面図であり、図30(c)は、偏心カム部材2333の本体部材2333aの正面図であり、図30(d)は、図30(c)の矢印XXXd方向視における本体部材2333aの側面図である。なお、図30(c)及び図30(d)では、本体部材2333aが部分的に断面視される。 30 (a) is a front view of the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30 (b) is a side view of the cam member 2333b in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). (C) is a front view of the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30 (d) is a side view of the main body member 2333a in the direction of arrow XXXd of FIG. 30 (c). In addition, in FIG. 30C and FIG. 30D, the main body member 2333a is partially cross-sectionally viewed.

図30(a)及び図30(b)に示すように、カム部材2333bは、偏心カム軸331d2(図10参照)に軸支される筒状部2333b1と、その筒状部2333b1に内接する円に沿って軸方向に延設され筒状部2333b1より若干短く形成されると共に内部が中空とされるカム部2333b2と、筒状部2333b1の先端部に軸方向に沿って切り欠かれる一対の切り欠き2333b3と、筒状部2333b1とカム部2333b2とを双方の軸を通る方向で連結する板状のリブ部2333b4と、そのリブ部2333b4から筒状部2333b1の軸心と平行に凸設される凸設部2333b5と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), the cam member 2333b has a tubular portion 2333b1 pivotally supported by an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) and a circle inscribed in the tubular portion 2333b1. A cam portion 2333b2 that extends axially along the shaft and is formed slightly shorter than the tubular portion 2333b1 and has a hollow inside, and a pair of cuts that are cut out along the axial direction at the tip of the tubular portion 2333b1. A plate-shaped rib portion 2333b4 that connects the notch 2333b3, the tubular portion 2333b1 and the cam portion 2333b2 in the direction passing through both axes, and the rib portion 2333b4 are projected from the rib portion 2333b4 in parallel with the axial center of the tubular portion 2333b1. Mainly includes a convex portion 2333b5.

凸設部2333b5は、筒状部2333b1から径方向に半径R21の長さだけ離間した位置に配設され本体部材2333aの円環凹部2333a3に挿通される突起であり、磁性体材料から形成され、リブ部2333b4に接着材等で接着される。なお、凸設部2333b5は、筒状部2333b1の径方向と交差する態様で配設される側面(図30(a)上下の側面)が筒状部2333b1を中心とする円形状に沿う曲面形状で形成される。 The convex portion 2333b5 is a protrusion that is disposed at a position radially separated from the tubular portion 2333b1 by the length of the radius R21 and is inserted into the annular recess 2333a3 of the main body member 2333a, and is formed of a magnetic material. It is adhered to the rib portion 2333b4 with an adhesive or the like. The convex portion 2333b5 has a curved surface shape in which side surfaces (upper and lower side surfaces in FIG. 30A) are arranged so as to intersect the radial direction of the tubular portion 2333b1 along a circular shape centered on the tubular portion 2333b1. Is formed by.

なお、筒状部2333b1は筒状部333bと、カム部2333b2はカム部333cと、切り欠き2333b3は切り欠き333dと、リブ部2333b4はリブ部333eと、それぞれ対応し、それら対応する部分同士で技術的思想は共通なため、ここでは説明を省略する。 The tubular portion 2333b1 corresponds to the tubular portion 333b, the cam portion 2333b2 corresponds to the cam portion 333c, the notch 2333b3 corresponds to the notch 333d, and the rib portion 2333b4 corresponds to the rib portion 333e, and the corresponding portions correspond to each other. Since the technical ideas are common, the description is omitted here.

図30(c)及び図30(d)に示すように、本体部材2333aは、中心に偏心カム軸331d2(図10参照)に軸支される断面円形状の軸孔2333a2が穿設されると共に外周面に駆動ギア335b(図10参照)と歯合されるギア歯が形成される円板形状の円板部2333a1と、その円板部2333a1の正面側から軸孔2333a2の軸心方向に沿って円環状に凹設される円環凹部2333a3と、その円環凹部2333a3の外周面に沿って磁性体材料が円環状に配設される固定磁石部2333a4と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIGS. 30 (c) and 30 (d), the main body member 2333a is provided with a shaft hole 2333a2 having a circular cross section pivotally supported by an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) at the center thereof. A disc-shaped disc portion 2333a1 in which gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) are formed on the outer peripheral surface, and along the axial direction of the shaft hole 2333a2 from the front side of the disc portion 2333a1. It mainly includes an annular recess 2333a3 that is recessed in an annular shape, and a fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in which a magnetic material is arranged in an annular shape along the outer peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3.

円環凹部2333a3は、軸孔2333a2の中心から円環凹部2333a3の内周面までの距離が半径R22の長さとされ、径方向の幅が凸設部2333b5の厚みより若干大きくされる。本実施形態では、半径R22は変形R21と等しい長さとされる(半径R21=半径R22)。また、円環凹部2333a3の凹設深さは、凸設部2333b5の凸設長さよりも長くされる。 The distance from the center of the shaft hole 2333a2 to the inner peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3 is the length of the radius R22 of the annular recess 2333a3, and the width in the radial direction is slightly larger than the thickness of the convex portion 2333b5. In the present embodiment, the radius R22 has a length equal to that of the modified R21 (radius R21 = radius R22). Further, the recessed depth of the annular recess 2333a3 is made longer than the convex length of the convex portion 2333b5.

ここで、円環凹部2333a3の外周側に固定磁石部2333a4が配設されるので、凸設部2333b5が筒状部2333b1よりも上方に配設される場合に、レバー部材2340からカム部材2333bが過荷重を受けると、凸設部2333b5を固定磁石部2333a4から逃がす方向にカム部材2333bが荷重を受ける。これにより、凸設部2333b5が固定磁石部2333a4に押し付けられることを防止することができ、磁石同士が擦れることにより劣化することを抑制することができる。 Here, since the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the annular recess 2333a3, when the convex portion 2333b5 is disposed above the tubular portion 2333b1, the lever member 2340 to the cam member 2333b When the overload is received, the cam member 2333b receives the load in the direction in which the convex portion 2333b5 is released from the fixed magnet portion 2333a4. As a result, it is possible to prevent the convex portion 2333b5 from being pressed against the fixed magnet portion 2333a4, and it is possible to prevent deterioration due to rubbing between the magnets.

図31は、偏心カム部材2333の本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとを組み立てた図であり、図31(a)は、偏心カム部材2333の正面図であり、図31(b)は図31(a)のXXXIb方向視における偏心カム部材2333の側面図であり、図31(c)は、偏心カム部材2333の正面図である。なお、図31(c)では、図31(a)に示す状態から、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが相対回転された状態が図示される。なお、D12(b)では、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが部分的に断面視される。 FIG. 31 is a view in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are assembled, FIG. 31 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 31 (b) is FIG. 31 ( It is a side view of the eccentric cam member 2333 in the XXXIb direction view of a), and FIG. 31C is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333. Note that FIG. 31 (c) shows a state in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are relatively rotated from the state shown in FIG. 31 (a). In D12 (b), the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are partially viewed in cross section.

図31(a)及び図31(b)に示すように、偏心カム部材2333の本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが偏心カム軸331d2に軸支され組み立てられた状態において、凸設部2333b5が円環凹部2333a3に挿通され、凸設部2333b5と固定磁石部2333a4との間で互いに吸着し合う方向の磁力が働く。そのため、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとは、駆動ギア335b(図10参照)から伝達される駆動力により一体で回転することができる。 As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), in a state where the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 and assembled, the convex portion 2333b5 is circular. It is inserted through the ring recess 2333a3, and a magnetic force acts between the convex portion 2333b5 and the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in the direction of attracting each other. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b can rotate integrally by the driving force transmitted from the driving gear 335b (see FIG. 10).

この際、凸設部2333b5の形状が筒状部2333b1を中心とした円に沿った曲面で形成され、円環凹部2333a3の側面と接触する面積を大きくすることができるので、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとを強固に固定することができる。 At this time, the shape of the convex portion 2333b5 is formed by a curved surface along a circle centered on the tubular portion 2333b1, and the area of contact with the side surface of the annular recess 2333a3 can be increased, so that the main body member 2333a and the cam The member 2333b can be firmly fixed.

一方、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとは磁力で吸着固定されているに過ぎないので、その吸着力以上の力でカム部材2333bが荷重を受けると、本体部材2333aに対してカム部材2333bを滑らせることができる。即ち、図31(a)に示すように、本体部材2333aの基準とする位相を表す基準線Oとカム部材2333bのリブ部2333b4の位相を表す直線Q21とが一致した状態から、本体部材2333aが固定されカム部材2333bに回転方向の荷重が加えられることで、図31(c)に示すように、基準線Oと直線Q21とがずれた状態へと変化させることができる。 On the other hand, since the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are merely attracted and fixed by magnetic force, when the cam member 2333b receives a load with a force equal to or greater than the attractive force, the cam member 2333b slides against the main body member 2333a. Can be made. That is, as shown in FIG. 31A, the main body member 2333a is in a state where the reference line O representing the reference phase of the main body member 2333a and the straight line Q21 representing the phase of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b coincide with each other. By being fixed and applying a load in the rotational direction to the cam member 2333b, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the reference line O and the straight line Q21 can be changed to a deviated state.

図32(a)は、ロック解除カム部材2339の正面図であり、図32(b)は、図32(a)のXXXIIb方向視におけるロック解除カム部材2339の底面図であり、図32(c)は、図32(a)のXXXIIc方向視におけるロック解除カム部材2339の側面図である。 32 (a) is a front view of the unlock cam member 2339, and FIG. 32 (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member 2339 in the direction of XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). ) Is a side view of the unlock cam member 2339 in the XXXIIc direction view of FIG. 32 (a).

図32に示すように、ロック解除カム部材2339は、偏心カム部材2333の本体部材2333aと同一の大きさに形成されると共に外周面に駆動ギア335bと歯合されるギア歯が形成される本体部2339aと、その本体部2339aの中心に穿設されると共にロック解除軸2331d5が挿通される軸孔2339bと、本体部2339aの正面側の側面に沿って径方向外側へ向けて延設されると共にロック部材2336の係止部2666dに当接可能な長さで形成される解除部2339cと、その解除部2339cに対して周方向に90度の位置で径方向外側に延設される検出片2339dと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 32, the unlock cam member 2339 is formed to have the same size as the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and the main body is formed with gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b on the outer peripheral surface. A shaft hole 2339b formed in the center of the portion 2339a and the main body portion 2339a and into which the unlocking shaft 2331d5 is inserted, and a shaft hole 2339b extending outward in the radial direction along the front side surface of the main body portion 2339a. A release portion 2339c formed with a length capable of contacting the locking portion 2666d of the lock member 2336, and a detection piece extending radially outward at a position 90 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the release portion 2339c. Mainly equipped with 2339d.

検出片2339dは、図示しない検出センサの隙間を通過する。これにより、ロック解除カム部材2339の位相を検出することができる。 The detection piece 2339d passes through a gap of a detection sensor (not shown). Thereby, the phase of the unlock cam member 2339 can be detected.

図33(a)は、ロック部材2336の正面図であり、図33(b)は、図33(a)のXXXIIIb方向視におけるロック部材2336の側面図である。 33 (a) is a front view of the lock member 2336, and FIG. 33 (b) is a side view of the lock member 2336 in the direction of XXXIIIb of FIG. 33 (a).

図33(a)及び図33(b)に示すように、ロック部材2336は、ギア部336d(図10参照)が省略された形状とされる。ロック部材2336は、レバー部材2340の揺動を防止する部材であって、先端側が略L字の鉤状に形成される板形状の本体部2336aと、その本体部2336aの基端側に穿設されると共にロック軸331d3(図10参照)が挿通される軸支孔2336bと、その軸支孔2336bを中心とした円弧に沿って形成される案内孔2336cと、本体部2336aのロック解除カム部材2339と対向する側(図33(b)左側)の側面から軸支孔2336bの上方(L字の鉤状の部分の先端)において凸出される係止部2336dと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), the lock member 2336 has a shape in which the gear portion 336d (see FIG. 10) is omitted. The lock member 2336 is a member that prevents the lever member 2340 from swinging, and is formed in a plate-shaped main body portion 2336a whose tip side is formed in a substantially L-shaped hook shape and on the base end side of the main body portion 2336a. A shaft support hole 2336b through which the lock shaft 331d3 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, a guide hole 2336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 2336b, and an unlock cam member of the main body 2336a. It mainly includes a locking portion 2336d that protrudes above the shaft support hole 2336b (the tip of the L-shaped hook-shaped portion) from the side surface on the side facing the 2339 (left side in FIG. 33B).

本体部2336aは、L字の鉤状に形成される先端部の側面(レバー部材2340の下側から当接する側面)が、レバー部材2340と当接する際にロック部材2336を回転させる力が大きくなる態様とされる。 The main body 2336a has a large force for rotating the lock member 2336 when the side surface of the tip portion (the side surface that abuts from the lower side of the lever member 2340) formed in the shape of an L-shaped hook abuts on the lever member 2340. It is regarded as an aspect.

案内孔2336cは、補助軸331d4(図10参照)が挿通される長孔であり、この案内孔2336cの長さにより、ロック部材2336の揺動終端を規定することができる。 The guide hole 2336c is a long hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, and the length of the guide hole 2336c can define the swing end of the lock member 2336.

係止部2336cは、ロック解除カム部材2339(図32参照)の解除部2339cから押される部分である。また、係止部2336cにねじりバネ(図示せず)が係止され、ロック部材2336は終始、固定側(図28(a)参照)へ向けて付勢力を受ける。 The locking portion 2336c is a portion pushed from the unlocking portion 2339c of the unlocking cam member 2339 (see FIG. 32). Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is locked to the locking portion 2336c, and the locking member 2336 receives an urging force toward the fixed side (see FIG. 28A) from beginning to end.

図34及び図35は、駆動ギア335bが回転することによりレバー部材2340が揺動することを時系列で図示するレバー部材2340、偏心カム部材2333、ロック部材2336及びロック解除カム部材2339の正面図である。 34 and 35 are front views of the lever member 2340, the eccentric cam member 2333, the lock member 2336, and the unlock cam member 2339, which show in chronological order that the lever member 2340 swings due to the rotation of the drive gear 335b. Is.

なお、図34(a)では、レバー部材2340がロック部材2336に揺動を規制された状態が図示され、図34(b)では、図34(a)に示す状態からロック解除カム部材2339がロック部材2336に当接するまで回転された状態が図示され、図34(c)では、図34(b)に示す状態からロック解除カム部材2339がロック部材2336を解除側に揺動させた状態が図示され、図34(d)では、図34(c)に示す状態からロック解除カム部材2339が回転されロック部材2336が固定側の位置に復帰した状態が図示される。 Note that FIG. 34 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336, and FIG. 34 (b) shows the unlock cam member 2339 from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a). The state of being rotated until it comes into contact with the lock member 2336 is shown, and in FIG. 34 (c), the state in which the lock release cam member 2339 swings the lock member 2336 toward the release side from the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). FIG. 34 (d) shows a state in which the unlock cam member 2339 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 34 (c) and the lock member 2336 is returned to the fixed position.

また、図35(a)では、偏心カム部材2333のカム部材2333bが、筒状部2333b1の反対側(180度の角度で配置される側)の側面でレバー部材2340と当接する状態が図示され、図35(b)では、図35(a)の状態から偏心カム部材2333が回転されレバー部材2340がロック部材2336に上側から当接した状態が図示され、図35(c)では、図35(b)の状態から偏心カム部材2333が回転されレバー部材2340がロック部材2336に揺動を規制される状態が図示される。 Further, FIG. 35A shows a state in which the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 comes into contact with the lever member 2340 on the side surface opposite to the tubular portion 2333b1 (the side arranged at an angle of 180 degrees). 35 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of FIG. 35 (a) and the lever member 2340 is in contact with the lock member 2336 from above. In FIG. 35 (c), FIG. 35 The state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state (b) and the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is shown.

図34(a)に示すように、ロック解除カム部材2339の解除部2339cがロック部材2336の係止部に当接するまでに角度θ21だけ回転する必要がある場合、ロック解除カム部材2339が角度θ21だけ回転して図34(b)に示す状態に至るまでの間は、レバー部材2340が揺動を規制されるので、偏心カム部材2333のカム部材2333bが回転することができない。そのため、ロック解除カム部材2339と同期して回転する本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが、図34(a)に示す状態から角度θ21だけ相対回転する(図34(b)参照)。 As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the release portion 2339c of the unlock cam member 2339 needs to rotate by an angle θ21 before it comes into contact with the lock portion of the lock member 2336, the unlock cam member 2339 needs to rotate at an angle θ21. Since the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging until the state shown in FIG. 34B is reached, the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 cannot rotate. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b, which rotate in synchronization with the unlocked cam member 2339, rotate relative to each other by an angle θ21 from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a) (see FIG. 34 (b)).

このように、カム部材2333bを本体部材2333aと相対回転可能としているので、偏心カム部材2333とロック解除カム部材2339との位相がずれて組み立てられた場合でも、偏心カム部材2333の回転がレバー部材2340にせき止められて、駆動モータ335a(図10参照)が損傷することを防止することができる。 In this way, since the cam member 2333b can rotate relative to the main body member 2333a, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 is the lever member even when the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlocked cam member 2339 are assembled out of phase. It is possible to prevent the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 10) from being damaged by being dammed by the 2340.

ロック解除カム部材2339が角度θ21だけ回転した後は、ロック解除カム部材2339がロック部材2336を解除側に移動させ始めることで、レバー部材2340の揺動の規制が解けるので、偏心カム部材2333の回転により、レバー部材2340が揺動する。この場合、偏心カム部材2333の本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが磁力で吸着され、一体で回転する。 After the unlock cam member 2339 has rotated by the angle θ21, the unlock cam member 2339 starts to move the lock member 2336 to the release side, so that the regulation of the swing of the lever member 2340 is released, so that the eccentric cam member 2333 The rotation causes the lever member 2340 to swing. In this case, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are attracted by a magnetic force and rotate integrally.

ロック解除カム部材2339の解除部2339cがロック部材2336の上方へ抜けて、ロック部材2336が固定側に復帰すると(図34(d)参照)、その後タイミングに関わらず、レバー部材2340の後端部(図34(a)右端部)がロック部材2336の本体部2336aの鉤状部分の曲面部を押すことでロック部材2336が解除側へ押しやられ、さらにレバー部材2340の後端部が下がることで、自然に揺動が規制される。 When the release portion 2339c of the lock release cam member 2339 is pulled out above the lock member 2336 and the lock member 2336 returns to the fixed side (see FIG. 34 (d)), the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 is thereafter regardless of the timing. (Fig. 34 (a) right end) pushes the curved surface of the hook-shaped part of the main body 2336a of the lock member 2336 to push the lock member 2336 to the release side, and further lowers the rear end of the lever member 2340. , The swing is naturally regulated.

そのため、例えば、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる方向に操作し、レバー部材2340の後端部が下降する場合、レバー部材2340の姿勢に関わらず(レバー部材2340が図34(d)、図35(a)又は図35(b)のどの姿勢をとっている場合でも)レバー部材2340がロック部材2336の鉤状部分の下側まで揺動されることで揺動が規制される。 Therefore, for example, when the player operates the swing operation member 310 in the lifting direction and the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 is lowered, the lever member 2340 is shown in FIG. 34 (d) regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340. The swing is regulated by swinging the lever member 2340 to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336 (regardless of the posture shown in FIG. 35 (a) or FIG. 35 (b)).

ここで、遊技者が首振り操作部材310(図28参照)を持ち上げ操作する際に偏心カム部材2333にかかる荷重に対する対策として、偏心カム部材2333をゴムなどの弾性材料から形成し、部材が弾性変形することで荷重を逃がすという方法が考えられる。しかし、この場合、部材にへたりが生じたり、形状が変化したりするという問題点があった。 Here, as a measure against the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 when the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), the eccentric cam member 2333 is formed from an elastic material such as rubber, and the member is elastic. A method of releasing the load by deforming is conceivable. However, in this case, there is a problem that the member is settled or the shape is changed.

これに対し、本実施形態では、カム部材2333bは本体部材2333aに対して滑ることができるので、遊技者が首振り操作部材310(図28参照)を持ち上げることで偏心カム部材2333に与えられる荷重によってカム部材2333bが破損することを防止することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the player lifting the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). It is possible to prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged.

即ち、レバー部材2340の姿勢に関わらず(レバー部材2340が図34(d)、図35(a)又は図35(b)のどの姿勢をとっている場合でも)、首振り操作部材310(図28参照)に上向きの荷重がかけられることで、レバー部材2340がカム部材2333bを押しやり(本体部材2333aに対して滑らせ)、レバー部材2340がロック部材2336の鉤状部分の下側まで揺動されることで揺動が規制される。 That is, regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 (regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 in FIGS. 34 (d), 35 (a), or 35 (b)), the swing operation member 310 (FIG. When an upward load is applied to (see 28), the lever member 2340 pushes the cam member 2333b (slides against the main body member 2333a), and the lever member 2340 swings to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336. Swing is regulated by being moved.

一方で、この場合、カム部材2333bの姿勢は同じ(図35(c)参照)であるのに、ロック解除カム部材2339の位相は異なる事態が生じる(図34(d)、図35(a)又は図35(b)参照)。そのため、再度、ロック解除カム部材2339でロック部材2336を解除側へ移動させるまでに必要な駆動ギア335bの回転角度が異なり、レバー部材2340の駆動開始のタイミングを定めることが困難になるという問題点があった。 On the other hand, in this case, although the postures of the cam members 2333b are the same (see FIG. 35 (c)), the phases of the unlocked cam members 2339 may be different (FIGS. 34 (d) and 35 (a)). Or see FIG. 35 (b)). Therefore, the rotation angle of the drive gear 335b required to move the lock member 2336 to the release side by the lock release cam member 2339 is different again, and it becomes difficult to determine the drive start timing of the lever member 2340. was there.

これに対し、本実施形態では、ロック解除カム部材2339の位相を検出センサ(図示せず)で検出することで、偏心カム部材2333とロック解除カム部材2339との位相を合わせることができる。即ち、ロック部材2336にレバー部材2340が揺動を規制されている場合のカム部材2333bの配置は図35(c)に示す配置に固定されるので、この状態で駆動ギア335bを回転させてロック解除カム部材2339を所定の位相(図34(b)参照)まで回転させることで、偏心カム部材2333の位相とロック解除カム部材2339の位相とを合わせることができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlock cam member 2339 can be matched by detecting the phase of the unlock cam member 2339 with a detection sensor (not shown). That is, since the arrangement of the cam member 2333b when the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is fixed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 35 (c), the drive gear 335b is rotated and locked in this state. By rotating the release cam member 2339 to a predetermined phase (see FIG. 34B), the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the unlock cam member 2339 can be matched.

これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310(図28参照)を持ち上げ操作するタイミングに関わらず、偏心カム部材2333の位相とロック解除カム部材2339の位相とを合わせることができ、レバー部材2340の駆動開始のタイミングを容易に一致させることができる。 As a result, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the unlocked cam member 2339 can be matched regardless of the timing when the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), and the lever member 2340 can be matched. The drive start timing can be easily matched.

次いで、図36を参照して、首振り部材2360の本体部材2361について説明する。図36(a)から図36(c)は、軸支棒363の軸方向視で図示した首振り部材2360の本体部材2361の正面図である。なお、図36(a)では、後転側の終端に本体部材2361が揺動配置された状態(図28(a)参照)が図示され、図36(b)では、前転側の終端に本体部材2361が揺動配置された状態(図28(b)参照)が図示され、図36(c)では、図36(b)に示す状態から本体部材2361が長孔2361fの長手方向に沿ってスライド移動された状態が図示される。 Next, the main body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. 36 (a) to 36 (c) are front views of the main body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 illustrated in the axial direction of the shaft support rod 363. Note that FIG. 36 (a) shows a state in which the main body member 2361 is oscillatedly arranged at the end on the backward rotation side (see FIG. 28 (a)), and FIG. 36 (b) shows the state at the end on the forward rotation side. A state in which the main body member 2361 is oscillated (see FIG. 28 (b)) is shown, and in FIG. 36 (c), the main body member 2361 is along the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 2361f from the state shown in FIG. 36 (b). The state of being slid and moved is illustrated.

図36に示すように、本体部材2361は、軸孔341e(図12参照)と同軸で軸支棒363に軸支される部材であって、側壁部361a(図12参照)の形状が若干変形されて形成される変形側壁部2361aと、軸孔361cから固定板部361eの延設方向に沿って形成される長孔2361fと、角度規制孔361dの上側端部から固定板部361eの延設方向に沿って形成される長孔2361gと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 36, the main body member 2361 is a member coaxially supported by the shaft support rod 363 with the shaft hole 341e (see FIG. 12), and the shape of the side wall portion 361a (see FIG. 12) is slightly deformed. The deformed side wall portion 2361a formed by being formed, the elongated hole 2361f formed from the shaft hole 361c along the extending direction of the fixing plate portion 361e, and the extension of the fixing plate portion 361e from the upper end portion of the angle regulating hole 361d. It mainly comprises 2361 g of elongated holes formed along the direction.

これにより、少なくとも本体部材2361が前転側の終端に揺動配置されない限り、軸支棒363および規制棒365が長孔2361f,2361gに侵入しないように配設される。そのため、本体部材2361は軸支棒363を中心とした揺動動作のみを行う。 As a result, unless at least the main body member 2361 is oscillated at the end on the forward rotation side, the shaft support rod 363 and the regulation rod 365 are arranged so as not to enter the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. Therefore, the main body member 2361 only swings around the shaft support rod 363.

次いで、図37を参照して、モータ固定板2362について説明する。図37(a)は、モータ固定板2362の上面図であり、図37(b)は、図37(a)のXXXVIIb方向視におけるモータ固定板2362の側面図であり、図37(c)は、図37(b)に示す状態からU字状部材2362dがスライド移動された状態を示すモータ固定板2362の側面図である。なお、理解を容易にするために、図37(b)及び図37(c)において、本体部材2361の外形が想像線で図示される。 Next, the motor fixing plate 2362 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. 37 (a) is a top view of the motor fixing plate 2362, FIG. 37 (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 in the direction of XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a), and FIG. 37 (c) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362. It is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 showing the state in which the U-shaped member 2362d is slid and moved from the state shown in FIG. 37 (b). For ease of understanding, the outer shape of the main body member 2361 is shown by an imaginary line in FIGS. 37 (b) and 37 (c).

図37に示すように、モータ固定板2362は、本体部362a及び側壁部362bが後方(図37上方)に延長された形状で形成される本体部2362a及び側壁部2362bと、本体部2362aの底側から下方へ延設される一対の棒状部2362cと、それら棒状部2362cにスライド移動可能に配設され長孔2361f,2361gの幅よりも大きな股幅で形成されるU字状部材2362dと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 37, the motor fixing plate 2362 includes a main body portion 2362a and a side wall portion 2362b formed by extending the main body portion 362a and the side wall portion 362b rearward (upper side of FIG. 37), and the bottom of the main body portion 2362a. A pair of rod-shaped portions 2362c extending downward from the side, and a U-shaped member 2362d formed in the rod-shaped portions 2362c so as to be slidably movable and having a crotch width larger than the width of the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. Mainly prepared.

側壁部2362bは、本体部2362aの延設方向に沿って穿設される長孔2362b1を備える。 The side wall portion 2362b includes an elongated hole 2362b1 formed along the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a.

U字状部材2362dは、U字の股幅の方向が長孔2361f,2361gの幅方向に沿う態様で配設され、弾性バネ等(図示せず)により本体部2362aから離反する方向に付勢される。即ち、U字状部材2362dに荷重がかけられていない場合は、U字状部材2362dは図37(b)に示す位置に配置され、U字の脚の部分が長孔2361f,2361gと重なるので、軸支棒363及び規制棒365が長孔2361f,2361gに沿って移動することを防止できる。 The U-shaped member 2362d is arranged so that the crotch width direction of the U-shape is along the width direction of the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g, and is urged in a direction away from the main body portion 2362a by an elastic spring or the like (not shown). Will be done. That is, when no load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. 37 (b), and the U-shaped leg portion overlaps with the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. , The shaft support rod 363 and the regulation rod 365 can be prevented from moving along the elongated holes 2361f, 2361g.

一方で、U字状部材2362dに本体部2362aへ近接する方向へ向けた荷重がかけられると、U字状部材2362dは図37(c)に示す位置に配置され、U字の股の部分が長孔2361f,2361gと重なるので、軸支棒363及び規制棒365を長孔2361f,2361gに沿って移動させることができる。 On the other hand, when a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d in a direction approaching the main body portion 2362a, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. 37 (c), and the U-shaped crotch portion is formed. Since it overlaps with the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g, the shaft support rod 363 and the regulating rod 365 can be moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

即ち、U字状部材2362dに荷重をかけるか否かを切り替えることで、本体部材2361を長孔2361f,2361gに沿って移動可能とするか否かを切り替えることができる。 That is, by switching whether or not a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, it is possible to switch whether or not the main body member 2361 can be moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

ここで、U字状部材2362dをスライド移動させる部材について説明する。本実施形態では、レバー部材2340の本体部材341の内側に長手方向に沿ってスライド移動可能に配設される板状の第1解除部材2370と、首振り操作部材310の背面側枠部材311に配設される貫通孔を貫通して本体部2362aの延設方向と垂直な方向にスライド移動可能に配設される板状の第2解除部材2380と、を主に備える。 Here, a member that slides the U-shaped member 2362d will be described. In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped first release member 2370 is arranged inside the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 so as to be slidable along the longitudinal direction, and the back side frame member 311 of the swing operation member 310. It mainly includes a plate-shaped second release member 2380 that is arranged so as to be slidably movable in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a through the through hole to be arranged.

なお、第1解除部材2370は後側(図28(a)右側)のU字状部材2362dをスライド移動可能に配設され、第2解除部材2380は前側(図28(a)左側)のU字状部材2362dをスライド移動可能に配設される。 The first release member 2370 is arranged so that the U-shaped member 2362d on the rear side (right side in FIG. 28 (a)) can be slidably moved, and the second release member 2380 is the U on the front side (left side in FIG. 28 (a)). The character member 2362d is arranged so as to be slidable.

また、第1解除部材2370は、剥離部材350がレバー部材2340から引きはがされることで、本体部材351が第1解除部材2370の端部に当接し、U字状部材2362dを押進する形状とされる。第2解除部材2380は、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置され、首振り部材2360が回転し前転方向の揺動終端に配置されることで、前カバー321が第2解除部材2380の端部に当接し、U字状部材2362dを押進する形状とされる。 Further, in the first release member 2370, when the release member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 2340, the main body member 351 comes into contact with the end of the first release member 2370 and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d. It is said to be a shape. In the second release member 2380, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position, the swing member 2360 rotates and is arranged at the swing end in the forward rotation direction, so that the front cover 321 is arranged on the second release member 2380. The shape is such that it abuts on the end and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d.

例えば、図29(b)に示す状態では、は前側(図29(a)左側)のU字状部材2362dはスライド移動されるが、後側(図29(a)右側)のU字状部材2362dはスライド移動していないので、首振り操作部材310を下方にスライド移動させることはできない。 For example, in the state shown in FIG. 29 (b), the U-shaped member 2362d on the front side (left side in FIG. 29 (a)) is slidably moved, but the U-shaped member on the rear side (right side in FIG. 29 (a)) is slid. Since the 2362d is not slid, the swing operating member 310 cannot be slid downward.

図38(a)及び図38(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス2300の断面図である。なお、図38(a)では、図28(a)に示す状態から首振り操作部材310が押し下げられ下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。また、図38(b)では、図38(a)に示す状態から、首振り操作部材310が長孔2361f,2361gに沿ってスライド移動された状態が図示される。 38 (a) and 38 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 38A, a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 28A and arranged in a downward position is shown. Further, FIG. 38 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is slid and moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g from the state shown in FIG. 38 (a).

図38(a)に示すように、剥離部材350が本体部材341から引きはがされ、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置されると共に回転され前転方向の揺動終端に配置されることで、一対のU字状部材2362dがスライド移動され、首振り操作部材310が長孔2361f,2361gに沿ってスライド移動することが可能となる。 As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position and is rotated and arranged at the swing end in the forward rotation direction. Then, the pair of U-shaped members 2362d are slid and moved, and the swinging operation member 310 can be slid and moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

このとき、レバー部材2340の本体部材341が剥離部材350が引きはがされることで首振り操作部材310に既に過荷重がかかっており、首振り操作部材310が揺動範囲の下端まで揺動したうえ、更に首振り操作部材310に下向きの力が掛かっている。そのため、遊技者が、首振り操作部材310を操作する際に誤って過荷重をかけてしまったわけではなく、操作と関係無く、首振り操作部材310を破壊しにかかっていると判断することができる。 At this time, the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 is already overloaded by the peeling member 350 being peeled off, and the swing operation member 310 swings to the lower end of the swing range. In addition, a downward force is further applied to the swing operation member 310. Therefore, it can be determined that the player does not accidentally apply an overload when operating the swing operation member 310, and is about to destroy the swing operation member 310 regardless of the operation. it can.

そのため、例えば、図38(b)に示す状態となったことを検出センサ(図示せず)で検出し、警報を出すことで、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に過荷重をかけることを抑制し、操作デバイス2300が破壊されることを防止することができる。 Therefore, for example, by detecting the state shown in FIG. 38 (b) with a detection sensor (not shown) and issuing an alarm, it is possible to prevent the player from applying an overload to the swing operation member 310. However, it is possible to prevent the operating device 2300 from being destroyed.

なお、首振り操作部材310に過荷重をかけない場合には、首振り操作部材310がスライド移動することを防止することができるので、長孔2361f,2361gによって首振り操作部材310の操作感が変化することを防止することができる。 When the swing operation member 310 is not overloaded, it is possible to prevent the swing operation member 310 from sliding, so that the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g provide a feeling of operation of the swing operation member 310. It can be prevented from changing.

次いで、図39から図42を参照して、第3実施形態における操作デバイス3300について説明する。第1実施形態では、レバー部材340を駆動させる駆動力がレバー部材340にレバー支持軸331d1の後方で伝達される場合を説明したが、第3実施形態における操作デバイス3300は、レバー部材3340を駆動させる駆動力がレバー支持軸331d1の前方で伝達される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the operation device 3300 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force for driving the lever member 340 is transmitted to the lever member 340 behind the lever support shaft 331d1 has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment drives the lever member 3340. The driving force to be driven is transmitted in front of the lever support shaft 331d1. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

なお、第3実施形態では、ねじりバネSP31からレバー部材3340を前倒れさせる方向に付勢力が働くとともに、ねじりバネSP32から首振り操作部材310を後倒れさせる方向に付勢力が働く。 In the third embodiment, the urging force acts in the direction of tilting the lever member 3340 forward from the torsion spring SP31, and the urging force acts in the direction of tilting the swing operation member 310 backward from the torsion spring SP32.

ねじりバネSP31は、軸支部331g,332g(図10参照)に巻き付けられ、一端がねじりバネ係止部331h,332h(図10参照)に上側から当接され、他端が角度規制棒部材346に上側から当接される。これにより、レバー部材340は首振り操作部材310が前倒れする方向に付勢される。 The torsion spring SP31 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end of which is brought into contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 10) from above, and the other end is attached to the angle regulating rod member 346. It is abutted from above. As a result, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 tilts forward.

ねじりバネSP32は、緩衝部材364に巻き付け支持され、一方の端部が正面曲面部345cに係止され、他方の端部がモータ固定板362に係止される。本実施形態では、ねじりバネSP32により、首振り部材360が、本体部材341に対して起き上がる方向に付勢される。 The torsion spring SP32 is wound and supported around the cushioning member 364, one end thereof is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP32 urges the swing member 360 in the rising direction with respect to the main body member 341.

図39(a)及び図39(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第3実施形態における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図39(a)及び図39(b)では、レバー部材3340がロック部材336に揺動を規制された状態が図示され、図39(b)では図39(a)に示す状態から首振り操作部材310が軸支棒363を軸に前方に首振り操作された状態が図示される。本実施形態では、図39(a)の状態が初期位置とされる。また、図17(a)では操作デバイス300が図示されるが、外観は同じなので、操作デバイス3300とみなして説明を行う。以下、本実施形態において同様である。 39 (a) and 39 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 according to the third embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It should be noted that in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), the state in which the lever member 3340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 is shown, and in FIG. 39 (b), the neck is changed from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a). The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung forward about the shaft support rod 363 is shown. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 39A is the initial position. Further, although the operation device 300 is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same, the operation device 300 will be regarded as the operation device 3300 for description. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

図39に示すように、本実施形態における操作デバイス3300は、偏心カム部材333を備えておらず、レバー部材3340の駆動は後述するソレノイド機構により行われる。以下、そのソレノイド機構について説明する。 As shown in FIG. 39, the operation device 3300 in the present embodiment does not include the eccentric cam member 333, and the lever member 3340 is driven by a solenoid mechanism described later. The solenoid mechanism will be described below.

ソレノイド機構は、内側カバー部材3330の内側に配設される磁性体材料から形成される磁性体部材3339と、レバー部材3340に固定されると共に円柱形状で金属製の棒状部材3345fとで構成される。 The solenoid mechanism is composed of a magnetic material member 3339 formed from a magnetic material material arranged inside the inner cover member 3330, and a cylindrical member 3345f fixed to the lever member 3340 and made of metal. ..

レバー部材3340の下部カバー部材3345は、背面ガイド部345aの左右端部から後下方に延設されると共に下部カバー部材3345と一体で成型される一対の伝達部3345eを備え、その伝達部3345eの先端にレバー支持軸331d1と平行な姿勢で金属製の棒状部材3345fが固定され、その棒状部材3345fには電流が導通される。 The lower cover member 3345 of the lever member 3340 includes a pair of transmission portions 3345e extending rearwardly and downwardly from the left and right ends of the back guide portion 345a and integrally molded with the lower cover member 3345, and the transmission portion 3345e thereof. A metal rod-shaped member 3345f is fixed to the tip in a posture parallel to the lever support shaft 331d1, and an electric current is conducted through the rod-shaped member 3345f.

磁性体材料3339は、内側カバー部材3330の正面側壁から背面側(図39(a)右側)に上下一対で延設されるU字形状の磁石である。本実施形態では、上側に配置される上側腕部3339nがN極とされ、下側に配置される下側腕部3339sがS極とされる。上側腕部3339nの下側面および下側腕部3339sの上側面は、レバー部材3340の揺動に伴って棒状部材3345fが移動する軌跡から上下方向に若干隙間をあけて配置される。そのため、レバー部材3340が揺動する際に、棒状部材3345fが磁性体部材3339と衝突することを抑制することができる。 The magnetic material 3339 is a U-shaped magnet extending in pairs from the front side wall to the back side (right side in FIG. 39 (a)) of the inner cover member 3330. In the present embodiment, the upper arm portion 3339n arranged on the upper side is the north pole, and the lower arm portion 3339s arranged on the lower side is the south pole. The lower side surface of the upper arm portion 3339n and the upper side surface of the lower arm portion 3339s are arranged with a slight vertical gap from the locus in which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves as the lever member 3340 swings. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rod-shaped member 3345f from colliding with the magnetic member 3339 when the lever member 3340 swings.

ここで、例えば、棒状部材3345fに、図39(a)紙面手前側へ向けて電流を流すと、棒状部材3345fを後方(図39(a)右方)へ向けて移動させる電磁力が生じる。また逆方向に電流を流すと、棒状部材3345fを前方(図39(a)左方)へ向けて移動させる電磁力が生じる。これら電磁力により、レバー部材3340を揺動させることができる。 Here, for example, when an electric current is passed through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 39 (a), an electromagnetic force is generated that moves the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the rear (right side in FIG. 39 (a)). Further, when an electric current is passed in the opposite direction, an electromagnetic force is generated that moves the rod-shaped member 3345f forward (to the left in FIG. 39A). The lever member 3340 can be swung by these electromagnetic forces.

図40(a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図40(a)では、ロック部材336が解除側に配置され、レバー部材3340が付勢力により揺動され首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。 40 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 40A shows a state in which the lock member 336 is arranged on the release side, the lever member 3340 is swung by the urging force, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position.

本実施形態では、レバー部材3340がねじりバネSP1により前倒れする方向に付勢されるので、ロック部材336を解除側に配置することでレバー部材3340を揺動開始させることができる。 In the present embodiment, since the lever member 3340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 in the direction of tilting forward, the lever member 3340 can be started to swing by arranging the lock member 336 on the release side.

本実施形態のように、レバー部材3340が前倒れする方向に付勢されると、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を押し下げた場合にレバー部材3340が近接する側にレバー部材3340を駆動させる偏心カム部材を配置する必要があり、遊技者の操作により偏心カム部材が破損しやすいという問題点があった。 When the lever member 3340 is urged in the direction of tilting forward as in the present embodiment, the eccentricity that drives the lever member 3340 toward the side where the lever member 3340 is close to the player when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310. It is necessary to arrange the cam member, and there is a problem that the eccentric cam member is easily damaged by the operation of the player.

一方、本実施形態では偏心カム部材を削除し、ソレノイド機構によりレバー部材3340に駆動力を伝達する。ソレノイド機構を構成する棒状部材3345fの移動軌跡と若干隙間を空ける態様で、ソレノイド機構を構成する磁性体部材3339が配設されるので、棒状部材3345fと磁性体部材3339とが衝突することが抑制され、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を押し下げ操作した場合に、ソレノイド機構が破損することを抑制することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member is deleted, and the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 3340 by the solenoid mechanism. Since the magnetic member 3339 constituting the solenoid mechanism is arranged so as to leave a slight gap from the movement locus of the rod-shaped member 3345f constituting the solenoid mechanism, collision between the rod-shaped member 3345f and the magnetic member 3339 is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the solenoid mechanism from being damaged when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310.

図40(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図40(b)では、図39(b)に示す状態から、首振り操作部材310が下方に押し下げられ、本体部材341と剥離部材350とが引きはがされた状態が図示される。 FIG. 40 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 40 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed downward and the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 are peeled off from the state shown in FIG. 39 (b).

ねじりバネSP1の付勢力は、レバー部材3340を前倒れさせる方向(図40(b)反時計回り方向)に向けられるので、図40(b)の状態から遊技者が手を離しても、首振り操作部材310はすぐに上昇移動することは無く、その場に維持される。 Since the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is directed in the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 40 (b)), even if the player releases his / her hand from the state in FIG. 40 (b), the neck The swing operation member 310 does not immediately move up and is maintained in place.

ここで、レバー部材340の付勢の方向を起き上がる方向とすると、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に過荷重をかけた場合に、レバー部材340が剥離部材350と剥離してロック部材336の破損を防止できたとしても、遊技者が手を離すとすぐに首振り操作部材310が上昇するので、遊技者が過荷重をかけていることに気付かず、首振り操作部材310に繰り返し過荷重をかける恐れがあるという問題点があった。 Here, assuming that the urging direction of the lever member 340 is the rising direction, when the player applies an overload to the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 peels off from the peeling member 350 and the lock member 336 is damaged. Even if this can be prevented, the swing operation member 310 rises as soon as the player releases the hand, so that the player does not notice that the swing operation member 310 is overloaded and repeatedly overloads the swing operation member 310. There was a problem that there was a risk of calling.

これに対し、本実施形態では、レバー部材3340の付勢の方向がレバー部材3340を前倒れされる方向(図40(b)反時計回り方向)に向けられるので、首振り操作部材310を下向き位置に配置させ続けることができる。これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に過荷重を繰り返しかける事態を回避することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the urging direction of the lever member 3340 is directed to the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 40B), so that the swing operation member 310 is directed downward. You can keep it in place. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player repeatedly applies an overload to the swing operation member 310.

本実施形態では、レバー部材3340を駆動させる電磁力を受ける棒状部材3345fが本体部材341と一体で動作する。即ち、本体部材341が剥離部材350と分離した状態において、棒状部材3345fが電磁力を受けることで本体部材341を揺動させることができる。 In the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345f that receives the electromagnetic force for driving the lever member 3340 operates integrally with the main body member 341. That is, in a state where the main body member 341 is separated from the peeling member 350, the main body member 341 can be swung by receiving the electromagnetic force of the rod-shaped member 3345f.

ここで、レバー部材340(図10参照)に偏心カム部材333(図10参照)で駆動力を伝達する場合、偏心カム部材333を剥離部材350の下方に配設すると、ロック部材336によりレバー部材340の揺動が規制される場合に、偏心カム部材333の回転も同時に規制される(図18(a)参照)。そのため、ロック部材336によりレバー部材340の揺動が規制される場合に、偏心カム部材333が動作すると、ロック部材336に荷重がかかりロック部材336が損傷する恐れがあるという問題点があった。 Here, when the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 340 (see FIG. 10) by the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10), when the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged below the release member 350, the lock member 336 causes the lever member. When the swing of the 340 is regulated, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 is also regulated (see FIG. 18A). Therefore, when the eccentric cam member 333 operates when the swing of the lever member 340 is restricted by the lock member 336, there is a problem that a load is applied to the lock member 336 and the lock member 336 may be damaged.

これに対し、本実施形態では、ロック部材336によりレバー部材3340の揺動が規制される場合に、棒状部材3345fが電磁力を受けて移動することで、本体部材341が揺動可能とされる一方、剥離部材350には駆動力が伝達されない。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing of the lever member 3340 is regulated by the lock member 336, the rod-shaped member 3345f moves by receiving an electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 can swing. On the other hand, the driving force is not transmitted to the peeling member 350.

そのため、ロック部材336によりレバー部材3340の揺動が規制される場合に棒状部材3345fに電流が流れたとしても、その際生じる電磁力は本体部材341の揺動に使用され、剥離部材350の揺動には使用されないので、ロック部材336が損傷することを防止することができる。 Therefore, even if a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f when the swing of the lever member 3340 is regulated by the lock member 336, the electromagnetic force generated at that time is used for swinging the main body member 341, and the release member 350 swings. Since it is not used for motion, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 from being damaged.

図41(a)及び図41(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図41(a)では、図40(b)に示す状態から、レバー部材3340が起き上がる方向に揺動された状態が図示され、図41(b)では、図41(a)に示す状態から、レバー部材3340が起き上がる方向に揺動された状態が図示される。 41 (a) and 41 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 41 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction from the state shown in FIG. 40 (b), and FIG. 41 (b) shows the state shown in FIG. 41 (a). Therefore, the state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction is illustrated.

図41(a)及び図41(b)に示すように、棒状部材3345fが電磁力を受けて移動することにより、レバー部材3340の本体部材341を揺動させることができる。ここで、剥離部材350の下方に偏心カム部材333(図10参照)を配置し、その偏心カム部材333を回転させることでレバー部材3340を駆動させる場合には、剥離部材350からレバー部材340の本体部材341が引きはがされた状態(図23(b)参照)で本体部材341を駆動させることはできない。 As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the rod-shaped member 3345f moves by receiving an electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 of the lever member 3340 can be swung. Here, when the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10) is arranged below the peeling member 350 and the lever member 3340 is driven by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the peeling member 350 to the lever member 340 The main body member 341 cannot be driven in a state where the main body member 341 is peeled off (see FIG. 23B).

これに対し、本実施形態では、剥離部材350を介して本体部材341に駆動力が伝達されるのではなく、棒状部材3345fが受ける電磁力が伝達部3345eを介して本体部材341に伝達され、本体部材341が駆動される。従って、剥離部材350の位置が固定されている場合でも、本体部材341を揺動させることができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the driving force is not transmitted to the main body member 341 via the peeling member 350, but the electromagnetic force received by the rod-shaped member 3345f is transmitted to the main body member 341 via the transmission unit 3345e. The main body member 341 is driven. Therefore, even when the position of the peeling member 350 is fixed, the main body member 341 can be swung.

図40(b)に示す状態から伝達部3345eが角度α31だけ姿勢変化するまで棒状部材3345fに図40(b)紙面奥側へ向けて電流を流すことで、本体部材341を図41(a)に示す状態とすることができ、図41(a)に示す状態から伝達部3345eが角度α32だけ姿勢変化するまで棒状部材3345fに図41(a)紙面奥側へ向けて電流を流すことで、本体部材341を図41(b)に示す状態とすることができる。 FIG. 41 (a) shows the main body member 341 by passing an electric current through the rod-shaped member 3345 f from the state shown in FIG. 40 (b) toward the back side of the paper surface until the transmission portion 3345e changes its posture by the angle α31. The state shown in FIG. 41 (a) can be obtained by passing a current through the rod-shaped member 3345f from the state shown in FIG. 41 (a) toward the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 41 (a) until the transmission unit 3345e changes its posture by the angle α32. The main body member 341 can be in the state shown in FIG. 41 (b).

棒状部材3345fに流す電流の向きを反転させることで、本体部材341の姿勢を、図41(a)の状態と図41(b)の状態とに繰り返し変化させることができる。これにより、遊技者に操作デバイス3300を注目させる煽り動作を行うことができる。 By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the posture of the main body member 341 can be repeatedly changed between the state of FIG. 41 (a) and the state of FIG. 41 (b). As a result, it is possible to perform a fanning operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 3300.

また、本体部材341に剥離部材350が吸着固定された状態(図40(a)参照)においても、棒状部材3345fに流す電流の向きを反転させることで、遊技者に操作デバイス3300を注目させる煽り動作を行うことができる。この際に、棒状部材3345fが移動する経路は本体部材341から剥離部材350が引きはがされた状態の経路と同様なので、単一の磁性体部材3339で、本体部材341から剥離部材350が引きはがされた場合と本体部材341に剥離部材350が吸着している場合とに対応することができる。 Further, even in a state where the peeling member 350 is attracted and fixed to the main body member 341 (see FIG. 40 (a)), the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f is reversed to incite the player to pay attention to the operation device 3300. Can perform operations. At this time, the path through which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves is the same as the path in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Therefore, the peeling member 350 is pulled from the main body member 341 by a single magnetic member 3339. It is possible to deal with the case where the peeling member 350 is attached to the main body member 341 and the case where the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341.

なお、本体部材341に剥離部材350が吸着している状態と、本体部材341から剥離部材350が引きはがされた状態とでは、本隊部材341の長手方向における重量バランスが変化するため、同じ強さの電流を流したとしても、煽り動作の速度を異ならせることができる。これにより、演出効果を向上させることができる。 The weight balance in the longitudinal direction of the main unit member 341 changes between the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Even if the current is passed, the speed of the fanning operation can be changed. As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved.

図42(a)及び図42(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス3300の断面図である。なお、図42(a)及び図42(b)では、理解を容易とするために首振り操作部材310が断面視されずに側面視で図示され、遊技者の手が想像線で図示される。 42 (a) and 42 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the swing operation member 310 is shown in a side view without being viewed in cross section, and the player's hand is shown in an imaginary line. ..

図42(a)では、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置され、遊技者の手が首振り操作部材310の背面側(図42(a)右側)から被せられた状態が図示される。この状態から、棒状部材3345fに図42(a)紙面奥へ向けて電流が流れることで棒状部材3345fが電磁力を受け、レバー部材3340が起き上がる方向に揺動される。このレバー部材3340の揺動により、首振り操作部材310が遊技者の手に引っ掛かり、首振り操作部材310が前転方向(図42(a)反時計回り)に揺動する。これにより、裏ボタン部材312dの状態が変化し、それを第2センサ部材313d(図20参照)で検出することで、遊技者からの入力動作の有無を判断することができる。 FIG. 42 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position and the player's hand is covered from the back side (right side of FIG. 42 (a)) of the swing operation member 310. From this state, when a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the back of the paper surface in FIG. 42 (a), the rod-shaped member 3345f receives an electromagnetic force and the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction. Due to the swing of the lever member 3340, the swing operation member 310 is caught in the player's hand, and the swing operation member 310 swings in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42A). As a result, the state of the back button member 312d changes, and by detecting this with the second sensor member 313d (see FIG. 20), it is possible to determine whether or not there is an input operation from the player.

この場合、遊技者は首振り操作部材310に手を被せているだけで、入力操作を行うことができ、入力操作を容易とすることができる。また、棒状部材3345fに電流を流す態様(タイミングや強さ)によって裏ボタン部材312dの状態が変化する(遊技者が手を被せている首振り操作部材310が前転方向に揺動する)タイミングを制御できる。そのため、遊技者に入力操作を求めることなく、手を首振り操作部材310に被せさせておき、棒状部材3345fに流れる電流の向きや強さを制御することで、制御側で裏ボタン312dの入力操作のタイミングを決定することができる。これにより、例えば、タイミング良く入力をすることを求める演出を行う場合に、遊技者の負担を減少させることができる。 In this case, the player can perform the input operation simply by putting his / her hand on the swing operation member 310, and the input operation can be facilitated. Further, the timing at which the state of the back button member 312d changes (the swinging operation member 310 on which the player covers the hand swings in the forward rotation direction) depending on the mode (timing and strength) in which a current is passed through the rod-shaped member 3345f. Can be controlled. Therefore, the back button 312d is input on the control side by covering the swinging operation member 310 with the hand and controlling the direction and strength of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f without asking the player for an input operation. The timing of the operation can be determined. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the player, for example, when performing an effect that requires input at the right time.

また、遊技者が首振り操作部材310の背面側に手を被せることなく、例えば、レンズ部材317に手を置いているだけでは、図42(a)に示す状態からレバー部材3340を起き上がる方向に揺動させても、首振り操作部材310が前転方向(図42(a)反時計回り)に揺動することは無い。そのため、操作デバイス3300の操作の態様が複数存在する場合に、タイミング良く入力をするための操作の方法を指定することができ、遊技者に適切な方法で操作デバイス3300を操作させることができる。 Further, if the player does not put his / her hand on the back side of the swing operation member 310 but simply puts his / her hand on the lens member 317, for example, the lever member 3340 is raised from the state shown in FIG. 42 (a). Even if it is swung, the swing operation member 310 does not swing in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42A). Therefore, when there are a plurality of operation modes of the operation device 3300, it is possible to specify an operation method for inputting in a timely manner, and the player can operate the operation device 3300 by an appropriate method.

これは、レバー部材3340のレバー支持軸331d1の後下方に偏心カム部材333を配設する形態では不可能であり、例えば、本実施形態のように、レバー支持軸331d1の前側において棒状部材3345hが受ける電磁力が伝達され、本体部材341を起き上がる方向に揺動させる形態を採用することで、初めて達成される効果である。 This is not possible in the form in which the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged behind and below the lever support shaft 331d1 of the lever member 3340. For example, as in the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345h is provided on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1. This effect is achieved for the first time by adopting a form in which the received electromagnetic force is transmitted and the main body member 341 swings in the rising direction.

次いで、図43から図52を参照して、第4実施形態における操作デバイス4300について説明する。第1実施形態では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態でロック部材336がレバー部材340の揺動を規制する場合を説明したが、第4実施形態における操作デバイス4300は、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態でロック部材4336がレバー部材4340の揺動を規制する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the lock member 336 regulates the swing of the lever member 340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment has a neck. The lock member 4336 regulates the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図43は、第4実施形態における操作デバイス4300の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図43では、外側ケース部材320の図示が省略され、内側ケース部材4330が分解された状態が図示される。 FIG. 43 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 43, the illustration of the outer case member 320 is omitted, and the state in which the inner case member 4330 is disassembled is shown.

図43に示すように、内側ケース部材4330は、レバー部材4340が内側に配設される箱状に組立てられる左カバー部材4331及び右カバー部材4332と、左カバー部材4331から凸設される偏心カム軸331d2に軸支される偏心カム部材4333と、左カバー部材331から凸設されるロック軸4331d3に軸支されるロック部材4336と、を主に備える。なお、本実施形態における駆動部材挿通孔332d及び第2駆動装置337は、その配置および姿勢が第1実施形態とは若干異なるが、ロック部材4336を駆動させるという技術的思想は第1実施形態と同様であるので、同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 As shown in FIG. 43, the inner case member 4330 includes a left cover member 4331 and a right cover member 4332 that are assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 4340 is arranged inside, and an eccentric cam that is projected from the left cover member 4331. It mainly includes an eccentric cam member 4333 pivotally supported by the shaft 331d2 and a lock member 4336 pivotally supported by the lock shaft 4331d3 projecting from the left cover member 331. Although the arrangement and orientation of the drive member insertion hole 332d and the second drive device 337 in the present embodiment are slightly different from those in the first embodiment, the technical idea of driving the lock member 4336 is the same as that in the first embodiment. Since they are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

左カバー部材4331は、第1実施形態における左カバー部材331と異なり、上側側壁部331bから右方に凸設され円柱形状に形成される複数の棒状部材4331dを備える。 Unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment, the left cover member 4331 includes a plurality of rod-shaped members 4331d that are convex to the right from the upper side wall portion 331b and are formed in a cylindrical shape.

棒状部材4331dは、左カバー部材4331の最上部に配置されるレバー支持軸331d1と、そのレバー支持軸331d1の下方に配設される偏心カム軸331d2と、その偏心カム軸331d2の後方に配設されるロック軸4331d3と、を主に備える。 The rod-shaped member 4331d is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 4331, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 arranged below the lever support shaft 331d1, and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. The lock shaft 4331d3 is mainly provided.

ロック軸4331d3は、ロック部材4336が挿通される軸であって、左カバー部材4331及び右カバー部材4332に両持ちで支持される。 The lock shaft 4331d3 is a shaft through which the lock member 4336 is inserted, and is supported by the left cover member 4331 and the right cover member 4332 with both sides.

偏心カム部材4333は、第1実施形態における左カバー部材331と異なり、カム部4333cを備える。カム部4333cは、カム部333cと同様の構成とされるが、カム部333cに比較して、偏心カムの直径が大きく形成される。詳細には、カム部4333cの端部が本体部333aの軸心と合わせられ、カム部4333cの最大径部分がレバー部材4340に最接近した状態で、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置される大きさに、偏心カムの直径が形成される。 The eccentric cam member 4333 includes a cam portion 4333c, unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment. The cam portion 4333c has the same configuration as the cam portion 333c, but the diameter of the eccentric cam is formed larger than that of the cam portion 333c. Specifically, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position with the end of the cam portion 4333c aligned with the axis of the main body portion 333a and the maximum diameter portion of the cam portion 4333c closest to the lever member 4340. The diameter of the eccentric cam is formed to the size of the cam.

ロック部材4336は、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置付近に配置され、レバー部材4340のロック受け部材4350が配設される側が上方に配置された状態で、ロック受け部材4350に対して下側から当接し、レバー部材4340の揺動を規制する部材である。 The lock member 4336 is arranged from below with respect to the lock receiving member 4350 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged near the downward position and the side of the lever member 4340 where the lock receiving member 4350 is arranged is arranged upward. It is a member that abuts and regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

図44(a)は、ロック部材4336の正面図であり、図44(b)は、図44(a)のXXXXIVb方向視におけるロック部材4336の側面図である。 44 (a) is a front view of the lock member 4336, and FIG. 44 (b) is a side view of the lock member 4336 in the XXXIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a).

ロック部材4336は、長尺板状に形成される本体部材4336aと、断面扇型の板形状に形成されると共に第2駆動装置337の駆動力がギアの歯合により伝達される伝達部材4336bと、を主に備える。 The lock member 4336 includes a main body member 4336a formed in a long plate shape and a transmission member 4336b formed in a fan-shaped cross-section and the driving force of the second driving device 337 is transmitted by the meshing of gears. , Is mainly provided.

本体部材4336aは、長尺板状に形成される本体部4336a1と、その本体部4336a1の左右方向(図44(a)左右方向)に穿設されると共にロック軸4331d3(図43参照)が挿通される軸支孔4336a2と、本体部4336a1の伝達部材4336bと反対側の側面から軸支孔4336a2の上方において凸出される係止部4336a3と、本体部4336a1の伝達部材4336bと対向する側の側面で軸支孔4336a2の下方において背面側(図44(b)右側)から正面側に凹設される凹設部4336a4と、を主に備える。 The main body member 4336a is bored in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 44A) of the main body portion 4336a1 formed in the shape of a long plate and the main body portion 4336a1, and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. The shaft support hole 4336a2 to be formed, the locking portion 4336a3 protruding above the shaft support hole 4336a2 from the side surface of the main body portion 4336a1 opposite to the transmission member 4336b, and the side surface of the main body portion 4336a1 facing the transmission member 4336b. A recessed portion 4336a4, which is recessed from the back surface side (right side in FIG. 44B) to the front surface side below the shaft support hole 4336a2, is mainly provided.

係止部4336a3は、ロック軸4331d3に固定され一方の腕部が連結側壁部331cに係止されるねじりバネSP41の他方の腕部が係止される部分である(図45参照)。これにより、本体部材4336aは常時、図44(b)反時計回りに付勢される。 The locking portion 4336a3 is a portion in which the other arm portion of the torsion spring SP41 fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and one arm portion being locked to the connecting side wall portion 331c is locked (see FIG. 45). As a result, the main body member 4336a is constantly urged counterclockwise in FIG. 44 (b).

凹設部4336a4は、伝達部材4336bの凸設部4336b4と当接される部分である。凹設部4336aの背面側からの深さが伝達部材4336bの凸設部4336b4の厚み以上とされることにより、本体部材4336aをロック待機状態(図45(a)参照)にする際の本体部材4336aの姿勢を本体部材4336aと連結側壁部331cとの関係(本体部材4336aが連結側壁部331cに当接された状態で姿勢保持すること)から規定することができる。 The recessed portion 4336a4 is a portion of the transmission member 4336b that comes into contact with the convex portion 4336b4. When the depth of the recessed portion 4336a from the back surface side is equal to or greater than the thickness of the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b, the main body member 4336a is put into the lock standby state (see FIG. 45A). The posture of the 4336a can be defined from the relationship between the main body member 4336a and the connecting side wall portion 331c (holding the posture in a state where the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c).

伝達部材4336bは、断面扇型に形成され曲面部に駆動ギア337bに歯合されるギア部が形成される本体部4336b1と、その本体部4336b1の左右方向(図44(a)左右方向)に穿設されると共にロック軸4331d3(図43参照)が挿通される軸支孔4336b2と、図示しないセンサ部材の隙間を通り伝達部材4336bの姿勢を検出可能とする板状の検出片4336b3と、本体部4336b1の本体部材4336aと対向する側の側面から凸設されると共に本体部4336b1の揺動方向で凹設部4336a4と当接される凸設部4336b4と、を主に備える。 The transmission member 4336b has a main body portion 4336b1 formed in a fan shape in cross section and a gear portion meshed with the drive gear 337b is formed on the curved surface portion, and the main body portion 4336b1 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 44A). A shaft support hole 4336b2 through which the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted, a plate-shaped detection piece 4336b3 that can detect the posture of the transmission member 4336b through a gap of a sensor member (not shown), and a main body. Mainly includes a convex portion 4336b4 which is projected from the side surface of the portion 4336b1 on the side facing the main body member 4336a and which is brought into contact with the concave portion 4336a4 in the swing direction of the main body portion 4336b1.

凸設部4336b4は、本体部4336b1の背面側端部に形成される。これにより、伝達部材4336bを連結側壁部331cに近接させる方向に揺動させることで、ねじりバネSP41の付勢力により揺動する本体部材4336aの背面側側面を連結側壁部331cと当接させることができる。 The convex portion 4336b4 is formed at the back end side end portion of the main body portion 4336b1. As a result, by swinging the transmission member 4336b in a direction close to the connecting side wall portion 331c, the back surface side surface of the main body member 4336a that swings due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 can be brought into contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c. it can.

図45(a)及び図45(b)は、ロック部材4336の側面図である。なお、図45(a)及び図45(b)では、駆動ギア337b及び連結側壁部331cが組立状態の配置で図示される。 45 (a) and 45 (b) are side views of the lock member 4336. In addition, in FIG. 45A and FIG. 45B, the drive gear 337b and the connecting side wall portion 331c are shown in an assembled arrangement.

ロック部材4336は、図45(a)に示すロック待機状態と、図45(b)に示すロック強制解除状態とを構成可能とされる。なお、ロック待機状態とは、伝達部材4336bが連結側壁部331cに近接配置され本体部材4336aが連結側壁部331cに当接された状態を意味する。 The lock member 4336 can be configured into a lock standby state shown in FIG. 45 (a) and a lock forced release state shown in FIG. 45 (b). The lock standby state means a state in which the transmission member 4336b is arranged close to the connecting side wall portion 331c and the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c.

また、ロック強制解除状態とは、ロック待機状態から駆動ギア337bが回転し伝達部材4336bが連結側壁部331cから離反する方向に揺動されることで本体部材4336aのレバー部材4340と対向する側の端部がレバー部材4340と当接しない位置に配置された状態を意味する。ロック強制解除状態では、伝達部材4336bの凸設部4336b4が凹設部4336a4に当接し本体部材4336aの姿勢を保持する。 Further, in the lock forced release state, the drive gear 337b rotates from the lock standby state and the transmission member 4336b is swung in the direction away from the connecting side wall portion 331c, so that the main body member 4336a faces the lever member 4340. It means a state in which the end portion is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the lever member 4340. In the locked forced release state, the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b comes into contact with the concave portion 4336a4 and holds the posture of the main body member 4336a.

ロック待機状態において、レバー部材4340が本体部材4336aの上方から当接すれば、ロック部材4336によりレバー部材4340の揺動を規制することができる(図47(a)参照)。レバー部材4340の揺動が規制された状態からロック強制解除状態にすれば、レバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解けて、レバー部材4340が揺動可能とされる(図48参照)。 If the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the main body member 4336a from above in the lock standby state, the lock member 4336 can regulate the swing of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 47 (a)). If the lock is forcibly released from the state in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted, the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 is released and the lever member 4340 can swing (see FIG. 48).

ここで、再度ロック待機状態とすることで(駆動ギア337bを回転させて、伝達部材4336bを図6−1時計回りに回すことで)、後述するように、レバー部材4340のロック部材4336と当接する側の端部がロック部材4336を上方に乗り越えることに伴って自動的にレバー部材4340の揺動を規制することができる。一方、ロック強制解除状態を維持しておくことで、レバー部材4340の揺動が規制されることを防止することができる。 Here, by putting the lock standby state again (by rotating the drive gear 337b and turning the transmission member 4336b clockwise in FIG. 6-1), as will be described later, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the lock member 4336. The swing of the lever member 4340 can be automatically regulated as the end portion on the contacting side gets over the lock member 4336 upward. On the other hand, by maintaining the lock forced release state, it is possible to prevent the swing of the lever member 4340 from being restricted.

図46は、レバー部材4340及び首振り操作部材310の正面分解斜視図である。レバー部材4340は、鉄などの金属材料から形成され断面コ字状の長尺棒状に形成される本体部材4341と、本体部材4341の軸孔341bと同軸で軸支されるロック受け部材4350と、を主に備えて構成される。 FIG. 46 is a front exploded perspective view of the lever member 4340 and the swing operation member 310. The lever member 4340 includes a main body member 4341 formed of a metal material such as iron and formed into a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, and a lock receiving member 4350 coaxially supported with a shaft hole 341b of the main body member 4341. It is mainly composed of.

本体部材4341は、断面コ字状の長尺棒状に形成され後端部左側(図46左側)に切り欠きを有する前方本体部4341aと、その前方本体部4341a1の切り欠きを補填する態様で配設される断面L字状の後方本体部4341a2と、その後方本体部4341a2の上面側に締結固定され電流が導通している時のみ後方本体部4341a2と前方本体部4341a1とを吸着する電磁石部材M41と、前方本体部4341a1の略中央部において左右方向に穿設される一対の軸孔341bと、を主に備える。 The main body member 4341 is arranged in a manner of compensating for the front main body portion 4341a which is formed in a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section and has a notch on the left side of the rear end portion (left side in FIG. 46) and the notch of the front main body portion 4341a1. An electromagnet member M41 that attracts the rear main body 4341a2 and the front main body 4341a1 only when it is fastened and fixed to the upper surface side of the rear main body 4341a2 having an L-shaped cross section and the current is conducting. A pair of shaft holes 341b formed in the left-right direction at a substantially central portion of the front main body portion 4341a1 are mainly provided.

ロック受け部材4350は、前後に長尺の略直方体状に形成されると共にレバー部材4340の後方本体部4341a2の下面に締結固定される本体部4351と、その本体部4351の前側端部において左右方向に穿設され軸孔341bと同軸でレバー支持軸331d1(図43参照)に軸支される軸孔4352と、を主に備える。そのため、後方本体部4341a2が前方本体部4341a1とは独立してレバー支持軸331d1を中心に揺動可能とされるが、それについては後述する。 The lock receiving member 4350 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape in the front-rear direction, and is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the rear main body portion 4341a2 of the lever member 4340, and the main body portion 4351 and the front end portion of the main body portion 4351 in the left-right direction. 4352 is mainly provided with a shaft hole 4352 which is formed in the shaft hole 341b and is coaxially supported by the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the rear main body portion 4341a2 can swing around the lever support shaft 331d1 independently of the front main body portion 4341a1, which will be described later.

図47(a)及び図47(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図47(a)及び図47(b)では、レバー部材4340がロック部材4336に揺動を規制された状態が図示され、図47(b)では図47(a)に示す状態から首振り操作部材310が軸支棒363(図46参照)を軸に後方に首振り操作された状態が図示されると共に、首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。本実施形態では、図47(a)の状態を初期位置とする。また、図17(a)では操作デバイス300が図示されるが、外観は同じなので、操作デバイス4300とみなして説明を行う。以下、本実施形態において同様である。 47 (a) and 47 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b) show a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336, and FIG. 47 (b) shows the neck from the state shown in FIG. 47 (a). The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung backward about the shaft support rod 363 (see FIG. 46) is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 47 (a) is set as the initial position. Further, although the operation device 300 is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same, the operation device 300 will be regarded as the operation device 4300 for description. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

図47(b)に示すように、第1実施形態と同様に、レバー部材4340の揺動が規制された状態で首振り操作部材310を首振り操作し、裏ボタン部材312dを押し込み操作することができる。 As shown in FIG. 47 (b), similarly to the first embodiment, the swing operation member 310 is swung and the back button member 312d is pushed in while the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted. Can be done.

本実施形態では、ロック部材4336がレバー支持軸331d1の後方においてレバー部材4340に下側から当接されるので、首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる誤操作に対して、ロック部材4336の強度で抵抗することができる。 In the present embodiment, since the lock member 4336 comes into contact with the lever member 4340 from below behind the lever support shaft 331d1, the strength of the lock member 4336 resists an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310. Can be done.

レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材4336とロック軸4331d3よりも後方で当接されることで、ロック部材4336がロック強制解除状態(図45(b)参照)側へ揺動することを抑制することができる。これにより、ロック部材4336が前倒れする方向(図47(a)左方向)にレバー部材4340からロック部材4336に荷重を与えることができ、ロック部材4336の姿勢を保持することができる。 The rear end of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the lock member 4336 behind the lock shaft 4331d3 to prevent the lock member 4336 from swinging toward the lock forced release state (see FIG. 45B). can do. As a result, a load can be applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 4336 in the direction in which the lock member 4336 tilts forward (leftward in FIG. 47 (a)), and the posture of the lock member 4336 can be maintained.

また、本実施形態ではレバー部材4340の揺動をロック部材4336で規制する状態において、偏心カム部材4333をレバー部材4340から離間させておける。そのため、レバー部材4340の揺動をロック部材4336で規制している間に偏心カム部材4333が誤作動等により回転した場合に、偏心カム部材4333やレバー部材4340が破損することを防止することができる。 Further, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 4333 can be separated from the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336. Therefore, if the eccentric cam member 4333 rotates due to a malfunction or the like while the swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated by the lock member 4336, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 from being damaged. it can.

図48は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図48では、ロック部材4336がロック強制解除状態とされ、レバー部材4340が揺動し始めた状態が図示される。 FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 48 shows a state in which the lock member 4336 is in the locked forced release state and the lever member 4340 starts to swing.

図48に示すように、ロック部材4336にレバー部材4340が揺動を規制された状態(図47(a)参照)からロック部材4336がロック強制解除状態とされると、ねじりバネSP1の付勢力によりレバー部材4340が起き上がる方向(図48時計回り)に揺動する。 As shown in FIG. 48, when the lock member 4336 is in the locked forced release state from the state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47 (a)), the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 The lever member 4340 swings in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48).

これにより、遊技者に対して操作デバイス4300を操作することを促すことができるが、レバー部材4340の揺動速度がねじりバネSP1の付勢力により定まり、毎回変わらないので、演出自由度が低減されるという問題点があった。 As a result, the player can be urged to operate the operation device 4300, but the swing speed of the lever member 4340 is determined by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 and does not change each time, so that the degree of freedom of production is reduced. There was a problem of

なお、レバー部材4340と当接する際の偏心カム部材4333の姿勢を様々に変化させ、偏心カム部材4333の回転とレバー部材4340の揺動とを連動させることで動作速度を多様にすることもできるが、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材4333に誤って高速で衝突した場合に偏心カム部材4333が破損する恐れがあるという問題点があった。そのため、ロック部材4336をロック強制解除状態へ向けて揺動させるタイミングは、偏心カム部材4333が退避位相(図49(a)参照)とされていることを第3センサ部材325a3(図9参照)で検出してからとすることが好ましい。 The operation speed can be diversified by variously changing the posture of the eccentric cam member 4333 when it comes into contact with the lever member 4340 and interlocking the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the swing of the lever member 4340. However, there is a problem that the eccentric cam member 4333 may be damaged when the lever member 4340 accidentally collides with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed. Therefore, the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9) indicates that the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase (see FIG. 49 (a)) at the timing of swinging the lock member 4336 toward the locked forced release state. It is preferable to detect with.

ここで、首振り操作部材310に内包される振動装置366の振動の反作用は、直線L1に沿ってレバー部材4340を前倒れさせる方向に作用する。これにより、例えば、レバー部材4340が起き上がる方向(図48時計回り)に揺動している最中に振動装置366を振動させることで、レバー部材4340を前倒れする方向に押し戻すことができ、レバー部材4340の揺動速度や揺動の態様を変化させることができる(遅くすることができる)。従って、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材4333に誤って高速で衝突することを防ぐことができる。 Here, the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 366 included in the swing operation member 310 acts in the direction of tilting the lever member 4340 forward along the straight line L1. As a result, for example, by vibrating the vibrating device 366 while the lever member 4340 is swinging in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48), the lever member 4340 can be pushed back in the forward tilting direction. The swing speed and swing mode of the member 4340 can be changed (can be slowed down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from accidentally colliding with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed.

図49(a)及び図49(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図49(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図49(b)では、図49(a)の状態から首振り操作部材310が後方(図49(a)右方向)へ向けて押し込み操作された状態が図示されると共に首振り操作部材310の断面視が省略される。 49 (a) and 49 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 49 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 49 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is rearward (FIG. 49) from the state of FIG. 49 (a). The state in which the pushing operation is performed toward 49 (a) to the right) is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swinging operation member 310 is omitted.

図49(a)及び図49(b)では、ロック部材4336がロック強制解除状態で維持される。そのため、例えば、図49(a)の状態から遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持し上下に移動させる操作をおこなったとしても、ロック部材4336によってレバー部材4340の揺動が規制されないので、遊技者が手を離せばねじりバネSP1の付勢力により首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に復帰する。 In FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b), the lock member 4336 is maintained in the locked forced release state. Therefore, for example, even if the player performs an operation of grasping the swing operation member 310 and moving it up and down from the state of FIG. 49A, the lock member 4336 does not regulate the swing of the lever member 4340. When the person releases the hand, the swinging operation member 310 returns to the upward position by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1.

図50(a)、図50(b)、図51(a)及び図51(b)は図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図50(a)、図50(b)、図51(a)及び図51(b)では、偏心カム部材4333の回転によりレバー部材4340が揺動する様子が時系列に沿って図示される。 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a) and 51 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 50A, FIG. 50B, FIG. 51A and FIG. 51B, a state in which the lever member 4340 swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 is shown in chronological order. To.

図50(a)では、偏心カム部材4333が退避位相とされ、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材4333に当接されると共にロック部材4336がロック待機状態とされた状態が図示され、図50(b)では、図50(a)の状態から偏心カム部材4333が約90度だけ図50(a)反時計回りに回転した状態が図示される。 FIG. 50 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the eccentric cam member 4333, and the lock member 4336 is in the lock standby state. ) Shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 50 (a) by about 90 degrees from the state of FIG. 50 (a).

また、図51(a)では、図50(b)の状態から偏心カム部材4333が更に同一方向に回転し、レバー部材4340がロック部材4336の上端に当接され揺動を規制された状態が図示され、図51(b)では、図51(a)の状態から偏心カム部材4333が更に同一方向に回転し、退避位相(図50(a)参照)とされた状態が図示される。 Further, in FIG. 51 (a), the eccentric cam member 4333 further rotates in the same direction from the state of FIG. 50 (b), the lever member 4340 is in contact with the upper end of the lock member 4336, and the swing is restricted. Illustrated, FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is further rotated in the same direction from the state of FIG. 51 (a) to be in the retracted phase (see FIG. 50 (a)).

図50(a)、図50(b)、図51(a)及び図51(b)に示すように、操作デバイス4300は、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置されてから遊技者が押し下げ動作を行わない場合でも、偏心カム部材4333によりレバー部材4340を揺動させることで、首振り操作部材を下向き位置(初期位置)まで移動させることができる。 As shown in FIGS. 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a), and 51 (b), the operation device 4300 is pushed down by the player after the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position. Even when the operation is not performed, the swinging operation member can be moved to the downward position (initial position) by swinging the lever member 4340 by the eccentric cam member 4333.

ロック部材4336は、ロック待機状態とされる。この場合、ロック部材4336の左側側面をレバー部材4340が押すことでロック部材4336が後倒れする方向に回転する(図50(b)参照)。一方で、ロック部材4336は、ねじりバネSP41(図45参照)により常に前倒れする方向に付勢されるので、レバー部材4340がロック部材4336の上方まで移動すると、付勢力によりレバー部材4340の下側に入り込む(図51(a)参照)。このように、レバー部材4340を揺動させる過程において、ロック部材4336が自動でレバー部材4340の揺動を規制する。 The lock member 4336 is put into a lock standby state. In this case, when the lever member 4340 pushes the left side surface of the lock member 4336, the lock member 4336 rotates in the direction of tilting backward (see FIG. 50 (b)). On the other hand, since the lock member 4336 is always urged by the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) in the direction of tilting forward, when the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 4336, the urging force under the lever member 4340. Enter the side (see FIG. 51 (a)). In this way, in the process of swinging the lever member 4340, the lock member 4336 automatically regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

そのため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を押し下げるタイミングが不明であっても、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置されることにより、ロック部材4336でレバー部材4340の揺動を規制することを確実に行うことができる。 Therefore, even if the timing at which the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 is unknown, the lock member 4336 regulates the swing of the lever member 4340 by arranging the swing operation member 310 in the downward position. You can do it with certainty.

レバー部材4340の揺動が規制される配置(図51(a)参照)では、偏心カム部材4333の最大径部分がレバー部材4340と当接される。そのため、レバー部材4340の揺動をロック部材4333により規制した状態(図51(a)参照)で、偏心カム部材4333を逆回転させて戻すのではなく、同一方向に回転させ続けることで偏心カム部材4333を退避位相に復帰させることができる。従って、偏心カム部材4333を逆回転させるタイミングを検出する検出装置を不要とできると共に、偏心カム部材4333を駆動させる第1駆動装置335の制御を容易に行うことができる。 In an arrangement in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted (see FIG. 51 (a)), the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 comes into contact with the lever member 4340. Therefore, in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4333 (see FIG. 51 (a)), the eccentric cam member 4333 is not rotated in the reverse direction and returned, but is continuously rotated in the same direction to obtain the eccentric cam. The member 4333 can be returned to the retracted phase. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a detection device that detects the timing at which the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated in the reverse direction, and it is possible to easily control the first drive device 335 that drives the eccentric cam member 4333.

図52は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス4300の断面図である。なお、図50(a)の状態におけるレバー部材4340、首振り操作部材310及び偏心カム部材4333の外形が想像線で図示される。 FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). The outer shapes of the lever member 4340, the swing operation member 310, and the eccentric cam member 4333 in the state of FIG. 50A are shown by imaginary lines.

図52に示すように、偏心カム部材4333を偏心カム軸331d2中心に角度θ41で往復回転することで、レバー部材4340をレバー支持軸331d1中心に角度θ42で往復揺動させることができる。これにより、遊技者に操作デバイス4300を注目させる煽り動作を行うことができる。 As shown in FIG. 52, by reciprocating the eccentric cam member 4333 around the center of the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 at an angle θ41, the lever member 4340 can be reciprocally swung around the center of the lever support shaft 331d1 at an angle θ42. As a result, it is possible to perform a fanning operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 4300.

この際、偏心カム部材4333のカム部4333cをレバー支持軸331d1の反対側に配置した状態で往復回転させることで、偏心カム部材4333とレバー部材4340との当接位置からレバー支持軸331d1までの距離を長く保つことができる。これにより、レバー部材4340を揺動させるために必要な駆動力を抑制できる(駆動力が小さくても良い)と共に、レバー部材4340から偏心カム部材4333にかけられる荷重を抑制することができる(過荷重にも耐えられる)。 At this time, by reciprocating the cam portion 4333c of the eccentric cam member 4333 in a state of being arranged on the opposite side of the lever support shaft 331d1, from the contact position between the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 to the lever support shaft 331d1. You can keep the distance long. As a result, the driving force required to swing the lever member 4340 can be suppressed (the driving force may be small), and the load applied from the lever member 4340 to the eccentric cam member 4333 can be suppressed (overload). Can withstand).

また、ロック部材4336がロック強制解除状態とされることで、レバー部材4340を往復揺動させる際に、ロック部材4336からレバー部材4340が負荷を与えられることを防止でき、偏心カム部材4333を回転させるために第1駆動装置335(図43参照)が発生させる駆動力を抑制することができる。 Further, by setting the lock member 4336 to the lock forced release state, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from being applied a load from the lock member 4336 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung, and the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated. It is possible to suppress the driving force generated by the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 43).

図53(a)は、レバー部材4340の本体部材4341及びロック受け部材4350の上面図であり、図53(b)及び図53(c)は、図53(a)のLIIIb方向視におけるレバー部材4340の本体部材4341及びロック受け部材4350の側面図である。なお、図53(c)は、図53(a)の状態から、前方本体部4341a1が電磁石部材M41から離反する方向に揺動した状態が図示される。 FIG. 53 (a) is a top view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of the lever member 4340, and FIGS. 53 (b) and 53 (c) are lever members in the LIIIb direction of FIG. 53 (a). It is a side view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of 4340. Note that FIG. 53 (c) shows a state in which the front main body portion 4341a1 swings in a direction away from the electromagnet member M41 from the state of FIG. 53 (a).

図53(a)に示すように、前方本体部4341a1及び後方本体部4341a2が電磁石部材M41により吸着される。そのため、電磁石部材M41の吸着力以上の荷重が本体部材4341に与えられない限り、前方本体部4341a1及び後方本体部4341a2が一体で揺動される。 As shown in FIG. 53A, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are attracted by the electromagnet member M41. Therefore, unless a load equal to or greater than the attractive force of the electromagnet member M41 is applied to the main body member 4341, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are integrally swung.

一方、電磁石部材M41は、電流の導通が停止すれば吸着力を失う。そのため、例えば、電源が切られた状態では、前方本体部4341a1と後方本体部4341a2との相対的な位置(角度)が変化する(図53(c)参照)。 On the other hand, the electromagnet member M41 loses its attractive force when the conduction of the current is stopped. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off, the relative position (angle) between the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 changes (see FIG. 53 (c)).

図54(a)及び図54(b)は、図6のVIb―VIb線で断面視したパチンコ機4010及び操作デバイス4300の部分断面図である。なお、図6では、第1実施形態におけるパチンコ機10及び操作デバイス300が図示されているが、第4実施形態のパチンコ機4010及び操作デバイス4300と外観は同じなので、第4実施形態のパチンコ機4010及び操作デバイス4300が図示されていると見なして説明を行う。 54 (a) and 54 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 4010 and the operating device 4300 viewed in cross section along the VIb-VIb line of FIG. Although the pachinko machine 10 and the operation device 300 in the first embodiment are shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment has the same appearance as the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment. The description will be given assuming that the 4010 and the operation device 4300 are illustrated.

ここで、操作デバイス4300は、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置されるか、下向き位置に配置されるかで、首振り操作部材310の正面側への張出長さが変化する。即ち、図54(b)に図示される状態に比較して、図54(a)に図示される状態の方が、首振り操作部材310が距離X41だけ正面側に張り出される。 Here, in the operation device 4300, the extension length of the swing operation member 310 to the front side changes depending on whether the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), the swing operation member 310 projects to the front side by a distance X41 as compared with the state shown in FIG. 54 (b).

この場合、パチンコ機4010の前後方向の幅寸法が図54(b)に示す状態の方が小さくなるので、例えば、パチンコ機4010を梱包する箱を選定する際に、図54(b)に示す状態を基準として選定した方が、箱を小さくすることができる。一方で、レバー部材4340が直線棒状で固定される場合にロック部材4336に揺動を規制された状態で電源が切られると、首振り操作部材310に外部から力を加えても首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に配置することができず、パチンコ機4010を梱包用の箱に入れることができないという問題点があった。 In this case, the width dimension of the pachinko machine 4010 in the front-rear direction is smaller in the state shown in FIG. 54 (b). Therefore, for example, when selecting a box for packing the pachinko machine 4010, it is shown in FIG. 54 (b). The box can be made smaller by selecting it based on the condition. On the other hand, when the lever member 4340 is fixed in the shape of a straight bar and the power is turned off in a state where the lock member 4336 regulates the swing, the swing operation member 310 even if an external force is applied to the swing operation member 310. There is a problem that the 310 cannot be arranged in the upward position and the pachinko machine 4010 cannot be put in the packing box.

また、工場の検査ライン等で、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態のパチンコ機4010の幅でラインの幅を決めておくと、首振り操作部材310が誤って下向き位置に配置された状態でラインを流れることにより、検査機等に首振り操作部材310が衝突する恐れがあるという問題点があった。 Further, if the width of the line is determined by the width of the pachinko machine 4010 in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position in the inspection line of the factory or the like, the swing operation member 310 is erroneously arranged in the downward position. There is a problem that the swinging operation member 310 may collide with the inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line in this state.

一方、本実施形態では、レバー部材4340の本体部材4341を一体化させている電磁石部材M41の吸着力が、電源を切ることにより失われる。そのため、電源を切ることによって、ロック受け部材4350がロック部材4336に当接しているか否かに関わらず、ねじりバネSP1の付勢力によりレバー部材4340の前方本体部4341a1を起き上がる方向に揺動させ、首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に配置することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the attractive force of the electromagnet member M41 that integrates the main body member 4341 of the lever member 4340 is lost when the power is turned off. Therefore, by turning off the power, the front main body portion 4341a1 of the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 regardless of whether the lock receiving member 4350 is in contact with the lock member 4336. The swing operation member 310 can be arranged in an upward position.

これにより、梱包時に首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に確実に配置させることができる。また、パチンコ機4010を検査ラインに流す際に電源を切ることで、検査機等に首振り操作部材310が衝突することを防止することができる。 As a result, the swing operation member 310 can be reliably arranged in the upward position at the time of packing. Further, by turning off the power when the pachinko machine 4010 is sent to the inspection line, it is possible to prevent the swinging operation member 310 from colliding with the inspection machine or the like.

次いで、図55から図61を参照して、第5実施形態における操作デバイス5300について説明する。第4実施形態では偏心カム部材4333及びロック部材4336が独立で駆動される場合を説明したが、第5実施形態における操作デバイス5300は、偏心カム部材5333及びロック部材5336が単一の駆動モータ335aで同期駆動される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61. In the fourth embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock member 4336 are driven independently has been described, but in the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are a single drive motor 335a. It is driven synchronously with. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図55は、第5実施形態における内側ケース部材5330の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図55では、右カバー部材の図示が省略される。 FIG. 55 is a front exploded perspective view of the inner case member 5330 according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 55, the illustration of the right cover member is omitted.

図55に示すように、内側ケース部材5330は、偏心カム軸331d2に軸支される偏心カム部材5333と、偏心カム軸331d2の後方に駆動ギア335bを挟んで配置される円柱形状のロック解除軸5331d5と、そのロック解除軸5331d5に軸支されるロック解除カム部材5339と、ロック軸4331d3に軸支されるロック部材5336と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 55, the inner case member 5330 is a cylindrical unlocking shaft arranged with the eccentric cam member 5333 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 and the drive gear 335b behind the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. It mainly includes a 5331d5, an unlocking cam member 5339 pivotally supported by the unlocking shaft 5331d5, and a locking member 5336 pivotally supported by the lock shaft 4331d3.

図56(a)は、偏心カム部材5333の正面図であり、図56(b)は、図56(a)のLVIb方向視における偏心カム部材5333の底面図であり、図56(c)は、図56(a)のLVIc方向視における偏心カム部材5333の側面図である。 56 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 5333, FIG. 56 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 5333 in the LVIb direction view of FIG. 56 (a), and FIG. 56 (c) is a bottom view. , FIG. 56A is a side view of the eccentric cam member 5333 in the LVIc direction view.

図56に示すように、偏心カム部材5333は、正面視略D字状のカム部5333cと、部分的に切り欠き5333f1が配設される傘部5333fと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 56, the eccentric cam member 5333 mainly includes a cam portion 5333c having a substantially D-shape in front view and an umbrella portion 5333f in which a notch 5333f1 is partially arranged.

カム部5333cは、正面視略D字状に形成され、直線形状で偏心カム部材5333の最大径端部まで延設されると共に剛性の高い剛体部5333c1と、その剛体部5333c1に比較して剛性が低くレバー部材4340からの衝撃を緩和する緩衝部5333c2と、を主に備える。なお、本実施形態では、剛体部5333c1の正面視における厚さが緩衝部5333c2の正面視における厚さの略3倍に設定される。 The cam portion 5333c is formed in a substantially D-shape in front view, has a linear shape and extends to the maximum diameter end of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has a rigid body portion 5333c1 having high rigidity as compared with the rigid body portion 5333c1. It is mainly provided with a cushioning portion 5333c2 which is low in diameter and cushions the impact from the lever member 4340. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the rigid body portion 5333c1 in the front view is set to be substantially three times the thickness of the buffer portion 5333c2 in the front view.

傘部5333fの切り欠き5333f1は、駆動ギア355bに対向配置された場合に駆動ギア355bを軸方向に抜き取り可能な大きさに形成される切り欠きであって、駆動ギア355b(図55参照)に対する偏心カム部材5333の初期位相を合わせるための目印である。ここで、偏心カム部材5333とロック部材5336とを単一の駆動モータ335a(図55参照)で同期動作させる場合、レバー部材4340の姿勢を検出してロック部材5336又は偏心カム部材5333の片方のみを揺動させることができないので、予め偏心カム部材5333とロック部材5336との位相を合わせておく必要があるという問題点があった。 The notch 5333f1 of the umbrella portion 5333f is a notch formed so as to be able to pull out the drive gear 355b in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is arranged to face the drive gear 355b, and is a notch formed with respect to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. 55). It is a mark for matching the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333. Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are synchronously operated by a single drive motor 335a (see FIG. 55), the posture of the lever member 4340 is detected and only one of the lock member 5336 or the eccentric cam member 5333 is operated. Since it is not possible to swing the eccentric cam member 5333, there is a problem that it is necessary to match the phases of the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 in advance.

本実施形態では、切り欠き5333f1を傘部5333fに配設しているので、切り欠き5333f1を目印に、偏心カム部材5333の初期位相を容易に定めることができる。 In the present embodiment, since the notch 5333f1 is arranged in the umbrella portion 5333f, the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333 can be easily determined by using the notch 5333f1 as a mark.

なお、傘部5333fを本体部333aの反対側(図56(b)下方)に配設すると、左カバー部材4331(図55参照)に第1駆動装置335(図55参照)が締結固定された状態では、偏心カム部材5333を偏心カム軸331d2に挿通する際に傘部5333fが駆動ギア335bに当たる場合には偏心カム部材5333を挿通できない。 When the umbrella portion 5333f is arranged on the opposite side of the main body portion 333a (below FIG. 56B), the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, if the umbrella portion 5333f hits the drive gear 335b, the eccentric cam member 5333 cannot be inserted.

即ち、切り欠き5333f1を駆動ギア335bに対向させた姿勢でのみ偏心カム部材5333を偏心カム軸331d2に挿通することが可能となるので、偏心カム部材5333を正しい姿勢で組み立てることができる。 That is, since the eccentric cam member 5333 can be inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 only in the posture in which the notch 5333f1 faces the drive gear 335b, the eccentric cam member 5333 can be assembled in the correct posture.

図57(a)は、ロック解除カム部材5339の正面図であり、図57(b)は、図57(a)のLVIIb方向視におけるロック解除カム部材5339の底面図であり、図57(c)は、図57(a)のLVIIc方向視におけるロック解除カム部材5339の側面図である。 57 (a) is a front view of the unlock cam member 5339, FIG. 57 (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member 5339 in the LVIIb direction view of FIG. 57 (a), and FIG. 57 (c). ) Is a side view of the unlocked cam member 5339 in the LVIIc direction view of FIG. 57 (a).

図57に示すように、ロック解除カム部材5339は、偏心カム部材5333の本体部333aと同一の大きさに形成されると共に外周面に駆動ギア335b(図59参照)と歯合されるギア歯が形成される本体部5339aと、本体部5339aの中心に穿設されると共にロック解除軸5331d5が挿通される軸孔5339bと、本体部5339aの正面側の側面に沿って径方向外側へ向けて延設されると共にロック部材5336の係止部4336a3に当接可能な長さで形成される解除部5339cと、本体部5339aの正面側においてギア部分を覆う円板形状の傘部5339dと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 57, the unlock cam member 5339 is formed to have the same size as the main body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 59) on the outer peripheral surface. 5339a, a shaft hole 5339b formed in the center of the main body 5339a, and a shaft hole 5339b through which the unlocking shaft 5331d5 is inserted, and a side surface of the main body 5339a on the front side toward the outside in the radial direction. A release portion 5339c that is extended and formed with a length that allows contact with the locking portion 4336a3 of the lock member 5336, and a disk-shaped umbrella portion 5339d that covers the gear portion on the front side of the main body portion 5339a. Mainly prepare.

傘部5339dは、部分的に外周面から軸側へ向けて切りかかれる切り欠き5339d1を備える。傘部5339dの切り欠き5339d1は、駆動ギア355bに対向配置された場合に駆動ギア355bを軸方向に抜き取り可能な大きさに形成される切り欠きであって、駆動ギア355b(図55参照)に対するロック解除カム部材5339の初期位相を合わせるための目印である。 The umbrella portion 5339d includes a notch 5339d1 that is partially cut from the outer peripheral surface toward the shaft side. The notch 5339d1 of the umbrella portion 5339d is a notch formed so as to be able to pull out the drive gear 355b in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is arranged to face the drive gear 355b, and is a notch with respect to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. It is a mark for matching the initial phase of the unlock cam member 5339.

なお、傘部5339dを本体部5339aの反対側(図57(b)下方)に配設すると、左カバー部材4331(図55参照)に第1駆動装置335(図55参照)が締結固定された状態では、ロック解除カム部材5339をロック解除軸5331d5に挿通する際に傘部5339dが駆動ギア335bに当たる場合にはロック解除カム部材5339を挿通できない。 When the umbrella portion 5339d is arranged on the opposite side of the main body portion 5339a (below FIG. 57B), the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, when the unlocking cam member 5339 is inserted into the unlocking shaft 5331d5, if the umbrella portion 5339d hits the drive gear 335b, the unlocking cam member 5339 cannot be inserted.

即ち、切り欠き5339d1を駆動ギア335bに対向させた姿勢でのみロック解除カム部材5339をロック解除軸5331d5に挿通することが可能となるので、ロック解除カム部材5339を正しい姿勢で組み立てることができる。 That is, since the unlock cam member 5339 can be inserted into the unlock shaft 5331d5 only in the posture in which the notch 5339d1 faces the drive gear 335b, the lock release cam member 5339 can be assembled in the correct posture.

図58(a)は、ロック部材5336の正面図であり、図58(b)は、図58(a)のLVIII方向視におけるロック部材5336の側面図である。図58(a)及び図58(b)に示すように、ロック部材5336は、長尺板状に形成される部材で構成され、断面扇型の板形状に形成される伝達部材4336b(図44参照)は不要とされる。 58 (a) is a front view of the lock member 5336, and FIG. 58 (b) is a side view of the lock member 5336 in the LVIII direction view of FIG. 58 (a). As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), the lock member 5336 is composed of a member formed in the shape of a long plate, and the transmission member 4336b formed in the shape of a fan-shaped cross section (FIG. 44). See) is not required.

ロック部材5336は、長尺板状に形成される本体部材5336aと、その本体部材5336aの左右方向(図58(a)左右方向)に穿設されると共にロック軸4331d3(図43参照)が挿通される軸支孔5336bと、本体部材5336aのロック解除カム部材5339と対向する側(図58(a)左側)の側面から軸支孔5336bの上方において凸出される係止部5336cと、を主に備える。 The lock member 5336 is bored in the main body member 5336a formed in the shape of a long plate and in the left-right direction (FIG. 58 (a) left-right direction) of the main body member 5336a, and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. Mainly, the shaft support hole 5336b to be formed and the locking portion 5336c protruding above the shaft support hole 5336b from the side surface of the main body member 5336a facing the unlock cam member 5339 (left side in FIG. 58 (a)). Prepare for.

係止部5336cは、ロック軸4331d3に固定され一方の腕部が連結側壁部331cに係止されるねじりバネSP41の他方の腕部が係止されると共にロック解除カム部材5339(図57参照)の解除部5339cから押される部分である。 The locking portion 5336c is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and one arm is locked to the connecting side wall 331c. The other arm of the torsion spring SP41 is locked and the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 57). It is a part pushed from the release part 5339c of.

本体部材5336aは、ロック部材5336がロック待機状態とされた場合にレバー部材4340と当接する側の側面に、レバー部材4340の後端部の軌跡に沿って湾曲される湾曲壁部5336a1と、その湾曲壁部5336a1の上端部からレバー部材4340に近接する側に軸支孔5336bを中心とした円に沿って凸設される凸設部5336a2と、を主に備える。 The main body member 5336a has a curved wall portion 5336a1 that is curved along the trajectory of the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 on the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the lever member 4340 when the lock member 5336 is in the lock standby state. Mainly provided is a convex portion 5336a2 which is projected along a circle centered on the shaft support hole 5336b on the side close to the lever member 4340 from the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 5336a1.

凸設部5336a2は、下端面が先端に向かうほど上方に傾斜している。これにより、レバー部材4340が凸設部5336a2に引っかかる(係止される)ことを抑制することができる。そのため、偏心カム部材5333を介してレバー部材4340を駆動させる駆動力を発生させる第1駆動装置335の駆動力を抑制することができる。 The convex portion 5336a2 is inclined upward so that the lower end surface toward the tip end surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from being caught (locked) on the convex portion 5336a2. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the driving force of the first driving device 335 that generates the driving force for driving the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333.

図59(a)及び図59(b)は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。図59(a)では、レバー部材4340がロック部材5336に揺動を規制される状態が図示され、図59(b)では、図59(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されロック解除カム部材5339がロック部材5336を押すことでロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解除され、レバー部材4340が起き上がる方向(時計回り)に揺動された状態が図示される。 59 (a) and 59 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336. FIG. 59 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 5336, and FIG. 59 (b) shows that the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59 (a). When the lock member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is shown.

図59(a)及び図59(b)に示すように、レバー部材4340に偏心カム部材5333を介して駆動力を与える前に、初期位置からレバー部材4340を揺動させることができる。そのため、首振り操作部材310が動いたら即座に首振り操作部材310を遊技者が操作することに伴って、偏心カム部材5333が破損することを抑制することができる。例えば、首振り操作部材310が初期位置から動き出した場合に、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上下に振る操作を行ったとしても、偏心カム部材5333からレバー部材4340が離れているので、偏心カム部材5333とレバー部材4340とが衝突することを抑制することができる。 As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the lever member 4340 can be swung from the initial position before the driving force is applied to the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 5333 from being damaged as the player operates the swing operation member 310 immediately after the swing operation member 310 moves. For example, when the swing operation member 310 starts to move from the initial position, even if the player swings the swing operation member 310 up and down, the lever member 4340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 5333, so that the lever member 4340 is eccentric. It is possible to prevent the cam member 5333 and the lever member 4340 from colliding with each other.

これは、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態でレバー部材4340の揺動を規制する場合(例えば、第1実施形態の場合)には避けられなかった課題であって、本実施形態のように、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態でレバー部材4340の揺動を規制することで解決されたものである。 This is an unavoidable problem when the swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated (for example, in the case of the first embodiment) in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position. This is solved by restricting the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position as in the embodiment.

なお、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を把持操作しない場合であっても、ロック部材5336が揺動の規制を解除する場合(図59(b)参照)の偏心カム部材5333の姿勢が機械的に決まるため、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333の特定の位置(短径側の位置、カム部5333cの逆側の位置)に確実にレバー部材4340を当接させることができる。 Even when the player does not grip the swing operation member 310, the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333 when the lock member 5336 releases the swing restriction (see FIG. 59 (b)) is mechanical. Therefore, the lever member 4340 can surely bring the lever member 4340 into contact with a specific position (position on the minor axis side, position on the opposite side of the cam portion 5333c) of the eccentric cam member 5333.

図59(b)に示すように、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解除されレバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333に当接する際に、偏心カム部材5333は筒状部333bがレバー部材4340に最も近接する姿勢をとる。そのため、レバー部材4340がカム部5333cに衝突することにより、カム部5333cが破損することを抑制することができる。 As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released and the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 is a lever. Take the posture closest to the member 4340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam portion 5333c from being damaged due to the lever member 4340 colliding with the cam portion 5333c.

また、カム部5333cが偏心カム軸331d2を挟んでレバー部材4340の反対側に配置されることにより、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解除された直後のレバー部材4340の揺動角度(移動量)を最大に確保することができる。即ち、本実施形態は、ロック部材5336と偏心カム部材5333とが同期動作する態様の内、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解除された直後においてレバー部材4340の揺動角度(移動量)が最大に確保される同期の態様である。これにより、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制解除時に首振り操作部材310(図17(b)参照)が上方に移動する移動量を大きく確保でき、首振り操作部材310の演出効果を向上させることができる。 Further, since the cam portion 5333c is arranged on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the swing of the lever member 4340 immediately after the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released. The maximum angle (movement amount) can be secured. That is, in the present embodiment, in the mode in which the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 operate in synchronization with each other, the swing angle of the lever member 4340 immediately after the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released ( This is a synchronization mode in which the maximum amount of movement is secured. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 17B) when the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 is produced. Can be improved.

図60(a)及び図60(b)は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。図60(a)では、図59(b)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cがロック部材5336の係止部5336cの上方に配置されロック部材5336がロック待機状態に復帰した状態が図示され、図60(b)では、図60(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されレバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の湾曲壁部5336a1と摺動する状態が図示される。 60 (a) and 60 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336. In FIG. 60 (a), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59 (b), and the release portion 5339c of the unlock cam member 5339 is arranged above the locking portion 5336c of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336. Is shown in the state of returning to the lock standby state. In FIG. 60 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60 (a), and the rear end of the lever member 4340 is a curved wall of the lock member 5336. The state of sliding with the portion 5336a1 is shown.

図60(a)に示すように、剛体部5333c1の側面でレバー部材4340を揺動させることで、レバー部材4340の揺動速度を向上させることができる。 As shown in FIG. 60A, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved by swinging the lever member 4340 on the side surface of the rigid body portion 5333c1.

ここで、円形の偏心カムの長径部分にレバー部材4340の偏心カムの回転方向から当たると、偏心カムにかかるモーメントが大となり、駆動装置にかかる回転方向の荷重が大きくなる。そのため、いつレバー部材4340に偏心カムが衝突するか分からないときには、大径部分は伝達部材の回転方向で操作部材と当たらないようにすることが良い(円形の偏心カム)。一方で、いつレバー部材4340と偏心カム部材5333とが当たるのか把握できるのであれば、大外径部分(径方向外方)で操作部材を揺動させた方が、操作部材の揺動速度を大とできるので、演出効果を上げることができる。 Here, when the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam is hit from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam of the lever member 4340, the moment applied to the eccentric cam becomes large, and the load applied to the drive device in the rotation direction becomes large. Therefore, when it is not known when the eccentric cam collides with the lever member 4340, it is preferable that the large diameter portion does not hit the operating member in the rotational direction of the transmission member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the lever member 4340 and the eccentric cam member 5333 hit each other, it is better to swing the operating member at the large outer diameter portion (outward in the radial direction) to increase the swing speed of the operating member. Since it can be made large, the effect of production can be improved.

同期駆動であれば、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333に衝突するタイミングを機械的に合わせられる。従って、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333に当接する際には剛体部5333c1を若干退避させ、衝突後のタイミングで剛体部5333c1をレバー部材4340に当接させることができ、レバー部材4340の揺動動作の速度を向上させることができる。 In the case of synchronous drive, the timing at which the lever member 4340 collides with the eccentric cam member 5333 can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the rigid body portion 5333c1 can be slightly retracted, and the rigid body portion 5333c1 can be brought into contact with the lever member 4340 at the timing after the collision, and the lever member 4340 swings. The speed of operation can be improved.

本実施形態では、図60(a)に示す状態と図60(b)に示す状態とを交互に繰り返す(駆動ギア335bの回転方向を交互に切り替えて回転させる)ことで、レバー部材4340を上下に往復揺動させることができ、そのレバー部材4340の先端部に配設される首振り操作部材310(図54参照)を上下に往復揺動させることができる。 In the present embodiment, the lever member 4340 is moved up and down by alternately repeating the state shown in FIG. 60 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 60 (b) (rotating the drive gear 335b by alternately switching the rotation direction). The swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated and swung up and down.

ここで、ロック部材5336を単独で駆動させる場合、レバー部材4340を上下に往復揺動させる状態ではロック部材4336をロック強制解除状態(図48参照)とし、遊技者に操作されたり、偏心カム部材4333に押し上げられたりして、レバー部材4340が前倒れする方向に揺動し首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された場合にロック部材4336をロック待機状態とすることで、レバー部材4340の揺動を規制することができる。 Here, when the lock member 5336 is driven independently, the lock member 4336 is set to the lock forced release state (see FIG. 48) in the state where the lever member 4340 is reciprocated up and down, and the lock member 4336 is operated by the player or the eccentric cam member. When the lever member 4340 swings in the direction of tilting forward due to being pushed up by 4333 and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position, the lock member 4336 is put into the lock standby state, so that the lever member 4340 The swing can be regulated.

これにより、レバー部材4340を上下に往復揺動させる状態(図52参照)にロック部材4336からレバー部材4340に抵抗がかけられることを抑制し、第1駆動装置335(図55参照)に必要な駆動力を低減することができる。 As a result, resistance is suppressed from the lock member 4336 to the lever member 4340 in a state where the lever member 4340 is reciprocated up and down (see FIG. 52), which is necessary for the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55). The driving force can be reduced.

一方、ロック部材5336と偏心カム部材5333とが同期制御される場合、ロック部材5336を駆動させる部材(本実施形態におけるロック解除カム部材5339)の姿勢が偏心カム部材5333の姿勢に依存する。そのため、特に遊技者に操作されることで首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された場合に、ロック部材5336をロック待機状態に即座に配置させることが困難な場合が生じる。 On the other hand, when the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 are controlled synchronously, the posture of the member for driving the lock member 5336 (the unlock cam member 5339 in the present embodiment) depends on the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, it may be difficult to immediately arrange the lock member 5336 in the lock standby state, especially when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position by being operated by the player.

例えば、ロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cがロック部材5336の反対側に配置される場合、解除部5339cでロック部材5336を押し始めるまでにロック部材5336を半周回転させる必要がある。そのため、遊技者の操作に応じてロック部材5336を揺動させることが困難となる。 For example, when the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is arranged on the opposite side of the lock member 5336, it is necessary to rotate the lock member 5336 half a turn before the release portion 5339c starts pushing the lock member 5336. Therefore, it becomes difficult to swing the lock member 5336 according to the operation of the player.

これに対し、本実施形態では、図60(a)及び図60(b)に示す状態においてロック部材5336が常にロック待機状態とされる。これにより、遊技者に操作され、レバー部材4340が前倒れする方向に揺動され、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置されたら常に、ロック部材5336がレバー部材4340の下側面に当接され、レバー部材4340の揺動を規制する(図62参照)。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lock member 5336 is always in the lock standby state in the states shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b). As a result, the lever member 4340 is swung in the direction of tilting forward by being operated by the player, and whenever the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position, the lock member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. , The swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated (see FIG. 62).

しかし、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333の回転により往復揺動される際にロック部材5336と当接すると、レバー部材4340がロック部材5336から抵抗を受け、偏心カム部材5333を駆動させる駆動力が過大となる恐れがある。 However, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the lock member 5336 when it reciprocates and swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333, the lever member 4340 receives resistance from the lock member 5336 and the driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 5333 is generated. It may be excessive.

これに対し、本実施形態では、ロック部材5336に形成される湾曲壁部5336a1により、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材5333の回転により往復揺動される際にロック部材5336をレバー部材4340から逃がすことができるので、レバー部材4340がロック部材5336から与えられる抵抗を抑制することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved wall portion 5336a1 formed on the lock member 5336 releases the lock member 5336 from the lever member 4340 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, the lever member 4340 can suppress the resistance given by the lock member 5336.

また、図60(b)に示す状態からレバー部材4340が前倒れする方向に揺動すると、レバー部材4340の後端部が凸設部5336a2に当接し、ロック部材5336をロック解除状態側へ向けて(図60(a)時計回り方向に)揺動させ、レバー部材4340がロック部材5336の上方へ移動し、ロック部材5336が付勢方向に復帰しロック待機状態となることでレバー部材4340の揺動が規制される。 Further, when the lever member 4340 swings in the direction of tilting forward from the state shown in FIG. 60B, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2, and the lock member 5336 is directed toward the unlocked state side. (Fig. 60 (a) clockwise), the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 returns to the urging direction, and the lever member 4340 enters the lock standby state. Rocking is regulated.

従って、レバー部材4340が往復揺動される際の抵抗は抑制しながら、レバー部材4340の揺動方向の規制を任意のタイミングで行うことができる。 Therefore, the swing direction of the lever member 4340 can be regulated at an arbitrary timing while suppressing the resistance when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung.

なお、ロック解除カム部材5339は、ロック部材5336をロック解除状態とするときにのみロック部材5336に駆動力を伝達し(図59(b)参照)、それ以外ではロック部材5336とは駆動力の伝達を解除される。そのため、図60に示すように偏心カム部材5333を往復揺動させる場合にロック部材5336が連動して動作し、レバー部材4340に衝突するなどの不具合が生じることを防止することができる。 The unlock cam member 5339 transmits a driving force to the lock member 5336 only when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)), and otherwise the driving force is different from that of the lock member 5336. The transmission is canceled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is reciprocally swung, the lock member 5336 operates in conjunction with each other, and it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the lever member 4340.

図60(a)に示すように、ロック部材5336がロック待機位置に配置されるまでは、レバー部材4340は首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置される姿勢(図59(b)の姿勢)を維持する。 As shown in FIG. 60A, the lever member 4340 is in a posture in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position until the lock member 5336 is arranged in the lock standby position (posture in FIG. 59B). To maintain.

ここで、偏心カム部材5333とロック部材5336とが同期制御される場合、ロック部材5336をロック解除状態(図59(b)参照)からロック待機状態(図60(a)参照)に移動させることで偏心カム部材5333がレバー部材4340を揺動させる恐れがある。この場合、ロック待機状態で首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に維持することができないという問題点があった。 Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are controlled synchronously, the lock member 5336 is moved from the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)) to the lock standby state (see FIG. 60 (a)). The eccentric cam member 5333 may swing the lever member 4340. In this case, there is a problem that the swing operation member 310 cannot be maintained in the upward position in the lock standby state.

本実施形態では、剛体部5333c1が筒状部333bの外周に接する直線状に形成されるので(図60(a)参照)、偏心カム部材5333が所定角度(図59(b)の姿勢から図60(a)の姿勢まで)回転しても、剛体部5333c1とレバー部材4340との間の隙間が埋まるに留まり、レバー部材4340が揺動することを抑制することができる。これにより、ロック部材5336をロック解除状態からロック待機状態にする間、首振り操作部材310を上向き位置に維持することができる。 In the present embodiment, since the rigid body portion 5333c1 is formed in a straight line in contact with the outer periphery of the tubular portion 333b (see FIG. 60A), the eccentric cam member 5333 is formed at a predetermined angle (from the posture of FIG. Even if it rotates (up to the posture of 60 (a)), the gap between the rigid body portion 5333c1 and the lever member 4340 is only filled, and the lever member 4340 can be suppressed from swinging. As a result, the swing operation member 310 can be maintained in the upward position while the lock member 5336 is changed from the unlocked state to the lock standby state.

図61(a)及び図61(b)は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。図61(a)では、図60(b)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転され、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の凸設部5336a2に当接された状態が図示され、図61(b)では、図61(a)に示す状態から偏心カム部材5333が回転し、ロック部材5336の上側面がレバー部材4340の下側面に当接する配置まで回転された状態が図示される。 61 (a) and 61 (b) are schematic views of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60 (b), and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. 61 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a) and the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 is rotated to the arrangement where the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 abuts on the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. To.

図61(a)に示すように、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の凸設部5336a2を押し上げることにより、ロック部材5336がレバー部材4340から離反する方向に回転する。更に偏心カム部材5333を回転させると、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の上端部よりも上方へ移動することで、ロック部材5336がねじりバネSP41(図45参照)の付勢力により復帰され、レバー部材4340の移動をロック部材5336の上側面で規制可能となる。 As shown in FIG. 61A, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 pushes up the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 rotates in the direction away from the lever member 4340. When the eccentric cam member 5333 is further rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves upward from the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 is restored by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). The movement of the lever member 4340 can be regulated by the upper side surface of the lock member 5336.

レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の凸設部5336a2に当接するまでは、湾曲壁部5336a1によりレバー部材4340からロック部材5336が逃げる態様とされることで、レバー部材4340にロック部材5336からかけられる抵抗を抑制可能な構造とされる。 Until the rear end of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, the curved wall portion 5336a1 allows the lock member 5336 to escape from the lever member 4340, so that the lock member 5336 is attached to the lever member 4340. It has a structure that can suppress the resistance applied from the lever.

また、レバー部材4340からロック部材5336へ荷重がかけられるのは、凸設部5336a2にレバー部材4340の後端部が当接する短い期間とされるので、ねじりバネSP41(図45参照)の反力を大きく確保でき、ロック部材5336がレバー部材4340の下方へ入り込む(図61(b)参照)速度を大きく確保することができる。従って、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の移動の規制を確実に行うことができる。 Further, the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 for a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2, so that the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) is applied. Can be secured to a large extent, and the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) can be secured to a large extent. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be reliably regulated by the lock member 5336.

図62は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材5333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。なお、図62では、図60(b)に示す状態からレバー部材4340が前倒れする方向に遊技者により押し下げられた状態が図示される。 FIG. 62 is a schematic view of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. Note that FIG. 62 shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is pushed down by the player in the direction of tilting forward from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b).

図61(b)に示すように、偏心カム部材5333の筒状部333bを中心としたカム部5333cの外接円C41が、レバー部材4340の下側面と接する。そのため、首振り操作部材310が遊技者に操作され、下向き位置に配置された状態で、偏心カム部材5333を反対方向(図62時計回り)に戻す必要がなく、偏心カム部材5333を同一方向(図62反時計回り)に回転させることで偏心カム部材5333を初期位置(図59(a)参照)に復帰させることができる。 As shown in FIG. 61B, the circumscribed circle C41 of the cam portion 5333c centered on the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 comes into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. Therefore, it is not necessary to return the eccentric cam member 5333 in the opposite direction (clockwise in FIG. 62) while the swing operation member 310 is operated by the player and is arranged in the downward position, and the eccentric cam member 5333 is moved in the same direction (in the same direction (clockwise in FIG. 62)). The eccentric cam member 5333 can be returned to the initial position (see FIG. 59 (a)) by rotating it counterclockwise (FIG. 62).

なお、図60(b)に示す状態から、遊技者がレバー部材4340を前倒れする方向に押し下げ操作しない場合でも、図60(b)に示す状態から偏心カム部材5333を同一方向(図62反時計回り)に回転させることでレバー部材4340を揺動させ、ロック部材5336をレバー部材4340の下側に当接させる(図61(b)参照)ことでレバー部材4340の揺動を規制することができる。 Even if the player does not push down the lever member 4340 in the forward tilting direction from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), the eccentric cam member 5333 is pushed in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b) (FIG. 62). The lever member 4340 is swung by rotating it clockwise), and the lock member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower side of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) to regulate the swing of the lever member 4340. Can be done.

これにより、ロック部材5336をロック解除状態とした後で、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を押し下げる操作をするか否かに関わらず、首振り操作部材310を下向き位置に復帰させることができる。 As a result, after the lock member 5336 is released from the lock state, the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the downward position regardless of whether or not the player pushes down the swing operation member 310.

次いで、図63から図65を参照して、第6実施形態について説明する。上記第5実施形態では、ロック部材5336がロック解除状態とされた場合に、カム部5333cの剛体部5333c1が偏心カム軸331d2の下方に配置されることでレバー部材4340の揺動幅が確保される場合を説明したが、第6実施形態における操作デバイス6300は、ロック部材5336がロック解除状態とされた場合に、カム部5333cの剛体部5333c1が偏心カム軸331d2の上方に配置される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. In the fifth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is arranged below the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, so that the swing width of the lever member 4340 is secured. However, in the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is arranged above the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図63(a)及び図63(b)は、第6実施形態におけるレバー部材4340、偏心カム部材6333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材4340、偏心カム部材6333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。図63(a)では、レバー部材4340がロック部材5336に揺動を規制される状態が図示され、図63(b)では、図63(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されロック解除カム部材5339がロック部材5336を押すことでロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の揺動の規制が解除され、レバー部材4340が起き上がる方向(時計回り)に揺動された状態が図示される。 63 (a) and 63 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in the sixth embodiment in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 63 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 5336, and FIG. 63 (b) shows that the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a). When the lock member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is shown.

図63(a)に示すように、偏心カム部材6333は、ロック解除カム部材5339がロック部材5336に当接する直前の状態において、カム部5333cがレバー部材4340側に向く姿勢でロック解除カム部材5339と同期されると共に、それに伴って、傘部6333fの切り欠き6333f1が、第5実施形態とは異なる配置で凹設される。 As shown in FIG. 63A, the eccentric cam member 6333 is in a state immediately before the unlock cam member 5339 comes into contact with the lock member 5336, and the unlock cam member 5339 is in a posture in which the cam portion 5333c faces the lever member 4340 side. Along with this, the notch 6333f1 of the umbrella portion 6333f is recessed in a different arrangement from that of the fifth embodiment.

図63(a)及び図63(b)に示すように、ロック部材5336がロック解除状態とされると、即座に偏心カム部材6333とレバー部材4340とが当接するので、レバー部材4340が偏心カム部材6333の回転に追従して揺動する。そのため、本実施形態における偏心カム部材6333とロック解除カム部材5339との動作を同期させる方法によれば、ロック部材5336の規制の解除のタイミングを遊技者に認識させ難くできる。 As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lever member 4340 immediately come into contact with each other, so that the lever member 4340 is eccentric cam. It swings following the rotation of the member 6333. Therefore, according to the method of synchronizing the operations of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlock cam member 5339 in the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the timing of releasing the regulation of the lock member 5336.

また、レバー部材4340の揺動速度は偏心カム部材6333の回転速度によるので、ロック部材5336の解除した直後から、レバー部材4340の揺動速度を任意に設定することができる。これにより、レバー部材4340の揺動速度の設計自由度を向上し、首振り操作部材310が上下に移動することの演出効果を向上させることができる。 Further, since the swing speed of the lever member 4340 depends on the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be arbitrarily set immediately after the lock member 5336 is released. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved, and the effect of moving the swing operation member 310 up and down can be improved.

図64(a)及び図64(b)は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材6333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の動作を時系列で表すレバー部材4340、偏心カム部材6333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。 64 (a) and 64 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336.

図64(a)では、図63(b)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cがロック部材5336の係止部5336cの上方に配置されロック部材5336がロック待機状態に復帰した状態が図示され、図64(b)では、図64(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転され偏心カム部材6333の剛体部5333c1がレバー部材4340の下側面に当接する状態が図示される。 In FIG. 64A, the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 63B, and the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 is arranged above the locking portion 5336c of the locking member 5336, and the locking member 5336. Is shown in the state of returning to the lock standby state. In FIG. 64 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64 (a), and the rigid body portion 5333c1 of the eccentric cam member 6333 is below the lever member 4340. The state of contacting the side surface is shown.

図64(a)及び図64(b)に示すように、偏心カム部材6333のカム部5333cが、偏心カム軸331d2を挟んでレバー部材4340の反対側に配置される場合には、レバー部材4340が揺動しても、その揺動が偏心カム軸331d2にせき止められる。そのため、カム部5333cとレバー部材4340とが衝突する恐れが無いので、偏心カム部材6333の回転速度を高速にしても、レバー部材4340とカム部5333cとが衝突する際に過荷重が生じることで偏心カム部材6333が破損することが無い。 As shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, when the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 is arranged on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the lever member 4340 Even if it swings, the swing is dammed by the eccentric camshaft 331d2. Therefore, there is no possibility that the cam portion 5333c and the lever member 4340 collide with each other. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 is increased, an overload occurs when the lever member 4340 and the cam portion 5333c collide with each other. The eccentric cam member 6333 will not be damaged.

従って、図64(a)及び図64(b)の間のみ偏心カム部材6333の回転速度を増加させることで、レバー部材4340が図64(a)の状態(レバー部材4340の後端部が最下端に配置される状態)とされる期間を短くすることができる。これにより、レバー部材4340が図64(a)の状態とされる期間を任意に設定することができるので、レバー部材4340の揺動動作の設計自由度を向上させることができる。 Therefore, by increasing the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 only between FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the lever member 4340 is in the state of FIG. 64 (a) (the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is the most). The period of being placed at the lower end) can be shortened. As a result, the period during which the lever member 4340 is in the state shown in FIG. 64A can be arbitrarily set, so that the degree of freedom in designing the swing operation of the lever member 4340 can be improved.

図65(a)及び図65(b)は、レバー部材4340、偏心カム部材6333、ロック解除カム部材5339及びロック部材5336の模式図である。なお、図65(a)では、図64(b)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転されレバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の湾曲壁部5336a1と摺動する状態が図示され、図65(b)では、図65(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが時計回りに回転され、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の凸設部5336a2に当接された状態が図示される。 65 (a) and 65 (b) are schematic views of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. In addition, in FIG. 65A, a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64B and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 slides with the curved wall portion 5336a1 of the lock member 5336 is shown. 65 (b) shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 65 (a) and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. Will be done.

また、図65(b)に示す状態から、更に偏心カム部材5333が回転することで、レバー部材4340の後端部が押し上げられ、ロック部材5336の上側面がレバー部材4340の下側面に当接することでレバー部材4340の揺動が規制される。 Further, by further rotating the eccentric cam member 5333 from the state shown in FIG. 65 (b), the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is pushed up, and the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 comes into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. This regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

本実施形態では、図64(b)に示す状態と図65(a)に示す状態とを交互に繰り返す(駆動ギア335bの回転方向を交互に切り替えて回転させる)ことで、レバー部材4340を上下に往復揺動させることができ、そのレバー部材4340の先端部に配設される首振り操作部材310(図54参照)を上下に往復揺動(煽り動作)させることができる。 In the present embodiment, the lever member 4340 is moved up and down by alternately repeating the state shown in FIG. 64 (b) and the state shown in FIG. 65 (a) (rotating the drive gear 335b by alternately switching the rotation direction). The swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) arranged at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated and swung up and down (fanning operation).

この場合、図64(b)及び図65(a)に示すように、ロック解除カム部材5339がロック部材5336に当接することは無いので(ロック解除カム部材の解除部5339cがロック部材5336から離間されるので)、ロック解除カム部材5339に対してロック部材5336から抵抗がかけられることを抑制でき、偏心カム部材5333の回転の状態を安定させることができる。 In this case, as shown in FIGS. 64 (b) and 65 (a), the unlock cam member 5339 does not come into contact with the lock member 5336 (the unlock portion 5339c of the unlock cam member is separated from the lock member 5336. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the application of resistance from the lock member 5336 to the unlock cam member 5339, and to stabilize the rotational state of the eccentric cam member 5333.

図65(b)に示すように、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の凸設部5336a2を押し上げることにより、ロック部材5336がレバー部材4340から離反する方向に回転する。更に偏心カム部材6333を回転させると、レバー部材4340の後端部がロック部材5336の上端部よりも上方へ移動することで、ロック部材5336がねじりバネSP41(図45参照)の付勢力により復帰され、レバー部材4340の移動をロック部材5336の上側面で規制可能となる(図63(a)参照)。 As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 pushes up the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 rotates in the direction away from the lever member 4340. When the eccentric cam member 6333 is further rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves upward from the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 is restored by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be regulated by the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 63 (a)).

また、レバー部材4340からロック部材5336へ荷重がかけられるのは、凸設部5336a2にレバー部材4340の後端部が当接する短い期間とされるので、ねじりバネSP41(図45参照)の反力を大きく確保でき、ロック部材5336がレバー部材4340の下方へ入り込む(図61(b)参照)速度を大きく確保することができる。従って、ロック部材5336によるレバー部材4340の移動の規制を確実に行うことができる。 Further, the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 for a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2, so that the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) is applied. Can be secured to a large extent, and the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) can be secured to a large extent. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be reliably regulated by the lock member 5336.

図65(a)に示す状態において、遊技者からレバー部材4340を上向きに持ち上げる方向の荷重がかけられる場合を考える。この場合、偏心カム部材6333のカム部5333cにレバー部材4340から下向きの荷重がかけられ、偏心カム部材6333が時計回りに回転される。本実施形態では、偏心カム部材6333とロック解除カム部材5339とが同期動作されるので、ロック解除カム部材5339の回転が規制される場合、偏心カム部材6333の回転も規制され、レバー部材4340から負荷される荷重により偏心カム部材6333が破損する恐れがある。 In the state shown in FIG. 65A, consider a case where a load is applied by the player in the direction of lifting the lever member 4340 upward. In this case, a downward load is applied to the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 from the lever member 4340, and the eccentric cam member 6333 is rotated clockwise. In the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlock cam member 5339 are operated in synchronization with each other. Therefore, when the rotation of the unlock cam member 5339 is restricted, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 6333 is also restricted from the lever member 4340. The eccentric cam member 6333 may be damaged by the applied load.

これに対し、本実施形態では、図65(a)の状態から、レバー部材4340が持ち上げ動作され、後端部が下げられる場合に、偏心カム部材6333の時計回りの回転に伴ってロック解除カム部材5339は時計回りに回転するので、ロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cがロック部材5336から離反する方向に移動する。従って、ロック解除カム部材5339がロック部材5336に当接して回転を規制される恐れはないので、偏心カム部材6333がレバー部材4340から負荷される荷重による破損することを抑制することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lever member 4340 is lifted and the rear end is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), the unlock cam is rotated clockwise with the eccentric cam member 6333. Since the member 5339 rotates clockwise, the release portion 5339c of the unlock cam member 5339 moves in a direction away from the lock member 5336. Therefore, since there is no possibility that the unlock cam member 5339 comes into contact with the lock member 5336 and the rotation is restricted, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 6333 from being damaged by the load applied from the lever member 4340.

なお、本実施形態では、偏心カム部材6333のカム部5333cと、ロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cとが、厚み方向(図65(a)紙面垂直方向)で異なる位置(図65(a)紙面平行方向で干渉しない位置)に配置される。そのため、図65(a)の状態から偏心カム部材6333のカム部5333cと、ロック解除カム部材5339の解除部5339cとが、図65(a)において近接する方向に回転しても、干渉することなくすれ違うので、偏心カム部材6333やロック解除カム部材5339の破損を防止することができる。 In the present embodiment, the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the release portion 5339c of the unlock cam member 5339 are at different positions in the thickness direction (FIG. 65 (a) in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface) (FIG. 65 (a)). It is placed at a position that does not interfere in the direction parallel to the paper surface. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocked portion 5339c of the unlocked cam member 5339 interfere with each other even if they rotate in the proximity direction in FIG. 65 (a). Since they pass each other, it is possible to prevent damage to the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlock cam member 5339.

次いで、図66を参照して、第7実施形態における操作デバイス7300について説明する。第1実施形態では、ギアダンパ338が常時レバー部材340に抵抗を与える場合を説明したが、第7実施形態における操作デバイス7300は、剥離部材7350がレバー部材7340から引きはがされた時に限定してギアダンパ7347からレバー部材7340に抵抗が与えられる場合を説明する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. In the first embodiment, the case where the gear damper 338 constantly gives resistance to the lever member 340 has been described, but the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment is limited to the case where the peeling member 7350 is peeled off from the lever member 7340. The case where resistance is given to the lever member 7340 from the gear damper 7347 will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図66(a)及び図66(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第7実施形態における操作デバイス7300の部分断面図である。なお、図66(a)では、レバー部材7340に剥離部材7350が吸着した状態が図示され、図66(b)では、剥離部材7350の揺動がロック部材336に規制され、レバー部材7340から剥離部材7350が引きはがされた状態が図示される。 66 (a) and 66 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 66 (a) shows a state in which the release member 7350 is attracted to the lever member 7340, and FIG. 66 (b) shows that the release member 7350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 and is separated from the lever member 7340. The state in which the member 7350 is peeled off is shown.

図66(a)に示すように、レバー部材7340は、本体部材341の内側に配設されるギアダンパ7347を備える。そのギアダンパ7347は、剥離部材7350の本体部材7351に形成される挿通孔352を中心とした円に沿ってギア歯状に形成されるギア部7351aに歯合される。 As shown in FIG. 66 (a), the lever member 7340 includes a gear damper 7347 arranged inside the main body member 341. The gear damper 7347 is meshed with a gear portion 7351a formed in a gear tooth shape along a circle centered on an insertion hole 352 formed in the main body member 7351 of the peeling member 7350.

この場合、図66(a)に示すように、レバー部材7340と剥離部材7350とが吸着固定され一体として揺動すると、ギアダンパ7347とギア部7351aとの相対的な位置関係が変化しないので、レバー部材7340がギアダンパ7347の粘性抵抗を受けることはない。 In this case, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are attracted and fixed and swing as one, the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a does not change, so that the lever The member 7340 is not subject to the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347.

一方、図66(b)に示すように、剥離部材7350がロック部材336に揺動を規制され、レバー部材7340から引きはがされた状態では、レバー部材7340が揺動する(遊技者が首振り操作部材310(図54参照)を操作する)場合に、ギアダンパ7347とギア部7351aとの相対的な位置関係が変化するので、ギアダンパ7347の粘性抵抗がレバー部材7340に与えられる。 On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the release member 7350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 and is peeled off from the lever member 7340, the lever member 7340 swings (the player necks). When the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) is operated), the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a changes, so that the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 is given to the lever member 7340.

従って、遊技者が首振り操作部材310(図54参照)に、剥離部材7350からレバー部材7340を引きはがすほどの過荷重を与えた場合にのみギアダンパ7347の粘性抵抗がレバー部材7340に働くようにすることができる。これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を操作する際の操作感を変化させ、首振り操作部材310を適切に使用するように促すことができる。 Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 acts on the lever member 7340 only when the player applies an overload to the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) enough to peel off the lever member 7340 from the peeling member 7350. can do. As a result, it is possible to change the operation feeling when the player operates the swing operation member 310 and encourage the player to properly use the swing operation member 310.

例えば、図66(b)の状態において首振り操作部材310を操作する際の操作抵抗が過度に大きくなることで、遊技者にとっては操作がしづらくなり、ストレスとなる。レバー部材7340及び剥離部材7350が吸着固定された状態に戻れば、操作抵抗が小さくなり、遊技者にとって操作し易くなる。そのため、ストレスを回避しようとする遊技者ほど、首振り操作部材310に過荷重をかけることを避けるようになる。これにより、操作デバイス7300が破壊されることを抑制することができる。 For example, in the state of FIG. 66 (b), the operation resistance when operating the swing operation member 310 becomes excessively large, which makes the operation difficult for the player and causes stress. When the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are returned to the suction-fixed state, the operation resistance is reduced and the player can easily operate the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350. Therefore, the player who tries to avoid stress will avoid applying an overload to the swing operation member 310. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating device 7300 from being destroyed.

次いで、図67から図69を参照して、第8実施形態について説明する。上記各実施形態では、ロック部材336,2336,4336,5336が内側ケース部材330,3330,4330,5330に軸支される場合を説明したが、第8実施形態における操作デバイス8300は、ロック部材8336が、レバー部材340の揺動に伴って内側ケース部材8330をスライド移動可能に構成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lock members 336, 2336, 4336, and 5336 are pivotally supported by the inner case members 330, 3330, 4330, and 5330 has been described, but the operation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment is the lock member 8336. However, the inner case member 8330 is configured to be slidable as the lever member 340 swings. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図67(a)及び図67(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第8実施形態における操作デバイス8300の断面図である。なお、図17(a)は第1実施形態における操作デバイス300を図示したものであるが、外観形状は本実施形態における操作デバイス8300と同等なので、代用する。図68及び図69においても同様である。また、図67(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図67(b)では、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。 67 (a) and 67 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 according to the eighth embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 8300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. The same applies to FIGS. 68 and 69. Further, FIG. 67A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 67B shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position. ..

図67(a)に示すように、内側ケース部材8330は、左カバー部材8331に、レバー支持軸331d1を中心とした円弧に沿って穿設される長孔形状のスライド孔8331iを複数備える。なお、スライド孔8331iは、左カバー部材8331と一対で配設される右カバー部材(図示せず)の対応した位置に左カバー部材8331と同様に穿設される。 As shown in FIG. 67A, the inner case member 8330 includes a plurality of elongated hole-shaped slide holes 8331i formed in the left cover member 8331 along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. The slide hole 8331i is formed in the same manner as the left cover member 8331 at a position corresponding to the right cover member (not shown) arranged in pairs with the left cover member 8331.

スライド孔8331iは、一対の長孔から構成され、内側面が平滑な表面から構成されると共にレバー支持軸331d1から離れた側に配設される第1スライド孔8331i1と、内側面が平滑な表面から構成されると共に第1スライド孔8331i1よりもレバー支持軸331d1側に配設される第2スライド孔8331i2と、を主に備える。 The slide hole 8331i is composed of a pair of elongated holes, the inner side surface is composed of a smooth surface, and the first slide hole 8331i1 is arranged on the side away from the lever support shaft 331d1, and the inner side surface is smooth. It is mainly provided with a second slide hole 8331i2 which is composed of the above and is arranged on the lever support shaft 331d1 side of the first slide hole 8331i1.

第2スライド孔8331i2は、ロック部材8336の軸部8336fの楔状部8336f1が挿通される長孔である。ロック部材8336の姿勢により、楔状部8336f1と第2スライド孔8331i2との間の摩擦抵抗が変化する。 The second slide hole 8331i2 is a long hole through which the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 of the shaft portion 8336f of the lock member 8336 is inserted. The frictional resistance between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2 changes depending on the posture of the lock member 8336.

ロック部材8336は、左カバー部材8331の内側面に沿ってスライド移動する態様で配設される板状のスライド板8370に軸支される。ロック部材8336は、軸支孔336bに挿通される円柱形状の部位であると共にスライド板8370を貫通する軸部8336fを備え、その軸部8336fを介してスライド板8370に軸支される。 The lock member 8336 is pivotally supported by a plate-shaped slide plate 8370 arranged so as to slide and move along the inner surface of the left cover member 8331. The lock member 8336 is provided with a shaft portion 8336f which is a cylindrical portion inserted into the shaft support hole 336b and penetrates the slide plate 8370, and is pivotally supported by the slide plate 8370 via the shaft portion 8336f.

軸部8336fは、軸方向の一部であって第2スライド孔8331i2に挿通される楔状部8336f1を備える。楔状部8336f1は、対向配置された状態において第2スライド孔8331i2の長手方向に延設される側面と所定距離だけ離れる態様(図67(a)参照)で形成される一対の第1側面8336f1aと、対向配置された状態において第2スライド孔8331i2の長手方向に延設される側面と面当たりする(図68(a)参照)一対の第2側面8336f1bと、を主に備え、各側面が若干湾曲した略ひし形状に構成される。 The shaft portion 8336f includes a wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 which is a part in the axial direction and is inserted into the second slide hole 8331i2. The wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 has a pair of first side surfaces 8336f1a formed in a manner of being separated from the side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 by a predetermined distance (see FIG. 67A) in a state of being arranged to face each other. , Mainly provided with a pair of second side surfaces 8336f1b that face a surface contact with a side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state of facing each other (see FIG. 68 (a)), and each side surface is slightly provided. It is composed of a curved rhombus.

第1側面8336f1aは、図67(a)に示すように、ロック部材8336が解除側に位置する状態において第2スライド孔8331i2の曲線形状に沿った(曲率半径の同一な)曲面形状から形成される。また、第2側面8336f1bは、図68(a)に示すように、ロック部材8336が固定側に位置する状態において第2スライド孔8331i2の曲線形状に沿った(曲率半径の同一な)曲面形状から形成される。 As shown in FIG. 67A, the first side surface 8336f1a is formed from a curved surface shape (with the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where the lock member 8336 is located on the release side. The radius. Further, as shown in FIG. 68A, the second side surface 8336f1b has a curved surface shape (with the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where the lock member 8336 is located on the fixed side. It is formed.

ロック部材8336が解除位置側に配置される状態においては、第1側面8336f1aが第2スライド孔8331i2と当接せず、所定距離隙間が空けられるため、レバー部材340の揺動に追従して移動するスライド板8370の移動抵抗を抑制することができる。 In the state where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release position side, the first side surface 8336f1a does not come into contact with the second slide hole 8331i2 and a predetermined distance is left, so that the lever member 340 moves following the swing of the lever member 340. It is possible to suppress the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370.

なお、図67(b)では、ロック部材8336が解除側の位置から所定量固定側の位置へ向けて回転された状態が図示される。この状態においても、楔状部8336f1と第2スライド孔8331i2との間には若干の隙間が空けられる。即ち、ロック部材8336が解除側の位置から多少回転しても、スライド板8370の移動抵抗が増加することが無いので、レバー部材340の揺動抵抗を抑制でき、遊技者が操作デバイス8300を揺動操作する際の操作感を損なうことを抑制することができる。 Note that FIG. 67B shows a state in which the lock member 8336 is rotated from the position on the release side to the position on the fixed amount side. Even in this state, a slight gap is provided between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2. That is, even if the lock member 8336 rotates slightly from the position on the release side, the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370 does not increase, so that the swing resistance of the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the player swings the operation device 8300. It is possible to suppress impairing the feeling of operation during dynamic operation.

一方で、ロック部材8336を解除側の位置から所定量固定側の位置へ向けて回転された状態で維持しておけば、所定のタイミングでロック部材8336を固定側に配置するまでの期間を短くすることができる。これにより、ロック部材8336を所望の位置で固定側に配置させやすくできる。 On the other hand, if the lock member 8336 is kept rotated from the position on the release side to the position on the fixed amount side, the period until the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side at a predetermined timing is shortened. can do. As a result, the lock member 8336 can be easily arranged on the fixed side at a desired position.

スライド板8370は、スライド孔8331iに挿通され断面円弧形状に凸設される凸設部8371と、剥離部材350と対向配置されると共に磁性体材料から形成される磁石部8372と、ロック部材8336の回転軸と駆動軸が平行になる態様でスライド板8370に配設される駆動モータ8373と、その駆動モータ8373が回転させると共にロック部材8336のギア部336dに歯合される駆動ギア8374と、を主に備える。 The slide plate 8370 includes a convex portion 8371 that is inserted into the slide hole 8331i and is projected in an arc shape in cross section, a magnet portion 8372 that is arranged to face the peeling member 350 and is formed of a magnetic material, and a lock member 8336. A drive motor 8373 arranged on the slide plate 8370 so that the rotation shaft and the drive shaft are parallel to each other, and a drive gear 8374 that rotates the drive motor 8373 and meshes with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 8336. Mainly prepare.

凸設部8371は、レバー支持軸331d1を中心とした円弧形状に形成される。これにより、凸設部8371が係止凹部8331i2に引っかかることを抑制することができる。 The convex portion 8371 is formed in an arc shape centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the convex portion 8371 from being caught in the locking recess 8331i2.

磁石部8372は、磁性体材料から形成され、剥離部材350に接着される。磁石部材8372が剥離部材350に接着された状態でレバー部材340が揺動されることに伴いスライド板8370がスライド孔8331iに沿ってスライド移動する。 The magnet portion 8372 is formed of a magnetic material and is adhered to the peeling member 350. The slide plate 8370 slides along the slide hole 8331i as the lever member 340 swings while the magnet member 8372 is adhered to the peeling member 350.

駆動モータ8373は、駆動ギア8374を駆動させることによって、ロック部材8336を解除側の位置(図67(a)参照)と、固定側の位置(図68(a)参照)とに配置可能とする駆動手段である。駆動モータ8373はスライド板8370に配設されるので、スライド板8370と共にスライド移動する。 By driving the drive gear 8374, the drive motor 8373 makes it possible to arrange the lock member 8336 at a position on the release side (see FIG. 67 (a)) and a position on the fixed side (see FIG. 68 (a)). It is a driving means. Since the drive motor 8373 is arranged on the slide plate 8370, it slides and moves together with the slide plate 8370.

剥離部材350は、下側の側面に沿って磁気を検出する磁気センサMC1を備え、その磁気センサMC1によって、磁石部8372が剥離部材350に吸着しているか、磁石部8372から剥離部材350が離反しているかを検出可能とされる。以下、ロック部材8336の制御の一例について説明する。 The peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects magnetism along the lower side surface, and the magnetic sensor MC1 either attracts the magnet portion 8372 to the peeling member 350 or separates the peeling member 350 from the magnet portion 8372. It is possible to detect whether or not it is. Hereinafter, an example of control of the lock member 8336 will be described.

ここで、図67(a)の状態では、第2センサ部材325a2(図23(b)参照)の隙間に検出片343b(図23(b)、図16参照)が配置されることで、レバー部材340が揺動範囲の終端に配置されていることが検出される。また、図67(b)の状態では、第1センサ部材325a1(図23(b)参照)の隙間に検出片343bが配置されることで、レバー部材340が揺動範囲の終端に配置されていることが検出される。 Here, in the state of FIG. 67 (a), the detection piece 343b (see FIGS. 23 (b) and 16) is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 23 (b)), so that the lever It is detected that the member 340 is located at the end of the swing range. Further, in the state of FIG. 67 (b), the detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the first sensor member 325a1 (see FIG. 23 (b)), so that the lever member 340 is arranged at the end of the swing range. Is detected.

そのため、偏心カム部材333が停止した状態において、レバー部材340が図67(a)の状態と図67(b)の状態とで繰り返し切り替わるような場合には、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上下に最大可動範囲で繰り返し操作していることを検出することができる(主制御装置に各センサ部材325a1,325a2から信号が出力される)。この場合、レバー部材340(剥離部材350)が偏心カム部材333に繰り返し衝突することで、偏心カム部材333が破損する恐れがある。 Therefore, when the eccentric cam member 333 is stopped and the lever member 340 repeatedly switches between the state shown in FIG. 67 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 67 (b), the player swings the swing operation member 310. It is possible to detect that the operation is repeated up and down within the maximum movable range (signals are output from the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 to the main control device). In this case, the lever member 340 (peeling member 350) repeatedly collides with the eccentric cam member 333, which may damage the eccentric cam member 333.

第1実施形態のように、ロック部材336が内側ケース部材330に軸支される態様では、停止した状態のレバー部材340をロック部材336で固定することはできても、揺動途中のレバー部材340をロック部材336で固定することは困難であった。 In the embodiment in which the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, the lever member 340 in the stopped state can be fixed by the lock member 336, but the lever member is in the process of swinging. It was difficult to fix the 340 with the lock member 336.

これに対し、本実施形態では、ロック部材8336がレバー部材340に追従して移動可能とされるので、レバー部材340の揺動動作中においても、レバー部材340の揺動をロック部材8336で停止させることが可能となる。そのため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上下に最大可動範囲で繰り返し操作していることを検出した場合に、ロック部材8336を作動させることで、偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止することができる。以下、これについて説明する。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lock member 8336 can move following the lever member 340, the lock member 8336 stops the swing of the lever member 340 even during the swing operation of the lever member 340. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, when it is detected that the player repeatedly operates the swing operation member 310 up and down within the maximum movable range, the lock member 8336 is operated to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. Can be done. This will be described below.

図68(a)及び図68(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス8300の断面図である。なお、図68(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置と下向き位置との中間に配置された状態が図示され、図68(b)では、図68(a)の状態から所定量以上の荷重が首振り操作部材310に下向きにかけられ、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引きはがされた状態が図示される。 68 (a) and 68 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 68 (a) shows a state in which the swing operating member 310 is arranged between the upward position and the downward position, and FIG. 68 (b) shows a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. 68 (a). The load is applied downward to the swing operation member 310, and the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350.

図68(a)に示すように、駆動ギア8374を回転させ、ロック部材8336を固定側に配置することで、楔状部8336f1の第2側面8336f1bが第2スライド孔7332i2の両側面に当接されることで、摩擦力によりスライド板8370のスライド移動が停止される。この状態で、首振り操作部材310を押し下げる操作に対しては、ロック部材8336が下向きに剥離部材350を係止し、首振り操作部材310を押し上げる操作に対しては、磁石部8372を介してスライド板8370が上向きに剥離部材350を係止する。そのため、レバー部材340は、上下方向の負荷が多少かかったとしても、図68(a)の状態で姿勢を維持する。 As shown in FIG. 68A, by rotating the drive gear 8374 and arranging the lock member 8336 on the fixed side, the second side surface 8336f1b of the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 is brought into contact with both side surfaces of the second slide hole 7332i2. As a result, the sliding movement of the slide plate 8370 is stopped by the frictional force. In this state, the lock member 8336 locks the release member 350 downward for the operation of pushing down the swing operation member 310, and the magnet portion 8372 is used for the operation of pushing up the swing operation member 310. The slide plate 8370 locks the release member 350 upward. Therefore, the lever member 340 maintains its posture in the state shown in FIG. 68A even if a load in the vertical direction is slightly applied.

図68(a)の状態から、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に対して、下方へ所定量以上(剥離部材350の磁石部材354とレバー部材340との吸着力以上)の荷重を与えると、剥離部材350からレバー部材340から引きはがされる(図68(b)参照)。これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に与えた所定量以上の荷重がロック部材8336に伝達されることで、ロック部材8336が破損することを防止することができる。 From the state shown in FIG. 68A, when the player applies a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attractive force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) to the swinging operation member 310, The peeling member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 340 (see FIG. 68 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the lock member 8336 from being damaged by transmitting a load of a predetermined amount or more applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player to the lock member 8336.

図68(b)に示すように、スライド板8370がその移動範囲の途中(レバー部材340の移動範囲の途中)で固定されることで、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる操作を行ったとしても、偏心カム部材333にレバー部材340が当接する前に磁石部8372に当接することで、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材333に当接することを防止することができる。これにより、偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止することができる。 As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the slide plate 8370 is fixed in the middle of the moving range (in the middle of the moving range of the lever member 340), so that the player lifts the swing operation member 310. Even so, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from coming into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 by contacting the magnet portion 8372 before the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. This makes it possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

また、図68(b)に示すように、レバー部材340を揺動させることができる角度範囲(剥離部材350の上側の範囲)が狭められるため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上方に移動させることでレバー部材340に付加される勢いを抑制することができ、レバー部材340が上から剥離部材350に当接する際に生じる荷重を抑制することができる。 Further, as shown in FIG. 68B, since the angle range in which the lever member 340 can be swung (the range above the peeling member 350) is narrowed, the player moves the swing operation member 310 upward. By doing so, the momentum applied to the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the load generated when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the peeling member 350 from above can be suppressed.

これにより、レバー部材340が剥離部材350に当接される際の反作用でロック部材8336に生じる荷重を抑制することができるので、ロック部材8336を駆動させる駆動モータ8373の駆動力を抑制することができる。 As a result, the load generated on the lock member 8336 due to the reaction when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the release member 350 can be suppressed, so that the driving force of the drive motor 8373 that drives the lock member 8336 can be suppressed. it can.

図69(a)及び図69(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス8300の断面図である。なお、図69(a)では、偏心カム部材333の回転により揺動されるレバー部材340及び剥離部材350が想像線で図示されると共に、ロック部材8336が解除側に配置された状態で剥離部材350が磁石部8372から引きはがされた状態におけるレバー部材340及び剥離部材350が実線で図示され、図69(b)では、図69(a)に実線で図示される状態からロック部材8336が固定側に配置された状態が図示される。 69 (a) and 69 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 69A, the lever member 340 and the release member 350 that are swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the release member is arranged with the lock member 8336 on the release side. The lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 in a state where the 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372 are shown by solid lines, and in FIG. 69 (b), the lock member 8336 is shown from the state shown by the solid line in FIG. 69 (a). The state of being arranged on the fixed side is illustrated.

図69(a)に示すように、偏心カム部材333の回転によりレバー部材340及び剥離部材350が揺動する場合、スライド板8370も剥離部材350と共にスライド移動する。このとき、首振り操作部材310に下向きに高速で荷重が付与されると、スライド板8370が剥離部材350の移動速度に追従できず(スライド孔8331iとの間の摩擦抵抗により減速され)、剥離部材350とスライド板8370とが離間し得る(図69(a)実線部分参照)。 As shown in FIG. 69A, when the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 swing due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333, the slide plate 8370 also slides and moves together with the peeling member 350. At this time, if a load is applied downward to the swing operation member 310 at a high speed, the slide plate 8370 cannot follow the moving speed of the release member 350 (decelerated due to frictional resistance with the slide hole 8331i) and is released. The member 350 and the slide plate 8370 can be separated from each other (see the solid line portion in FIG. 69A).

この場合、ロック部材8336が解除側に配置され、スライド板8370が固定されておらず、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上向きに持ち上げる操作を行うと、偏心カム部材333に剥離部材350が当接することで、偏心カム部材333が破損する恐れがある。 In this case, when the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release side, the slide plate 8370 is not fixed, and the player performs an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 upward, the release member 350 hits the eccentric cam member 333. The eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged by the contact.

これに対し、本実施形態では、剥離部材350が、剥離部材350から磁石部8372が引きはがされたことを検出する磁気センサMC1を備える。磁気センサMC1が、剥離部材350と磁石部8372とが分離したことを検出したら、即座に、ロック部材8336が固定側に配置される(図69(b)参照)ように制御することで、剥離部材350の下側面にロック部材8336の上側面を当接可能にすることができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects that the magnet portion 8372 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350. When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the peeling member 350 and the magnet portion 8372 are separated, the locking member 8336 is immediately controlled to be arranged on the fixed side (see FIG. 69B), thereby peeling. The upper side surface of the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the lower side surface of the member 350.

これにより、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に上向きの荷重を与えたとしても、剥離部材350が偏心カム部材333に当接する前に、剥離部材350がロック部材8336に当接することで下方への移動が止められるので、偏心カム部材333が破損することを防止することができる。なお、本効果は、本実施形態のように、ロック部材8336が剥離部材350と共にスライド移動する構成があって初めて発揮される効果である。 As a result, even if the player applies an upward load to the swing operation member 310, the release member 350 abuts on the lock member 8336 before the release member 350 abuts on the eccentric cam member 333, thereby moving downward. Since the movement is stopped, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. It should be noted that this effect is exhibited only when the lock member 8336 is configured to slide and move together with the release member 350 as in the present embodiment.

即ち、第1実施形態のように、ロック部材336が内側ケース部材330に軸支される場合、偏心カム部材333の位相によっては(例えば、図24(b)参照)、ロック部材336を固定側に配置しても、ロック部材336の上側面よりも偏心カム部材333の上側面が剥離部材350側に張り出している恐れがあり、この状態で首振り操作部材310に上向きの荷重を与えられると、剥離部材350は偏心カム部材333に当接する。そのため、偏心カム部材333の破損を防ぐ効果が十分でない。 That is, when the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, the lock member 336 is fixed on the fixed side depending on the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (see, for example, FIG. 24B). Even if it is arranged in, there is a possibility that the upper side surface of the eccentric cam member 333 protrudes toward the release member 350 side rather than the upper side surface of the lock member 336, and if an upward load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in this state. , The peeling member 350 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. Therefore, the effect of preventing damage to the eccentric cam member 333 is not sufficient.

これに対し、本実施形態によれば、偏心カム部材333の回転により剥離部材350も、ロック部材8336も同様に移動する(剥離部材350が偏心カム部材333及び磁石部8372の両方と当接する状態が維持される)ので、剥離部材350が磁石部8372から引き剥がされた直後にロック部材8336を固定側に配置することで、ロック部材8336の上側面を偏心カム部材333よりも剥離部材350に近づけることができる。これにより、偏心カム部材333よりも先にロック部材8336を剥離部材350に当接させ、剥離部材350が偏心カム部材333に衝突することを防止することができる。 On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the release member 350 and the lock member 8336 move in the same manner due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 (a state in which the release member 350 comes into contact with both the eccentric cam member 333 and the magnet portion 8372). By arranging the lock member 8336 on the fixed side immediately after the release member 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372, the upper side surface of the lock member 8336 is placed on the release member 350 rather than the eccentric cam member 333. You can get closer. As a result, the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the release member 350 before the eccentric cam member 333, and the release member 350 can be prevented from colliding with the eccentric cam member 333.

なお、磁気センサMC1が、磁石部8372と剥離部材350が分離したことを検出した際には、偏心カム部材333の回転を停止させることが好ましい。そのまま偏心カム部材333が回転を継続し、最大径部分が剥離部材350に近づく態様で移動すると、偏心カム部材333の最大径部分がロック部材8336を越えて剥離部材350に近づいてしまう恐れがあるためである。 When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the magnet portion 8372 and the peeling member 350 are separated, it is preferable to stop the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. If the eccentric cam member 333 continues to rotate and moves in such a manner that the maximum diameter portion approaches the release member 350, the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 333 may exceed the lock member 8336 and approach the release member 350. Because.

次いで、図70を参照して、第9実施形態について説明する。上記各実施形態では、レバー部材340,2340,3340,4340の全体が剛体である場合を説明したが、第9実施形態における操作デバイス9300は、レバー部材9340の首振り操作部材310にコイルスプリングから形成される弾性連結部材CS91,CS92を備える。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lever members 340, 2340, 3340, and 4340 are entirely rigid has been described, but the operation device 9300 in the ninth embodiment is attached to the swing operation member 310 of the lever member 9340 from a coil spring. The elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 to be formed are provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図70(a)及び図70(b)は、第9実施形態における操作デバイス9300の側面図である。なお、図70(a)では、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図70(b)では、図70(a)に示す状態において首振り操作部材310に下向きに所定量以上の荷重がかけられ、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92が撓んだ状態が図示される。 70 (a) and 70 (b) are side views of the operation device 9300 according to the ninth embodiment. Note that FIG. 70 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position, and FIG. 70 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is downward in the state shown in FIG. 70 (a). A state in which the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are bent when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied is shown.

図70(a)及び図70(b)に示すように、レバー部材9340は、首振り操作部材310付近に上下一対で配設されるコイルスプリング状の弾性連結部材CS91,CS92を備える。 As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the lever member 9340 includes coil spring-shaped elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 arranged in pairs up and down near the swing operation member 310.

首振り操作部材310に遊技者が負荷をかけていない状態においては、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92が略同等の長さに縮められた状態が維持される。なお、首振り操作部材310の重量を支えながら図70(a)の状態(双方が略同等の長さに縮められた状態)を維持するために、上側の弾性連結部材CS91の弾性係数が下側の弾性連結部材CS91の弾性係数に比較して高く設定されると共に、双方の長さは略同一とされる。 When the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 310, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are maintained in a state of being contracted to substantially the same length. The elastic modulus of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is lowered in order to maintain the state shown in FIG. 70 (a) (both are contracted to substantially the same length) while supporting the weight of the swinging operation member 310. It is set higher than the elastic modulus of the elastic connecting member CS91 on the side, and the lengths of both are substantially the same.

首振り操作部材310へ遊技者から加えられる荷重が所定量よりも小さい場合においては、レバー部材9340と首振り操作部材310との相対的な位置関係が弾性連結部材CS91,CS92により維持される。 When the load applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player is smaller than a predetermined amount, the relative positional relationship between the lever member 9340 and the swing operation member 310 is maintained by the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92.

一方、図70(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材310に、所定量以上の荷重が下向きにかけられると、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92の伸縮状態が変化することにより(上側の弾性連結部材CS91の長さが下側の弾性連結部材CS92に比較して長くなることにより)、首振り操作部材310とレバー部材9340との相対的な位置関係が崩れ、首振り操作部材310に負荷された荷重が直接的にレバー部材340の後部(剥離部材350等、図16参照)に伝達されることを抑制することができる。換言すれば、首振り操作部材310にかけられた荷重を弾性連結部材CS91,CS92の変形に消費することができる。従って、首振り操作部材310にかけられる荷重によって、外側ケース部材320の内部の部材(例えば、偏心カム部材333、図10参照)が破損することを抑制することができる。 On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70B, when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied downward to the swing operation member 310, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 change their elastic states (upper elastic connecting member). (Because the length of CS91 is longer than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92), the relative positional relationship between the swinging operation member 310 and the lever member 9340 is broken, and the swinging operation member 310 is loaded. It is possible to prevent the load from being directly transmitted to the rear portion of the lever member 340 (peeling member 350, etc., see FIG. 16). In other words, the load applied to the swing operation member 310 can be consumed for the deformation of the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inner member of the outer case member 320 (for example, the eccentric cam member 333, see FIG. 10) from being damaged by the load applied to the swing operation member 310.

次いで、図71から図74を参照して、第10実施形態について説明する。上記各実施形態では、偏心カム部材333,2333,4333,5333がレバー支持軸331d1の後方であってレバー部材340,2340,4340の下方に配設される場合を説明したが、第10実施形態における操作デバイス10300は、偏心カム部材2333が、レバー支持軸331d1の後方であってレバー部材340の上方に配設される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the eccentric cam members 333, 2333, 4333, 5333 are arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and below the lever members 340, 2340, 4340 has been described, but the tenth embodiment has been described. In the operation device 10300, the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and above the lever member 340. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図71(a)、図71(b)、図72(a)及び図72(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第10実施形態における操作デバイス10300の断面図である。なお、図17(a)は第1実施形態における操作デバイス300を図示したものであるが、外観形状は本実施形態における操作デバイス10300と同等なので、代用する。図73及び図74においても同様に代用する。 71 (a), 71 (b), 72 (a) and 72 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 according to the tenth embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 10300 according to the present embodiment, it is substituted. The same applies to FIGS. 73 and 74.

また、図71(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図71(b)では、図71(a)の状態から偏心カム部材2333が図71(a)において反時計回りに所定角度θ101だけ回転した状態が図示され、図72(a)では、図71(a)の状態から偏心カム部材2333が図71(a)において反時計回りに角度θ101よりも大きな角度θ102だけ回転した状態が図示され、図72(b)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。 Further, in FIG. 71 (a), a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position is shown, and in FIG. 71 (b), the eccentric cam member 2333 is shown in FIG. 71 (a) from the state of FIG. 71 (a). ) Is shown in a state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ101, and in FIG. 72 (a), the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated counterclockwise from the angle θ101 in FIG. 71 (a). The state in which the swing operation member 310 is rotated by a large angle θ102 is shown, and FIG. 72 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position.

図71(a)に示すように、操作デバイス10300は、断面矩形の箱状の内側ケース部材10330を備え、その内側ケース部材10330は、レバー支持軸331d1の後方に偏心カム部材2333を軸支する偏心カム軸10331iを備えると共に、その偏心カム軸10331iから所定距離だけ離れた位置に駆動モータにより回転駆動される駆動ギア10335が配設され、その駆動ギア10335の回転により偏心カム部材2333が回転駆動される。 As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the operation device 10300 includes a box-shaped inner case member 10330 having a rectangular cross section, and the inner case member 10330 pivotally supports an eccentric cam member 2333 behind the lever support shaft 331d1. An eccentric cam shaft 10331i is provided, and a drive gear 10335 that is rotationally driven by a drive motor is arranged at a position separated from the eccentric cam shaft 10331i by a predetermined distance, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotationally driven by the rotation of the drive gear 10335. Will be done.

本実施形態では、弾性材料から形成されるねじりバネ状のねじりバネSP101が、レバー部材340に対して首振り操作部材310を下方へ押し下げる方向に付勢する付勢力を発生させる。 In the present embodiment, the torsion spring-like torsion spring SP101 formed of the elastic material generates an urging force that urges the lever member 340 in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310.

これにより、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材2333に押し当てられる態様で常時付勢されるので、レバー部材340を偏心カム部材2333の回転に追従させて動作させることができる。 As a result, the lever member 340 is constantly urged so as to be pressed against the eccentric cam member 2333, so that the lever member 340 can be operated by following the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333.

本実施形態では、レバー部材340を揺動させる手段として、第2実施形態で説明した偏心カム部材2333を利用するため、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を押し下げることで、レバー部材340の後端部が持ち上がり、レバー部材340から偏心カム部材2333に負荷が生じても、本体部材2333aとカム部材2333bとが滑ることで、カム部材2333bが破損することを抑制することができる。 In the present embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 2333 described in the second embodiment is used as a means for swinging the lever member 340, the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 to push down the rear end of the lever member 340. Even if the portion is lifted and a load is generated from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333, it is possible to prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged due to the sliding of the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b.

ここで、カム部材2333bが本体部材2333aに対して滑ることができるとしても、カム部材2333bのリブ部2333b4の延設方向とレバー部材340の上面とが垂直な姿勢で当接すると、レバー部材340からの荷重が偏心カム部材2333の径方向に働き(周方向に逃げない)、カム部材2333bが破損する恐れがある。 Here, even if the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, when the extending direction of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b and the upper surface of the lever member 340 come into contact with each other in a vertical posture, the lever member 340 The load from the cam member 2333 acts in the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 2333 (does not escape in the circumferential direction), and the cam member 2333b may be damaged.

これに対し、本実施形態では、図71(a)に示すように、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置される状態において、レバー部材340の上面と当接する部位P101が、偏心カム部材2333のリブ部2333b4から所定角度ずれた位置(図71時計回りに所定角度ずれた位置)とされる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the portion P101 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the lever member 340 is the eccentric cam member 2333. It is set to a position deviated from the rib portion 2333b4 of the above by a predetermined angle (a position deviated by a predetermined angle clockwise in FIG. 71).

これにより、図71(a)の状態で、レバー部材340から偏心カム部材2333に荷重が負荷されても、偏心カム部材2333の周方向に荷重が与えられ、カム部材2333bを本体部材2333aに対して滑らせることができる。従って、偏心カム部材2333が破損することを抑制することができる。 As a result, even if a load is applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333 in the state of FIG. 71A, the load is applied in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 2333, and the cam member 2333b is applied to the main body member 2333a. Can be slid. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

本実施形態では、偏心カム部材2333がレバー支持軸331d1の後上方に配置されるので、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を持ち上げる誤操作を行う場合には、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材333から離反する方向に移動する。そのため、レバー部材340を持ち上げる誤操作を行うことにより偏心カム部材2333が破損することを防止することができる。 In the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind and above the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, when the player makes an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 333. Move in the direction you want. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged by performing an erroneous operation of lifting the lever member 340.

なお、図71(a)の状態において、剥離部材350の下側に円柱状の部材が配設され、レバー部材340がそれ以上、揺動不可能とされる(図71(a)の姿勢が終端位置とされる)。 In the state of FIG. 71 (a), a columnar member is arranged under the peeling member 350, and the lever member 340 cannot swing any more (the posture of FIG. 71 (a) is It is considered to be the terminal position).

図71(b)に示す状態から、図72(a)に示す状態まで偏心カム部材2333が反時計回りに回転すると、首振り操作部材310が上方へ揺動する。また、図72(a)の状態から、図71(b)に示す状態まで偏心カム部材2333が逆方向(時計回り)に回転すると、首振り操作部材310が下方へ揺動する。このように、偏心カム部材2333を時計回りに回転させることと、反時計回りに回転させることとを繰り返すことによって、首振り操作部材310を上下に往復揺動(煽り動作)させることができる。これにより、遊技者にとって有利な状態や、不利な状態を報知することができる。また、操作デバイス10300を演出装置として遊技者に視認させることができる。 When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 71 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), the swing operation member 310 swings upward. Further, when the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 72 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 71 (b), the swing operating member 310 swings downward. By repeating the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 clockwise and the counterclockwise rotation in this way, the swing operation member 310 can be reciprocally swung up and down (fanning operation). As a result, it is possible to notify the player of an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state. In addition, the operation device 10300 can be visually recognized by the player as an effect device.

なお、偏心カム部材2333の往復回転により首振り操作部材を上下に往復揺動させる場合、本実施形態のように、レバー支持軸331d1の後方に偏心カム部材2333が配置されることが好ましい。レバー支持軸331d1を遊技者側(前方)に配置し易くなり、これにより、切り欠き331c1,332c1のレバー支持軸331d1の周方向の長さが同じ場合でも、首振り操作部材310の揺動角度を大きくすることができるためである。この場合、首振り操作部材310の上下方向の移動量を大きく保つことができ、首振り操作部材310の演出効果を向上させることができる。 When the swinging operation member is reciprocally swung up and down by the reciprocating rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, it is preferable that the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 as in the present embodiment. The lever support shaft 331d1 can be easily arranged on the player side (front), whereby the swing angle of the swing operation member 310 even when the lengths of the lever support shafts 331d1 of the notches 331c1 and 332c1 in the circumferential direction are the same. This is because can be increased. In this case, the amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 in the vertical direction can be kept large, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

図72(b)に示す状態では、ロック部材336が固定側に配置され、剥離部材350がロック部材336に移動を規制される。そのため、首振り操作部材310に遊技者が手を乗せる等の小さな荷重をかける場合に、レバー部材340及び剥離部材350が揺動することが防止される。 In the state shown in FIG. 72B, the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side, and the release member 350 is restricted from moving by the lock member 336. Therefore, when a small load such as a player placing a hand on the swing operation member 310 is applied, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are prevented from swinging.

図73(a)、図73(b)及び図74は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における操作デバイス10300の断面図である。なお、図73(a)では、首振り操作部材310が上向き位置に配置され、ロック部材336が固定側の位置に配置されると共に偏心カム部材2333がレバー部材340の反対側に退避された状態が図示され、図73(b)では、図73(a)の状態からレバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされると共に、偏心カム部材2333に当接された状態が図示され、図74では、図73(b)の状態から、偏心カム部材2333が時計回りに所定角度回転し、レバー部材340が時計周りに揺動された状態が図示されると共に、図73(b)の状態が想像線で図示される。 73 (a), 73 (b) and 74 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 73A, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the lock member 336 is arranged in the fixed side position, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is retracted to the opposite side of the lever member 340. 73 (b) shows a state in which the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and is in contact with the eccentric cam member 2333 from the state shown in FIG. 73 (a). From the state of FIG. 73 (b), the state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle and the lever member 340 is swung clockwise is shown, and the state of FIG. 73 (b) is an imaginary line. Illustrated in.

本実施形態では、ロック部材336が固定側に配置され、レバー部材340の移動が規制されると、それに伴って、偏心カム部材2333がレバー部材340から離反する位置に移動するように制御される。これにより、首振り操作部材310に負荷がかけられ、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引きはがされ移動する場合に、偏心カム部材2333の筒状部2333b1側に当接されるので(図73(b)参照)、偏心カム部材2333のカム部2333b2が破損することを抑制することができる。 In the present embodiment, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side and the movement of the lever member 340 is restricted, the eccentric cam member 2333 is controlled to move to a position away from the lever member 340. .. As a result, when a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and moved, the lever member 340 is brought into contact with the tubular portion 2333b1 side of the eccentric cam member 2333 (FIG. 73). (See (b)), it is possible to prevent the cam portion 2333b2 of the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

また、本実施形態によれば、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引きはがされた後にレバー部材340が偏心カム部材2333に当接されるので、遊技者が首振り操作部材310に加える荷重の一部がレバー部材340を剥離部材350から引き剥がすことに使用される。そのため、レバー部材340が偏心カム部材2333に負荷する荷重を減少させることができる。 Further, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 2333, so that the load applied by the player to the swing operation member 310 is applied. A part is used to peel the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the lever member 340 can be reduced.

遊技者が首振り操作部材310に押し下げ方向の荷重を加える場合に、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされるまではレバー部材340が移動しないので、遊技者に対して反力が伝えられる(首振り操作部材310の揺動抵抗が高くなる)。これにより、首振り操作部材310を押し下げるためには、遊技者は所定量以上(剥離部材350の磁石部材354とレバー部材340との間の吸着力以上)の負荷を首振り操作部材310に負荷することが必要となるので(重くなるので)、遊技者に操作感を与えることができる。 When the player applies a load in the pushing-down direction to the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 does not move until the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, so that the reaction force is transmitted to the player ( The swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 increases). As a result, in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the player applies a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attractive force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) to the swing operation member 310. Because it is necessary to do (because it becomes heavy), it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation.

図74に示すように、本実施形態によれば、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされた後において、偏心カム部材2333を回転させることで、レバー部材340を揺動させ、首振り操作部材310を上下に往復動作(煽り動作)させることができる。 As shown in FIG. 74, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated to swing the lever member 340 and swing the lever member. The member 310 can be reciprocated up and down (fanned).

これにより、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされたという内部状態の変化を遊技者に認識し難くすることができる。そのため、レバー部材340を剥離部材350から引き剥がすという破壊動作を行うことに伴い遊技者が感じる不安感を抑制することができる。 As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the internal state that the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the anxiety felt by the player due to the destructive operation of peeling the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350.

また、首振り操作部材310の押し下げ操作後にレバー部材340を揺動させることで、首振り操作部材310を把持している遊技者の手に反力を返すことができ、遊技者に操作感を付与することができる。 Further, by swinging the lever member 340 after pushing down the swing operation member 310, a reaction force can be returned to the hand of the player holding the swing operation member 310, giving the player a feeling of operation. Can be granted.

一方で、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされた後で、偏心カム部材2333が高速で回転することで、レバー部材340が高速で往復揺動する。これにより、遊技者に異状を報知することができる。例えば、パチンコ機10の液晶表示装置に、「弱く」という文字を表示して、遊技者に、首振り操作部材310へかける荷重が強すぎることを知らせることができる。 On the other hand, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates at high speed, so that the lever member 340 reciprocates and swings at high speed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the abnormality. For example, the character "weak" can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko machine 10 to notify the player that the load applied to the swing operation member 310 is too strong.

即ち、本実施形態では、レバー部材340を剥離部材350から引き剥がした後で偏心カム部材2333の回転に伴ってレバー部材340を上下に往復揺動させることを、遊技者に操作の反力を返し操作感を付与することにも使えるし、遊技者に異状を報知することにも使用することができる。前者の場合は、遊技者が行う操作を促進する効果を奏し、後者の場合は、遊技者が行う操作を抑制させる効果を奏する。なお、この状態の切替は、偏心カム部材2333の回転速度の大小により切り替えることができる。 That is, in the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the lever member 340 is reciprocally swung up and down with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, which causes the player to perform an operation reaction force. It can be used to give a feeling of return operation, and can also be used to notify the player of an abnormality. In the former case, it has the effect of promoting the operation performed by the player, and in the latter case, it has the effect of suppressing the operation performed by the player. It should be noted that this state can be switched depending on the magnitude of the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333.

従って、本実施形態によれば、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされた後における偏心カム部材2333の回転速度を切り替えることによって、遊技者に所定の操作を促進させたり、所定の操作を抑制させたりすることができる。 Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by switching the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the player can be promoted to perform a predetermined operation or perform a predetermined operation. It can be suppressed.

次いで、図75を参照して、第11実施形態について説明する。上記各実施形態では、レンズ部材317の押し込み動作と首振り操作部材310の揺動動作とは構造的に連関しない場合を説明したが、第11実施形態における操作デバイス11300は、首振り操作部材11310の揺動時の抵抗がレンズ部材317の押し込み動作により上昇する。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pushing operation of the lens member 317 and the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 310 are structurally not related to each other has been described, but the operation device 11300 in the eleventh embodiment has the swinging operation member 11310. The resistance when swinging is increased by the pushing operation of the lens member 317. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図75(a)及び図75(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第11実施形態における首振り操作部材11310及びレバー部材340の部分断面図である。なお、図17(a)は第1実施形態における操作デバイス300を図示したものであるが、外観形状は本実施形態における操作デバイス11300と同等なので、代用する。また、図75(a)では、レンズ部材317が押し込みの負荷を受けない無負荷状態が図示され、図75(b)では、図75(a)の状態から、レンズ部材317が押し込み操作された状態が図示される。 75 (a) and 75 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 11310 and the lever member 340 according to the eleventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 11300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. Further, FIG. 75 (a) shows a no-load state in which the lens member 317 is not subjected to a pushing load, and FIG. 75 (b) shows a pushing operation of the lens member 317 from the state of FIG. 75 (a). The state is illustrated.

図75(a)に示すように、首振り操作部材11310では、振動装置11366の押し付け部材11366bの中心軸上に貫通孔が開口形成され、ボビン部材11366aの底壁から軸支棒363の径方向両側に向けて一対の貫通孔が開口形成される。そのため、振動装置11366を通って振動部材11314から軸支棒363まで貫通する貫通孔が開口形成される。なお、ボビン部材11366aの開口の間隔は、軸支棒363に巻き付けられるねじりバネSP2の外径よりも短くされる。 As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the swing operation member 11310, a through hole is formed on the central axis of the pressing member 11366b of the vibrating device 11366, and a through hole is formed in the radial direction of the shaft support rod 363 from the bottom wall of the bobbin member 11366a. A pair of through holes are formed toward both sides. Therefore, a through hole is formed through the vibrating device 11366 and penetrating from the vibrating member 11314 to the shaft support rod 363. The interval between the openings of the bobbin member 11366a is shorter than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2 wound around the shaft support rod 363.

振動部材11314は、押し付け部材11366bの貫通孔に挿通される回転止め部11314gを備える。 The vibrating member 11314 includes a rotation stop portion 11314g which is inserted into a through hole of the pressing member 11366b.

回転止め部11314gは、押し付け部材11366bの貫通孔に挿通される棒状の部分であって、ボビン部材11366aの一対の貫通孔に挿通されると共に一対の板バネ状に形成される挟み込み部11314g1を備える。 The rotation stop portion 11314g is a rod-shaped portion that is inserted into the through hole of the pressing member 11366b, and includes a sandwiching portion 11314g1 that is inserted into the pair of through holes of the bobbin member 11366a and is formed in the shape of a pair of leaf springs. ..

挟み込み部11314g1は、無負荷状態(図75(a)参照)では、ねじりバネSP2から離間した位置に配置され、レンズ部材317が押し込み操作された状態(図75(b)参照)では、ねじりバネSP2を挟持する位置に配置される。ここで、挟み込み部11314g1が板バネ状に形成され、図75(b)の状態で、挟み込み部11314g1がねじりバネSP2ごと軸支棒363をくわえ込むので、首振り操作部材310の軸支棒363を中心とした揺動動作の抵抗を上昇させることができる。即ち、レンズ部材317を押し込む動作を行うことにより、レバー部材340に対する首振り操作部材310の揺動抵抗を上昇させることができる。 The sandwiching portion 11314g1 is arranged at a position separated from the torsion spring SP2 in the no-load state (see FIG. 75 (a)), and the torsion spring in the state in which the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 75 (b)). It is arranged at a position where the SP2 is sandwiched. Here, the sandwiching portion 11314g1 is formed in a leaf spring shape, and in the state of FIG. 75 (b), the sandwiching portion 11314g1 holds the shaft support rod 363 together with the torsion spring SP2, so that the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation member 310 is held. It is possible to increase the resistance of the swinging motion centered on. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

この場合、振動装置11366の動作時に、振動装置11366の振動が首振り操作部の軸支棒363を中心とした揺動の駆動力として消費され、遊技者に伝わる振動装置11366の振動方向(図75(a)上下方向)の振動成分が減少することを抑制することができる。 In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 11366, the vibration of the vibration device 11366 is consumed as a driving force for the vibration centered on the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation unit, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player (FIG. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the vibration component of 75 (a) in the vertical direction).

また、遊技者がレンズ部材317を押し込み操作している時にのみ首振り操作部材310の揺動を抑制しつつ、遊技者に伝わる振動装置11366の振動成分を確保し、遊技者がレンズ部材317から手を離す無負荷状態においては、振動装置11366の振動によって首振り操作部材310を揺動動作させることができる。 Further, while suppressing the swing of the swing operation member 310 only when the player is pushing the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player is secured, and the player can press the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In the no-load state where the hand is released, the swing operation member 310 can be swung by the vibration of the vibrating device 11366.

これにより、レンズ部材317を押し込む遊技者に伝わる振動成分を確保する効果と、無負荷状態では首振り操作部材11310の動作を激しくし遊技者の注目を集める効果とを、同一の振動装置11366で両立させることができる。 As a result, the same vibrating device 11366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of vibrating the swing operation member 11310 in the no-load state and attracting the player's attention. It can be compatible.

次いで、図76を参照して、第12実施形態について説明する。上記第11実施形態では、レンズ部材317の押し込み動作により首振り操作部材11310の揺動動作の抵抗が上昇する場合を説明したが、第12実施形態における操作デバイス12300は、レンズ部材317の押し込み動作により規制棒365が首振り部材360の角度規制孔361dの下方の端部に押し付けられる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the resistance of the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 11310 increases due to the pushing operation of the lens member 317 has been described, but the operating device 12300 in the twelfth embodiment has the pushing operation of the lens member 317. The regulating rod 365 is pressed against the lower end of the swinging member 360 at the angle regulating hole 361d. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図76(a)及び図76(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線における第12実施形態における首振り操作部材12310及びレバー部材340の部分断面図である。なお、図17(a)は第1実施形態における操作デバイス300を図示したものであるが、外観形状は本実施形態における操作デバイス12300と同等なので、代用する。また、図76(a)では、レンズ部材317が押し込みの負荷を受けない無負荷状態が図示され、図76(b)では、図76(a)の状態から、レンズ部材317が押し込み操作された状態が図示される。 76 (a) and 76 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 12310 and the lever member 340 according to the twelfth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 12300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. Further, FIG. 76 (a) shows a no-load state in which the lens member 317 is not subjected to a pushing load, and FIG. 76 (b) shows a pushing operation of the lens member 317 from the state of FIG. 76 (a). The state is illustrated.

図76(a)に示すように、首振り操作部材12310は、中間枠部材12312と、振動部材12314と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the swing operation member 12310 mainly includes an intermediate frame member 12312 and a vibration member 12314.

中間枠部材12312は、第1実施形態の中間枠部材312(図13参照)に対して、底部312aの中心の開口が拡大される。 The opening of the center of the bottom portion 312a of the intermediate frame member 12312 is enlarged with respect to the intermediate frame member 312 (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment.

振動部材12314は、本体部314aから中間枠部材12312の中心の開口の拡大部分を振動装置366に沿って下方に延設される棒状の押し付け棒部12314gを備える。押し付け棒部12314gは、先端が規制棒365に当接可能な位置まで延設される。 The vibrating member 12314 includes a rod-shaped pressing rod portion 12314g in which an enlarged portion of the central opening of the intermediate frame member 12312 is extended downward along the vibrating device 366 from the main body portion 314a. The pressing rod portion 12314g is extended to a position where the tip can come into contact with the regulation rod 365.

押し付け棒部12314gは、無負荷状態(図76(a)参照)では、規制棒365と接する位置に配置され、レンズ部材317が押し込み操作された状態(図76(b)参照)では、規制棒365に押し当てられる。そのため、レンズ部材317を押し込むことで、押し付け棒部12314gが移動する距離分(本体部314aと押し付け部材366bとの間の距離)だけ、首振り操作部材12310が時計回りに回転され、軸支棒365が角度規制孔361dの終端に押し付けられる。この状態において、角度規制孔361dに対して軸支棒365を固定することができるので、首振り操作部材12310の軸支棒363を中心とした揺動動作を抑制することができる。即ち、レンズ部材317を押し込む動作を行うことにより、レバー部材340に対する首振り操作部材12310の揺動抵抗を上昇させることができる。 The pressing rod portion 12314g is arranged at a position in contact with the regulating rod 365 in the no-load state (see FIG. 76 (a)), and the restricting rod is in the state where the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 76 (b)). It is pressed against 365. Therefore, by pushing the lens member 317, the swing operation member 12310 is rotated clockwise by the distance that the pressing rod portion 12314g moves (the distance between the main body portion 314a and the pressing member 366b), and the shaft support rod is rotated. 365 is pressed against the end of the angle control hole 361d. In this state, since the shaft support rod 365 can be fixed to the angle regulation hole 361d, it is possible to suppress the swinging operation of the swing operation member 12310 centering on the shaft support rod 363. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 12310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

この場合、振動装置366の動作時に、振動装置366の振動が首振り操作部の軸支棒363を中心とした揺動の駆動力として消費され、遊技者に伝わる振動装置366の振動方向(図76(a)上下方向)の振動成分が減少することを抑制することができる。 In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 366, the vibration of the vibration device 366 is consumed as a driving force for the vibration centered on the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation unit, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 366 is transmitted to the player (FIG. FIG. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the vibration component of 76 (a) in the vertical direction).

また、遊技者がレンズ部材317を押し込み操作している時にのみ首振り操作部材12310の揺動を抑制しつつ、遊技者に伝わる振動装置366の振動成分を確保し、遊技者がレンズ部材317から手を離す無負荷状態においては、振動装置366の振動によって首振り操作部材12310を揺動動作させることができる。 Further, while suppressing the swing of the swing operation member 12310 only when the player is pushing the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibration device 366 transmitted to the player is secured, and the player can operate the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In the no-load state where the hand is released, the swing operation member 12310 can be swung by the vibration of the vibrating device 366.

これにより、レンズ部材317を押し込む遊技者に伝わる振動成分を確保する効果と、無負荷状態では首振り操作部材12310の動作を激しくし遊技者の注目を集める効果とを、同一の振動装置366で両立させることができる。 As a result, the same vibration device 366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of vibrating the swing operation member 12310 in the no-load state and attracting the player's attention. It can be compatible.

次いで、図77から図90を参照して、第13実施形態について説明する。上述した第1実施形態では、偏心カム部材333の回転によりレバー部材340が回転動作し、その回転動作中は首振り操作部材310がレバー部材340に対する付勢方向にレバー部材340に対して保持される場合を説明したが、第13実施形態における操作デバイス13300は、レバー部材340が回転動作する間に、首振り操作部材310がレバー部材340に対する付勢方向の逆側にレバー部材340に対して変位する状態を構成可能とされる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 90. In the first embodiment described above, the lever member 340 rotates due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333, and the swing operation member 310 is held against the lever member 340 in the urging direction with respect to the lever member 340 during the rotation operation. However, in the operation device 13300 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the swing operation member 310 with respect to the lever member 340 on the opposite side of the urging direction with respect to the lever member 340 while the lever member 340 rotates. It is possible to configure a state of displacement. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図77は、第13実施形態における操作デバイス13300の正面斜視図である。なお、図77では、操作デバイス13300の首振り操作部材13310が、下向き位置(図7参照)に配置された状態が図示される。図77に示すように、操作デバイス13300は、矩形状の外側ケース部材13320から、首振り操作部材13310が正面側に張り出して配置される。 FIG. 77 is a front perspective view of the operation device 13300 according to the thirteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 77 shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 of the operation device 13300 is arranged in a downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 77, in the operation device 13300, the swing operation member 13310 is arranged so as to project from the rectangular outer case member 13320 to the front side.

図78は、操作デバイス13300の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図78では、外側ケース部材13320が、その外側ケース部材13320よりも内側に配設される内側ケース部材13330から取り外された状態が図示される。 FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 13300. Note that FIG. 78 shows a state in which the outer case member 13320 is removed from the inner case member 13330 arranged inside the outer case member 13320.

図78に示すように、外側ケース部材13320は、カバー部材344,345(図11参照)の曲面に沿った形状で背面側が形成され内側ケース部材13330に正面側からカバー部材344,345の左右の縁を隠す態様で取り付けられる左前カバー13321、右前カバー13322と、内側ケース部材13330に左右方向から締結固定される左カバー部材13323,右カバー部材13324と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 78, the outer case member 13320 is formed on the back surface side in a shape along the curved surface of the cover members 344,345 (see FIG. 11), and the inner case member 13330 is formed on the left and right sides of the cover members 344,345 from the front side. It mainly includes a left front cover 13321 and a right front cover 13322 that are attached in a manner of hiding the edges, and a left cover member 13323 and a right cover member 13324 that are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 13330 from the left and right directions.

左カバー部材13323及び右カバー部材13324は、外側上端部において、前後方向に穿設され左右方向に長尺に延設される調整長孔13323a,13324aをそれぞれ備える。 The left cover member 13323 and the right cover member 13324 are provided with adjusting elongated holes 13323a and 13324a, respectively, which are bored in the front-rear direction and extended in the left-right direction at the outer upper end portion.

調整長孔13323a,13324aは、それぞれ左前カバー13321及び右前カバー13322を締結固定するための孔であり、左右方向に長尺とされることで、成型のばらつき等により左前カバー13321及び右前カバー13322の形状がばらついた場合でも、首振り操作部材13310に対する左前カバー13321及び右前カバー13322の左右方向の位置を容易に調整することができる。これにより、右前カバー13322に嵌め込まれる壁部材13322bと、当接部材13312aとの間に生じる左右方向の位置ずれを低減することができる。 The adjustment elongated holes 13323a and 13324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322, respectively. Since they are elongated in the left-right direction, the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 may be formed due to variations in molding or the like. Even if the shapes vary, the positions of the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 with respect to the swing operation member 13310 can be easily adjusted in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the positional deviation in the left-right direction that occurs between the wall member 13322b fitted into the right front cover 13322 and the contact member 13312a.

左前カバー13321及び右前カバー13322は、調整長孔13323a,13324aに前後方向で締結固定されると共に、左右方向で対向する端面で、左右方向に締結固定される。 The left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 are fastened and fixed to the adjusting elongated holes 13323a and 13324a in the front-rear direction, and are fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at the end faces facing each other in the left-right direction.

図78に示すように、右前カバー13322は、右前カバー13322の左前カバー13321と当接する端面から右方向に凹設される嵌合凹部13322aと、その嵌合凹部13322aに前後方向に抜け止めされる態様で装着される壁部材13322bと、を備え、右前カバー13322と左前カバー13321とが組み立てられた状態(図77参照)において、左方への移動を左前カバー13321の端面によって止められることにより壁部材13322bが嵌合凹部13322aの内部に保持される。 As shown in FIG. 78, the right front cover 13322 is prevented from coming off in the front-rear direction by the fitting recess 13322a recessed in the right direction from the end face of the right front cover 13322 in contact with the left front cover 13322 and the fitting recess 13322a. In a state where the wall member 13322b to be mounted in the embodiment is provided and the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 are assembled (see FIG. 77), the movement to the left is stopped by the end surface of the left front cover 13321 to prevent the wall. The member 13322b is held inside the fitting recess 13322a.

このような構成により、壁部材13322bを交換する際には、右前カバー13322を取り外すのみで壁部材13322bを交換することができる(壁部材13322bは、姿勢修正装置13312からの負荷を受け、破損し易い箇所である)。従って、メンテナンス効率を向上させることができる。 With such a configuration, when the wall member 13322b is replaced, the wall member 13322b can be replaced only by removing the right front cover 13322 (the wall member 13322b is damaged due to the load from the posture correction device 13312). It is an easy place). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

図79は、操作デバイス13300の正面分解斜視図である。なお、図79では、外側ケース部材13320の図示が省略され、内側ケース部材13330が分解された状態が図示される。 FIG. 79 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 13300. In FIG. 79, the illustration of the outer case member 13320 is omitted, and the state in which the inner case member 13330 is disassembled is shown.

図79に示すように、内側ケース部材13330は、複数の棒状部材13331dを備え、その複数の棒状部材13331dは、レバー部材13340を軸支するレバー支持軸331d1と、偏心カム部材5333を軸支する偏心カム軸331d2と、ロック部材5336が軸支されるロック軸4331d3と、そのロック軸4331d3の上方に配置されレバー支持軸331d1よりも短い長さで形成されると共にロック解除カム部材5339が軸支されるロック解除軸13331d5と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a plurality of rod-shaped members 13331d, and the plurality of rod-shaped members 13331d pivotally support a lever support shaft 331d1 that pivotally supports the lever member 13340 and an eccentric cam member 5333. The eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the lock shaft 4331d3 on which the lock member 5336 is pivotally supported, and the lock shaft 4331d3 arranged above the lock shaft 4331d3 are formed to have a length shorter than the lever support shaft 331d1 and the lock release cam member 5339 is pivotally supported. The lock release shaft 13331d5 is mainly provided.

ロック解除軸13331d5の先端には折曲形成される板金部材B13が左カバー部材13331に締結固定されることにより固定される。これにより、ロック解除カム部材5339がロック解除軸13331d5から抜き取り不能に維持される。 A bent sheet metal member B13 is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 13331 at the tip of the unlocking shaft 13331d5. As a result, the unlock cam member 5339 is maintained so as not to be pulled out from the unlock shaft 13331d5.

ロック解除軸13331d5が、レバー支持軸331d1よりも短く形成されることにより、ロック解除軸13331d5が配設されていない部分(ロック解除軸13331d5の先端よりも正面視右方の部分)においてレバー部材13340を回転させることにより、ロック解除軸13331d5とレバー部材13340とが干渉することを避けることができる。 Since the unlocking shaft 13331d5 is formed shorter than the lever support shaft 331d1, the lever member 13340 is located in the portion where the unlocking shaft 13331d5 is not arranged (the portion on the right side of the front end of the unlocking shaft 13331d5). By rotating the lock release shaft 13331d5, it is possible to prevent the lever member 13340 from interfering with each other.

図79に示すように、内側ケース部材13330は、レバー部材13340が内側に配設される箱状に組立てられる左カバー部材13331及び右カバー部材13332と、偏心カム部材5333と、位相検出部材334と、第1駆動装置335と、ロック部材5336と、ギアダンパ338と、ロック解除カム部材5339と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a left cover member 13331 and a right cover member 13332, which are assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 13340 is arranged inside, an eccentric cam member 5333, and a phase detection member 334. , The first drive device 335, the lock member 5336, the gear damper 338, and the unlock cam member 5339 are mainly provided.

図80は、首振り操作部材13310及びレバー部材13340の分解正面斜視図である。図80では、首振り操作部材13310から背面側枠部材13311が分解された状態が図示されると共に、レバー部材13340の左右に締結固定されるギアダンパ受け部材342及び姿勢検出部材343が分解された状態が図示される。 FIG. 80 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 13310 and the lever member 13340. In FIG. 80, a state in which the back side frame member 13311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 13310 is shown, and a state in which the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detecting member 343 that are fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 13340 are disassembled. Is illustrated.

背面側枠部材13311は、外殻が背面側に突出する半球形状に形成され、その突出された先から上部が正面側に張り出す(戻る)態様で略半円状に凹む(図17(b)参照)。その凹む部分に略矩形状の開口である挿通孔311aを備える。挿通孔311aは、首振り部材360が部分的に挿通される貫通孔である。 The back side frame member 13311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the outer shell protrudes to the back side, and the upper part protrudes (returns) to the front side from the protruding tip and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape (FIG. 17 (b). )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swing member 360 is partially inserted.

図80に示すように、レバー部材13340は、鉄などの金属材料から形成され断面コ字状の長尺棒状に形成される本体部材13341と、ギアダンパ受け部材342と、そのギアダンパ受け部材342と同軸で軸支される姿勢検出部材343と、上部カバー部材344と、下部カバー部材345と、角度規制棒部材346と、本体部材341の正面側端部に配設される首振り部材360と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 80, the lever member 13340 is coaxial with the main body member 13341 formed from a metal material such as iron and formed in the shape of a long rod having a U-shaped cross section, the gear damper receiving member 342, and the gear damper receiving member 342. The posture detection member 343, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, the angle control rod member 346, and the swing member 360 arranged at the front end of the main body member 341. Mainly prepare.

図81は、レバー部材13340の本体部材13341、上部カバー部材344、下部カバー部材345及び首振り部材360の正面分解斜視図である。 FIG. 81 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 13341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swinging member 360 of the lever member 13340.

レバー部材13340の本体部材13341は、断面コ字状の長尺棒状に形成される本体部13341aと、その本体部13341aの略中央部において左右方向に穿設される一対の軸孔341bと、規制孔341cと、一対の首振り部材支持部341dと、軸孔341eと、規制孔341fと、本体部13341aの後下部に締結固定されると共に偏心カム部材5333及びロック部材5336(図79参照)と当接される当接部材13341gと、を主に備える。 The main body member 13341 of the lever member 13340 is regulated by a main body portion 13341a formed in a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section and a pair of shaft holes 341b formed in the substantially central portion of the main body portion 13341a in the left-right direction. The hole 341c, the pair of swing member support portions 341d, the shaft hole 341e, the regulation hole 341f, and the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 79) are fastened and fixed to the rear lower portion of the main body portion 13341a. Mainly includes a contact member 13341 g to be contacted.

当接部材13341gは、下側側面の正面側部分において偏心カム部材5333と当接され、下側側面の背面側部分においてロック部材5336と当接される。なお、当接部材13341gの断面形状は、ロック受け部材4350(図46参照)と同等な形状とされる。 The contact member 13341g is in contact with the eccentric cam member 5333 at the front side portion of the lower side surface and is in contact with the lock member 5336 at the back surface side portion of the lower side surface. The cross-sectional shape of the contact member 13341g is the same as that of the lock receiving member 4350 (see FIG. 46).

次いで、図82を参照して、首振り操作部材13310の枠構造について説明する。図82は、首振り操作部材13310の正面分解斜視図である。首振り操作部材13310は、首振り部材360の固定板部361e(図81参照)に締結固定される円盤板形状の中間ベースM13と、その中間ベースM13の下面に締結固定される背面側枠部材13311と、その背面側枠部材13311の内側に配設されると共に内側から外側に張り出す部分を有する姿勢修正装置13312と、背面側枠部材13311と中間ベースM13との間に挟持されるフランジ部を有し背面側枠部材13311及び中間ベースM13を前後方向から挟み互いに締結固定される正面カバー13313及び背面カバー13314と、それら正面カバー13313と背面カバー13314との締結位置に覆設される一対の分離防止カバー13315と、その分離防止カバー13315の下方(図82)から嵌め込まれる保護カバー13316と、中間ベースM13との間で弾性的に連結されるレンズ部材13317と、を主に備える。 Next, the frame structure of the swing operation member 13310 will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 13310. The swing operation member 13310 is a disk plate-shaped intermediate base M13 that is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 361e (see FIG. 81) of the swing member 360, and a back side frame member that is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the intermediate base M13. 13311, a posture correction device 13312 which is arranged inside the back side frame member 13311 and has a portion protruding from the inside to the outside, and a flange portion sandwiched between the back side frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13. The front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, which are fixed to each other by sandwiching the back side frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13 from the front-rear direction, and a pair of covers at the fastening positions of the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314. It mainly includes a separation prevention cover 13315, a protective cover 13316 fitted from below the separation prevention cover 13315 (FIG. 82), and a lens member 13317 elastically connected between the intermediate base M13.

姿勢修正装置13312は、背面側枠部材13311のガイド孔13311bから外方へ張り出される当接部材13312aと、その当接部材13312aとの間にコイルバネSP13を介して配設される支持部材13312bと、背面側枠部材13311の鉤部挿入孔13311eから内方へ張り出されると共に支持部材13312bの係止凸部13312b3と嵌合する鉤形状部分を有する鉤部材13312cと、を備える。 The posture correction device 13312 has a support member 13312b disposed between the contact member 13312a protruding outward from the guide hole 13311b of the back side frame member 13311 and the contact member 13312a via a coil spring SP13. A hook member 13312c having a hook-shaped portion that projects inward from the hook portion insertion hole 13311e of the back side frame member 13311 and fits with the locking convex portion 13312b3 of the support member 13312b.

当接部材13312aは、直棒形状の張り出し部13312a1と、その張り出し部13312a1から左右方向にフランジ状に張り出すフランジ部13312a2と、を備える。 The contact member 13312a includes a straight rod-shaped overhanging portion 13312a1 and a flange portion 13312a2 protruding from the overhanging portion 13312a1 in a flange shape in the left-right direction.

張り出し部13312a1は、背面側枠部材13311のガイド孔13311bの外側に張り出す部分であり、フランジ部13312a2は、背面側枠部材13311の延設壁13311cに当接することで当接部材13312がそれ以上に張り出す事を防止する部分である。 The overhanging portion 13312a1 is a portion that overhangs the outside of the guide hole 13311b of the back side frame member 13311, and the flange portion 13312a2 abuts on the extended wall 13311c of the back side frame member 13311 so that the contact member 13312 is further extended. It is a part that prevents overhanging.

正面カバー13313は、背面カバー13314との締結位置の下方(図82奥方)に、後方へ向けて開放される凹設形状の係止凹部13313aを備える。 The front cover 13313 is provided with a recessed locking recess 13313a that is opened rearward below the fastening position with the back cover 13314 (in the back of FIG. 82).

分離防止カバー13315は、保護カバー13316の外形と同等の形状で凹設され組立状態において保護カバー13316を受け入れ可能に構成される受入凹部13315aと、その受入凹部13315aの上方(図82手前側)に穿設されると共に内部を挿通される棒が組立状態(図77参照)において係止凹部13313aに内嵌可能に構成される抜止孔13315bと、を主に備える。 The separation prevention cover 13315 is recessed in the same shape as the outer shape of the protective cover 13316 so that the protective cover 13316 can be received in the assembled state, and above the receiving recess 13315a (front side in FIG. 82). A rod to be drilled and inserted into the inside is mainly provided with a retaining hole 13315b configured to be internally fitted into the locking recess 13313a in the assembled state (see FIG. 77).

図83は、正面カバー13313、背面カバー13314、分離防止カバー13315及び保護カバー13316の組立方法を時系列で図示するものであり、図83(a)は、正面カバー13313及び背面カバー13314の底面図であり、図83(b)は正面カバー13313、背面カバー13314及び分離防止カバー13315の底面図であり、図83(c)は、図83(b)のLXXXIIIc―LXXXIIIc線における正面カバー13313、背面カバー13314、分離防止カバー13315及び保護カバー13316の断面図である。 FIG. 83 shows the assembly method of the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, the separation prevention cover 13315, and the protective cover 13316 in chronological order, and FIG. 83A is a bottom view of the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314. 83 (b) is a bottom view of the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314 and the separation prevention cover 13315, and FIG. 83 (c) is the front cover 13313 and the back surface of the line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc of FIG. 83 (b). It is sectional drawing of the cover 13314, the separation prevention cover 13315 and the protective cover 13316.

図83に示すように、図83(a)では、正面カバー13313及び背面カバー13314が固定された状態が図視され、図83(b)では、図83(a)の状態に分離防止カバー13315が追加された状態が図視され、図83(c)では、図83(b)の状態に保護カバー13316が追加されると共に背面側枠部材13311に固定された状態が図示される。 As shown in FIG. 83, in FIG. 83 (a), a state in which the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314 are fixed is illustrated, and in FIG. 83 (b), the separation prevention cover 13315 is in the state of FIG. 83 (a). Is added, and FIG. 83 (c) shows a state in which the protective cover 13316 is added to the state of FIG. 83 (b) and is fixed to the back side frame member 13311.

図83(a)に図示されるように、正面カバー13313と背面カバー13314とは、対向配置される壁部分が締結ビスN13aによって締結固定されることにより組立てられる。図83(b)に示すように、締結ビスN13aを覆う(少なくとも前後方向(図83(b)上下方向で覆う)態様で分離防止カバー13315が取り付けられ、係止凹部13313aに挿通される締結ネジN13bが抜止孔13315bに螺入されることにより、分離防止カバー13315が取り外し不能に固定される。 As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314 are assembled by fastening and fixing the wall portions arranged to face each other with the fastening screw N13a. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the separation prevention cover 13315 is attached so as to cover the fastening screw N13a (at least in the front-rear direction (covering in the vertical direction in FIG. 83 (b)), and the fastening screw is inserted into the locking recess 13313a. By screwing N13b into the retaining hole 13315b, the separation prevention cover 13315 is fixed so as not to be removable.

図83(c)に示すように、締結ビスN13bを覆う態様で受入凹部13315aに保護カバー13316が嵌め込まれ(側方(図83(c)右方)へ引き抜き不能な態様で嵌め込まれ)、その後、中間ベースM13(図82参照)が背面側枠部材13311に締結固定されることにより、背面側枠部材の上側面が保護カバー13316の下面と当接される。 As shown in FIG. 83 (c), the protective cover 13316 is fitted into the receiving recess 13315a in a manner of covering the fastening screw N13b (fitted sideways (to the right of FIG. 83C) in a non-pullable manner), and then. By fastening and fixing the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) to the back side frame member 13311, the upper side surface of the back side frame member is brought into contact with the lower surface of the protective cover 13316.

この構造により、正面カバー13313と背面カバー13314とを分離させることを困難とし、操作デバイス13300を部分的に分解して内部にワイヤを通す不正を防止することができる。 With this structure, it is difficult to separate the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, and the operation device 13300 can be partially disassembled to prevent fraudulent passage of wires inside.

即ち、正面カバー13313と背面カバー13314とを分解するには締結ビスN13aを取り外さなければいけないところ、締結ビスN13aへの経路は分離防止カバー13315に防がれている。 That is, the fastening screw N13a must be removed in order to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, but the path to the fastening screw N13a is blocked by the separation prevention cover 133315.

更に、分離防止カバー13315を正面カバー13313及び背面カバー13314から分離させるには締結ビスN13bを取り外さなければいけないところ、締結ビスN13bへの経路は保護カバー13316に防がれており、その保護カバー13316は組立状態において引き抜き方向で背面側枠部材13311に当接されるので、保護カバー13316を取り外すには背面側枠部材13311を中間ベースM13(図82参照)から取り外す必要が生じる。 Further, where the fastening screw N13b must be removed in order to separate the separation prevention cover 13315 from the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, the route to the fastening screw N13b is blocked by the protective cover 13316, and the protective cover 13316 thereof. Is abutted against the back side frame member 13311 in the pull-out direction in the assembled state, so that it is necessary to remove the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) in order to remove the protective cover 13316.

従って、正面カバー13313と背面カバー13314とを分解するために、背面側枠部材13311を中間ベースM13から取り外す必要が生じるが、組立状態において背面側枠部材13311の背面側に左前カバー13321及び右前カバー13322が近接配置される(図77参照)ので、背面側から正面側へ向けて挿通されている締結ネジを取り外すためのアクセス経路が狭くなる。そのため、背面側枠部材13311を中間ベースM13から取り外すことを困難とでき、不正防止を図ることができる。 Therefore, in order to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, it is necessary to remove the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13, but in the assembled state, the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover are on the back side of the back side frame member 13311. Since the 13322s are arranged close to each other (see FIG. 77), the access path for removing the fastening screw inserted from the back side to the front side is narrowed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13, and it is possible to prevent fraud.

次いで、図84を参照して、背面側枠部材13311について説明する。図84(a)は、背面側枠部材13311の斜視図であり、図84(b)は、図84(a)の矢印LXXXIVb方向視(ガイド底壁13311dの面に垂直な方向からの方向視)における背面側枠部材13311の上面図であり、図84(c)は、図84(b)のLXXXIVc−LXXXIVc線における背面側枠部材13311の断面図である。 Next, the back side frame member 13311 will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the back side frame member 13311, and FIG. 84 (b) is a directional view of the arrow LXXXIVb of FIG. 84 (a) (direction view from a direction perpendicular to the plane of the guide bottom wall 13311d). It is a top view of the back side frame member 13311 in FIG. 84 (c), and FIG. 84 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 in the line LXXXXIVc-LXXXXIVc of FIG. 84 (b).

図84に図示されるように、背面側枠部材13311は、レバー部材13340(図80参照)が挿通される挿通孔311aと、その挿通孔311aの下方において前後方向(図84(c)左右方向)に穿設されるガイド孔13311bと、背面側枠部材13311の内側においてガイド孔13311bの左右側面よりも左右方向外側に延設される壁状の延設壁13311cと、ガイド孔13311bの底壁に沿って背面側枠部材13311の内側に延設されるガイド底壁13311dと、そのガイド底壁13311dのガイド孔13311bの反対側の端部において上下方向に穿設される鉤部挿入孔13311eと、延設壁13311cの端部からガイド孔13311bの開口方向に沿って延設される一対の支持部材案内壁13311fと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 84, the back side frame member 13311 has an insertion hole 311a through which the lever member 13340 (see FIG. 80) is inserted, and a front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 84C) below the insertion hole 311a. ), A wall-shaped extension wall 13311c extending laterally from the left and right side surfaces of the guide hole 13311b inside the back side frame member 13311, and a bottom wall of the guide hole 13311b. A guide bottom wall 13311d extending inside the back side frame member 13311 along the line, and a hook insertion hole 13311e formed in the vertical direction at the opposite end of the guide hole 13311b of the guide bottom wall 13311d. A pair of support member guide walls 13311f extending from the end of the extension wall 13311c along the opening direction of the guide hole 13311b are mainly provided.

図84(c)に示すように、鉤部挿入孔13311eは、ガイド底壁13311d側の側面が、下端から上方へ向かうにつれてガイド孔1311bから遠ざかる態様で傾斜する。この傾斜により、後述する鉤部材13312cの傾斜当接部13312c3との当接面積を確保し、ガイド底壁13311dが鉤部材13312cからかけられる負荷により破損する(割れる)ことを防止することができる。 As shown in FIG. 84 (c), the hook insertion hole 13311e is inclined so that the side surface of the guide bottom wall 13311d side moves away from the guide hole 1311b as it goes upward from the lower end. Due to this inclination, the contact area of the hook member 13312c described later with the inclined contact portion 13312c3 can be secured, and the guide bottom wall 13311d can be prevented from being damaged (cracked) by the load applied from the hook member 13312c.

支持部材案内壁13311fは、上端面(図84(a)手前側面)がガイド底壁13311dと平行な面として形成される。 The support member guide wall 13311f is formed so that the upper end surface (front side surface in FIG. 84A) is parallel to the guide bottom wall 13311d.

次いで、図85を参照して、鉤部材13312cについて説明する。鉤部材13312cは硬質の樹脂材料から構成される部材であって、図85(a)は、鉤部材13312cの正面斜視図であり、図85(b)は、図85(a)の矢印LXXXVb方向視における鉤部材13312cの正面図であり、図85(c)は、図85(a)の矢印LXXXVc方向視における鉤部材13312cの側面図であり、図85(d)は、図85(b)のLXXXVd−LXXXVd線における鉤部材13312cの断面図である。 Next, the hook member 13312c will be described with reference to FIG. 85. The hook member 13312c is a member made of a hard resin material, FIG. 85 (a) is a front perspective view of the hook member 13312c, and FIG. 85 (b) is the direction of the arrow LXXXVb in FIG. 85 (a). FIG. 85 (c) is a front view of the hook member 13312c in view, FIG. 85 (c) is a side view of the hook member 13312c in the direction of arrow LXXXVc in FIG. 85 (a), and FIG. 85 (d) is a side view of FIG. 85 (b). It is sectional drawing of the hook member 13312c in the line LXXXXVd-LXXXVd.

図85に示すように、鉤部材13312cは左右対称な形状で構成される部材であって、上下方向に沿った長方形板状の本体部13312c1と、その本体部13312c1の上端部から正面側に延設される鉤部13312c2と、本体部13312c1の下端部から正面側に延設される傾斜当接部13312c3と、本体部13312c1及び傾斜当接部13312c3の底面よりも外側に張り出す底壁として形成される底壁部13312c4と、その底壁部13312c4の下面から本体部13312c1の一部を長手方向に削る態様で凹設される凹設部13312c5と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 85, the hook member 13312c is a member having a symmetrical shape, and extends from the upper end portion of the rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 13312c1 and the main body portion 13312c1 along the vertical direction to the front side. Formed as a hook portion 13312c2 to be provided, an inclined contact portion 13312c3 extending from the lower end portion of the main body portion 13312c1 to the front side, and a bottom wall protruding outward from the bottom surfaces of the main body portion 13312c1 and the inclined contact portion 13312c3. It mainly includes a bottom wall portion 13312c4 to be formed, and a recessed portion 13312c5 recessed in a manner in which a part of the main body portion 13312c1 is cut in the longitudinal direction from the lower surface of the bottom wall portion 13312c4.

傾斜当接部13312c3の底壁部13312c4の傾斜角度は、背面側枠部材13311のガイド底壁13311dに対する鉤部挿入孔13311eの傾斜角度と同等な傾斜角度とされる。 The inclination angle of the bottom wall portion 13312c4 of the inclined contact portion 13312c3 is set to an inclination angle equivalent to the inclination angle of the hook portion insertion hole 13311e with respect to the guide bottom wall 13311d of the back side frame member 13311.

次いで、図86を参照して、支持部材13312bについて説明する。支持部材13312bは硬質樹脂から構成されると共に上面視において長手方向を軸に対称な形状から形成される部材であって、図86(a)は、支持部材13312bの正面斜視図であり、図86(b)は、図86(a)の矢印LXXXVIb方向視における支持部材13312bの上面図であり、図86(c)は、図86(b)のLXXXVIc−LXXXVIc線における支持部材13312bの断面図である。 Next, the support member 13312b will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The support member 13312b is a member made of a hard resin and formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to the longitudinal direction in a top view. FIG. 86A is a front perspective view of the support member 13312b, and FIG. (B) is a top view of the support member 13312b in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIb of FIG. 86 (a), and FIG. 86 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the support member 13312b in the line LXXXVIc-LXXXXVIc of FIG. 86 (b). is there.

図86に示すように、支持部材13312bは、断面L字の板形状に形成される本体部13312b1と、その本体部13312b1の交差部の両側面を連結する一対の板状の当接板13312b2と、本体部13312b1の端部から厚み方向に凸設される係止凸部13312b3と、本体部13312b1の交差部において上下方向に穿設される覗き孔13312b4と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 86, the support member 13312b includes a main body portion 13312b1 formed in a plate shape having an L-shaped cross section and a pair of plate-shaped contact plates 13312b2 connecting both side surfaces of the intersection of the main body portion 13312b1. Mainly includes a locking convex portion 13312b3 that is projected from the end of the main body portion 13312b1 in the thickness direction, and a peep hole 13312b4 that is bored in the vertical direction at the intersection of the main body portion 13312b1.

図86(c)に示すように、支持部材13312bは、本体部13312b1及び当接板13312b2で囲われる領域にコイルバネSP13及び当接部材13312aが配設される部材である。 As shown in FIG. 86 (c), the support member 13312b is a member in which the coil spring SP13 and the contact member 13312a are arranged in the region surrounded by the main body portion 13312b1 and the contact plate 13312b2.

なお、本体部13312b1がコイルバネSP13に被さる状態で組み立てられるところ、覗き孔13312b4を通してコイルバネSP13を視認可能とされるので、組立時にコイルバネSP13を入れ忘れたり、コイルバネSP13の支持部材13312bに対する位置がずれたりすることを防止することができる。 When the main body portion 13312b1 is assembled so as to cover the coil spring SP13, the coil spring SP13 can be visually recognized through the peephole 13312b4. Therefore, the coil spring SP13 may be forgotten to be inserted during assembly, or the position of the coil spring SP13 with respect to the support member 13312b may shift. Can be prevented.

次いで、図87及び図88を参照して、背面側枠部材13311に対して姿勢修正装置13312を組み付ける方法について説明する。なお、図87及び図88では、背面側枠部材13311に姿勢修正装置13312を組み付ける様子が時系列で図示される。 Next, a method of assembling the posture correction device 13312 to the back side frame member 13311 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. In addition, in FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, the state of assembling the posture correction device 13312 to the back side frame member 13311 is shown in time series.

図87(a)は、背面側枠部材13311の部分上面図であり、図87(b)は、図87(a)のLXXXVIIb−LXXXVIIb線における背面側枠部材13311の部分断面図であり、図87(c)は、背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置13312の部分上面図であり、図87(d)は、図87(c)のLXXXVIId−LXXXVIId線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置13312の部分断面図であり、図87(e)は、図87(d)のLXXXVIIe−LXXXVIIe線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置13312の断面図である。 87 (a) is a partial top view of the back side frame member 13311, and FIG. 87 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 in the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a). 87 (c) is a partial top view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312, and FIG. 87 (d) is the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device in the line LXXXVIId-LXXXXVIId of FIG. 87 (c). It is a partial cross-sectional view of 13312, and FIG. 87 (e) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 in the line LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe of FIG. 87 (d).

また、図88(a)、図88(c)及び図88(e)は、背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置13312の部分上面図であり、図88(b)は、図88(a)のLXXXVIIIb−LXXXVIIIb線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置13312の部分断面図であり、図88(d)は、図88(c)のLXXXVIIId−LXXXVIIId線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置13312の部分断面図であり、図88(f)は、図88(e)のLXXXVIIIf−LXXXVIIIf線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置13312の部分断面図である。 88 (a), 88 (c) and 88 (e) are partial top views of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312, and FIG. 88 (b) is a partial top view of FIG. 88 (a). FIG. 88 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 in the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb, and FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of 13312, and FIG. 88 (f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 in the line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf of FIG. 88 (e).

背面側枠部材13310及び姿勢修正装置13312の組立方法について、詳細に説明する。まず、図87(a)及び図87(b)に図示される背面側枠部材13310に、姿勢修正装置13312がガイド底壁13311dに沿う形で移動され、図87(c)及び図87(d)に図示されるように、支持部材13312bの本体部13312b1の先端がガイド孔13311bに挿通される。ここで、支持部材13312bの左方には鉤部材13312cが組み付けられるが、それは後付けとされるので、支持部材13312bをガイド孔13311bに挿通する経路のスペース(図87(d)の支持部材13312bの左方のスペース)を広く取ることができ、支持部材13312bをガイド孔13311bに挿通することを容易とすることができる。 The method of assembling the back side frame member 13310 and the posture correction device 13312 will be described in detail. First, the posture correction device 13312 is moved to the back side frame member 13310 shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and 87 (b) along the guide bottom wall 13311d, and FIGS. 87 (c) and 87 (d). ), The tip of the main body portion 13312b1 of the support member 13312b is inserted into the guide hole 13311b. Here, the hook member 13312c is assembled to the left side of the support member 13312b, but since it is retrofitted, the space of the path for inserting the support member 13312b into the guide hole 13311b (the support member 13312b in FIG. 87 (d)). The space on the left side) can be widened, and the support member 13312b can be easily inserted into the guide hole 13311b.

この状態において、図87(e)に示すように、当接部材13312aは、フランジ部13312a2が背面側枠部材13311の延設壁13311cに係止される(せき止められる)形で背面側枠部材13311の内側に配設される。 In this state, as shown in FIG. 87 (e), in the contact member 13312a, the flange portion 13312a2 is locked (dammed) to the extended wall 13311c of the back side frame member 13311, and the back side frame member 13311 It is arranged inside the.

図87(c)から図87(e)に示す状態において、コイルバネSP13は自然長よりも縮められた状態となっている。即ち、支持部材13312bに右方へ向けた負荷がかけられており、その負荷を解除すると支持部材13312bが左方へ移動することとなる。 In the state shown in FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e), the coil spring SP13 is in a state of being contracted more than its natural length. That is, a load directed to the right is applied to the support member 13312b, and when the load is released, the support member 13312b moves to the left.

図88(a)及び図88(b)に示すように、図87(c)から図87(e)に示す状態から、背面側枠部材13311の鉤部挿入孔13311eに鉤部材13312cを背面側枠部材13311の外側(図88(b)下方)から挿入する。そのため、図88(d)に示すように、鉤部材13312cの一部が背面側枠部材13311の外方に露出するので、組み付け忘れした場合や、鉤部材が破損して脱落した場合に、外観検査でそれらの不良に気付く事ができる。 As shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), from the state shown in FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e), the hook member 13312c is placed on the back side of the hook portion insertion hole 13311e of the back side frame member 13311. It is inserted from the outside of the frame member 13311 (below FIG. 88 (b)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), a part of the hook member 13312c is exposed to the outside of the back side frame member 13311. Therefore, the appearance when the hook member is forgotten to be assembled or the hook member is damaged and falls off. You can notice those defects by inspection.

図88(c)及び図88(d)に示すように、鉤部材13312cの底壁部13312c4がガイド底壁13311dの下側面に当接するまで鉤部材13312cを押し込み、その状態で支持部材13312bにかけられていた負荷を外すと、コイルバネSP13の弾性力により支持部材13312bが鉤部材13312cに当接する位置まで図88(f)左方に移動され(支持部材13312bの左方への移動が鉤部材13312cにより防止され)、係止凸部13312b3が鉤部材13312cの鉤部13312c2に上方から覆われることにより支持部材13312bの上方への移動が規制される。 As shown in FIGS. 88 (c) and 88 (d), the hook member 13312c is pushed in until the bottom wall portion 13312c4 of the hook member 13312c abuts on the lower side surface of the guide bottom wall 13311d, and in that state, the hook member 13312b is hung on the support member 13312b. When the applied load is removed, the support member 13312b is moved to the left in FIG. 88 (f) to the position where the support member 13312b abuts on the hook member 13312c due to the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 (the movement of the support member 13312b to the left is due to the hook member 13312c. (Prevented), the locking convex portion 13312b3 is covered from above by the hook portion 13312c2 of the hook member 13312c, so that the upward movement of the support member 13312b is restricted.

即ち、支持部材13312bが、コイルバネSP13の弾性力により、図88(e)及び図88(f)に図示するように背面側枠部材13311に位置決めされる。 That is, the support member 13312b is positioned on the back side frame member 13311 as shown in FIGS. 88 (e) and 88 (f) by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13.

なお、本実施形態では、鉤部材13312cを背面側枠部材13311の外側から組み付けるようにしているので、支持部材13312bの移動寸法を小さくすることができる。即ち、鉤部材13312cを背面側枠部材13311の内側から背面側枠部材13311に組み付ける実施形態において、鉤部13312c2が支持部材13312bの上方への移動をせき止めるのと同様に、鉤部材13312cが背面側枠部材13311から上方へ移動することをせき止める鉤状部が鉤部13312c2の反対側に配設される場合には、支持部材13312bを鉤部13312c2の分の寸法に加え鉤状部の寸法の分も移動させる必要が生じる。 In the present embodiment, since the hook member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, the moving dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced. That is, in the embodiment in which the hook member 13312c is assembled from the inside of the back side frame member 13311 to the back side frame member 13311, the hook member 13312c is on the back side in the same manner as the hook portion 13312c2 blocks the upward movement of the support member 13312b. When the hook-shaped portion that prevents the frame member 13311 from moving upward is arranged on the opposite side of the hook portion 13312c2, the support member 13312b is added to the size of the hook portion 13312c2 and the size of the hook-shaped portion. Will also need to be moved.

この場合には、コイルバネSP13の選定が困難となり、姿勢修正装置13312の機能に支障をきたすおそれがある。即ち、姿勢修正装置13312の保持力を重視する場合、コイルバネSP13は弾性力の大きい物を選定する方が良い。組付け時に支持部材13312bを余分に移動させる必要(例えば、2倍の距離移動させる必要)が生じると、コイルバネSP13から生じる弾性力はその分だけ大きくなり(例えば、2倍となり)、力の弱い作業者では組み付けが困難となる。 In this case, it becomes difficult to select the coil spring SP13, which may interfere with the function of the posture correction device 13312. That is, when the holding force of the posture correction device 13312 is emphasized, it is better to select a coil spring SP13 having a large elastic force. If it becomes necessary to move the support member 13312b extra (for example, it is necessary to move it twice the distance) during assembly, the elastic force generated from the coil spring SP13 increases (for example, doubles) by that amount, and the force is weak. It is difficult for workers to assemble.

一方で、組立状態で支持部材13312bを保持するコイルバネSP13の弾性力は、鉤部材13312cを組み付ける際に支持部材13312bを移動させた距離には関係無く、組立状態でのコイルバネSP13の自然長からの変位による。そのため、支持部材13312bを移動させる距離を小さくする方が、より小さな力で組み付けられると共に、大きな保持力を確保することができる。本実施形態では、鉤部材13312cを背面側枠部材13311の外側から組み付けるようにしているので、支持部材13312bの移動寸法を小さくすることができる。 On the other hand, the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 that holds the support member 13312b in the assembled state is from the natural length of the coil spring SP13 in the assembled state regardless of the distance that the support member 13312b is moved when assembling the hook member 13312c. Depends on displacement. Therefore, if the distance for moving the support member 13312b is reduced, it can be assembled with a smaller force and a large holding force can be secured. In the present embodiment, since the hook member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, the moving dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced.

姿勢修正装置13312を取り外す際には、支持部材13312bの正面側端部(図88(f)左側端部)をコイルバネSP13が縮む方向に移動させることにより、鉤部材13312cと支持部材13312bとの係止が外れ、鉤部材13312cと支持部材13312bとをそれぞれ別々に背面側枠部材13311から取り外すことができる。 When removing the posture correction device 13312, the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b are engaged by moving the front side end portion (left end portion in FIG. 88F) of the support member 13312b in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts. The stopper is released, and the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b can be separately removed from the back side frame member 13311.

本実施形態では、組立状態(図88(f)参照)において、本体部13312b1の先端が背面側枠部材13311の外側面よりも内側(面位置)に配置されるので、背面側枠部材13311の外側から支持部材13312bを引き出すことが困難とされ、支持部材13312bをコイルバネSP13が縮む方向へ移動させるには、背面側枠部材13311の内側から力を負荷する必要がある。これにより、遊技者が誤って支持部材13312bを背面側枠部材13311から外してしまうことや、支持部材13312bや鉤部材13312cを抜き取る不正等を防止することができる。 In the present embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 88 (f)), the tip of the main body portion 13312b1 is arranged inside (surface position) from the outer surface of the back side frame member 13311, so that the back side frame member 13311 It is difficult to pull out the support member 13312b from the outside, and in order to move the support member 13312b in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts, it is necessary to apply a force from the inside of the back side frame member 13311. This makes it possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the support member 13312b from the back side frame member 13311 and fraudulently pulling out the support member 13312b and the hook member 13312c.

なお、支持部材13312bのぐらつきを防止するために、組立状態(図88(f)参照)において、鉤部材13312cの鉤部13312c2の下面と、支持部材13312bの係止凸部13312b3の上面とを密着させる必要がある。そのため、寸法関係を厳しく管理する必要が生じるが、支持部材13312bや鉤部材13312cの成型のばらつきにより、普通に嵌め込むだけでは鉤部13312c2の下面が係止凸部13312b3の上面よりも上側まで行かない(鉤部13312c2の背面(図88(f)右側の面)と係止凸部13312b3とが当接して支持部材が途中で止まってしまう)場合が生じる恐れがある。 In order to prevent the support member 13312b from wobbling, the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c2 of the hook member 13312c and the upper surface of the locking convex portion 13312b3 of the support member 13312b are brought into close contact with each other in the assembled state (see FIG. 88 (f)). I need to let you. Therefore, it is necessary to strictly control the dimensional relationship, but due to variations in the molding of the support member 13312b and the hook member 13312c, the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c2 may go to the upper side of the upper surface of the locking convex portion 13312b3 just by fitting normally. There is a possibility that there is no such case (the back surface of the hook portion 13312c2 (the surface on the right side in FIG. 88F) and the locking convex portion 13312b3 come into contact with each other and the support member stops in the middle).

本実施形態では、鉤部材13312cに配設される凹設部13312c5に力を集中して押し込むことにより、比較的小さな力で鉤部材13312cを変形させて、鉤部13312c1の下面が係止凸部13312b3の上面よりも上側に行くまで背面側枠部材13311の内側に押し込むことができる。 In the present embodiment, the hook member 13312c is deformed by a relatively small force by concentrating and pushing the force into the recessed portion 13312c5 arranged on the hook member 13312c, and the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c1 is locked by the convex portion. It can be pushed inward of the back side frame member 13311 until it goes above the upper surface of 13312b3.

また、鉤部材13312cが破損したり、鉤部材13312cを取り付け忘れた場合でも、支持部材13312bがコイルバネSP13の弾性力でガイド孔13311bの反対側の壁部に押し付けられるまで移動することにより、鉤部挿入孔13311eが閉鎖される。これにより、鉤部挿入孔13311eからワイヤを侵入させる不正行為を抑制することができる。 Further, even if the hook member 13312c is damaged or the hook member 13312c is forgotten to be attached, the support member 13312b moves until it is pressed against the wall portion on the opposite side of the guide hole 13311b by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13. The insertion hole 13311e is closed. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which the wire is inserted through the hook insertion hole 13311e.

次いで、図89を参照して、姿勢修正装置13312の機能について説明する。図89(a)及び図89(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイス13300の部分断面図である。なお、図89(a)では、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図89(b)では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。 Next, the function of the posture correction device 13312 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. 89 (a) and 89 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 13300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 89A shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 89B shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. ..

図89(a)に示すように、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置される際にレンズ部材13317が移動する方向Y13a(軸支棒363を通る直線方向であって振動装置366が変位する方向)と同じ方向に、遊技者がレンズ部材13317を押し込む操作方向U13aを設定する場合を説明する。なお、方向Y13aと、操作方向U13aとのなす角度が小さいほど、操作が容易となる(手首を返さず押し込める)。 As shown in FIG. 89A, the vibrating device 366 is displaced in the direction Y13a in which the lens member 13317 moves when the swing operating member 13310 is arranged in the upward position (in a linear direction passing through the shaft support rod 363). The case where the player sets the operation direction U13a for pushing the lens member 13317 in the same direction as the direction) will be described. The smaller the angle between the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a, the easier the operation (the wrist can be pushed in without returning).

図89(a)に示す状態から、駆動モータ335a(図79参照)を回転させることにより、偏心カム部材5333が回転し、レバー部材13340を図89(b)に示す下向き位置まで回転させる。 By rotating the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) from the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated, and the lever member 13340 is rotated to the downward position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

ここで、図89(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材13310を上向き位置から下向き位置まで移動する際に、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置される際のレバー部材13340の長手方向と平行な直線X13aと、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置される際のレバー部材13340の長手方向と平行な直線X13bとの成す角度θ13xだけ、レバー部材13340が回転される。 Here, as shown in FIG. 89B, when the swing operation member 13310 is moved from the upward position to the downward position, the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position. The lever member 13340 is rotated by the angle θ13x formed by the straight line X13a parallel to the above and the straight line X13b parallel to the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position.

ここで、レバー部材13340及び首振り操作部材13310が相対変位しない場合、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置されると、方向Y13aと操作方向U13aとの間の角度は、角度θ13xとなる。 Here, when the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 are not relatively displaced, the angle between the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a becomes the angle θ13x when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position.

これに対し、本実施形態では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置されると、当接部材13312aの張り出し部13312a1の先端が壁部材13322bに当接し、レバー部材13340に対して首振り操作部材13310が図89(a)時計回りに角度θ13yだけ回転される。なお、角度θ13yは、首振り部材360の本体部材361が回転可能な角度と同様の角度に設定される。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the tip of the overhanging portion 13312a1 of the contact member 13312a comes into contact with the wall member 13322b, and the swing operation is performed on the lever member 13340. The member 13310 is rotated clockwise by an angle θ13y in FIG. 89 (a). The angle θ13y is set to an angle similar to the angle at which the main body member 361 of the swing member 360 can rotate.

首振り操作部材13310がレバー部材13340に対して首振り回転されることにより、レンズ部材13317が移動する方向が方向Y13bに変化される(方向Y13aと方向Y13bとの成す角度が角度θ13y)。従って、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態において、レンズ部材13317が移動する方向Y13bを操作方向U13aに寄せる(レンズ部材13317を移動させる方向と操作方向U13aとの角度を小さくする)事ができるので、操作感が変化することを避けると共に、遊技者がレンズ部材13317を押しにくくなる事態を避けることができる。 When the swing operation member 13310 swings and rotates with respect to the lever member 13340, the direction in which the lens member 13317 moves is changed to the direction Y13b (the angle formed by the direction Y13a and the direction Y13b is an angle θ13y). Therefore, in the state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the direction Y13b in which the lens member 13317 moves is brought closer to the operation direction U13a (the angle between the direction in which the lens member 13317 is moved and the operation direction U13a is reduced). Since this can be done, it is possible to avoid a change in the operation feeling and a situation in which it becomes difficult for the player to press the lens member 13317.

本実施形態では、レバー部材13340に対する首振り操作部材13310の姿勢変化を、首振り操作部材13310の内部に姿勢修正装置13312を配設することにより達成している。そのため、レバー部材13340の内部に首振り操作部材13310に駆動力を伝達する伝達機構を配設する場合に比較して、構造を簡素化することができる。 In the present embodiment, the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is achieved by disposing the posture correction device 13312 inside the swing operation member 13310. Therefore, the structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the swing operation member 13310 is provided inside the lever member 13340.

また、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置されたタイミングで姿勢変化する構成とされるので、レバー部材13340を回転動作させる間に亘って首振り操作部材13310の姿勢変化を継続させる場合に比較して、遊技者にレンズ部材317を押すタイミングを示唆し易くすることができる。即ち、例えば、レバー部材13340に対して首振り操作部材13310が姿勢変化するタイミングに合わせて、第3図柄表示装置81(図2参照)に「押せ」などの表示をすることにより、第3図柄表示装置81の表示と操作デバイス13310の動きとをリンクさせることができ、遊技者がレンズ部材13317を押すべきタイミングを、遊技者にわかり易く告知することができる。 Further, since the swing operation member 13310 is configured to change its posture at the timing when it is arranged in the downward position, it is compared with the case where the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 is continued while the lever member 13340 is rotated. Therefore, it is possible to easily indicate to the player the timing of pressing the lens member 317. That is, for example, by displaying "press" or the like on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) at the timing when the swing operation member 13310 changes its posture with respect to the lever member 13340, the third symbol The display of the display device 81 and the movement of the operation device 13310 can be linked, and the timing at which the player should press the lens member 13317 can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

本実施形態では、姿勢修正装置13312が首振り操作部材13310のレバー部材13340に対する姿勢を変化させる負荷を与える機能を有するところ、姿勢修正装置13312から首振り操作部材13310に負荷される力はレバー部材13340の回転方向と逆向きに生じる(レバー部材13340が図89(b)反時計回りに回転する際に首振り操作部材13310を図89(b)時計回りに回転させる負荷が生じる)。従って、首振り操作部材13310を姿勢変化させるために姿勢修正装置13312が発生する力が、レバー部材13340を制動させる力としても機能する。そのため、レバー部材13340が勢い余って回転しすぎ、レバー部材13340の後端部(図89(b)右側端部)が内側ケース部材13330に衝突することを防止することができる。 In the present embodiment, the posture correction device 13312 has a function of applying a load for changing the posture of the swing operation member 13310 to the lever member 13340, and the force applied from the posture correction device 13312 to the swing operation member 13310 is the lever member. It occurs in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of 13340 (when the lever member 13340 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 89 (b), a load for rotating the swing operation member 13310 clockwise (b) occurs). Therefore, the force generated by the posture correction device 13312 for changing the posture of the swing operation member 13310 also functions as a force for braking the lever member 13340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 13340 from rotating too much and the rear end portion (right end portion in FIG. 89B) of the lever member 13340 from colliding with the inner case member 13330.

なお、姿勢修正装置13312が当接する壁部材13322bは、レバー部材13340が反時計回りに過回転(図89(b)の状態から更に回転)しようとする場合は、レバー部材13340にも当接可能な位置に配置されている。これにより、レンズ部材13317に遊技者が過荷重をかける場合にでも、レバー部材13340が過回転することを壁部材13322bにより防ぐことができる。 The wall member 13322b with which the posture correction device 13312 abuts can also abut with the lever member 13340 when the lever member 13340 intends to over-rotate counterclockwise (further rotate from the state shown in FIG. 89B). It is placed in a suitable position. As a result, even when the player applies an overload to the lens member 13317, the wall member 13322b can prevent the lever member 13340 from over-rotating.

ここで、レバー部材13340に沿ってレバー部材13340の回転軸から首振り操作部材13310までギアを連結させて、そのギア群の歯合回転により首振り操作部材13310を回転させることも可能である。これに対し、本実施形態では、首振り操作部材13310から張り出された当接部材13312aが壁部材13322bに当接することにより首振り操作部材13310を姿勢変化させるので、レバー部材13340に配設するギア群分の重量を省くことができる。そのため、レバー部材13340を軽量化することができ、駆動モータ335a(図79参照)の駆動力を抑制することができる。 Here, it is also possible to connect gears from the rotation shaft of the lever member 13340 to the swing operation member 13310 along the lever member 13340, and rotate the swing operation member 13310 by the mesh rotation of the gear group. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the contact member 13312a projecting from the swing operation member 13310 changes the posture of the swing operation member 13310 by contacting the wall member 13322b, so that the swing operation member 13310 is arranged on the lever member 13340. The weight of the gear group can be saved. Therefore, the weight of the lever member 13340 can be reduced, and the driving force of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be suppressed.

図89(a)及び図89(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材13310を付勢するねじりバネSP2の弾性力(ねじり方向の変位)が、上向き位置に配置される状態に比較して、下向き位置に配置される状態の方が大きくされる。また、下向き位置では、ねじりバネSP2の付勢方向の反対方向に首振り操作部材13310を回転させようとする態様で姿勢修正装置13312から首振り操作部材13310へ向けて力が負荷される。 As shown in FIGS. 89A and 89B, the elastic force (displacement in the torsional direction) of the torsion spring SP2 that urges the swing operation member 13310 is compared with the state in which the torsion spring SP2 is arranged in the upward position. , The state where it is placed in the downward position is larger. Further, in the downward position, a force is applied from the posture correction device 13312 toward the swing operation member 13310 in a manner in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated in the direction opposite to the urging direction of the torsion spring SP2.

そのため、首振り操作部材13310をレバー部材13340に対して相対変位しないように固定する力が、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置される状態に比較して、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置される状態の方が大きくなる。従って、レバー部材13340に対して首振り操作部材13310の回転抵抗の小さい(軽い)操作感を生じる状態(上向き位置)と、回転抵抗の大きい(重い)操作感を生じる状態(下向き位置)とを形成することができる。 Therefore, the force for fixing the swing operation member 13310 so as not to be relatively displaced with respect to the lever member 13340 is such that the swing operation member 13310 is in the downward position as compared with the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position. The state of being placed in is larger. Therefore, there are two states: a state in which the swing operation member 13310 has a small (light) operation feeling with respect to the lever member 13340 (upward position) and a state in which the rotation resistance is large (heavy) in operation (downward position). Can be formed.

例えば、上向き位置に首振り操作部材13310が配置される時にレンズ部材13317(図77参照)を叩く操作を行う場合に、ねじりバネSP2の付勢力が弱く、叩いた反動で首振り操作部材13310がレバー部材13340に対してぐらぐらと回動する演出を行うことができる一方で、下向き位置に首振り操作部材13310が配置される時にレンズ部材13317を叩く操作を行う場合には、首振り操作部材13310のレバー部材13340に対する回転抵抗が上昇することにより首振り操作部材13310をレバー部材13340に対して固めることができ、例えば、レンズ部材13317を連続して叩く場合に叩き損ねることを抑制することができる。 For example, when the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) is hit when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is weak, and the swing operation member 13310 is affected by the hit reaction. While it is possible to produce an effect of wobbling with respect to the lever member 13340, when the operation of hitting the lens member 13317 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation member 13310 is performed. By increasing the rotational resistance of the lever member 13340, the swinging operation member 13310 can be solidified with respect to the lever member 13340, and for example, it is possible to suppress failure to hit the lens member 13317 when it is continuously hit. ..

なお、本実実施形態における首振り操作部材13310の回転抵抗の変化は、レバー部材13340の位置の変化により生じるものであり、その作用が、レバー部材13340の移動速度によって変化するものでは無い。 The change in the rotational resistance of the swinging operation member 13310 in the present embodiment is caused by a change in the position of the lever member 13340, and the action is not changed by the moving speed of the lever member 13340.

次いで、図90を参照して、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態における首振り操作部材13310の姿勢変化について説明する。図90(a)及び図90(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイス13300の部分断面図である。なお、図90(a)及び図90(b)では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図90(a)では、当接部材13312aが壁部材13322bに当接して後方向に回転された状態が図示され、図90(b)では、レンズ部材13317が押し込まれた後も首振り操作部材13310に力が加えられ、姿勢修正装置13312のコイルバネSP13を縮ませながら、首振り操作部材13310を前方向に倒した状態が図示される。 Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 in the state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position will be described. 90 (a) and 90 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 13300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 90A and FIG. 90B, the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position is shown, and in FIG. 90A, the contact member 13312a comes into contact with the wall member 13322b. In FIG. 90B, a force is applied to the swing operation member 13310 even after the lens member 13317 is pushed in, and the coil spring SP13 of the posture correction device 13312 is contracted while the state of being rotated in the rearward direction is shown. , The state in which the swing operation member 13310 is tilted forward is shown.

図90(b)に示すように、レンズ部材13317に過負荷が与えられた場合にでも、姿勢修正装置13312が縮むことのできる態様で構成されるので、レンズ部材13317に過負荷が生じた場合に首振り操作部材13310を姿勢変化可能とすると共に、壁部材13322bを破損する(貫通して破壊する)ことを防止することができる。 As shown in FIG. 90 (b), even when the lens member 13317 is overloaded, the posture correction device 13312 is configured to be able to contract, so that when the lens member 13317 is overloaded. The posture of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed, and the wall member 13322b can be prevented from being damaged (penetrated and destroyed).

また、当接部材13312aの先端を壁部材13322bに押し当てて首振り操作部材13310を回転させる場合に、その回転角度が大きくなるほどコイルバネSP13の変位が大きくなり、コイルバネSP13から生じる弾性力その変位に比例して大きくなるので、首振り操作部材13310が過度に回転することを抑制することができる。 Further, when the tip of the contact member 13312a is pressed against the wall member 13322b to rotate the swing operation member 13310, the displacement of the coil spring SP13 increases as the rotation angle increases, and the elastic force generated from the coil spring SP13 is affected by the displacement. Since it increases proportionally, it is possible to prevent the swinging operation member 13310 from rotating excessively.

なお、本実施形態では、レンズ部材13317を押し込む方向Y13a,Y13b上に首振り操作部材13310の回転軸である軸支棒363が配設されるので、レンズ部材13317を押し込む荷重により首振り操作部材13310を回転させる力が生じることを抑制することができる。 In the present embodiment, since the shaft support rod 363, which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 13310, is arranged on the directions Y13a and Y13b for pushing the lens member 13317, the swing operation member is subjected to the load of pushing the lens member 13317. It is possible to suppress the generation of a force for rotating the 13310.

次いで、図91から図96を参照して、第14実施形態について説明する。上述した第13実施形態では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置されると首振り操作部材13310が必ず姿勢変化される場合を説明したが、第14実施形態における操作デバイス14300は、首振り操作部材14310が下向き位置に配置された状態において首振り操作部材14310が姿勢変化する場合と、姿勢変化しない場合とを切り替えることができる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the swing operation member 13310 is always arranged in the downward position causes the swing operation member 13310 to change its posture. However, the operation device 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment swings. It is possible to switch between the case where the swinging operation member 14310 changes its posture and the case where the posture does not change when the operating member 14310 is arranged in the downward position. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図91(a)は、第14実施形態におけるロック部材14336の正面図であり、図91(b)は、図91(a)の矢印LXXXXIb方向視におけるロック部材14336の側面図である。 91 (a) is a front view of the lock member 14336 in the 14th embodiment, and FIG. 91 (b) is a side view of the lock member 14336 in the direction of the arrow LXXXXIb of FIG. 91 (a).

図91に示すように、ロック部材14336は、上下方向に長尺な棒形状に構成されると共に湾曲壁部5336a1及び凸設部5336a2を有する本体部材14336aと、軸支孔5336bと、本体部材14336aから没出方向に移動可能に構成される係止部材14336cと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 91, the lock member 14336 is formed in a rod shape that is long in the vertical direction, and has a main body member 14336a having a curved wall portion 5336a1 and a convex portion 5336a2, a shaft support hole 5336b, and a main body member 14336a. It mainly includes a locking member 14336c which is configured to be movable in the sinking direction.

係止部材14336cは、本体部材14336aに没出動作可能に嵌め込まれ、本体部材14336aとの間に付勢バネSP14aが配設される部材であって、出張った状態ではロック解除カム部材5339と当接可能な位置に配置される。係止部材14336cは、上側面に面取りされて構成される面取り部14336c1を備える。 The locking member 14336c is a member that is fitted into the main body member 14336a so as to be retractable, and an urging spring SP14a is arranged between the locking member 14336c and the main body member 14336a, and is in contact with the unlocking cam member 5339 when traveling. It is placed in a position where it can be touched. The locking member 14336c includes a chamfered portion 14336c1 formed by chamfering on the upper side surface.

そのため、ロック解除カム部材5339(図92(a)参照)が係止部材14336cに上方から当接する場合には面取り部14336c1に沿って係止部材14336cを本体部材14336aの内方へ向けて押し込む(没入)させることが可能とされ、上方以外(例えば、正面側から(図91(b)左方から))当接する場合には係止部材14336cを押すことによりロック部材14336を回転させることができる。 Therefore, when the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 92A) comes into contact with the locking member 14336c from above, the locking member 14336c is pushed inward of the main body member 14336a along the chamfered portion 14336c1 (see FIG. 92A). (Immersion) is possible, and the lock member 14336 can be rotated by pushing the locking member 14336c when the contact is made from the front side (for example, from the left side in FIG. 91B). ..

図92(a)を参照して、偏心カム部材14333と、その偏心カム部材14333に当接し回転する姿勢切替装置14337について説明する。図92(a)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイス14300の部分断面図である。 The eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 that abuts and rotates in contact with the eccentric cam member 14333 will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (a). FIG. 92 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 14300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a).

図92(a)に示すように、偏心カム部材14333は、本体部333aと、筒状部333bと、左右方向(図92(a)紙面垂直方向)で形状が異なるカム部14333cと、傘部5333fと、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 92A, the eccentric cam member 14333 includes a main body portion 333a, a tubular portion 333b, a cam portion 14333c having different shapes in the left-right direction (FIG. 92 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface), and an umbrella portion. Mainly includes 5333f.

カム部14333cは、図92(a)手前側において半円状に形成される半円状部14333c1と、その半円状部14333c1の左方(図92(b)紙面奥方)において半円状部14333c1の端部から凸設される凸設部14333c2と、を備える。 The cam portion 14333c is a semicircular portion 14333c1 formed in a semicircular shape on the front side in FIG. 92 (a) and a semicircular portion on the left side of the semicircular portion 14333c1 (in the back of the paper surface in FIG. 92 (b)). A convex portion 14333c2, which is projected from an end portion of the 14333c1, is provided.

凸設部14333c2は、周方向の側面が偏心カム部材14333の径方向に対して傾斜する態様とされる。そのため、凸設部14333c2と、姿勢切替装置14337とが当接する際に、凸設部14337b1を押す力を偏心カム部材14333の周方向の力だけでなく、径方向に発生する力(偏心カム軸331d2との間の距離関係で生じる負荷)によっても生じさせることができる。従って、偏心カム部材14333に生じる回転方向の負荷を低減することができる。 The convex portion 14333c2 is configured such that the side surface in the circumferential direction is inclined with respect to the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333. Therefore, when the convex portion 14333c2 and the attitude switching device 14337 come into contact with each other, the force for pushing the convex portion 14337b1 is not only the force in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 but also the force generated in the radial direction (eccentric cam shaft). It can also be generated by the load generated in the distance relationship with 331d2). Therefore, the load in the rotational direction generated on the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced.

姿勢切替装置14337は、断面L字の板形状に構成される本体部材14337aと、その本体部材14337aの側方から二股を構成する形状で延設される延設部14337bと、それら本体部材14337aと延設部14337bとの連結部分において本体部材14337a及び延設部14337bを軸支する軸支部14337cと、本体部材14337aの端部に弾性力を負荷する事により本体部材14337aの姿勢を中間位置で維持する弾性装置14337dと、を主に備える。 The posture switching device 14337 includes a main body member 14337a having a plate shape with an L-shaped cross section, an extension portion 14337b extending from the side of the main body member 14337a in a bifurcated shape, and these main body members 14337a. The posture of the main body member 14337a is maintained at an intermediate position by applying an elastic force to the shaft support portion 14337c that pivotally supports the main body member 14337a and the extension portion 14337b at the connecting portion with the extension portion 14337b and the end portion of the main body member 14337a. The elastic device 14337d and the like are mainly provided.

本体部材14337aは、軸支部14337cに軸支される端部の反対側の端部が内側ケース部材14330から張り出し可能に構成される。なお、図92(a)に示す状態では、本体部材14337aは首振り操作部材14310に当接はしても、荷重を負荷することはできない位置関係(距離0で触れる位置関係)とされる。 The main body member 14337a is configured such that the end on the opposite side of the end pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 14337c can project from the inner case member 14330. In the state shown in FIG. 92A, the main body member 14337a is in a positional relationship (positional relationship in which the main body member 14337a is touched at a distance of 0) even if it comes into contact with the swing operation member 14310, but cannot apply a load.

延設部14337bは、左右方向(図92(a)紙面垂直方向)の位置として傘部5333fと同じ平面上に配設され、軸支部14337cの反対側において凸設部14333c2と当接可能なように図92(a)紙面手前側に凸設される凸設部14337b1を備える。ここで、凸設部14337b1は、図92(a)の状態で凸設部14333c2の移動軌跡上に配設されると共に、本体部材14337aが端まで回転された状態(図93(b)又は図95(b)参照)において凸設部14333c2の移動軌跡から外れる位置に配設される。 The extension portion 14337b is arranged on the same plane as the umbrella portion 5333f as a position in the left-right direction (vertical direction on the paper surface in FIG. 92A) so that it can come into contact with the convex portion 14333c2 on the opposite side of the shaft support portion 14337c. 92 (a) is provided with a convex portion 14337b1 projecting on the front side of the paper surface. Here, the convex portion 14337b1 is arranged on the movement locus of the convex portion 14333c2 in the state of FIG. 92 (a), and the main body member 14337a is rotated to the end (FIG. 93 (b) or FIG. 95 (b)), it is arranged at a position deviating from the movement locus of the convex portion 14333c2.

弾性装置14337dは、内側ケース部材14330の内側にケースが固着され、本体部材14337aに当接する部分がくの字状に凹設され、その凹設部分がコイルバネで付勢された状態で位置変化可能に構成される。即ち、本体部材14337aが回転仕掛けたとしても、回転力を取り除くと、くの字状の凹設部分に収束される形で位置復帰させる事ができる。 In the elastic device 14337d, the case is fixed to the inside of the inner case member 14330, and the portion in contact with the main body member 14337a is recessed in a dogleg shape, and the recessed portion can be changed in position while being urged by a coil spring. It is composed. That is, even if the main body member 14337a is set to rotate, if the rotational force is removed, the position can be returned in a form that converges on the dogleg-shaped recessed portion.

図92(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイス14300の部分断面図である。なお、図92(b)では、図92(a)の状態から駆動ギア335bが回転され、偏心カム部材14333とロック解除カム部材5339が反時計回りに回転することにより、ロック部材14336が回転され、レバー部材13340が回転し、首振り操作部材14310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。即ち、図92(a)から図92(b)までの間に、首振り操作部材14310は第13実施形態における首振り操作部材13310と同等の距離移動される。 FIG. 92 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 14300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 92 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated from the state of FIG. 92 (a), and the eccentric cam member 14333 and the unlock cam member 5339 are rotated counterclockwise to rotate the lock member 14336. , The state in which the lever member 13340 is rotated and the swing operation member 14310 is arranged in the upward position is shown. That is, between FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b), the swing operation member 14310 is moved by the same distance as the swing operation member 13310 in the thirteenth embodiment.

また、本実施形態では、第13実施形態と比較して、壁部材13322b(図78参照)が省略されると共に、姿勢修正装置13312(図80参照)が張り出す為に穿設されたガイド孔13311bが閉鎖される態様で形成される背面側枠部材14311が首振り操作部材14310の後側面に配設される。 Further, in the present embodiment, as compared with the thirteenth embodiment, the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted, and the guide hole drilled for the posture correction device 13312 (see FIG. 80) to project. A back side frame member 14311 formed in such a manner that the 13311b is closed is arranged on the rear side surface of the swing operation member 14310.

図93(a)及び図93(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイス14300の部分断面図である。なお、図93(a)では、図92(b)の状態から偏心カム部材14333が反時計回りに回転され首振り操作部材14310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図93(b)では、図93(a)の状態から偏心カム部材14333が反時計回りに回転され姿勢切替部材14337の本体部材14337aが回転端まで回転される状態が図示される。図93(b)の状態から更に偏心カム部材14333を回転させると図92(a)の状態に戻る。 93 (a) and 93 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 14300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 93 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 92 (b) and the swing operation member 14310 is arranged in the downward position. The state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 93A and the main body member 14337a of the posture switching member 14337 is rotated to the rotation end is shown. When the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 93 (b), the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 92 (a).

即ち、偏心カム部材14333を図92(a)の反時計回りに回転させる駆動状態では、姿勢切替装置14337から首振り操作部材14310へ負荷が生じることは無く、首振り操作部材14310はレバー部材13340に対して姿勢を維持したまま移動する。 That is, in the driving state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 92 (a), no load is generated from the attitude switching device 14337 to the swing operation member 14310, and the swing operation member 14310 is the lever member 13340. Move while maintaining the posture.

次いで図94を参照して、偏心カム部材14333と姿勢切替装置14337との連動について説明する。図94(a)から図94(c)は、偏心カム部材14333及び姿勢切替装置14337の部分拡大図である。なお、図94(a)では、偏心カム部材14333が反時計回りに回転され、凸設部14333c2と凸設部14337b1とが当接した状態が図示され、図94(b)では、図94(a)の状態から更に偏心カム部材14333が反時計回りに所定量回転され凸設部14337b1が凸設部14333c2よりも偏心カム軸331d2側に移動された状態が図示され、図94(c)では、図94(b)の状態から更に偏心カム部材14333が反時計回りに所定量回転され、凸設部14333c2と凸設部14337b1との当接が解除された直後の状態が図示される。 Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the interlocking of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 will be described. 94 (a) to 94 (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337. Note that FIG. 94 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise and the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 are in contact with each other, and FIG. 94 (b) shows FIG. 94 (b). From the state of a), the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount, and the convex portion 14337b1 is moved to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 side from the convex portion 14333c2. FIG. 94 (c) shows. , The state immediately after the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 94B and the contact between the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 is released is shown.

図94に示すように、本実施形態では、半円状部14333c1で姿勢切替装置14337を押す場合に比較して、延設部14337bの回転角度が小さな状態で凸設部14333c2と凸設部14337b1との当接を解除することができる。 As shown in FIG. 94, in the present embodiment, the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 are in a state where the rotation angle of the extension portion 14337b is smaller than that in the case where the posture switching device 14337 is pushed by the semicircular portion 14333c1. The contact with and can be released.

即ち、半円状部14333c1で姿勢切替装置14337を押す場合、半円状部14333c1の回転軌跡から凸設部14337b1を押し出すまでは、延設部14337bが回転され続ける。 That is, when the posture switching device 14337 is pushed by the semicircular portion 14333c1, the extending portion 14337b continues to rotate until the convex portion 14337b1 is pushed out from the rotation locus of the semicircular portion 14333c1.

これに対し、本実実施形態では、凸設部14337b1が凸設部14333c2と偏心カム軸331d2との間に逃げることができるので(図94(b)参照)、図94(a)に示す状態から、図94(b)に示す状態まで延設部14337bを回転させるのみで、凸設部14333c2と凸設部14337b1との当接を解除することができる(図94(c)参照)。従って、延設部14337bが偏心カム部材14333の回転の抵抗となる領域を小さくする事ができ、偏心カム部材14333を駆動する駆動力を抑制することができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the convex portion 14337b1 can escape between the convex portion 14333c2 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 94 (b)), the state shown in FIG. 94 (a). Therefore, the contact between the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 can be released only by rotating the extension portion 14337b to the state shown in FIG. 94 (b) (see FIG. 94 (c)). Therefore, the region where the extension portion 14337b becomes a resistance to rotation of the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced, and the driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 14333 can be suppressed.

図95及び図96を参照して、図95(a)、図95(b)、図96(a)及び図96(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における操作デバイス14300の部分断面図である。なお、図95(a)では、首振り操作部材14310が下向き位置に配置されると共に偏心カム部材14333の凸設部14333c2が姿勢切替装置の凸設部14337b1よりも下方に配置された状態(図92(a)と同等の状態)が図示され、図95(b)では、図95(a)の状態から偏心カム部材14333が時計回りに回転され凸設部14333cが凸設部14337b1を押すことにより姿勢切替部材14337の本体部材14337aが回転端まで回転された状態が図示され、図96(a)では、図95(b)に示す状態から偏心カム部材14333が時計回りに回転された状態が図示され、図96(b)では、図96(a)に示す状態から偏心カム部材14333が時計回りに回転された状態が図示される。 95 (a), 95 (b), 96 (a) and 96 (b) are the lines corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa lines of FIG. 17 (a) with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 14300. In FIG. 95A, the swing operation member 14310 is arranged in a downward position, and the convex portion 14333c2 of the eccentric cam member 14333 is arranged below the convex portion 14337b1 of the attitude switching device (FIG. FIG. A state equivalent to 92 (a)) is shown, and in FIG. 95 (b), the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 95 (a), and the convex portion 14333c pushes the convex portion 14337b1. The state in which the main body member 14337a of the posture switching member 14337 is rotated to the rotation end is shown, and in FIG. 96 (a), the state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 95 (b) is shown. Illustrated, FIG. 96 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 96 (a).

図95及び図96に示すように、偏心カム部材14333を反時計回りに回転させることにより、姿勢切替装置14337を介して首振り操作部材14310を首振り動作させることができる(図95(b)参照)。即ち、偏心カム部材14333の回転方向を切り替えるだけで、下向き位置において首振り操作部材14310を首振りさせる動作状態と、首振り操作部材14310のレバー部材13340に対する姿勢を維持する動作状態とを切り替えることができる。 As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, by rotating the eccentric cam member 14333 counterclockwise, the swing operation member 14310 can be swung via the attitude switching device 14337 (FIG. 95 (b)). reference). That is, by simply switching the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, the operation state of swinging the swing operation member 14310 in the downward position and the operation state of maintaining the posture of the swing operation member 14310 with respect to the lever member 13340 can be switched. Can be done.

また、図95(b)に図示されるように、偏心カム部材14333で首振り操作部材14310に負荷をあたえる際には、レバー部材13340に対して偏心カム部材14333は負荷を与えていない。これは、レバー部材13340と姿勢切替装置14337との間に十分な距離を設け、レバー部材13340、姿勢切替装置14337及び偏心カム部材14333が同時に当接しない位置関係で配設したことによる。従って、偏心カム部材14333により複数の部材にそれぞれ駆動力を伝達可能としながらも、それらが同時に伝達されることは避けることができるので、駆動モータ335a(図79参照)の駆動力を抑制することができる。 Further, as shown in FIG. 95B, when the eccentric cam member 14333 applies a load to the swing operation member 14310, the eccentric cam member 14333 does not apply a load to the lever member 13340. This is because a sufficient distance is provided between the lever member 13340 and the attitude switching device 14337, and the lever member 13340, the attitude switching device 14337, and the eccentric cam member 14333 are arranged in a positional relationship so as not to come into contact with each other at the same time. Therefore, while the eccentric cam member 14333 can transmit the driving force to each of the plurality of members, it is possible to avoid transmitting them at the same time, so that the driving force of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) is suppressed. Can be done.

凸設部14333c2の上側側面(凸設部14337b1と当接する側面)が、偏心カム部材14333の軸径方向に対して傾斜して形成されるので、凸設部14333c2と、姿勢切替装置14337とが当接する際に、凸設部14337b1を押す力を偏心カム部材14333の周方向の力だけでなく、径方向に発生する力(偏心カム軸331d2との間の距離関係で生じる負荷)によっても生じさせることができる。従って、偏心カム部材14333に生じる回転方向の負荷を低減することができる。 Since the upper side surface of the convex portion 14333c2 (the side surface that comes into contact with the convex portion 14337b1) is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the axial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, the convex portion 14333c2 and the posture switching device 14337 are formed. The force that pushes the convex portion 14337b1 at the time of contact is generated not only by the force in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 but also by the force generated in the radial direction (the load generated by the distance relationship with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2). Can be made to. Therefore, the load in the rotational direction generated on the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced.

なお、図96(b)の状態から更に偏心カム部材14333が時計回りに回転すると図95(a)の状態に戻る。このとき、ロック解除カム部材5339はロック部材14336に対して上方から当接されるので、ロック部材14336の係止部材14336c(図91参照)は没入状態とされ、ロック解除カム部材5339の回転が阻害されることは防止される。 When the eccentric cam member 14333 further rotates clockwise from the state of FIG. 96 (b), it returns to the state of FIG. 95 (a). At this time, since the unlock cam member 5339 is brought into contact with the lock member 14336 from above, the locking member 14336c (see FIG. 91) of the lock member 14336 is in an immersive state, and the rotation of the unlock cam member 5339 is performed. It is prevented from being hindered.

図92から図96で説明したように、偏心カム部材14333の回転方向を切り替えることにより首振り操作部材14310が下向き位置に配置された状態において姿勢変化するか否かを切り替えることができるので、例えば、偏心カム部材14333を特定の位相に配置することにより首振り操作部材14310に負荷を与える場合に比較して、駆動モータ335a(図79参照)の制御を緩くすることができる(多少空回りさせたとしても、外観上変化を生じなくさせることができる)。 As described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96, by switching the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, it is possible to switch whether or not the posture changes when the swing operation member 14310 is arranged in the downward position. By arranging the eccentric cam member 14333 in a specific phase, the control of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be loosened (slightly idle) as compared with the case where a load is applied to the swing operation member 14310. However, it is possible to prevent the appearance from changing).

ここで、図92(a)の状態から偏心カム部材14333が回転されることにより図92(b)の状態へ変わるまでの時間と、図95(a)の状態から偏心カム部材14333が回転されることにより図95(b)の状態へ変わるまでの時間とを合わせることにより(合致するように偏心カム部材14333及びロック部材14336の停止位置を定めることにより)、偏心カム部材14333の回転速度はそのままで、回転方向を切り替えることにより、駆動モータ335a(図79参照)の駆動後の同じタイミングで図92(a)の状態から図92(b)の状態へ変わるか、図95(a)の状態から図95(b)の状態へ変わるかのどちらかの変化を生じさせることができる。 Here, the time until the eccentric cam member 14333 changes from the state of FIG. 92 (a) to the state of FIG. 92 (b) and the eccentric cam member 14333 are rotated from the state of FIG. 95 (a). By matching the time until the state changes to the state shown in FIG. 95 (b) (by determining the stop positions of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 so as to match), the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 14333 can be adjusted. By switching the rotation direction as it is, the state of FIG. 92 (a) changes to the state of FIG. 92 (b) at the same timing after the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) is driven, or the state of FIG. 95 (a). Either change from state to state in FIG. 95 (b) can occur.

例えば、図92(a)の状態から図92(b)の状態へ変わる変化が生じるまでの時間よりも、図95(a)の状態から図95(b)の状態へ変わる変化が生じるまでの時間の方が短いとすると、駆動モータ335aの動作振動を感じてから図95(a)の状態から図95(b)の状態へ変わる変化が生じ無い場合には、必然的に図92(a)の状態から図92(b)の状態へ変わる変化が生じることとなってしまい、首振り操作部材14310の動きに注目せずとも首振り操作部材14310が次にどんな動作を行うかを判別できてしまい、遊技者の興趣を低下させることになる。 For example, it takes longer than the time until the change from the state of FIG. 92 (a) to the state of FIG. 92 (b) occurs until the change from the state of FIG. 95 (a) to the state of FIG. 95 (b) occurs. Assuming that the time is shorter, if there is no change from the state shown in FIG. 95 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 95 (b) after the operating vibration of the drive motor 335a is felt, it is inevitable that the state shown in FIG. ) Will change to the state shown in FIG. 92 (b), and it is possible to determine what kind of operation the swing operation member 14310 will perform next without paying attention to the movement of the swing operation member 14310. This will reduce the interest of the player.

これに対し、本実施形態では、駆動モータ335aの振動を遊技者が感じたとしても、それによって図92(a)の状態から図92(b)の状態へ変わる変化が生じるのか、図95(a)の状態から図95(b)の状態へ変わる変化が生じるのかを判別することを不可能とすることができる。従って、首振り操作部材14310への遊技者の注目力を向上させることができる。 On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the player feels the vibration of the drive motor 335a, does it cause a change from the state of FIG. 92 (a) to the state of FIG. 92 (b)? It is possible to make it impossible to determine whether or not a change from the state of a) to the state of FIG. 95 (b) occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the swing operation member 14310.

なお、本実施形態では、偏心カム部材14333とロック部材14336とが同一の駆動ギア335bに歯合され同期回転する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものでは無い。例えば、第4実施形態のように、偏心カム部材14333とロック部材14336とが別の駆動ギアで回転されても良い。この場合にも、いずれかの駆動モータを動作させてから、首振り操作部材14310がレバー部材13340に対して首振り動作(図92(a)時計回りに回転)し始めるまでの時間と、レバー部材13340が図92(a)時計回りに回転動作し始めるまでの時間とを合わせることで、同様の効果を得ることができる。 In the present embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 are meshed with the same drive gear 335b and rotate synchronously has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the fourth embodiment, the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 may be rotated by different drive gears. In this case as well, the time from operating one of the drive motors until the swinging operation member 14310 starts swinging with respect to the lever member 13340 (rotating clockwise in FIG. 92A) and the lever. The same effect can be obtained by combining the time until the member 13340 starts to rotate clockwise in FIG. 92 (a).

また、それぞれ動作し始めるまでの時間が異なる場合にも、かかる時間が長い第1の駆動モータを先に回転させ、かかる時間の短い第2の駆動モータを後で回転させた後で、先に駆動させた第1の駆動モータを停止させることにより(この間も第2の駆動モータの振動を遊技者が感じる)、かかる時間の長い第1の駆動モータの振動を遊技者に感じさせながら、第2の駆動モータによる動作を生じさせる事ができ、遊技者に驚きを与えることができる。 In addition, even if the time required to start operation is different, the first drive motor, which takes a long time, is rotated first, and the second drive motor, which takes a short time, is rotated later, and then first. By stopping the driven first drive motor (the player still feels the vibration of the second drive motor during this period), the player feels the vibration of the first drive motor, which takes a long time, and the first The operation by the drive motor of 2 can be generated, and the player can be surprised.

次いで図97を参照して、偏心カム部材14333と姿勢切替装置14337との連動について説明する。図97(a)から図97(c)は、偏心カム部材14333及び姿勢切替装置14337の部分拡大図である。なお、図97(a)では、偏心カム部材14333が時計回りに回転され、凸設部14333c2と凸設部14337b1とが当接し始めた状態が図示され、図97(b)では、図97(a)の状態から更に偏心カム部材14333が時計回りに所定量回転され凸設部14337b1が凸設部14333c2の外周に近い側に移動された状態が図示され、図97(c)では、図97(b)の状態から更に偏心カム部材14333が時計回りに所定量回転され、凸設部14333c2の外周面に凸設部14337b1が当接された状態が図示される。 Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the interlocking of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 will be described. 97 (a) to 97 (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the attitude switching device 14337. Note that FIG. 97 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise and the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 start to come into contact with each other. FIG. 97 (b) shows FIG. 97 (b). From the state of a), the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, and the convex portion 14337b1 is moved to the side closer to the outer periphery of the convex portion 14333c2. FIG. 97 (c) shows FIG. 97. From the state of (b), the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, and the state in which the convex portion 14337b1 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the convex portion 14333c2 is shown.

図97に示すように、凸設部14333c2の上側面が外周面から偏心カム軸331d2に近接するほど外周面と偏心カム軸331dを結ぶ直線から遠ざかる態様で傾斜するので、偏心カム部材14333の回転による変位が、凸設部14337b1を偏心カム部材14333の軸径方向に移動させる(負荷の軸径方向への成分が支配的となる)。そのため、偏心カム部材14333に周方向の抵抗が生じる場合に比較して、偏心カム部材14333に与えられる負荷(駆動モータ335aに与えられる負荷)を抑制することができる。 As shown in FIG. 97, the closer the upper side surface of the convex portion 14333c2 is to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 from the outer peripheral surface, the more it is inclined from the straight line connecting the outer peripheral surface and the eccentric cam shaft 331d. Therefore, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 14333 The displacement due to the above causes the convex portion 14337b1 to move in the axial direction of the shaft of the eccentric cam member 14333 (the component in the axial direction of the load becomes dominant). Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 14333 (the load applied to the drive motor 335a) can be suppressed as compared with the case where resistance in the circumferential direction is generated in the eccentric cam member 14333.

また、図97(c)に示す状態において、凸設部14337bから偏心カム部材14333へ与えられる負荷は偏心カム軸331d2を通るので、偏心カム部材14333を回転させる力が生じず、駆動モータ335aの動力を切った状態でも凸設部14337bからの負荷に対抗することができる。従って、駆動モータ335aの消費電力を低減することができる。 Further, in the state shown in FIG. 97 (c), since the load applied from the convex portion 14337b to the eccentric cam member 14333 passes through the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, no force is generated to rotate the eccentric cam member 14333, and the drive motor 335a Even when the power is turned off, the load from the convex portion 14337b can be countered. Therefore, the power consumption of the drive motor 335a can be reduced.

次いで、図98及び図99を参照して、第15実施形態について説明する。上述した第13実施形態では、姿勢修正装置13312の当接部材13312aを背面側枠部材13311の外側から抜き取り不能な場合を説明したが、第15実施形態における操作デバイス15300は、当接部材13312aを背面側枠部材13311の外側から抜き取る状態を構成可能とされる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 cannot be pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311 has been described, but the operation device 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment has the contact member 13312a. It is possible to configure a state in which the back side frame member 13311 is pulled out from the outside. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図98(a)及び図98(b)は、第15実施形態における当接部材15312aの上面図であり、図98(c)は、図87のLXXXVIIb−LXXXVIIb線に対応する線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置15312の断面図であり、図98(d)は、図98(c)のLXXXXVIIId−LXXXXVIIId線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置15312の断面図である。 98 (a) and 98 (b) are top views of the contact member 15312a in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 98 (c) is a back side frame in a line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. FIG. 98 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312, and FIG. 98 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312 in the line LXXXXXXVIIId-LXXXXVIIId of FIG. 98 (c).

なお、図98(a)では、フランジ部材15312a2が張り出し部材13312a1に埋め込まれた状態(係止状態)が図示され、図98(b)では、フランジ部材15312a2が張り出し部材13312a1から抜き取られた状態(抜き状態)が図示される。 Note that FIG. 98A shows a state in which the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the overhanging member 13312a1 (locked state), and FIG. 98B shows a state in which the flange member 15312a2 is pulled out from the overhanging member 13312a1 (in FIG. 98B). The unplugged state) is shown.

図98(a)及び図98(b)に示すように、当接部材15312aは、端部が変形可能に構成される棒状の張り出し部材15312a1と、断面T字状に形成されると共に張り出し部材15312a1に埋め込まれることで張り出し部材15312a1を変形させるフランジ部材15312a2と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b), the contact member 15312a is formed with a rod-shaped overhang member 15312a1 having a deformable end portion and a T-shaped cross section, and the overhang member 15312a1. Mainly includes a flange member 15312a2 that deforms the overhanging member 15312a1 by being embedded in the.

張り出し部材15312a1は、弾性率の高いゴム材料から形成され、長尺棒状の本体部15312a11と、その本体部15312a11の一端の短手方向端部において連結される一対の変形部15312a12と、を主に備える。本体部15312a11と変形部15312a12との連結部分には、変形し易いように切れ目が入れられており、フランジ部材15312a2が埋め込まれていない状態(図98(b)参照)において変形部15312a12は本体部15312a11の短手方向の幅の内側に収まる。 The overhanging member 15312a1 is formed of a rubber material having a high elastic modulus, and mainly includes a long rod-shaped main body portion 15312a11 and a pair of deformed portions 15312a12 connected at one end of the main body portion 15312a11 in the lateral direction. Be prepared. The connecting portion between the main body portion 15312a11 and the deforming portion 15312a12 is provided with a cut so as to be easily deformed, and the deformed portion 15312a12 is the main body portion in a state where the flange member 15312a2 is not embedded (see FIG. 98 (b)). It fits inside the width of 15312a11 in the lateral direction.

フランジ部材15312a2は、一対の支持部材案内壁13311fの間に収まる寸法で形成される土台部15312a21と、その土台部15312a21から張り出し部材15312a1の本体部15312a11と変形部15312a12との連結部分同士の距離よりも短い幅で凸設される凸設部15312a22と、を主に備える。 The flange member 15312a2 is based on the distance between the base portion 15312a21 formed so as to fit between the pair of support member guide walls 13311f and the connecting portion between the main body portion 15312a11 of the overhanging member 15312a1 and the deformed portion 15312a12 from the base portion 15312a21. Also mainly includes a convex portion 15312a22 which is convexly provided with a short width.

このような構成により、フランジ部材15312a2の凸設部15312a22が張り出し部材15312a1に埋め込まれる場合には張り出し部材15312a1の変形部15312a12が外側に張り出す係止状態(図98(a)参照)とされ、フランジ部材15312a2が張り出し部材15312a1から離される場合には変形部15312a12が内側にすぼまる抜き状態(図98(b)参照)とされる。 With such a configuration, when the convex portion 15312a22 of the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 of the overhanging member 15312a1 is in a locked state (see FIG. 98A). When the flange member 15312a2 is separated from the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 is in a pulled-out state (see FIG. 98B).

図98(c)及び図98(d)では、鉤部材13312cが背面側外枠部材13311に組み付けられた状態が図示される。この状態において、コイルバネSP13は自然長よりも短くされるので、コイルバネSP13からフランジ部材15312a2を張り出し部材15312a1に埋め込ませる負荷を生じさせる事ができる。そのため、図98(d)に示すように、当接部材15312aは係止状態とされる。この係止状態において、張り出し部材15312a1を引き抜こうとしても、変形部15312a12が引っ掛かり、引き抜く事ができない。従って、遊技者が誤って張り出し部材15312a1を引き抜く事や、張り出し部材15312a1を引き抜く不正を防止することができる。 In FIGS. 98 (c) and 98 (d), a state in which the hook member 13312c is assembled to the back side outer frame member 13311 is illustrated. In this state, since the coil spring SP13 is shorter than the natural length, it is possible to generate a load for embedding the flange member 15312a2 in the overhanging member 15312a1 from the coil spring SP13. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98 (d), the contact member 15312a is in the locked state. In this locked state, even if an attempt is made to pull out the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 is caught and cannot be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally pulling out the overhanging member 15312a1 and fraudulently pulling out the overhanging member 15312a1.

図99(a)は、図87のLXXXVIIb−LXXXVIIb線に対応する線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置15312の断面図であり、図99(b)は、図99(a)のLXXXXIXb−LXXXXIXb線における背面側枠部材13311及び姿勢修正装置15312の断面図である。 FIG. 99 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312 in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87, and FIG. 99 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the LXXXXXIXb- of FIG. 99 (a). It is sectional drawing of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312 in line LXXXXXXb.

なお、図99(a)及び図99(b)では、鉤部材13312cが背面側枠部材13311から外され、鉤部材13312cが占めていたスペースに支持部材13312bをスライド移動させた状態が図示される。 In addition, in FIGS. 99A and 99B, a state in which the hook member 13312c is removed from the back side frame member 13311 and the support member 13312b is slid to the space occupied by the hook member 13312c is shown. ..

図99(a)及び図99(b)に示す状態において、コイルバネSP13は自然長よりも長い状態とされるので、フランジ部材15312a2を張り出し部材15312a1に押し付ける力が生じなくなり、変形部15312a12が形状を復帰(図98(b)の状態へと復帰)することにより、当接部材15312aが抜き状態とされる。これにより、張り出し部材15312a1を背面側枠部材13311の外側(図99(b)右方)から抜き取ることができる。 In the states shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), since the coil spring SP13 is in a state longer than the natural length, the force for pressing the flange member 15312a2 against the overhanging member 15312a1 is not generated, and the deformed portion 15312a12 has a shape. By returning (returning to the state shown in FIG. 98 (b)), the contact member 15312a is brought into the removed state. As a result, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be pulled out from the outside (right side in FIG. 99B) of the back side frame member 13311.

即ち、支持部材13312bを背面側枠部材13311から離間させなくとも、横スライドさせるだけで、張り出し部材15312a1を交換することができる。そのため、例えば、背面側枠部材13311の内側に多く部材が配設されており、支持部材13312bをガイド底壁13311dから離間させることができなくとも、他の部材と衝突するため破損し易い部分である張り出し部材15312a1の交換を行うことができ、メンテナンス性を向上させることができる。 That is, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be replaced by simply sliding the support member 13312b laterally without separating it from the back side frame member 13311. Therefore, for example, many members are arranged inside the back side frame member 13311, and even if the support member 13312b cannot be separated from the guide bottom wall 13311d, it collides with other members and is easily damaged. A certain overhanging member 15312a1 can be replaced, and maintainability can be improved.

本実施形態の構成によれば、鉤部材13312cが脱落することにより、支持部材13312bが移動することで、当接部材15312aを背面側枠部材13311の外側に押し出す力は低減されるので、鉤部材13312cが割れるなどして脱落するような大きな荷重が支持部材13312bから鉤部材13312cへかけられた場合に、当接部材15312aが同じように破損することを抑制することができる。 According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the force of pushing the contact member 15312a to the outside of the back side frame member 13311 is reduced by moving the support member 13312b due to the hook member 13312c falling off, so that the hook member When a large load such as the 13312c falling off due to cracking is applied from the support member 13312b to the hook member 13312c, it is possible to prevent the contact member 15312a from being similarly damaged.

本実施形態の構成によれば、鉤部材13312cが脱落した場合には、当接部材15312aを抜き状態とできることから、取り替えを早急に行うことができる。例えば、当接部材15312aが壁部材13322b(図78参照)に疲労強度に安全を考慮した重み付けをした回数としての所定回数衝突することにより鉤部材13312cが脱落するように疲労強度を設計しておくことにより、鉤部材13312cの脱落を目印に当接部材15312aの交換時期を判断することができる。また、鉤部材13312cが脱落した状態では、張り出し部材15312a1を背面側枠部材13311の外側から抜き取り可能なので、取り替えを容易におこなうことができ、メンテナンス性能を向上させることができる。 According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the hook member 13312c falls off, the contact member 15312a can be pulled out, so that the replacement can be performed immediately. For example, the fatigue strength is designed so that the hook member 13312c falls off when the contact member 15312a collides with the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) a predetermined number of times as the number of times the fatigue strength is weighted in consideration of safety. Thereby, the replacement time of the contact member 15312a can be determined by using the detachment of the hook member 13312c as a mark. Further, in the state where the hook member 13312c has fallen off, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, so that the replacement can be easily performed and the maintenance performance can be improved.

次いで、図100を参照して、第16実施形態について説明する。上述した第13実施形態では、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置されるか下向き位置に配置されるかによって、首振り操作部材13310を付勢するねじりバネSP1の弾性力が変化し、首振り操作部材13310の操作感が変化する場合を説明したが、第16実施形態における操作デバイス16300は、それに加えて、首振り操作部材16310の重心位置が変化することによって首振り操作部材16310の操作感を変化可能とされる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the elastic force of the torsion spring SP1 that urges the swing operation member 13310 changes depending on whether the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position, and the neck is changed. The case where the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes has been described, but in addition to this, the operation device 16300 in the 16th embodiment operates the swing operation member 16310 by changing the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310. The feeling can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図100(a)から図100(d)は、第16実施形態における操作デバイス16300の側面図である。なお、図100(a)から図100(d)では、首振り操作部材16310の外観図が図示されると共に、レバー部材13340の断面図が模式的に図示され、その他の部分が模式的に想像線で図示される。 100 (a) to 100 (d) are side views of the operation device 16300 according to the 16th embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 100A to 100D, an external view of the swing operation member 16310 is shown, a cross-sectional view of the lever member 13340 is schematically shown, and other parts are schematically imagined. Illustrated by a line.

図100(a)及び図100(b)では、首振り操作部材16310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図100(c)及び図100(d)では、首振り操作部材16310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。また、図100(a)及び図100(c)では、首振り操作部材16310がレバー部材13340に対して前転側(図100(a)反時計回り側)の移動端に配置された状態が図示され、図100(b)及び図100(d)では、首振り操作部材16310がレバー部材13340に対して後転側(図100(a)時計回り側)の移動端に配置された状態が図示される。 100 (a) and 100 (b) show a state in which the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in an upward position, and in FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d), the swing operation member 16310 faces downward. The state of being arranged at the position is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (c), the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the moving end on the forward rotation side (counterclockwise side in FIG. 100 (a)) with respect to the lever member 13340. Illustrated, in FIGS. 100 (b) and 100 (d), the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the moving end on the backward rotation side (clockwise side in FIG. 100 (a)) with respect to the lever member 13340. Illustrated.

図100に示すように、首振り操作部材16310は、背面側枠部材13311と、姿勢修正装置13312と、正面カバー13313と、背面カバー13314と、それら正面カバー13313及び背面カバー13314の締結部分を隠すと共に首振り操作部材16310の重心位置を変化させる鉄球16315eを有する分離防止カバー16315と、その分離防止カバー16315の下側に配置され背面側枠部材13311との間に挟まれる保護カバー13316(図82参照)と、レンズ部材13317と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 100, the swing operation member 16310 hides the fastening portion of the back side frame member 13311, the posture correction device 13312, the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, and the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314. A protective cover 13316 sandwiched between a separation prevention cover 16315 having an iron ball 16315e that changes the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 and a back side frame member 13311 arranged below the separation prevention cover 16315 (FIG. 82) and a lens member 13317 are mainly provided.

分離防止カバー16315は、受入凹部13315a及び抜止孔13315b(図82参照)と、円盤部分の下端部から前後方向(図100(a)左右方向)に背面側枠部材13311及び正面カバー13313の壁面に沿って延設される延設部16315cと、その延設部16315cの背面側枠部材13311及び正面カバー13313と対向配置される側面に長溝状に配設される長溝16315dと、その長溝16315dの内部を移動可能に配設される鉄球16315eと、主に備える。 The separation prevention cover 16315 is provided on the wall surface of the receiving recess 13315a and the retaining hole 13315b (see FIG. 82), and the back side frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 100 (a)) from the lower end of the disk portion. An extension portion 16315c extending along the extension portion 16315c, a long groove 16315d arranged in a long groove shape on a side surface facing the back side frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313 of the extension portion 16315c, and the inside of the long groove 16315d. 16315e, which is movably arranged, and is mainly provided.

長溝16315dは、内部に配設される鉄球16315eを重力により転動させる溝であって、図100(a)において、右側端部の方が左側端部に比較して軸支棒363からの距離が短くされる。 The long groove 16315d is a groove for rolling the iron ball 16315e arranged inside by gravity, and in FIG. 100A, the right end portion is from the shaft support rod 363 as compared with the left end portion. The distance is shortened.

また、首振り操作部材16310を前転側端部から後転側端部へ回転させる角度θ13yが10度であり(θ13y=10°)、レバー部材13340の回転角度が34度であるので、図100(a)における長溝16315dの角度θ16aを水平方向(図100(a)左右方向)に対して24度未満とすることにより(θ16a<24°)、首振り操作部材16310が上向き位置に配置される場合も、下向き位置に配置される場合も、首振り操作部材16310の首振り操作に対して鉄球16315eの位置を維持することができる(長溝16315dの左右端部の上下関係を維持することができる)。なお、本実施形態では、角度θ16aが約10度に設定される。 Further, the angle θ13y for rotating the swing operation member 16310 from the forward rotation side end portion to the backward rotation side end portion is 10 degrees (θ13y = 10 °), and the rotation angle of the lever member 13340 is 34 degrees. By setting the angle θ16a of the long groove 16315d in 100 (a) to less than 24 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 100 (a)) (θ16a <24 °), the swing operating member 16310 is arranged in the upward position. The position of the iron ball 16315e can be maintained with respect to the swing operation of the swing operation member 16310 (maintaining the vertical relationship between the left and right ends of the long groove 16315d) regardless of whether the iron ball 16315e is arranged in the downward position. Can be done). In this embodiment, the angle θ16a is set to about 10 degrees.

鉄球16315eは、鉄製の球状部材であって、首振り操作部材16310の重量の大部分を担うことができる球である。そのため、鉄球16315eが移動する事により、首振り操作部材16310の重心位置が変化する。 The iron ball 16315e is a spherical member made of iron and is a ball capable of carrying most of the weight of the swinging operation member 16310. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity of the swinging operation member 16310 changes as the iron ball 16315e moves.

図100(a)及び図100(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材16310が上向き位置に配置された状態では、長溝16315dの右端部に鉄球16315eが配置され重心位置が軸支棒363から近くされる一方、図100(c)及び図100(d)に示すように、首振り操作部材16310が下向き位置に配置された状態では、長溝16315dの左端部に鉄球16315eが配置され重心位置が軸支棒363から遠くされる。 As shown in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (b), when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the iron ball 16315e is arranged at the right end of the long groove 16315d and the center of gravity is the shaft support rod 363. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d), in the state where the swinging operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the iron ball 16315e is arranged at the left end of the long groove 16315d and the center of gravity. The position is moved away from the shaft support rod 363.

即ち、首振り操作部材16310が上向き位置に配置されるか下向き位置に配置されるかにより、軸支棒363からの首振り操作部材16310の重心位置までの距離を変化させることができる。これにより、首振り操作部材16310の操作感を変化させることができる。 That is, the distance from the shaft support rod 363 to the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position. Thereby, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed.

例えば、首振り操作部材16310が上向き位置に配置される場合よりも、下向き位置に配置される場合の方において、重心位置が軸支棒363から遠くなり、首振り操作部材16310の軸回りのモーメント(図100(c)反時計回りのモーメント)を大きくすることができる。 For example, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the center of gravity is farther from the shaft support rod 363 than when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, and the moment around the axis of the swing operation member 16310. (Fig. 100 (c) counterclockwise moment) can be increased.

従って、首振り操作部材16310が下向き位置に配置された状態において(図100(c)及び図100(d)参照)、遊技者がレンズ部材13317を押し込み操作することにより首振り操作部材16310が前転方向に回転した後(図100(d)の状態から図100(c)の状態に回転した後)、姿勢修正装置13312から生じる負荷により首振り操作部材16310の姿勢が戻る(図100(c)の状態から図100(d)の状態まで回転する)のに要する時間を、首振り操作部材16310の重心が回転軸付近に配置される場合に比較して長くすることができる(ゆっくり戻るようにすることができる)。 Therefore, in a state where the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position (see FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d)), the swing operation member 16310 is moved forward by the player pushing the lens member 13317. After rotating in the rolling direction (after rotating from the state of FIG. 100 (d) to the state of FIG. 100 (c)), the posture of the swing operation member 16310 returns due to the load generated from the posture correction device 13312 (FIG. 100 (c). ) To the state of FIG. 100 (d)) can be lengthened as compared with the case where the center of gravity of the swinging operation member 16310 is arranged near the rotation axis (so that it returns slowly). Can be).

これにより、首振り操作部材16310が上向き位置に配置された際には、レバー部材13340に対する首振り操作部材16310の回転抵抗を第13実施形態における首振り操作部材13310(図89参照)の回転抵抗と同等に保ちながら、首振り操作部材16310が下向き位置に配置された際には、首振り操作部材16310が起き上がる方向(図100(c)時計回り)に回転する回転抵抗を大きくすることができる。この場合、レンズ部材13317を遊技者が叩く操作をして、首振り操作部材16310が図100(c)の状態となってから、図100(d)の状態に復帰するまでの時間が長い分、再び遊技者がレンズ部材13317を叩く場合(連打する場合)にも首振り操作部材16310の姿勢を図100(c)の状態で維持する事ができ、即座に図100(c)の状態から図100(d)の状態に戻ってしまう場合に比較して、レンズ部材13317の連打操作を容易とすることができる。 As a result, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 16310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is changed to the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 13310 (see FIG. 89) in the thirteenth embodiment. When the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310 rotating in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 100C) can be increased. .. In this case, it takes a long time for the player to hit the lens member 13317 and the swing operation member 16310 returns to the state shown in FIG. 100 (d) after the swing operation member 16310 is in the state shown in FIG. 100 (c). Even when the player hits the lens member 13317 again (when hitting repeatedly), the posture of the swinging operation member 16310 can be maintained in the state of FIG. 100 (c), and immediately from the state of FIG. 100 (c). Compared with the case of returning to the state of FIG. 100 (d), the continuous striking operation of the lens member 13317 can be facilitated.

また、首振り操作部材16310の回転方向の違いによる回転抵抗の変化の点から言及すると、首振り操作部材16310が上向き位置に配置された場合、首振り操作部材16310を図100(a)時計回りに回転させる方向が、鉄球16315eを下方へ移動させる方向であるので、図100(a)反時計回りに回転させる場合に比較して、回転抵抗を小さくすることができる。 Further, referring to the change in rotational resistance due to the difference in the rotation direction of the swing operation member 16310, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position, the swing operation member 16310 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 100 (a). Since the direction of rotation is the direction of moving the iron ball 16315e downward, the rotational resistance can be reduced as compared with the case of rotating counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (a).

一方で、首振り操作部材16310が下向き位置に配置された場合、首振り操作部材16310を図100(c)反時計回りに回転させる方向が、鉄球16315eを下方へ移動させる方向であるので、図100(c)時計回りに回転させる場合に比較して、回転抵抗を小さくすることができる。 On the other hand, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the direction in which the swing operation member 16310 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (c) is the direction in which the iron ball 16315e is moved downward. FIG. 100 (c) The rotational resistance can be reduced as compared with the case of rotating clockwise.

従って、首振り操作部材16310が下向き位置に配置された場合か、首振り操作部材16310が上向き位置に配置された場合かで、首振り操作部材16310を回転操作する際の回転抵抗が軽くなる方向を、逆転させることができる。 Therefore, depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position or the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the rotational resistance when the swing operation member 16310 is rotated is reduced. Can be reversed.

本実施形態によれば、鉄球16315eの移動により(首振り操作部材16310の内部の状況の変化により)首振り操作部材16310の回転抵抗を変化させるので、首振り操作部材16310の移動方向と逆方向の負荷を与えることにより首振り操作部材16310の回転抵抗を上げる場合に比較して、首振り操作部材16310にかけられる負荷を低減することができる。 According to the present embodiment, the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 16310 is changed by the movement of the iron ball 16315e (due to the change in the internal condition of the swing operation member 16310), so that the direction is opposite to the movement direction of the swing operation member 16310. The load applied to the swing operation member 16310 can be reduced as compared with the case where the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310 is increased by applying a load in the direction.

次いで、図101を参照して第17実施形態について説明する。上述した第13実施形態では、ねじりバネSP2の捻り加減が変化することにより首振り操作部材13310の操作感が変化する場合を説明したが、第17実施形態における操作デバイス17300は、首振り部材17360と壁部材17322bとが擦れることにより首振り操作部材13310の操作感を変化可能とされる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes due to the change in the twisting degree of the torsion spring SP2 has been described, but the operation device 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment has the swing member 17360. By rubbing against the wall member 17322b, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図101(a)及び図101(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第17実施形態における操作デバイス17300の部分断面図である。なお、図101(a)では、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図101(b)では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。また、図101(a)及び図101(b)では、ねじりバネSP2及び下部カバー部材345(図81参照)が取り外された状態が図示されると共に、それぞれレバー部材13340に対して首振り操作部材13310が前転側に回転された状態が図示される。 101 (a) and 101 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 17300 according to the 17th embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 101 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 101 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. .. Further, in FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b), a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed is shown, and the swinging operation member with respect to the lever member 13340, respectively. The state in which 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side is shown.

本実施形態では、レバー部材13340の先端に第1実施形態での首振り部材360の替わりに首振り部材17360が軸支される。首振り部材17360は、本体部材361と、壁部材17322bと擦れる態様で形成されるモータ固定板17362と、軸支棒363と、緩衝部材364と、規制棒365と、振動装置366と、を主に備える(図81参照)。 In the present embodiment, the swing member 17360 is pivotally supported at the tip of the lever member 13340 instead of the swing member 360 in the first embodiment. The swing member 17360 mainly includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 17362 formed in a manner of rubbing against a wall member 17322b, a shaft support rod 363, a cushioning member 364, a regulation rod 365, and a vibration device 366. (See FIG. 81).

モータ固定板17362は、側壁部362bから軸支棒363を挿通する軸孔362b1の径方向に延設される摩擦腕部17362cを備える。 The motor fixing plate 17362 includes a friction arm portion 17362c extending in the radial direction of the shaft hole 362b1 through which the shaft support rod 363 is inserted from the side wall portion 362b.

また、第13実施形態の壁部材13322bの替わりに、壁部材17322bが右前カバー13322と左前カバー13321との間に嵌め込まれる(図78参照)。壁部材17322bは、その上端部から上方に延設される延設部17322b1を備える。 Further, instead of the wall member 13322b of the thirteenth embodiment, the wall member 17322b is fitted between the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 (see FIG. 78). The wall member 17322b includes an extension portion 17322b1 extending upward from the upper end portion thereof.

図101(a)及び図101(b)に示すように、延設部17322b1は、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置される状態では摩擦腕部17362cと接触せず、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置される状態では摩擦腕部17362cと接触する態様で形成される。即ち、延設部17322b1は、図101(b)に示すように、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態において、摩擦腕部17362cの先端部に押し付けられる当接面が軸支棒363を中心とした円弧形状で形成される。これにより、延設部17322b1と摩擦腕部17362cとの当接面積を確保でき、十分な動摩擦力を発揮することができる。従って、動摩擦力によりモータ固定板17362の回転抵抗が上昇することにより首振り操作部材13310の回転抵抗も上昇するので、首振り操作部材13310の操作感を変化させることができる。 As shown in FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b), the extension portion 17322b1 does not come into contact with the friction arm portion 17362c when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position, and the swing operation member 13310 Is formed in contact with the friction arm portion 17362c in a state where the is arranged in the downward position. That is, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the extension portion 17322b1 has a shaft support rod having a contact surface pressed against the tip end portion of the friction arm portion 17362c in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. It is formed in an arc shape centered on 363. As a result, the contact area between the extending portion 17322b1 and the friction arm portion 17362c can be secured, and a sufficient dynamic friction force can be exhibited. Therefore, since the rotational resistance of the motor fixing plate 17362 increases due to the dynamic friction force, the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 also increases, so that the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed.

上述した操作感の変化は、レバー部材13340の位置により変化するものであるので、レバー部材13340の動作速度によってその変化量が変わるものではない。従って、首振り操作部材13310を高速で振り回して操作する場合も、首振り操作部材13310をゆっくりと操作する場合も、レバー部材13310の先端が下向き位置に配置されてしまえば、首振り操作部材13310の回転に対して同じように動摩擦力をかけることができるので、操作感の変化を確実に生じさせることができる。 Since the change in the operation feeling described above changes depending on the position of the lever member 13340, the amount of change does not change depending on the operating speed of the lever member 13340. Therefore, whether the swing operation member 13310 is swung at high speed or the swing operation member 13310 is slowly operated, if the tip of the lever member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation member 13310 Since the dynamic friction force can be applied in the same manner to the rotation of the head, it is possible to surely cause a change in the operation feeling.

また、動摩擦力は、押し付けられる力により変化するものであって、モータ固定板17362の回転速度によって変化するものではないので、摩擦腕部17362cの先端が延設部17322b1に押し付けられている状態において、回転速度が遅い場合(例えば、回転させ始め)においても、十分な動摩擦力を発生させることができる。 Further, since the dynamic friction force is changed by the pressing force and not by the rotation speed of the motor fixing plate 17362, the tip of the friction arm portion 17362c is pressed against the extension portion 17322b1. Even when the rotation speed is slow (for example, when the rotation starts), a sufficient dynamic friction force can be generated.

なお、本実施形態では、延設部17322b1が壁部材17322bに配設されるので、延設部17322b1が破損した場合に、取り替える必要がある部材を左前カバー13321及び右前カバー13322に限定することができる。従って、壁部材17322bの交換を容易とでき、メンテナンス性を向上させることができる。 In the present embodiment, since the extension portion 17322b1 is arranged on the wall member 17322b, if the extension portion 17322b1 is damaged, the members that need to be replaced can be limited to the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322. it can. Therefore, the wall member 17322b can be easily replaced, and maintainability can be improved.

次いで、図102を参照して、第18実施形態について説明する。上述した第13実施形態では、レバー部材13340の配置によって首振り操作部材13310の回転抵抗が変化する場合を説明したが、第18実施形態における操作デバイス18300は、偏心カム部材5333を介して駆動力が首振り部材18360に伝達されることにより、首振り操作部材13310の回転抵抗を変化可能とされる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the rotational resistance of the swing operating member 13310 changes depending on the arrangement of the lever member 13340 has been described, but the operating device 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment has a driving force via the eccentric cam member 5333. Is transmitted to the swing member 18360, so that the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図102(a)から図102(c)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第18実施形態における操作デバイス18300の部分断面図である。なお、図102(a)から図102(c)では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示されると共に、ねじりバネSP2の図示が省略され、下部カバー部材345(図81参照)が取り外された状態が図示される。また、それぞれレバー部材18340に対して首振り操作部材13310が前転側に回転された状態が図示される。 102 (a) to 102 (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 18300 according to the eighteenth embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (c), the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position is shown, and the torsion spring SP2 is not shown, and the lower cover member 345 (FIG. 81). The state in which (see) is removed is shown. Further, a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side with respect to the lever member 18340 is shown.

本実施形態における操作デバイス18300は、首振り操作部材13310の内部に配設されるとともに首振り操作部材13310と一体で回転する首振り部材18360と、首振り部材18360を軸支するレバー部材18340を、第13実施形態における操作デバイス13300と違う部分として少なくとも備える。 The operation device 18300 in the present embodiment includes a swing member 18360 which is arranged inside the swing operation member 13310 and rotates integrally with the swing operation member 13310, and a lever member 18340 which pivotally supports the swing member 18360. , At least as a part different from the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment.

首振り部材18360は、本体部材361と、軸孔362b1の開口方向にそって側壁部362bから延設される薄壁部18362cを有するモータ固定板18362と、軸支棒363と、緩衝部材364と、規制棒365と、振動装置366と、を主に備える(図81参照)。 The swing member 18360 includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 18362 having a thin wall portion 18362c extending from the side wall portion 362b along the opening direction of the shaft hole 362b1, a shaft support rod 363, and a cushioning member 364. , A regulation rod 365 and a vibrating device 366 are mainly provided (see FIG. 81).

薄壁部18362cは、組立状態(図102(a)参照)において、軸支棒363の周囲に配設される部分であって、本実施形態では、その薄壁部18362cを軸支棒363に押し付ける方向に負荷を生じさせることができるゴムバンドRBが薄壁部18362cの周囲に巻き付けられる。 The thin wall portion 18362c is a portion arranged around the shaft support rod 363 in the assembled state (see FIG. 102 (a)), and in the present embodiment, the thin wall portion 18362c is attached to the shaft support rod 363. A rubber band RB capable of generating a load in the pressing direction is wound around the thin wall portion 18362c.

ゴムバンドRBは、ゴム材料から形成される帯状の部材であって、両端がレバー支持軸331d1の周囲に移動不能にピン固定される。従って、首振り操作部材13310を回転させる場合に、薄壁部18362cとゴムバンドRBとの間で摺動摩擦が生じる。 The rubber band RB is a band-shaped member formed of a rubber material, and both ends thereof are immovably pinned around the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, when the swing operation member 13310 is rotated, sliding friction occurs between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB.

レバー部材18340は、第13実施形態の本体部材13341の替わりに、偏心カム部材5333に当接されることにより移動可能に構成される伝達装置18347を有する本体部材18341を備える。 The lever member 18340 includes a main body member 18341 having a transmission device 18347 configured to be movable by being brought into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333 instead of the main body member 13341 of the thirteenth embodiment.

本体部材18341は、断面コ字状に形成される本体部18341aの側壁部分に、レバー部材18340の長手方向と傾斜して延設される長孔18341hと、その長孔18341hの延設方向を挟む態様で平行に配設される一対のガイド壁部18341iと、を主に備える。長孔18341hは、図102(a)に示すように、ゴムバンドRBに干渉する位置まで延設される。 The main body member 18341 sandwiches an elongated hole 18341h extending in an inclined direction from the longitudinal direction of the lever member 18340 and an extending direction of the elongated hole 18341h in a side wall portion of the main body portion 18341a formed in a U-shaped cross section. It mainly includes a pair of guide wall portions 18341i arranged in parallel in the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 102 (a), the elongated hole 18341h extends to a position where it interferes with the rubber band RB.

伝達装置18347は、長孔18341hに挿通される凸部を有すると共にガイド壁部18341iの間をスライド移動可能な大きさで構成される押し込み部18347aと、その押し込み部18347aの下端部で軸支される調整部18347bと、押し込み部18347aの下端部から調整部18347bの片側の側面に沿って(本実施形態では上側の側面に沿って)張り出される張り出し部18347cと、を主に備える。なお、本実施形態では、調整部18347bが押し込み部18347aに対して図示しない付勢バネによって、図102(a)の姿勢(調整部18347bが張り出し部18347cに当接する姿勢)に維持される。 The transmission device 18347 is pivotally supported by a push-in portion 18347a having a convex portion to be inserted into the elongated hole 18341h and having a size that allows sliding movement between the guide wall portions 18341i, and a lower end portion of the push-in portion 18347a. The adjusting portion 18347b and the overhanging portion 18347c protruding from the lower end portion of the pushing portion 18347a along one side surface of the adjusting portion 18347b (along the upper side surface in the present embodiment) are mainly provided. In the present embodiment, the adjusting portion 18347b is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 102 (a) (the posture in which the adjusting portion 18347b abuts on the overhanging portion 18347c) by an urging spring (not shown) with respect to the pushing portion 18347a.

本実施形態において、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態において、偏心カム部材5333が回転する途中で調整部18347bと偏心カム部材5333とが衝突する位置関係で、長孔18241h及びガイド壁部18341iが配設される。 In the present embodiment, in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position, the elongated hole 18241h and the guide are in a positional relationship in which the adjusting portion 18347b and the eccentric cam member 5333 collide with each other while the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotating. The wall portion 18341i is arranged.

張り出し部18347cが、調整部18347bの軸支位置を越えて延設されることにより、調整部18347bが張り出し部18347cに近接する方向に回転することを防止することができる。従って、押し込み部18347aに対して調整部18347bが回転し易い方向と、回転しにくい方向とを作ることができる。 By extending the overhanging portion 18347c beyond the axial support position of the adjusting portion 18347b, it is possible to prevent the adjusting portion 18347b from rotating in a direction close to the overhanging portion 18347c. Therefore, it is possible to create a direction in which the adjusting portion 18347b is easy to rotate and a direction in which the adjusting portion 18347b is difficult to rotate with respect to the pushing portion 18347a.

このような構成から、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態において、首振り操作部材13310の回転抵抗を変化させるか否かを切り替えることができる。 From such a configuration, it is possible to switch whether or not to change the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 in the state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position.

即ち、図102(a)の状態から、偏心カム部材5333を図102(a)反時計回りに回転させる場合、調整部18347bが押し込み部18347aに対して回転することに駆動力が使われ、押し込み部18347aが長孔18341hに沿って移動しない(図102(b)参照)。そのため、ゴムバンドRBの状態に変化はなく、首振り操作部材13310の回転抵抗の変化は生じない。 That is, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 102 (a) from the state shown in FIG. 102 (a), the driving force is used to rotate the adjusting portion 18347b with respect to the pushing portion 18347a, and the pushing force is used. Part 18347a does not move along the elongated hole 18341h (see FIG. 102 (b)). Therefore, the state of the rubber band RB does not change, and the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 does not change.

一方、図102(a)の状態から、偏心カム部材5333を図102(a)時計回りに回転させる場合、調整部18347bが張り出し部18347cに回転方向で係止され、調整部18347bが押し込み部18347aに対して回転不能となるので、長孔18341hを移動する事に駆動力が使用される(図102(c)参照)。この場合、押し込み部18347aがゴムバンドRBを引き延ばす方向に変形させるので、薄壁部18362cとゴムバンドRBとがより密着し、薄壁部18362cとゴムバンドRBとの間の摺動抵抗が大きくなる。従って、首振り操作部材13310の操作感が変化する。 On the other hand, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 102 (a) from the state of FIG. 102 (a), the adjusting portion 18347b is locked to the overhanging portion 18347c in the rotational direction, and the adjusting portion 18347b is pushed into the pushing portion 18347a. A driving force is used to move the elongated hole 18341h (see FIG. 102 (c)). In this case, since the pushing portion 18347a deforms the rubber band RB in the stretching direction, the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB are more closely attached, and the sliding resistance between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB increases. .. Therefore, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes.

従って、外観上は首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態として同じ状態に見えても、偏心カム部材5333の回転方向を切り替え伝達装置18347を動作させるか、停止させておくかを切り替えることで、首振り操作部材13310の操作感を変化させることができる。 Therefore, even if the swing operation member 13310 looks the same as the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 5333 is switched to switch whether the transmission device 18347 is operated or stopped. As a result, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed.

次いで、図103を参照して、第19実施形態について説明する。上述した第13実施形態では、姿勢修正装置13312から生じる負荷が首振り操作部材13310のみに与えられる場合を説明したが、第19実施形態における操作デバイス19300は、姿勢修正装置13312から発生する負荷をレバー部材19340にも及ぼすことが可能とされる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the load generated from the posture correction device 13312 is applied only to the swing operation member 13310 has been described, but the operation device 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment receives the load generated from the posture correction device 13312. It is possible to apply it to the lever member 19340. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図103(a)及び図103(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第19実施形態における操作デバイス19300の部分断面図である。なお、図103(a)及び図103(b)では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示されると共に、図103(a)では、遊技者から首振り操作部材13310に力が負荷されていない状態が図示され、図103(b)では、遊技者から首振り操作部材13310に力が負荷され前転方向(図103(b)反時計周り)に回転された状態が図示される。 103 (a) and 103 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 19300 in the 19th embodiment on the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 103 (a) and FIG. 103 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position is shown, and in FIG. 103 (a), the player moves to the swing operation member 13310. A state in which no force is applied is shown, and in FIG. 103 (b), a state in which a force is applied from the player to the swing operation member 13310 and rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 103 (b)) is shown. Illustrated.

レバー部材19340は、第13実施形態におけるレバー部材13340の下部カバー部材345の側壁から係止凸部19345eが凸設されることのみがレバー部材13340から追加される態様で構成される。係止凸部19345eは、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態において、回転レバー19337bの回転軌跡上に入る位置に配設される。 The lever member 19340 is configured in such a manner that the locking convex portion 19345e is convexly provided from the side wall of the lower cover member 345 of the lever member 13340 according to the thirteenth embodiment, and is added from the lever member 13340. The locking convex portion 19345e is arranged at a position where the swing operating member 13310 is placed on the rotation locus of the rotary lever 19337b in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at a downward position.

図103(a)に示すように、本実施形態では、内側ケース部材13330の替わりに、内側ケース部材19330が配設される。内側ケース部材19330は、内側ケース部材13330の内側に、伝達装置19337が追加される態様で構成される。 As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the present embodiment, the inner case member 19330 is arranged instead of the inner case member 13330. The inner case member 19330 is configured such that a transmission device 19337 is added to the inside of the inner case member 13330.

伝達装置19337は、左カバー部材13331の回転軸19337aに軸支されると共に断面L字形状に形成される回転レバー19337bと、左カバー部材13331に固定され回転レバー19337bの回転方向(図103(a)反時計回り)に付勢力を発生させるねじりばねSP19と、を主に備える。 The transmission device 19337 is pivotally supported by the rotation shaft 19337a of the left cover member 13331 and formed in an L-shaped cross section, and the rotation direction of the rotation lever 19337b fixed to the left cover member 13331 (FIG. 103 (a)). ) A torsion spring SP19 that generates an urging force (counterclockwise) is mainly provided.

回転レバー19337bは、付勢方向の回転端に位置する場合において(図103(a)参照)、左カバー部材13331の正面側の壁面の内側の面に当接する姿勢維持部19337b1と、その姿勢維持部19337b1を有する棒状部分から折曲されるとともに回転レバー19337bが付勢方向の回転端に位置する場合において先端部が左前カバー13321の姿勢修正装置13312の当接部材13312aと当接する面と面位置に配設される当接部19337b2と、を主に備える。なお、本実施形態では、壁部材13322b(図78参照)の配設が省略され、内側ケース部材19330にも開口が形成されることにより、その開口の内側で当接部材13312aと当接部19337b2とを当接可能に構成される。 When the rotary lever 19337b is located at the rotating end in the urging direction (see FIG. 103 (a)), the posture maintaining portion 19337b1 that comes into contact with the inner surface of the wall surface on the front side of the left cover member 13331 and its posture maintaining portion 19337b1. When the rotary lever 19337b is bent from the rod-shaped portion having the portion 19337b1 and the rotary lever 19337b is located at the rotating end in the urging direction, the surface and surface position where the tip portion abuts on the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 of the left front cover 13321. A contact portion 19337b2 arranged in the above is mainly provided. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted, and the inner case member 19330 also has an opening, so that the contact member 13312a and the contact portion 19337b2 are formed inside the opening. It is configured so that it can be contacted with.

これらの構成により、首振り操作部材13310に与えられる負荷をレバー部材19340の振動を抑制するための負荷として利用することができる。以下において、詳述する。 With these configurations, the load applied to the swing operation member 13310 can be used as a load for suppressing the vibration of the lever member 19340. It will be described in detail below.

図103(a)に示すように、首振り操作部材13310に遊技者が負荷を与えない状態で首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置される場合(例えば、偏心カム部材5333(図89参照)の回転により首振り操作部材13310が移動する場合)、姿勢修正装置13312の当接部材13312aが伝達装置19337の当接部19337b2に押されて、首振り操作部材13310がレバー部材19340に対して回転する(図103(a)の状態となる)。この状態においては、回転レバー19337bはレバー部材19340と当接しておらず、負荷は伝達されないので、回転レバー19337bを駆動させる駆動力を低減させることができる。 As shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position in a state where the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 13310 (for example, the eccentric cam member 5333 (see FIG. 89)). (When the swing operation member 13310 moves due to the rotation of the swing operation member 13310), the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 is pushed by the contact portion 19337b2 of the transmission device 19337, and the swing operation member 13310 rotates with respect to the lever member 19340. (The state shown in FIG. 103 (a) is obtained). In this state, the rotary lever 19337b is not in contact with the lever member 19340 and the load is not transmitted, so that the driving force for driving the rotary lever 19337b can be reduced.

図103(b)に示すように、図103(a)の状態から、遊技者が首振り操作部材13310を回転させる操作を行った場合、その際の負荷がねじりバネSP19の付勢力を上回ると、姿勢修正装置13312の当接部材13312aが伝達装置19337の回転レバー19337bを回転させる。この場合、回転レバー19337bが回転方向で係止凸部19345eと当接することにより、回転レバー19337bを介して、レバー部材19340の回転方向への反動動作(図103(b)時計回りに回転する動作)を抑制することができる。 As shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the player performs an operation of rotating the swing operation member 13310 from the state of FIG. 103 (a), the load at that time exceeds the urging force of the torsion spring SP19. , The contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 rotates the rotary lever 19337b of the transmission device 19337. In this case, when the rotary lever 19337b comes into contact with the locking convex portion 19345e in the rotational direction, the lever member 19340 rebounds in the rotational direction via the rotary lever 19337b (FIG. 103 (b), an operation of rotating clockwise). ) Can be suppressed.

従って、例えば、首振り操作部材13310のレンズ部材13317(図77参照)を遊技者が叩く場合、その反動によりレバー部材19340を起き上がらせる方向に負荷がかかり、レバー部材19340の後端部を下方から支えるロック部材5336(図12(b)参照)に過負荷がかけられる場合があるが、本実施形態では、回転レバー19337bがレバー部材19340の回転を抑制可能に構成されるので、ロック部材5336にかけられる負荷を低減することができる。 Therefore, for example, when the player hits the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) of the swing operation member 13310, a load is applied in the direction of raising the lever member 19340 due to the reaction, and the rear end portion of the lever member 19340 is moved from below. An overload may be applied to the supporting lock member 5336 (see FIG. 12B), but in the present embodiment, the rotary lever 19337b is configured to be able to suppress the rotation of the lever member 19340, so that the lock member 5336 is applied. The load to be applied can be reduced.

また、回転レバー19337bがレバー部材19340に当接するとレバー部材19340の回転抵抗が上昇し、レバー部材19340を駆動させる駆動力が不必要に大きくなる恐れがあるところ、本実施形態では、レンズ部材13317(図77参照)に過負荷がかけられたときにのみ回転レバー19337bがレバー部材19340に当接可能とされるので、普段(例えば、首振り操作部材13310を遊技者が触っていない場合)のレバー部材19340の回転抵抗は低い状態で維持することができる。 Further, when the rotary lever 19337b comes into contact with the lever member 19340, the rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 may increase and the driving force for driving the lever member 19340 may become unnecessarily large. However, in the present embodiment, the lens member 13317 Since the rotary lever 19337b can come into contact with the lever member 19340 only when an overload is applied to (see FIG. 77), it is usual (for example, when the player is not touching the swing operation member 13310). The rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 can be maintained in a low state.

これにより、レバー部材19340の駆動力は抑制しながら、過負荷が与えられた場合には一時的にレバー部材19340の回転抵抗を上昇させることにより、ロック部材5336(図89(b)参照)に与えられる負荷を抑制し、ロック部材5336の耐久性を向上させることができる。 As a result, while suppressing the driving force of the lever member 19340, when an overload is applied, the rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 is temporarily increased to make the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 89 (b)). The applied load can be suppressed and the durability of the lock member 5336 can be improved.

次いで、図104及び図105を参照して、第20実施形態について説明する。上述した第13実施形態では首振り操作部材13310を起き上がらせる方向に回転させる姿勢修正装置13312が直動動作する場合を説明したが、第20実施形態における操作デバイス20300は、姿勢修正装置20312が回動動作する装置として構成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the posture correction device 13312 for rotating the swing operation member 13310 in the rising direction operates in a linear motion has been described, but in the operation device 20300 in the twentieth embodiment, the posture correction device 20312 is rotated. It is configured as a dynamic device. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図104(a)及び図104(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第20実施形態における操作デバイス20300の部分断面図であり、図105は、図104(a)の矢印CV方向視における首振り操作部材20310の背面図である。 104 (a) and 104 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 20300 in the 20th embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 105 is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 104 (a). It is a rear view of the swinging operation member 20310 in the arrow CV direction view of a).

なお、図104(a)及び図104(b)では、首振り操作部材20310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示されると共に、図104(a)では、遊技者から首振り操作部材13310に力が負荷されず首振り操作部材20310が後転方向に回転された状態が図示され、図104(b)では、遊技者から首振り操作部材13310に力が負荷され前転方向(図104(b)反時計周り)に首振り操作部材20310が回転された状態が図示される。 In addition, in FIG. 104 (a) and FIG. 104 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 20310 is arranged in the downward position is shown, and in FIG. 104 (a), the player moves to the swing operation member 13310. A state in which the swing operation member 20310 is rotated in the backward rotation direction without a force being applied is shown. In FIG. 104 (b), a force is applied from the player to the swing operation member 13310 in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 104 (b)). b) The state in which the swing operation member 20310 is rotated counterclockwise) is shown.

首振り操作部材20310は、首振り部材366の下側に配設されるカップ状(背面側枠部材13311と近似される外形)の背面側枠部材20311と、その背面側枠部材20311に配設される姿勢修正装置20312と、正面カバー13313と、背面カバー13314と、分離防止カバー13315と、保護カバー13316と、レンズ部材13317と、を主に備える(図82参照)。 The swing operation member 20310 is arranged on the back side frame member 20311 having a cup shape (outer shape similar to the back side frame member 13311) and the back side frame member 20311 arranged on the lower side of the swing member 366. The posture correction device 20312, the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, the separation prevention cover 13315, the protective cover 13316, and the lens member 13317 are mainly provided (see FIG. 82).

背面側枠部材20311は、背面の開口を挿通孔311aと、姿勢修正装置20312が動作する領域を開ける動作領域孔20311bとに分割する仕切りである機能壁部20311cを備える。 The back side frame member 20311 includes a functional wall portion 20311c that is a partition that divides the opening on the back surface into an insertion hole 311a and an operation area hole 20311b that opens an area in which the posture correction device 20312 operates.

機能壁部20311cは、背面側から正面側へ向けて姿勢修正装置20312の軸棒部20312a1よりも若干大きな幅で凹設され軸棒部20312a1を軸支可能に形成される凹設部20311c1と、その凹設部20311c1の上方において断面扇形状(入口から深くなるほど幅が広くなる幅が広くなる形状)に凹設される被差込凹部20311c2と、その被差込凹部20311c2の凹設部20311c1から遠い側の内側側面から凸設される係止凸部20311c3と、を主に備える。 The functional wall portion 20311c is recessed from the back side to the front side with a width slightly larger than that of the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the posture correction device 20312, and the recessed portion 20311c1 formed so as to support the shaft rod portion 20312a1. From the insertion recess 20311c2 recessed above the recessed portion 20311c1 in a cross-sectional fan shape (the shape becomes wider as it gets deeper from the entrance) and the recessed portion 20311c1 of the insertion recess 20311c2. It mainly includes a locking convex portion 20311c3 that is projected from the inner side surface on the distant side.

姿勢修正装置20312は、断面J字状に構成される本体部材20312aと、その本体部材20312aの開口部20312a3を貫通する態様で本体部材20312aと組み立てられる板バネ状の板バネ部材20312bと、を主に備える。 The posture correction device 20312 mainly includes a main body member 20312a having a J-shaped cross section and a leaf spring-shaped leaf spring member 20312b assembled with the main body member 20312a in a manner of penetrating the opening 20312a3 of the main body member 20312a. Prepare for.

本体部材20312aは、凹設部20311c1に軸支される軸棒部20312a1と、その軸棒部20312a1を端部に配置して平板状に形成される平板部20312a2と、軸棒部20312a1及び平板部20312a2の間に開口形成される開口部20312a3と、平板部20312a2の下端部から湾曲形成される湾曲部20312a4と、その湾曲部20312a4の先端部において板バネ部材20312bを挟持可能に凹設される挟持凹部20312a5と、を主に備える。 The main body member 20312a includes a shaft rod portion 20312a1 pivotally supported by the recessed portion 20311c1, a flat plate portion 20312a2 formed in a flat plate shape by arranging the shaft rod portion 20312a1 at an end portion, and a shaft rod portion 20312a1 and a flat plate portion. An opening 20312a3 formed between the 20312a2, a curved portion 20312a4 curved from the lower end of the flat plate portion 20312a2, and a pinching portion in which the leaf spring member 20312b is recessed so as to be sandwiched at the tip of the curved portion 20312a4. It mainly includes a recess 20312a5.

被差込凹部20311c2の凹設部20311c1から遠い側の側面は、凹設部20311c1が凹設される壁部と平行に配設され、それらの垂直方向の間隔が板バネ部剤20312bの厚みよりも若干大きくされる。 The side surface of the recessed portion 20311c2 on the side far from the recessed portion 20311c1 is arranged parallel to the wall portion on which the recessed portion 20311c1 is recessed, and the vertical distance between them is larger than the thickness of the leaf spring portion agent 20312b. Is also slightly enlarged.

板バネ部材20312bは、被差込凹部20311c2の入口の寸法よりも厚みが小さく設定されると共に開口部20312a3よりも横幅が小さく設定され、組立状態において被差込凹部20311c2に差し込まれると共に凹設部20311c1に嵌め込まれた軸棒部20312a1を引き抜き不能に押さえる上側部20312b1と、その上側部20312b1の下端部(開口部20312a3の上端部に位置する)から折曲されると共に開口部20312a3を内側へ向けて貫通する態様で延設され挟持凹部20312a5に差し込まれる下側部20312b2と、上側部20312b1に穿設される係止孔20312b3と、を主に備える。なお、本実施形態において、板バネ部材20312bは、折れ曲がりを緩やかにする方向(図104(a)の下端部が反時計回りに回転擦る方向)に付勢される。 The leaf spring member 20312b is set to have a thickness smaller than the size of the entrance of the insertion recess 20311c2 and a width smaller than the opening 20312a3, and is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2 in the assembled state and is recessed. The upper portion 20312b1 that presses the shaft rod portion 20312a1 fitted in the 20311c1 so that it cannot be pulled out, and the lower end portion (located at the upper end portion of the opening 20312a3) of the upper portion 20312b1 are bent and the opening 20312a3 is directed inward. The lower portion 20312b2 is extended and inserted into the sandwiching recess 20312a5, and the locking hole 20312b3 is formed in the upper portion 20312b1. In the present embodiment, the leaf spring member 20312b is urged in a direction in which the bending is gentle (a direction in which the lower end portion in FIG. 104A is rotationally rubbed counterclockwise).

係止孔20312b3は、板バネ部材20312bを被差込凹部20311c2に差し込んだ状態において係止凸部20311c3が引っ掛けられる孔である。そのため、組立状態において、板バネ部材20312bに外向き(図104(a)右向き)の負荷がかけられたとしても、板バネ部材20312bが被差込凹部20311c2から脱落することを防止することができる。 The locking hole 20312b3 is a hole into which the locking convex portion 20311c3 is hooked in a state where the leaf spring member 20312b is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2. Therefore, even if the leaf spring member 20312b is loaded outward (to the right in FIG. 104 (a)) in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the leaf spring member 20312b from falling off from the insertion recess 20311c2. ..

本実施形態における構成によれば、板バネ部材20312bの弾性力により、本体部材20312aが凹設部20311c1から脱落することを防止することができる。即ち、本体部材20312aの軸棒部20312a1が脱落する方向に移動させる場合、板バネ部材20312bも一緒に移動させる必要があるところ、その移動方向は板バネ部材20312bの係止孔20312b3を係止凸部20311c3に食い込ませる方向であるので、板バネ部材20312bを移動させることができず、その結果、本体部材20312aの軸棒部20312a1が凹設部20311c1から脱落することを防止することができる。 According to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the main body member 20312a from falling off from the recessed portion 20311c1 due to the elastic force of the leaf spring member 20312b. That is, when the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a is moved in the direction in which it falls off, the leaf spring member 20312b also needs to be moved together, but the moving direction locks the locking hole 20312b3 of the leaf spring member 20312b. Since the direction is to bite into the portion 20311c3, the leaf spring member 20312b cannot be moved, and as a result, the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a can be prevented from falling off from the recessed portion 20311c1.

また、図104(b)に示すように、本体部材20312aが壁部材13322bから負荷を受け、背面側枠部材20311の内側に押し込まれる場合には、板バネ部材20312bの付勢力が増す方向に板バネ部材20312bが変位されるので、軸棒部20312a1を凹設部20311c1から脱落させることは一層困難になる。従って、ネジなどの締結部材を一切使用しない構成ながら、遊技中に遊技者が誤って姿勢修正装置2031を取り外してしまう事態を防止することができる。 Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the main body member 20312a receives a load from the wall member 13322b and is pushed inside the back side frame member 20311, the plate is in the direction in which the urging force of the leaf spring member 20312b increases. Since the spring member 20312b is displaced, it becomes more difficult to remove the shaft rod portion 20312a1 from the recessed portion 20311c1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the posture correction device 2031 during the game, even though the structure does not use any fastening members such as screws.

ここで、壁部材13322bと本体部材20312aとの間に過負荷が生じ、本体部材20312aが割れてしまった場合、本体部材20312aの下端部が動作領域孔20311bの下端部に係止されずに、曲げが解消される位置まで板バネ部材20312bが変形する。従って、背面側枠部材20311の外側に板バネ部材20312bが露出した状態となるので、正常な状態との違いが大きく、外観検査でメンテナンスの必要性を容易に判断することができる。 Here, when an overload occurs between the wall member 13322b and the main body member 20312a and the main body member 20312a is cracked, the lower end portion of the main body member 20312a is not locked to the lower end portion of the operating region hole 20311b. The leaf spring member 20312b is deformed to a position where the bending is eliminated. Therefore, since the leaf spring member 20312b is exposed on the outside of the back side frame member 20311, the difference from the normal state is large, and the necessity of maintenance can be easily determined by the visual inspection.

なお、姿勢修正装置20312を機能壁部20311cに組み付ける方法としては、まず、板バネ部材20312bを本体部材20312aの開口部20312a3に挿通した状態で軸棒部20312a1を凹設部20311c1に嵌め込む。このとき、板バネ部剤20312bはまだ狭持凹部20312a5には差し込まない。 As a method of assembling the posture correction device 20312 to the functional wall portion 20311c, first, the shaft rod portion 20312a1 is fitted into the recessed portion 20311c1 in a state where the leaf spring member 20312b is inserted into the opening portion 20312a3 of the main body member 20312a. At this time, the leaf spring portion agent 20312b is not yet inserted into the narrow holding recess 20312a5.

次に、開口部20312a3の内側を自由に移動できる状態の板バネ部材20312bの上側部20312b1を、被差込凹部20311c2に差し込む。 Next, the upper portion 20312b1 of the leaf spring member 20312b in a state where it can freely move inside the opening 20312a3 is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2.

最後に、背面側枠部材20311の内側から板バネ部材20312bの下側部20312b2を下方に引っ張って狭持凹部20312a5に差し込むことで図104(a)の状態を形成することができる。この状態において、板バネ部材20312bの上側部20312b1は凹設部20311c1が凹設される側面を支点として被差込凹部20311c2の内側を係止凸部20311c3に近接する方向に回転され、係止孔20312b3が係止凸部20311c3に引っ掛けられる。従って上側部20312b1が被差込凹部20311c2から脱落することを防止することができる。 Finally, the state shown in FIG. 104 (a) can be formed by pulling the lower portion 20312b2 of the leaf spring member 20312b downward from the inside of the back side frame member 20311 and inserting it into the narrow holding recess 20312a5. In this state, the upper portion 20312b1 of the leaf spring member 20312b is rotated in the direction close to the locking convex portion 20311c3 with the side surface on which the recessed portion 20311c1 is recessed as a fulcrum as a fulcrum, and the locking hole 20311c3. The 20312b3 is hooked on the locking convex portion 20311c3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper portion 20312b1 from falling off from the insertion recess 20311c2.

このように、背面側枠部材20311の内側から板バネ部材20312bを触れば、組み付けや取り外しは容易である(下側部20312b2を変形させれば良い)ものの、組立状態のように背面側枠部材20311の外側からしか板バネ部材20312bに触れない場合には、取り外しが困難となる。 In this way, if the leaf spring member 20312b is touched from the inside of the back side frame member 20311, it can be easily assembled and removed (the lower side frame member 20312b2 may be deformed), but the back side frame member is as in the assembled state. If the leaf spring member 20312b is touched only from the outside of the 20311, it becomes difficult to remove it.

従って、メンテナンス時のように背面側枠部材20311を取り外して内側から姿勢修正装置20312を取り外す場合には、その作業を迅速かつ容易に行うことができると共に、背面側枠部材20311の外側から姿勢修正装置20312を取り外すような不正行為を困難とすることができる。 Therefore, when the back side frame member 20311 is removed and the posture correction device 20312 is removed from the inside as in the case of maintenance, the work can be performed quickly and easily, and the posture is corrected from the outside of the back side frame member 20311. Cheating such as removing device 20312 can be made difficult.

次いで、図106を参照して、第21実施形態について説明する。上述した第17実施形態ではモータ固定板17362が壁部材17322bに擦れる場合を説明したが、第21実施形態における操作デバイス21300は、モータ固定板21362がレバー部材13340の回転に連動して回転する態様で構成される。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the motor fixing plate 17362 rubs against the wall member 17322b has been described, but in the operation device 21300 in the 21st embodiment, the motor fixing plate 21362 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the lever member 13340. Consists of. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図106(a)及び図106(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第21実施形態における操作デバイス21300の部分断面図である。なお、図106(a)では、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図106(b)では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。また、図106(a)及び図106(b)では、ねじりバネSP2及び下部カバー部材345(図81参照)が取り外された状態が図示されると共に、図106(a)では、レバー部材13340に対して首振り操作部材13310が前転側に回転された状態が、図106(b)では、レバー部材13340に対して首振り操作部材13310が後転側に回転された状態が、それぞれ図示される。 106 (a) and 106 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 21300 in the 21st embodiment on the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 106 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 106 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. .. Further, in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed is shown, and in FIG. 106 (a), the lever member 13340 is shown. On the other hand, the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side is shown, and in FIG. 106 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the backward rotation side with respect to the lever member 13340 is shown. To.

図106に示すように、壁部材21322bは、前上方(図106(a)斜め左上方向)へ延設され一対の摩擦腕部17362cの内側に配設される延設スライド部21322b2を備える。 As shown in FIG. 106, the wall member 21322b includes an extended slide portion 21322b2 extending forward and upward (in the diagonally upper left direction in FIG. 106 (a)) and arranged inside a pair of friction arm portions 17362c.

延設スライド部21322b2は、左右方向(図106紙面垂直方向)に穿設され上下方向に延設される長孔21322b21を備える。溝部21322b21は、図106(a)に示す状態においてモータ固定板21362の凸設ピン21362dが挿通可能な位置に配置され、その位置から、レバー支持軸331d1を中心としてその位置を通る円弧よりも外側を、下方へ向かうほどレバー支持軸331d1からの距離が遠くなる態様で延設され、図106(b)に示す状態においてモータ固定板21362の凸設ピン21362dが挿通可能な態様で形成される。 The extended slide portion 21322b2 includes an elongated hole 21322b21 that is bored in the left-right direction (vertical direction on the paper surface of FIG. 106) and extends in the vertical direction. The groove portion 21322b21 is arranged at a position where the convex pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted in the state shown in FIG. 106A, and is outside the arc passing through the position centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 from that position. Is extended downward so that the distance from the lever support shaft 331d1 increases, and the convex pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted in the state shown in FIG. 106 (b).

首振り部材21360は、本体部材361と、モータ固定板362に近似した形状から構成されるモータ固定板21362と、軸支棒363と、緩衝部材364と、規制棒365と、振動装置366と、を主に備える(図81参照)。 The swing member 21360 includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 21362 having a shape similar to that of the motor fixing plate 362, a shaft support rod 363, a cushioning member 364, a regulation rod 365, a vibrating device 366, and the like. (See FIG. 81).

モータ固定板21362は、本体部362aと、側壁部362bと、一対の摩擦腕部17362bと、その一対の摩擦腕部17362bから内側へ凸設される凸設ピン21362dと、を主に備える。 The motor fixing plate 21362 mainly includes a main body portion 362a, a side wall portion 362b, a pair of friction arm portions 17362b, and a convex pin 21362d projecting inward from the pair of friction arm portions 17362b.

本実施形態において、凸設ピン21362dが長孔21322b21に挿通されるので、長孔21322b21の形状の設定により、レバー部材13340の回転に伴う首振り操作部材13310のレバー部材13340に対する移動態様を変化させることができる。例えば、長孔21322b21を、レバー支持軸331d1を中心とした円弧と同等な形状とすることで、レバー部材13340がレバー支持軸331d1を中心に回転した場合の首振り操作部材13310のレバー部材13340に対する変位を無しにすることができる。 In the present embodiment, since the convex pin 21362d is inserted into the elongated hole 21322b21, the movement mode of the swinging operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 due to the rotation of the lever member 13340 is changed by setting the shape of the elongated hole 21322b21. be able to. For example, by making the elongated hole 21322b21 a shape equivalent to an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, the lever member 13340 with respect to the lever member 13340 of the swing operation member 13310 when the lever member 13340 rotates about the lever support shaft 331d1. Displacement can be eliminated.

一方で、本実施形態のように、長孔21322b21を、レバー支持軸331d1を中心とした円弧に対して傾斜した方向に延設される態様とすることによって、レバー部材13340が回転する事により凸設ピン21362dと長孔21322b21との間に生じる嵌合位置のずれを埋めるべく、モータ固定板21362が回転される。従って、レバー部材13340の回転動作に伴って(連動して)、モータ固定板21362が(回転可能な方向、即ち図106(a)の状態から図106(b)の状態に回転するのであれば、図106(a)時計回りに)回転されるので、首振り操作部材13310を回転させることができる。これにより、レバー部材13340と首振り操作部材13310とを連動して回転させることができる。 On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the elongated hole 21322b21 is extended in a direction inclined with respect to the arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, so that the lever member 13340 is rotated to be convex. The motor fixing plate 21362 is rotated to fill the gap in the fitting position that occurs between the setting pin 21362d and the elongated hole 21322b21. Therefore, if the motor fixing plate 21362 rotates (in conjunction with) with the rotation operation of the lever member 13340 (in a rotatable direction, that is, from the state of FIG. 106 (a) to the state of FIG. 106 (b)). , FIG. 106 (a) is rotated clockwise), so that the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated. As a result, the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated in conjunction with each other.

次いで、図107を参照して、第22実施形態について説明する。上述した第21実施形態ではモータ固定板21362の凸設ピン21362dが溝部21322b21に案内されることにより首振り操作部材13310が姿勢変化する場合を説明したが、第22実施形態における操作デバイス22300は、首振り操作部材13310の姿勢変化が、ギアの歯合回転により生じる。なお、上述した各実施形態と同一の部分には同一の符号を付して、その説明は省略する。 Next, the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 107. In the 21st embodiment described above, the case where the swing operation member 13310 changes its posture by guiding the convex pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 to the groove portion 21322b21 has been described. However, the operation device 22300 in the 22nd embodiment has been described. The posture change of the swing operation member 13310 is caused by the tooth rotation of the gear. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

図107(a)及び図107(b)は、図17(a)のXVIIIa−XVIIIa線に対応する線における第22実施形態における操作デバイス22300の部分断面図である。 107 (a) and 107 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 22300 in the 22nd embodiment on the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a).

図107(a)では、首振り操作部材13310が上向き位置に配置された状態が図示され、図107(b)では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態が図示される。なお、図107(a)及び図107(b)では、ねじりバネSP2及び下部カバー部材345(図81参照)が取り外された状態が図示されると共に、図107(a)では、レバー部材22340に対して首振り操作部材13310が前転側に回転された状態が、図107(b)では、レバー部材22340に対して首振り操作部材13310が後転側に回転された状態が、それぞれ図示される。また、図107(a)及び図107(b)では、理解を容易とするために、ねじりバネSP1及び案内支持孔331e1の図示が省略される。 FIG. 107 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 107 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. In addition, in FIGS. 107 (a) and 107 (b), the state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed is shown, and in FIG. 107 (a), the lever member 22340 is shown. On the other hand, the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side is shown, and in FIG. 107 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the backward rotation side with respect to the lever member 22340 is shown. To. Further, in FIGS. 107 (a) and 107 (b), the torsion spring SP1 and the guide support hole 331e1 are omitted for ease of understanding.

図107に示すように、操作デバイス22300は、首振り操作部材13310を一方(図107(b)左側)の端部で軸支しながら、レバー支持軸331d1に軸支されるレバー部材22340と、レバー部材22340の回転ギア22347と常に歯合される円弧壁部22322b2を有する壁部材22322bと、レバー部材22340の回転ギア22347と常に歯合される歯合板部22362cを有する首振り部材22360と、を主に備える。 As shown in FIG. 107, the operation device 22300 includes a lever member 22340 that is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331d1 while pivotally supporting the swing operation member 13310 at one end (left side of FIG. 107 (b)). A wall member 22322b having an arc wall portion 22322b2 that is always meshed with the rotary gear 22347 of the lever member 22340, and a swing member 22360 having a tooth plywood portion 22362c that is always meshed with the rotary gear 22347 of the lever member 22340. Mainly prepare.

レバー部材22340は、第13実施形態におけるレバー部材13340に、角度規制棒部材346に軸支される回転ギア22347を追加する態様で構成される。 The lever member 22340 is configured by adding a rotary gear 22347 axially supported by the angle control rod member 346 to the lever member 13340 in the thirteenth embodiment.

壁部材22322bは、嵌合凹部13322a(図78参照)に嵌合される板部材であって、レバー支持軸331d1へ近接する方向へ向けて延設される内方延設部22322b1と、その内方延設部22322b1の内方(図107(a)右方)の端部からレバー支持軸331d1を中心とした円弧に沿って延設されると共に回転ギア22347と歯合されるギア歯を有する円弧壁部22322b2と、を備える。 The wall member 22322b is a plate member fitted in the fitting recess 13322a (see FIG. 78), and is an inward extending portion 22322b1 extending in a direction approaching the lever support shaft 331d1 and an inward extending portion 22322b1 thereof. 22322b2 is an arc wall portion that extends from the inner end of 22322b1 (right side in FIG. 107 (a)) along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 and has gear teeth that are meshed with the rotary gear 22347. And.

首振り部材22360は、第13実施形態における首振り部材360のモータ固定板362(図81参照)が、回転ギア22347に歯合されるギア歯が形成される歯合板部22362cを有するモータ固定板22362と交換された態様で構成される。 The swing member 22360 is a motor fixing plate having a tooth plywood portion 22362c in which the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 81) of the swing member 360 according to the thirteenth embodiment is formed with gear teeth meshed with the rotary gear 22347. It is configured in a manner exchanged for 22362.

本実施形態の構成によれば、レバー部材22340が回転されることにより、円弧壁部22322b2に対して回転ギア22347が回転され、その回転ギア22347の回転に伴って、モータ固定板22362が軸支棒363を軸に回転される。従って、レバー部材22340が回転している間中、首振り操作部材13310の回転を継続させることができる。 According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the rotation of the lever member 22340 causes the rotary gear 22347 to rotate with respect to the arc wall portion 22322b2, and the motor fixing plate 22362 is pivotally supported by the rotation of the rotary gear 22347. It is rotated around the rod 363. Therefore, the rotation of the swing operation member 13310 can be continued while the lever member 22340 is rotating.

なお、本実施形態では、レバー部材22340が図107(a)に示す状態から図107(b)に示す状態まで34度回転され、その間に首振り操作部材13310が10度回転される。即ち、円弧壁部22322b2に形成されるギア歯に対する歯合板部22362cのギア比が約0.3(=10/34)となる態様で形成される。 In the present embodiment, the lever member 22340 is rotated 34 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 107 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 107 (b), and the swing operation member 13310 is rotated 10 degrees during that time. That is, the gear ratio of the tooth plywood portion 22362c to the gear teeth formed on the arc wall portion 22322b2 is about 0.3 (= 10/34).

以上、上記実施形態に基づき本発明を説明したが、本発明は上記形態に何ら限定されるものではなく、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない範囲内で種々の変形改良が可能であることは容易に推察できるものである。 Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

上記各実施形態において、一の実施形態における構成の一部または全部を、他の実施形態における構成の一部または全部の構成と組み合わせて或いは置き換えて、別の実施形態としても良い。 In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

上記各実施形態では、レバー部材340の本体部材341が形状を固定される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、長手方向で部分的に伸縮可能とされても良い。この場合、本体部材341を縮め、首振り操作部材310を後方に収納できるように構成することで、首振り操作部材310が下向き位置に配置されパチンコ機10の前方に張り出して、梱包用の箱からはみ出す場合に、梱包用の箱に入るサイズまで首振り操作部材310の前後幅を縮めることができる。 In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is fixed in shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be partially stretchable in the longitudinal direction. In this case, the main body member 341 is shrunk so that the swing operation member 310 can be stored rearward, so that the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position and projects in front of the pachinko machine 10, and is a box for packing. The front-rear width of the swing operation member 310 can be reduced to a size that fits in a packing box when it protrudes from the outside.

上記第6実施形態では、ギアダンパ6347が、レバー部材6340から剥離部材6350が引きはがされた場合に限り粘性抵抗を生じる場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、ギアダンパが、レバー部材6340及び剥離部材6350が吸着固定されている場合に限って、粘性抵抗を生じるようにしても良い。この場合、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を操作する際の操作速度に応じた抵抗を遊技者に返すことができ、操作感を向上させることができる。 In the sixth embodiment, the case where the gear damper 6347 causes viscous resistance only when the peeling member 6350 is peeled off from the lever member 6340 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the gear damper may generate viscous resistance only when the lever member 6340 and the peeling member 6350 are suction-fixed. In this case, the resistance corresponding to the operation speed when the player operates the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the player, and the operation feeling can be improved.

上記第4実施形態では、偏心カム部材4333の最長径部分とロック受け部材4350とが当接している時(偏心カム部材4333の回転軌跡の外接円とロック受け部材4350とが接する時)に、ロック部材4336の上端とロック受け部材4350の下端部とが当接する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、ロック受け部材4350が偏心カム部材4333から上方に離間した位置でロック部材4336の上端に揺動を規制される態様でも良い。 In the fourth embodiment, when the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact with each other (when the circumscribed circle of the rotation locus of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact with each other). Although the case where the upper end of the lock member 4336 and the lower end of the lock receiving member 4350 come into contact with each other has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lock receiving member 4350 may be restricted from swinging at the upper end of the lock member 4336 at a position separated upward from the eccentric cam member 4333.

この場合、偏心カム部材4333の回転駆動によりロック受け部材4350が揺動する場合には、ロック受け部材4350がロック部材4336に規制されることは無いため、偏心カム部材4333を一方向に回転駆動させることにより、首振り操作部材310を上下に往復動作させる煽り動作を行うことができる。 In this case, when the lock receiving member 4350 swings due to the rotational drive of the eccentric cam member 4333, the lock receiving member 4350 is not restricted by the lock member 4336, so that the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotationally driven in one direction. By making the swing operation member 310 reciprocate up and down, it is possible to perform a fanning operation.

また、例えば、偏心カム部材4333の最長径部分と偏心カム軸331d2との間の中間部がロック受け部材4350と当接している時にロック受け部材4350がロック部材4336に揺動を規制される態様でも良い。 Further, for example, when the intermediate portion between the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350, the lock receiving member 4350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336. But it's okay.

この場合、偏心カム部材4333を一方向に回転させることで、ロック受け部材4350がロック部材4336の上端よりも上側で上下に往復動作可能とされ、煽り動作を行うことができる。なお且つ、煽り動作中に、遊技者が首振り操作部材310を上向きに持ち上げる誤操作を行ったとしても、ロック部材4336でロック受け部材4350の揺動を規制することができ、偏心カム部材4333が破損することを防止することができる。 In this case, by rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 in one direction, the lock receiving member 4350 can be reciprocated up and down above the upper end of the lock member 4336, and the fanning operation can be performed. Moreover, even if the player makes an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 upward during the fanning operation, the lock member 4336 can regulate the swing of the lock receiving member 4350, and the eccentric cam member 4333 can be used. It can be prevented from being damaged.

上記第8実施形態では、レバー部材340とスライド板8370とが離間した際に、ロック部材8336がレバー部材340の下側に入り込み、レバー部材340の揺動を規制する場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、内側ケース部材8330の側壁から内側ケース部材8330の内方へ向けて、伸縮する棒状部材が配設され、その棒状部材は、レバー部材340とスライド板8370とが離間する場合に伸張され、レバー部材340の後端部の下側に入り込むようにしても良い。 In the eighth embodiment, when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other, the lock member 8336 enters the lower side of the lever member 340 to regulate the swing of the lever member 340, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, a rod-shaped member that expands and contracts is arranged from the side wall of the inner case member 8330 toward the inside of the inner case member 8330, and the rod-shaped member is extended when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other. It may be inserted into the lower side of the rear end portion of the lever member 340.

この場合、ロック部材8336の鉤状の先端部の形状をレバー部材340の下側に入り込む形状にする必要が無いので、ロック部材8336の設計自由度を向上させることができる。 In this case, since it is not necessary to make the shape of the hook-shaped tip portion of the lock member 8336 into a shape that fits under the lever member 340, the degree of freedom in designing the lock member 8336 can be improved.

上記第8実施形態では、レバー部材340が揺動角度範囲の中間の姿勢とされた状態でロック部材8336が固定側に配置される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、レバー部材340の後端部が揺動角度範囲の最上位置に配置された場合にロック部材8336が固定側に配置されるようにしても良い。 In the eighth embodiment, the case where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side in a state where the lever member 340 is in an intermediate posture in the swing angle range has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the uppermost position of the swing angle range, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side.

この場合、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引き剥がされたとしても、揺動を規制された剥離部材350の上側においてレバー部材340が揺動可能な範囲が限定されているため、遊技者の操作によりレバー部材340にかけられる揺動方向の勢いが抑制される(勢いを付ける程度にレバー部材340を移動させることができない)。従って、レバー部材340が勢いよく内側ケース部材8330に衝突して内側ケース部材8330が破損することを防止することができる。 In this case, even if the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the range in which the lever member 340 can swing is limited on the upper side of the peeling member 350 whose swing is restricted, so that the player can operate the lever member 340. As a result, the momentum in the swing direction applied to the lever member 340 is suppressed (the lever member 340 cannot be moved to the extent that the momentum is applied). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from vigorously colliding with the inner case member 8330 and damaging the inner case member 8330.

また、例えば、レバー部材340の後端部が揺動角度範囲の最下位置に配置された場合にロック部材8336が固定側に配置されるようにしても良い。この場合、レバー部材340が揺動を規制された姿勢において、レバー部材340の後端部と内側ケース部材8330の上側面との距離を遠くできるので、レバー部材340が剥離部材350から引きはがされることにより遊技者に伝わる感覚が変化すること(剥離部材350の重さが遊技者に伝わらなくなり、首振り操作部材310を重く感じること)に遊技者が気付き、遊技者が首振り操作部材310にかける負荷を和らげる時間的余裕を持つことができる。 Further, for example, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the lowest position in the swing angle range. In this case, in a posture in which the lever member 340 is restricted from swinging, the distance between the rear end portion of the lever member 340 and the upper side surface of the inner case member 8330 can be increased, so that the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350. The player notices that the feeling transmitted to the player changes (the weight of the peeling member 350 is not transmitted to the player and the swing operation member 310 feels heavy), and the player notices that the swing operation member is heavy. There can be time to relieve the load on the 310.

一方で、レバー部材340の後端部が揺動角度範囲の最下位置に配置された場合、剥離部材350と偏心カム部材333とが当接するため、剥離部材350から偏心カム部材333に負荷が生じる恐れがある。そのため、これを防ぐために、ロック部材8336が揺動範囲の中間位置よりも情報に配置される時(偏心カム部材333が剥離部材350と当接しない時)に限って、ロック部材8336が固定側に配置されるようにしても良い。 On the other hand, when the rear end of the lever member 340 is arranged at the lowest position in the swing angle range, the release member 350 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other, so that a load is applied from the release member 350 to the eccentric cam member 333. May occur. Therefore, in order to prevent this, the lock member 8336 is fixed on the fixed side only when the lock member 8336 is arranged in information from the intermediate position of the swing range (when the eccentric cam member 333 does not abut on the release member 350). It may be arranged in.

上記第9実施形態では、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92をそれぞれ同じ長さで形成し、上側の弾性連結部材CS91の弾性係数を下側の弾性連結部材CS92に比較して大きくする場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92をそれぞれ同じ弾性係数とし、上側の弾性連結部材CS91を下側の弾性連結部材CS92に比較して短くしてもいい。 In the ninth embodiment, the case where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are formed to have the same length and the elastic modulus of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is made larger than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92 has been described. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 may have the same elastic modulus, and the upper elastic connecting member CS91 may be shorter than the lower elastic connecting member CS92.

この場合、弾性連結部材CS91,CS92が互いに同じ長さになる(延伸される)状態において、上側の弾性連結部材CS91の方が弾性変位が大きくなり、弾性回復力が大きくなるので、弾性回復した後の状態において首振り操作部材310のレンズ部材317を上方向きに保持しやすくできる。これにより、遊技者がレンズ部材317を上方から押し込み操作すること容易とすることができる。 In this case, in a state where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 have the same length (stretched), the upper elastic connecting member CS91 has a larger elastic displacement and a larger elastic recovery force, so that the elastic recovery is performed. In the later state, the lens member 317 of the swing operation member 310 can be easily held upward. This makes it easy for the player to push the lens member 317 from above.

上記第13実施形態では、鉤部材13312cが硬質樹脂から形成される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、常温で鉤部材13312cの形状を維持し、加熱により支持部材13312bとの係合が解除される態様で形状変化する形状記憶材料から形成されても良い。この場合、鉤部材13312cの交換を中間ベースM13から背面側枠部材13311を取り外すことなく行うことができる。 In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the hook member 13312c is formed of a hard resin has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a shape memory material that maintains the shape of the hook member 13312c at room temperature and changes its shape in such a manner that the engagement with the support member 13312b is released by heating. In this case, the hook member 13312c can be replaced without removing the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13.

上記第13実施形態では、保護カバー13316が硬質樹脂から形成され、保護カバー13316を取り外すために背面側枠部材13311を中間ベースM13から取り外す必要がある場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、保護カバー13316が軟質の樹脂材料から形成されても良い。この場合、保護カバー13316の形状を変形させることで、背面側枠部材13311を中間ベースM13に固定したままでも保護カバー13316を取り外すことができる。 In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the protective cover 13316 is formed of a hard resin and the back side frame member 13311 needs to be removed from the intermediate base M13 in order to remove the protective cover 13316 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the protective cover 13316 may be formed from a soft resin material. In this case, by deforming the shape of the protective cover 13316, the protective cover 13316 can be removed even while the back side frame member 13311 is fixed to the intermediate base M13.

上記第17実施形態では、壁部材17322bの延設部17322b1の表面状態が一様である場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、延設部17322b1の表面状態に、摩擦係数の大きい第1領域と、その第1領域よりも摩擦係数の小さくされる第2領域とが形成されても良い。この場合、摩擦腕部17362cと延設部17322b1とが擦れている状態で首振り操作部材13310を首振り操作する遊技者に与える操作感(回転抵抗、重さ)を摩擦腕部17362cが第1領域と擦れる場合と、摩擦腕部17362cが第2領域と擦れる場合とで変化させることができる。 In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the surface state of the extending portion 17322b1 of the wall member 17322b is uniform has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a first region having a large friction coefficient and a second region having a friction coefficient smaller than that of the first region may be formed on the surface state of the extending portion 17322b1. In this case, the friction arm portion 17362c first gives a feeling of operation (rotational resistance, weight) to the player who swings the swing operation member 13310 while the friction arm portion 17362c and the extension portion 17322b1 are rubbing against each other. It can be changed depending on whether it rubs against the region or when the friction arm portion 17362c rubs against the second region.

上記第19実施形態では、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置に配置された状態において回転レバー19337bがレバー部材19340に当接される場合を説明したが、必ずしもこれに限られるものではない。例えば、首振り操作部材13310が下向き位置へ向かう途中(レバー部材19340が移動中)に回転レバー19337bがレバー部材19340に当接する態様とされても良い。この場合、回転レバー19337bをレバー部材19340の回転方向と逆方向に動作させ当接させることにより、レバー部材19340を減速させる効果を奏することができる。 In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the rotary lever 19337b is brought into contact with the lever member 19340 in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotary lever 19337b may come into contact with the lever member 19340 while the swing operation member 13310 is moving toward the downward position (the lever member 19340 is moving). In this case, the effect of decelerating the lever member 19340 can be achieved by moving the rotary lever 19337b in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the lever member 19340 and bringing them into contact with each other.

本発明を上記各実施形態とは異なるタイプのパチンコ機等に実施してもよい。例えば、一度大当たりすると、それを含めて複数回(例えば2回、3回)大当たり状態が発生するまで、大当たり期待値が高められるようなパチンコ機(通称、2回権利物、3回権利物と称される)として実施してもよい。また、大当たり図柄が表示された後に、所定の領域に球を入賞させることを必要条件として遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技を発生させるパチンコ機として実施してもよい。また、Vゾーン等の特別領域を有する入賞装置を有し、その特別領域に球を入賞させることを必要条件として特別遊技状態となるパチンコ機に実施してもよい。更に、パチンコ機以外にも、アレパチ、雀球、スロットマシン、いわゆるパチンコ機とスロットマシンとが融合した遊技機などの各種遊技機として実施するようにしても良い。 The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

なお、スロットマシンは、例えばコインを投入して図柄有効ラインを決定させた状態で操作レバーを操作することにより図柄が変動され、ストップボタンを操作することにより図柄が停止されて確定される周知のものである。従って、スロットマシンの基本概念としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を変動表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する表示装置を備え、始動用操作手段(例えば操作レバー)の操作に起因して識別情報の変動表示が開始され、停止用操作手段(例えばストップボタン)の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の変動表示が停止して確定表示され、その停止時の識別情報の組合せが特定のものであることを必要条件として、遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技を発生させるスロットマシン」となり、この場合、遊技媒体はコイン、メダル等が代表例として挙げられる。 In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

また、パチンコ機とスロットマシンとが融合した遊技機の具体例としては、複数の図柄からなる図柄列を変動表示した後に図柄を確定表示する表示装置を備えており、球打出用のハンドルを備えていないものが挙げられる。この場合、所定の操作(ボタン操作)に基づく所定量の球の投入の後、例えば操作レバーの操作に起因して図柄の変動が開始され、例えばストップボタンの操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、図柄の変動が停止され、その停止時の確定図柄がいわゆる大当たり図柄であることを必要条件として遊技者に所定の遊技価値を付与する特別遊技が発生させられ、遊技者には、下部の受皿に多量の球が払い出されるものである。かかる遊技機をスロットマシンに代えて使用すれば、遊技ホールでは球のみを遊技価値として取り扱うことができるため、パチンコ機とスロットマシンとが混在している現在の遊技ホールにおいてみられる、遊技価値たるメダルと球との別個の取扱による設備上の負担や遊技機設置個所の制約といった問題を解消し得る。 Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

以下に、本発明の遊技機に加えて上述した実施形態に含まれる各種発明の概念を示す。 The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<ロック時にレバー部材340が折れる構造とする技術思想の一例>
遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材と、その移動部材の移動を規制する規制部材と、を備える遊技機において、前記移動部材は、遊技者が操作する操作部材と、その操作部材に連結され前記規制部材に移動を規制可能とされる被規制部材と、を備え、前記被規制部材が、前記規制部材に移動を規制される状態において、前記操作部材に所定量以上の荷重が作用することにより、前記移動部材の形状が変形可能に構成されることを特徴とする遊技機A1。
<An example of a technical concept in which the lever member 340 breaks when locked>
In a gaming machine including a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player and a regulating member that regulates the movement of the moving member, the moving member is provided by the player. The operation member to be operated and a regulated member connected to the operating member and capable of restricting movement by the regulating member are provided, and the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulating member. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the shape of the moving member is deformable when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the operating member.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、遊技者が手動操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材が規制部材によって所定位置で移動を規制される遊技機がある(例えば、特開2014−144218号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、移動を規制された状態で遊技者が移動部材に過荷重を加えると、移動部材を通して規制部材に荷重が加わり、規制部材が破損する恐れがあるという問題点があった。 In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player manually operates is restricted from moving at a predetermined position by a regulating member (for example,). (See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, if the player applies an overload to the moving member while the movement is restricted, the load is applied to the regulating member through the moving member, and the regulating member may be damaged. was there.

これに対し、遊技機A1によれば、移動部材は、遊技者が操作する操作部材と、その操作部材に連結され規制部材に移動を規制可能とされる被規制部材と、を備え、被規制部材が、規制部材に移動を規制される状態において、操作部材に所定量以上の荷重が作用することにより、移動部材の形状が変形可能とされるので、荷重が移動部材の形状変形に消費されることで、規制部材に伝達される荷重を減少させることができる。従って、遊技者が移動部材に過荷重をかけることにより規制部材が破損することを防止することができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the moving member includes an operating member operated by the player and a regulated member connected to the operating member so that the movement can be regulated by the regulating member, and is regulated. In a state where the member is restricted from moving by the regulating member, the shape of the moving member can be deformed by applying a load of a predetermined amount or more to the operating member, so that the load is consumed for the shape deformation of the moving member. As a result, the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restricting member from being damaged by the player applying an overload to the moving member.

なお、荷重の負荷による移動部材の形状の変形を実現する移動部材の構成としては、例えば、移動部材の一部にバネ等の弾性部材を配設する構成や、移動部材が複数の部位から構成され各部位が磁力で吸着される構成等が例示される。 The structure of the moving member that realizes the deformation of the shape of the moving member due to the load is, for example, a structure in which an elastic member such as a spring is arranged as a part of the moving member, or a structure in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts. An example is a configuration in which each part is attracted by a magnetic force.

移動部材の一部にバネ等の弾性部材が配設される構成では、負荷される荷重に比例して移動部材の形状の変形の度合いが変化するため、遊技者から操作部材に過荷重がかけられる程、移動部材の変形の度合いが大きくなる。そのため、遊技者から操作部材に過荷重がかけられる程、弾性部材で消費される荷重を大きくすることができ、その分規制部材に伝達される荷重を減少させることができる。 In a configuration in which an elastic member such as a spring is arranged as a part of the moving member, the degree of deformation of the shape of the moving member changes in proportion to the applied load, so that the player applies an overload to the operating member. The greater the degree of deformation of the moving member. Therefore, the more the player applies an overload to the operating member, the larger the load consumed by the elastic member can be, and the more the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced.

移動部材が複数の部位から構成され各部材が磁力で吸着される構成では、吸着力以上の荷重がかけられるまでは移動部材が形状を維持し、吸着力以上の荷重がかけられて初めて移動部材の形状が変形する。これにより、吸着力以下の荷重で通常通りに操作する場合には、移動部材を剛体として扱え、移動部材の操作を容易とすることができる。 In a configuration in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts and each member is attracted by a magnetic force, the moving member maintains its shape until a load equal to or greater than the attractive force is applied, and the moving member must be applied with a load greater than the attractive force. The shape of is deformed. As a result, when the moving member is operated as usual with a load equal to or less than the suction force, the moving member can be treated as a rigid body, and the moving member can be easily operated.

遊技機A1において、前記移動部材は、前記操作部材が前記被規制部材に固定される固定状態と、前記被規制部材が前記規制部材に移動を規制された状態で、前記操作部材に所定量以上の荷重が負荷されることで、少なくとも前記操作部材が前記被規制部材に対して相対移動可能とされる非伝達状態と、を構成可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機A2。 In the game machine A1, the moving member has a predetermined amount or more to the operating member in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and a state in which the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulated member. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that, by being loaded with the load of the above, at least the operating member can be configured in a non-transmission state in which the operating member can move relative to the regulated member.

遊技機A2によれば、遊技機A1の奏する効果に加え、移動部材は、操作部材が被規制部材に固定される固定状態と、被規制部材が規制部材に移動を規制された状態で、操作部材に所定量以上の荷重が負荷されることで、少なくとも操作部材が被規制部材に対して相対移動可能とされる非伝達状態と、を構成可能とされるので、固定状態において操作部材の操作性を確保しながら、非伝達状態では規制部材への荷重の伝達を抑制することができる。 According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the moving member is operated in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and in a state in which the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulated member. When a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the member, it is possible to configure at least a non-transmission state in which the operating member can move relative to the regulated member. Therefore, the operating member can be operated in the fixed state. It is possible to suppress the transmission of the load to the regulating member in the non-transmission state while ensuring the property.

遊技機A1及び2において、前記移動部材を支持する支持部材を備え、前記移動部材を構成する前記操作部材および前記被規制部材は前記支持部材に配設される第1軸に同軸で軸支され、前記移動部材の移動は、前記第1軸を中心とした揺動であることを特徴とする遊技機A3。 In the game machines A1 and 2, the support member for supporting the moving member is provided, and the operating member and the regulated member constituting the moving member are coaxially supported by a first axis arranged on the supporting member. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the movement of the moving member is a swing about the first axis.

遊技機A3によれば、遊技機A1及び2の奏する効果に加え、操作部材が操作されることで、規制部材と被規制部材との間で大きな荷重がかかることを抑制でき、規制部材または被規制部材が破損することを抑制することができる。 According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 and 2, it is possible to suppress a large load from being applied between the regulated member and the regulated member by operating the operating member, and the regulated member or the subject It is possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged.

遊技機A3において、前記移動部材を揺動方向に移動させる付勢力を発生させる第1付勢部材を備え、前記付勢力は前記操作部材側に加えられることを特徴とする遊技機A4。 The game machine A4 includes a first urging member that generates an urging force for moving the moving member in the swing direction, and the urging force is applied to the operating member side.

遊技機A4によれば、遊技機A3の奏する効果に加え、第1付勢部材の付勢力が操作部材側に加えられ、被規制部材側には加えられないので、規制部材に付勢部材の付勢力が加わることを防止できる。これにより、移動部材が非伝達状態となった際に規制部材が第1付勢部材から過度な付勢力を受けて破損することを防止することができる。 According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the urging force of the first urging member is applied to the operating member side and not to the regulated member side. It is possible to prevent the addition of urging force. This makes it possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged by receiving an excessive urging force from the first urging member when the moving member is in the non-transmission state.

ここで、過度な付勢力が生じる場合としては、操作部材と被規制部材との間を連結する態様でバネ部材が配設され、固定状態ではバネ部材が伸縮しないが、非伝達状態で操作部材と被規制部材との間のバネ部材が伸縮され、付勢力が生じる場合が例示される。この場合、操作部材と被規制部材との間の距離の変化量が大きくなることで、被規制部材から規制部材に過度な付勢力が生じる恐れがある。 Here, when an excessive urging force is generated, the spring member is arranged in a manner of connecting the operating member and the regulated member, and the spring member does not expand or contract in the fixed state, but the operating member is not transmitted. An example is a case where the spring member between the regulated member and the regulated member is expanded and contracted to generate an urging force. In this case, the amount of change in the distance between the operating member and the regulated member becomes large, so that an excessive urging force may be generated from the regulated member to the regulated member.

遊技機A4において、前記第1軸が横方向に長手方向を向けて配設され、前記第1付勢部材の付勢力が、前記操作部材を前倒れさせる方向に向けて発生し、前記固定状態の前記移動部材が、前記規制部材に揺動を規制された状態で、前記操作部材に下向きの荷重をかけることで、前記非伝達状態が構成されることを特徴とする遊技機A5。 In the game machine A4, the first axis is arranged in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, and the urging force of the first urging member is generated in the direction of tilting the operating member forward, and the fixed state. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the non-transmission state is formed by applying a downward load to the operating member while the moving member is restricted from swinging by the regulating member.

ここで、第1付勢部材の付勢の方向を移動部材が起き上がる方向に設定すると、遊技者が操作部材に下向きに過荷重をかけた場合に、操作部材が被規制部材から剥離して規制部材の破損を防止できたとしても、遊技者が手を離すとすぐに操作部材が上昇するので、遊技者が過荷重をかけていることに気付かず、操作部材に繰り返し過荷重をかける恐れがあるという問題点があった。 Here, if the urging direction of the first urging member is set to the direction in which the moving member rises, the operating member is separated from the regulated member and regulated when the player applies a downward overload to the operating member. Even if the member can be prevented from being damaged, the operating member rises as soon as the player releases the hand, so that the player may not notice that the operating member is overloaded and may repeatedly overload the operating member. There was a problem that there was.

これに対し、遊技機A5では、遊技機A4の奏する効果に加え、第1付勢部材による操作部材の付勢の方向が操作部材を前倒れされる方向に向けられるので、操作部材を下方の位置に配置させ続けることができる。これにより、遊技者が操作部材に過荷重を繰り返しかける事態を回避することができる。 On the other hand, in the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the direction of urging the operation member by the first urging member is directed to the direction in which the operation member is tilted forward, so that the operation member is moved downward. Can be kept in place. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player repeatedly applies an overload to the operating member.

遊技機A4において、前記第1軸が横方向に長手方向を向けて配設され、前記第1付勢部材の付勢力が、前記操作部材を上昇させる方向に向けられ、前記固定状態の前記移動部材が、前記規制部材に揺動を規制された状態で、前記操作部材に下向きの荷重をかけることで、前記非伝達状態が構成されることを特徴とする遊技機A6。 In the game machine A4, the first axis is arranged in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, the urging force of the first urging member is directed in the direction of raising the operating member, and the movement in the fixed state. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the non-transmission state is formed by applying a downward load to the operating member in a state where the member is restricted from swinging by the regulating member.

遊技機A6によれば、遊技機A4の奏する効果に加え、操作部材を上昇させる方向に向けられ、操作部材に下向きの荷重をかけることで非伝達状態が構成されるので、遊技者が操作部材に下向きの荷重をかけて、移動部材が非伝達状態を構成しても、遊技者が荷重を解くと操作部材が付勢力により固定状態側へ移動する。これにより、操作部材の配置を安定化することができ、遊技者が次の操作を行いやすくすることができる。 According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the operating member is directed in the direction of raising and a non-transmission state is formed by applying a downward load to the operating member, so that the player can operate the operating member. Even if a downward load is applied to the moving member to form a non-transmission state, when the player releases the load, the operating member moves to the fixed state side by the urging force. As a result, the arrangement of the operating members can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

遊技機A6において、前記移動部材が前記非伝達状態から前記固定状態へ復帰する場合の前記操作部材の揺動速度を低減する制動手段を備える遊技機A7。 In the game machine A6, the game machine A7 includes a braking means for reducing the swing speed of the operating member when the moving member returns from the non-transmission state to the fixed state.

遊技機A7によれば、遊技機A6の奏する効果に加え、非伝達状態から固定状態へ復帰する際の操作部材の揺動速度が低減されるので、操作部材が固定状態に高速で復帰することで規制部材に衝撃が伝わることを抑制することができる。 According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, the swing speed of the operating member when returning from the non-transmission state to the fixed state is reduced, so that the operating member returns to the fixed state at high speed. It is possible to suppress the impact from being transmitted to the regulating member.

遊技機A7において、前記制動手段は、前記支持部材に配設され粘性抵抗を発生可能なギアダンパであり、前記操作部材に配設されるギア部と前記ギアダンパとが歯合することを特徴とする遊技機A8。 In the game machine A7, the braking means is a gear damper disposed on the support member and capable of generating a viscous resistance, and is characterized in that the gear portion disposed on the operating member and the gear damper mesh with each other. Game machine A8.

遊技機A8によれば、遊技機A7の奏する効果に加え、制動手段が粘性抵抗を発生可能なギアダンパから構成されるので、操作部材の揺動速度が大きい程、操作部材にかかる抵抗は大きくなる。そのため、揺動速度が小さい(操作部材の復帰速度が小さい)場合の抵抗を抑制し、例えば、移動部材が非伝達状態の場合に遊技者が操作部材を操作して操作部材が高速で揺動する場合の抵抗は大きくすることができる。 According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the braking means is composed of a gear damper capable of generating viscous resistance. Therefore, the higher the swing speed of the operating member, the greater the resistance applied to the operating member. .. Therefore, the resistance when the swing speed is small (the return speed of the operation member is small) is suppressed. For example, when the moving member is in the non-transmission state, the player operates the operation member and the operation member swings at high speed. The resistance can be increased.

これにより、揺動速度によらず、遊技者の高速の操作に対応した大きな抵抗を生じる場合に比較して、第1付勢部材の付勢力を小さく設定でき、第1付勢部材の設計自由度を向上させることができる。 As a result, the urging force of the first urging member can be set smaller than in the case where a large resistance corresponding to the player's high-speed operation is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the design of the first urging member is free. The degree can be improved.

遊技機A8において、前記ギアダンパは、前記操作部材および前記被規制部材の相対移動に粘性抵抗を発生させる態様で配設されることを特徴とする遊技機A9。 A9 of the game machine A8, wherein the gear damper is arranged in a manner of generating a viscous resistance with respect to the relative movement of the operation member and the regulated member.

ここで、操作部材と被規制部材とが固定され一体として揺動すると、操作部材と被規制部材との相対的な位置関係が変化しないので、操作部材がギアダンパから粘性抵抗を受けることはない。 Here, when the operating member and the regulated member are fixed and swing as one, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member does not change, so that the operating member does not receive viscous resistance from the gear damper.

これに対し、遊技機A9によれば、遊技機A8の奏する効果に加え、非伝達状態では、操作部材が揺動する場合に、操作部材と被規制部材との相対的な位置関係が変化するので、ギアダンパの粘性抵抗が操作部材に与えられる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A8, in the non-transmission state, when the operation member swings, the relative positional relationship between the operation member and the regulated member changes. Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper is given to the operating member.

従って、遊技者が操作部材に、被規制部材と操作部材とが非伝達状態を構成するほどの荷重を与えた場合にのみギアダンパの粘性抵抗が操作部材に働くようにすることができる。これにより、遊技者が操作部材を操作する際の操作感を変化させ、操作部材を適切に使用するように促すことができる。 Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper can be made to act on the operating member only when the player applies a load to the operating member so that the regulated member and the operating member form a non-transmission state. As a result, it is possible to change the feeling of operation when the player operates the operating member and encourage the player to use the operating member appropriately.

例えば、操作部材を操作する際の操作抵抗が過度に大きくなることで、遊技者にとっては操作がしづらくなり、ストレスとなる。操作部材および被規制部材が固定された状態に戻れば、操作抵抗が小さくなり、遊技者にとって操作し易くできる。 For example, when the operating resistance when operating the operating member becomes excessively large, it becomes difficult for the player to operate the operating member, which causes stress. When the operating member and the regulated member are returned to the fixed state, the operating resistance is reduced and the player can easily operate the operating member.

そのため、ストレスを回避しようとする遊技者ほど、操作部材に過荷重をかけることを避けるようになる。これにより、移動部材が破壊されることを抑制することができる。 Therefore, a player who tries to avoid stress will avoid applying an overload to the operating member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving member from being destroyed.

遊技機A1からA9のいずれかにおいて、前記移動部材を駆動させる駆動力を発生する駆動装置と、その駆動力を前記移動部材へ伝達する伝達部材と、を備え、前記移動部材が荷重を受け前記固定状態から前記非伝達状態へ変化する際に、その荷重が伝達されない位置に前記伝達部材が配設されることを特徴とする遊技機A10。 In any of the game machines A1 to A9, a driving device for generating a driving force for driving the moving member and a transmitting member for transmitting the driving force to the moving member are provided, and the moving member receives a load and said. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the transmission member is arranged at a position where the load is not transmitted when the state changes from the fixed state to the non-transmission state.

遊技機A10によれば、遊技機A1からA9のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、移動部材が荷重を受け、固定状態から非伝達状態へ変化したとしても、伝達部材にはその荷重が伝達されないので、伝達部材の破損を抑制し、伝達部材の耐久性を向上させることができる。 According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A9, even if the moving member receives a load and changes from the fixed state to the non-transmission state, the load is not transmitted to the transmission member. , Damage of the transmission member can be suppressed, and the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

なお、移動部材から荷重が伝達されない位置としては、移動部材が荷重を受ける方向に移動するとした場合に移動部材が移動する方向の反対側の位置や、移動部材が荷重を受ける方向に移動するとした場合に移動部材が移動する方向の位置であって移動部材から所定距離だけ離間する位置などが例示される。 The position where the load is not transmitted from the moving member is the position opposite to the direction in which the moving member moves when the moving member moves in the direction in which the load is received, or the position in which the moving member receives the load. In this case, a position in which the moving member moves and is separated from the moving member by a predetermined distance is exemplified.

遊技機A10において、前記移動部材が前記非伝達状態とされ、前記駆動装置から駆動力が生じる場合に、前記駆動装置の駆動力が前記操作部材に伝達され、前記被規制部材に非伝達とされることを特徴とする遊技機A11。 In the game machine A10, when the moving member is in the non-transmission state and a driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member and is not transmitted to the regulated member. A game machine A11 characterized by the fact that.

遊技機A11によれば、遊技機A10の奏する効果に加え、規制部材により移動部材の揺動が規制される場合に、駆動装置から駆動力が生じたとしても、その際生じる駆動力は操作部材の揺動に使用され、被規制部材の揺動には使用されないので、規制部材が損傷することを防止することができる。 According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of the game machine A10, when the swing of the moving member is regulated by the regulating member, even if the driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force generated at that time is the operating member. Since it is used for swinging the regulated member and not for swinging the regulated member, it is possible to prevent the regulated member from being damaged.

遊技機A2からA11において、前記移動部材が前記固定状態とされ、前記移動部材が前記第1位置に配置される場合に比較して前記第2位置に配置される場合の方が、前記操作部材を外方に張り出させる態様で構成され、前記移動部材が第2位置に配置された場合に前記移動部材が前記規制部材により移動を規制され、前記操作部材および前記被規制部材が電磁石で吸着されることにより前記固定状態が構成されることを特徴とする遊技機A12。 In the game machines A2 to A11, the operating member is arranged in the second position as compared with the case where the moving member is in the fixed state and the moving member is arranged in the first position. The moving member is restricted from moving by the regulating member when the moving member is arranged at the second position, and the operating member and the regulated member are attracted by an electromagnet. The gaming machine A12 is characterized in that the fixed state is formed by the operation.

ここで、第1位置で操作部材の揺動を規制した方が操作部材の外方への張り出し幅が小さいので、例えば、遊技機を梱包する箱を選定する際に、第1位置で操作部材が固定された状態を基準として選定した方が、箱を小さくすることができる。 Here, since the width of the operating member overhanging outward is smaller when the swing of the operating member is regulated at the first position, for example, when selecting a box for packing the game machine, the operating member is regulated at the first position. The box can be made smaller by selecting it based on the fixed state.

一方で、第2位置で操作部材の揺動を規制した状態で電源が切られると、操作部材を第2位置から移動させることができず、遊技機を梱包用の箱に入れることができないという問題点があった。 On the other hand, if the power is turned off while the swing of the operating member is restricted at the second position, the operating member cannot be moved from the second position and the gaming machine cannot be put in the packing box. There was a problem.

また、工場の検査ライン等で、操作部材が第1位置に配置された状態の幅でライン幅を決めておくと、操作部材が誤って第2位置に配置され揺動を固定された状態でラインを流れることにより、検査機等に操作部材が衝突する恐れがあるという問題点があった。 In addition, if the line width is determined by the width of the operation member placed in the first position on the inspection line of a factory or the like, the operation member is mistakenly placed in the second position and the swing is fixed. There is a problem that the operating member may collide with the inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line.

遊技機A12によれば、遊技機A2からA11のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、移動部材が操作部材を張り出させる第2位置で移動を規制されたとしても、操作部材と被規制部材とが電磁石で固定されているため、電源を落とすことで操作部材と被規制部材との固定を解くことができる。これにより、操作部材を容易に第1位置に配置することができ、梱包用の箱に遊技機を収納する事や、向上の検査ラインでの検査を容易にすることができる。 According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A11, even if the movement is restricted at the second position where the moving member projects the operating member, the operating member and the regulated member are still in contact with each other. Since it is fixed by an electromagnet, it is possible to release the fixation between the operating member and the regulated member by turning off the power supply. As a result, the operating member can be easily arranged in the first position, the game machine can be stored in the packing box, and the inspection on the improved inspection line can be facilitated.

<偏心カムがレバーと離間可能とされる技術思想の一例>
遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材と、その移動部材を移動させる駆動力を発生させる駆動装置と、その駆動装置から生じる駆動力を前記移動部材に伝達する伝達部材と、を備える遊技機であって、前記移動部材が一の方向に操作されることで、前記移動部材が、前記伝達部材から離反する方向に移動することを特徴とする遊技機B1。
<An example of the technical idea that the eccentric cam can be separated from the lever>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player, a driving device that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated from the driving device are used as the moving member. A game machine including a transmission member for transmitting to the above, wherein the moving member moves in a direction away from the transmission member when the moving member is operated in one direction. Machine B1.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材が、ギアの歯合により駆動される遊技機がある(例えば、特開2014−144218号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、移動部材の駆動中に移動部材が手動操作されると、ギアにかかる負担が大きくなり、駆動装置や伝達部材の耐久性が落ちたり、駆動により移動部材が遊技者に負荷を与えたりする恐れがあるという問題点があった。 In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is driven by a gear mesh (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014). -144218 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, if the moving member is manually operated while the moving member is being driven, the load on the gear is increased, the durability of the driving device and the transmission member is lowered, or the moving member is moved by the driving. There was a problem that there was a risk of giving a load to the player.

これに対し、遊技機B1によれば、遊技者が移動部材を一方に操作することで、移動部材が伝達部材から離反する方向に移動するので、移動部材から駆動装置や伝達部材に負荷が与えられることを抑制することができる。また、駆動により、移動部材が遊技者に負荷を与えることを抑制することができる。なお、伝達部材としては、偏心カムや、ソレノイドなどが例示される。 On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, when the player operates the moving member in one direction, the moving member moves in the direction away from the transmitting member, so that a load is applied from the moving member to the driving device and the transmitting member. It can be suppressed. In addition, the drive can prevent the moving member from giving a load to the player. Examples of the transmission member include an eccentric cam and a solenoid.

遊技機B1において、前記伝達部材が、第1軸に偏心して軸支され、前記第1軸を中心に回転される部材から構成されることを特徴とする遊技機B2。 In the game machine B1, the game machine B2 is characterized in that the transmission member is eccentrically supported by a first axis and is composed of a member that is rotated about the first axis.

ここで、移動部材が一の方向へ操作されることで移動部材と伝達部材とが離反されるので、逆に移動部材を他の方向へ操作すると、移動部材と伝達部材とが衝突する。移動部材の移動幅が大きくなるほど伝達部材の腕長さが長くなることが多い。この場合、衝突により伝達部材が破損する恐れがある。 Here, when the moving member is operated in one direction, the moving member and the transmitting member are separated from each other. Therefore, when the moving member is operated in the other direction, the moving member and the transmitting member collide with each other. As the moving width of the moving member increases, the arm length of the transmitting member often becomes longer. In this case, the transmission member may be damaged due to the collision.

これに対し、遊技機B2によれば、遊技機B1の奏する効果に加え、伝達部材が偏心カムから構成されるので、第1軸から外形までの距離が長い部分で移動部材を駆動させる際の移動量を確保しつつ、移動部材と衝突する際には第1軸から外形までの距離が短い部分を移動部材に向けた姿勢をとることで、第1軸から移動部材と伝達部材とが衝突する部分の伝達部材の腕長さを短くすることができる。これにより、伝達部材が破損することを防止することができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, since the transmission member is composed of an eccentric cam, when the moving member is driven in a portion where the distance from the first axis to the outer shape is long. When colliding with the moving member while ensuring the amount of movement, the moving member and the transmitting member collide from the first axis by taking a posture in which the portion where the distance from the first axis to the outer shape is short is directed toward the moving member. It is possible to shorten the arm length of the transmission member of the portion to be used. This makes it possible to prevent the transmission member from being damaged.

遊技機B2において、前記移動部材を特定の方向に移動させる付勢力を発生する第1付勢部材を備え、前記特定の方向が、前記移動部材および前記伝達部材を近接させる方向であることを特徴とする遊技機B3。 The game machine B2 includes a first urging member that generates an urging force that moves the moving member in a specific direction, and the specific direction is a direction that brings the moving member and the transmission member close to each other. Game machine B3.

遊技機B3によれば、遊技機B2の奏する効果に加え、第1付勢部材の付勢力により、移動部材が伝達部材に押し付けられるので、伝達部材を第1軸中心に回転させることで、移動部材に往復移動を行わせることができる。これにより、遊技者の注目を移動部材に集めやすくできる。 According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the moving member is pressed against the transmission member by the urging force of the first urging member. Therefore, the moving member is moved by rotating the transmission member around the first axis. The member can be reciprocated. This makes it easier for the player to draw the attention of the moving member.

遊技機B3において、前記移動部材が前記第1軸とは異なる軸であって左右方向に延設される第2軸で揺動可能に軸支され、前記移動部材が、遊技者が操作する操作部材を備え、前記伝達部材が前記第2軸を挟んで前記操作部材の反対側であって、かつ前記移動部材の下側に配設されることを特徴とする遊技機B4。 In the game machine B3, the moving member is swingably supported by a second axis that is different from the first axis and extends in the left-right direction, and the moving member is operated by the player. A gaming machine B4 comprising a member, wherein the transmission member is arranged on the opposite side of the operating member with the second shaft interposed therebetween and below the moving member.

遊技機B4によれば、遊技機B3の奏する効果に加え、第2軸が左右方向に延設され、レバーが前倒れする方向に揺動可能とされた状態で、伝達部材が移動部材の下側かつ第2軸を挟んで操作部材の反対側に配設されるので、遊技者が操作部材を押し下げ操作する場合に、伝達部材に荷重が与えられることを抑制することができる。これにより、伝達部材の耐久性を向上させることができる。 According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the transmission member is under the moving member in a state where the second axis is extended in the left-right direction and the lever can swing in the direction of tilting forward. Since it is arranged on the side and on the opposite side of the operating member with the second shaft in between, it is possible to suppress the application of a load to the transmitting member when the player pushes down the operating member. Thereby, the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

遊技機B4において、前記操作部材に、遊技者に対する演出を行う演出部材が配設されることを特徴とする遊技機B5。 In the game machine B4, the game machine B5 is characterized in that the operation member is provided with an effect member for producing an effect on the player.

遊技機B5によれば、遊技機B4の奏する効果に加え、操作部材に、遊技者に対する演出を行う演出部材が配設されるので、操作部材に遊技者の注目を集めることができる。 According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4, since the operation member is provided with the effect member for producing the effect on the player, the operation member can attract the attention of the player.

なお、遊技者に対する演出を行う演出装置としては、基盤に配設されたLEDなどの発光装置や、振動を生じる振動装置等が例示される。 Examples of the effect device for producing the effect on the player include a light emitting device such as an LED arranged on the substrate, a vibration device that generates vibration, and the like.

遊技機B5において、前記演出部材は、少なくとも振動を生じる振動装置を備え、その振動装置が振動することにより前記操作部材に加えられる荷重が、前記移動部材を前記伝達部材から離反させる方向に向けられることを特徴とする遊技機B6。 In the game machine B5, the effect member includes at least a vibrating device that generates vibration, and the load applied to the operating member due to the vibration of the vibrating device is directed in a direction that separates the moving member from the transmitting member. A game machine B6 characterized by this.

ここで、操作部材に演出装置が配設される場合、移動部材の操作部材側の重量が重くなるため、第1付勢部材の付勢力が大きく必要となる。そのため、伝達部材にかけられる負荷が大きくなる恐れがある。 Here, when the effect device is arranged on the operating member, the weight of the moving member on the operating member side becomes heavy, so that a large urging force of the first urging member is required. Therefore, the load applied to the transmission member may increase.

これに対し、遊技機B6によれば、遊技機B5の奏する効果に加え、演出部材が少なくとも振動を生じる振動装置を備え、その振動装置が振動することにより操作部材に加えられる荷重が、移動部材を伝達部材から離反させる方向に向けられるので、振動装置の振動により、移動部材から伝達部材へかけられる負荷を減少させることができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the effect member is provided with a vibrating device that generates at least vibration, and the load applied to the operating member due to the vibration of the vibrating device is a moving member. Is directed away from the transmission member, so that the load applied from the moving member to the transmission member can be reduced by the vibration of the vibrating device.

遊技機B6において、前記操作部材が内部を中空とした球状に構成され、その操作部材の略中央部に前記振動装置が配設され、その振動装置によって振動する振動部が、前記操作部材の外殻と剛体として連結されることを特徴とする遊技機B7。 In the game machine B6, the operating member is formed in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, the vibrating device is arranged at a substantially central portion of the operating member, and the vibrating portion vibrated by the vibrating device is outside the operating member. A game machine B7 characterized in that it is connected to a shell as a rigid body.

遊技機B7によれば、遊技機B6の奏する効果に加え、操作部材が内部を中空とした球状に構成され、その操作部材の略中央部に振動装置が配設されるので、操作部材の外形は小さく抑えながら、振動装置の大きさを確保することができる。その上で、振動装置によって振動する振動部が操作部材の内部に隠されるのではなく、操作部材の外殻と剛体として連結されるので、操作部材を操作する遊技者の手指に直に振動を伝えることができる。従って、振動装置の演出効果を向上させることができる。 According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6, the operation member is formed in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, and the vibration device is arranged in the substantially central portion of the operation member. It is possible to secure the size of the vibrating device while keeping it small. On top of that, the vibrating part vibrated by the vibrating device is not hidden inside the operating member, but is connected to the outer shell of the operating member as a rigid body, so that the vibration is directly applied to the fingers of the player who operates the operating member. I can tell. Therefore, the effect of the vibrating device can be improved.

遊技機B3からB7のいずれかにおいて、前記操作部材は下方へ向けた押し込み動作を可能とする押し込み部材を備え、その押し込み部材を押し込む方向軸が、前記第2軸を挟んで前記第1軸の反対側に配置されることを特徴とする遊技機B8。 In any of the game machines B3 to B7, the operating member includes a pushing member that enables a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is the first axis with the second axis interposed therebetween. A game machine B8 characterized in that it is arranged on the opposite side.

遊技機B8によれば、遊技機B3からB7のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、操作部材は下方へ向けた押し込み動作を可能とする押し込み部材を備え、その押し込み部材を押し込む方向軸が、第2軸を挟んで第1軸の反対側に配置されるので、遊技者が押し込み部材を押し込むことによって、移動部材が伝達部材から離反される方向に荷重を受け、伝達部材に移動部材からかけられる荷重を減少させることができる。 According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B3 to B7, the operating member is provided with a pushing member that enables a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is a second. Since it is arranged on the opposite side of the first axis with the shaft in between, when the player pushes the pushing member, the moving member receives a load in the direction away from the transmitting member, and the load applied to the transmitting member from the moving member. Can be reduced.

遊技機B8において、前記押し込み部材を押し込み可能な押し込み可能状態と、前記押し込み部材が変位不能に固定され押し込み不能である押し込み不能状態とが構成されることを特徴とする遊技機B9。 The game machine B8 is characterized in that a pushable state in which the push member can be pushed and a pushable state in which the push member is fixed so as not to be displaced and cannot be pushed are configured.

遊技機B9によれば、遊技機B8の奏する効果に加え、押し込み部材を押し込み可能な押し込み可能状態と、押し込み部材が変位不能に固定され押し込み不能である押し込み不能状態とが構成されるので、遊技者の行う操作によって移動部材が受ける影響を遊技機側で切替ることができる。 According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of the game machine B8, a pushable state in which the push member can be pushed in and a pushable state in which the push member is fixed in a non-displaceable manner and cannot be pushed are configured. The effect on the moving member can be switched on the gaming machine side by the operation performed by the person.

例えば、遊技者が押し込み部材を断続的に繰り返し押し込む(連打する)場合、押し込み部材が押し込まれた状態から戻る際に、その反作用で、移動部材が伝達部材へ近接する方向に負荷を受ける。そのため、伝達部材が破損する恐れがある。 For example, when a player repeatedly pushes (continuously hits) the pushing member intermittently, when the pushing member returns from the pushed state, the moving member receives a load in a direction close to the transmission member due to the reaction. Therefore, the transmission member may be damaged.

一方、押し込み不能状態とされる場合、遊技者の押し込み操作に対して操作部材全体が押し下げられるので、それにより移動部材も伝達部材から離反する方向に移動する。従って、遊技者が押し込み部材を連打しても、操作部材が上方へ付勢力により戻ることにより伝達部材と移動部材とが衝突するという事態を抑制することができる。 On the other hand, when the pushing-in impossible state is set, the entire operating member is pushed down in response to the pushing operation of the player, so that the moving member also moves in the direction away from the transmission member. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the pushing member, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the transmitting member and the moving member collide with each other due to the operating member returning upward by the urging force.

なお、押し込み不能状態を構成する方法としては、鉤状の爪で押し込み部材を係止する方法や、直線的な往復運動をするボイスコイルモータなどの振動装置により押し込み部材を終端位置まで張り出させる(一方向に負荷をかけ続ける)方法等が例示される。ボイスコイルモータなどの振動装置により押し込み部材を終端位置まで張り出させる方法によれば、その振動装置によって押し込み部材を振動させることと、押し込み部材を押し込み不能状態とすることとの両方の作用を生じさせることができる。 In addition, as a method of configuring the push-in impossible state, a method of locking the push member with a hook-shaped claw or a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor that makes a linear reciprocating motion is used to extend the push member to the terminal position. An example is a method (continuing to apply a load in one direction). According to the method of projecting the pushing member to the terminal position by a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor, the vibrating device causes both the action of vibrating the pushing member and the action of making the pushing member in a push-in impossible state. Can be made to.

遊技機B4からB9のいずれかにおいて、前記第1軸と前記第2軸とが平行に配置され、前記伝達部材の回転方向が、前記第2軸を挟んで前記第1軸から離間する側が前記移動部材に対向する方向とされることを特徴とする遊技機B10。 In any of the game machines B4 to B9, the first axis and the second axis are arranged in parallel, and the side in which the rotation direction of the transmission member is separated from the first axis across the second axis is said. A game machine B10 characterized in that the direction is opposed to a moving member.

遊技機B10によれば、遊技機B4からB9のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、伝達部材の回転方向が、第2軸を挟んで第1軸から遠い側で移動部材に対向する方向とされるので、伝達部材が移動部材に対向して移動する場合には、移動部材から伝達部材に与えられる荷重が抑制される(第2軸から移動部材と伝達部材との当接位置までの距離が長くなる)ので、伝達部材が移動部材に近接する方向に移動するとしても伝達部材が破損する可能性を低くすることができる。 According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B4 to B9, the rotation direction of the transmission member is a direction facing the moving member on the side far from the first axis with the second axis in between. Therefore, when the transmission member moves facing the moving member, the load applied to the transmission member from the moving member is suppressed (the distance from the second axis to the contact position between the moving member and the transmission member is long). Therefore, even if the transmission member moves in a direction close to the moving member, the possibility that the transmission member is damaged can be reduced.

遊技機B1からB10のいずれかにおいて、前記伝達部材は第1軸で軸支され、前記駆動装置から駆動力を伝達される回転ギアと、前記第1軸に偏心して軸支されると共に前記移動部材に当接される偏心カムと、を備え、その偏心カムに対して前記回転ギアが固定される固定状態と、前記偏心カムに対して前記回転ギアが相対移動可能な非伝達状態とを構成可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機B11。 In any of the game machines B1 to B10, the transmission member is pivotally supported by the first shaft, and is pivotally supported and eccentrically supported by the rotating gear to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving device and the movement. An eccentric cam that comes into contact with a member is provided, and a fixed state in which the rotary gear is fixed to the eccentric cam and a non-transmission state in which the rotary gear can move relative to the eccentric cam are configured. A game machine B11 characterized in that it is possible.

遊技機B11によれば、遊技機B1からB10のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、固定状態では、伝達部材の回転により移動部材を揺動させることができると共に、偏心カムが移動部材から閾値以上の荷重を受ける場合には、偏心カムおよび回転ギアを非伝達状態とすることで、移動部材から偏心カムに加えられる荷重を逃がすことができる。これにより、偏心カムが破損することを防止することができる。 According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B10, in the fixed state, the moving member can be swung by the rotation of the transmission member, and the eccentric cam is equal to or higher than the threshold value from the moving member. When receiving a load, the load applied to the eccentric cam can be released from the moving member by setting the eccentric cam and the rotary gear in a non-transmissive state. This makes it possible to prevent the eccentric cam from being damaged.

なお、偏心カムと回転ギアとが非伝達状態を構成可能とされる場合とは、例えば、磁力によって偏心カムと回転ギアとが吸着固定される場合や、偏心カムと回転ギアとが周方向の摩擦で嵌合している場合等が例示される。 The case where the eccentric cam and the rotary gear can be configured in a non-transmission state is, for example, the case where the eccentric cam and the rotary gear are attracted and fixed by magnetic force, or the case where the eccentric cam and the rotary gear are in the circumferential direction. An example is the case where the gears are fitted by friction.

<移動部材を固定するロック部材が移動部材と同期動作される技術思想の一例>
遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材と、その移動部材を駆動させる駆動力を発生する駆動装置と、第1軸に偏心して軸支されると共に前記駆動装置の駆動力を前記移動部材に伝達する伝達部材と、前記移動部材の揺動を規制する規制部材と、を備える遊技機であって、前記規制部材は、前記移動部材の揺動を規制可能な待機状態と、前記移動部材の揺動の規制を解除する解除状態と、を構成可能とされ、前記伝達部材と前記規制部材とが前記駆動装置の駆動力により同期して動作することを特徴とする遊技機C1。
<Example of technical concept in which the lock member that fixes the moving member is operated in synchronization with the moving member>
A moving member that moves between the first position and the second position by being operated by the player, a driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving member, and an eccentric support on the first axis. A gaming machine including a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the drive device to the moving member and a regulating member that regulates the swing of the moving member, wherein the regulating member causes the moving member to swing. A regulateable standby state and a release state for releasing the restriction on the swing of the moving member can be configured, and the transmission member and the regulating member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. A game machine C1 characterized by.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材が、駆動装置で駆動される偏心カム状の伝達部材により揺動され、その偏心カム状の伝達部材に近接する方向に移動部材を移動させる付勢力を受け、移動部材の揺動の途中で移動部材の揺動を規制すると共に所定のタイミングで移動部材の揺動の規制を解除する規制部材を備える遊技機がある(例えば、特開2013−244108号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、移動部材の揺動の規制を解除するのに合わせて、偏心カム状の伝達部材の短径側を移動部材と当接する側に向けることで、移動部材と偏心カム状の伝達部材とが衝突した場合の伝達部材の破損を防止できるが、何らかの理由で規制部材が誤作動した場合に、偏心カム状の伝達部材の姿勢を変化させることができず、偏心カム状の伝達部材が長径側で移動部材と衝突し、偏心カム状の伝達部材が破損する恐れがあるという問題点があった。 In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is oscillated by an eccentric cam-shaped transmitting member driven by a driving device. In response to the urging force that moves the moving member in the direction close to the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, the swing of the moving member is regulated during the swing of the moving member, and the swing of the moving member is regulated at a predetermined timing. There is a gaming machine provided with a restricting member to be released (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-244108). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the minor axis side of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member is directed to the side that comes into contact with the moving member in accordance with the release of the restriction on the swing of the moving member. It is possible to prevent damage to the transmission member when it collides with the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, but if the regulating member malfunctions for some reason, the posture of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member cannot be changed and the eccentricity is eccentric. There is a problem that the cam-shaped transmission member may collide with the moving member on the major axis side and the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member may be damaged.

これに対し、遊技機C1によれば、移動部材に駆動力を伝達する伝達部材と、移動部材の揺動を規制する規制部材とが駆動装置の駆動力により同期して動作するので、規制部材が解除状態とされる際の伝達部材の姿勢を機械的に定めることができる。これにより、伝達部材の強度の高い側(短径側)を移動部材へ向けた状態で移動部材と伝達部材とを当接させることができるので、伝達部材の耐久性を向上させることができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force to the moving member and the regulating member that regulates the swing of the moving member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. The posture of the transmission member when is in the released state can be mechanically determined. As a result, the moving member and the transmitting member can be brought into contact with each other with the high-strength side (minor diameter side) of the transmitting member facing the moving member, so that the durability of the transmitting member can be improved.

遊技機C1において、前記規制部材は、前記移動部材の揺動の規制を解除する位相に限って前記伝達部材と同期動作され、前記伝達部材との同期動作が解除された場合には、前記規制部材は前記待機状態とされ、前記移動部材が所定位置まで移動することで前記移動部材の揺動が前記規制部材に規制されることを特徴とする遊技機C2。 In the game machine C1, the restricting member is synchronously operated with the transmission member only in the phase in which the regulation of the swing of the moving member is released, and when the synchronous operation with the transmission member is released, the regulation is performed. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the member is put into the standby state, and the swing of the moving member is restricted by the regulating member when the moving member moves to a predetermined position.

遊技機C2によれば、遊技機C1の奏する効果に加え、規制部材が移動部材の揺動の規制を解除した後は、駆動装置の駆動力を専ら移動部材の揺動に利用することができるので、伝達部材を回転させる際に規制部材が一緒に動くことにより移動部材と衝突する等の不具合が生じることを防止することができる。 According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, after the regulating member releases the restriction on the swing of the moving member, the driving force of the driving device can be exclusively used for swinging the moving member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the moving member due to the regulation member moving together when the transmission member is rotated.

また、同期駆動中に遊技者が移動部材を操作した場合にも、所定位置に移動部材を配置することにより移動部材の揺動を規制部材により規制することができるので、繰り返し、移動部材と規制部材との同期駆動(移動部材の揺動規制を解除すること)を行うことができる。 Further, even when the player operates the moving member during the synchronous drive, the swing of the moving member can be regulated by the regulating member by arranging the moving member at a predetermined position. Synchronous drive with the member (release of the swing regulation of the moving member) can be performed.

遊技機C2において、前記規制部材が前記待機状態とされる場合に、前記移動部材の一端が前記規制部材に乗り上げる態様で前記規制部材を移動させることで、前記移動部材の揺動が規制され、前記移動部材は、前記伝達部材の移動態様により、前記所定位置を経由しない第1動作と、前記所定位置へ至る第2動作と、を実行可能とされ、前記規制部材は、前記移動部材が前記第1動作を実行する場合に、前記移動部材の外形部の揺動軌跡から退避して凹設される凹設部を備えることを特徴とする遊技機C3。 In the game machine C2, when the regulating member is put into the standby state, the swing of the moving member is restricted by moving the regulating member in such a manner that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member. The moving member is capable of performing a first operation that does not pass through the predetermined position and a second operation that reaches the predetermined position, depending on the movement mode of the transmission member. The gaming machine C3 is provided with a recessed portion that is recessed from the swing locus of the outer shape portion of the moving member when the first operation is executed.

移動部材の一端が規制部材に乗り上げる態様で規制部材を移動させることで移動部材の揺動方向が規制される場合、移動部材に揺動方向の規制を与える前段階として、移動部材に対して規制部材から抵抗が加えられる。一方で、第1動作のように、揺動方向の規制を与えられることを目的としない動作の際にまで規制部材から抵抗が加わると、移動部材の駆動力が余計に必要となる。 When the swing direction of the moving member is regulated by moving the regulating member so that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member, the moving member is regulated as a preliminary step of restricting the swinging direction of the moving member. Resistance is applied from the member. On the other hand, if resistance is applied from the restricting member even during an operation that is not intended to regulate the swing direction, such as the first operation, an extra driving force of the moving member is required.

これに対し、遊技機C3によれば、遊技機C2の奏する効果に加え、移動部材が第1動作を実行する場合に、凹設部が移動部材から退避して凹設されるので、規制部材から移動部材へ抵抗が加えられることを防止することができる。これによって、伝達部材にかけられる負荷を抑制することができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, when the moving member executes the first operation, the recessed portion is retracted from the moving member and is recessed. It is possible to prevent the resistance from being applied to the moving member. As a result, the load applied to the transmission member can be suppressed.

遊技機C1からC3のいずれかにおいて、前記移動部材を前記伝達部材へ近接する方向へ揺動させる付勢力を発生する第1付勢装置を備え、前記伝達部材は前記第1軸を中心に回転する偏心カムから構成され、前記規制部材による前記移動部材の揺動の規制が解除され、前記移動部材が前記伝達部材へ向けて付勢力で移動される場合に、前記伝達部材のカム部分の内で、前記移動部材と当接する側の側面である第1側面が、前記第1軸に軸支される前記伝達部材の一部分である円筒部に接する態様で構成され、前記移動部材が前記円筒部に当接し始めた際に前記第1側面が前記移動部材から退避して配置されることを特徴とする遊技機C4。 In any of the game machines C1 to C3, a first urging device for generating an urging force for swinging the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member is provided, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. It is composed of an eccentric cam, and when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released and the moving member is moved toward the transmitting member by a tangential force, the inside of the cam portion of the transmitting member The first side surface, which is the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the moving member, is configured to be in contact with a cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmitting member pivotally supported by the first axis, and the moving member is formed by the cylindrical portion. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the first side surface is retracted from the moving member when it starts to come into contact with the moving member.

遊技機C4によれば、遊技機C1からC3のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、規制部材による移動部材の揺動の規制が解除され、移動部材が伝達部材へ向けて付勢力で移動する場合に、伝達部材のカム部分の内で、伝達部材の移動部材と当接する側の側面である第1側面が、第1軸に軸支される伝達部材の一部分である円筒部に接する態様で構成され、移動部材が円筒部に当接し始めた際に第1側面が移動部材から退避して配置されるので、移動部材の揺動変位を最大に確保することができる。従って、規制部材による移動部材の揺動の規制を解除した直後において移動部材の揺動変位を最大に確保する同期状態を構成することができる。 According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released and the moving member moves toward the transmission member by a tangential force. In the cam portion of the transmission member, the first side surface, which is the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the moving member of the transmission member, is configured to be in contact with the cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member pivotally supported by the first axis. Since the first side surface is retracted from the moving member when the moving member starts to come into contact with the cylindrical portion, the swing displacement of the moving member can be secured to the maximum. Therefore, it is possible to configure a synchronous state in which the maximum swing displacement of the moving member is secured immediately after the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released.

遊技機C4において、前記第1側面の前記円筒部の反対側の端部が、前記移動部材と前記伝達部材との当たり始めから当接することを特徴とする遊技機C5。 In the game machine C4, the game machine C5 is characterized in that an end portion of the first side surface opposite to the cylindrical portion comes into contact with the moving member and the transmission member from the beginning of contact.

遊技機C5によれば、遊技機C4の奏する効果に加え、移動部材の揺動動作の速度を向上させることができる。 According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the speed of the swinging motion of the moving member can be improved.

ここで、円形の偏心カムの長径部分に移動部材が偏心カムの回転方向から当たると、偏心カムにかかるモーメントが大となり、駆動装置にかかる回転方向の荷重が大きくなる。そのため、いつ移動部材に伝達部材が衝突するか分からないときには、大径部分は伝達部材の回転方向で移動部材と当たらないようにすることが良い(円形の偏心カム)。一方で、いつ移動部材と伝達部材とが当たるのか把握できるのであれば、大外径部分で移動部材を揺動させた方が、移動部材の揺動速度を大とできるので、演出効果を上げることができる。 Here, when the moving member hits the major axis portion of the circular eccentric cam from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam, the moment applied to the eccentric cam becomes large, and the load applied to the drive device in the rotation direction becomes large. Therefore, when it is not known when the transmission member collides with the moving member, it is preferable that the large diameter portion does not hit the moving member in the rotational direction of the transmitting member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the moving member and the transmitting member hit each other, it is better to swing the moving member at the large outer diameter portion because the swinging speed of the moving member can be increased, so that the effect is improved. be able to.

同期駆動であれば、移動部材が伝達部材に衝突するタイミングを機械的に合わせられる。従って、移動部材が伝達部材に当接する際には第1側面を若干退避させ、衝突後のタイミングで第1側面を移動部材に当接させることができ、移動部材の揺動動作の速度を向上させることができる。 In the case of synchronous drive, the timing at which the moving member collides with the transmission member can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the moving member comes into contact with the transmission member, the first side surface can be slightly retracted, and the first side surface can be brought into contact with the moving member at the timing after the collision, improving the speed of the swinging motion of the moving member. Can be made to.

遊技機C1からC3のいずれかにおいて、前記移動部材を前記伝達部材へ近接する方向へ揺動させる付勢力を発生する第1付勢装置を備え、前記伝達部材は前記第1軸を中心に回転する偏心カムから構成され、前記規制部材による前記移動部材の揺動の規制が解除される際に、前記伝達部材が前記移動部材に当接し、前記伝達部材の回転に追従して前記移動部材が揺動されることを特徴とする遊技機C6。 In any of the game machines C1 to C3, a first urging device for generating an urging force for swinging the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member is provided, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. When the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, the transmitting member comes into contact with the moving member, and the moving member follows the rotation of the transmitting member. A game machine C6 characterized by being rocked.

遊技機C6によれば、遊技機C1からC3のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、移動部材を伝達部材へ近接する方向へ揺動させる付勢力を発生する第1付勢装置を備え、伝達部材は第1軸を中心に回転する偏心カムから構成され、規制部材による移動部材の揺動の規制が解除される際に、伝達部材が移動部材に当接し、伝達部材の回転に追従して前記移動部材が揺動するので、遊技者に移動部材の揺動の規制が解除されるタイミングを気付きにくくさせることができる。これにより、遊技者が遊技に集中しやすくすることができる。 According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, the transmission member includes a first urging device that generates an urging force that swings the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member. It is composed of an eccentric cam that rotates around the first axis, and when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, the transmitting member comes into contact with the moving member and moves following the rotation of the transmitting member. Since the member swings, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the timing when the restriction on the swing of the moving member is released. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the game.

<移動部材の先端に配置される操作部が振動する技術思想の一例>
遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材と、その移動部材に配設され振動を発生可能とされる振動装置と、を備え、前記振動装置の振動の方向と、前記移動部材の長手方向とが互いに傾斜することを特徴とする遊技機D1。
<Example of technical concept in which the operation unit placed at the tip of the moving member vibrates>
The vibration of the vibration device is provided with a moving member that moves between the first position and the second position by being operated by the player, and a vibration device that is arranged on the moving member and is capable of generating vibration. D1 is a gaming machine D1 characterized in that the direction of the moving member and the longitudinal direction of the moving member are inclined to each other.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、遊技者が操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する移動部材が、振動装置を備える遊技機がある(例えば、特開2001−120741号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、振動装置の振動が遊技機に伝達されることで遊技機が揺れる等の不具合が生じることを防ぐため、振動を大きくする事が困難であるという問題点があった。 In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is provided with a vibration device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-120741). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the vibration in order to prevent problems such as the game machine from shaking due to the vibration of the vibration device being transmitted to the game machine. there were.

これに対し、遊技機D1によれば、移動部材の長手方向と、その移動部材に配設される振動装置の振動の方向とが傾斜するので、振動装置が発生させる振動を、移動部材の長手方向に沿った方向成分と、その方向成分の垂直方向に沿った方向成分とに分解することができ、遊技機に伝達される振動を抑制することができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the longitudinal direction of the moving member and the vibration direction of the vibrating device arranged on the moving member are inclined, so that the vibration generated by the vibrating device is generated by the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It can be decomposed into a directional component along the direction and a directional component along the vertical direction of the directional component, and vibration transmitted to the game machine can be suppressed.

なお、振動装置としては、直線方向の振動を構成するボイスコイルモータや、偏心した重りを回転させることで振動を生じるバイブレータ等が例示される。ボイスコイルモータの場合、振動の方向とは、ボイスコイルモータが往復動作する方向を意味し、バイブレータの場合、振動の方向とは、重りの回転軸と垂直な方向を意味する。 Examples of the vibrating device include a voice coil motor that constitutes vibration in the linear direction, a vibrator that generates vibration by rotating an eccentric weight, and the like. In the case of a voice coil motor, the direction of vibration means the direction in which the voice coil motor reciprocates, and in the case of a vibrator, the direction of vibration means the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the weight.

遊技機D1において、前記移動部材を揺動させる駆動力を発生させる駆動装置と、その駆動装置が発生する駆動力を前記移動部材へ伝達する伝達部材と、を備え、前記振動装置は直線方向の振動を発生する装置から構成され、前記振動装置の振動により前記移動部材が移動される方向の反対側に前記伝達部材が配設されることを特徴とする遊技機D2。 The game machine D1 includes a driving device that generates a driving force that causes the moving member to swing, and a transmission member that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device to the moving member, and the vibrating device is in a linear direction. The gaming machine D2 is composed of a device that generates vibration, and the transmission member is arranged on the side opposite to the direction in which the moving member is moved by the vibration of the vibrating device.

遊技機D2によれば、遊技機D1の奏する効果に加え、振動装置が動作する際に生じる反作用が移動部材を伝達部材から離反させる方向に向けられるので、振動装置の振動により、移動部材を伝達部材から離反する方向に揺動させることができる。これにより、振動装置の振動により伝達部材が負荷を受けることを抑制することができる。 According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the reaction generated when the vibrating device operates is directed in the direction of separating the moving member from the transmitting member, so that the moving member is transmitted by the vibration of the vibrating device. It can be swung in a direction away from the member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission member from receiving a load due to the vibration of the vibrating device.

遊技機D1又はD2において、前記振動装置は直線方向の振動を発生する装置から構成され、前記振動装置が、前記移動部材に配設される第2軸で軸支され、前記振動装置の振動の中心軸が、前記第2軸を通る態様で配置され、その第2軸に振動を吸収する緩衝部材が配設されることを特徴とする遊技機D3。 In the game machine D1 or D2, the vibrating device is composed of a device that generates vibration in the linear direction, and the vibrating device is pivotally supported by a second axis arranged on the moving member to generate vibration of the vibrating device. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that a central axis is arranged so as to pass through the second axis, and a cushioning member that absorbs vibration is arranged on the second axis.

遊技機D3によれば、遊技機D1又はD2の奏する効果に加え、振動装置が移動部材に配設される第2軸で軸支され、振動装置は直線方向の振動を発生する装置から構成され、振動装置の振動の中心軸が、第2軸を通る態様で配置され、第2軸に緩衝部材が配設されるので、緩衝部材により振動の衝撃を緩和することができる。これにより、移動部材へ伝わる振動を抑制することができ、遊技機に伝わる振動を抑制することができる。 According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is pivotally supported by the second axis arranged on the moving member, and the vibration device is composed of a device that generates vibration in the linear direction. Since the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device is arranged so as to pass through the second axis and the cushioning member is arranged on the second axis, the shock of vibration can be mitigated by the cushioning member. As a result, the vibration transmitted to the moving member can be suppressed, and the vibration transmitted to the game machine can be suppressed.

遊技機D3において、前記移動部材は遊技者が押し込み操作する押し込み部材を備え、その押し込み部材を押し込み操作することにより前記第2軸の回転抵抗が上昇する態様で構成されることを特徴とする遊技機D4。 The game machine D3 is characterized in that the moving member includes a pushing member that the player pushes in, and the rotation resistance of the second shaft is increased by pushing the pushing member. Machine D4.

遊技機D4によれば、遊技機D3の奏する効果に加え、移動部材は遊技者が押し込み操作する押し込み部材を備え、その押し込み部材を押し込み操作することにより第2軸の回転抵抗が上昇する態様で構成されるので、遊技者が押し込み部材を押し込み操作する場合に特に、振動装置の回転動作を抑制し、振動成分を大きく確保することができる。これにより、振動装置が第2軸で回転し易くなる状態と、振動装置が振動成分を大きく確保する状態とを遊技者の操作により切り替えることができる。 According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, the moving member is provided with a pushing member that the player pushes in, and the rotation resistance of the second axis is increased by pushing the pushing member. Since it is configured, it is possible to suppress the rotational operation of the vibrating device and secure a large vibration component, particularly when the player pushes the pushing member. As a result, the state in which the vibrating device can easily rotate on the second axis and the state in which the vibrating device secures a large vibration component can be switched by the operation of the player.

遊技機D4において、前記振動装置が、前記押し込み部材と剛体として連結されることを特徴とする遊技機D5。 In the game machine D4, the game machine D5 is characterized in that the vibrating device is connected to the pushing member as a rigid body.

遊技機D5によれば、遊技機D4の奏する効果に加え、振動装置が押し込み部材と剛体として連結されるので、遊技者が、押し込み部材を通して振動装置の振動を体感することができる。そのため、押し込み部材を押し込んでいないときには振動装置を振動および第2軸を中心として揺動させて遊技者の注目を振動装置に集め、一方で、押し込み部材を押し込む際には、振動装置の揺動を抑えることで遊技者が感じる直線方向の振動を大きくすることができる。従って、状況(遊技者が押し込み部材を押し込んでいるか否か)に応じて、振動装置の挙動を変化させることができる。 According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the vibrating device is connected to the pushing member as a rigid body, so that the player can experience the vibration of the vibrating device through the pushing member. Therefore, when the pushing member is not pushed, the vibrating device vibrates and swings around the second axis to attract the player's attention to the vibrating device, while when pushing the pushing member, the vibrating device swings. It is possible to increase the vibration in the linear direction felt by the player by suppressing the vibration. Therefore, the behavior of the vibrating device can be changed according to the situation (whether or not the player is pushing the pushing member).

遊技機D1又はD2において、前記振動装置が、前記移動部材に配設される第2軸で軸支され、前記振動装置の振動の中心軸が、第2軸と離間した位置を通る態様で配置されることを特徴とする遊技機D6。 In the game machine D1 or D2, the vibrating device is pivotally supported by a second axis arranged on the moving member, and the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device is arranged so as to pass through a position separated from the second axis. A game machine D6 characterized by being played.

移動部材と振動装置との連結を軸支としたときに、振動装置の振動の中心軸と軸支位置とを一致させることで遊技者側に伝える振動を大きくすることができる。一方で、この場合、遊技機にも大きな振動が伝わってしまう。そのため、締結ネジの緩みや部材の劣化が早い段階で生じて、メンテナンス周期が早まるという問題点があった。 When the connection between the moving member and the vibrating device is used as a shaft support, the vibration transmitted to the player side can be increased by matching the central axis of the vibration of the vibrating device with the shaft support position. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the game machine. Therefore, there is a problem that loosening of the fastening screw and deterioration of the member occur at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

これに対し、遊技機D6によれば、遊技機D1又はD2の奏する効果に加え、振動装置の回転軸と、振動装置の振動の中心軸とをずらすことで、振動装置を回転させることに振動装置の振動を利用することができ、遊技機に伝わる振動を少なくすることができる(振動のエネルギーが振動装置の回転に使用される)。加えて、振動装置の振動により、振動装置を揺動させることで演出効果を向上させることができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the rotating axis of the vibrating device and the central axis of the vibration of the vibrating device are shifted to rotate the vibrating device. The vibration of the device can be utilized, and the vibration transmitted to the game machine can be reduced (the energy of the vibration is used for the rotation of the vibration device). In addition, the effect of the vibrating device can be improved by vibrating the vibrating device.

遊技機D6において、前記振動装置の振動を検出する検出装置を備え、前記振動装置は、遊技者が把持する操作部材に配設されることを特徴とする遊技機D7。 The game machine D6 includes a detection device for detecting the vibration of the vibration device, and the vibration device is arranged on an operation member held by the player.

遊技機D7によれば、遊技機D6の奏する効果に加え、遊技者が把持する操作部材に振動装置が配設され、振動装置の振動を検出する検出装置を備えるため、振動装置が振動している最中に操作部材を把持することで振動を抑え、振動装置が検出する信号を変化させることができる。これにより、遊技者が操作部材を把持しているか(移動部材を操作する準備段階にあるか)を検出することができる。 According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, a vibration device is provided on the operating member gripped by the player, and the vibration device is provided with a detection device for detecting the vibration of the vibration device. By grasping the operating member during the operation, vibration can be suppressed and the signal detected by the vibration device can be changed. This makes it possible to detect whether the player is holding the operating member (whether it is in the preparatory stage for operating the moving member).

<煽りを行う移動部材の入力タイミングを補助する技術思想の一例>
遊技者が入力操作する入力装置を備え、その入力装置は遊技者に対して近接離反する方向に駆動されると共に入力操作を行う部分である入力部を備えることを特徴とする遊技機E1。
<An example of a technical idea that assists the input timing of moving members that perform fanning>
The gaming machine E1 is provided with an input device for the player to perform an input operation, and the input device is driven in a direction in which the player is moved away from the player and is provided with an input unit which is a portion for performing an input operation.

パチンコ機等の遊技機において、入力装置を操作するタイミングが指定される遊技機がある(例えば、特開2012−210238号公報を参照)。しかし、上述した従来の遊技機では、入力装置を操作するタイミングに気を取られ、球を弾く強度の調整がおろそかになるなど、遊技に集中できなくなるという問題点があった。 In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the timing for operating the input device is specified (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-210238). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that it is not possible to concentrate on the game, such as being distracted by the timing of operating the input device and neglecting the adjustment of the strength of playing the ball.

これに対し、遊技機E1によれば、入力装置の入力部が、遊技者に対して近接離反する方向に駆動されるので、入力部が遊技者に近接する方向に移動し、遊技者の手指に当接したら、それを押し返す態様で入力部を操作させることで、入力部の操作のタイミングを遊技機側で図ることができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the input unit of the input device is driven in the direction of approaching and separating from the player, the input unit moves in the direction of approaching the player, and the player's fingers By operating the input unit in a manner of pushing back the input unit, the timing of operation of the input unit can be determined on the game machine side.

なお、入力操作としては、押しボタンを押し込み操作する操作や、移動部材に対して引っ張る動作などが例示される。 Examples of the input operation include an operation of pushing a push button and an operation of pulling a moving member.

遊技機E1において、前記入力装置は、直線方向に振動する振動装置を備え、その振動装置の振動方向と、前記入力部を操作する方向とが一致する態様で配置され、前記振動装置が前記入力部に押し付けられる場合には、前記入力部が操作不能とされ、前記振動装置が前記入力部から退避される場合には、前記入力部が操作可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機E2。 In the game machine E1, the input device includes a vibrating device that vibrates in a linear direction, and is arranged in such a manner that the vibrating direction of the vibrating device and the direction of operating the input unit coincide with each other. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the input unit is inoperable when pressed against the unit, and the input unit is operable when the vibrating device is retracted from the input unit.

遊技機E2によれば、遊技機E1の奏する効果に加え、振動装置が入力部に押し付けられる場合には、入力部が操作不能とされ、振動装置が入力部から退避される場合には、入力部が操作可能とされるので、振動装置に、入力装置を振動させる演出効果と、入力部を操作するタイミングを図る効果との両方を持たせることができる。 According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the input unit is disabled when the vibrating device is pressed against the input unit, and the input unit is retracted from the input unit when the vibrating device is retracted from the input unit. Since the unit can be operated, the vibrating device can have both an effect of vibrating the input device and an effect of timing the operation of the input unit.

遊技機E2において遊技者が前記入力部を操作する際に遊技者側に反力を作用させる第1付勢装置の弾性係数が、前記入力部に前記伝達装置が振動を伝達する際に前記振動装置側に反力を作用させる第2付勢装置の弾性係数に比較して小さくされることを特徴とする遊技機E3。 In the game machine E2, the elastic modulus of the first urging device that causes a reaction force to act on the player side when the player operates the input unit is the vibration when the transmission device transmits vibration to the input unit. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is made smaller than the elastic modulus of the second urging device that exerts a reaction force on the device side.

遊技機E3によれば、遊技機E2の奏する効果に加え、第2付勢装置の弾性係数に比較して、第1付勢装置の弾性係数が小さくされるので、振動装置を入力装置から離間する位置に復帰させる速度は大きく確保しながら、入力部の操作は小さな力で行うことができる。従って、遊技者が受動的に感じる振動の大きさを確保しつつ、入力部の操作の容易性を向上させることができる。 According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the elastic modulus of the first urging device is smaller than that of the second urging device, so that the vibrating device is separated from the input device. The input unit can be operated with a small force while ensuring a high speed for returning to the desired position. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of operation of the input unit while ensuring the magnitude of the vibration that the player passively feels.

遊技機E2又はE3において、前記入力装置は、遊技者が把持可能な大きさの部材であって、前記入力装置を遊技者が把持する際に、掌の位置に入力部を配置可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機E4。 In the game machine E2 or E3, the input device is a member having a size that can be gripped by the player, and when the player grips the input device, the input unit can be arranged at the position of the palm. A game machine E4 characterized by this.

遊技機E4によれば、遊技機E2又はE3の奏する効果に加え、入力部を備える入力装置が遊技者が把持可能な大きさの部材として形成され、入力装置を遊技者が把持する際に、掌の位置に入力部を配置可能とされるので、入力部の操作の容易性を向上させることができる。即ち、入力装置を把持した状態で、更に握り込むことにより、掌を入力部に押し当てることができ、入力装置を持ち替える等の別の動作を不要とできる。 According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2 or E3, an input device provided with an input unit is formed as a member having a size that can be gripped by the player, and when the player grips the input device, the input device is formed. Since the input unit can be arranged at the position of the palm, the ease of operation of the input unit can be improved. That is, by further grasping the input device while grasping it, the palm can be pressed against the input unit, and another operation such as changing the input device can be unnecessary.

また、入力部を掌で隠すことができるので、入力部が振動する動作を、入力部を把持している遊技者だけに把握させることができる。これにより、他の遊技者には気づかれない態様で、大当たりなどの告知を行うことができる。 Further, since the input unit can be hidden by the palm, the operation of the input unit vibrating can be grasped only by the player holding the input unit. As a result, it is possible to announce a big hit or the like in a manner that is not noticed by other players.

遊技機E4において、前記入力装置の前記入力部の反対側に手指を係止する係止部を備えることを特徴とする遊技機E5。 The game machine E5 is characterized in that the game machine E4 is provided with a locking portion for locking the fingers on the opposite side of the input portion of the input device.

遊技機E5によれば、遊技機E4の奏する効果に加え、入力装置を把持した際に、入力部側の振動を掌で受け止めて、係止部に手指を引っ掛けることで、振動装置による振動を掌の内側に閉じ込めることができる。これにより、遊技者が感じる振動を大きく確保することができる。 According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, when the input device is gripped, the vibration on the input part side is received by the palm, and the vibration by the vibration device is generated by hooking the finger on the locking part. Can be confined inside the palm. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of vibration felt by the player.

<球状部分が移動下端で遊技者側に向き直る技術思想の一例>
遊技者に操作される操作部を有し移動可能に構成される操作部材と、その操作部材と遊技機本体を連結すると共に移動可能に構成される接続部材とを備え、前記接続部材の移動により、前記操作部を操作する遊技者から見た前記操作部材の姿勢が第1状態と、その第1状態と異なる第2状態とを形成可能とされる場合に、その姿勢の変化量を縮小する方向に操作部材を姿勢変化させる修正手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機F1。
<An example of the technical idea that the spherical part turns to the player side at the lower end of the movement>
It is provided with an operation member having an operation unit operated by the player and being movable, and a connecting member that connects the operation member and the game machine main body and is configured to be movable, and by moving the connecting member. When the posture of the operating member as seen by the player who operates the operating unit can form a first state and a second state different from the first state, the amount of change in the posture is reduced. The gaming machine F1 is provided with a correction means for changing the posture of the operating member in a direction.

押しボタン等の操作部を有する操作部材を備え、操作部材が移動することにより操作部材の遊技者に対する姿勢が第1状態と第2状態とで変化する遊技機が知られている(例えば、特開2014−144218号公報参照)。このような遊技機では、例えば、第1状態で遊技者に操作し易い姿勢とすると、第2状態では操作し難くなる恐れがあり、第1状態と第2状態とで操作部材の操作感が変化することにより、遊技者がストレスを感じ、遊技者から不満が出る恐れがあるという問題点があった。 A gaming machine is known that includes an operating member having an operating portion such as a push button, and the posture of the operating member with respect to the player changes between the first state and the second state when the operating member moves (for example, special feature). Open 2014-144218 (see). In such a game machine, for example, if the posture is set so that the player can easily operate it in the first state, it may be difficult to operate in the second state, and the operation feeling of the operating member is felt in the first state and the second state. There is a problem that the player feels stress due to the change and the player may be dissatisfied.

例えば、操作部材が遊技者の正面側に距離をおいて配置され、操作部が押し下げ動作を求める場合には、操作部を楽に操作できたとしても、操作部材が左右方向に延設される軸を中心とした円弧軌道で移動することにより遊技者に近接し、操作部が正面側からの押し込み動作を求める態様に変化する場合には、操作部を押し込む腕を配置するスペースが狭くなり、遊技者が操作部を操作することが困難となり、最悪の場合、遊技者が操作部を操作することを放棄する可能性がある。 For example, when the operating member is arranged at a distance from the front side of the player and the operating unit requires a pushing-down operation, even if the operating unit can be easily operated, the operating member is extended in the left-right direction. When the player approaches the player by moving in an arc orbit centered on the player and the operation unit changes to a mode in which a pushing operation from the front side is required, the space for arranging the arm for pushing the operation unit becomes narrow, and the game It becomes difficult for a person to operate the operation unit, and in the worst case, the player may abandon the operation of the operation unit.

これに対し、遊技機F1によれば、接続部材の移動により操作部材を操作する遊技者から見た操作部材の姿勢が第1状態と、その第1状態と異なる第2状態とを形成可能とされる場合に、その変化量を縮小する方向に操作部材を姿勢変化させる修正手段を備えるため、遊技者の操作部材に対する操作感を変わりにくくすることができる。従って、第1状態で遊技者にとって遊技し易いように構成されることにより、第2状態においても、遊技者にとって操作し易い状態を維持することができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the posture of the operating member as seen by the player who operates the operating member by moving the connecting member can form a first state and a second state different from the first state. In this case, since the correction means for changing the posture of the operating member in the direction of reducing the amount of change is provided, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to change the operating feeling of the operating member. Therefore, by being configured to be easy for the player to play in the first state, it is possible to maintain a state that is easy for the player to operate even in the second state.

なお、修正手段としては、例えば、壁部材と、その壁部材に当接可能な態様で操作部材に配設される当接部材とから構成され、当接部材が壁部材に当接する際に生じる反力で操作部材の姿勢を変化させる装置や、操作部材に配設されるギア歯と歯合すると共に接続部材の移動によりそのギア歯に回転方向の負荷を与えるギア群から構成される装置等が例示される。 The correction means is composed of, for example, a wall member and a contact member arranged on the operation member in a manner capable of contacting the wall member, and occurs when the contact member comes into contact with the wall member. A device that changes the posture of the operating member by a reaction force, a device that meshes with the gear teeth arranged on the operating member, and a group of gears that apply a load in the rotational direction to the gear teeth by moving the connecting member, etc. Is exemplified.

また、接続部材の移動の態様としては、所定の回転軸を中心とした回転や、直線方向へのスライド移動等が例示される。 Moreover, as a mode of movement of the connecting member, rotation about a predetermined rotation axis, slide movement in a linear direction, and the like are exemplified.

遊技機F1において、前記接続部材を駆動する駆動装置を備え、前記接続部材の移動範囲において、前記操作部材が姿勢変化する変化状態と、前記操作部材が姿勢変化されず前記操作部材と前記接続部材との姿勢が維持される維持状態とが形成され、前記変化状態の際に前記修正手段から前記操作部材に生じる負荷が、前記接続部材を制動させる向きを向くことを特徴とする遊技機F2。 The game machine F1 is provided with a drive device for driving the connecting member, and the operating member is in a changing state in which the posture of the operating member changes within the moving range of the connecting member, and the operating member is not changed in posture and the operating member and the connecting member are not changed. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that a maintenance state in which the posture is maintained is formed, and a load generated from the correction means on the operation member in the change state is directed to brake the connection member.

遊技機F2によれば、遊技機F1の奏する効果に加え、接続部材に対して操作部材が常時姿勢変化するわけではないので、接続部材が常時姿勢変化する場合に比較して、接続部材を駆動させるのに必要な駆動力を抑制することができると共に、変化状態の際に修正手段から操作部材に生じる負荷が接続部材を制動させる向きに向けられるので、接続部材を制動させるのに駆動装置が発生する必要がある力を修正手段が補助し、駆動装置に与えられる負荷を抑制することができる。 According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the operation member does not always change its posture with respect to the connecting member, so that the connecting member is driven as compared with the case where the connecting member constantly changes its posture. The driving force required for braking can be suppressed, and the load generated on the operating member from the correction means in the changing state is directed in the direction of braking the connecting member, so that the driving device can brake the connecting member. The correction means can assist the force that needs to be generated, and the load applied to the drive device can be suppressed.

例えば、接続部材および操作部材が上下方向に移動し、接続部材および操作部材が移動範囲の下端に配置された際に変化状態を構成する場合、移動範囲の下端では修正手段から操作部材に与えられる負荷により接続部材および操作部材の移動速度を減速することができると共に、移動範囲の上端付近まで接続部材および操作部材が上昇した場合に接続部材および操作部材の移動抵抗が上がることを抑制することで、接続部材の駆動に必要な駆動力を抑制することができる。 For example, when the connecting member and the operating member move in the vertical direction and the connecting member and the operating member are arranged at the lower end of the moving range to form a changing state, the correction means gives the operating member at the lower end of the moving range. The moving speed of the connecting member and the operating member can be reduced by the load, and the movement resistance of the connecting member and the operating member is suppressed from increasing when the connecting member and the operating member rise to the vicinity of the upper end of the moving range. , The driving force required to drive the connecting member can be suppressed.

遊技機F2において、前記修正手段に当接される被当接部材を備え、前記操作部材の移動において前記修正手段が前記被当接部材に当接することにより前記操作部材の姿勢が変化することを特徴とする遊技機F3。 The game machine F2 includes a contacted member that comes into contact with the correcting means, and the posture of the operating member changes when the correcting means comes into contact with the contacted member when the operating member moves. The featured game machine F3.

遊技機F3によれば、遊技機F2の奏する効果に加え、修正手段と被当接部材とが当接することにより操作部材が姿勢変化するので、駆動装置の駆動力を操作部材に伝達するための部材を接続部材に配設する場合に比較して接続部材の構造を簡素化することができると共に、被当接部材が配置される位置まで修正手段が到達するまでは操作部材の姿勢を接続部材に対して維持することにより、操作部を遊技者に操作させるタイミングを示すことができる。 According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, the operation member changes its posture due to the contact between the correction means and the contacted member, so that the driving force of the driving device can be transmitted to the operating member. The structure of the connecting member can be simplified as compared with the case where the member is arranged on the connecting member, and the posture of the operating member is changed until the correction means reaches the position where the contacted member is arranged. By maintaining the above, it is possible to indicate the timing at which the player operates the operation unit.

遊技機F2又はF3において、前記操作部材が前記変化状態とされる場合に、前記修正手段から生じる負荷の方向と逆方向である所定方向の負荷を操作部材に与えることで、前記操作部材を前記所定方向に姿勢変化可能に前記修正手段が構成されることを特徴とする遊技機F4。 In the game machine F2 or F3, when the operating member is in the changed state, the operating member is subjected to the operation member by applying a load in a predetermined direction opposite to the direction of the load generated from the correction means to the operating member. The gaming machine F4, wherein the correction means is configured so that the posture can be changed in a predetermined direction.

遊技機F4によれば、遊技機F2又はF3の奏する効果に加え、変化状態における姿勢変化時に、その姿勢変化の方向と対向する方向であって変位の方向と力の方向とが向かい合うことからその負荷が過大となる恐れのある所定方向で操作部材に負荷が与えられたとしても、修正手段が操作部材を所定方向で姿勢変化可能に構成されることで、修正手段が破壊されることを抑制することができる。 According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2 or F3, when the posture changes in the changing state, the direction of the displacement and the direction of the force face each other in the direction facing the direction of the posture change. Even if a load is applied to the operating member in a predetermined direction in which the load may become excessive, the correcting means is configured to be able to change the posture of the operating member in the predetermined direction, thereby suppressing the destruction of the correcting means. can do.

遊技機F4において、前記修正手段は、前記操作部材との間にバネ弾性を有する弾性部材を備え、その弾性部材のバネ弾性により修正手段が変形することを特徴とする遊技機F5。 In the game machine F4, the correction means includes an elastic member having spring elasticity between the operating member and the game machine F5, wherein the correction means is deformed by the spring elasticity of the elastic member.

遊技機F5によれば、遊技機F4の奏する効果に加え、操作部材との間に修正手段が備える弾性部材のバネ弾性により修正手段が変形されるので、操作部材の姿勢変化に比例する反発力を発生可能であり、操作部材に所定方向の荷重が負荷された場合に、操作部材の移動量が大きくなるに伴い修正手段から操作部材に与えられる力を大きくすることで、操作部材の移動量を抑制することができる。 According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F4, the correction means is deformed by the spring elasticity of the elastic member provided between the correction means and the operation member, so that the repulsive force proportional to the posture change of the operation member is deformed. Is possible, and when a load in a predetermined direction is applied to the operating member, the moving amount of the operating member is increased by increasing the force applied to the operating member from the correction means as the moving amount of the operating member increases. Can be suppressed.

遊技機F1からF5のいずれかにおいて、前記修正手段が当接する被当接部材を備え、前記接続部材は前記遊技機本体に軸支されるレバー部材であって、前記修正手段が前記被当接部材に当接した際に受ける反力の方向が、その際の前記レバー部材の移動方向と垂直な方向成分を有する方向となることを特徴とする遊技機F6。 In any of the game machines F1 to F5, the abutting member provided with the abutting means, the connecting member is a lever member pivotally supported by the amusement machine main body, and the abutting means abuts the abutting member. The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the direction of the reaction force received when it comes into contact with the member is a direction having a direction component perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member at that time.

遊技機F6によれば、遊技機F1からF5のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、修正手段がレバー部材の移動方向と垂直な方向に沿う方向で被当接部材に当接するので、修正手段によって操作部材にかけられる負荷がレバー部材の移動方向と垂直な方向に沿って作用し、レバー部材が軸径方向の負荷を受けるので、レバー部材が移動方向(周方向)に振動する事を抑制することができる(修正手段によって操作部材にかけられる負荷がレバー部材の移動方向に作用することを抑制できる)。従って、操作部材が被当接部材と当接して姿勢変化する際のレバー部材の姿勢を安定させることができ、操作性を向上させることができる。 According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F5, the correction means abuts on the contacted member in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member, and thus is operated by the correction means. Since the load applied to the member acts along the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member and the lever member receives the load in the axial radial direction, it is possible to suppress the lever member from vibrating in the moving direction (circumferential direction). (It is possible to suppress the load applied to the operating member by the correction means from acting in the moving direction of the lever member). Therefore, the posture of the lever member when the operating member comes into contact with the contacted member and changes its posture can be stabilized, and the operability can be improved.

遊技機F6において、前記被当接部材は、前記修正手段から所定量以上の荷重が加えられることにより、前記レバー部材に当接可能に張り出すことを特徴とする遊技機F7。 The game machine F6 is characterized in that the contacted member projects so as to be in contact with the lever member when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied from the correction means.

遊技機F7によれば、遊技機F6の奏する効果に加え、遊技者の操作等により修正手段を通して被当接部材に所定量以上の荷重が加えられる場合には、被当接部材をレバー部材に当接する位置まで張り出させることによりレバー部材を制動させて、レバー部材の移動速度を抑制することができる一方で、修正手段から操作部材に加えられる負荷が所定量未満の場合にはレバー部材の移動抵抗を抑制することができる。これにより、レバー部材の破壊防止と、レバー部材の操作を軽くすることとの両立を図ることができる。 According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of the game machine F6, when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the contacted member through the correction means by the operation of the player or the like, the contacted member is used as the lever member. The lever member can be braked by projecting to the abutting position to suppress the moving speed of the lever member, but when the load applied to the operating member from the correction means is less than a predetermined amount, the lever member Movement resistance can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to achieve both prevention of breakage of the lever member and lightening of the operation of the lever member.

<球状部分が移動下端で向き直るか否かを切り替えられる技術思想の一例>
遊技者が操作する操作部を有する操作部材と、その操作部材を所定幅で移動可能な態様で遊技機本体に連結する接続部材と、少なくとも前記接続部材を駆動する駆動装置と、を備え、接続部材を所定位置に配置した状態で操作部材を第1姿勢と、その第1姿勢とは異なる第2姿勢と、で変化可能な遊技機において、前記駆動装置の駆動力を前記操作部材に伝達する伝達部材を備え、前記接続部材が所定位置に配置された状態において、前記操作部材が前記第1姿勢で維持される第1動作状態と、前記接続部材が所定位置に配置された状態において、前記伝達部材を介して前記駆動装置の駆動力が前記操作部材に伝達され、前記操作部材が前記第1姿勢から前記第2姿勢に変化される第2動作状態と、を切替可能に構成され、それら第1動作状態と第2動作状態とで、前記操作部材の移動幅が不変とされることを特徴とする遊技機G1。
<An example of a technical idea that can switch whether or not the spherical part turns at the lower end of the movement>
An operating member having an operating unit operated by the player, a connecting member for connecting the operating member to the game machine main body in a manner movable by a predetermined width, and at least a driving device for driving the connecting member are provided and connected. In a gaming machine in which the operating member can be changed between a first posture and a second posture different from the first posture with the member arranged at a predetermined position, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member. The first operating state in which the transmission member is provided and the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, the operating member is maintained in the first posture, and the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position. The driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member via the transmitting member, and the operating member is configured to be switchable between a second operating state in which the operating member is changed from the first posture to the second posture. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the movement width of the operating member is invariant between the first operating state and the second operating state.

操作部材と接続部材とを備え、接続部材を駆動させる駆動装置により操作部材を接続部材に対して相対的に駆動させる遊技機が知られている(例えば、特開2014−144218号公報参照)。このような遊技機では、操作性を重視する場面と、演出効果を重視する場面とがあったとしても、接続部材の動作に対する操作部材の動きは一種類しかないので、操作性を重視するか演出効果を重視するかの一方を選択し、他方を犠牲にする必要があり、改良の余地があった。 There is known a game machine that includes an operating member and a connecting member and drives the operating member relative to the connecting member by a driving device that drives the connecting member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). In such a game machine, even if there are scenes where operability is emphasized and scenes where the effect is emphasized, since there is only one type of movement of the operating member with respect to the movement of the connecting member, is it important to emphasize operability? There was room for improvement because it was necessary to choose one that emphasizes the effect and sacrifice the other.

例えば、操作部材に遊技者が操作する押しボタンが配設される場合、遊技者から見た押しボタンの姿勢を一定とした方が、遊技者はその押しボタンを押し易くなる一方で、操作部材自体の動きは小さくなるので操作部材の動きを利用して大きな演出を行うことが困難となる。 For example, when a push button operated by a player is provided on an operation member, it is easier for the player to push the push button when the posture of the push button as seen from the player is constant, while the operation member is arranged. Since the movement of itself becomes small, it becomes difficult to perform a large effect by utilizing the movement of the operating member.

これに対し、遊技機G1によれば、接続部材が所定位置に配置された状態において操作部材が第1姿勢のまま維持される第1動作状態と、接続部材が所定位置に配置された状態において伝達部材を介して駆動装置の駆動力が操作部材に伝達され操作部材が第1姿勢から第2姿勢に変化される第2動作状態とを、操作部材の移動幅を不変としたまま切替られるので、操作性と演出効果との両立を図ることができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, in the first operating state in which the operating member is maintained in the first posture when the connecting member is arranged in the predetermined position, and in the state where the connecting member is arranged in the predetermined position. Since the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member via the transmitting member and the operating member is changed from the first posture to the second posture, the second operating state can be switched while keeping the movement width of the operating member unchanged. , It is possible to achieve both operability and directing effect.

例えば、操作部材に押しボタンが配設される場合に、遊技者に押しボタンの操作を求める際には操作部材の姿勢を第2姿勢に変化させ、遊技者に操作し易い向きに押しボタンを向ける一方で、遊技者に操作を求めない演出時には、操作部材の姿勢を第1姿勢のままとすることで、操作性は度外視した演出に切り替えることができ、操作部材を大きく動作させることができる。従って、操作性の向上と、演出性の向上とを両立させることができる。 For example, when a push button is arranged on the operation member, when the player is requested to operate the push button, the posture of the operation member is changed to the second posture, and the push button is pushed in a direction that is easy for the player to operate. On the other hand, at the time of the production that does not require the player to operate, by keeping the posture of the operating member in the first posture, the operability can be switched to the disregarded production, and the operating member can be greatly operated. .. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement in operability and improvement in color rendering.

また、第1動作状態と第2動作状態とで操作部材の移動幅が不変とされるので、操作部材の姿勢が所定位置で変化するまでは、遊技者は操作部材がどちらの動作状態となっているのかを把握しづらくできるので、遊技者の興趣を向上させることができる。 Further, since the movement width of the operating member is unchanged between the first operating state and the second operating state, the player is in which operating state the operating member is in until the posture of the operating member changes at a predetermined position. Since it is difficult to grasp whether or not the player is playing, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

また、遊技者に操作部を操作させるタイミングまでは第1動作状態とされ操作部材を所定幅で往復移動を継続させ、所定のタイミングで第2動作状態に切り替え操作部材の姿勢を変化させることにより、遊技者に操作部を押すタイミングを知らせることができると共に、操作部材自体も押しやすい姿勢にされることで、遊技をわかり易く(押しボタンを押すタイミングをわかり易く)、かつ、快適にする(押しボタンを押しやすくする)ことができる。 Further, the first operating state is set until the player is made to operate the operation unit, the operating member is continuously reciprocated with a predetermined width, and the operation member is switched to the second operating state at a predetermined timing to change the posture of the operating member. , The player can be informed of the timing to press the operation unit, and the operation member itself is placed in an easy-to-push posture to make the game easy to understand (the timing to press the push button is easy to understand) and comfortable (push button). Can be made easier to press).

遊技機G1において、前記伝達部材に駆動力を伝達する偏心カム部材を備え、その偏心カム部材は、前記駆動装置から前記接続部材へ駆動力を伝達可能に構成され、前記偏心カム部材は、前記駆動装置の駆動力を、前記伝達部材または前記接続部材のいずれか一方に伝達する態様で構成され、いずれに伝達するかを切替可能な切替手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機G2。 The game machine G1 includes an eccentric cam member that transmits a driving force to the transmission member, the eccentric cam member is configured to be able to transmit a driving force from the driving device to the connecting member, and the eccentric cam member is the said. The gaming machine G2 is configured to transmit the driving force of the driving device to either the transmitting member or the connecting member, and includes a switching means capable of switching which of the transmitting members is transmitted.

遊技機G2によれば、遊技機G1の奏する効果に加え、偏心カム部材を通して駆動装置の駆動力が操作部材または接続部材のいずれか一方に切替可能に伝達されるので、操作部材と接続部材とを同時に駆動させる場合に比較して駆動装置から発生させる駆動力を抑制することができる。 According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the driving force of the driving device is switchably transmitted to either the operating member or the connecting member through the eccentric cam member, so that the operating member and the connecting member It is possible to suppress the driving force generated from the driving device as compared with the case where the two are driven at the same time.

なお、駆動装置の駆動力を接続部材に伝達するか操作部材に伝達するかを切り替える態様としては、操作部材および接続部材まで駆動装置から歯合により連結されるギア群が配設され、状況によって歯合するギアを切替可能とする態様や、偏心カム部材が回転の途中で接続部材または伝達部材のどちらかに当接可能に構成され、それら接続部材と操作部材との間の距離が偏心カム部材の幅よりも大きくされる態様等が例示される。 As a mode for switching whether to transmit the driving force of the driving device to the connecting member or the operating member, a gear group in which the driving device and the connecting member are connected by teeth from the driving device is arranged, depending on the situation. The eccentric cam member is configured so that the gears to be meshed can be switched, and the eccentric cam member can come into contact with either the connecting member or the transmitting member during rotation, and the distance between the connecting member and the operating member is the eccentric cam. An embodiment in which the width is made larger than the width of the member is exemplified.

遊技機G2において、前記偏心カム部材が正回転される状態で前記伝達部材に当接する場合には、前記伝達部材を介して前記操作部材に駆動力が伝達され、前記偏心カム部材が逆回転される状態で前記伝達部材に当接する場合には、前記操作部材へ駆動力が非伝達とされることを特徴とする遊技機G3。 In the game machine G2, when the eccentric cam member comes into contact with the transmission member in a state of being rotated forward, a driving force is transmitted to the operating member via the transmission member, and the eccentric cam member is rotated in the reverse direction. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the driving force is not transmitted to the operating member when it comes into contact with the transmitting member in such a state.

ここで、例えば、偏心カム部材と接続部材とが離間することを契機に駆動力が操作部材に伝達される態様で構成される場合、動作時の振動や、遊技者が操作部材を操作すること等により、接続部材が偏心カム部材から意図せず離間することを検出して、誤って操作部材に駆動力が伝達されることを防止するために駆動装置を停止させる必要が生じるので、検出装置を追加する必要が有ると共に、駆動装置の制御が複雑となる。 Here, for example, when the eccentric cam member and the connecting member are separated from each other and the driving force is transmitted to the operating member, vibration during operation or the player operating the operating member. For example, it is necessary to detect that the connecting member is unintentionally separated from the eccentric cam member and stop the driving device in order to prevent the driving force from being erroneously transmitted to the operating member. It is necessary to add, and the control of the drive device becomes complicated.

これに対し、遊技機G3によれば、遊技機G2の奏する効果に加え、偏心カム部材の回転方向によって駆動力が操作部材に伝達されるか否かを切り替えることができるので、接続部材と偏心カム部材とが動作の途中で離間したとしても、一定の方向で偏心カム部材を回転させ続けるかぎり駆動力の伝達対象が切り替えられることが無いので、操作部材に誤って駆動力が伝達される恐れが生じず、駆動装置の制御を緩やかなものとする事ができる(駆動装置を即座に停止させることが不要とされる)。 On the other hand, according to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, it is possible to switch whether or not the driving force is transmitted to the operating member depending on the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member, so that the connecting member and the eccentricity can be switched. Even if the cam member is separated in the middle of operation, the transmission target of the driving force is not switched as long as the eccentric cam member is continuously rotated in a certain direction, so that the driving force may be erroneously transmitted to the operating member. The control of the drive device can be relaxed (it is not necessary to stop the drive device immediately).

また、接続部材と偏心カム部材とが離間したことを検出するための検出センサを不要とできるので、製品コストを低減することができる。 Further, since the detection sensor for detecting that the connecting member and the eccentric cam member are separated from each other can be eliminated, the product cost can be reduced.

遊技機G3において、前記偏心カム部材は、外径部分に回転軸に沿って凸設される第1凸設部を備え、前記伝達部材は、前記第1凸設部と当接可能な態様で凸設される第2凸設部を備え、前記偏心カム部材が回転されるに伴って前記第2凸設部が前記偏心カム部材の回転軸に近接移動する領域を有し、その領域において前記第2凸設部が、前記第1凸設部よりも前記偏心カム部材の回転軸に近接配置可能に構成されることを特徴とする遊技機G4。 In the game machine G3, the eccentric cam member includes a first convex portion projecting along the rotation axis on the outer diameter portion, and the transmission member is in a manner capable of contacting the first convex portion. A second convex portion to be convex is provided, and the second convex portion has a region that moves close to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member as the eccentric cam member is rotated. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the second convex portion is configured to be arranged closer to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member than the first convex portion.

遊技機G4によれば、遊技機G3の奏する効果に加え、偏心カム部材が回転されるに伴って、第2凸設部が偏心カム部材の回転軸に近接移動する領域を有し、その領域において第2凸設部が第1凸設部よりも偏心カム部材の回転軸に近接配置可能に構成されるので、第2凸設部の位置の復帰を、第1凸設部と偏心カム部材の回転軸との間を第2凸設部が通過することにより行うことができる。 According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, the second convex portion has a region that moves close to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member as the eccentric cam member is rotated. Since the second convex portion can be arranged closer to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member than the first convex portion, the position of the second convex portion can be returned to the first convex portion and the eccentric cam member. This can be done by passing the second convex portion between the rotating shafts of the above.

従って、第2凸設部が偏心カム部材の第1凸設部の外径部分の軌跡の外側まで移動してから伝達部材の姿勢を復帰させる場合に比較して、第1凸設部が第2凸設部に当接してから離間するまでの伝達部材の回転角度を抑制することができ、偏心カム部材にかけられる負荷が上昇する角度範囲を抑制することができる。 Therefore, as compared with the case where the second convex portion moves to the outside of the locus of the outer diameter portion of the first convex portion of the eccentric cam member and then the posture of the transmission member is restored, the first convex portion is the first. The rotation angle of the transmission member from the contact with the convex portion to the separation from the convex portion can be suppressed, and the angle range in which the load applied to the eccentric cam member increases can be suppressed.

遊技機G4において、前記第1凸設部は、その第1凸設部の最外径部分と前記偏心カム部材の回転軸とを結ぶ所定直線に対して傾斜する壁部として構成され、前記正回転で前記偏心カム部材が回転される状態において前記第2凸部に当接される押し込み壁面が、前記所定直線に対して軸径方向に遠ざかるほど近接する態様で傾斜して構成されることを特徴とする遊技機G5。 In the game machine G4, the first convex portion is configured as a wall portion inclined with respect to a predetermined straight line connecting the outermost diameter portion of the first convex portion and the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member. In a state where the eccentric cam member is rotated by rotation, the pushing wall surface that comes into contact with the second convex portion is inclined so as to be closer to the predetermined straight line in the axial direction. The featured game machine G5.

遊技機G5によれば、遊技機G4の奏する効果に加え、伝達部材を介して操作部材に駆動力が伝達される状態である偏心カム部材の回転方向が正回転の場合に、伝達部材と当接する押し込み壁面が所定直線に対して軸径方向に遠ざかるほど近接する態様で傾斜して構成されるので、押し込み部材が所定方向に沿った壁面で構成される場合に比較して、偏心カム部材が所定角度回転される場合の伝達部材の移動量を低減することができる。従って、伝達部材を介して伝達される駆動力の所定時間あたりの伝達効率を低減することができるので、操作部材を操作されることにより伝達部材を介して偏心カム部材に短期間に大荷重が負荷されることを抑制することができる。 According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G4, when the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member, which is a state in which the driving force is transmitted to the operation member via the transmission member, is forward rotation, the transmission member and the contact member. Since the pushing wall surface in contact is inclined so as to be closer to the predetermined straight line in the axial direction, the eccentric cam member is formed as compared with the case where the pushing member is formed of the wall surface along the predetermined direction. It is possible to reduce the amount of movement of the transmission member when it is rotated by a predetermined angle. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the transmission efficiency of the driving force transmitted through the transmission member per predetermined time, so that a large load is applied to the eccentric cam member via the transmission member in a short period of time by operating the operation member. It is possible to suppress being loaded.

遊技機G3からG5のいずれかにおいて、前記接続部材の姿勢を所定の位置で固定するロック部材を備え、そのロック部材による前記接続部材の姿勢の固定の解除は、前記偏心カム部材が逆回転することにより可能である一方で、前記偏心カム部材が正回転する場合には前記ロック部材による前記接続部材の姿勢の固定が維持されることを特徴とする遊技機G6。 In any of the game machines G3 to G5, a lock member for fixing the posture of the connecting member at a predetermined position is provided, and the unlocking of the posture of the connecting member by the locking member causes the eccentric cam member to rotate in the reverse direction. On the other hand, the gaming machine G6 is characterized in that when the eccentric cam member rotates in the forward direction, the posture of the connecting member is maintained by the locking member.

遊技機G6によれば、遊技機G3からG5のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、ロック部材による接続部材の固定の解除が、偏心カム部材が逆回転する場合にのみ生じるので、接続部材を所定位置に配置した状態で偏心カム部材を一方向(正回転の方向)に回転させることにより、接続部材の姿勢を維持したまま、容易に伝達部材を介して操作部材に駆動力を伝達することができる。従って、偏心カム部材の位相を細かく制御せずとも、ロック部材による接続部材の姿勢の維持と、操作部材の姿勢変化とを共に達成することができるので、駆動装置の制御を緩やかにすることができる。 According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G3 to G5, the fixing of the connecting member by the lock member occurs only when the eccentric cam member rotates in the reverse direction, so that the connecting member is placed in a predetermined position. By rotating the eccentric cam member in one direction (forward rotation direction) in the state of being arranged in, the driving force can be easily transmitted to the operating member via the transmission member while maintaining the posture of the connecting member. .. Therefore, even if the phase of the eccentric cam member is not finely controlled, the posture of the connecting member can be maintained by the lock member and the posture of the operating member can be changed, so that the control of the drive device can be relaxed. it can.

<抑制部材が第2移動部材を押し出す弾性力の反力で押さえられる技術思想の一例>
移動可能に構成される第1移動部材と、前記第1移動部材の外方に少なくとも一部が張り出された状態で配設されると共に前記第1移動部材に対して移動可能とされる第2移動部材と、その第2移動部材の移動方向において前記第1移動部材の内方側に配設され一方の端部が前記第2移動部材に連結されると共にバネ弾性を有する弾性部材と、その弾性部材の他方の端部に配設され前記弾性部材の弾性力により前記第1移動部材に押し付けられることにより前記第1移動部材から前記第2移動部材が離間することを抑制する抑制部材と、を備え、前記第2移動部材の前記第1移動部材から張り出される部分が移動することにより、前記抑制部材を前記第1移動部材に押し付ける力が大きくなることを特徴とする遊技機H1。
<Example of technical concept in which the restraining member is pressed by the reaction force of the elastic force pushing out the second moving member>
A first moving member configured to be movable, and a first movable member that is arranged in a state in which at least a part of the first moving member is projected outward and is movable with respect to the first moving member. Two moving members, an elastic member arranged on the inner side of the first moving member in the moving direction of the second moving member, one end of which is connected to the second moving member, and elastic member having spring elasticity. An inhibitory member that is disposed at the other end of the elastic member and is pressed against the first moving member by the elastic force of the elastic member to prevent the second moving member from separating from the first moving member. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the force of pressing the restraining member against the first moving member is increased by moving the portion of the second moving member that projects from the first moving member.

第1移動部材と、その第1移動部材の外方に張り出し第1移動部材に対して移動可能な第2移動部材を備える遊技機が知られている(例えば、特開2014−144218号公報参照)。このような遊技機では、第1移動部材の移動時に第2移動部材が他の部材と衝突することにより破損して、取り替えが必要となる場合があるため仮止め程度に止めておく方が取り替えの時間を短縮できる一方で、保持力が不十分だと、他の部材との衝突時に生じる荷重の大きさ次第で第1移動部材から第2移動部材が外れてしまう恐れがある。 A gaming machine including a first moving member and a second moving member that projects outward from the first moving member and is movable with respect to the first moving member is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). In such a game machine, when the first moving member is moved, the second moving member may be damaged due to a collision with another member and need to be replaced. Therefore, it is better to temporarily fix the first moving member. On the other hand, if the holding force is insufficient, the second moving member may come off from the first moving member depending on the magnitude of the load generated at the time of collision with other members.

換言すれば、第2移動部材を第1移動部材に保持する部材をビスでの締結により第1移動部材に固定した方が、嵌合で固定する場合に比較して固定力を大きくすることができる一方で、組立時にはビスをネジ入れる手間が、また、メンテナンス等で取り外す時にはビスを取り外す手間が、それぞれ生じ、作業時間が長くなる。 In other words, fixing the member that holds the second moving member to the first moving member to the first moving member by fastening with screws can increase the fixing force as compared with the case of fixing by fitting. On the other hand, it takes time to screw in the screws when assembling, and it takes time to remove the screws when removing them for maintenance or the like, which increases the work time.

即ち、第2移動部材を第1移動部材に強固に固定することと、第2移動部材を第1移動部材に組み付ける及び第2移動部材を第1移動部材から取り外す作業時間を短縮することとを両立することは困難であるという問題点があった。 That is, firmly fixing the second moving member to the first moving member, assembling the second moving member to the first moving member, and shortening the work time for removing the second moving member from the first moving member. There was a problem that it was difficult to achieve both.

これに対し、遊技機H1では、第1移動部材から張り出される部分が弾性部材の弾性力に抗する方向に動作することにより、抑制部材が第1移動部材に押し付けられる力が大きくなるので、第2移動部材が他の部材に当接して第1移動部材に大きな荷重がかかる場合に、より強固に抑制部材を第1移動部材に固定することができる。従って、弾性力により第1移動部材に第2移動部材を保持することにより取り替えの時間の短縮を図りつつ、第2移動部材が他の部材に当接する際にも第2移動部材が第1移動部材から外れることを防止することができる。 On the other hand, in the game machine H1, the portion protruding from the first moving member operates in a direction that opposes the elastic force of the elastic member, so that the force that the suppressing member is pressed against the first moving member increases. When the second moving member comes into contact with another member and a large load is applied to the first moving member, the restraining member can be more firmly fixed to the first moving member. Therefore, while the replacement time is shortened by holding the second moving member on the first moving member by elastic force, the second moving member moves first when the second moving member comes into contact with another member. It is possible to prevent it from coming off the member.

遊技機H1において、前記抑制部材を、前記弾性部材の弾性力の方向に対して垂直な方向で移動不能に前記第1移動部材に保持する鉤部材を備え、その鉤部材は、前記抑制部材が前記第1移動部材に押し付けられる方向において移動可能な位置の一部に配置されることを特徴とする遊技機H2。 The game machine H1 includes a hook member that holds the restraining member to the first moving member in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the elastic force of the elastic member so that the restraining member can not move. The gaming machine H2 is arranged at a part of a movable position in a direction of being pressed against the first moving member.

遊技機H2によれば、遊技機H1の奏する効果に加え、鉤部材は、抑制部材が第1移動部材に押し付けられる方向において移動可能な位置の一部に配置されるので、鉤部材を第1移動部材に取り付ける前においては、鉤部材が取り付けられるスペースが空きスペースとなるので、抑制部材を配置することが容易となると共に、鉤部材の装着後は抑制部材が第1移動部材から弾性部材の弾性力の垂直な方向に離反することを抑制することができる。 According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the hook member is arranged at a part of the movable position in the direction in which the restraining member is pressed against the first moving member, so that the hook member is first placed. Before attaching to the moving member, the space for attaching the hook member becomes an empty space, so that it becomes easy to arrange the suppressing member, and after the hook member is attached, the suppressing member is changed from the first moving member to the elastic member. It is possible to prevent the elastic force from separating in the vertical direction.

また、鉤部材が、抑制部材の第1移動部材に押し付けられる方向において移動可能な位置の一部に配置されることから、鉤部材を第1移動部材に保持する力が弾性部材の変形により生じるので、弾性部材を逆方向に変形させることで容易に鉤部材を第1移動部材から取り外すことができ、それに伴い第2移動部材を容易に第1移動部材から取り外すことができる。 Further, since the hook member is arranged at a part of the movable position in the direction of being pressed against the first moving member of the restraining member, a force for holding the hook member on the first moving member is generated by the deformation of the elastic member. Therefore, the hook member can be easily removed from the first moving member by deforming the elastic member in the opposite direction, and the second moving member can be easily removed from the first moving member accordingly.

遊技機H2において、前記弾性部材および前記抑制部材が前記第1移動部材の内側に配設され、前記鉤部材が、前記第1移動部材の外側から内側へ向けて取り付けられることを特徴とする遊技機H3。 In the game machine H2, the elastic member and the restraining member are arranged inside the first moving member, and the hook member is attached from the outside to the inside of the first moving member. Machine H3.

遊技機H3によれば、遊技機H2の奏する効果に加え、弾性部材および抑制部材を遊技者が不正に取り外すことを抑制できると共に、鉤部材が第1移動部材の外側から取り付け可能なので鉤部材が外れた場合や組み付け忘れをした場合等に第1移動部材を分解することなく鉤部材を第1移動部材に取り付けることができ、メンテナンス時間を短縮することができる。 According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally removing the elastic member and the restraining member, and the hook member can be attached from the outside of the first moving member, so that the hook member can be attached. The hook member can be attached to the first moving member without disassembling the first moving member when it comes off or is forgotten to be assembled, and the maintenance time can be shortened.

また、鉤部材が外側から取り付けられることから、第1移動部材から鉤部材が外れた場合に第1移動部材の外に鉤部材を落下させる構成とすることができ、鉤部材が落下することを頼りにメンテナンスの必要性を判断することができる。即ち、第1移動部材を分解して内部を覗くことなくメンテナンスの必要性を判断することができる。 Further, since the hook member is attached from the outside, when the hook member is removed from the first moving member, the hook member can be dropped to the outside of the first moving member, and the hook member can be dropped. You can rely on it to determine the need for maintenance. That is, the necessity of maintenance can be determined without disassembling the first moving member and looking inside.

更に、鉤部材を第1移動部材の内側から取り付ける場合、鉤部材を第1移動部材から引き抜き不能に係止するための係止突起の寸法分だけ余分に弾性部材を縮ませられる態様とすることが望まれるところ、鉤部材を第1移動部材の外側から取り付ける場合には、係止突起を第1移動部材の外側に配置することができ、鉤部材を組み付ける際に弾性部材を縮ませる量を抑制することができる。これにより、弾性部材の弾性力を大きく保持して第2移動部材や抑制部材を第1移動部材に保持する強さを大きく保ちつつ(硬めの弾性部材を使用しつつ)、鉤部材の取り付けを容易とすることができる。 Further, when the hook member is attached from the inside of the first moving member, the elastic member can be further contracted by the size of the locking projection for locking the hook member from the first moving member so that it cannot be pulled out. However, when the hook member is attached from the outside of the first moving member, the locking projection can be arranged outside the first moving member, and the amount of contraction of the elastic member when assembling the hook member is increased. It can be suppressed. As a result, the hook member can be attached while maintaining a large elastic force of the elastic member and maintaining a large strength of holding the second moving member and the restraining member in the first moving member (while using a hard elastic member). It can be easy.

遊技機H3において、前記抑制部材を前記弾性力で押し付けられる方向の反対方向に変位させることにより、前記鉤部材が前記第1移動部材から取り外し可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機H4。 The game machine H3 is characterized in that the hook member can be removed from the first moving member by displacing the restraining member in a direction opposite to the direction of being pressed by the elastic force.

遊技機H4によれば、遊技機H3の奏する効果に加え、第1移動部材の内側に配設される抑制部材を弾性力で押し付けられる方向の反対方向に変位させることにより、鉤部材が第1移動部材から取り外し可能とされるので、遊技中に誤って遊技者が鉤部材を第1移動部材から取り外すことを防止することができる。また、不正に鉤部材を取り外すことを抑制することができる。 According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, the hook member is displaced in the direction opposite to the direction in which it is pressed by the elastic force, so that the hook member is first. Since it is removable from the moving member, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the hook member from the first moving member during the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hook member from being removed illegally.

遊技機H2からH4のいずれかにおいて、前記鉤部材が配置される位置に前記抑制部材が侵入することにより、前記第2移動部材に負荷される弾性力が低減されることを特徴とする遊技機H5。 In any of the game machines H2 to H4, the elastic force applied to the second moving member is reduced by invading the restraining member at the position where the hook member is arranged. H5.

遊技機H5によれば、遊技機H2からH4の奏する効果に加え、鉤部材が破断される等して鉤部材が配置されていたスペースが空き、そのスペースに抑制部材が侵入することにより第2移動部材に負荷される弾性力が低減されるので、鉤部材が破断される等して配置されていたスペースが空いた後において、第2移動部材にかけられる負荷に対する緩衝作用を向上させることができ、第2移動部材が破損することを抑制することができる。 According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machines H2 to H4, a space in which the hook member is arranged is vacant due to a break of the hook member, and the restraining member invades the space to obtain a second. Since the elastic force applied to the moving member is reduced, it is possible to improve the cushioning action against the load applied to the second moving member after the space where the hook member has been arranged is vacated due to breakage of the hook member or the like. , It is possible to prevent the second moving member from being damaged.

なお、鉤部材の構成としては、例えば、鉤部材が破断された後に再組み付け可能に構成するものが例示される。この場合において、破断している間は鉤部材の一部が第1移動部材の外側に露出することで、鉤部材が破断していることを外観から確認し易くすることができる。 As the configuration of the hook member, for example, one that can be reassembled after the hook member is broken is exemplified. In this case, a part of the hook member is exposed to the outside of the first moving member while the hook member is broken, so that it is easy to confirm from the appearance that the hook member is broken.

遊技機H2からH5のいずれかにおいて、前記第2移動部材は、前記第1移動部材の外側から引き抜き可能な抜き状態と、前記第1移動部材の外側から引き抜き不能に構成される係止状態とを形成可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機H6。 In any of the game machines H2 to H5, the second moving member has a pulling state in which it can be pulled out from the outside of the first moving member and a locked state in which it cannot be pulled out from the outside of the first moving member. A game machine H6 characterized in that it is possible to form.

遊技機H6によれば、遊技機H2からH5のいずれかの奏する効果に加え、第2移動部材は、抜き状態と、係止状態とを形成可能とされるので、メンテナンス性能を向上できる状態と、容易に第2移動部材を取り外せないことにより不正防止の性能を向上できる状態とを場合によって切り替えることができる。 According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H2 to H5, the second moving member can form a pulled-out state and a locked state, so that the maintenance performance can be improved. In some cases, it is possible to switch between a state in which the fraud prevention performance can be improved by not being able to easily remove the second moving member.

遊技機H6において、前記抜き状態は、前記抑制部材を前記鉤部材が保持する状態において前記鉤部材が配置されるスペースの内側に、前記抑制部材が侵入することにより形成可能とされることを特徴とする遊技機H7。 In the game machine H6, the pulled-out state can be formed by the restraining member invading the inside of the space in which the hook member is arranged while the holding member is held by the hook member. The game machine H7.

遊技機H7によれば、遊技機H6の奏する効果に加え、抜き状態は、鉤部材を組立状態における正規の位置から取り去った状態において空いたスペースに抑制部材を侵入させることにより形成可能なので、鉤部材が正規の位置に配置された状態においては第2移動部材を取り外すために第1移動部材を分解することが必要であり、第2移動部材を取り外す不正を抑制することができる。 According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of the game machine H6, the pulled-out state can be formed by invading the restraining member into the vacant space when the hook member is removed from the normal position in the assembled state. In a state where the member is arranged at a regular position, it is necessary to disassemble the first moving member in order to remove the second moving member, and it is possible to suppress fraudulent removal of the second moving member.

また、鉤部材に大きな負荷が与えられ、鉤部材が正規の位置から外れた場合には、抜き状態を形成することができ、第2移動部材を容易に取り替えることができるので、メンテナンス性能を向上させることができる。 Further, when a large load is applied to the hook member and the hook member deviates from the normal position, a pulled-out state can be formed and the second moving member can be easily replaced, so that maintenance performance is improved. Can be made to.

<球状部分の接続部材に対する回転抵抗を変化させる技術思想の一例>
遊技者が操作可能に構成される操作部材と、その操作部材を移動可能に支持する接続部材と、を備え、その接続部材に対して、前記操作部材を所定方向に移動させる場合の移動抵抗を可変とする可変手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機I1。
<Example of technical concept to change the rotational resistance of the spherical part to the connecting member>
An operating member configured to be operable by a player and a connecting member that movably supports the operating member are provided, and a movement resistance when the operating member is moved in a predetermined direction is provided to the connecting member. A game machine I1 characterized by comprising variable means for making it variable.

接続部材と、その接続部材に対して移動可能に構成される操作部材を備える遊技機が知られている(特開2014−144218号公報参照)。このような遊技機では、操作部材を接続部材に対して所定方向に操作する場合、操作感(例えば、遊技者が感じる重さ)に変化が無く、操作部材の操作に遊技者が飽きてしまうという問題点があった。 A gaming machine including a connecting member and an operating member configured to be movable with respect to the connecting member is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). In such a game machine, when the operating member is operated in a predetermined direction with respect to the connecting member, the operating feeling (for example, the weight felt by the player) does not change, and the player gets tired of operating the operating member. There was a problem.

例えば、接続部材に操作部材が回転可能に軸支され、操作部材を正回転させる場合と、操作部材を逆回転させる場合とで回転抵抗を変化させておいたとしても、遊技者が操作部材を操作する方向と、回転抵抗との関係が常に一定とされるので、操作部材を回転させる動作により遊技者に生じる気付き(発見)が乏しく、遊技者が操作部材の操作に飽きてしまう。 For example, even if the operation member is rotatably supported by the connecting member and the rotation resistance is changed between the case where the operation member is rotated forward and the case where the operation member is rotated in the reverse direction, the player can control the operation member. Since the relationship between the operating direction and the rotational resistance is always constant, there is little awareness (discovery) that occurs in the player due to the operation of rotating the operating member, and the player gets tired of operating the operating member.

これに対し、遊技機I1によれば、接続部材に対して操作部材を所定方向に移動させる場合の移動抵抗を可変とする可変手段を備えるので、同一方向に操作部材を操作させた場合の操作部材の操作感に変化を持たせることができ、操作部材を操作する遊技者の興趣を向上させることができる。 On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since the variable means for changing the movement resistance when the operating member is moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the connecting member is provided, the operation when the operating member is operated in the same direction is provided. It is possible to change the operation feeling of the member, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player who operates the operation member.

なお、可変手段の態様としては、接続部材が移動可能に構成される場合に、接続部材の位置により調整を行う態様や、操作部材の変位量により調整を行う態様や、操作部材および接続部材以外の部材(例えば接続部材を駆動する部材等)により調整を行う態様等が例示される。 In addition, as the mode of the variable means, when the connecting member is configured to be movable, the mode of adjusting by the position of the connecting member, the mode of adjusting by the displacement amount of the operating member, and the mode other than the operating member and the connecting member An embodiment in which adjustment is performed by a member (for example, a member for driving a connecting member) is exemplified.

例えば、操作部材および接続部材以外の部材により調整を行う態様によれば、操作部材に触れてみて初めて状態(操作部材の接続部材に対する移動抵抗の状態)を分かるようにすることができ、遊技者の操作部材に対する注目力を上げることができる。 For example, according to an embodiment in which adjustment is performed by a member other than the operating member and the connecting member, the state (state of movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member) can be known only by touching the operating member, and the player can understand the state. It is possible to raise the attention to the operating members of.

また、接続部材が遊技機本体に対して移動可能に構成されている場合、接続部材に対する操作部材の移動抵抗を、遊技機本体に対する接続部材の移動抵抗を境界として強弱切替可能とする事により、遊技者には操作部材の操作のみを求めながら、場合によって、遊技機本体に対して接続部材を移動させるよりも接続部材に対して操作部材を移動させやすい状況と、接続部材に対して操作部材を移動させるよりも遊技機本体に対して接続部材を移動させやすい状況とを切り替えることができる(押しボタンを固めることとの違い)。 Further, when the connecting member is configured to be movable with respect to the game machine main body, the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member can be switched between strength and weakness with the movement resistance of the connecting member with respect to the game machine main body as a boundary. While requesting the player to operate only the operating member, in some cases, it is easier to move the operating member with respect to the connecting member than to move the connecting member with respect to the game machine main body, and the operating member with respect to the connecting member. It is possible to switch between situations where it is easier to move the connecting member to the game machine body than to move it (difference from pressing the push button).

遊技機I1において、前記接続部材が移動可能に構成され、前記可変手段による移動抵抗の調整が、前記接続部材の配置が変化することにより行われることを特徴とする遊技機I2。 The game machine I1 is characterized in that the connecting member is configured to be movable, and the movement resistance is adjusted by the variable means by changing the arrangement of the connecting member.

遊技機I2によれば、遊技機I1の奏する効果に加え、接続部材の配置が変化することによって接続部材に対する操作部材の移動抵抗の強弱が調整されるので、接続部材または操作部材を操作する速度に関わりなく接続部材に対する操作部材の移動抵抗を変化させることができる。 According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the strength of the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member is adjusted by changing the arrangement of the connecting member, so that the speed at which the connecting member or the operating member is operated is adjusted. The movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member can be changed regardless of the connection member.

なお、接続部材の配置の変化により移動抵抗を調整する態様としては、接続部材の移動量に対応して移動抵抗を変化させる態様や、接続部材が所定位置に配置されたことを契機に移動抵抗を切り替える態様等が例示される。 In addition, as a mode of adjusting the movement resistance by changing the arrangement of the connecting member, a mode of changing the movement resistance according to the movement amount of the connecting member or a movement resistance triggered by the arrangement of the connecting member at a predetermined position. An embodiment of switching between the above is exemplified.

遊技機I2において、前記操作部材を前記接続部材に対して所定方向に付勢する弾性力を生じる付勢部材と、前記操作部材に当接可能に配設される壁部材と、を備え、前記接続部材が所定位置に配置された状態において、前記操作部材が、前記付勢部材による付勢方向とは反対方向である第1方向の負荷を前記壁部材から与えられ、前記第1方向に前記操作部材が移動される態様で構成されることを特徴とする遊技機I3。 The game machine I2 includes an urging member that generates an elastic force that urges the operating member in a predetermined direction with respect to the connecting member, and a wall member that is arranged so as to come into contact with the operating member. In a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, the operating member is given a load from the wall member in the first direction opposite to the urging direction by the urging member, and the operating member receives the load in the first direction. A game machine I3 characterized in that the operating member is configured to be moved.

遊技機I3によれば、遊技機I2の奏する効果に加え、接続部材が所定位置に配置されることにより操作部材が壁部材に当接し、第1方向に操作部材が移動されるので、接続部材に対して静止する操作部材を付勢する付勢部材から生じる弾性力が、接続部材が所定位置以外に配置される場合に比較して向上する。従って、接続部材が所定位置に配置される状態において接続部材に対する操作部材の移動抵抗を上昇させることができる。 According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2, when the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, the operating member comes into contact with the wall member and the operating member is moved in the first direction. The elastic force generated from the urging member that urges the operating member that stands still is improved as compared with the case where the connecting member is arranged at a position other than a predetermined position. Therefore, it is possible to increase the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member in a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position.

遊技機I2において、前記接続部材を所定位置に配置した状態において前記操作部材の移動方向に沿って延設されると共に前記操作部材と擦れる摩擦部材を備えることを特徴とする遊技機I4。 The game machine I2 is characterized by including a friction member that extends along the moving direction of the operating member and rubs against the operating member in a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position.

遊技機I4によれば、遊技機I2の奏する効果に加え、接続部材を所定位置に配置した状態において、操作部材が摩擦部材と擦れながら移動するので、操作部材の回転し始めから擦れる面積に応じた動摩擦を操作部材にかけることができ、十分に移動抵抗を変化させることができる。 According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2, the operating member moves while rubbing against the friction member in a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, so that the operating member moves according to the area of rubbing from the beginning of rotation. The dynamic friction can be applied to the operating member, and the movement resistance can be sufficiently changed.

なお、摩擦部材の配設位置としては、接続部材に配設される態様や、接続部材を支持する本体ケースに配設される態様が例示される。 Examples of the arrangement position of the friction member include a mode in which the friction member is arranged in the connecting member and a mode in which the friction member is arranged in the main body case that supports the connecting member.

遊技機I4において、前記接続部材を箱の内部に支持する本体ケースと、その本体ケースの外側に配設されるカバー部材と、を備え、前記摩擦部材が前記カバー部材から前記接続部材側に延設される部分として構成されることを特徴とする遊技機I5。 The game machine I4 includes a main body case that supports the connecting member inside the box and a cover member that is arranged outside the main body case, and the friction member extends from the cover member to the connecting member side. A game machine I5 characterized in that it is configured as a part to be installed.

遊技機I5によれば、遊技機I4の奏する効果に加え、摩擦部材が接続部材に配設される場合に比較して、摩擦部材が摩耗した場合の摩擦部材の取り替えを容易とすることができる。 According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, it is possible to facilitate the replacement of the friction member when the friction member is worn, as compared with the case where the friction member is arranged on the connecting member. ..

遊技機I5において、前記摩擦部材は、擦れた状態において前記操作部材に所定の動摩擦を与える低摩擦部と、その低摩擦部に比較して大きな動摩擦を与える高摩擦部と、を備え、それらが前記操作部材の移動方向に沿って分割配置されることを特徴とする遊技機I6。 In the game machine I5, the friction member includes a low friction portion that gives a predetermined dynamic friction to the operating member in a rubbed state, and a high friction portion that gives a large dynamic friction as compared with the low friction portion. The gaming machine I6, characterized in that it is divided and arranged along the moving direction of the operating member.

遊技機I6によれば、操作部材が主に低摩擦部から動摩擦を受ける場合と、主に高摩擦部から動摩擦を受ける場合とで、操作部材の接続部材に対する移動抵抗を変化させることができる。従って、操作感を2段階に切り替えることができる。 According to the game machine I6, the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member can be changed depending on whether the operating member receives the dynamic friction mainly from the low friction portion or the dynamic friction mainly from the high friction portion. Therefore, the feeling of operation can be switched between two stages.

遊技機I1において、前記操作部材は、重心位置を構成する重し部材を備え、前記可変手段による移動抵抗の調整が、前記重し部材の操作部材の回転軸からの距離が変化することにより行われることを特徴とする遊技機I7。 In the game machine I1, the operation member includes a weight member constituting the position of the center of gravity, and the adjustment of the movement resistance by the variable means is performed by changing the distance of the weight member from the rotation axis of the operation member. A game machine I7 characterized by being struck.

遊技機I7によれば、遊技機I1の奏する効果に加え、可変手段による移動抵抗の調整が、操作部材の回転軸から重し部材までの距離が変化することにより行われるので、操作部材の移動方向とは逆方向の負荷を与えることで操作部材の移動抵抗を上げる場合に比較して、操作部材にかけられる負荷を低減することができる。 According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the movement resistance is adjusted by the variable means by changing the distance from the rotation axis of the operation member to the weight member, so that the movement of the operation member is performed. The load applied to the operating member can be reduced as compared with the case where the moving resistance of the operating member is increased by applying the load in the direction opposite to the direction.

また、操作部材の回転軸から見て、重し部材を持ち上げる回転方向の回転抵抗を向上させることができるので、重し部材を移動させることにより回転軸に対する重し部材の配置を逆転させることにより、回転抵抗が重くなる方向を逆転させることができる。従って、遊技者に与える操作感を、変化させることができる。 Further, since the rotational resistance in the rotational direction for lifting the weight member can be improved when viewed from the rotation axis of the operating member, the arrangement of the weight member with respect to the rotation axis can be reversed by moving the weight member. , The direction in which the rotational resistance becomes heavy can be reversed. Therefore, the feeling of operation given to the player can be changed.

なお、重し部材を操作部材の回転軸から移動させる態様としては、重し部材が載置される底面の傾斜が操作部材の姿勢変化により変化し、底面の両端の上下関係が反転することにより重し部材が重力で底面を移動する態様が例示される。 In addition, as a mode of moving the weight member from the rotation axis of the operation member, the inclination of the bottom surface on which the weight member is placed changes due to the change in the posture of the operation member, and the vertical relationship between both ends of the bottom surface is reversed. An embodiment in which the weight member moves on the bottom surface by gravity is exemplified.

遊技機I1において、駆動力を発生させる駆動装置と、その駆動装置の駆動力を前記接続部材に伝達可能に構成される伝達装置と、変位により前記操作部材の移動抵抗を調整する抵抗変化部材と、を備え、前記抵抗変化部材は、前記駆動装置の駆動力により変位することを特徴とする遊技機I8。 In the game machine I1, a driving device that generates a driving force, a transmission device that is configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving device to the connecting member, and a resistance changing member that adjusts the movement resistance of the operating member by displacement. I8, wherein the resistance changing member is displaced by a driving force of the driving device.

遊技機I8によれば、遊技機I1の奏する効果に加え、操作部材の移動抵抗が、接続部材を駆動させる駆動装置の駆動力により抵抗変化部材を変位させることにより調整されるので、追加の駆動装置無しで、操作部材および接続部材の外観を全く変えずに操作部材の移動抵抗を調整することができる。 According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the movement resistance of the operating member is adjusted by displacement the resistance changing member by the driving force of the driving device that drives the connecting member, so that additional driving is performed. Without the device, the moving resistance of the operating member can be adjusted without changing the appearance of the operating member and the connecting member at all.

そのため、遊技者が触って初めて操作部材の移動抵抗の状態を確認することができ、操作部材を触ることの遊技者にとっての価値を引き上げることができる。また、有利な状態になったことを契機に操作部材の移動抵抗を変化させる場合には、操作をする遊技者にしか分からない形で、遊技者にとって有利な状態になったと告知することができる。 Therefore, the state of the movement resistance of the operating member can be confirmed only when the player touches it, and the value for the player of touching the operating member can be increased. In addition, when the movement resistance of the operating member is changed when the operating member is in an advantageous state, it can be notified that the operating member is in an advantageous state in a form known only to the operating player. ..

遊技機A1からA12,B1からB11,C1からC6,D1からD7,E1からE5,F1からF7,G1からG6,H1からH7,I1からI8のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はスロットマシンであることを特徴とする遊技機J1。中でも、スロットマシンの基本構成としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を動的表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する可変表示手段を備え、始動用操作手段(例えば操作レバー)の操作に起因して識別情報の動的表示が開始され、停止用操作手段(ストップボタン)の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の動的表示が停止され、その停止時の確定識別情報が特定識別情報であることを必要条件として、遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態を発生させる特別遊技状態発生手段とを備えた遊技機」となる。この場合、遊技媒体はコイン、メダル等が代表例として挙げられる。 In any of the game machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the game machine is a slot machine. A game machine J1 characterized by this. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

遊技機A1からA12,B1からB11,C1からC6,D1からD7,E1からE5,F1からF7,G1からG6,H1からH7,I1からI8のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はパチンコ遊技機であることを特徴とする遊技機J2。中でも、パチンコ遊技機の基本構成としては操作ハンドルを備え、その操作ハンドルの操作に応じて球を所定の遊技領域へ発射し、球が遊技領域内の所定の位置に配設された作動口に入賞(又は作動口を通過)することを必要条件として、表示手段において動的表示されている識別情報が所定時間後に確定停止されるものが挙げられる。また、特別遊技状態の発生時には、遊技領域内の所定の位置に配設された可変入賞装置(特定入賞口)が所定の態様で開放されて球を入賞可能とし、その入賞個数に応じた有価価値(景品球のみならず、磁気カードへ書き込まれるデータ等も含む)が付与されるものが挙げられる。 In any of the game machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. A game machine J2 characterized by being there. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

遊技機A1からA12,B1からB11,C1からC6,D1からD7,E1からE5,F1からF7,G1からG6,H1からH7,I1からI8のいずれかにおいて、前記遊技機はパチンコ遊技機とスロットマシンとを融合させたものであることを特徴とする遊技機J3。中でも、融合させた遊技機の基本構成としては、「複数の識別情報からなる識別情報列を動的表示した後に識別情報を確定表示する可変表示手段を備え、始動用操作手段(例えば操作レバー)の操作に起因して識別情報の変動が開始され、停止用操作手段(例えばストップボタン)の操作に起因して、或いは、所定時間経過することにより、識別情報の動的表示が停止され、その停止時の確定識別情報が特定識別情報であることを必要条件として、遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態を発生させる特別遊技状態発生手段とを備え、遊技媒体として球を使用すると共に、前記識別情報の動的表示の開始に際しては所定数の球を必要とし、特別遊技状態の発生に際しては多くの球が払い出されるように構成されている遊技機」となる。
<その他>
パチンコ機などの遊技機において、遊技者が手動操作することで第1位置と第2位置との間を移動する操作部材を備える遊技機がある(例えば、特許文献1:特開2014−144218号公報)。
しかしながら、上述した従来の遊技機では、操作部材の操作性に改良の余地があるという問題点があった。
本技術的思想は、上記例示した問題点を解決するためになされたものであり、操作部材の操作性の良好な遊技機を提供することを目的とする。
<手段>
この目的を達成するために技術的思想1の遊技機は、遊技者に操作される操作部を有し移動可能に構成される操作部材と、その操作部材と遊技機本体を連結すると共に移動可能に構成される接続部材とを備え、前記接続部材の移動により、前記操作部を操作する遊技者から見た前記操作部材の姿勢が第1状態と、その第1状態と異なる第2状態とを形成可能とされる場合に、その姿勢の変化量を縮小する方向に操作部材を姿勢変化させる修正手段を備える。
技術的思想2の遊技機は、技術的思想1記載の遊技機において、前記接続部材を駆動する駆動装置を備え、前記接続部材の移動範囲において、前記操作部材が姿勢変化する変化状態と、前記操作部材が姿勢変化されず前記操作部材と前記接続部材との姿勢が維持される維持状態とが形成され、前記変化状態の際に前記修正手段から前記操作部材に生じる負荷が、前記接続部材を制動させる向きを向く。
技術的思想3の遊技機は、技術的思想2記載の遊技機において、前記修正手段に当接される被当接部材を備え、前記操作部材の移動において前記修正手段が前記被当接部材に当接することにより前記操作部材の姿勢が変化する。
<効果>
技術的思想1記載の遊技機によれば、操作部材の操作性を良好にすることができる。
技術的思想2記載の遊技機によれば、技術的思想1記載の遊技機の奏する効果に加え、駆動動作時の操作性を良好にすることができる。
技術的思想3記載の遊技機によれば、技術的思想2記載の遊技機の奏する効果に加え、操作部材を軽量化できる。
In any of the game machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the game machine is a pachinko machine. A game machine J3 characterized by being fused with a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including an operating member that moves between a first position and a second position by a manual operation by a player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). Gazette).
However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the operability of the operating member.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having good operability of operating members.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the game machine of the technical idea 1 has an operation member operated by the player and is configured to be movable, and the operation member and the game machine main body are connected and movable. The first state and the second state in which the posture of the operation member as seen by the player who operates the operation unit is different from the first state due to the movement of the connection member. When it is possible to form the operating member, a correction means for changing the posture of the operating member in a direction of reducing the amount of change in the posture is provided.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 includes a driving device for driving the connecting member in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, and the changing state in which the operating member changes its posture within the moving range of the connecting member and the above-mentioned A maintenance state is formed in which the posture of the operation member is not changed and the posture of the operation member and the connection member is maintained, and the load generated from the correction means on the operation member during the change state causes the connection member. Turn to the direction to brake.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 includes the contacted member that is brought into contact with the modifying means in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, and the modifying means is brought into contact with the modifying member when the operating member is moved. The posture of the operating member changes due to the contact.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the operability of the operating member can be improved.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the operability at the time of driving operation can be improved.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 2, the weight of the operating member can be reduced.

10 パチンコ機(遊技機)
310、13310、14310、15310、16310、20310 首振り操作部材(操作部材の一部、入力装置の一部、第1移動部材)
311a 挿通孔(係止部)
313d 第2センサ部材(検出装置)
317、13317 レンズ部材(入力装置の一部、入力部、押し込み部材、操作部)
330、3330、5330、8330、10330、13330 内側ケース部材(支持部材の一部、本体ケース)
331d1 レバー支持軸(第1軸、第2軸)
331d2 偏心カム軸(第1軸)
333、2333、4333、6333、14333 偏心カム部材(伝達部材、偏心カム部材)
333b 筒状部(円筒部)
335 第1駆動装置(駆動装置)
336、4336、5336、8336、14336 ロック部材(規制部材、ロック部材)
338 ギアダンパ(制動手段)
340、2340、3340、4340、7340、9340、13340、18340、19340 レバー部材(移動部材の一部、接続部材)
350、4350、7350、 剥離部材(被規制部材の一部)
363 軸支棒(第2軸)
364 緩衝部材
366 振動装置(演出部材の一部、振動装置)
366b 押し付け部材(振動部)
2333a 本体部材(回転ギア)
2333b カム部材(偏心カム)
5336a1 湾曲壁部(凹設部)
13312、15312、20312 姿勢修正装置(修正手段、可変手段の一部)
13312a 当接部材(第2移動部材)
13312b 支持部材
13312c 鉤部材(ロック部材)
13322 右前カバー(カバー部材)
13322b、17322b 壁部材(被当接部材)
14333c2 凸設部(第1凸設部)
14337 姿勢切替装置(切替手段)
14337a 本体部材(伝達部材の一部、切替手段の一部)
14337b 延設部(伝達部材の一部)
14337b1 凸設部(第2凸設部)
16315 分離防止カバー(可変手段の一部)
16315e 鉄球(重し部材)
17322b1 延設部(可変手段の一部、摩擦部材)
17362c 摩擦腕部(可変手段の一部)
18347 伝達装置(可変手段の一部、抵抗変化部材の一部)
CS1 振動コイルスプリング(第2付勢装置)
CS2 押し込みコイルスプリング(第1付勢装置)
M41 電磁石部材(電磁石)
RB ゴムバンド(可変手段の一部、抵抗変化部材の一部)
SP1、SP21、SP31、SP41、SP101 ねじりバネ(第1付勢部材、付勢部材)
SP13 コイルバネ(弾性部材、可変手段の一部)
10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
310, 13310, 14310, 15310, 16310, 20310 Swing operation member (part of operation member, part of input device, first moving member)
311a Insertion hole (locking part)
313d 2nd sensor member (detector)
317, 13317 Lens member (part of input device, input part, pushing member, operation part)
330, 3330, 5330, 8330, 10330, 13330 Inner case member (part of support member, main body case)
331d1 lever support shaft (1st shaft, 2nd shaft)
331d2 Eccentric camshaft (1st axis)
333, 2333, 4333, 6333, 14333 Eccentric cam member (transmission member, eccentric cam member)
333b Cylindrical part (cylindrical part)
335 First drive device (drive device)
336, 4336, 5336, 8336, 14336 Lock member (regulatory member, lock member)
338 Gear damper (braking means)
340, 2340, 3340, 4340, 7340, 9340, 13340, 18340, 19340 Lever member (part of moving member, connecting member)
350, 4350, 7350, peeling member (part of regulated member)
363 Shaft support rod (2nd shaft)
364 Cushioning member 366 Vibration device (part of production member, vibration device)
366b Pressing member (vibrating part)
2333a Main body member (rotary gear)
2333b Cam member (eccentric cam)
5336a1 Curved wall part (concave part)
13312, 15312, 20312 Posture correction device (correction means, part of variable means)
13312a Contact member (second moving member)
13312b Support member 13312c Hook member (lock member)
13322 Right front cover (cover member)
13322b, 17322b Wall member (contact member)
14333c2 Convex part (first convex part)
14337 Posture switching device (switching means)
14337a Main body member (part of transmission member, part of switching means)
14337b Extension (part of transmission member)
14337b1 Convex part (second convex part)
16315 Separation prevention cover (part of variable means)
16315e Iron ball (weight member)
17322b1 Extension (part of variable means, friction member)
17362c Friction arm (part of variable means)
18347 Transmission device (part of variable means, part of resistance changing member)
CS1 vibration coil spring (second urging device)
CS2 Push-in coil spring (1st urging device)
M41 Electromagnet member (electromagnet)
RB rubber band (part of variable means, part of resistance changing member)
SP1, SP21, SP31, SP41, SP101 Torsion spring (first urging member, urging member)
SP13 Coil spring (elastic member, part of variable means)

Claims (3)

遊技者に操作される操作部を有し移動可能に構成される操作部材と、その操作部材と遊技機本体を連結すると共に移動可能に構成される接続部材とを備え、
前記接続部材の移動により、前記操作部を操作する遊技者から見た前記操作部材の姿勢が第1状態と、その第1状態と異なる第2状態とを形成可能とされる場合に、その姿勢の変化量を縮小する方向に操作部材を姿勢変化させる修正手段を備えることを特徴とする遊技機。
It is provided with an operating member having an operating unit operated by the player and being movable, and a connecting member that connects the operating member and the game machine main body and is configured to be movable.
When the posture of the operating member as seen by the player who operates the operating unit can be formed into a first state and a second state different from the first state by the movement of the connecting member, the posture. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a correction means for changing the posture of an operating member in a direction of reducing the amount of change in.
前記接続部材を駆動する駆動装置を備え、前記接続部材の移動範囲において、前記操作部材が姿勢変化する変化状態と、前記操作部材が姿勢変化されず前記操作部材と前記接続部材との姿勢が維持される維持状態とが形成され、
前記変化状態の際に前記修正手段から前記操作部材に生じる負荷が、前記接続部材を制動させる向きを向くことを特徴とする請求項1記載の遊技機。
A drive device for driving the connecting member is provided, and within the moving range of the connecting member, the changing state in which the operating member changes its posture and the posture of the operating member not changing and the posture of the operating member and the connecting member are maintained. The maintenance state is formed and
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the load generated from the correction means on the operating member in the changed state faces the direction in which the connecting member is braked.
前記修正手段に当接される被当接部材を備え、前記操作部材の移動において前記修正手段が前記被当接部材に当接することにより前記操作部材の姿勢が変化することを特徴とする請求項2記載の遊技機。
The claim is characterized in that the contacted member is provided in contact with the modifying means, and the posture of the operating member changes when the modifying means abuts on the contacted member when the operating member moves. 2. The game machine described.
JP2020162485A 2014-10-30 2020-09-28 Game machine Withdrawn JP2020199413A (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022117871A JP2022132650A (en) 2014-10-30 2022-07-25 game machine

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2014222051 2014-10-30
JP2014222051 2014-10-30

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2019232662A Division JP2020049283A (en) 2014-10-30 2019-12-24 Game machine

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2022117871A Division JP2022132650A (en) 2014-10-30 2022-07-25 game machine

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
JP2020199413A true JP2020199413A (en) 2020-12-17

Family

ID=56017507

Family Applications (12)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2015017699A Active JP6304062B2 (en) 2014-10-30 2015-01-30 Game machine
JP2015017697A Active JP6572546B2 (en) 2014-10-30 2015-01-30 Game machine
JP2015017696A Active JP6304061B2 (en) 2014-10-30 2015-01-30 Game machine
JP2015017698A Pending JP2016087406A (en) 2014-10-30 2015-01-30 Game machine
JP2018041365A Pending JP2018086562A (en) 2014-10-30 2018-03-08 Game machine
JP2018041363A Pending JP2018086560A (en) 2014-10-30 2018-03-08 Game machine
JP2018041362A Pending JP2018086559A (en) 2014-10-30 2018-03-08 Game machine
JP2018041364A Pending JP2018086561A (en) 2014-10-30 2018-03-08 Game machine
JP2019232663A Active JP6922970B2 (en) 2014-10-30 2019-12-24 Pachinko machine
JP2019232662A Withdrawn JP2020049283A (en) 2014-10-30 2019-12-24 Game machine
JP2020162485A Withdrawn JP2020199413A (en) 2014-10-30 2020-09-28 Game machine
JP2022117871A Pending JP2022132650A (en) 2014-10-30 2022-07-25 game machine

Family Applications Before (10)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2015017699A Active JP6304062B2 (en) 2014-10-30 2015-01-30 Game machine
JP2015017697A Active JP6572546B2 (en) 2014-10-30 2015-01-30 Game machine
JP2015017696A Active JP6304061B2 (en) 2014-10-30 2015-01-30 Game machine
JP2015017698A Pending JP2016087406A (en) 2014-10-30 2015-01-30 Game machine
JP2018041365A Pending JP2018086562A (en) 2014-10-30 2018-03-08 Game machine
JP2018041363A Pending JP2018086560A (en) 2014-10-30 2018-03-08 Game machine
JP2018041362A Pending JP2018086559A (en) 2014-10-30 2018-03-08 Game machine
JP2018041364A Pending JP2018086561A (en) 2014-10-30 2018-03-08 Game machine
JP2019232663A Active JP6922970B2 (en) 2014-10-30 2019-12-24 Pachinko machine
JP2019232662A Withdrawn JP2020049283A (en) 2014-10-30 2019-12-24 Game machine

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2022117871A Pending JP2022132650A (en) 2014-10-30 2022-07-25 game machine

Country Status (1)

Country Link
JP (12) JP6304062B2 (en)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6304062B2 (en) * 2014-10-30 2018-04-04 株式会社三洋物産 Game machine

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010075607A (en) * 2008-09-29 2010-04-08 Sanyo Product Co Ltd Game machine
JP6515907B2 (en) * 2016-11-17 2019-05-22 株式会社三洋物産 Gaming machine
JP2020168455A (en) * 2020-07-07 2020-10-15 株式会社三洋物産 Game machine

Family Cites Families (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000293298A (en) * 1999-04-08 2000-10-20 Sega Enterp Ltd Operation device and its controlling method
JP2007037739A (en) * 2005-08-02 2007-02-15 Samii Kk Game machine
JP5617154B2 (en) * 2008-06-13 2014-11-05 株式会社三洋物産 Game machine
JP5361681B2 (en) * 2008-11-27 2013-12-04 日本ぱちんこ部品株式会社 Gaming machine launch handle and gaming machine having the same
JP5868686B2 (en) * 2010-12-16 2016-02-24 日本ぱちんこ部品株式会社 OPERATING SWITCH FOR GAME MACHINE AND GAME MACHINE HAVING THE SAME
JP5791170B2 (en) * 2011-01-27 2015-10-07 日本ぱちんこ部品株式会社 OPERATING DEVICE FOR GAME MACHINE AND GAME MACHINE HAVING THE SAME
JP2014144218A (en) * 2013-01-30 2014-08-14 Sammy Corp Game machine
JP5641074B2 (en) * 2013-02-15 2014-12-17 タイヨーエレック株式会社 Game machine
JP6304062B2 (en) * 2014-10-30 2018-04-04 株式会社三洋物産 Game machine

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010075607A (en) * 2008-09-29 2010-04-08 Sanyo Product Co Ltd Game machine
JP6515907B2 (en) * 2016-11-17 2019-05-22 株式会社三洋物産 Gaming machine
JP2020168455A (en) * 2020-07-07 2020-10-15 株式会社三洋物産 Game machine

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2016087405A (en) 2016-05-23
JP6304061B2 (en) 2018-04-04
JP6572546B2 (en) 2019-09-11
JP6922970B2 (en) 2021-08-18
JP6304062B2 (en) 2018-04-04
JP2020049283A (en) 2020-04-02
JP2018086562A (en) 2018-06-07
JP2018086559A (en) 2018-06-07
JP2016087404A (en) 2016-05-23
JP2016087406A (en) 2016-05-23
JP2018086561A (en) 2018-06-07
JP2016087407A (en) 2016-05-23
JP2020044412A (en) 2020-03-26
JP2018086560A (en) 2018-06-07
JP2022132650A (en) 2022-09-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6686331B2 (en) Amusement machine
JP2020037014A (en) Game machine
JP6451215B2 (en) Game machine
JP6922970B2 (en) Pachinko machine
JP6041032B2 (en) Game machine
JP6044693B2 (en) Game machine
JP6194936B2 (en) Game machine
JP6515907B2 (en) Gaming machine
JP2022079745A (en) Game machine
JP6710915B2 (en) Amusement machine
JP6265106B2 (en) Game machine
JP6451214B2 (en) Game machine
JP6687087B2 (en) Amusement machine
JP2021049452A (en) Game machine
JP6428747B2 (en) Game machine
JP6566649B2 (en) Game machine
JP2019166356A (en) Game machine
JP2019037873A (en) Game machine
JP2018057933A (en) Game machine
JP2018140225A (en) Game machine
JP2019111425A (en) Game machine
JP2020014916A (en) Game machine

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
A521 Request for written amendment filed

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20200930

A621 Written request for application examination

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A621

Effective date: 20201028

A131 Notification of reasons for refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A131

Effective date: 20210831

A02 Decision of refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A02

Effective date: 20220426

A761 Written withdrawal of application

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A761

Effective date: 20220726